H8S/2194 Series,H8S/2194C Series,H8S/2194 F-ZTAT,H8S/2194C F-ZTAT Hardware Manual
Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Hitachi
Electric and Hitachi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp.
The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas
Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog
and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.)
Accordingly, although Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and other Hitachi brand
names are mentioned in the document, these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas
Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding. Except for our corporate trademark, logo and
corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document, and
these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself.
Renesas Technology Home Page: http://www.renesas.com
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Dept.
April 1, 2003
To all our customers
Cautions
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1. Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better
and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with
semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate
measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or
(iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas
Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any
license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology
Corporation or a third party.
2. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any
third-party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or
circuit application examples contained in these materials.
3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and
algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are
subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or
other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation
or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information
before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss
rising from these inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various
means, including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page
(http://www.renesas.com).
4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams,
charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before
making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology
Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the
information contained herein.
5. Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device
or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact
Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor
when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or
systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in
whole or in part these materials.
7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be
exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other
than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the
country of destination is prohibited.
8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products
contained therein.
Hitachi 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8S/2194 Series, H8S/2194C Series,
H8S/2194 F-ZTAT
TM
, H8S/2194C F-ZTAT
TM
H8S/2194, HD6432194, HD64F2194,
H8S/2193, HD6432193
H8S/2192, HD6432192
H8S/2191, HD6432191
H8S/2194C, HD6432194C, HD64F2194C,
H8S/2194B, HD6432194B
H8S/2194A, HD6432194A
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-160A
Rev. 2.0
11/10/00
Hitachi, Ltd.
Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi's or any third party's
patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in
this document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party's
rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information
contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you
have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or
use.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability.
However, contact Hitachi's sales office before using the product in an application that
demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly
threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear
power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for
life support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi
particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics,
installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or
damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges,
consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and
employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi
product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of
the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document
without written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi's sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi
semiconductor products.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page I of V
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition
Page
Item
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
All pages of
this manual
Amendments due to introduction of the H8S/2194C
series
5
1.1 Overview
Table 1.1 Features
Memory and Product lineup amended
14
1.4 Differences between
H8S/2194C Series and
H8S/2194 Series
Added
All pages of
section 2
Notes on TAS instruction added
31
2.6.1 Overview
Table 2.1 Instruction Classification
Notes 3 added
65, 66
3.4 Address Map in Each
Operating Mode
Address maps for the H8S/2194C series added
68
4.1 Overview
Table 4.1 Internal Chip Status in Each Mode
Timer L, PSU, 12-bit PWM added
Sleep and Watch modes of I/O amended
79
4.4.1 Sleep Mode
Description amended
Other supporting modules (excluding the servo
circuit and 12-bit PWM) do not stop.
80
4.5.1 Module Stop Mode
Table 4.4 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip
Supporting Modules
Module corresponding to the MSTP1 bit amended
119
6.4.5 Interrupt Response
Times
Table 6.8 Interrupt Response Times
Note 2 amended
121
6.5.4 When NMI is Disabled
Added
126
Figure 7.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions
Amended
127
7.2.3 Flash Memory
Operating Modes
Figure 7.4 Boot Mode
Amended
131
7.3.1 Flash Memory Control
Register 1 (FLMCR1)
Description amended
FLMCR1 is initialized by a reset, in power-down
state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module
stop mode, and sleep mode), or when a low level is
input to the FWE pin.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page II of V
Page
Item
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
134
7.3.2 Flash Memory Control
Register 2 (FLMCR2)
Description amended
The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in power-
down state (excluding the medium-speed mode,
module stop mode, and sleep mode), hardware
protect mode, and software protect mode.
Description amended
EBR1 and EBR2 are each initialized to H'00 by a
reset, in power-down state (excluding the medium-
speed mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode),
when a low level is input to the FWE pin, or when a
high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE bit in
FLMCR1 is not set.
136
7.3.3 Erase Block Registers 1
and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)
Table 7.4 Flash Memory Erase Blocks
EB3 address amended
138
7.4 On-Board Programming
Modes
Table 7.5 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
MD0 pin level in use program mode amended
140
Figure 7.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
Flow amended
141
Table 7.6 System Clock Frequencies for which
Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
2400-bps transfer bit rate deleted
142
7.4.1 Boot Mode
Figure 7.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Programming control program area amended
145
7.5.1 Program Mode
Description amended
(For details, see the flowchart in figure 7.12.)
146
7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode
Description amended
(For details, see the flowchart in figure 7.12.)
7.5.3 Erase Mode
Description amended
(For details, see the flowchart in figure 7.13.)
148
7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode
Description amended
(For details, see the flowchart in figure 7.13.)
150
7.6.1 Hardware Protection
Table 7.7 Hardware Protection
Reset/standby protection description amended
152
7.6.3 Error Protection
FLER bit setting condition (3) amended
Figure 7.14 Flash Memory State Transitions
amended
153
7.7 Interrupt Handling when
Programming/Erasing Flash
Memory
Note 1 amended
154
7.8.2 Socket Adapters and
Memory Map
Table 7.9 Socket Adapter Product Codes
amended
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page III of V
Page
Item
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
166
7.8.9 Programmer Mode
Transition Time
Figure 7.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Boot
Program Transfer Time, and Power Supply Fall
Sequence
Vcc timing amended
169
7.10 Note on Switching from
F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM
Version
Added
Section 8 ROM (H8S/2194C
Series)
Added
221
9.1 Overview
Description amended due to introduction of the
H8S/2194C series
304
14.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of the Timer J
/1024 clock source (for H8S/2194C series) added
308
14.2.1 Timer Mode Register J
(TMJ)
Bits 3 and 2
Description amended
311, 312
14.2.2 Timer J Control
Register (TMJC)
Bit 0 description amended
336
16.2.1 Timer R Mode
Register 1 (TMRM1)
Bit 0 description amended
416
20.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control
Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR)
Initialization description amended
419
20.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data
Registers (CPWDR, DPWDR)
Initialization description amended
420
20.2.3 Module stop Control
Register (MSTPCR)
Added
443
23.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of SCI1
Register names amended
454
23.2.7 Serial Status Register
(SSR1)
Bit 7:
Clearing conditions amended
520
25.1.4 Register Configuration Table 25.2 Register Configuration
Note 2 description amended
522
25.2.1 I
2
C Bus Data Register
(ICDR)
Description amended
531,
534 to 536
25.2.5 I
2
C Bus Control
Register (ICCR)
Bit 7 description amended
Bit 1 description amended
541
25.2.6 I
2
C Bus Status
Register (ICSR)
Bit 4 description amended
544
25.2.7 Serial/Timer Control
Register (STCR)
Bit 5 description amended
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page IV of V
Page
Item
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
547 to 549
25.3.2 Master Transmit
Operation
550 to 552
25.3.3 Master Receive
Operation
556
25.3.5 Slave Transmit
Operation
Description amended
561
Figure 25.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode
(Example) amended
562
25.3.8 Sample Flowcharts
Figure 25.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode
(Example) amended
565, 566
25.3.9 Initialization of Internal
State
Added
570 to 572
25.4 Usage Notes
Description (7) to (9) added
604
27.3.7 RTS Instruction
Figure 27.15 RTS Instruction
Description amended
Stack storing
613
28.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 28.1 Block Diagram of Servo Circuits
Amended
624
28.2.5 Register Descriptions
(5) CTL Gain Control Register (CTLGR)
Bits 3 to 0: CTL Amplifier Gain Setting Bits
(CTLGR3 to 0) values of CTL output gain amended
627
28.3.2 Block Diagram
Figure 28.6 REF30 Signal Generator
amended
634
28.3.4 Register Descriptions
(5) Reference Period Mode Register 2 (RFM2)
Bit 7: TBC Selection Bit
Description amended
663, 664
28.4.5 Register Descriptions
(4) FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 (FPDRA)
(5) FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB)
Descriptions of bits in these registers added
667, 668
28.4.5 Register Descriptions
(9) DFG Reference Register 2 (DFCRB)
Descriptions of bits 4 to 0 added
(11) DFG Reference Count Register (DFCTR)
Initial value of bit 4 to 0 amended and descriptions
added
669, 670
28.4.6 Description of
Operation
Completely Amended
688
28.6.4 Register Descriptions
(5) Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register
(DFVCR)
Descriptions of bits 1 and 0 amended
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page V of V
Page
Item
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
708
28.8.4 Register Descriptions
(5) Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register
(CFVCR)
Descriptions of bits 1 and 0 amended
745
28.12.5 Additional V Pulse
Signal
Figure 28.46 Additional V Pulse Negative Polarity
is Specified
Value of POL amended
761
28.13.5 Register Descriptions (8) Duty I/O Register (DI/O)
Descriptions of ASM Mark Detect Mode amended
769
28.13.8 Duty Discriminator
Values of duty amended
780
28.14.2 CTL Frequency
Divider
Figure 28.63 CTL Frequency Divider amended
817
28.17 Module Stop Control
Register (MSTPCR)
Added
819 to 860
29 Electrical Characteristics
Description amended due to introduction of the
H8S/2194C series
861 to 909
Appendix A Instruction Set
Notes on TAS instruction added
917 to 1017
B.2 Function List
Following list of registers amended
H'D097: RFM2
H'D0A4: CTLGR
H'D13A: TMJ
H'D13B: TMJC
H'D148: SMR1
H'D14C: SR1
H'D158: ICCR
H'D159: ICSR
H'FFF8: FLMCR1
H'FFF9: FLMCR2
H'FFFA: EBR1
H'FFFB: EBR2
1019 to 1031 C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams
Table C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams
Completely amended
Figure E.3 Sample External Circuit for Servo
Section
Amended
1035
E.3 Sample External Circuits
Figure E.4 Example of External Circuit for Sync
Signal Detection Circuit Section
Amended
1036
Appendix F List of Product
Codes
Figure F.1 Product Codes List of H8S/2194 series
and H8S/2194C series
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page i of xviii
Contents
Section 1 Overview........................................................................................
1
1.1
Overview .....................................................................................................................
1
1.2
Internal Block Diagram ................................................................................................
6
1.3
Pin Arrangement and Functions....................................................................................
7
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement .............................................................................................
7
1.3.2
Pin Functions...................................................................................................
8
1.4
Differences between H8S/2194C Series and H8S/2194 Series.......................................
14
Section 2 CPU ............................................................................................... 15
2.1
Overview .....................................................................................................................
15
2.1.1
Features...........................................................................................................
15
2.1.2
Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU.................................
16
2.1.3
Differences from H8/300 CPU.........................................................................
16
2.1.4
Differences from H8/300H CPU ......................................................................
17
2.2
CPU Operating Modes .................................................................................................
18
2.3
Address Space..............................................................................................................
23
2.4
Register Configuration .................................................................................................
24
2.4.1
Overview.........................................................................................................
24
2.4.2
General Registers ............................................................................................
25
2.4.3
Control Registers.............................................................................................
26
2.4.4
Initial Register Values .....................................................................................
27
2.5
Data Formats ...............................................................................................................
28
2.5.1
General Register Data Formats ........................................................................
28
2.5.2
Memory Data Formats .....................................................................................
30
2.6
Instruction Set............................................................................................................. .
31
2.6.1
Overview.........................................................................................................
31
2.6.2
Instructions and Addressing Modes..................................................................
32
2.6.3
Table of Instructions Classified by Function.....................................................
33
2.6.4
Basic Instruction Formats ................................................................................
43
2.6.5
Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions.................................................
44
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................
45
2.7.1
Addressing Mode ............................................................................................
45
2.7.2
Effective Address Calculation..........................................................................
48
2.8
Processing States..........................................................................................................
52
2.8.1
Overview.........................................................................................................
52
2.8.2
Reset State.......................................................................................................
53
2.8.3
Exception-Handling State ................................................................................
54
2.8.4
Program Execution State..................................................................................
55
2.8.5
Power-Down State...........................................................................................
56
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page ii of xviii
2.9
Basic Timing ...............................................................................................................
57
2.9.1
Overview ........................................................................................................
57
2.9.2
On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)......................................................................
57
2.9.3
On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing....................................................
58
2.10
Usage Note ..................................................................................................................
58
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................. 59
3.1
Overview.....................................................................................................................
59
3.1.1
Operating Mode Selection ...............................................................................
59
3.1.2
Register Configuration.....................................................................................
59
3.2
Register Descriptions ...................................................................................................
60
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)......................................................................
60
3.2.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................
60
3.3
Operating Mode Descriptions.......................................................................................
62
3.3.1
Mode 1............................................................................................................
62
3.4
Address Map................................................................................................................
63
Section 4 Power-Down State ......................................................................... 67
4.1
Overview.....................................................................................................................
67
4.1.1
Register Configuration.....................................................................................
71
4.2
Register Descriptions ...................................................................................................
72
4.2.1
Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................
72
4.2.2
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................
74
4.2.3
Timer Register A (TMA) .................................................................................
76
4.2.4
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................
77
4.3
Medium-Speed Mode...................................................................................................
78
4.4
Sleep Mode..................................................................................................................
79
4.4.1
Sleep Mode .....................................................................................................
79
4.4.2
Clearing Sleep Mode .......................................................................................
79
4.5
Module Stop Mode ......................................................................................................
80
4.5.1
Module Stop Mode ..........................................................................................
80
4.6
Standby Mode..............................................................................................................
81
4.6.1
Standby Mode .................................................................................................
81
4.6.2
Clearing Standby Mode ...................................................................................
81
4.6.3
Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode ........................
81
4.7
Watch Mode ................................................................................................................
83
4.7.1
Watch Mode....................................................................................................
83
4.7.2
Clearing Watch Mode......................................................................................
83
4.8
Subsleep Mode ............................................................................................................
84
4.8.1
Subsleep Mode ................................................................................................
84
4.8.2
Clearing Subsleep Mode ..................................................................................
84
4.9
Subactive Mode ...........................................................................................................
85
4.9.1
Subactive Mode...............................................................................................
85
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page iii of xviii
4.9.2
Clearing Subactive Mode.................................................................................
85
4.10
Direct Transition .......................................................................................................... 86
4.10.1 Overview of Direct Transition .........................................................................
86
Section 5 Exception Handling ........................................................................ 87
5.1
Overview .....................................................................................................................
87
5.1.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority ............................................................
87
5.1.2
Exception Handling Operation .........................................................................
88
5.1.3
Exception Sources and Vector Table ................................................................
88
5.2
Reset ...........................................................................................................................
90
5.2.1
Overview.........................................................................................................
90
5.2.2
Reset Sequence................................................................................................
90
5.2.3
Interrupts after Reset .......................................................................................
91
5.3
Interrupts .....................................................................................................................
92
5.4
Trap Instruction ...........................................................................................................
93
5.5
Stack Status after Exception Handling ..........................................................................
94
5.6
Notes on Use of the Stack ............................................................................................
95
Section 6 Interrupt Controller......................................................................... 97
6.1
Overview .....................................................................................................................
97
6.1.1
Features...........................................................................................................
97
6.1.2
Block Diagram ................................................................................................
98
6.1.3
Pin Configuration ............................................................................................
99
6.1.4
Register Configuration.....................................................................................
99
6.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 100
6.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................... 100
6.2.2
Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ......................................... 101
6.2.3
IRQ Enable Register (IENR)............................................................................ 102
6.2.4
IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR)................................................................... 103
6.2.5
IRQ Status Register (IRQR)............................................................................. 104
6.2.6
Port Mode Register (PMR1) ............................................................................ 105
6.3
Interrupt Sources.......................................................................................................... 106
6.3.1
External Interrupts ........................................................................................... 106
6.3.2
Internal Interrupts ............................................................................................ 108
6.3.3
Interrupt Exception Vector Table ..................................................................... 108
6.4
Interrupt Operation....................................................................................................... 111
6.4.1
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation.............................................. 111
6.4.2
Interrupt Control Mode 0 ................................................................................. 113
6.4.3
Interrupt Control Mode 1 ................................................................................. 115
6.4.4
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ........................................................... 118
6.4.5
Interrupt Response Times ................................................................................ 119
6.5
Usage Notes................................................................................................................. 120
6.5.1
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ................................... 120
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page iv of xviii
6.5.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts................................................................... 121
6.5.3
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction........................................ 121
6.5.4
When NMI is Disabled .................................................................................... 121
Section 7 ROM (H8S/2194 Series) ................................................................ 123
7.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 123
7.1.1
Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 123
7.2
Overview of Flash Memory.......................................................................................... 124
7.2.1
Features........................................................................................................... 124
7.2.2
Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 125
7.2.3
Flash Memory Operating Modes...................................................................... 126
7.2.4
Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 130
7.2.5
Register Configuration..................................................................................... 130
7.3
Flash Memory Register Descriptions ............................................................................ 131
7.3.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) .................................................. 131
7.3.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) .................................................. 134
7.3.3
Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) .................................................. 136
7.3.4
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ............................................................. 137
7.4
On-Board Programming Modes.................................................................................... 138
7.4.1
Boot Mode ...................................................................................................... 139
7.4.2
User Program Mode ........................................................................................ 144
7.5
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ........................................................................... 145
7.5.1
Program Mode................................................................................................. 145
7.5.2
Program-Verify Mode ..................................................................................... 146
7.5.3
Erase Mode ..................................................................................................... 148
7.5.4
Erase-Verify Mode .......................................................................................... 148
7.6
Flash Memory Protection ............................................................................................. 150
7.6.1
Hardware Protection ........................................................................................ 150
7.6.2
Software Protection ......................................................................................... 151
7.6.3
Error Protection............................................................................................... 152
7.7
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory..................................... 153
7.8
Flash Memory Programmer Mode ................................................................................ 154
7.8.1
Programmer Mode Setting ............................................................................... 154
7.8.2
Socket Adapters and Memory Map .................................................................. 154
7.8.3
Programmer Mode Operation........................................................................... 155
7.8.4
Memory Read Mode........................................................................................ 157
7.8.5
Auto-Program Mode........................................................................................ 160
7.8.6
Auto-Erase Mode ............................................................................................ 162
7.8.7
Status Read Mode............................................................................................ 163
7.8.8
Status Polling .................................................................................................. 165
7.8.9
Programmer Mode Transition Time ................................................................. 166
7.8.10 Notes On Memory Programming ..................................................................... 166
7.9
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions .................................................. 167
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page v of xviii
7.10
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version................................. 169
Section 8 ROM (H8S/2194C Series) .............................................................. 171
8.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 171
8.1.1
Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 171
8.2
Overview of Flash Memory.......................................................................................... 172
8.2.1
Features........................................................................................................... 172
8.2.2
Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 173
8.2.3
Flash Memory Operating Modes...................................................................... 174
8.2.4
Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 178
8.2.5
Register Configuration..................................................................................... 178
8.3
Flash Memory Register Descriptions ............................................................................ 179
8.3.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) .................................................. 179
8.3.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) .................................................. 182
8.3.3
Erase Block Registers 1 (EBR1) ...................................................................... 185
8.3.4
Erase Block Registers 2 (EBR2) ...................................................................... 185
8.3.5
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ............................................................. 187
8.4
On-Board Programming Modes.................................................................................... 188
8.4.1
Boot Mode ...................................................................................................... 189
8.4.2
User Program Mode......................................................................................... 194
8.5
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ........................................................................... 195
8.5.1
Program Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'0000 to H'1FFFF and n= 2
for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF) .................................................................. 195
8.5.2
Program-Verify Mode (n =1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2
for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF) .................................................................. 196
8.5.3
Erase Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2
for address H'20000 to H'3FFFF) ..................................................................... 198
8.5.4
Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2
for address H'20000 to H'3FFFF) ..................................................................... 198
8.6
Flash Memory Protection ............................................................................................. 200
8.6.1
Hardware Protection ........................................................................................ 200
8.6.2
Software Protection ......................................................................................... 201
8.6.3
Error Protection ............................................................................................... 202
8.7
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ..................................... 203
8.8
Flash Memory Programmer Mode ................................................................................ 204
8.8.1
Programmer Mode Setting ............................................................................... 204
8.8.2
Socket Adapters and Memory Map .................................................................. 204
8.8.3
Programmer Mode Operation........................................................................... 205
8.8.4
Memory Read Mode ........................................................................................ 207
8.8.5
Auto-Program Mode........................................................................................ 210
8.8.6
Auto-Erase Mode ............................................................................................ 212
8.8.7
Status Read Mode............................................................................................ 213
8.8.8
Status Polling .................................................................................................. 215
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page vi of xviii
8.8.9
Programmer Mode Transition Time ................................................................. 216
8.8.10 Notes On Memory Programming ..................................................................... 216
8.9
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions .................................................. 217
8.10
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version ................................ 219
Section 9 RAM.............................................................................................. 221
9.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 221
9.1.1
Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 221
Section 10 Clock Pulse Generator.................................................................. 223
10.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 223
10.1.1 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 223
10.1.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 223
10.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 224
10.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ................................................................. 224
10.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................ 225
10.3
Oscillator ..................................................................................................................... 226
10.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ....................................................................... 226
10.3.2 External Clock Input........................................................................................ 228
10.4
Duty Adjustment Circuit .............................................................................................. 231
10.5
Medium-Speed Clock Divider ...................................................................................... 231
10.6
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .............................................................................. 231
10.7
Subclock Oscillator Circuit .......................................................................................... 232
10.7.1 Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator ....................................................... 232
10.7.2 External Clock Input........................................................................................ 233
10.7.3 When Subclock is not Needed.......................................................................... 233
10.8
Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit............................................................................ 234
10.9
Notes on the Resonator ................................................................................................ 234
Section 11 I/O Port ........................................................................................ 235
11.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 235
11.1.1 Port Functions ................................................................................................. 235
11.1.2 Port Input ........................................................................................................ 235
11.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors ................................................................................ 237
11.2
Port 0........................................................................................................................... 238
11.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 238
11.2.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 239
11.2.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 240
11.2.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 240
11.3
Port 1........................................................................................................................... 241
11.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 241
11.3.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 241
11.3.3 Pin Functions .................................................................................................. 245
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page vii of xviii
11.3.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 246
11.4
Port 2........................................................................................................................... 247
11.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 247
11.4.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 247
11.4.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 251
11.4.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 253
11.5
Port 3........................................................................................................................... 254
11.5.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 254
11.5.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 254
11.5.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 258
11.5.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 260
11.6
Port 4........................................................................................................................... 261
11.6.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 261
11.6.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 261
11.6.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 264
11.6.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 266
11.7
Port 5........................................................................................................................... 267
11.7.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 267
11.7.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 267
11.7.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 271
11.7.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 272
11.8
Port 6........................................................................................................................... 273
11.8.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 273
11.8.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 274
11.8.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 277
11.8.4 Operation ........................................................................................................ 278
11.8.5 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 279
11.9
Port 7........................................................................................................................... 280
11.9.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 280
11.9.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 280
11.9.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 282
11.9.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 282
11.10 Port 8........................................................................................................................... 283
11.10.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 283
11.10.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 283
11.10.3 Pin Functions................................................................................................... 286
11.10.4 Pin States ........................................................................................................ 288
Section 12 Timer A........................................................................................ 289
12.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 289
12.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 289
12.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 290
12.1.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 290
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page viii of xviii
12.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 291
12.2.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA) ....................................................................... 291
12.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA) .................................................................................. 293
12.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 293
12.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 294
12.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer........................................................................ 294
12.3.2 Operation of the Timer for Clocks.................................................................... 294
12.3.3 Initializing the Counts...................................................................................... 294
Section 13 Timer B........................................................................................ 295
13.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 295
13.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 295
13.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 295
13.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 296
13.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 296
13.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 297
13.2.1 Timer Mode Register B (TMB)........................................................................ 297
13.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB)................................................................................... 299
13.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB).......................................................................... 299
13.2.4 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) ......................................................................... 300
13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 300
13.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 302
13.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer........................................................................ 302
13.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer ................................................................ 302
13.3.3 Event Counter ................................................................................................. 302
Section 14 Timer J......................................................................................... 303
14.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 303
14.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 303
14.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 303
14.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 305
14.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 305
14.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 306
14.2.1 Timer Mode Register J (TMJ).......................................................................... 306
14.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC) .................................................................... 310
14.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS) ....................................................................... 312
14.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ)..................................................................................... 313
14.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK) .................................................................................. 313
14.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ)............................................................................ 314
14.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK) ......................................................................... 314
14.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 315
14.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 316
14.3.1 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1)............................................................................. 316
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page ix of xviii
14.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2)............................................................................. 316
14.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission ............................................................. 317
Section 15 Timer L ........................................................................................ 321
15.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 321
15.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 321
15.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 322
15.1.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 323
15.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 324
15.2.1 Timer L Mode Register (LMR) ........................................................................ 324
15.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC)............................................................................. 326
15.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR)........................................................... 326
15.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 327
15.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 328
15.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation...................................................................... 328
Section 16 Timer R ........................................................................................ 331
16.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 331
16.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 331
16.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 331
16.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 333
16.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 333
16.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 334
16.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)................................................................ 334
16.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)................................................................ 336
16.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS) ...................................................... 339
16.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1) ........................................................... 341
16.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2) ........................................................... 342
16.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1).................................................................. 342
16.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2).................................................................. 343
16.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3).................................................................. 343
16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 344
16.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 345
16.3.1 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1................. 345
16.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2................. 346
16.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3 ...................................................................... 346
16.3.4 Mode Identification ......................................................................................... 347
16.3.5 Reeling Controls.............................................................................................. 347
16.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor................................ 347
16.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function ............................................................... 348
16.4
Interrupt Cause ............................................................................................................ 350
16.5
Exemplary Settings for Respective Functions ............................................................... 351
16.5.1 Mode Identification ......................................................................................... 351
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page x of xviii
16.5.2 Reeling Controls.............................................................................................. 352
16.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function ............................................................... 352
16.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor................................ 353
Section 17 Timer X1...................................................................................... 355
17.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 355
17.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 355
17.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 356
17.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 357
17.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 358
17.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers ............................................................................ 359
17.2.1 Free Running Counter (FRC) ........................................................................... 359
17.2.2 Output Comparing Register A and B (OCRA and OCRB) ................................ 360
17.2.3 Input Capture Register A Through D (ICRA Through ICRD) ........................... 361
17.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)........................................................ 363
17.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX) ...................................................... 366
17.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX)................................................................... 370
17.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR) ......................................... 372
17.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 375
17.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 376
17.3.1 Operation of the Timer X1............................................................................... 376
17.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC ........................................................................... 377
17.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing................................................... 378
17.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing ...................................................................................... 378
17.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing ............................................................. 379
17.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing ........................... 380
17.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing ....................... 381
17.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing ......................................................... 381
17.4
Operation Mode of the Timer X1 ................................................................................. 382
17.5
Interrupt Causes........................................................................................................... 383
17.6
Exemplary Uses of the Timer X1 ................................................................................. 384
17.7
Precautions when Using the Timer X1.......................................................................... 385
17.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC ................................ 385
17.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC.......................... 386
17.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR ................. 387
17.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations ............................. 388
Section 18 Watchdog Timer (WDT) .............................................................. 391
18.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 391
18.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 391
18.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 392
18.1.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 393
18.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 394
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xi of xviii
18.2.1 Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)................................................................ 394
18.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)......................................... 394
18.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................... 397
18.2.4 Notes on Register Access................................................................................. 397
18.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 399
18.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation.............................................................................. 399
18.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ................................................................................. 400
18.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ...................................................... 401
18.4
Interrupts ..................................................................................................................... 402
18.5
Usage Notes................................................................................................................. 402
18.5.1 Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write
and Increment.................................................................................................. 402
18.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 .................................................................. 403
18.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode ............... 403
Section 19 8-Bit PWM ................................................................................... 405
19.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 405
19.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 405
19.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 405
19.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 406
19.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 406
19.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 407
19.2.1 Bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3) ............ 407
19.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR) ............................................................ 408
19.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3).......................................................................... 409
19.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 410
19.3
8-Bit PWM Operation .................................................................................................. 411
Section 20 12-Bit PWM ................................................................................. 413
20.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 413
20.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 413
20.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 414
20.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 415
20.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 415
20.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 416
20.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR) ........................................ 416
20.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (CPWDR, DPWDR) ............................................ 419
20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 420
20.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 421
20.3.1 Output Waveform............................................................................................ 421
Section 21 14-Bit PWM ................................................................................. 423
21.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 423
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xii of xviii
21.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 423
21.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 424
21.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 424
21.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 425
21.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 426
21.2.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR) ...................................................................... 426
21.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL).......................................... 427
21.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 428
21.3
14-Bit PWM Operation ................................................................................................ 429
Section 22 Prescalar Unit............................................................................... 431
22.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 431
22.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 431
22.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 432
22.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 433
22.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 433
22.2
Registers...................................................................................................................... 434
22.2.1 Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1) ...................................................................... 434
22.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR)................................................. 434
22.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ......................................................................... 437
22.3
Noise Cancel Circuit .................................................................................................... 437
22.4
Operation..................................................................................................................... 438
22.4.1 Prescalar S (PSS)............................................................................................. 438
22.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW).......................................................................................... 439
22.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count ................................................................. 439
22.4.4 8-Bit PWM...................................................................................................... 440
22.4.5 8-Bit Input Capture Using IC Pin ..................................................................... 440
22.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output .................................................................... 440
Section 23 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) ..................................... 441
23.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 441
23.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 441
23.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 443
23.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 444
23.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 444
23.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 445
23.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)........................................................................... 445
23.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR1) ........................................................................ 445
23.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ......................................................................... 446
23.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR1) ....................................................................... 446
23.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR1).......................................................................... 447
23.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR1) ........................................................................ 450
23.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR1)........................................................................... 453
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xiii of xviii
23.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR1) ................................................................................ 457
23.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR1) ......................................................... 464
23.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 465
23.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 466
23.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 466
23.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode.................................................................... 468
23.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function......................................................... 478
23.3.4 Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode ............................................................ 486
23.4
SCI1 Interrupts ............................................................................................................ 494
23.5
Usage Notes................................................................................................................. 495
Section 24 Serial Communication Interface 2 (SCI2) ..................................... 499
24.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 499
24.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 499
24.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 500
24.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 501
24.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 501
24.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 502
24.2.1 Starting Address Register (STAR) ................................................................... 502
24.2.2 Ending Address Register (EDAR).................................................................... 502
24.2.3 Serial Control Register 2 (SCR2) ..................................................................... 503
24.2.4 Serial Control Status Register 2 (SCSR2)......................................................... 504
24.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 507
24.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 508
24.3.1 Clock .............................................................................................................. 508
24.3.2 Data Transfer Format....................................................................................... 508
24.3.3 Data Transfer Operations ................................................................................. 511
24.4
Interrupt Sources.......................................................................................................... 515
Section 25 I
2
C Bus Interface (IIC) ................................................................. 517
25.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 517
25.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 517
25.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 518
25.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 519
25.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 520
25.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 521
25.2.1 I
2
C Bus Data Register (ICDR).......................................................................... 521
25.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) ......................................................................... 524
25.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) .......................................................... 526
25.2.4 I
2
C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ....................................................................... 527
25.2.5 I
2
C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ..................................................................... 531
25.2.6 I
2
C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ........................................................................ 538
25.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ............................................................. 543
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xiv of xviii
25.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 545
25.3
Operation..................................................................................................................... 546
25.3.1 I
2
C Bus Data Format........................................................................................ 546
25.3.2 Master Transmit Operation .............................................................................. 547
25.3.3 Master Receive Operation................................................................................ 550
25.3.4 Slave Receive Operation.................................................................................. 553
25.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation ................................................................................ 556
25.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ............................................................. 558
25.3.7 Noise Canceler ................................................................................................ 560
25.3.8 Sample Flowcharts .......................................................................................... 560
25.3.9 Initialization of Internal State........................................................................... 565
25.4
Usage Notes................................................................................................................. 567
Section 26 A/D Converter.............................................................................. 573
26.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 573
26.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 573
26.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 574
26.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 575
26.1.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 576
26.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 577
26.2.1 Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR) .............................................. 577
26.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR) ............................................. 577
26.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)......................................................................... 579
26.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................ 582
26.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR) .................................................................... 585
26.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0) ......................................................................... 585
26.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ....................................................... 586
26.3
Interface to Bus Master ................................................................................................ 587
26.4
Operation..................................................................................................................... 588
26.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion................................................................ 588
26.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion ........................................... 589
26.5
Interrupt Sources.......................................................................................................... 590
Section 27 Address Trap Controller (ATC).................................................... 591
27.1
Overview..................................................................................................................... 591
27.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 591
27.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 591
27.1.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 592
27.2
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................... 592
27.2.1 Address Trap Control Register (ATCR) ........................................................... 592
27.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0) ................................................ 593
27.3
Precautions in Usage.................................................................................................... 595
27.3.1 Basic Operations ............................................................................................. 595
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xv of xviii
27.3.2 Enable ............................................................................................................. 597
27.3.3 Bcc Instruction ................................................................................................ 597
27.3.4 BSR Instruction ............................................................................................... 601
27.3.5 JSR Instruction ................................................................................................ 602
27.3.6 JMP Instruction ............................................................................................... 603
27.3.7 RTS Instruction ............................................................................................... 604
27.3.8 SLEEP Instruction ........................................................................................... 604
27.3.9 Competing Interrupt ........................................................................................ 607
Section 28 Servo Circuits ............................................................................... 611
28.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................... 611
28.1.1 Functions......................................................................................................... 611
28.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 612
28.2
Servo Port.................................................................................................................... 614
28.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 614
28.2.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 614
28.2.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 617
28.2.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 618
28.2.5 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 618
28.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals .................................................................................. 625
28.3
Reference Signal Generators ........................................................................................ 626
28.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 626
28.3.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 626
28.3.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 628
28.3.4 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 629
28.3.5 Description of Operation.................................................................................. 635
28.4
HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator......................................................................... 650
28.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 650
28.4.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 650
28.4.3 Composition .................................................................................................... 652
28.4.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 653
28.4.5 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 653
28.4.6 Description of Operation.................................................................................. 669
28.4.7 Interrupt .......................................................................................................... 675
28.4.8 Cautions .......................................................................................................... 676
28.5
Four-head High-speed Switching Circuit for Special Playback...................................... 677
28.5.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 677
28.5.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 677
28.5.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 678
28.5.4 Register Description ........................................................................................ 678
28.6
Drum Speed Error Detector .......................................................................................... 681
28.6.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 681
28.6.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 681
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xvi of xviii
28.6.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 683
28.6.4 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 684
28.6.5 Description of Operation ................................................................................. 689
28.6.6 f
H
Correction in Trick Play Mode ..................................................................... 691
28.7
Drum Phase Error Detector .......................................................................................... 692
28.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 692
28.7.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 692
28.7.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 694
28.7.4 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 695
28.7.5 Description of Operation ................................................................................. 698
28.7.6 Phase Comparison ........................................................................................... 700
28.8
Capstan Speed Error Detector ...................................................................................... 701
28.8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 701
28.8.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 701
28.8.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 703
28.8.4 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 704
28.8.5 Description of Operation ................................................................................. 708
28.9
Capstan Phase Error Detector ....................................................................................... 710
28.9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 710
28.9.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 710
28.9.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 712
28.9.4 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 713
28.9.5 Description of Operation ................................................................................. 716
28.10 X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit.................................................................... 718
28.10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 718
28.10.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 718
28.10.3 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 720
28.11 Digital Filters............................................................................................................... 723
28.11.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 723
28.11.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 724
28.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer ............................................................................................ 726
28.11.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 727
28.11.5 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 728
28.11.6 Filter Characteristics........................................................................................ 736
28.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response........................................................ 738
28.11.8 Initialization of Z
-1
........................................................................................... 738
28.12 Additional V Signal Generator ..................................................................................... 740
28.12.1 Overview ........................................................................................................ 740
28.12.2 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 741
28.12.3 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 741
28.12.4 Register Description ........................................................................................ 741
28.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal................................................................................ 743
28.13 CTL Circuit ................................................................................................................. 746
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xvii of xviii
28.13.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 746
28.13.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 747
28.13.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 748
28.13.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 748
28.13.5 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 749
28.13.6 Operation ........................................................................................................ 763
28.13.7 CTL Input Section ........................................................................................... 766
28.13.8 Duty Discriminator .......................................................................................... 769
28.13.9 CTL Output Section......................................................................................... 775
28.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit......................................................................... 778
28.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt .................................................................................. 779
28.14 Frequency Dividers...................................................................................................... 780
28.14.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 780
28.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider................................................................................... 780
28.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider................................................................................... 784
28.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit ............................................................................ 793
28.15 Sync Signal Detector.................................................................................................... 795
28.15.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 795
28.15.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 796
28.15.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................ 797
28.15.4 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 797
28.15.5 Register Descriptions....................................................................................... 798
28.15.6 Noise Detection ............................................................................................... 806
28.15.7 Sync Signal Detector Activation ...................................................................... 809
28.16 Servo Interrupt ............................................................................................................. 810
28.16.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 810
28.16.2 Register Configuration..................................................................................... 810
28.16.3 Register Description ........................................................................................ 810
28.17 Module Stop Control Reigster (MSTPCR).................................................................... 817
Section 29 Electrical Characteristics............................................................... 819
29.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ......................................................................................... 819
29.2
Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194 ...................................................................... 820
29.2.1 DC Characteristics of HD64F2194................................................................... 820
29.2.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C ............................... 826
29.2.3 AC Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C ........................................... 827
29.2.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C..................................... 830
29.2.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C .......................... 835
29.2.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C ............ 836
29.2.7 FLASH Memory Characteristics ...................................................................... 839
29.2.8 Usage Note...................................................................................................... 840
29.3
Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A.......................................................... 841
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page xviii of xviii
29.3.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A ............................................. 841
29.3.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A......................... 847
29.3.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A ............................................. 848
29.3.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A......................... 852
29.3.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A......................... 857
29.3.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193,
HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A .... 858
Appendix A Instruction Set............................................................................ 861
A.1
Instructions.................................................................................................................. 861
A.2
Instruction Codes ......................................................................................................... 872
A.3
Operation Code Map.................................................................................................... 882
A.4
Number of Execution States ......................................................................................... 886
A.5
Bus Status During Instruction Execution ...................................................................... 896
A.6
Change of Condition Codes.......................................................................................... 905
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ................................................................. 910
B.1
Addresses .................................................................................................................... 910
B.2
Function List................................................................................................................ 917
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams............................................................... 1018
C.1
Pin Circuit Diagrams................................................................................................. 1018
Appendix D Port States in the Difference Processing States........................ 1032
D.1
Pin Circuit Diagrams................................................................................................. 1032
Appendix E Usage Notes ............................................................................ 1033
E.1
Power Supply Rise and Fall Order............................................................................. 1033
E.2
Pin Handling When the High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special
Playback Is Not Used ................................................................................................ 1034
E.3
Sample External Circuits........................................................................................... 1035
Appendix F List of Product Codes .............................................................. 1036
Appendix G External Dimensions............................................................... 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1 of 1037
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Overview
The H8S/2194 Series, and H8S/2194C Series comprise microcomputers (MCUs) built around the
H8S/2000 CPU, employing Hitachi's proprietary architecture, and equipped with supporting
modules on-chip.
The H8S/2000 has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general
registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can
address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300
and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300,
H8/300L, or H8/300H Series.
The H8S/2194 Series, and H8S/2194C Series are incorporated with digital servo circuit, ROM,
RAM, seven types of timers, three types of PWM, two types of serial communication interface,
I
2
C bus interface, A/D converter, and I/O port as on-chip supporting modules.
The on-chip ROM is either flash memory (F-ZTAT
TM
*) or mask ROM, with a capacity of 256,
192, 160, 128, 112, 96, or 80 kbytes. ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus,
enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been
speeded up, and processing speed increased.
The features of the H8S/2194 Series, and H8S/2194C Series are shown in table 1.1.
Note: *
F-ZTAT
TM
is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 2 of 1037
Table 1.1
Features
Item
Specifications
CPU
s
General-register architecture
Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or
eight 32-bit registers)
s
High-speed operation suitable for real-time control
Maximum operating frequency: 10 MHz/4 to 5.5 V
Operable by 32 kHz subclock
High-speed arithmetic operations
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns (10 MHz operation)
16
16-bit register-register multiply: 2000 ns (10 MHz operation)
32
16-bit register-register divide: 2000 ns (10 MHz operation)
s
Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation
Sixty-five basic instructions
8/16/32-bit transfer/arithmetic and logic instructions
Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
s
CPU operating modes
Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space
Timer
s
Seven types of timer are incorporated
(1) Timer A
8-bit interval timer
Clock source can be selected among 8 types of internal clock of which
frequencies are divided from the system clock (
) and subclock (
SUB)
Functions as clock time base by subclock input
(2) Timer B
Functions as 8-bit interval timer or reload timer
Clock source can be selected among 7 types of internal clock or external
event input
(3) Timer J
Functions as two 8-bit down counters or one 16-bit down counter (reload
timer/event counter timer/timer output, etc., 5 types of operation modes)
Remote controlled transmit function
Take up/Supply Reel Pulse Frequency division
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 3 of 1037
Item
Specifications
Timer
(4) Timer L
8-bit up/down counter
Clock source can be selected among 2 types of internal clock, CFG
frequency division signal, and PB and REC-CTL (control pulse)
Compare-match clearing function/auto reload function
(5) Timer R
Three reload timers
Mode discrimination
Reel control
Capstan motor acceleration/deceleration detection function
Slow tracking mono-multi
(6) Timer X1
16-bit free-running counter
Clock source can be selected among 3 types of internal clock and DVCFG
Two output compare outputs
Four input capture inputs
(7) Watchdog timer
Functions as watchdog timer or 8-bit interval timer
Generates reset signal or NMI at overflow
Prescaler unit
Divides system clock frequency and generates frequency division clock
for supporting module functions
Divides subclock frequency and generates input clock for Timer A (clock
time base)
Generates 8-bit PWM frequency and duty period
8-bit input capture at external signal edge
Frequency division clock output enabled
PWM
s
Three types of PWM are incorporated
(1) 14-bit PWM: Pulse resolution type x 1 channel
(2) 8-bit PWM: Duty control type x 4 channels
(3) 12-bit PWM: Pulse pitch control type x 2 channels
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 4 of 1037
Item
Specifications
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)
s
Two types of serial communication interface is incorporated
(1) SCI1
Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable
Desired bit rate selectable with built-in baud rate generator
Multiprocessor communication function
(2) SCI2
32-byte data automatically transferrable
Transfer clock selectable among seven types of internal/external clock
I
2
C bus interface
Conforms to Phillips I
2
C bus interface standard
Single master mode/slave mode
Arbitration lost condition can be identified
Supports two slave addresses
A/D converter
Resolution: 10 bits
Input: 12 channels
High-speed conversion: 13.4
s minimum conversion time (10 MHz
operation)
Sample-and-hold function
A/D conversion can be activated by software or external trigger
Address trap
controller
Interrupt occurs when the preset address is found during bus cycle
To-be-trapped addresses can be individually set at three different
locations
I/O port
60 input/output pins
8 input-only pins
Can be switched for each supporting module
Servo circuit
s
Digital servo circuits on-chip
Input and output circuits
Error detection circuit
Phase and gain compensation
Sync signal
detector
s
On-chip sync signal detection circuit
Can separately detect horizontal and vertical sync signals
Noise detection function
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 5 of 1037
Item
Specifications
Memory
Flash memory or mask ROM
High-speed static RAM
Power-down
state
Medium-speed mode
Sleep mode
Module stop mode
Standby mode
Subclock operation
Subactive mode, watch mode, subsleep mode
Interrupt
controller
Seven external interrupt pins (
10,
,
,54
to
,54
)
38 internal interrupt sources
Three priority levels settable
Clock pulse
generator
s
Two types of clock pulse generator on-chip
System clock pulse generator: 8 to 10 MHz
Subclock pulse generator: 32.768 kHz
Packages
112-pin plastic QFP (FP-112)
Product lineup
Product Name
ROM
RAM
H8S/2194C
256 kbytes
6 kbytes
H8S/2194B
192 kbytes
6 kbytes
H8S/2194A
160 kbytes
6 kbytes
H8S/2194
128 kbytes
3 kbytes
H8S/2193
112 kbytes
3 kbytes
H8S/2192
96 kbytes
3 kbytes
H8S/2191
80 kbytes
3 kbytes
Product Code
Series
Mask ROM
Versions
F-ZTAT
Versions
ROM/RAM
(bytes)
Packages
HD6432194C
HD64F2194C
256 k/6 k
FP-112
HD6432194B
192 k/6 k
FP-112
H8S/2194C
HD6432194A
160 k/6 k
FP-112
HD6432194
HD64F2194
128 k/3 k
FP-112
HD6432193
112 k/3 k
FP-112
HD6432192
96 k/3 k
FP-112
H8S/2194
HD6432191
80 k/3 k
FP-112
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 6 of 1037
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
An internal block diagram of the chip is shown in figure 1.1.
P23/SDA
P25/SI2
P22/SCK1
P26/SO2
P21/SO1
P27/SCK2
P20/SI1
P24/SCL
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
V
CC
V
CC
V
CC
V
SS
MD0
FWE
RES
NMI
OSC2
OSC1
X2
X1
V
CC
AUDIO FF
DRMPWM
VIDEO FF
DFG
Csync
SV
SS
SV
CC
Vpulse
EXCTL/PS4
CLT(+)
CAPPWM
CTLSMT(i)
CTLBias
CTLFB
CLT(-)
CTL REF
CFG
CTLAmp(o)
C.Rotary/PS0
COMP/PS2
DPG/PS3
H.Amp SW/PS1
P13/IRQ3
P15/IRQ5
P12/IRQ2
R A M
R O M
H8S/2000 CPU
P16/IC
P11/IRQ1
P17/TMOW
P10/IRQ0
P14/IRQ4
P03/AN3
P05/AN5
P02/AN2
P06/AN6
P01/AN1
P07/AN7
P00/AN0
P04/AN4
ANA
AN9
AN8
ANB
AV
CC
AV
SS
P83/SV2
P85
P82/SV1
P86
P81/EXCAP
P87
P80/EXTTRG
P84
P33/PWM1
P35/PWM3
P32/PWM0
P36/BUZZ
P31/STRB
P37/TMO
P30/CS
P34/PWM2
P43/FTIC
P45/FTOA
P42/FTIB
P46/FTOB
P41/FTIA
P47
P40/PWM14
P44/FTID
P51
P53/TRIG
P50/ADTRG
P52/TMBI
P73/PPG3
P75/PPG5
P72/PPG2
P76/PPG6
P71/PPG1
P77/PPG7
P70/PPG0
P74/PPG4
P63/RP3
P65/RP5
P62/RP2
P66/RP6
P61/RP1
P67/RP7
P60/RP0
P64/RP4
S C I 1
S C I 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 0
Port 4
Port 3
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Sync signal
detection
analog
port
External address bus
External data bus
External data bus
External address bus
Subclock pulse
generator
System clock pulse generator
Interrupt controller
8-bit PWM
Watchdog timer
I C bus
interface
Timer L
2
A/D converter
Servo pins (CTL input/output
amplifier, three-level output, etc.)
Servo circuit
Internal data bus
Internal address bus
Bus
controller
Address trap
controller
Prescaler unit
Timer A
Timer B
Timer J
Timer R
Timer X1
14-bit PWM
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2194 Series
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 7 of 1037
1.3
Pin Arrangement and Functions
1.3.1
Pin Arrangement
The pin arrangement of the chip is shown in figure 1.2.
V
SS
P72/PPG2
V
CC
P71/PPG1
P70/PPG0
P67/RP7
P66/RP6
P65/RP5
P64/RP4
P63/RP3
P62/RP2
P61/RP1
P60/RP0
MD0
V
CC
OSC2
V
SS
OSC1
RES
X2
X1
NMI
FWE
P17/TMOW
P16/IC
P15/IRQ5
P14/IRQ4
P13/IRQ3
CTLREF
V
SS
Vpulse
V
CC
DFG
DPG/PS3
EXCTL/PS4
COMP/PS2
H.Amp sw/PS1
C.Rotary/PS0
DRM PWM
CAP PWM
VIDEO FF
AUDIO FF
Csync
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83/SV2
P82/SV1
P81/EXCAP
P80/EXTTRG
P77/PPG7
P76/PPG6
P75/PPG5
P74/PPG4
P73/PPG3
1
CTL(+)
FP-112
(Top view)
84
2
SV
SS
83
3
CTL()
82
4
CTLBias
81
5
CTLFB
80
6
CTLAmp(o)
79
7
CTLSMT(i)
78
8
CFG
77
9
SV
CC
76
10
AV
CC
75
11
P00/AN0
74
12
P01/AN1
73
13
P02/AN2
72
14
P03/AN3
71
15
P04/AN4
70
16
P05/AN5
69
17
P06/AN6
68
18
P07/AN7
67
19
AN8
66
20
AN9
65
21
ANA
64
22
ANB
63
23
AV
SS
62
24
P50/ADTRG
61
25
P51
60
26
P52/TMBI
59
27
P53/TRIG
58
28
P40/PWM14
57
29
P41/FTIA
112
30
P42/FTIB
111
31
P43/FTIC
110
32
P44/FTID
109
33
P45/FTOA
108
34
P46/FTOB
107
35
P47
106
36
P30/CS
105
37
P31/STRB
104
38
P32/PWM0
103
39
P33/PWM1
102
40
P34/PWM2
101
41
P35/PWM3
100
42
P36/BUZZ
99
43
V
SS
98
44
P37/TMO
97
45
V
CC
96
46
P20/SI1
95
47
P21/SO1
94
48
P22/SCK1
93
49
P23/SDA
92
50
P24/SCL
91
51
P25/SI2
90
52
P26/SO2
89
53
P27/SCK2
88
54
P10/IRQ0
87
55
P11/IRQ1
86
56
P12/IRQ2
85
Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2194 Series
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 8 of 1037
1.3.2
Pin Functions
Table 1.2 summarizes the functions of the chip's pins.
Table 1.2
Pin Functions
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
Vcc
45, 70,
82, 109
Input
Power supply:
All Vcc pins should be connected to the system
power supply (+5V)
Vss
43, 68,
84, 111
Input
Ground:
All Vss pins should be connected to the system
power supply (0V)
SVcc
9
Input
Servo power supply:
SVcc pin should be connected to the servo
analog power supply (+5V)
SVss
2
Input
Servo ground:
SVss pin should be connected to the servo
analog power supply (0V)
AVcc
10
Input
Analog power supply:
Power supply pin for A/D converter. It should be
connected to the system power supply (+5V)
when the A/D converter is not used
Power
supply
AVss
23
Input
Analog ground:
Ground pin for A/D converter. It should be
connected to the system power supply (0V)
OSC1
67
Input
OSC2
69
Output
Connected to a crystal oscillator. It can also
input an external clock. See section 10, Clock
Pulse Generator, for typical connection
diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external
clock input
X1
65
Input
Clock
X2
64
Output
Connected to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.
See section 10, Clock Pulse Generator, for
typical connection diagrams
Operating
mode
control
MD0
71
Input
Mode pins:
These pins set the operating mode. These pins
should not be changed while the MCU is in
operation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 9 of 1037
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
5(6
66
Input
Reset input:
When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset
System
control
FWE
62
Input
Flash memory enable:
Enables/disables flash memory programming.
This pin is available only with MCU with flash
memory on-chip. For mask ROM type, do not
connect anything to this pin
,54
54
Input
External interrupt request 0:
External interrupt input pin for which rising edge
sense, falling edge sense or both edges sense
are selectable
,54
,54
,54
,54
,54
55
56
57
58
59
Input
External interrupt requests 1 to 5:
External interrupt input pins for which rising or
falling edge sense are selectable
Interrupts
10,
63
Input
Nonmaskable interrupt:
Nonmaskable interrupt input pin for which rising
edge sense, falling edge sense or both edges
sense are selectable
,&
60
Input
Input capture input:
Input capture input pin for prescaler unit
Prescaler
unit
TMOW
61
Output
Frequency division clock output:
Output pin for clock of which frequency is
divided by prescaler
TMBI
26
Input
Timer B event input:
Input pin for events to be input to Timer B
counter
,54
,54
55
56
Input
Timer J event input:
Input pin for events to be input to Timer J RDT-
1or RDT-2 counter
TMO
44
Output
Timer J timer output:
Output pin for toggle at underflow of RDT-1 of
Timer J, or remote controlled transmit data
Timers
BUZZ
42
Output
Timer J buzzer output:
Output pin for toggle which is selectable among
fixed frequency, 1Hz frequency divided from
subclock (32 kHz), and frequency division CTL
signal
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 10 of 1037
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
,54
57
Input
Timer R input capture:
Input pin for input capture of Timer R TMRU-1 or
TMRU-2
FTOA
FTOB
33
34
Output
Timer X1 output compare A and B output:
Output pin for output compare A and B of Timer
X1
Timers
FTIA
FTIB
FTIC
FTID
29
30
31
32
Input
Timer X1 input capture A, B, C and D input:
Input pin for input capture A, B, C and D of
Timer X1
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
38
39
40
41
Output
8-bit PWM square waveform output:
Output pin for waveform generated by 8-bit
PWM 0, 1, 2 and 3
PWM
PWM14
28
Output
14-bit PWM square waveform output:
Output pin for waveform generated by 14-bit
PWM
SCK1
SCK2
48
53
Input
/output
SCI clock input/output:
Clock input pins for SCI 1 and 2
SI1
SI2
46
51
Input
SCI receive data input:
Receive data input pins for SCI 1 and 2
SO1
SO2
47
52
Output
SCI transmit data output:
Transmit data output pins for SCI 1 and 2
STRB
37
Output
SCI2 strobe output:
This pin outputs strobe pulse for each byte
transmit by SCI2
Serial
commu-
nication
interface
(SCI)
&6
36
Input
SCI2 chip select input:
This pin controls the transfer start of SCI2
SCL
50
Input
/output
I
2
C bus interface clock input/output:
Clock input/output pin for I
2
C bus interface
I
2
C bus
interface
SDA
49
Input
/output
I
2
C bus interface data input/output:
Data input/output pin for I
2
C bus interface
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 11 of 1037
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
AN7 to
AN0
18 to 11
Input
Analog input channels 7 to 0:
Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is
started by a software triggering
AN8
AN9
ANA
ANB
19
20
21
22
Input
Analog input channels 8, 9, A and B:
Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is
started by an external, hardware, or software
triggering
A/D
converter
$'75*
24
Input
A/D conversion external trigger input:
Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D
conversion
AUDIO FF
99
Output
Audio FF:
Output pin for audio head switching signal
VIDEO FF
100
Output
Video FF:
Output pin for video head switching signal
CAPPWM
101
Output
Capstan mix:
12-bit PWM output pin giving result of capstan
speed error and phase error after filtering
DRMPWM
102
Output
Drum mix:
12-bit PWM output pin giving result of drum
speed error and phase error after filtering
Vpulse
110
Output
Additional V pulse:
Three-level output pin for additional V signal
synchronized to the Video FF signal
C.Rotary
/PS0
103
Output,
input/
output
Color rotary signal:
Output pin for color signal processing control
signal in four-head special-effects playback
H.AmpSW
/PS1
104
Output,
input/
output
Head-amp switch:
Output pin for preamplifier output select signal in
four-head special-effects playback. This pin can
also be used as a general port when not used
COMP
/PS2
105
Input,
input/
output
Compare input:
Input pin for signal giving the result of
preamplifier output comparison in four-head
special-effects playback. This pin can also be
used as a general port when not used
CTL (+)
CTL (-)
1
3
Input
/output
CTL head (+) and (-) pins:
I/O pins for CTL signals
Servo
circuits
CTL Bias
4
Input
CTL primary amp bias supply:
Bias supply pin for CTL primary amp
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 12 of 1037
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
CTL Amp
(o)
6
Output
CTL amp output:
Output pin for CTL amp
CTL SMT
(l)
7
Input
CTL Schmitt amp input:
Input pin for CTL Schmitt amp
CTLFB
5
Input
CLT feedback input:
Input pin for CTL amp high-range characteristics
control
CTLREF
112
Output
CTL amp reference voltage output:
Output pin for 1/2Vcc (SV)
CFG
8
Input
Capstan FG input:
Schmitt comparator input pin for CFG signal
DFG
108
Input
Drum FG input:
Schmitt input pin for DFG signal
DPG/PS3
107
Input,
input/
output
Drum PG input:
Schmitt input pin for DPG signal. This pin can
also be used as a general port when not used
EXCTL
/PS4
106
Input,
input/
output
External CTL input:
Input pin for external CTL signal. This pin can
also be used as a general port when not used
Csync
98
Input
Mixed sync signal input:
Input pin for mixed sync signal
EXCAP
91
Input
Capstan external sync signal input:
Signal input pin for external synchronization of
capstan phase control
EXTTRG
90
Input
External trigger signal input:
Signal input pin for synchronization with
reference signal generator
SV1
92
Output
Servo monitor output pin 1:
Output pin for servo module internal signal
SV2
93
Output
Servo monitor output pin 2:
Output pin for servo module internal signal
Servo
circuits
PPG7 to
PPG0
89 to
85, 83,
81, 80
Output
PPG:
Output pin for HSW timing generator. To be
used when head switching is required as well as
Audio FF and Video FF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 13 of 1037
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Name and Function
P07 to P00
11 to 18
Input
Port 0:
8-bit input pins
P17 to P10
61 to 54
Input
/output
Port 1:
8-bit I/O pins
P27 to P20
53 to 46
Input
/output
Port 2:
8-bit I/O pins
P37 to P30
44,
42 to 36
Input
/output
Port 3:
8-bit I/O pins
P47 to P40
35 to 28
Input
/output
Port 4:
8-bit I/O pins
P53 to P50
27 to 24
Input
/output
Port 5:
4-bit I/O pins
P67 to P60
79 to 72
Input
/output
Port 6:
8-bit I/O pins
P77 to P70
89 to
85, 83,
81, 80
Input
/output
Port 7:
8-bit I/O pins
P87 to P80
97 to 90
Input
/output
Port 8:
8-bit I/O pins
RP7 to RP0
79 to 72
Output
Realtime output port:
8-bit realtime output pins
I/O port
TRIG
27
Input
Realtime output port trigger input:
Input pin for realtime output port trigger
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 14 of 1037
1.4
Differences between H8S/2194C Series and H8S/2194 Series
Though the H8S/2194C series is compatible with the H8S/2194 series and their supporting
modules are almost identical, there are some differences between them as shown below. For
details, see the following sections.
Table 1.3
Differences between H8S/2194C series and H8S/2194 series
H8S/2194C Series
H8S/2194 Series
ROM
H8S/2194C: 256 kbytes
H8S/2194B: 192 kbytes
H8S/2194A: 160 kbytes
H8S/2194: 128 kbytes
H8S/2193: 112 kbytes
H8S/2192: 96 kbytes
H8S/2191: 80 kbytes
RAM
H8S/2194C: 6 kbytes
H8S/2194B: 6 kbytes
H8S/2194A: 6 kbytes
H8S/2194: 3 kbytes
H8S/2193: 3 kbytes
H8S/2192: 3 kbytes
H8S/2191: 3 kbytes
Timer J
Five operating modes: TMJ-2 input
clock sources: PSS=
/16384,
/2048,
or
/1024; underflow of TMJ-1,
external clock (IRQ2)
Four operating modes: TMJ-2 input
clock sources: PSS=
/16384 or
/2048; underflow of TMJ-1, external
clock (IRQ2)
Servo circuit
In the reference signal generator, the
servo circuit selects whether
reference signals are generated with
VD when it is in PB mode, or in free-
run
In the reference signal generator,
when the servo circuit is in PB mode,
reference signals are generated in
free-run
Flash ROM
256 kbytes
When the flash ROM control flag is
set, use the E (erase) bit and the P
(program) bit in flash memory control
register 1 (FMLCR1).
128 kbytes
When the flash ROM control flag is
set, use the E (erase) bit and the P
(program) bit in flash memory control
register 2 (FMLCR2).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 15 of 1037
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Overview
The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture
that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen
16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space,
and is ideal for realtime control.
2.1.1
Features
The H8S/2000 CPU has the following features.
Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs
Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs
General-register architecture
Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers)
Sixty-five basic instructions
8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
Eight addressing modes
Register direct [Rn]
Register indirect [@ERn]
Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn]
Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
16-Mbyte address space
Program: 16 Mbytes
Data:
16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally)
High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
Maximum clock rate:
10 MHz
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns
8
8-bit register-register multiply:
1200 ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 16 of 1037
16
8-bit register-register divide:
1200 ns
16
16-bit register-register multiply:
2000 ns
32
16-bit register-register divide:
2000 ns
Two CPU operating modes
Normal mode*/Advanced mode
Power-down state
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
CPU clock speed selection
Note: *
Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
2.1.2
Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below.
Register configuration
The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU.
Basic instructions
The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the
H8S/2600 CPU.
Number of execution states
The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions differ as follows.
Number of Execution States
Instruction
Mnemonic
H8S/2600
H8S/2000
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
3
12
MULXU
MULXU.W Rs, Erd
4
20
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
4
13
MULXS
MULXS.W Rs, Erd
5
21
There are also differences in the address space, EXR register functions, power-down state, etc.,
depending on the product.
2.1.3
Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.
More general registers and control registers
Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 17 of 1037
Expanded address space
Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.
Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.
Enhanced addressing mode
The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space.
Enhanced instructions
Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added.
Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
A test and set instruction has been added.
Higher speed
Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
2.1.4
Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.
Additional control register
One 8-bit control register has been added.
Enhanced instructions
Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
A test and set instruction has been added.
Higher speed
Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 18 of 1037
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total
address space (architecturally the maximum total address space is 4 Gbytes, with a maximum of
16 Mbytes for the program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for the data area).
The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller.
CPU operating mode
Normal mode
*
Advanced mode
Maximum 64 kbytes for program
and data areas combined
Maximum 16 Mbytes for program
and data areas combined
Note:
*
Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes
(1) Normal Mode
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
(a) Address Space
A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.
(b) Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any
value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register.
If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-
decrement (@-Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the
value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected.
(c) Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective
addresses (EA) are valid.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 19 of 1037
(d) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table.
One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The configuration of the exception vector table
in normal mode is shown in figure 2.2. For details of the exception vector table, see
section 5, Exception Handling.
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
H'0006
H'0007
H'0008
H'0009
H'000A
H'000B
Reset exception vector
Exception vector 1
Exception vector 2
Exception vector table
(Reserved for system use)
Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR
instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a
memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit
word operand, providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the
top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector
table.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 20 of 1037
(e) Stack Structure
When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC
and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they
are stored as shown in figure 2.3. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto
the stack. For details, see section 5, Exception Handling.
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
PC
(16 bits)
CCR
CCR
*
PC
(16 bits)
SP
SP
Note:
*
Ignored when returning.
Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
(2) Advanced Mode
(a) Address Space
Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a
maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum
of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined).
(b) Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
(c) Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 21 of 1037
(d) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector
table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address
is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see
section 5, Exception Handling.
H'00000000
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'0000000B
H'0000000C
Exception vector table
Reserved
Reset exception vector
(Reserved for system use)
Reserved
Exception vector 1
Reserved
H'00000010
H'00000008
H'00000007
Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR
instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a
memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-
bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32
bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the
area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the
exception vector table.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 22 of 1037
(e) Stack Structure
In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a
subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack
in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. The extended control
register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 5, Exception
Handling.
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
PC
(24 bits)
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
SP
SP
Reserved
Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 23 of 1037
2.3
Address Space
Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear
access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte
(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode.
(b) Advanced mode
H'0000
H'FFFF
H'00000000
H'FFFFFFFF
H'00FFFFFF
(a) Normal mode
*
Data area
Program area
Cannot be used
with this LSI
Note:
*
Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.6 Memory Map
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 24 of 1037
2.4
Register Configuration
2.4.1
Overview
The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers:
general registers and control registers.
T I2 I1 I0
EXR
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PC
23
0
15
0 7
0 7
0
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0H
R1H
R2H
R3H
R4H
R5H
R6H
R7H
R0L
R1L
R2L
R3L
R4L
R5L
R6L
R7L
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
Control Registers (CR)
[Legend]
SP
PC
EXR
T
I2 to I0
CCR
I
UI
ER0
ER1
ER2
ER3
ER4
ER5
ER6
ER7 (SP)
I UI H U N Z V C
CCR
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
: Half-carry flag
: User bit
: Negative flag
: Zero flag
: Overflow flag
: Carry flag
H
U
N
Z
V
C
: Stack pointer
: Program counter
: Extended control register
: Trace bit
: Interrupt mask bits
: Condition-code register
: Interrupt mask bit
: User bit or interrupt mask bit
Note:
*
Does not affect operation in this LSI.
*
Figure 2.7 CPU Registers
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 25 of 1037
2.4.2
General Registers
The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and
can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a
data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers
are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to
ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and
RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen
8-bit registers.
Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be
selected independently.
Address registers
32-bit registers
16-bit registers
8-bit registers
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the
stack.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 26 of 1037
SP (ER7)
Free area
Stack area
Figure 2.9 Stack
2.4.3
Control Registers
The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR),
and 8-bit condition-code register (CCR).
(1) Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The
length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored.
(When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.)
(2) Extended Control Register (EXR)
An 8-bit register. In this LSI, this register does not affect operation.
Bit 7: Trace Bit (T)
This bit is reserved. In this LSI, this bit does not affect operation.
Bits 6 to 3: Reserved
These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0: Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0)
These bits are reserved. In this LSI, these bits do not affect operation.
(3) Condition: Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit
(I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.
Bit 7: Interrupt Mask Bit (I)
Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit
setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exception-handling sequence.
For details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 27 of 1037
Bit 6: User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI)
Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details, see section 6,
Interrupt Controller.
Bit 5: Half-Carry Flag (H)
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is
executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the
H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When
the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4: User Bit (U)
Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions.
Bit 3: Negative Flag (N)
Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data.
Bit 2: Zero Flag (Z)
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Bit 1: Overflow Flag (V)
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 0: Carry Flag (C)
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
(a) Add instructions, to indicate a carry
(b) Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
(c) Shift and rotate instructions, to store the carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit-manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each
instruction on the flag bits, see section 29, Appendix A.1, List of Instructions.
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional
branch (Bcc) instructions.
2.4.4
Initial Register Values
Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the
trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits
and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not
initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed
immediately after a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 28 of 1037
2.5
Data Formats
The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data.
Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte
operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-
bit BCD data.
2.5.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers.
7
0
7
0
MSB
LSB
MSB
LSB
7
0
4 3
Upper digit Lower digit
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
7
0
4 3
Upper digit
Lower digit
7
0
Don't care
6
5 4
3 2
7
1 0
7
0
Don't care
6
5 4
3 2
7
1 0
Don't care
Data Format
Data type
1-bit data
1-bit data
4-bit BCD data
4-bit BCD data
Byte data
Byte data
General Register
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 29 of 1037
15
0
MSB
LSB
15
0
MSB
LSB
31
16
MSB
15
0
LSB
En
Rn
Data Type
Word data
Word data
Longword data
General Register
Rn
En
ERn
Data format
ERn
En
Rn
RnH
RnL
MSB
LSB
: General register ER
: General register E
: General register R
: General register RH
: General register RL
: Most significant bit
: Least significant bit
[Legend]
Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 30 of 1037
2.5.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory.
The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must
begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd
address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the
access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
7
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSB
LSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
Address
Address L
Address L
Address 2M
Address 2N
Address 2N+1
Address 2N+2
Address 2N+3
1-bit data
Byte data
Word data
Longword data
Data Type
Data Format
Address 2M+1
Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be
word size or longword size.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 31 of 1037
2.6
Instruction Set
2.6.1
Overview
The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in
table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Size
Types
MOV
BWL
POP
*
1
, PUSH
*
1
WL
LDM, STM
L
Data transfer
MOVFPE
*
3
, MOVTPE
*
3
B
5
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG
BWL
ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS
B
INC, DEC
BWL
ADDS, SUBS
L
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS
BW
EXTU, EXTS
WL
Arithmetic
TAS
*
4
B
19
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
BWL
4
Shift
SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR,
ROTXL, ROTXR
BWL
8
Bit manipulation
RSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST,
BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR,
BIXOR
B
14
Branch
Bcc
*
2
, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
5
System control
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC,
XORC, NOP
9
Block data transfer
EEPMOV
1
Total: 65 types
Notes: B: byte size; W: word size; L: longword size.
1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-
SP.
POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn,
@-SP.
2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
3. Not available in this LSI.
4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 32 of 1037
2.6.2
Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2000
CPU can use.
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Addressing Modes
Function
Arithmetic operations
System control
Branch
Logic
operation
Instruction
MOV
POP, PUSH
LDM, STM
ADD, CMP
SUB
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
NEG
EXTU, EXTS
TAS
*
2
MOVFPE,
MOVTPE
*
1
MULXU,
DIVXU
MULXS,
DIVXS
AND, OR,
XOR
ANDC,
ORC, XORC
NOT
Bcc, BSR
JMP, JSR
RTS
TRAPA
RTE
SLEEP
LDC
STC
NOP
Shift
Bit manipulation
Block data transfer
Data transfer
BWL
#xx
--
--
BWL
WL
B
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
BWL
B
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
--
--
--
--
--
BWL
Rn
--
--
BWL
BWL
B
L
BWL
B
BWL
WL
--
--
BW
BW
BWL
--
BWL
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
B
--
BWL
B
--
BWL
@ERn
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
B
--
BWL
@(d:16, ERn)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
--
--
BWL
@(d:32, ERn)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
--
--
BWL
@-ERn/@ERn+
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
--
--
B
@aa:8
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
--
BWL
@aa:16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
B
--
--
@aa:24
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
BWL
@aa:32
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
--
--
B
--
--
@(d:8, PC)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
@(d:16, PC)
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
@@aa:8
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
WL
L
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
BW
[Legend]
B:
Byte
W:
Work
L:
Longword
Note:
*
1 Cannot be used in this LSI.
*
2 Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 33 of 1037
2.6.3
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Table 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in
table 2.3 is defined below.
Operation Notation
Rd
General register (destination)
*
Rs
General register (source)
*
Rn
General register
*
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extended control register
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
Disp
Displacement
+
Addition
-
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Logical AND
Logical OR
Logical exclusive OR
Move
NOT (logical complement)
:8/:16/:24/:32
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers
(R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 34 of 1037
Table 2.3
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs)
Rd, Rs
(EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general
register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general
register
MOVFPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI
MOVTPE
B
Cannot be used in this LSI
POP
W/L
@SP+
Rn
Pops a general register from the stack
POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn
POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn
PUSH
W/L
Rn
@-SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack
PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP
PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP
LDM
L
@SP+
Rn (register list)
Pops two or more general registers from the stack
STM
L
Rn (register list)
@-SP
Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack
Note:
*
Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
W:
Word
L:
Longword
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 35 of 1037
Table 2.4
Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
1
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd
Rs
Rd, Rd
#IMM
Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
(Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a
general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction)
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd
Rs
C
Rd, Rd
#IMM
C
Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two
general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general
register
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd
1
Rd, Rd
2
Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte
operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only)
ADDS
SUBS
B
Rd
1
Rd, Rd
2
Rd, Rd
4
Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit
register
DAA
DAS
B/W
Rd decimal adjust
Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general
register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data
MULXU
B/W
Rd
Rs
Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general
registers: either 8 bits
8 bits
16 bits or 16 bits
16 bits
32
bits
MULXS
B/W
Rd
Rs
Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers:
either 8 bits
8 bits
16 bits or 16 bits
16 bits
32 bits
DIVXU
B/W
Rd
Rs
Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers:
either 16 bits
8 bits
8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32
bits
16 bits
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 36 of 1037
Instruction
Size
*
1
Function
DIVXS
B/W
Rd
Rs
Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either
16 bits
8 bits
8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits
16 bits
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder
CMP
B/W/L
Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another
general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits
according to the result
NEG
B/W/L
0 - Rd
Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in
a general register
EXTU
W/L
Rd (zero extension)
Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the
lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding
with zeros on the left
EXTS
W/L
Rd (sign extension)
Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the
lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending
the sign bit
TAS
B
@ERd - 0, 1
(<bit 7> of @ERd)
*
2
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7)
to 1
Note:
*
1 Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
W:
Word
L:
Longword
*
2 Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 37 of 1037
Table 2.5
Logic Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
AND
B/W/L
Rd
Rs
Rd, Rd
#IMM
Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data
OR
B/W/L
Rd
Rs
Rd, Rd
#IMM
Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data
XOR
B/W/L
Rd
Rs
Rd, Rd
#IMM
Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data
NOT
B/W/L
~ Rd
Rd
Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general
register contents
Note:
*
Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
W:
Word
L:
Longword
Table 2.6
Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift)
Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents
A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
Rd (shift)
Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents
A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate)
Rd
Rotates general register contents
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate)
Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible
Note:
*
Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
W:
Word
L:
Longword
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 38 of 1037
Table 2.7
Bit Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
BSET
B
1
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to
1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register
BCLR
B
0
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand
to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register
BNOT
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register
BTST
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand
and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is
specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register
BAND
B
C
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag
BIAND
B
C
[~(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)]
C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BOR
B
C
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag
BIOR
B
C
[~(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)]
C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry
flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 39 of 1037
Instruction
Size
*
Function
BOXR
B
C
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry
flag
BIXOR
B
C
[~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)]
C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in
a general register or memory operand and stores the result in
the carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag
BILD
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand to the carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BST
B
C
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand
BIST
B
~ C
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in
a general register or memory operand
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
Note:
*
Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 40 of 1037
Table 2.8
Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
Bcc
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true
The branching conditions are listed below
JMP
Branches unconditionally to a specified address
BSR
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
JSR
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
RTS
Returns from a subroutine
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA (BT)
Always (True)
Always
BRN (BF)
Never (False)
Never
BHI
HIgh
CVZ = 0
BLS
Low of Same
CVZ = 1
BCC (BHS)
Carry Clear (High or Same)
C = 0
BCS (BLO)
Carry Set (LOw)
C = 1
BNE
Not Equal
Z = 0
BEQ
EQual
Z = 1
BVC
oVerflow Clear
V = 0
BVS
oVerflow Set
V = 1
BPL
PLus
N = 0
BMI
MInus
N = 1
BGE
Greater or Equal
NV = 0
BLT
Less Than
N
V = 1
BGT
Greater Than
Z
(N
V) = 0
BLE
Less or Equal
Z
(N
V) = 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 41 of 1037
Table 2.9
System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
TRAPA
Starts trap-instruction exception handling
RTE
Returns from an exception-handling routine
SLEEP
Causes a transition to a power-down state
LDC
B/W
(EAs)
CCR, (EAs)
EXR
Moves contents of a general register or memory or immediate
data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit
registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and
memory. The upper 8 bits are valid
STC
B/W
CCR
(EAd), EXR
(EAd)
Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or
memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size
transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper
8 bits are valid
ANDC
B
CCR
#IMM
CCR, EXR
#IMM
EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data
ORC
B
CCR
#IMM
CCR, EXR
#IMM
EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data
XORC
B
CCR
#IMM
CCR, EXR
#IMM
EXR
Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data
NOP
PC + 2
PC
Only increments the program counter
Note:
*
Size refers to the operand size.
B:
Byte
W:
Word
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 42 of 1037
Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
*
Function
EEPMOV.B
if R4L
0 then
Repeat @ER5+
@er6+
R4L
-
1
R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W
if R4
0 then
Repeat @ER5+
@er6+
R4
-
1
R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general
registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6
R4L or R4: size of block (bytes)
ER5: starting source address
ER6: starting destination address
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer
is completed
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 43 of 1037
2.6.4
Basic Instruction Formats
The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation
field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a
condition field (cc).
Figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats.
op
op
r n
r m
NOP, RTS, etc.
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
MOV.B@(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
(1) Operation field only
(2) Operation field and register fields
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
r n
r m
op
EA (disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA (disp)
BRA d:16, etc.
Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples)
(1) Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried
out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction.
Some instructions have two operation fields.
(2) Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits
or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
(3) Effective Address Extension
Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement.
(4) Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 44 of 1037
2.6.5
Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, carry out bit
manipulation, then write back the byte of data. Caution is therefore required when using these
instructions on a register containing write-only bits, or a port.
The BCLR instruction can be used to clear internal I/O register flags to 0. In this case, the
relevant flag need not be read beforehand if it is clear that it has been set to 1 in an interrupt
handling routine, etc.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 45 of 1037
2.7
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.7.1
Addressing Mode
The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset
of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and
immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-
counter relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register
indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR,
BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in
the operand.
Table 2.11 Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@-ERn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8/#@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
(1) Register DirectRn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register
containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0
to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-
bit registers.
(2) Register Indirect@Ern
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains
the address of the operand in memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the
lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register
(ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a
memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 46 of 1037
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement@ERn+ or @-ERn
(a) Register indirect with post-increment@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which
contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is
added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The
value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word
or longword access, the register value should be even.
(b) Register indirect with pre-decrement@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register
field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand.
The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access,
2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register
value should be even.
(5) Absolute Address@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute
address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits
long (@aa:32).
To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1
(H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit
absolute address can access the entire address space.
A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The
upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.
Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address
Normal Mode
Advanced Mode
8 bits
(@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits
(@aa:16)
H'000000 to H007FFF, H'FF8000 to
H'FFFFFF
Data address
32 bits
(@aa:32)
Program instruction
address
24 bits
(@aa:24)
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 47 of 1037
(6) Immediate#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as
an operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a
bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code,
specifying a vector address.
(7) Program-Counter Relative@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement
contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate
a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are
all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address
of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes
(-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch
instruction. The resulting value should be an even number.
(8) Memory Indirect@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-
bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch
address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range
is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode).
In normal mode the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits
long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which
is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further
details, see section 5, Exception Handling.
(a) Normal Mode
(b) Advanced Mode
Branch address
Specified by
@aa:8
Specified by
@aa:8
Reserved
Branch address
Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 48 of 1037
If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address,
the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or an instruction code to
be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see
section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.)
2.7.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode.
In normal mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit
address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 49 of 1037
Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
1
Register direct (Rn)
op
rm rn
Operand is general register
contents
2
Register indirect (@ERn)
General register contents
31
0
31
0
r
op
24 23
Don't
care
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
General register contents
Sign extension
disp
31
0
31
0
31
0
op
r
disp
Don't
care
24 23
4
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement
Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
General register contents
1, 2, or
4
31
0
31
0
r
op
Don't
care
24 23
Register indirect with pre-decrement @ERn
General register contents
1, 2, or
4
Byte
Word
Longword
1
2
4
Operand
Size
Value
Added
31
0
31
0
op
r
Don't
care
24 23
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 50 of 1037
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
5
Absolute address
@aa:8
@aa:16
@aa:32
31
0
8 7
@aa:24
31
0
16 15
31
0
31
0
op
abs
op
abs
abs
op
op
abs
H'FFFF
24 23
Don't
care
Don't
care
Don't
care
Don't
care
24 23
24 23
24 23
Sign
exten-
sion
6
Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op
IMM
Operand is immediate data
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC)
0
0
23
23
disp
31
0
24 23
op
disp
PC contents
Don't
care
Sign
exten-
sion
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 51 of 1037
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
8
Memory indirect @@aa:8
Normal mode
*
0
0
31
8 7
0
15
H'000000
31
0
16 15
op
abs
abs
Memory
contents
H'00
24 23
Don't
care
Advanced mode
31
0
31
8 7
0
abs
H'000000
31
0
24 23
op
abs
Memory contents
Don't
care
Note:
*
Not available in this LSI.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 52 of 1037
2.8
Processing States
2.8.1
Overview
The CPU has four main processing states:
the reset state, exception-handling state, program
execution state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states.
Figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions.
Reset state
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped.
Exception-handling
state
A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response
to a reset, interrupt or trap instruction.
Program execution
state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Power-down state
CPU operation is stopped
to conserve power.
*
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Processing
states
Note:
*
The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, modue stop mode, sub-active mode,
sub-sleep mode and watch mode.
Figure 2.14 Processing States
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 53 of 1037
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Power-down state
Program execution state
Interrupt request
External interrupt request
RES = High
Request for exception handling
SLEEP instruction
with LSON=0,
SSBY=0
SLEEP instruction
with LSON=0,
SSBY=0
Notes:
End of exception handling
*
1
*
2
1.
2.
From any state, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can
also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows.
The power-down state also includes a watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For
details, see section 4, Power-Down State.
Figure 2.15 State Transitions
2.8.2
Reset State
When the
#$ input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state.
All interrupts are disabled in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the
#$
signal changes from low to high.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, see section 17,
Watchdog Timer.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 54 of 1037
2.8.3
Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address
(vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address.
(1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.14
indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception
handling is always accepted in the program execution state.
Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in
SYSCR.
Table 2.14 Exception Handling Types and Priority
Priority
Type of Exception
Detection Timing
Start of Exception Handling
Reset
Synchronized with
clock
Exception handling starts
immediately after a low-to-high
transition at the
#$
pin, or when the
watchdog timer overflows
Interrupt
End of instruction
execution or end of
exception-handling
sequence
*
1
When an interrupt is requested,
exception handling starts at the end
of the current instruction or current
exception-handling sequence
High
Low
Trap instruction
When TRAPA
instruction is executed
Exception handling starts when a trap
(TRAPA) instruction is executed
*
2
Notes: 1. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC
instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling.
2. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state.
(2) Reset Exception Handling
After the
#$ pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when #$ goes high
again, reset exception handling starts. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches
a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from
that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and
after it ends.
(3) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling
When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack
pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack.
Next, the CPU alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the
CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution
starts from that start address.
Figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 55 of 1037
PC
(16 bits)
SP
CCR
CCR
*
1
PC
(24 bits)
SP
CCR
Normal Mode
Advanced Mode
*
2
Notes: 1. Ignored when returning.
2. Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples)
2.8.4
Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 56 of 1037
2.8.5
Power-Down State
The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in
which the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep
mode, standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also three other power-down
modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In medium-speed mode,
the CPU operates on a medium-speed clock. Module stop mode permits halting of the operation
of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode
are power-down modes that use subclock input. For details, see section 4, Power-Down State.
(1) Sleep Mode
A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software
standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) and the LSON bit in the low-
power control register (LPWRCR) are both cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop
immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are
retained.
(2) Standby Mode
A transition to standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY
bit in SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in the TMA
(timer A) are both cleared to 0. In standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU
operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and
on-chip RAM are retained.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 57 of 1037
2.9
Basic Timing
2.9.1
Overview
The CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol
. The period from one rising edge
of
to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one or two
states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory and on-chip supporting modules.
2.9.2
On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word transfer instruction. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
Bus cycle
T1
Address
Read data
Write data
Read access
Write access
Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 58 of 1037
2.9.3
On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16
bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.18 shows
the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules.
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
Bus cycle
T1
Address
Read access
Write access
Read data
Write data
T2
Figure 2.18 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle
2.10
Usage Note
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS
instruction is not generated by the Hitachi H8S or H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. If the TAS
instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0, ER1, ER4,
or ER5 is used.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 59 of 1037
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1
Overview
3.1.1
Operating Mode Selection
This LSI has one operating mode (mode 1). This mode is selected depending on settings of the
mode pin (MD0).
Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes.
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Selection
MCU Operating Mode
MD0
CPU Operating Mode
Description
0
0
1
1
Advanced
Single-chip mode
The CPU's architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but this LSI actually accesses a
maximum of 16 Mbytes.
Mode 1 operation starts in single-chip mode after reset release.
This LSI can only be used in mode 1. This means that the mode pins must be set at mode 1. Do
not changes the inputs at the mode pins during operation.
3.1.2
Register Configuration
This LSI has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pin (MD0)
and a system control register (SYSCR) and that controls the operation of this LSI. Table 3.2
summarizes these registers.
Table 3.2
MCU Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
Mode control register
MDCR
R/W
Undetermined
H'FFE9
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'09
H'FFE8
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 60 of 1037
3.2
Register Descriptions
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
0
--
*
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
--
--
--
--
--
0
6
--
0
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R
MDS0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: *
Determined by MD0 pin
MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register monitors the current operating mode of this LSI.
Bit 7 to 1: Reserved.
These bits cannot be modified and are always set at 0.
Bit 0: Mode Select 0 (MDS0)
This bit indicates the value which reflects the input levels at mode pin (MD0) (the current
operating mode). Bit MDS0 corresponds to MD0 pin. It is read-only bit and cannot be written
to. The mode pin (MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read.
3.2.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)
0
--
1
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
--
0
7
--
--
--
--
R
R
INTM1
INTM0
XRST
NMIEG1
NMIEG0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 61 of 1037
Bits 5 and 4: Interrupt control modes 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0)
These bits are for selecting the interrupt control mode of the interrupt controller. For details of
the interrupt control modes, see section 6.4, Interrupt Operation.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt
Control Mode
Description
0
0
Interrupt is controlled by bit I
(Initial value)
0
1
1
Interrupt is controlled by bits I and UI, and ICR
0
2
Cannot be used in this LSI
1
1
3
Cannot be used in this LSI
Bit 3: External Reset (XRST)
Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by
watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to
1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow.
Bit 3
XRST
Description
0
A reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
1
A reset is generated by an external reset
(Initial value)
Bits 2 and 1: NMI edge select 1 and 0 (NMIG1, 0)
Select the input edge for NMI interrupt.
Bit 2
Bit 1
NIMIEG1
NIMIEG0
Description
0
An interrupt request occurs at falling edge of NMI input
(Initial value)
0
1
An interrupt request occurs at rising edge of NMI input
1
*
An interrupt request occurs at rising or falling edge of NMI input
Note:
*
Don't care
Bit 0: Reserved.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 62 of 1037
3.3
Operating Mode Descriptions
3.3.1
Mode 1
The CPU can access a 16 Mbyte address space in advanced mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 63 of 1037
3.4
Address Map
H8S/2191
H8S/2192
Memory indirect
branch address
Absolute address, 16 bits
3 kbytes
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(80 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(3kbytes)
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(96 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(3kbytes)
H'000000
H'000000
H'017FFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
H'013FFF
H'FF8000
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFF00
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
Absolut e address,
8 bits
Absolute address, 16 bits
Figure 3.1 Address Map (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 64 of 1037
H8S/2193
H8S/2194
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(112 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(3kbytes)
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(128 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(3kbytes)
H'000000
H'000000
H'01FFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'01BFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
Figure 3.2 Address Map (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 65 of 1037
H8S/2191A
H8S/2194B
Memory indirect
branch address
Absolute address, 16 bits
6 kbytes
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(160 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(6 kbytes)
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(192 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(6 kbytes)
H'000000
H'000000
H'02FFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFE7B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
H'027FFF
H'FF8000
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFE7B0
H'FFFF00
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
Absolute address,
8 bits
Absolute address, 16 bits
Figure 3.3 Address Map (3)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 66 of 1037
H8S/2194C
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(256 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(6 kbytes)
H'000000
H'03FFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFE7B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
Figure 3.4 Address Map (4)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 67 of 1037
Section 4 Power-Down State
4.1
Overview
In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has a power-down state in which
operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power
operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and
so on.
This LSI operating modes are as follows:
1. High-speed mode
2. Medium-speed mode
3. Subactive mode
4. Sleep mode
5. Subsleep mode
6. Watch mode
7. Module stop mode
8. Standby mode
Of these, 2 to 8 are power-down modes. Certain combinations of these modes can be set.
After a reset, the MCU is in high-speed mode.
Table 4.1 shows the internal chip states in each mode, and table 4.2 shows the conditions for
transition to the various modes. Figure 4.1 shows a mode transition diagram.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 68 of 1037
Table 4.1
Internal Chip States in Each Mode
Function
High-
Speed
Medium-
Speed
Sleep
Module
Stop
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
Standby
System clock
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Subclock pulse
generator
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
Instructions
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
CPU
operation
Registers
Functioning Medium-
speed
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Subclock
operation
Retained
Retained
NIMI
IRQ0
IRQ1
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
External
interrupts
IRQ5
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
Halted
Halted
Functioning Halted
Timer A
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Halted
(retained)
Timer B
Timer J
Timer L
Timer R
Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Timer X1
Functioning Functioning Functioning
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Watchdog
timer
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
PSU
Functioning Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Halted
IIC
SCI1
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
SCI2
14-bit PWM
8-bit PWM
Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
A/D
Functioning Functioning Functioning
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
I/O
Functioning Functioning Retained
Functioning Halted
Functioning Retained
Halted
12-bit PWM
On-chip
supporting
module
operation
Servo
Functioning Functioning Halted
(reset)
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Notes: 1. "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state
is "operation suspended."
2. "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.
3. In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted
(reset or retained).
4. In the power-down mode, the analog section of the servo circuits are not turned off,
therefore Vcc (Servo) current does not go low. When power-down is needed,
externally shut down the analog system power.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 69 of 1037
Program-halted state
Conditions for mode transition (1)
Conditions for mode transition (2)
Interruption factor
Sleep
(high-speed)
mode
Sleep
(medium-speed)
mode
Subsleep
mode
Program execution state
Reset state
Flag
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
LSON SSBY TMA3 DTON
a
0
1
0
*
b
*
1
1
0
c
0
1
1
1
d
1
1
1
1
e
0
0
*
*
f
1
0
1
*
g
SCK1 to 0 = 0
h
SCK1 to 0
0 (either 1 bit = 0)
Power-down mode
Active
(high-speed)
mode
Active
(medium-speed)
mode
Subactive
mode
Program-halted state
Watch
mode
Standby
mode
NMI, IRQ0
to
1
NMI, IRQ0
to
1, Timer A interruption
All interruption (excluding servo system)
NMI, IRQ0
to
5, Timer A interruption
1
2
3
4
Interrupt
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
e
Note: When a transition is made between
modes by means of an interrupt,
transition cannot be made on interrupt
source generation alone. Ensure that
interrupt handling is performed after
accepting the interrupt request
SLEEP
instruction a
1
Interrupt
1
2
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
a
b
g
h
d
SLEEP
instruction
c
e
3
Interrupt 2
Interrupt 3
Interrupt 2
Interrupt 4
c
SLEEP
instruction
d
b
b
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction 1
Note:
*
Don't care
Figure 4.1 Mode Transitions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 70 of 1037
Table 4.2
Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions
Control Bit States at Time of
Transition
State before
Transition
SSBY
TMA3
LSON
DTON
State after Transition
by SLEEP Instruction
State after Return
by Interrupt
0
*
0
*
Sleep
High-speed
/medium-speed
*
1
0
*
1
*
1
0
0
*
Standby
High-speed
/medium-speed
*
1
1
0
1
*
1
1
0
0
Watch
High-speed
/medium-speed
*
1
1
1
1
0
Watch
Subactive
1
1
0
1
High-speed
/medium-
speed
1
1
1
1
Subactive
0
0
*
*
0
1
0
*
0
1
1
*
Subsleep
Subactive
1
0
*
*
1
1
0
0
Watch
High-speed
/medium-speed
*
2
1
1
1
0
Watch
Subactive
1
1
0
1
High-speed
/medium-speed
*
2
Subactive
1
1
1
1
Notes:
*
Don't care
: Do not set.
1. Returns to the state before transition.
2. Mode varies depending on the state of SCK1 to SCK0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 71 of 1037
4.1.1
Register Configuration
The power-down state is controlled by the SBYCR, LPWRCR, TMA (Timer A), and MSTPCR
registers. Table 4.3 summarizes these registers.
Table 4.3
Power-Down State Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
Standby control register
SBYCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEA
Low-power control register
LPWRCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEB
MSTPCRH
R/W
H'FF
H'FFEC
Module stop control register
MSTPCRL
R/W
H'FF
H'FFED
Timer mode register
TMA
R/W
H'30
H'FFBA
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 72 of 1037
4.2
Register Descriptions
4.2.1
Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
--
--
--
--
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
STS1
R/W
STS2
0
R/W
SSBY
STS0
SCK1
SCK0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: Software Standby (SSBY)
Determines the operating mode, in combination with other control bits, when a power-down
mode transition is made by executing a SLEEP instruction. The SSBY setting is not changed by
a mode transition due to an interrupt, etc.
Bit 7
SSBY
Description
0
Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode
or medium-speed mode
Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive
mode
(Initial value)
1
Transition to standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after execution of
SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode
Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of SLEEP
instruction in subactive mode
Bits 6 to 4: Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0)
These bits select the time the MCU waits for the clock to stabilize when standby mode, watch
mode, or subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-
speed mode by means of a specific interrupt or instruction. With crystal oscillation, see table
4.5 and make a selection according to the operating frequency so that the standby time is at least
10 ms (the oscillation settling time). With an external clock, any selection can be made.
(With FLASH ROM version, do not set the standby time to 16 states.)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 73 of 1037
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
STS2
STS1
STS0
Description
0
0
0
Standby time = 8192 states
0
0
1
Standby time = 16384 states
0
1
0
Standby time = 32768 states
0
1
1
Standby time = 65536 states
1
0
0
Standby time = 131072 states
1
0
1
Standby time = 262144 states
1
1
*
Standby time = 16 states
*
1
Notes:
*
Don't care
1. With FLASH ROM version, do not set the standby time to 16 states.
The standby time is 32 states when transited to medium-speed mode
/32 (SCK1=1,
SCK0=0).
Bit 3, 2: Reserved.
These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bits 1, 0: System Clock Select 1, 0 (SCK1, SCK0)
These bits select the CPU clock for the bus master in high-speed mode and medium-speed mode.
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCK1
SCK0
Description
0
0
Bus master is in high-speed mode (Initial value)
0
1
Medium-speed clock is
/16
1
0
Medium-speed clock is
/32
1
1
Medium-speed clock is
/64
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 74 of 1037
4.2.2
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
NESEL
R/W
LSON
0
R/W
DTON
SA1
SA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: Direct-Transfer On Flag (DTON)
Specifies whether a direct transition is made between high-speed mode, medium-speed mode,
and subactive mode when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction.
The operating mode to which the transition is made after SLEEP instruction execution is
determined by a combination of other control bits.
Bit 7
DTON
Description
0
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode or watch mode
(Initial value)
1
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, transition is made directly to subactive mode, or a transition is made to
sleep mode or standby mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
directly to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode
Bit 6: Low-Speed On Flag (LSON)
Determines the operating mode in combination with other control bits when making a power-
down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. Also controls whether a transition is made to
high-speed mode or to subactive mode when watch mode is cleared.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 75 of 1037
Bit 6
LSON
Description
0
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to watch mode, or directly to high-speed mode
After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode
(Initial value)
1
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made
to watch mode, subactive mode, sleep mode or standby mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode or watch mode
After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode
Bit 5: Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL)
Selects the frequency at which the subclock (
w) generated by the subclock pulse generator is
sampled with the clock (
) generated by the system clock oscillator. When
= 5 MHz or higher,
clear this bit to 0.
Bit 5
NESEL
Description
0
Sampling at
divided by 16
1
Sampling at
divided by 4
Bits 4 to 2: Reserved.
These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 1, 0: Subactive mode clock select 1, 0 (SA1, SA0)
These bits select the CPU operating clock in the subactive mode. These bits cannot be modified
in the subactive mode.
Bit 1
Bit 0
SA1
SA0
Description
0
0
Operating clock of CPU is
w/8
(Initial value)
0
1
Operating clock of CPU is
w/4
1
*
Operating clock of CPU is
w/2
Note:
*
Don't care
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 76 of 1037
4.2.3
Timer Register A (TMA)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
1
5
--
--
1
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMA3
R/W
TMA2
R/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)
*
TMAOV
TMA1
TMA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
The timer register A (TMA) controls timer A interrupts and selects input clock.
Only Bit 3 is explained here. For details of other bits, see section 12.2.1, Timer Mode Register
A.
TMA is a readable/writable register which is initialized to H'30 by a reset.
Bit 3: Clock source, prescaler select (TMA3)
Selects Timer A clock source between PSS and PSW.
Also controls transition operation to the power-down mode. The operation mode to which the
MCU is transited after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by the combination with other
control bits than this bit.
For details, see the description of Clock Select 2 to 0 in section 12.2.1, Timer Mode Register A.
Bit 3
TMA3
Description
0
Timer A counts
-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode or software standby mode
(Initial value)
1
Timer A counts
w-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, watch mode, or subactive mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode, watch mode, or high-speed mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 77 of 1037
4.2.4
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode
control.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
MSTRCRH and MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0: Module Stop (MSTP 15 to MSTP 0)
These bits specify module stop mode. See table 4.4 for the method of selecting on-chip
supporting modules.
MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL
Bits 7 to 0
MSTP 15 to MSTP 0
Description
0
Module stop mode is cleared
1
Module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 78 of 1037
4.3
Medium-Speed Mode
When the SCK1 and SCK0 bits in SBYCR are set to 1 in high-speed mode, the operating mode
changes to medium-speed mode at the end of the bus cycle. In medium-speed mode, the CPU
operates on the operating clock (
16,
32 or
64) specified by the SCK1 and SCK0 bits. The
on-chip supporting modules other than the CPU always operate on the high-speed clock (
).
In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect
to the bus master operating clock. For example, if
16 is selected as the operating clock, on-
chip memory is accessed in 16 states, and internal I/O registers in 32 states.
Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing the both bits SCK1 and SCK0 to 0. A transition is
made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in
LPWRCR are cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by
an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, and the LSON bit
in LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are both cleared to 0, a transition is made to
software standby mode. When standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed
mode is restored.
When the
5(6 pin is driven low, a transition is made to the reset state, and medium-speed mode
is cleared. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.
Figure 4.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode
Internal ,
supporting module clock
CPU clock
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
SBYCR
SBYCR
Figure 4.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 79 of 1037
4.4
Sleep Mode
4.4.1
Sleep Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in
LPWRCR are both cleared to 0, the CPU enters sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation
stops but the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules
(excluding the servo circuit and 12-bit PWM) do not stop.
4.4.2
Clearing Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or with the
5(6 pin.
(1) Clearing with an Interrupt
When an interrupt request signal is input, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception
handling is started. Sleep mode will not be cleared if interrupts are disabled, or if interrupts
other than NMI have been masked by the CPU.
(2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin
When the
5(6 pin is driven low, the reset state is entered. When the 5(6 pin is driven high
after the prescribed reset input period, the CPU begins reset exception handling.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 80 of 1037
4.5
Module Stop Mode
4.5.1
Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of
the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating
independently.
Table 4.4 shows MSTP bits and the on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module
starts operating again at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of
modules other than the SCI1, A/D converter, Timer X1, and Servo circuit, are retained.
After reset release, all modules are in module stop mode.
When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is
disabled.
Table 4.4
MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules
Register
Bit
Module
MSTP15
Timer A
MSTP14
Timer B
MSTP13
Timer J
MSTP12
Timer L
MSTP11
Timer R
MSTP10
Timer X1
MSTP9
MSTPCRH
MSTP8
Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1)
MSTP7
Serial communication interface 2 (SCI2)
MSTP6
I
2
C bus interface (IIC)
MSTP5
14-bit PWM
MSTP4
8-bit PWM
MSTP3
MSTP2
A/D converter
MSTP1
Servo circuit, 12-bit PWM
MSTPCRL
MSTP0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 81 of 1037
4.6
Standby Mode
4.6.1
Standby Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in
LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is cleared to 0, standby mode is
entered. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator (except for subclock
oscillator) all stop. However, contents of the CPU's internal registers and data in the built-in
RAM as well as functions of the SCII, timer X1 and built-in peripheral circuits (except the servo
circuit) are maintained in the current state. The I/O port, at this time, is caused to the high
impedance state.
In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced.
4.6.2
Clearing Standby Mode
Standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pin
,54 to ,54, or by means of
the
5(6 pin.
(1) Clearing with an Interrupt
When an NMI,
,54 to ,54 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and
after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clocks are supplied to
the entire chip, standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started.
Standby mode cannot be cleared with an
,54 to ,54 interrupt if the corresponding enable
bit has been cleared to 0 or has been masked by the CPU.
(2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin
When the
5(6 pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock
oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the
5(6 pin must be held
low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the
5(6 pin goes high, the CPU begins reset
exception handling.
4.6.3
Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.
(1) Using a Crystal Oscillator
Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 10 ms (the oscillation settling time).
Table 4.5 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits
STS2 to STS0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 82 of 1037
Table 4.5
Oscillation Settling Time Settings
STS2
STS1
STS0
Standby Time
10 MHz
8 MHz
Unit
0
8192 states
0.8
1.0
0
1
16384 states
1.6
2.0
0
32768 states
3.3
4.1
0
1
1
65536 states
6.6
8.2
0
131072 states
13.1
16.4
0
1
262144 states
26.2
32.8
ms
1
1
*
16 states
*
1
1.6
2.0
s
: Recommended time setting
Note:
*
Don't care
(2) Using an External Clock
Any value can be set.
Note: 1. With Flash memory version, do not set the standby time to 16 states. The standby
time is 32 states when transited to medium-speed mode
/32 (SCK1 = 1, SCK0 = 0).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 83 of 1037
4.7
Watch Mode
4.7.1
Watch Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode, medium-speed mode or subactive mode
when the SSBY in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3
bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU makes a transition to watch mode.
In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules except Timer A stop. As long as the
prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of some of the CPU's internal registers and on-chip
RAM are retained, and I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state.
4.7.2
Clearing Watch Mode
Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, NMI pin, or pin
,54 to ,54), or by
means of the
5(6 pin.
(1) Clearing with an Interrupt
When an interrupt request signal is input, watch mode is cleared and a transition is made to
high-speed mode or medium-speed mode if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, or to
subactive mode if the LSON bit is set to 1. When making a transition to medium-speed
mode, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are
supplied to the entire chip, and interrupt exception handling is started.
Watch mode cannot be cleared with an
,54 to ,54 interrupt if the corresponding enable
bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the
relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU.
See section 4.6.3, Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode, for the
oscillation settling time setting when making a transition from watch mode to high-speed
mode.
(2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin
See (2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 84 of 1037
4.8
Subsleep Mode
4.8.1
Subsleep Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is cleared to 0,
the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU
makes a transition to subsleep mode.
In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules other than Timer A stop. As long as
the prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of the CPU, some of its on-chip registers and on-
chip RAM are retained, and I/O ports retain their states prior to the transition.
4.8.2
Clearing Subsleep Mode
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, NMI pin, or pin
,54 to ,54), or
by means of the
5(6 pin.
(1) Clearing with an Interrupt
When an interrupt request signal is input, subsleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception
handling is started. Subsleep mode cannot be cleared with an
,54 to ,54 interrupt if the
corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module
interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable
register or masked by the CPU.
(2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin
See (2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 85 of 1037
4.9
Subactive Mode
4.9.1
Subactive Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode when the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the
DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are all set to 1, the CPU makes a
transition to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in watch mode, if the LSON bit in
LPWRCR is set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in
subsleep mode, a transition is made to subactive mode.
In subactive mode, the CPU performs sequential program execution at low speed on the
subclock. In this mode, all on-chip supporting modules other than Timer A stop.
4.9.2
Clearing Subactive Mode
Subsleep mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction, or by means of the
5(6 pin.
(1) Clearing with a SLEEP Instruction
When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON
bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, subactive
mode is cleared and a transition is made to watch mode. When a SLEEP instruction is
executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to
1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON
bit is set to 1 and the LSON bit is cleared to 0 in LPWRCR, and the PSS bit in TCSR
(WDT1) is set to 1, a transition is made directly to high-speed or medium-speed mode.
Fort details of direct transition, see section 4.10, Direct Transition.
(2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin
See (2) Clearing with the
5(6 Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby Mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 86 of 1037
4.10
Direct Transition
4.10.1
Overview of Direct Transition
There are three operating modes in which the CPU executes programs:
high-speed
mode, medium-speed mode, and subactive mode. A transition between high-speed mode and
subactive mode without halting the program* is called a direct transition. A direct transition can
be carried out by setting the DTON bit in LPWRCR to 1 and executing a SLEEP instruction.
After the transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling is started.
(1) Direct Transition from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the
LSON bit and DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are all set to 1,
a transition is made to subactive mode.
(2) Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode/Medium-Speed Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to
1, the LSON bit is cleared to 0 and the DTON bit is set to 1 in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit
in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in
SBYCR, a transition is made to directly to high-speed mode.
Note: *
At the time of transition from subactive mode to high- or medium-speed mode, an
oscillation stabilization wait time is generated.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 87 of 1037
Section 5 Exception Handling
5.1
Overview
5.1.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 5.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or
interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 5.1. If two or more exceptions
occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction
exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state.
Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on
the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits in SYSCR.
Table 5.1
Exception Types and Priority
Priority
Exception
Type
Start of Exception Handling
Reset
Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the
#$
pin, or
when the watchdog timer overflows
Trace
*
1
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1
Interrupt
Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued
*
2
Direct transition
Started by a direct transition resulting from execution of a SLEEP
instruction
High
Low
Trap instruction
(TRAPA)
*
3
Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA)
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control modes 2 and 3. (They cannot be used in
this LSI.) Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE
instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in the program
execution state.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 88 of 1037
5.1.2
Exception Handling Operation
Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as
follows:
[1] The program counter (PC) and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack.
[2] The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0.
[3] A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution
starts from that address.
For a reset exception, steps [2] and [3] above are carried out.
5.1.3
Exception Sources and Vector Table
The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 5.1. Different vector addresses are
assigned to different exception sources.
Table 5.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses.
Exception sources
Reset
Interrupts
Trap instruction
Trace (cannot be used in this LSI)
Direct transition
External interrupts NMI, IRQ5 to IRQ0
Internal interrupts Interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules
...
...
Figure 5.1 Exception Sources
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 89 of 1037
Table 5.2
Exception Vector Table
Exception Source
Vector Number
Vector Address
*
1
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0003
1
H'0004 to H'0007
2
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'000C to H'000F
4
H'0010 to H'0013
Reserved for system use
5
H'0014 to H'0017
Direct transition
6
H'0018 to H001B
External interrupt
NMI
7
H'001C to H'001F
8
H'0020 to H'0023
9
H'0024 to H'0027
10
H'0028 to H'002B
Trap instruction (4 sources)
11
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0030 to H'0033
13
H'0034 to H'0037
14
H'0038 to H'003B
Reserved for system use
15
H'003C to H'003F
#0
16
H'0040 to H'0043
#1
17
H'0044 to H'0047
Address trap
#2
18
H'0048 to H'004B
Internal interrupt (IC)
19
H'004C to H'004F
Internal interrupt (HSW1)
20
H'0050 to H'0053
IRQ0
21
H'0054 to H'0057
IRQ1
22
H'0058 to H'005B
IRQ2
23
H'005C to H'005F
IRQ3
24
H'0060 to H'0063
IRQ4
25
H'0064 to H'0067
External interrupt
IRQ5
26
H'0068 to H'006B
Reserved
27
33
H'006C to H'006F
H'0084 to H'0087
Internal interrupt
*
2
30
67
H'0088 to H'008B
H'010C to H'010F
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details on internal interrupt vectors, see section 6.3.3, Interrupt Exception Vector
Table.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 90 of 1037
5.2
Reset
5.2.1
Overview
A reset has the highest exception priority.
When the
#$ pin goes low, all processing halts and the MCU enters the reset state. A reset
initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules.
Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set.
Reset exception handling begins when the
#$ pin changes from low to high.
The MCUs can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 17,
Watchdog Timer.
5.2.2
Reset Sequence
The MCU enters the reset state when the
#$ pin goes low.
To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the
#$ pin low during the oscillation stabilizing time of
the clock oscillator when powering on. To reset the chip during operation, hold the
#$ pin low
for at least 20 states. For pin states in a reset, see Appendix D.1, Pin Circuit Diagrams.
When the
#$ pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset
exception handling as follows:
[1] The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR.
[2] The reset exception vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution
starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figures 5.2 shows examples of the reset sequence.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 91 of 1037
RES
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
Vector
fetch
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
: Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000 or H'000000)
: Start address (contents of reset exception vector address)
: Start address ((3) = (2))
: First program instruction
(1)
(3)
High level
Internal
processing
Fetch of first program
instruction
(2)
(4)
Figure 5.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 1)
5.2.3
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt
requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a
program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction
initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 92 of 1037
5.3
Interrupts
Interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (NMI and IRQ5 to
IRQ0) and internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 5.3 shows the interrupt
sources and the number of interrupts of each type.
The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT),
prescaler unit (PSU), Timers A, B, J, L, R and X1 (TMR), serial communication interface (SCI),
A/D converter (ADC), I
2
C bus interface (IIC), servo circuits, synchronized detection, address
trap, etc. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address.
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The
interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to
either three priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control.
For details on interrupts, see section 6, Interrupt Controller.
WDT
*
(1)
PSU (1)
TMR (15)
SCI (6)
ADC (1)
IIC (1)
Servo circuits (9)
Synchronized detection (1)
Address trap (3)
Interrupts
Internal
interrupts
External
interrupts
Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources.
When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt
request at each counter overflow.
*
NMI (1)
IRQ5 to IRQ0 (6)
Figure 5.3 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 93 of 1037
5.4
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap
instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a
vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.
Table 5.3 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception
handling.
Table 5.3
Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
CCR
EXR
*
Interrupt
Control Mode
I
UI
I2 to I0
T
0
1
1
1
1
Legend:
1:
Set to 1
0:
Cleared to 0
:
Retains value prior to execution.
*
:
Does not affect operation in this LSI.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 94 of 1037
5.5
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figure 5.4 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt
exception handling.
CCR
CCR
*
PC
(16 bits)
SP
Note:
*
Ignored on return.
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
Figure 5.4 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode)*
Note: *
Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
SP
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
Figure 5.4 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 95 of 1037
5.6
Notes on Use of the Stack
When accessing word data or longword data, this chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0.
The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer
instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the
following instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W
Rn
(or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L
ERn
(or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W Rn
(or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L ERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 5.5 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
SP
[Legend]
: Condition-code register
: Program counter
: General register R1L
: Stack pointer
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFF
R1L
PC
SP
CCR
PC
SP
CCR
PC
R1L
SP
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, is advanced mode.
TRAPA instruction executed
MOV.B R1L, @-ER7
SP set to H'FFFEFF
Data saved above SP
Contents of CCR lost
Figure 5.5 Operation when SP Value is Odd
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 96 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 97 of 1037
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
6.1
Overview
6.1.1
Features
This LSI controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the
following features:
(1) Two Interrupt Control Modes
Either of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits
in the system control register (SYSCR).
(2) Priorities Settable with ICR
An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three
priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI.
(3) Independent Vector Addresses
All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary
for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
(4) Seven External Interrupt Pins
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Falling edge, rising
edge, or both edge detection can be selected for the NMI interrupt.
Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection can be selected for interrupt IRQ0.
Falling edge or rising edge can be individually selected for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 98 of 1037
6.1.2
Block Diagram
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 6.1.
NM input
IRQ input
Internal
interrupt
requests
[Legend]
IEGR
IENR
IRQR
ICR
SYSCR
: IRQ edge select register
: IRQ enable register
: IRQ status register
: Interrupt control register
: System control register
NMI input unit
Interrupt
request
Vector
number
I, UI
IRQ input
unit IRQR
IEGR
IENR
ICR
CPU
Interrupt controller
SYSCR
INTM1, INTM0
NMIEG1, NMIEG0
CCR
Priority
determina-
tion
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 99 of 1037
6.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.
Table 6.1
Interrupt Controller Pins
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Nonmaskable
interrupt
10,
Input
Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising, falling, or
both edges can be selected
External interrupt
request
,54
Input
Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both
edges can be selected
External interrupt
requests 1 to 5
,54
to
,54
Input
Maskable external interrupts: rising, or falling
edges can be selected
6.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller.
Table 6.2
Interrupt Controller Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
1
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFE8
IRQ edge select register
IEGR
R/W
H'00
H'FFF0
IRQ enable register
IENR
R/W
H'00
H'FFF1
IRQ status register
IRQR
R/ (W)
*
2
H'00
H'FFF2
Interrupt control register A
ICRA
R/W
H'00
H'FFF3
Interrupt control register B
ICRB
R/W
H'00
H'FFF4
Interrupt control register C
ICRC
R/W
H'00
H'FFF5
Interrupt control register D
ICRD
R/W
H'00
H'FFF6
Port mode register 1
PMR1
R/W
H'00
H'FFCE
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 100 of 1037
6.2
Register Descriptions
6.2.1
System Control Register (SYSCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
R
4
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
0
7
NMIEG0
NMIEG1
XRST
INTM0
INTM1
0
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable register that selects the interrupt control mode and the detected edge
for
10,.
Only bits 5, 4, 2 and 1 are described here; for details on the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System
Control Register (SYSCR).
SYSCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 5 and 4: Interrupt Control Mode (INTM1, INTM0)
These bits select one of two interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. The INTM1 bit
must not be set to 1.
Bit 5
Bit 4
INTM1
INTM0
Interrupt Control
Mode
Description
0
0
Interrupts are controlled by I bit (Initial value)
0
1
1
Interrupts are controlled by I and UI bits and ICR
0
Cannot be used in this LSI
1
1
Cannot be used in this LSI
Bit 2 and 1:
10,
10, Pin Detected Edge Select (NMIEG1, NMIEG0)
Selects the detected edge for the
10, pin.
Bit 2
Bit 1
NIMIEG1
NIMIEG0
Description
0
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of
10,
pin
(Initial value)
0
1
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
10,
pin
1
*
Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of
10,
pin
Note:
*
Don't care
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 101 of 1037
6.2.2
Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
0
R/W
ICR7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICR6
ICR5
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The ICR registers are four 8-bit readable/writable registers that set the interrupt control level for
interrupts other than NMI.
The correspondence between ICR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 6.3.
The ICR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7 to 0: Interrupt Control Level (ICR7 to ICR0)
Sets the control level for the corresponding interrupt source.
Bit n
ICRn
Description
0
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority)
(Initial value)
1
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority)
(n = 7 to 0)
Table 6.3
Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings
ICRA7
ICRA6
ICRA5
ICRA4
ICRA3
ICRA2
ICRA1
CIRA0
ICRA
Reserved
Input
capture
HSW1
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
Reserved
ICRB7
ICRB6
ICRB5
ICRB4
ICRB3
ICRB2
ICRB1
ICRB0
ICRB
Reserved
Reserved
Servo
(drum,
capstan
latch)
Timer A
Timer B
Timer J
Timer R
Timer L
ICRC7
ICRC6
ICRC5
ICRC4
ICRC3
ICRC2
ICRC1
ICRC0
ICRC
Timer X1
Synchro-
nized
detection
Watchdog
timer
Servo
IIC
SCI1
(UART)
SCI2
(with 32-
bit buffer)
A/D
ICRD7
ICRD6
ICRD5
ICRD4
ICRD3
ICRD2
ICRD1
ICRD0
ICRD
HSW2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 102 of 1037
6.2.3
IRQ Enable Register (IENR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
6
--
--
--
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IENR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt
requests IRQ5 to IRQ0.
IENR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved
Do not write 1 to them.
Bits 5 to 0: IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E)
These bits select whether IRQ5 to IRQ0 are enabled or disabled.
Bit n
IRQnE
Description
0
IRQn interrupt disabled
(Initial value)
1
IRQn interrupt enabled
(n = 5 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 103 of 1037
6.2.4
IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
0
7
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ4EG
R/W
IRQ5EG
IRQ3EG
IRQ2EG
IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG0
0
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IEGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects detected edge of the input at pins
,54 to
,54.
IEGR register is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: Reserved
Do not write 1 to it.
Bits 6 to 2:
,54
,54 to ,54
,54 Pins Detected Edge Select (IRQ5EG to IRQ1EG)
These bits select detected edge for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1.
Bits 6 to 2
IRQnEG
Description
0
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of
,54Q
pin input
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
,54Q
pin input
(n = 5 to 1)
Bits 1 and 0:
,54
,54 Pin Detected Edge Select (IRQ0EG1, IRQ0EG0)
These bits select detected edge for interrupt IRQ0.
Bit 1
Bit 0
IRQ0EG1
IRQ0EG0
Description
0
0
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of
,54
pin input (Initial
value)
0
1
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of
,54
pin input
1
*
Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of
,54
pin
input
Note:
*
Don't care
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 104 of 1037
6.2.5
IRQ Status Register (IRQR)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
5
0
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
6
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IRQR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
IRQR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7 and 6: Reserved
Do not write 1 to them.
Bits 5 to 0: IRQ5 to IRQ0 Flags
These bits indicate the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Bit n
IRQnF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
Cleared by reading IRQnF set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed
1
[Setting conditions]
(1) When a falling edge occurs in
,54Q
input while falling edge detection is set
(IRQnEG = 0)
(2) When a rising edge occurs in
,54Q
input while rising edge detection is set
(IRQnEG = 0)
(3) When a falling or rising edge occurs in
,54
input while both-edge detection is
set (IRQ0EG1 = 1)
(n = 5 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 105 of 1037
6.2.6
Port Mode Register (PMR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
PMR17
PMR16
PMR15
PMR14
PMR13
PMR12
PMR11
PMR10
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) controls pin function switching-over of port 1. Switching is
specified for each bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Only bits 5 to 0 are explained here. For details, see section 10, I/O Port.
Bits 5 to 0: P15/
,54
,54 to P10/,54
,54 pin switching (PMR15 to PMR10)
These bits are for setting the P1n/
,54Q pin as the input/output pin for P1n or as the ,54Q pin for
external interrupt request input.
Bit n
PMR1n
Description
0
P1n/
,54Q
pin functions as the P1n input/output pin
(Initial value)
1
P1n/IRQn pin functions as the
,54Q
input pin
(N = 5 to 0)
The following is the notes on switching the pin function by PMR1.
(1) When the port is set as the
,& input pin or ,54 to ,54 input pin, the pin level must be
High or Low regardless of active mode or power-down mode. Do not set the pin level at Medium.
(2) Switching the pin function of P16/
,& or P15/,54 to P10/,54 may be mistakenly identified
as edge detection and detection signal may be generated. To prevent this, operate as follows:
(a) Set the interrupt enable/disable flag to disable before switching the pin function.
(b) Clear the applicable interrupt request flag to 0 after switching the pin function and
executing another instruction.
(Program example)
:
MOV.B R0L,@IENR
Interrupt disabled
MOV.B R1L,@PMR1
Pin function change
NOP
Optional instruction
BCLR m @IRQR
Applicable interrupt clear
MOV.B R1L,@IENR
Interrupt enabled
:
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 106 of 1037
6.3
Interrupt Sources
Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts.
6.3.1
External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupt sources; NMI and IRQ5 to IRQ0. Of these, NMI, and IRQ1 to
IRQ0 can be used to restore this chip from standby mode.
(1) NMI Interrupt
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the
interrupt control mode and the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG1 and
NMIEG0 bits in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising,
falling edge or both edges on the
10, pin.
The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7.
(2) IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts
Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins
,54 to ,54. Interrupts
IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features:
(a) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level,
falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pin
,54.
(b) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level,
falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins
,54 to ,54.
(c) Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IENR.
(d) The interrupt control level can be set with ICR.
(e) The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in IRQR. IRQR flags can be
cleared to 0 by software.
A block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 6.2.
Clear signal
R
S
Q
Edge detection
circuit
IRQnEG
IRQnF
IRQnE
Note: n = 5 to 0
IRQn interrupt
request
IRQn input
Figure 6.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 107 of 1037
Figure 6.3 shows the timing of IRQnF setting.
Internal
IRQnF
IRQn
input pin
Figure 6.3 Timing of IRQnF Setting
The vector numbers for IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 21 to 26.
Upon detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts, the applicable pin is set in the port mode register 1
(PMR1) as
,54Q pin.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 108 of 1037
6.3.2
Internal Interrupts
There are 38 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules.
(1) For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If any one of these is set
to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
(2) The interrupt control level can be set by means of ICR.
6.3.3
Interrupt Exception Vector Table
Table 6.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority.
Priorities among modules can be set by means of ICR. The situation when two or more modules
are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 6.4.
Table 6.4
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Priority
Interrupt Source
Origin of Interrupt
Source
Vector
No.
Vector address
ICR
Remarks
Reset
External pin
0
H'0000 to H'0003
1
H'0004 to H'0007
2
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'000C to H'000F
4
H'0010 to H'0013
Reserved
5
H'0014 to H'0017
Direct transition
Instruction
6
H'0018 to H'001B
NMI
External pin
7
H'001C to H'001F
TRAPA#0
8
H'0020 to H'0023
TRAPA#1
9
H'0024 to H'0027
TRAPA#2
10
H'0028 to H'002B
Trap instruction
TRAPA#3
Instruction
11
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0030 to H'0033
13
H'0034 to H'0037
14
H'0038 to H'003B
High
Low
Reserved
15
H'003C to H'003F
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 109 of 1037
Priority
Interrupt Source
Origin of Interrupt
Source
Vector
No.
Vector address
ICR
Remarks
#0
16
H'0040 to H'0043
#1
17
H'0044 to H'0047
Address trap
#2
ATC
18
H'0048 to H'004B
IC
PSU
19
H'004C to H'004F
ICRA6
HSW1
Servo circuit
20
H'0050 to H'0053
ICRA5
IRQ0
21
H'0054 to H'0057
ICRA4
IRQ1
22
H'0058 to H'005B
ICRA3
IRQ2
23
H'005C to H'005F
IRQ3
24
H'0060 to H'0063
ICRA2
IRQ4
25
H'0064 to H'0067
IRQ5
External pin
26
H'0068 to H'006B
ICRA1
27
H'006C to H'006F
28
H'0070 to H'0073
29
H'0074 to H'0077
30
H'0078 to H'007B
31
H'007C to H'007F
32
H'0080 to H'0083
Reserved
33
H'0084 to H'0087
Drum latch 1 (speed)
34
H'0088 to H'008B
Capstan latch 1 (speed)
Servo circuit
35
H'008C to H'008F
ICRB5
TMAI
Timer A
36
H'0090 to H'0093
ICRB4
TMBI
Timer B
37
H'0094 to H'0097
ICRB3
TMJ1I
38
H'0098 to H'009B
TMJ2I
Timer J
39
H'009C to H'009F
ICRB2
TMR1I
40
H'00A0 to H'00A3
TMR2I
41
H'00A4 to H'00A7
TMR3I
Timer R
42
H'00A8 to H'00AB
ICRB1
High
Low
TMLI
Timer L
43
H'00AC to H'00AF
ICRB0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 110 of 1037
Priority
Interrupt Source
Origin of Interrupt
Source
Vector
No.
Vector address
ICR
Remarks
ICXA
Timer X1
44
H'00B0 to H'00B3
ICXB
45
H'00B4 to H'00B7
ICXC
46
H'00B8 to H'00BB
ICXD
47
H'00BC to H'00BF
OCX1
48
H'00C0 to H'00C3
OCX2
49
H'00C4 to H'00C7
OVFX
50
H'00C8 to H'00CB
ICRC7
VD interrupts
Sync signal
detection
51
H'00CC to H'00CF
ICRC6
Reserved
52
H'00D0 to H'00D3
8-bit interval timer
Watchdog timer
53
H'00D4 to H'00D7
ICRC5
CTL
54
H'00D8 to H'00DB
Drum latch 2 (speed)
55
H'00DC to H'00DF
Capstan latch 2 (speed)
56
H'00E0 to H'00E3
Drum latch 3 (phase)
57
H'00E4 to H'00D7
Capstan latch 3 (phase)
Servo circuit
58
H'00E8 to H'00EB
ICRC4
IIC
IIC
59
H'00EC to H'00EF
ICRC3
ERI
60
H'00F0 to H'00F3
RXI
61
H'00F4 to H'00F7
TXI
62
H'00F8 to H'00FB
SCI1
TEI
SCI1
(UART)
63
H'00FC to H'00FF
ICRC2
TEI
64
H'0100 to H'0103
SCI2
ABTI
SCI2
65
H'0104 to H'0107
ICRC1
A/D conversion end
A/D
66
H'0108 to H'010B
ICRC0
High
Low
HSW2
Servo circuit
67
H'010C to H'010F
ICRD7
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 111 of 1037
6.4
Interrupt Operation
6.4.1
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
Interrupt operations in this LSI differ depending on the interrupt control mode.
NMI interrupts and address trap interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state. In
the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided
for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request.
Interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller.
Table 6.5 shows the interrupt control modes.
The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by
the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in ICR, and the masking state indicated
by the I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR.
Table 6.5
Interrupt Control Modes
SYSCR
Interrupt
Control
Mode
INTM1
INTM0
Priority Setting
Register
Interrupt
Mask Bits
Description
0
0
ICR
I
Interrupt mask control is
performed by the I bit
Priority can be set with ICR
1
0
1
ICR
I, UI
3-level interrupt mask control is
performed by the I and UI bits
Priority can be set with ICR
Figure 6.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit.
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
I
Interrupt source
UI
Vector number
Interrupt acceptance
control and 3-level
mask control
Default priority
determination
I C R
Figure 6.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Priority Determination Operation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 112 of 1037
(1) Interrupt Acceptance Control and 3-Level Control
In interrupt control modes 0 and 1, interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control is
performed by means of the I and UI bits in CCR, and ICR (control level).
Table 6.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode.
Table 6.6
Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Interrupt Mask Bit
Interrupt
Control
Mode
I
UI
Selected Interrupts
0
*
All interrupts (control level 1 has priority)
0
1
*
NMI and address trap interrupts
0
*
All interrupts (control level 1 has priority)
0
NMI, address trap and control level 1 interrupts
1
1
1
NMI and address trap interrupts
Note:
*
Don't care
(2) Default Priority Determination
The priority is determined for the selected interrupt, and a vector number is generated.
If the same value is set for ICR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the
interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected
and has a vector number generated.
Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending.
Table 6.7 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode.
Table 6.7
Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Setting
Interrupt Acceptance Control,
3-Level Control
Interrupt
Control
Mode
INTM1
INTM0
I
UI
ICR
Default Priority
Determination
0
0
{
IM
PR
{
1
0
1
{
IM
IM
PR
{
Legend:
{
:
Interrupt operation control performed
IM:
Used as interrupt mask bit
PR:
Sets priority
:
Not used
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 113 of 1037
6.4.2
Interrupt Control Mode 0
Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by
means of the I bit in the CPU's CCR, and ICR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to
0, and disabled when set to 1. Control level 1 interrupt sources have higher priority.
Figure 6.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
(1) If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
(2) When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt,
according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt
requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level
setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority
according to the priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected.
(3) The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If
the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI or an address trap interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt
requests are held pending.
(4) When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of
the current instruction has been completed.
(5) The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved
on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
(6) Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI and address trap.
(7) A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 114 of 1037
Program execution state
Interrupt
generated?
NMI
Address trap
interrupt?
Control level 1
interrupt?
I C
I = 0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Save PC and CCR
I
1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
I C
No
No
H S W 1
H S W 1
H S W 2
H S W 2
Hold pending
Figure 6.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 115 of 1037
6.4.3
Interrupt Control Mode 1
Three-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module
interrupts by means of the I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR, and ICR.
(1) Control level 0 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled
when set to 1.
(2) Control level 1 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit or UI bit is cleared to 0, and
disabled when both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1.
For example, if the interrupt enable bit for an interrupt request is set to 1, and H'04, H'00, H'00
and H'00 are set in ICRA, ICRB, ICRC and ICRD respectively, (i.e. IRQ2 interrupt is set to
control level 1 and other interrupts to control level 0), the situation is as follows:
(1) When I = 0, all interrupts are enabled
(Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IC > HSW1 > ...)
(2) When I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, address trap and IRQ2 interrupts are enabled
(3) When I = 1 and UI = 1, only NMI and address trap interrupts are enabled
Figure 6.6 shows the state transitions in these cases.
Only NMI, address trap and
IRQ2 interrupts enabled
All interrupts enabled
Exception handling
execution or UI
1
Exception handling
execution or
I
1, UI
1
I
0
I
1, UI
0
UI
0
I
0
Only NMI and address trap
interrupts enabled
Figure 6.6 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1
Figure 6.7 shows an operation flowchart of interrupt reception.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 116 of 1037
(1) If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
(2) When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt,
according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt
requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level
setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority
according to the priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected.
(3) The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit has no effect.
An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0.
If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI and address trap interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt
requests are held pending.
An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 1 has priority over an interrupt request set
to interrupt control level 0, and is accepted if the I bit is cleared to 0, or if the I bit is set to 1
and the UI bit is cleared to 0.
When both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1, only NMI and address trap interrupts are
accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
(4) When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of
the current instruction has been completed.
(5) The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved
on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
(6) Next, the I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI and address
trap.
(7) A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 117 of 1037
Program execution state
NMI
I C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
I C
No
No
H S W 1
H S W 1
H S W 2
H S W 2
Yes
No
Yes
No
Interrupt
generated?
Address trap
interrupt?
Control level 1
interrupt?
I = 0
I = 0
UI = 0
Save PC and CCR
I
1, UI
1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Hold pending
Figure 6.7 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 118 of 1037
6.4.4
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 6.8 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case
where interrupt control 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-
chip memory.
(1)
(1)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.
This is the contents of the saved PC, the
return address.)
Saved PC and saved CCR
Vector address
Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents)
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12))
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(2)(4)
(6)(8)
(10)(12)
(13)
(9)(11)
(14)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(9)
(11)
(13)
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
Internal read
signal
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
(2)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(10)
(12)
(14)
Stack
Vector fetch
Interrupt level
determination
Wait for end of
instruction
Interrupt
acceptance
Internal
operation
Internal
operation
Instruction
prefetch
Interrupt handling routine
instruction prefetch
Instruction code (Not executed.)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.)
(5)
SP-2
(7)
SP-4
Figure 6.8 Interrupt Exception Handling
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 119 of 1037
6.4.5
Interrupt Response Times
Table 6.8 shows interrupt response times-the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols used in table
6.8 are explained in table 6.9.
Table 6.8
Interrupt Response Times
No.
Number of States
Advanced Mode
1
Interrupt priority determination
*
1
3
2
Number of wait states until executing instruction ends
*
2
1 to 19+2
S
I
3
PC, CCR stack save
2
S
k
4
Vector fetch
2
S
I
5
Instruction fetch
*
3
2
S
I
6
Internal processing
*
4
2
Total (using on-chip memory)
12 to 32
Notes: 1. Two states in case of internal interrupt.
2. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions.
3. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
4. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector
fetch.
Table 6.9
Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution
Object of Access
Symbol
Internal Memory
Instruction fetch SI
Branch address read SJ
Stack manipulation SK
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 120 of 1037
6.5
Usage Notes
6.5.1
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or
MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned
will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that
interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt
request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for
the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.
The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 6.9 shows an example in which the OCIAE bit in timer X1 TIER is cleared to 0.
TIER address
Internal
address bus
Internal
write signal
OCIAE
OCFA
OCIA
interrupt signal
TIER write cycle
by CPU
OCIA interrupt
exception handling
Figure 6.9 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 121 of 1037
6.5.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these
instructions is executed, all interrupts except NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always
executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes
valid two states after execution of the instruction ends.
6.5.3
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the move is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this
case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1: EEPMOV.W
MOV.W R4,R4
BNE L1
6.5.4
When NMI is Disabled
When NMI is disabled, the input level to the
10, pin must be fixed high or low. It is
recommended that the NMI interrupt exception handling address be set to the NMI vector
address (H'00001C to H'00001F) and that the RTE instruction also be set to the NMI exception
handling address.
<Program Example>
.ORG H'00001C
.DATA.L NMI
.
.
.
.
NMI:RTE
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 122 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 123 of 1037
Section 7 ROM (H8S/2194 Series)
7.1
Overview
The H8S/2194 has 128 kbytes of on-chip ROM (flash memory or mask ROM), the H8S/2193 has
112 kbytes, the H8S/2192 has 96 kbytes, and the H8S/2191 has 80 kbytes. The ROM is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in one
state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher processing speed.
The flash memory versions of the H8S/2194 can be erased and programmed on-board as well as
with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
7.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'000000
H'000002
H'01FFFE
H'000001
H'000003
H'01FFFF
Figure 7.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2194)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 124 of 1037
7.2
Overview of Flash Memory
7.2.1
Features
The features of the flash memory are summarized below.
Four flash memory operating modes
--
Program mode
--
Erase mode
--
Program-verify mode
--
Erase-verify mode
Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase
(in single-block units). When erasing all blocks, the individual blocks must be erased
sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 8-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 28-
kbyte, and 32-kbyte blocks.
Programming/erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming,
equivalent to 300
s (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block.
Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
On-board programming modes
There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board:
--
Boot mode
--
User program mode
Automatic bit rate adjustment
If data transfer on boot mode, automatic adjustment is possible at host transfer bit rates and
MCU's bit rates.
Protect modes
There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected
status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations.
Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 125 of 1037
7.2.2
Block Diagram
Module bus
Bus interface/controller
Flash memory
(128 kbytes)
Operat-
ing
mode
FLMCR1
*
*
*
*
STCR
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
EBR2
: Serial timer control register
: Flash memory control register 1
: Flash memory control register 2
: Erase block register 1
: Erase block register 2
[Legend]
Internal address bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
STCR
FWE pin
Mode pin
FLMCR2
EBR1
EBR2
Note:
*
These registers are exclusively used for the flash
memory. If you try to read these addresses with the
mask ROM version, values read becomes uncertain.
Data write is also disabled with the above version.
Figure 7.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 126 of 1037
7.2.3
Flash Memory Operating Modes
(1) Mode Transitions
When each mode pin and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed,
the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 7.3. In user mode, flash
memory can be read but not programmed or erased.
Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and
programmer mode.
Boot mode
On-board program mode
User
program
mode
User mode
Reset state
Programmer
mode
FWE = 1, MD0 = 0,
P12 = P13 = P14 = 1
RES = 0
RES = 0
FWE = 1
SWE = 1
FWE = 0
or
SWE = 0
RES = 0
MD0 = 1, FWE = 0
RES = 0
Only make a transition between user mode
and user program mode when the CPU is not
accessing the flash memory.
*
1 MD0=0,P12=P13=1,P14=0
Note:
*
1
Figure 7.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 127 of 1037
(2) On-Board Programming Modes
(a) Boot mode
Flash memory
RAM
Host
Programming control
program
SCI
Application program
(old version)
New application
program
New application
program
Flash memory
This LSI
This LSI
This LSI
This LSI
RAM
Host
SCI
Application program
(old version)
Boot program area
Programming control
program
New application
program
Flash memory
RAM
Host
SCI
Flash memory
preprograming
erase
Boot program
Flash memory
Program execution state
RAM
Host
SCI
New application
program
Boot program
Programming control
program
"
!
"
1. Initial state
The old program version or data remains written
in the flash memory. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new
application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer
When boot mode is entered, the boot program in
the LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is
started and the programing control program in
the host is transferred to RAM via SCI
communication. The boot program required for
flash memory erasing is automatically transferred
to the RAM boot program area.
3. Flash memory initialization
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
4. Writing new application program
The programming control program transferred
from the host to RAM is executed, and the new
application program in the host is written into the
flash memory.
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program area
Boot program
area
Programming
control program
Figure 7.4 Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 128 of 1037
(b) User program mode
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
Programming/erase control program
SCI
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Flash memory erase
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
Program execution state
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Programming/erase
control program
1. Initial state
2. Programming/erase control program transfer
3. Flash memory initialization
4. Writing new application program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
,
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Programming/erase control program
Programming/erase control program
<Flash memory>
New application
program
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
(1) The FWE assessment program that confirms that
the FWE pin has been driven high, and (2) the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from the flash memory to on-chip RAM
should be written into the flash memory by the user
beforehand. (3) The programming/erase control
program should be prepared in the host or in the flash
memory.
When user program mode is entered, user software
confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the
flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase
control program to RAM.
The programming/erase control program in RAM is
executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF).
Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte
units.
Next, the new application program in the host is written
into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to
unerased blocks.
New application
program
<Flash memory>
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
Figure 7.5 User Program Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 129 of 1037
(3) Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Table 7.1
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode
User Program Mode
Entire memory erase
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
Programming control program
*
Program/program-verify
Erase/erase-verify
Program/program-verify
Note:
*
To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
(4) Block Configuration
The flash memory is divided into two 32-kbyte blocks, two 8-kbyte blocks, one 16-kbyte
block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks.
8k bytes
Address H'00000
Address H'1FFFF
128 kbytes
32 kbytes
128-kbyte version
32 kbytes
28 kbytes
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
16 kbytes
8k bytes
Figure 7.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 130 of 1037
7.2.4
Pin Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 7.2.
Table 7.2
Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Reset
5(6
Input
Reset
Flash write enable
FWE
Input
Flash program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 0
MD0
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode
Port 12
P12
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 13
P13
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 14
P14
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Transmit data
SO1
Output
Serial transmit data output
Receive data
SI1
Input
Serial receive data input
7.2.5
Register Configuration
The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 7.3.
In order to access these registers, the FLSHE bit in STCR must be set to 1.
Table 7.3
Flash Memory Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial
Value
Address
*
5
Access
Size
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
2
H'FFF8
8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFF9
8
Erase block register 1
EBR1
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFFA
8
Erase block register 2
EBR2
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFFB
8
Serial timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEE
8
Notes: 1. When the FWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set at 1, writes are disabled.
2. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80.
3. When a low level is input to the FWE pin, or if a high level is input and the SWE bit in
FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00.
4. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are
valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states.
5. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 131 of 1037
7.3
Flash Memory Register Descriptions
7.3.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
7
FWE
--
*
R
6
SWE
0
R/W
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
EV
0
R/W
0
P
0
R/W
2
PV
0
R/W
1
E
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note:
*
Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify
mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1. Program mode is
entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and finally
setting the P bit. Erase mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 when FWE = 1, then setting the
ESU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the E bit. FLMCR1 is initialized by a reset, in power-
down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode), or when a
low level is input to the FWE pin. Its initial value is H'80 when a high level is input to the FWE
pin, and H'00 when a low level is input. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will
return H'00, and writes are invalid.
Writes to the SWE bit in FLMCR1 are enabled only when FWE = 1; writes to the EV and PV
bits only when FWE=1 and SWE=1; writes to the E bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU
= 1; and writes to the P bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1.
Bit 7: Flash Write Enable (FWE)
Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Bit 7
FWE
Description
0
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
1
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 132 of 1037
Bit 6:
Software Write Enable (SWE)
Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits ESU,
PSU, EV, PV, E, P, and EB9 to EB0, and should not be cleared at the same time as these bits.
Bit 6
SWE
Description
0
Writes are disabled
(Initial value)
1
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected
Bit 5 and 4: Reserved
These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 3: Erase-Verify (EV)
Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit
at the same time.
Bit 3
EV
Description
0
Erase-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 are selected
Bit 2: Program-Verify (PV)
Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P
bit at the same time.
Bit 2
PV
Description
0
Program-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 are selected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 133 of 1037
Bit 1: Erase (E)
Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at
the same time.
Bit 1
E
Description
0
Erase mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 are
selected
Bit 0: Program (P)
Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, PSU, ESU, EV, PV, or E bit
at the same time.
Bit 0
P
Description
0
Program mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 are
selected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 134 of 1037
7.3.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
7
FLER
0
R
6
--
0
--
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
--
0
--
0
PSU
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
ESU
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register that monitors the presence or absence of flash memory
program/erase protection (error protection) and performs setup for flash memory program/erase
mode. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in
power-down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode),
hardware protect mode, or software protect mode.
Bit 7: Flash Memory Error (FLER)
Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or
erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state.
Bit 7
FLER
Description
0
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode
(Initial value)
1
An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition] See section 7.6.3, Error Protection
Bits 6 to 2: Reserved
These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 1: Erase Setup (ESU)
Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1.
Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time.
Bit 1
ESU
Description
0
Erase setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Erase setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 135 of 1037
Bit 0: Program Setup (PSU)
Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit to 1 in
FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time.
Bit 0
PSU
Description
0
Program setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Program setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 136 of 1037
7.3.3
Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)
7
--
0
--
6
--
0
--
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
--
0
--
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
EB9
0
R/W
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit
EBR1
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
:
Bit
EBR2
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
:
EBR1 and EBR2 are registers that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; bits 1
and 0 in EBR1 (128-kbyte versions only) and bits 7 to 0 in EBR2 are readable/writable bits.
EBR1 and EBR2 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset, in power-down state (excluding the
medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode), when a low level is input to the FWE
pin, or when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When
a bit in EBR1 or EBR2 is set, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-
protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 or EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set).
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 7.4.
Table 7.4
Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (Size)
128-kbyte Versions
Address
EB0 (1 kbyte)
H'000000 to H'0003FF
EB1 (1 kbyte)
H'000400 to H'0007FF
EB2 (1 kbyte)
H'000800 to H'000BFF
EB3 (1 kbyte)
H'000C00 to H'000FFF
EB4 (28 kbytes)
H'001000 to H'007FFF
EB5 (16 kbytes)
H'008000 to H'00BFFF
EB6 (8 kbytes)
H'00C000 to H'00DFFF
EB7 (8 kbytes)
H'00E000 to H'00FFFF
EB8 (32 kbytes)
H'010000 to H'017FFF
EB9 (32 kbytes)
H'018000 to H'01FFFF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 137 of 1037
7.3.4
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
7
--
0
--
6
IICX
0
R/W
5
IICRST
0
R/W
4
--
0
--
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
--
0
--
2
--
0
--
1
--
0
--
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the I
2
C bus interface
operating mode, and on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the I
2
C bus
interface serial clock frequency. For details on functions not related to on-chip flash memory,
see section 25.2.7, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR), and descriptions of individual
modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit.
STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 6, 5: I
2
C Control (IICX, IICRST)
These bits control the operation of the I
2
C bus interface. For details, see section 24, I
2
C Bus
Interface.
Bit 3: Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE)
Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If
FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash
memory control register contents are retained.
Bit 3
FLSHE
Description
0
Flash memory control registers deselected
(Initial value)
1
Flash memory control registers selected
Bits 7, 4 and 2 to 0: Reserved
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 138 of 1037
7.4
On-Board Programming Modes
When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be
performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot
mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown
in table 7.5. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 7.3.
Table 7.5
Setting On-Board Programming Modes
Mode
Pin
Mode Name
FWE
MD0
P12
P13
P14
Boot mode
1
0
1
*
2
1
*
2
1
*
2
User program mode
1
*
1
1
Notes: 1. In user program mode, the FWE pin should not be constantly set to 1. Set FWE to 1
to make a transition to user program mode before performing a program/erase/verify
operation.
2. Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 139 of 1037
7.4.1
Boot Mode
When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in
the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode.
When a reset-start is executed after the MCU's pins have been set to boot mode, the boot
program built into the MCU is started and the programming control program prepared in the host
is serially transmitted to the MCU via the SCI1. In the MCU, the programming control program
received via the SCI1 is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM.
After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control
program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory
programming is performed).
The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the
programming algorithm given later.
The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 7.7, and the boot program mode
execution procedure in figure 7.8.
SI1
SO1
SCI1
This LSI
Flash memory
Write data reception
Verify data
transmission
Host
On-chip RAM
Figure 7.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 140 of 1037
Start
Set pins to boot mode and
execute reset-start
Host transfers data (H'00)
continuously at prescribed bit rate
Host transmits programming
control program sequentially in
byte units
Transfer received programming
control program to on-chip RAM
This LSI calculates bit rate and
sets value in bit rate register
Host transmits number of
programming control program
bytes (N), upper byte followed by
lower byte
This LSI transmits received
programming control program to
host as verify data (echo-back)
n = 1
End of transmission
n = N?
n+1
n
Note :
Yes
No
This LSI measures low period of
H'00 data transmitted by host
After bit rate adjustment, transmits
one H'00 data byte to host to
indicate end of adjustment
Upon receiving H'55, this LSI
transmits one H'AA data byte to
host
Host confirms normal reception of
bit rate adjustment end indication
(H'00) and transmits one H'55
data byte
Execute programming control
program transferred to on-chip
RAM
This LSI transmits received
number of bytes to host as verify
data (echo-back)
If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one
H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and
subsequent operations are halted.
After confirming that all flash
memory data has been erased,
this LSI transmits one H'AA data
byte to host
Check flash memory data, and if
data has already been written,
erase all blocks
Figure 7.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 141 of 1037
(1) Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
Start
bit
Stop
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data)
High period
(1 or more bits)
Figure 7.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
When boot mode is initiated, the MCU measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI
communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive
format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The MCU calculates the bit rate
of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to
the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment
end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the MCU. If
reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above
operations. Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the MCU's system clock
frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the MCU. To ensure
correct SCI operation, the host's transfer bit rate should be set to (2400, 4800, or 9600) bps.
Table 7.6 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic
adjustment of the MCU's bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this
system clock range.
Table 7.6
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit
Rate is Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment
of This LSI Bit Rate is Possible
9600 bps
8 MHz to 10 MHz
4800 bps
4 MHz to 10 MHz
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 142 of 1037
(2) On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode
In boot mode, the 2048-byte area from H'FFEFB0 to H'FFF7AF is reserved for use by the
boot program, as shown in figure 7.10. The area to which the programming control program
is transferred is H'FFF7B0 to H'FFFF2F (1920 bytes). The boot program area can be used
when the programming control program transferred into RAM enters the execution state. A
stack area should be set up as required.
H'FFEFB0
H'FFF7B0
Programming
control program
area
(1920 bytes)
Reserved area
(128 bytes)
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFF30
Boot program
area
*
(2048 bytes)
Note:
*
The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution
state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot
program reamins stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming
control program.
Figure 7.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 143 of 1037
(3) Notes on Use of Boot Mode:
(a) When reset is released in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI1's
SI1 pin. The reset should end with SI1 pin high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100
states for the chip to get ready to measure the low period of the SI1 pin input.
(b) In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not
1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is
unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program
activated in user program mode is accidentally erased.
(c) Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
(d) The SI1 and SO1 pins should be pulled up on the board.
(e) Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H' FFF3B0), the chip
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing
the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The
transmit data output pin, SO1, goes to the high-level output state (P21PCR = 1, P21PDR
= 1).
The contents of the CPU's internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these
registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control
program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls,
etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program.
The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed.
(f) Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 7.5 and executing a
reset-start.
When the chip detects the boot mode setting at reset release
*1
, it retains that state
internally.
Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then
setting the FWE pin and mode pins, and executing reset release
*1
. Boot mode can also be
cleared by a WDT overflow reset.
If the mode pin input levels are changed in boot mode, the boot mode state will be
maintained in the microcomputer, and boot mode continued, unless a reset occurs.
However, the FWE pin must not be driven low while the boot program is running or flash
memory is being programmed or erased
*2
.
Notes: 1. Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t
MDS
= 4
states) with respect to the reset release timing.
2. For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 7.9, Flash
Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 144 of 1037
7.4.2
User Program Mode
When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a
user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash
memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of FWE control and supply of
programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as
necessary.
In this mode, the chip starts up in mode 1 and applies a high level to the FWE pin.
The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 to perform programming or
erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip
RAM or external memory.
Figure 7.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when
transferred to on-chip RAM.
Clear FWE
*
FWE = high
*
Branch to flash memory
application program
Branch to program/erase control
program in RAM area
Execute program/erase control
program (flash memory rewriting)
Transfer program/erase
control program to RAM
MD0 = 1
Reset start
Write the FWE assessment program and
transfer program (and the program/erase
control program if necessary) beforehand
Note:
Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin. Apply a high level to the FWE pin only
when the flash memory is programmed or erased. Also, while a high level is applied to the
FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or
overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
*
For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 7.9, Flash
Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Figure 7.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 145 of 1037
7.5
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by
software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by
setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR2, and the P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR1.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program
that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be
located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, EV, PV, E, and P bits in
FLMCR1, and the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash
memory.
2. When programming or erasing, set FWE to 1 (programming/erasing will not be
executed if FWE = 0).
3. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming
on previously programmed addresses.
7.5.1
Program Mode
Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 7.12 to write
data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32
bytes at a time.
Table 29.9 in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics, lists wait time (x, y, z,
,
,
,
and
) after setting or clearing each bit on the flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1 and
FLMCR2) and the maximum write count (N).
Following the elapse of (x)
s or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram
data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write
addresses. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80,
H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program
address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be
performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway,
etc. Set more than (y + z +
+
)
s as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for
program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and after the
elapse of (y)
s or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P bit in
FLMCR1. The time during which the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make
a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z)
s.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 146 of 1037
7.5.2
Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the P bit in
FLMCR1 is cleared, then the PSU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (
)
s later). The watchdog
timer is cleared after the elapse of (
)
s or more, and the operating mode is switched to
program-verify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify
mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy
write should be executed after the elapse of (
)
s or more. When the flash memory is read in
this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least
(
)
s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written
data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 7.12) and
transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-
verify mode, wait for at least (
)
s, then clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is
necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before.
However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times
on the same bits.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 147 of 1037
START
End of
programming
Programming
failure
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (x) s
Store 32-byte program data in program data area
and reprogram data area
n = 1
m = 0
Enable WDT
Set PSU bit in FLMCR2
Wait (y) s
Set P bit in FLMCR1
Wait (z) s
Start of programming
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Wait ( ) s
Wait ( ) s
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
Wait ( ) s
Wait ( ) s
*
5
*
3
*
2
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
4
*
1
*
5
Wait ( ) s
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2
Disable WDT
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Reprogram data computation
*
4
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
m = 1
End of programming
Program data = verify data?
End of 32-byte
data verification?
m = 0?
Increment address
YES
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n N?
n
n+1
Notes:
Program data
0
0
1
1
Verify data
0
1
0
1
Reprogram data
1
0
1
1
Comments
Do not reprogram bits for which
programming has been completed.
Programming incomplete; reprogramming
should be performed.
--
Still in erased state; no action
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Write 32-byte data in RAM reprogram data
area consecutively to flash memory
Programming must be excuted in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming on
addresses that have already been programmed.
RAM
Program data storage
area (32 bytes)
Reprogram data
storage area (32 bytes)
Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40,
H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0,, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in
this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Even in case of the bit which is already-programmed in the 32-byte programming loop, perform additional
programming if the bit fails at the next verify.
An area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents
of the latter are rewritten as programming progresses.
The values of x, y, z, , , , , and N are listed in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 7.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 148 of 1037
7.5.3
Erase Mode
Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the
erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 7.13.
Table 28.9 in section 28.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics lists wait time (x, y, z,
,
,
,
and
) after setting or clearing each bit on the flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1 and
FLMCR2) and the maximum clearing count (N).
To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased
in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least (x)
s after setting the SWE bit to 1 in
flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent
overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set more than (y + z +
+
) ms as the WDT
overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the
ESU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y)
s or more, the operating mode is switched to
erase mode by setting the E bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash
memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms.
Note:
With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased
to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
7.5.4
Erase-Verify Mode
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the E bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the
ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (
)
s later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the
elapse of (
)
s or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the
EV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should
be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (
)
s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the
data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (
)
s after the dummy write before performing
this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the
next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode
again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the
erase/erase-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When verification is
completed, exit erase-verify mode, and wait for at least (
)
s. If erasure has been completed on
all the erase blocks, clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1
bit setting in EBR1 or EBR2 for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-
verify sequence in the same way.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 149 of 1037
End of erasing
START
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Set ESU bit in FLMCR2
Set E bit in FLMCR1
Wait (x) s
Wait (y) s
n = 1
Set EBR1, EBR2
Enable WDT
*
2
*
4
*
2
Wait (z) ms
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
Set block start address to
verify address
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
3
*
5
Start of erase
Clear E bit in FLMCR1
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2
Set EV bit in FLMCR1
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
Wait ( ) s
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Disable WDT
Halt erase
*
1
Verify data =
all 1?
End of erasing of
all erase blocks?
Erase failure
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n N?
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Increment
address
n
n+1
Last address
of block?
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary.
The values of x, y, z, , , , , and N are listed in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Set only one bit in EBR1 or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially.
Figure 7.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 150 of 1037
7.6
Flash Memory Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
7.6.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1
and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). In error
protection mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1 and EBR2 settings are retained. (See table 7.7.)
Table 7.7
Hardware Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
FWE pin
protection
When a low level is input to the FWE pin, FLMCR1,
FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered
Yes
Yes
Reset/standby
protection
In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in
power-down state (excluding the medium-speed
mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode),
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (excluding the FLER bit), EBR1,
and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-
protected state is entered
In a reset via the
5(6
pin, the reset state is not
entered unless the
5(6
pin is held low until oscillation
stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset
during operation, hold the
5(6
pin low for the
5(6
pulse width specified in the AC characteristics section
Yes
Yes
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 151 of 1037
7.6.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1 and erase block
registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in
flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase
mode. (See table 7.8.)
Table 7.8
Software Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
SWE bit
protection
Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the
program/erase-protected state for all blocks
(Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory)
Yes
Yes
Block
specification
protection
Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by
settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1,
EBR2)
Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in
the erase-protected state
-
Yes
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 152 of 1037
7.6.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in
FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2
settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error
occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit.
However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode.
FLER bit setting conditions are as follows:
(1) When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or
instruction fetch)
(2) Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing
(3) When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Figure 7.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
: Memory read possible
: Verify-read possible
: Programming possible
: Erasing possible
RD
VF
PR
ER
: Memory read not possible
: Verify-read not possible
: Programming not possible
: Erasing not possible
RD
VF
PR
ER
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Error occurrence
Error occurrence
SLEEP instruction
execution
RES = 0
RES = 0
RES = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Program mode
Erase mode
Reset
(hardware protection)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
Error protection mode
Error protection mode
(Power-down state)
*
1
Power-down state
*
1
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, EBR2 initialization
state
Power-down state
*
1
release
*
1: Watch mode, standby mode, and
subactive mode
Figure 7.14 Flash Memory State Transitions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 153 of 1037
7.7
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including NMI input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or
erased (when the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot
mode
*1
, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this:
(1) Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or
erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.
(2) In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector
would not be read correctly
*2
, possibly resulting in MCU runaway.
(3) If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the
normal boot mode sequence.
For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling
interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal
erasing and programming or MCU operation. All requests, including NMI input, must therefore
be disabled inside and outside the MCU during FWE application. Interrupt is also disabled in
the error-protection state while the P or E bit remains set in FLMCR1.
Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until data write by
the write control program is complete.
2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:
If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is
set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be
returned).
If the interrupt entry in the interrupt vector table has not been programmed yet,
interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 154 of 1037
7.8
Flash Memory Programmer Mode
7.8.1
Programmer Mode Setting
Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In programmer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using
a PROM programmer that supports Hitachi microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on-chip
flash memory. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read
mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status
read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals
are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
7.8.2
Socket Adapters and Memory Map
In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the writer programmer. The socket
adapter product codes are listed in table 7.9.
Figure 7.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode.
Table 7.9
Socket Adapter Product Codes
Product Codes
Package
Socket Adapter Product Code
HD64F2194
112-pin QFP
ME2194ESHF1H
This LSI
H'000000
MCU mode
Programmmer mode
H'01FFFF
H'00000
H'1FFFF
On-chip ROM area
(128 kbytes)
Figure 7.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 155 of 1037
7.8.3
Programmer Mode Operation
Table 7.10 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and
table 7.11 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
(1) Memory Read Mode
Memory read mode supports byte reads.
(2) Auto-Program Mode
Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to
confirm the end of auto-programming.
(3) Auto-Erase Mode
Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is
used to confirm the end of auto-erasing.
(4) Status Read Mode
Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be
confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an
error occurs.
Table 7.10 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode
Pin Names
Mode
FWE
&(
&(
2(
2(
:(
:(
FO0 to FO7
FA0 to FA17
Read
H or L
L
L
H
Data output
Ain
Output disable
H or L
L
H
H
Hi-z
X
Command write
H or L
*
3
L
H
L
Data input
Ain
*
2
Chip disable
*
1
H or L
L
X
X
Hi-z
X
Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
3. For command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode,
input a high level to the FWE pin.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 156 of 1037
Table 7.11 Programmer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command Name
Number of
Cycles
Mode
Address
Data
Mode
Address
Data
Memory read mode
1+n
write
X
H'00
read
RA
Dout
Auto-program mode
129
write
X
H'40
write
WA
Din
Auto-erase mode
2
write
X
H'20
write
X
H'20
Status read mode
2
write
X
H'71
write
X
H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a
simultaneous 128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 157 of 1037
7.8.4
Memory Read Mode
(1) After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait
state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode
by means of a command write before the read is executed.
(2) Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state.
(3) Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.
(4) After power-on, memory read mode is entered.
Table 7.12 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
H'00
OE
WE
Command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
f
t
r
t
nxtc
Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE.
t
ces
Memory read mode
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
Figure 7.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 158 of 1037
Table 7.13 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
H'XX
OE
WE
XX mode command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
nxtc
Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time.
t
ces
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.17 Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 159 of 1037
Table 7.14 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Access time
t
acc
20
s
&(
output delay time
t
ce
150
ns
2(
output delay time
t
oe
150
ns
Output disable delay time
t
df
100
ns
Data output hold time
t
oh
5
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
VIL
VIL
VIH
OE
WE
t
acc
t
oh
t
oh
t
acc
ADDRESS STABLE
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
DATA
Figure 7.18 Timing Waveforms for
/
Enable State Read
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
VIH
OE
WE
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
t
oh
t
oh
t
df
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
ADDRESS STABLE
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
DATA
t
df
Figure 7.19 Timing Waveforms for
/
Clocked Read
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 160 of 1037
7.8.5
Auto-Program Mode
(a) In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried
out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
(b) A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
(c) The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an
effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write
error will be flagged.
(d) Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 7.20). Do not perform
transfer after the second cycle.
(e) Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
(f) Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address.
Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations.
(g) Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end
identification pin).
(h) The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write.
Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling
and .
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 161 of 1037
Table 7.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t
wsts
1
ms
Status polling access time
t
spa
150
ns
Address setup time
t
as
0
ns
Address hold time
t
ah
60
ns
Memory write time
t
write
1
3000
ms
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Write setup time
t
pns
100
ns
Write end setup time
t
pnh
100
ns
CE
FWE
ADDRESS
FO7
OE
WE
t
nxtc
t
wsts
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ds
t
dh
t
wep
t
as
t
pnh
t
pns
t
ah
t
ceh
ADDRESS STABLE
Data transfer
1 byte to 128 bytes
FO6
Programming wait
DATA
DATA
H'40
DATA
FO0 to 5 = 0
t
f
t
r
t
write
(1 to 3,000 ms)
Programming operation
end identification signal
Programming normal end
identification signal
Figure 7.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 162 of 1037
7.8.6
Auto-Erase Mode
(a) Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.
(b) Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.
(c) Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can
also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end
identification pin).
(d) The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write.
Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling
and .
Table 7.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t
ests
1
ms
Status polling access time
t
spa
150
ns
Memory erase time
t
erase
100
40000
ms
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Erase setup time
t
ens
100
ns
Erase end setup time
t
enh
100
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 163 of 1037
CE
FWE
ADDRESS
FO5 to FO0
FO6
FO7
OE
WE
t
erase
(100 to 40000ms)
t
ests
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ceh
t
dh
CL
in
DL
in
t
ds
t
wep
t
ens
FO0 to 5 = 0
H'20
H'20
t
enh
Erase end
identification signal
Erase normal end
identification signal
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
7.8.7
Status Read Mode
(1) Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode
when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode.
(2) The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is
performed.
Table 7.17 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
2(
output delay time
t
oe
150
ns
Disable delay time
t
df
100
ns
&(
output delay time
t
ce
150
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 164 of 1037
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
OE
WE
t
ces
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
df
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
t
ces
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
wep
t
wep
DATA
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
oe
t
ce
t
nxtc
H'71
H'71
t
f
t
r
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Table 7.18 Status Read Mode Return Commands
Pin Name
FO7
FO6
FO5
FO4
FO3
FO2
FO1
FO0
Attribute
Normal
end
identifica-
tion
Command
error
Program-
ming error
Erase
error
Program-
ming or
erase
count
exceeded
Effective
address
error
Initial
value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Indica-
tions
Normal
end: 0
Abnormal
end: 1
Command
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Program-
ming error:
1
Otherwise:
0
Erase
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Count
exceeded:
1
Otherwise:
0
Effective
address
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 165 of 1037
7.8.8
Status Polling
(1) The FO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase
mode.
(2) The FO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-
erase mode.
Table 7.19 Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin Names
Internal Operation
in Progress
Abnormal End
Normal End
FO7
0
1
0
1
FO6
0
0
1
1
FO0 to FO5
0
0
0
0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 166 of 1037
7.8.9
Programmer Mode Transition Time
Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer
mode setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read
mode.
Table 7.20 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Standby release
(oscillation stabilization time)
t
osc1
10
ms
Programmer mode setup time
t
bmv
10
ms
V
CC
hold time
t
dwn
0
ms
V
CC
RES
FWE
Memory read
mode
Command wait
state
Command
wait state
Normal/abnormal
end identifica-
tion
Auto-program mode
Auto-erase mode
t
osc1
t
bmv
t
dwn
Note: Except in auto-program mode and auto-erase mode, drive the FWE input pin low.
Don't care
Don't care
Figure 7.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time,
Boot Program Transfer Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence
7.8.10
Notes On Memory Programming
(1) When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out auto-
erasing before auto-programming.
(2) When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been
programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before
carrying out auto-programming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by
Hitachi. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended
that auto-erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 167 of 1037
7.9
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode and programmer mode are
summarized below.
(1) Use the Specified Voltages and Timing for Programming and Erasing
Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM
programmer that supports Hitachi microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on-chip flash
memory.
Do not select the HN28F101 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified
socket adapter. Incorrect use will result in damaging the device.
(2) Powering On and Off
Do not apply a high level to the FWE pin until V
CC
has stabilized. Also, drive the FWE pin
low before turning off V
CC
.
When applying or disconnecting V
CC
, fix the FWE pin low and place the flash memory in the
hardware protection state.
The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a
power failure and subsequent recovery.
(3) FWE Application/Disconnection
FWE application should be carried out when MCU operation is in a stable condition. If
MCU operation is not stable, fix the FWE pin low and set the protection state.
The following points must be observed concerning FWE application and disconnection to
prevent unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory:
(a) Apply FWE when the V
CC
voltage has stabilized within its rated voltage range.
(b) In boot mode, apply and disconnect FWE during a reset.
(c) In user program mode, FWE can be switched between high and low level regardless of
the reset state. FWE input can also be switched during program execution in flash
memory.
(d) Do not apply FWE if program runaway has occurred.
(e) Disconnect FWE only when the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, P, and E bits in FLMCR1 and
FLMCR2 are cleared.
Make sure that the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, P, and E bits are not set by mistake when
applying or disconnecting FWE.
(4) Do Not Apply a Constant High Level to the FWE Pin
Apply a high level to the FWE pin only when programming or erasing flash memory. A
system configuration in which a high level is constantly applied to the FWE should be
avoided. Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be
activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 168 of 1037
(5) Use the Recommended Algorithm when Programming and Erasing Flash Memory
The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without
subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting
the P or E bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution
against program runaway, etc.
(6) Do Not Set or Clear the SWE Bit During Program Execution in Flash Memory
Clear the SWE bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory.
When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but flash memory should
only be accessed for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing).
(7) Do Not Use Interrupts while Flash Memory is Being Programmed or Erased
All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during FWE application to give
priority to program/erase operations.
(8) Do Not Perform Additional Programming. Erase the Memory before Reprogramming.
In on-board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 32-byte
programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming
operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with
the entire programming unit block erased.
(9) Before Programming, Check that the Chip is Correctly Mounted in the PROM Programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer
socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(10)Do Not Touch the Socket Adapter or Chip During Programming.
Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 169 of 1037
7.10
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are
provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 7.21 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT
version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 7.21 is read in the mask
ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed
on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to
ensure that the registers in table 7.21 have no effect.
Table 7.21 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version
Register
Abbreviation
Address
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
H'FFF8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
H'FFF9
Erase block register 1
EBR1
H'FFFA
Erase block register 2
EBR2
H'FFFB
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 170 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 171 of 1037
Section 8 ROM (H8S/2194C Series)
8.1
Overview
The H8S/2194C has 256 kbytes of on-chip ROM (flash memory or mask ROM), the H8S/2194B
has 192 kbytes, the H8S/2194A has 160 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit
data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction
fetches and higher processing speed.
The flash memory versions of the H8S/2194C can be erased and programmed on-board as well
as with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
8.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'000000
H'000002
H'03FFFE
H'000001
H'000003
H'03FFFF
Figure 8.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2194C)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 172 of 1037
8.2
Overview of Flash Memory
8.2.1
Features
The features of the flash memory are summarized below.
Four flash memory operating modes
--
Program mode
--
Erase mode
--
Program-verify mode
--
Erase-verify mode
Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase
(in single-block units). When erasing all blocks, the individual blocks must be erased
sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 8-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 28-
kbyte, and 32-kbyte blocks.
Programming/erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming,
equivalent to 300
s (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block.
Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
On-board programming modes
There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board:
--
Boot mode
--
User program mode
Automatic bit rate adjustment
If data transfer on boot mode, automatic adjustment is possible at host transfer bit rates and
MCU's bit rates.
Protect modes
There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected
status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations.
Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 173 of 1037
8.2.2
Block Diagram
Module bus
Bus interface/controller
Flash memory
(256 kbytes)
Operat-
ing
mode
FLMCR1
*
*
*
*
STCR
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
EBR2
: Serial timer control register
: Flash memory control register 1
: Flash memory control register 2
: Erase block register 1
: Erase block register 2
[Legend]
Internal address bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
STCR
FWE pin
Mode pin
FLMCR2
EBR1
EBR2
Note:
*
These registers are exclusively used for the flash memory.
If you try to read these addresses with the mask ROM
version, values read becomes uncertain. Data write is
also disabled with the above version.
Figure 8.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 174 of 1037
8.2.3
Flash Memory Operating Modes
(1) Mode Transitions
When each mode pin and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed,
the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 8.3. In user mode, flash
memory can be read but not programmed or erased.
Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and
programmer mode.
Boot mode
On-board program mode
User
program
mode
User mode
Reset state
Programmer
mode
FWE = 1, MD0 = 0,
P12 = P13 = P14 = 1
RES = 0
RES = 0
FWE = 1
SWE = 1
FWE = 0
or
SWE = 0
RES = 0
MD0 = 1, FWE = 0
RES = 0
Only make a transition between user mode
and user program mode when the CPU is not
accessing the flash memory.
*
1: MD0 = 0, P12 = P13 = 1, P14 = 0
Note:
*
1
Figure 8.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 175 of 1037
(2) On-Board Programming Modes
(a) Boot mode
Flash memory
RAM
Host
Programming control
program
SCI
Application program
(old version)
New application
program
New application
program
Flash memory
This LSI
This LSI
This LSI
This LSI
RAM
Host
SCI
Application program
(old version)
Boot program area
Programming control
program
New application
program
Flash memory
RAM
Host
SCI
Flash memory
preprograming
erase
Boot program
Flash memory
Program execution state
RAM
Host
SCI
New application
program
Boot program
Programming control
program
"
!
"
1. Initial state
The old program version or data remains written
in the flash memory. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new
application program beforehand in the host.
2. Programming control program transfer
When boot mode is entered, the boot program in
the LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is
started and the programing control program in
the host is transferred to RAM via SCI
communication. The boot program required for
flash memory erasing is automatically transferred
to the RAM boot program area.
3. Flash memory initialization
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
4. Writing new application program
The programming control program transferred
from the host to RAM is executed, and the new
application program in the host is written into the
flash memory.
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program area
Boot program
area
Programming
control program
Figure 8.4 Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 176 of 1037
(b) User program mode
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
Programming/erase control program
SCI
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Flash memory erase
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
Program execution state
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Programming/erase
control program
1. Initial state
2. Programming/erase control program transfer
3. Flash memory initialization
4. Writing new application program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
,
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Programming/erase control program
Programming/erase control program
<Flash memory>
New application
program
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
(1) The FWE assessment program that confirms that
the FWE pin has been driven high, and (2) the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from the flash memory to on-chip RAM
should be written into the flash memory by the user
beforehand. (3) The programming/erase control
program should be prepared in the host or in the flash
memory.
When user program mode is entered, user software
confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the
flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase
control program to RAM.
The programming/erase control program in RAM is
executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF).
Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte
units.
Next, the new application program in the host is written
into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to
unerased blocks.
New application
program
<Flash memory>
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
Figure 8.5 User Program Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 177 of 1037
(3) Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Table 8.1
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode
User Program Mode
Entire memory erase
Yes
Yes
Block erase
No
Yes
Programming control program
*
Program/program-verify
Erase/erase-verify
Program/program-verify
Note:
*
To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
(4) Block Configuration
The flash memory is divided into six 32-kbyte blocks, two 8-kbyte blocks, one 16-kbyte
block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks.
8 kbytes
Address H'000000
Address H'03FFFF
256 kbytes
32 kbytes
32 kbytes
32 kbytes
32 kbytes
32 kbytes
256-kbyte version
32 kbytes
28 kbytes
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
16 kbytes
8 kbytes
Figure 8.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 178 of 1037
8.2.4
Pin Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 8.2.
Table 8.2
Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Reset
5(6
Input
Reset
Flash write enable
FWE
Input
Flash program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 0
MD0
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode
Port 12
P12
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 13
P13
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 14
P14
Input
Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Transmit data
SO1
Output
Serial transmit data output
Receive data
SI1
Input
Serial receive data input
8.2.5
Register Configuration
The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 8.3.
In order to access these registers, the FLSHE bit in STCR must be set to 1.
Table 8.3
Flash Memory Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
5
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
2
H'FFF8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFF9
Erase block register 1
EBR1
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFFA
Erase block register 2
EBR2
*
4
R/W
*
1
H'00
*
3
H'FFFB
Serial timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEE
Notes: 1. When the FWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set at 1, writes are disabled.
2. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80.
3. When a low level is input to the FWE pin, or if a high level is input and the SWE bit in
FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00.
4. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are
valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states.
5. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 179 of 1037
8.3
Flash Memory Register Descriptions
8.3.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
7
FWE
--
*
R
6
SWE
0
R/W
5
ESU1
0
R/W
4
PSU1
0
R/W
3
EV1
0
R/W
0
P1
0
R/W
2
PV1
0
R/W
1
E1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note:
*
Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify
mode or erase-verify mode for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF is entered by setting SWE to 1
while FWE is 1 and then setting the EV1 bit or PV1 bit. Program mode for addresses H'00000
to H'1FFFF is entered by setting SWE to 1 while FWE is 1, then setting the PSU1 bit, and finally
setting the P1 bit. Erase mode for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF is entered by setting SWE to 1
while FWE is 1, then setting the ESU1 bit, and finally setting the E1 bit. FLMCR1 is initialized
by a reset, in power-down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and
sleep mode), or when a low level is input to the FWE pin. When a high level is input to the
FWE pin, its initial value is H'80 and when a low level is input, its initial value is H'00.
Writes to the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, and PV1 bits in FLMCR1 are enabled only when FWE =
1 and SWE = 1; writes to the E1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU1 = 1; and writes to
the P1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU1 = 1.
Bit 7: Flash Write Enable (FWE)
Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Bit 7
FWE
Description
0
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
1
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 180 of 1037
Bit 6: Software Write Enable (SWE)
Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits 5 to 0,
bits 5 to 0 in FLMCR2, bits 5 to 0 in EBR1 and bits 7 to 0 in EBR2.
Bit 6
SWE
Description
0
Writes are disabled
(Initial value)
1
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected
Bit 5: Erase-Setup Bit 1 (ESU1)
Prepares erase-mode transition for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF. Set ESU1 to 1 before setting
the E1 bit to 1. Do not set the SWE, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 5
ESU1
Description
0
Erase-setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Erase-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Bit 4: Program-Setup Bit 1 (PSU1)
Prepares erase-mode transition for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF. Set PSU1 to 1 before setting
the P1 bit to 1. Do not set the SWE, ESU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 4
PSU1
Description
0
Program-setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Program-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Bit 3: Erase-Verify (EV1)
Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, PV1, E1, or
P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 3
EV1
Description
0
Erase-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 are selected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 181 of 1037
Bit 2: Program-Verify (PV1)
Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, E1,
or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 2
PV1
Description
0
Program-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE = 1 are selected
Bit 1: Erase (E1)
Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, or P1
bit at the same time.
Bit 1
E1
Description
0
Erase mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 are
selected
Bit 0: Program (P1)
Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, PSU1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, or
E1 bit at the same time.
Bit 0
P1
Description
0
Program mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 are
selected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 182 of 1037
8.3.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
7
FLER
0
R
6
--
0
--
5
ESU2
0
R/W
4
PSU2
0
R/W
3
EV2
0
R/W
0
P2
0
R/W
2
PV2
0
R/W
1
E2
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify
mode or erase-verify mode for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE in
FLMCR1 to 1 while FWE in FLMCR1 is 1 and then setting the EV2 bit or PV2 bit. Program
mode for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE in FLMCR1 to 1 while FWE
in FLMCR1 is 1, then setting the PSU2 bit, and finally setting the P2 bit. Erase mode for
addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF is entered by setting SWE in FLMCR1 to 1 while FWE in
FLMCR1 is 1, then setting the ESU2 bit, and finally setting the E2 bit. FLMCR2 is initialized to
H'00 by a reset, in power-down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module stop mode,
and sleep mode), when a low level is input to the FWE pin, or when a high level is input to the
FWE pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. However, FLER is initialized only by a reset.
Writes to the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, and PV2 bits in FLMCR2 are enabled only when FWE in
FLMCR1 = 1 and SWE in FLMCR1 = 1; writes to the E2 bit only when FWE in FLMCR1 = 1,
SWE in FLMCR1 = 1, and ESU2 = 1; and writes to the P2 bit only when FWE in FLMCR1 = 1,
SWE in FLMCR1 = 1, and PSU2 = 1.
Bit 7: Flash Memory Error (FLER)
Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or
erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state.
Bit 7
FLER
Description
0
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode
(Initial value)
1
An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition] See section 8.8.3, Error Protection
Bits 6: Reserved
This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 183 of 1037
Bit 5: Erase-Setup Bit 2 (ESU2)
Prepares erase-mode transition for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF. Set ESU2 to 1 before setting
the E2 bit to 1. Do not set the PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 5
ESU2
Description
0
Erase-setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Erase-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Bit 4: Program-Setup Bit 2 (PSU2)
Prepares erase-mode transition for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF. Set PSU2 to 1 before setting
the P2 bit to 1. Do not set the ESU2, EV2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 4
PSU2
Description
0
Program-setup cleared
(Initial value)
1
Program-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Bit 3: Erase-Verify 2 (EV2)
Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF. Do not set
the ESU2, PSU2, PV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 3
EV2
Description
0
Erase-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Bit 2: Program-Verify 2 (PV2)
Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing for addresses H'20000 to H'3 FFFF. Do not
set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, E2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 2
PV2
Description
0
Program-verify mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 184 of 1037
Bit 1: Erase 2 (E2)
Selects erase mode transition or clearing for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF. Do not set the
ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, or P2 bit at the same time.
Bit 1
E2
Description
0
Erase mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and ESU2 = 1
Bit 0: Program 2 (P2)
Selects program-mode transition or clearing for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF. Do not set the
ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, or E2 bit at the same time.
Bit 0
P2
Description
0
Program-mode cleared
(Initial value)
1
Transition to program-mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, SWE = 1, and PSU2 = 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 185 of 1037
8.3.3
Erase Block Registers 1 (EBR1)
7
--
0
--
6
--
0
--
5
EB13
0
R/W
4
EB12
0
R/W
3
EB11
0
R/W
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
EB10
0
R/W
1
EB9
0
R/W
Bit
EBR1
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
:
EBR1 is a register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR1 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in power-down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module
stop mode, and sleep mode), when a low level is input to the FWE pin, or when a high level is
input to the FWE pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 is set, the
corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1
or EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set).
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 8.3.
8.3.4
Erase Block Registers 2 (EBR2)
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit
EBR2
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
:
EBR2 is a register that specifies the flash memory erase area block by block. EBR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in power-down state (excluding the medium-speed mode, module
stop mode, and sleep mode), when a low level is input to the FWE pin, or when a high level is
input to the FWE pin and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR2 is set, the
corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1
or EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set).
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 8.4.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 186 of 1037
Table 8.4
Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (Size)
128-kbyte Versions
Address
EB0 (1 kbyte)
H'000000 to H'0003FF
EB1 (1 kbyte)
H'000400 to H'0007FF
EB2 (1 kbyte)
H'000800 to H'000BFF
EB3 (1 kbyte)
H'000C00 to H'000FFF
EB4 (28 kbytes)
H'001000 to H'007FFF
EB5 (16 kbytes)
H'008000 to H'00BFFF
EB6 (8 kbytes)
H'00C000 to H'00DFFF
EB7 (8 kbytes)
H'00E000 to H'00FFFF
EB8 (32 kbytes)
H'010000 to H'017FFF
EB9 (32 kbytes)
H'018000 to H'01FFFF
EB10 (32 kbytes)
H'020000 to H'027FFF
EB11 (32 kbytes)
H'028000 to H'02FFFF
EB12 (32 kbytes)
H'030000 to H'037FFF
EB13 (32 kbytes)
H'038000 to H'03FFFF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 187 of 1037
8.3.5
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
7
--
0
--
6
IICX
0
R/W
5
IICRST
0
R/W
4
--
0
--
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
--
0
--
2
--
0
--
1
--
0
--
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the I
2
C bus interface
operating mode, and on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the I
2
C bus
interface serial clock frequency. For details on functions not related to on-chip flash memory,
see section 25.2.7, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR), and descriptions of individual
modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit.
STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 6 to 5: I
2
C Control (IICX, IICRST)
These bits control the operation of the I
2
C bus interface. For details, see section 25, I
2
C Bus
Interface.
Bit 3: Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE)
Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If
FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash
memory control register contents are retained.
Bit 3
FLSHE
Description
0
Flash memory control registers deselected
(Initial value)
1
Flash memory control registers selected
Bits 7, 4 and 2 to 0: Reserved
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 188 of 1037
8.4
On-Board Programming Modes
When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be
performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot
mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown
in table 8.5. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 8.3.
Table 8.5
Setting On-Board Programming Modes
Mode
Pin
Mode Name
FWE
MD0
P12
P13
P14
Boot mode
1
0
1
*
2
1
*
2
1
*
2
User program mode
1
*
1
1
Notes: 1. In user program mode, the FWE pin should not be constantly set to 1. Set FWE to 1
to make a transition to user program mode before performing a program/erase/verify
operation.
2. Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 189 of 1037
8.4.1
Boot Mode
When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in
the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode.
When a reset-start is executed after the MCU's pins have been set to boot mode, the boot
program built into the MCU is started and the programming control program prepared in the host
is serially transmitted to the MCU via the SCI1. In the MCU, the programming control program
received via the SCI1 is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM.
After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control
program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory
programming is performed).
The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the
programming algorithm given later.
The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 8.7, and the boot program mode
execution procedure in figure 8.8.
SI1
SO1
SCI1
This LSI
Flash memory
Write data reception
Verify data
transmission
Host
On-chip RAM
Figure 8.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 190 of 1037
Start
Set pins to boot mode and
execute reset-start
Host transfers data (H'00)
continuously at prescribed bit rate
Host transmits programming
control program sequentially in
byte units
Transfer received programming
control program to on-chip RAM
This LSI calculates bit rate and
sets value in bit rate register
Host transmits number of
programming control program
bytes (N), upper byte followed by
lower byte
This LSI transmits received
programming control program to
host as verify data (echo-back)
n = 1
End of transmission
n = N?
n+1
n
Note :
Yes
No
This LSI measures low period of
H'00 data transmitted by host
After bit rate adjustment, transmits
one H'00 data byte to host to
indicate end of adjustment
Upon receiving H'55, this LSI
transmits one H'AA data byte to
host
Host confirms normal reception of
bit rate adjustment end indication
(H'00) and transmits one H'55
data byte
Execute programming control
program transferred to on-chip
RAM
This LSI transmits received
number of bytes to host as verify
data (echo-back)
If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one
H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and
subsequent operations are halted.
After confirming that all flash
memory data has been erased,
this LSI transmits one H'AA data
byte to host
Check flash memory data, and if
data has already been written,
erase all blocks
Figure 8.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 191 of 1037
(1) Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
Start
bit
Stop
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data)
High period
(1 or more bits)
Figure 8.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
When boot mode is initiated, the MCU measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI
communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive
format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The MCU calculates the bit rate
of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to
the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment
end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the MCU. If
reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above
operations. Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the MCU's system clock
frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the MCU. To ensure
correct SCI operation, the host's transfer bit rate should be set to (2400, 4800, or 9600) bps.
Table 8.6 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic
adjustment of the MCU's bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this
system clock range.
Table 8.6
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit
Rate is Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment
of This LSI Bit Rate is Possible
9600 bps
8 MHz to 10 MHz
4800 bps
4 MHz to 10 MHz
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 192 of 1037
(2) On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode
In boot mode, the RAM area is divided into; the area for use by the boot program and the
area to which programming control program is transferred by the SCI, as shown in figure
8.10. The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state
in boot mode for the programming control program transferred to RAM.
H'FFE7B0
H'FFF3AF
Programming
control program
area
(2944 bytes)
Reserved area
(128 bytes)
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFF2F
Boot program
area
*
(3 kbytes)
Note:
*
The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution
state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot
program reamins stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming
control program.
Figure 8.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 193 of 1037
(3) Notes on Use of Boot Mode:
(a) When reset is released in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI1's
SI1 pin. The reset should end with SI1 pin high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100
states for the chip to get ready to measure the low period of the SI1 pin input.
(b) In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not
1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is
unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program
activated in user program mode is accidentally erased.
(c) Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
(d) The SI1 and SO1 pins should be pulled up on the board.
(e) Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H' FFF3B0), the chip
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing
the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The
transmit data output pin, SO1, goes to the high-level output state (P21PCR = 1, P21PDR
= 1).
The contents of the CPU's internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these
registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control
program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls,
etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program.
The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed.
(f) Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 8.6 and executing a
reset-start.
When the chip detects the boot mode setting at reset release
*1
, it retains that state
internally.
Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then
setting the FWE pin and mode pins, and executing reset release
*1
. Boot mode can also be
cleared by a WDT overflow reset.
If the mode pin input levels are changed in boot mode, the boot mode state will be
maintained in the microcomputer, and boot mode continued, unless a reset occurs.
However, the FWE pin must not be driven low while the boot program is running or flash
memory is being programmed or erased
*2
.
Notes: 1. Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t
MDS
= 4
states) with respect to the reset release timing.
2. For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 8.9, Flash
Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 194 of 1037
8.4.2
User Program Mode
When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a
user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash
memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of FWE control and supply of
programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as
necessary.
In this mode, the chip starts up in mode 1 and applies a high level to the FWE pin.
The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 to perform programming or
erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip
RAM or external memory.
Figure 8.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when
transferred to on-chip RAM.
Clear FWE
*
FWE = high
*
Branch to flash memory
application program
Branch to program/erase control
program in RAM area
Execute program/erase control
program (flash memory rewriting)
Transfer program/erase
control program to RAM
MD0 = 1
Reset start
Write the FWE assessment program and
transfer program (and the program/erase
control program if necessary) beforehand
Note:
Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin. Apply a high level to the FWE pin only
when the flash memory is programmed or erased. Also, while a high level is applied to the
FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or
overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
*
For further information on FWE application and disconnection, see section 8.9, Flash
Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Figure 8.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure (Preliminary)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 195 of 1037
8.5
Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by
software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. For addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF,
transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU1, ESU1, P1, E1, PV1 and EV1 bits in
FLMCR1 and for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF, transitions to these modes can be made by
setting the PSU2, ESU2, P2, E2, PV2 and EV1 bits in FLMCR2.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program
that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be
located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1,
E1, and P1 bits in FLMCR1, and the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2 and P2 bits in
FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory.
2. When programming or erasing, set FWE to 1 (programming/erasing will not be
executed if FWE = 0).
3.
Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming
on previously programmed addresses.
Do not program addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and H'20000 to H'3FFFF at the same
time. Operation is not guaranteed if both areas are programmed at the same time.
8.5.1
Program Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'0000 to H'1FFFF and n= 2 for addresses
H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 8.12 to write
data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32
bytes at a time.
Table 29.9 in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics, lists wait time (x, y, z,
,
,
,
and
) after setting or clearing each bit on the flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1 and
FLMCR2) and the maximum write count (N).
Following the elapse of (x)
s or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control
register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram
data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write
addresses. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80,
H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program
address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be
performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway,
etc. Set more than (y + z +
+
)
s as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 196 of 1037
program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the
elapse of (y)
s or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the Pn bit
in FLMCRn. The time during which the Pn bit is set is the flash memory programming time.
Make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of
(z)
s.
8.5.2
Program-Verify Mode (n =1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for
addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the Pn bit in
FLMCRn is cleared, then the PSUn bit in FLMCRn is cleared at least (
)
s later). The
watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of (
)
s or more, and the operating mode is switched
to program-verify mode by setting the PVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in program-verify
mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy
write should be executed after the elapse of (
)
s or more. When the flash memory is read in
this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least
(
)
s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written
data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 8.12) and
transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-
verify mode, wait for at least (
)
s, then clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is
necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before.
However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times
on the same bits.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 197 of 1037
START
End of
programming
Programming
failure
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait (x) s
Store 32-byte program data in program data area
and reprogram data area
n = 1
m = 0
Enable WDT
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Wait (y) s
Set P bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Wait (z) s
Start of programming
Clear P bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Wait ( ) s
Wait ( ) s
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
Wait ( ) s
Wait ( ) s
*
5
*
3
*
2
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
5
*
4
*
1
*
5
Wait ( ) s
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Disable WDT
Set PV bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Reprogram data computation
*
4
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
m = 1
End of programming
Program data = verify data?
End of 32-byte
data verification?
m = 0?
Increment address
YES
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n N?
n
n+1
Notes:
Program data
0
0
1
1
Verify data
0
1
0
1
Reprogram data
1
0
1
1
Comments
Do not reprogram bits for which
programming has been completed.
Programming incomplete; reprogramming
should be performed.
--
Still in erased state; no action
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Write 32-byte data in RAM reprogram data
area consecutively to flash memory
Programming must be excuted in the erased state.
Do not perform additional programming on
addresses that have already been programmed.
RAM
Program data storage
area (32 bytes)
Reprogram data
storage area (32 bytes)
Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40,
H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0,, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in
this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Even in case of the bit which is already-programmed in the 32-byte programming loop, perform additional
programming if the bit fails at the next verify.
An area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents
of the latter are rewritten as programming progresses.
The values of x, y, z, , , , , and N are listed in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 8.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 198 of 1037
8.5.3
Erase Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for address
H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the
erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 8.13.
Table 28.9 in section 28.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics lists wait time (x, y, z,
,
,
,
and
) after setting or clearing each bit on the flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1 and
FLMCR2) and the maximum clearing count (N).
To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased
in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least (x)
s after setting the SWE bit to 1 in
flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent
overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set more than (y + z +
+
) ms as the WDT
overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the
ESUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the elapse of (y)
s or more, the operating mode is switched to
erase mode by setting the En bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the En bit is set is the
flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms.
Note:
With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased
to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
8.5.4
Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for
address H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the En bit in FLMCRn is cleared, then
the ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (
)
s later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the
elapse of (
)
s or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the
EVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should
be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (
)
s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the
data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (
)
s after the dummy write before performing
this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the
next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode
again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the
erase/erase-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When verification is
completed, exit erase-verify mode, and wait for at least (
)
s. If erasure has been completed on
all the erase blocks, clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1
bit setting in EBR1 or EBR2 for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-
verify sequence in the same way.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 199 of 1037
End of erasing
START
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Set ESU bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Set E bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Wait (x) s
Wait (y) s
n = 1
Set EBR1, EBR2
Enable WDT
*
2
*
4
*
2
Wait (z) ms
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
Set block start address to
verify address
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
Wait ( ) s
*
2
*
2
*
2
*
3
*
5
Start of erase
Clear E bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Clear ESU bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Set EV bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Wait ( ) s
Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Disable WDT
Halt erase
*
1
Verify data =
all 1?
End of erasing of
all erase blocks?
Erase failure
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
n N?
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Increment
address
n
n+1
Last address
of block?
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary.
The values of x, y, z, , , , , and N are listed in section 29.2.7, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Set only one bit in EBR1 or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially.
Figure 8.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 200 of 1037
8.6
Flash Memory Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
8.6.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1
and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 8.7.)
Table 8.7
Hardware Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
FWE pin
protection
When a low level is input to the FWE pin, FLMCR1,
FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered
Yes
Yes
Reset/standby
protection
In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in
power-down state (excluding the medium-speed
mode, module stop mode, and sleep mode),
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (excluding the FLER bit), EBR1,
and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-
protected state is entered
In a reset via the
5(6
pin, the reset state is not
entered unless the
5(6
pin is held low until oscillation
stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset
during operation, hold the
5(6
pin low for the
5(6
pulse width specified in the AC characteristics section
Yes
Yes
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 201 of 1037
8.6.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1 and erase block
registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P1 or E1 bit
in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), or setting the P2 or E2 bit in flash memory
control register 2 (FLMCR2) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See
table 8.8.)
Table 8.8
Software Protection
Functions
Item
Description
Program
Erase
SWE bit
protection
Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the
program/erase-protected state for all blocks
(Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory)
Yes
Yes
Block
specification
protection
Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by
settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1,
EBR2)
Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in
the erase-protected state
-
Yes
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 202 of 1037
8.6.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in
FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2
settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error
occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P1, E1, P2 or E2
bit. However, PV1, EV1, PV2 or EV2 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to
verify mode.
FLER bit setting conditions are as follows:
(1) When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or
instruction fetch)
(2) Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing
(3) When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Figure 8.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
: Memory read possible
: Verify-read possible
: Programming possible
: Erasing possible
RD
VF
PR
ER
: Memory read not possible
: Verify-read not possible
: Programming not possible
: Erasing not possible
RD
VF
PR
ER
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Error occurrence
Error occurrence
SLEEP instruction
execution
RES = 0
RES = 0
RES = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Program mode
Erase mode
Reset
(hardware protection)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
Error protection mode
Error protection mode
(Power-down state)
*
1
Power-down state
*
1
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, EBR2 initialization
state
Power-down state
*
1
release
*
1: Watch mode, standby mode, and
subactive mode
Figure 8.14 Flash Memory State Transitions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 203 of 1037
8.7
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including NMI input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or
erased (when the Pn or En bit is set in FLMCRn), and while the boot program is executing in
boot mode
*1
, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this:
(1) Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or
erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.
(2) In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector
would not be read correctly
*2
, possibly resulting in MCU runaway.
(3) If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the
normal boot mode sequence.
For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling
interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal
erasing and programming or MCU operation. All requests, including NMI input, must therefore
be disabled inside and outside the MCU during FWE application. Interrupt is also disabled in
the error-protection state while the Pn or En bit remains set in FLMCRn.
Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until data write by
the write control program is complete.
2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:
If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the Pn or En bit
is set in FLMCRn), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will
be returned).
If the interrupt entry in the interrupt vector table has not been programmed yet,
interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 204 of 1037
8.8
Flash Memory Programmer Mode
8.8.1
Programmer Mode Setting
Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In programmer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using
a PROM programmer that supports Hitachi microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on-chip
flash memory. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read
mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status
read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals
are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
8.8.2
Socket Adapters and Memory Map
In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the writer programmer. The socket
adapter product codes are listed in table 8.9.
Figure 8.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode.
Table 8.9
Socket Adapter Product Codes
Product Codes
Package
Socket Adapter Product Code
HD64F2194C
112-pin QFP
ME2194ESHF1H
This LSI
H'000000
MCU mode
Programmmer mode
H'03FFFF
H'00000
H'3FFFF
On-chip ROM area
(256 kbytes)
Figure 8.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 205 of 1037
8.8.3
Programmer Mode Operation
Table 8.10 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and
table 8.11 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
(1) Memory Read Mode
Memory read mode supports byte reads.
(2) Auto-Program Mode
Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to
confirm the end of auto-programming.
(3) Auto-Erase Mode
Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is
used to confirm the end of auto-erasing.
(4) Status Read Mode
Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be
confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an
error occurs.
Table 8.10 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode
Pin Names
Mode
FWE
&(
&(
2(
2(
:(
:(
FO0 to FO7
FA0 to FA17
Read
H or L
L
L
H
Data output
Ain
Output disable
H or L
L
H
H
Hi-z
X
Command write
H or L
*
3
L
H
L
Data input
Ain
*
2
Chip disable
*
1
H or L
L
X
X
Hi-z
X
Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
3. For command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode,
input a high level to the FWE pin.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 206 of 1037
Table 8.11 Programmer Mode Commands
1st Cycle
2nd Cycle
Command Name
Number of
Cycles
Mode
Address
Data
Mode
Address
Data
Memory read mode
1+n
write
X
H'00
read
RA
Dout
Auto-program mode
129
write
X
H'40
write
WA
Din
Auto-erase mode
2
write
X
H'20
write
X
H'20
Status read mode
2
write
X
H'71
write
X
H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a
simultaneous 128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 207 of 1037
8.8.4
Memory Read Mode
(1) After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait
state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode
by means of a command write before the read is executed.
(2) Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state.
(3) Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.
(4) After power-on, memory read mode is entered.
Table 8.12 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
H'00
OE
WE
Command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
f
t
r
t
nxtc
Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE.
t
ces
Memory read mode
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
Figure 8.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 208 of 1037
Table 8.13 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
H'XX
OE
WE
XX mode command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
nxtc
Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time.
t
ces
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
t
f
t
r
Figure 8.17 Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 209 of 1037
Table 8.14 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Access time
t
acc
20
s
&(
output delay time
t
ce
150
ns
2(
output delay time
t
oe
150
ns
Output disable delay time
t
df
100
ns
Data output hold time
t
oh
5
ns
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
VIL
VIL
VIH
OE
WE
t
acc
t
oh
t
oh
t
acc
ADDRESS STABLE
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
DATA
Figure 8.18 Timing Waveforms for
/
Enable State Read
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
VIH
OE
WE
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
t
oh
t
oh
t
df
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
ADDRESS STABLE
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
DATA
t
df
Figure 8.19 Timing Waveforms for
/
Clocked Read
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 210 of 1037
8.8.5
Auto-Program Mode
(a) In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried
out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
(b) A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
(c) The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an
effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write
error will be flagged.
(d) Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 8.20). Do not perform
transfer after the second cycle.
(e) Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
(f) Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address.
Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations.
(g) Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end
identification pin).
(h) The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write.
Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling
and .
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 211 of 1037
Table 8.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t
wsts
1
ms
Status polling access time
t
spa
150
ns
Address setup time
t
as
0
ns
Address hold time
t
ah
60
ns
Memory write time
t
write
1
3000
ms
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Write setup time
t
pns
100
ns
Write end setup time
t
pnh
100
ns
CE
FWE
ADDRESS
FO7
OE
WE
t
nxtc
t
wsts
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ds
t
dh
t
wep
t
as
t
pnh
t
pns
t
ah
t
ceh
ADDRESS STABLE
Data transfer
1 byte to 128 bytes
FO6
Programming wait
DATA
DATA
H'40
DATA
FO0 to 5 = 0
t
f
t
r
t
write
(1 to 3,000 ms)
Programming operation
end identification signal
Programming normal end
identification signal
Figure 8.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 212 of 1037
8.8.6
Auto-Erase Mode
(a) Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.
(b) Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.
(c) Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can
also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end
identification pin).
(d) The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write.
Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling
and .
Table 8.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
Status polling start time
t
ests
1
ms
Status polling access time
t
spa
150
ns
Memory erase time
t
erase
100
40000
ms
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Erase setup time
t
ens
100
ns
Erase end setup time
t
enh
100
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 213 of 1037
CE
FWE
ADDRESS
FO5 to FO0
FO6
FO7
OE
WE
t
erase
(100 to 40000ms)
t
ests
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ceh
t
dh
CL
in
DL
in
t
ds
t
wep
t
ens
FO0 to 5 = 0
H'20
H'20
t
enh
Erase end
identification signal
Erase normal end
identification signal
t
f
t
r
Figure 8.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
8.8.7
Status Read Mode
(1) Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode
when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode.
(2) The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is
performed.
Table 8.17 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode
(Conditions: V
CC
= 5.0 V
10%, V
SS
= 0 V, Ta = 25
C
5
C)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Command write cycle
t
nxtc
20
s
&(
hold time
t
ceh
0
ns
&(
setup time
t
ces
0
ns
Data hold time
t
dh
50
ns
Data setup time
t
ds
50
ns
Write pulse width
t
wep
70
ns
2(
output delay time
t
oe
150
ns
Disable delay time
t
df
100
ns
&(
output delay time
t
ce
150
ns
:(
rise time
t
r
30
ns
:(
fall time
t
f
30
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 214 of 1037
CE
ADDRESS
DATA
OE
WE
t
ces
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
df
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
t
ces
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
wep
t
wep
DATA
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
oe
t
ce
t
nxtc
H'71
H'71
t
f
t
r
t
f
t
r
Figure 8.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Table 8.18 Status Read Mode Return Commands
Pin Name
FO7
FO6
FO5
FO4
FO3
FO2
FO1
FO0
Attribute
Normal
end
identifica-
tion
Command
error
Program-
ming error
Erase
error
Program-
ming or
erase
count
exceeded
Effective
address
error
Initial
value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Indica-
tions
Normal
end: 0
Abnormal
end: 1
Command
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Program-
ming error:
1
Otherwise:
0
Erase
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Count
exceeded:
1
Otherwise:
0
Effective
address
error: 1
Otherwise:
0
Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 215 of 1037
8.8.8
Status Polling
(1) The FO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase
mode.
(2) The FO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-
erase mode.
Table 8.19 Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin Names
Internal Operation
in Progress
Abnormal End
Normal End
FO7
0
1
0
1
FO6
0
0
1
1
FO0 to FO5
0
0
0
0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 216 of 1037
8.8.9
Programmer Mode Transition Time
Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer
mode setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read
mode.
Table 8.20 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Standby release
(oscillation stabilization time)
t
osc1
10
ms
Programmer mode setup time
t
bmv
10
ms
V
CC
hold time
t
dwn
0
ms
V
CC
RES
FWE
Memory read
mode
Command wait
state
Command
wait state
Normal/abnormal
end identifica-
tion
Auto-program mode
Auto-erase mode
t
osc1
t
bmv
t
dwn
Note: Except in auto-program mode and auto-erase mode, drive the FWE input pin low.
Don't care
Don't care
Figure 8.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time,
Boot Program Transfer Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence
8.8.10
Notes On Memory Programming
(1) When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out auto-
erasing before auto-programming.
(2) When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been
programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before
carrying out auto-programming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by
Hitachi. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended
that auto-erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 217 of 1037
8.9
Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode and programmer mode are
summarized below.
(1) Use the Specified Voltages and Timing for Programming and Erasing
Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Use a PROM
programmer that supports Hitachi microcomputer device type with 256-kbyte on-chip flash
memory.
Do not select the HN28F101 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified
socket adapter. Incorrect use will result in damaging the device.
(2) Powering On and Off
Do not apply a high level to the FWE pin until V
CC
has stabilized. Also, drive the FWE pin
low before turning off V
CC
.
When applying or disconnecting V
CC
, fix the FWE pin low and place the flash memory in the
hardware protection state.
The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a
power failure and subsequent recovery.
(3) FWE Application/Disconnection
FWE application should be carried out when MCU operation is in a stable condition. If
MCU operation is not stable, fix the FWE pin low and set the protection state.
The following points must be observed concerning FWE application and disconnection to
prevent unintentional programming or erasing of flash memory:
(a) Apply FWE when the V
CC
voltage has stabilized within its rated voltage range.
(b) In boot mode, apply and disconnect FWE during a reset.
(c) In user program mode, FWE can be switched between high and low level regardless of
the reset state. FWE input can also be switched during program execution in flash
memory.
(d) Do not apply FWE if program runaway has occurred.
(e) Disconnect FWE only when the SWE, ESU1, ESU2, PSU1, PSU2, EV1, EV2, PV1, PV2,
P1, P2, E1 and E2 bits in FLMCR1 and FLMCR2 are cleared.
Make sure that the SWE, ESU1, ESU2, PSU1, PSU2, EV1, EV2, PV1, PV2, P1, P2, E1
and E2 bits are not set by mistake when applying or disconnecting FWE.
(4) Do Not Apply a Constant High Level to the FWE Pin
Apply a high level to the FWE pin only when programming or erasing flash memory. A
system configuration in which a high level is constantly applied to the FWE should be
avoided. Also, while a high level is applied to the FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be
activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 218 of 1037
(5) Use the Recommended Algorithm when Programming and Erasing Flash Memory
The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without
subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting
the Pn or En bit in FLMCR1 and FLMCR2, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a
precaution against program runaway, etc.
(6) Do Not Set or Clear the SWE Bit During Program Execution in Flash Memory
Clear the SWE bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory.
When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but flash memory should
only be accessed for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing).
(7) Do Not Use Interrupts while Flash Memory is Being Programmed or Erased
All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled during FWE application to give
priority to program/erase operations.
(8) Do Not Perform Additional Programming. Erase the Memory before Reprogramming.
In on-board programming, perform only one programming operation on a 32-byte
programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming
operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with
the entire programming unit block erased.
(9) Before Programming, Check that the Chip is Correctly Mounted in the PROM Programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer
socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(10)Do Not Touch the Socket Adapter or Chip During Programming.
Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 219 of 1037
8.10
Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are
provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 8.21 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT
version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 8.21 is read in the mask
ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed
on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to
ensure that the registers in table 8.21 have no effect.
Table 8.21 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version
Register
Abbreviation
Address
Flash memory control register 1
FLMCR1
H'FFF8
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR2
H'FFF9
Erase block register 1
EBR1
H'FFFA
Erase block register 2
EBR2
H'FFFB
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 220 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 221 of 1037
Section 9 RAM
9.1
Overview
The H8S/2194C, H8S/2194B, and H8S/2194A have 6 kbytes, and the H8S/2194, H8S/2193,
H8S/2192 and H8S/2191 have 3 kbytes, of on-chip high-speed static RAM. The on-chip RAM
is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte data and word data to be
accessed in one state. This makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer.
9.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'FFF3B0
H'FFF3B2
H'FFF3B4
H'FFFFAE
H'FFF3B1
H'FFF3B3
H'FFF3B5
H'FFFFAF
Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2194)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 222 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 223 of 1037
Section 10 Clock Pulse Generator
10.1
Overview
This LSI has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (
), the bus
master clock, and internal clocks.
The clock pulse generator consists of a system clock oscillator, a duty adjustment circuit, clock
selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, subclock oscillator, and subclock division circuit.
10.1.1
Block Diagram
Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
System
clock
oscillator
Duty
adjustment
circuit
Clock
selection
circuit
Medium-
speed clock
divider
Subclock
oscillator
Subclock
division
circuit
OSC1
OSC2
X1
X2
/16, /32, /64
w/2, w/4, w/8
SUB
or SUB
Timer A
count clock
Internal clock
To supporting modules
Bus master clock
To CPU
SUB ( w/2, w/4, w/8)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
10.1.2
Register Configuration
The clock pulse generator is controlled by SBYCR and LPWRCR. Table 10.1 shows the register
configuration.
Table 10.1 CPG Registers
Name
Abbreviation
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
Standby control register
SBYCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEA
Low-power control
register
LPWRCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEB
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 224 of 1037
10.2
Register Descriptions
10.2.1
Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
--
0
--
0
SCK0
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
SCK1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
Only bits 0 and 1 are described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.1,
Standby Register (SBYCR). SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 1 and 0: System Clock Select 1 and 0 (SCK1, SCK0)
These bits select the bus master clock for high-speed mode and medium-speed mode.
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCK1
SCK0
Description
0
Bus master is in high-speed mode
(Initial value)
0
1
Medium-speed clock is
/16
0
Medium-speed clock is
/32
1
1
Medium-speed clock is
/64
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 225 of 1037
10.2.2
Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
7
DTON
0
R/W
6
LSON
0
R/W
5
NESEL
0
R/W
4
--
0
--
3
--
0
--
0
SA0
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
SA1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
Only bit 1 and 0 is described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.2, Low-
Power Control Register (LPWRCR).
LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 1 and 0: Subactive Mode Clock Select (SA1, SA0)
Selects CPU clock for subactive mode. In subactive mode, writes are disabled.
Bit 1
Bit 0
SA1
SA0
Description
0
CPU operating clock is
w/8
(Initial value)
0
1
CPU operating clock is
w/4
1
*
CPU operating clock is
w/2
Note:
*
Don't care
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 226 of 1037
10.3
Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock.
10.3.1
Connecting a Crystal Resonator
(1) Circuit Configuration
A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 10.2. An AT-cut
parallel-resonance crystal should be used.
OSC1
OSC2
R
f
C
L2
C
L1
C
L1 =
C
L2
= 10 to 22pF
R
f =
1M 20%
Figure 10.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)
(2) Crystal Resonator
Figure 10.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that
has the characteristics shown in table 10.2 and the same frequency as the system clock (
).
OSC1
C
L
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
OSC2
C
0
L
R
s
Figure 10.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Table 10.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
8
10
R
S
max (
)
80
60
C
O
max (pF)
7
7
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 227 of 1037
(3) Note on Board Design
When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted.
Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from
interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 10.4.
When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as
possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins.
C
L2
Signal A Signal B
C
L1
This chip
OSC1
OSC2
Avoid
R
f
Figure 10.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 228 of 1037
10.3.2
External Clock Input
(1) Circuit Configuration
An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 10.5. If the OSC2
pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF.
In example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode, subactive
mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode.
OSC1
OSC2
External clock input
Open
(a) OSC2 pin left open
OSC1
OSC2
External clock input
(b) Completely clock input at OSC2 pin
Figure 10.5 External Clock Input (Examples)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 229 of 1037
(2) External Clock
The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the system clock (
).
Table 10.3 and figure 10.6 show the input conditions for the external clock.
Table 10.3 External Clock Input Conditions
V
CC
= 4.0 to 5.5 V
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Test Conditions
External clock input low
pulse width
t
CPL
40
ns
External clock input
high pulse width
t
CPH
40
ns
External clock rise time
t
CPr
10
ns
External clock fall time
t
CPf
10
ns
Figure 10.6
t
CPH
t
CPL
t
CPr
t
CPf
OSC1
Figure 10.6 External Clock Input Timing
Table 10.4 shows the external clock output settling delay time, and figure 10.7 shows the
external clock output settling delay timing. The oscillator and duty adjustment circuit have a
function for adjusting the waveform of the external clock input at the OSC1 pin. When the
prescribed clock signal is input at the OSC1 pin, internal clock signal output is fixed after the
elapse of the external clock output settling delay time (t
DEXT
). As the clock signal output is not
fixed during the t
DEXT
period, the reset signal should be driven low to maintain the reset state.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 230 of 1037
Table 10.4 External Clock Output Settling Delay Time
(Conditions: V
CC
= 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AV
CC
= 4.0 V to 5.5 V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0 V)
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
External clock output settling
delay time
t
DEXT
*
500
s
Figure 10.7
Note:
*
t
DEXT
includes 20 t
CYC
of
#$
pulse width (t
RESW
).
t
DEXT
*
RES
(Internal)
OSC1
V
CC
4.0 V
Note:
*
t
DEXT
includes 20 t
cyc
of RES pulse width (t
RESW
).
Figure 10.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 231 of 1037
10.4
Duty Adjustment Circuit
When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty
cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (
).
10.5
Medium-Speed Clock Divider
The medium-speed divider divides the system clock to generate
/16,
/32, and
/64 clocks.
10.6
Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
The bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock (
) or one of the medium-speed
clocks (
/16,
/32 or
/64) to be supplied to the bus master (CPU), according to the settings of
bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SBYCR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 232 of 1037
10.7
Subclock Oscillator Circuit
10.7.1
Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator
When using a subclock, connect a 32.768 kHz crystal resonator to X1 and X2 pins as shown in
figure 10.8.
For precautions on connecting, see section 10.3.1 (3), Note on Board Design.
The subclock input conditions are shown in figure 10.10.
X1
X2
C
2
C
1
C
1
= C
2
= 15 pF (Typ)
Figure 10.8 Connecting a 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator (Example)
Figure 10.9 shows a crystal resonator equivalent circuit.
X1
C
S
C
0
= 1.5 pF (Typ)
R
S
= 14 k (Typ)
f
W
= 32.768 kHz
Note: Values shown are the reference values.
X2
C
0
L
s
R
s
Figure 10.9 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 233 of 1037
10.7.2
External Clock Input
(1) Circuit Configuration
When external clock input connect to the X1 pin, and X2 pin should remain open as
connection example of figure 10.10.
X1
X2
Open
External clock input
Figure 10.10 Connection Example When Inputting External Clock
10.7.3
When Subclock is not Needed
Connect X1 pin to V
CC
, and X2 pin should remain open as shown in figure 10.11.
X1
X2
V
CC
Open
Figure 10.11 Terminal When Subclock is not Needed
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 234 of 1037
10.8
Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit
To eliminate noise in the subclock input from the X1 pin, this circuit samples the clock using a
clock obtained by dividing the
clock. The sampling frequency is set with the NESEL bit in
LPWRCR. For details, see section 4.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR). The clock
is not sampled in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode.
10.9
Notes on the Resonator
Resonator characteristics are closely related to the user board design. Perform appropriate
assessment of resonator connection, mask version and F-ZTAT, by referring to the connection
example given in this section. The resonator circuit rate differs depending on the free capacity
of the resonator and the execution circuit, so consult with the resonator manufacturer before
determination. Make sure the voltage applied to the resonator pin does not exceed the maximum
rated voltage.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 235 of 1037
Section 11 I/O Port
11.1
Overview
11.1.1
Port Functions
This LSI has seven 8-bit I/O ports (including one CMOS high-current port), one 4-bit I/O port,
and one 8-bit input port. Table 11.1 shows the functions of each port. Each I/O part a port
control register (PCR) that controls an input and output and a port data register (PDR) for storing
output data. The input and output can be controlled in a unit of bit. The pin whose peripheral
function is used both as an alternative function can set the pin function in a unit of bit by a port
mode register (PMR).
11.1.2
Port Input
(1) Reading a Port
When a general port of PCR = 0 (input) is read, the pin level is read.
When a general port of PCR = 1 (output) is read, the value of the corresponding PDR bit
is read.
When the pins (excluding AN7 to AN0 and RP7 to RP0 pins) set to the peripheral
function are read, the results are as given in items (1) and (2) according to the PCR value.
(2) Processing Input Pins
The general input port or general I/O port is gated by read signals. Unused pins can be left
open if they are not read. However, if an open pin is read, a feedthrough current may apply
during the read period according to an intermediate level. The read period is about one-state.
Relevant ports: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8
When an alternative pin is set to an alternative function other than the general I/O, always set
the pin level to a high or low level. If the pin is left open, a feedthrough current applies
according to an intermediate level, which adversely affects reliability, causes malfunctions,
and in the worst case may damage the pin.
Because the PMR is not initialized in low power consumption mode, pay attention to the pin
input level after the mode has been shifted to the low power consumption mode.
Relevant pins:
,&, ,54 to ,54, SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2, &6, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID,
TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*, EXCAP, EXTTRG
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 236 of 1037
Table 11.1 Port Functions
Port
Description
Pins
Alternative Functions
Function
Switching
Register
Port 0
P07 to P00 input-only
ports
P70/AN7 to
P00/AN0
Analog data input channels 7 to 0
PMR0
P17/TMOW
Prescalar unit frequency division clock
output
P16/
,&
Prescalar unit input capture input
Port 1
P17 to P10 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-up
transistors)
P15/
,54
to
P10/
,54
External interrupt request input
PMR1
P27/SCK2
SCI2 clock I/O
P26/SO2
SCI2 transmit data output
P25/SI2
SCI2 receive data input
PMR2
P24/SCL
I
2
C bus interface clock I/O
P23/SDA
I
2
C bus interface data I/O
ICCR
P22/SCK1
SCI1 clock I/O
P21/SO1
SCI1 transmit data output
Port 2
P27 to P20 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-up
transistors)
P20/SI1
SCI1 receive data input
SMR
SCR
P37/TMO
Timer J timer output
P36/BUZZ
Timer J buzzer output
P35/PWM3 to
P32/PWM0
8-bit PWM output
P31/STRB
SCI2 strobe output
Port 3
P37 to P30 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-up
transistors)
P30/
&6
SCI2 chip select input
PMR3
P47
None
P46/FTOB
Timer X output compare B output
P45/FTOA
Timer X output compare A output
TOCR
P44/FTID
Timer X input capture D input
P43/FTIC
Timer X input capture C input
P42/FTIB
Timer X input capture B input
P41/FTIA
Timer X input capture A input
Port 4
P47 to P40 I/O ports
P40/PWM14
14-bit PWM output
PMR4
P53/TRIG
Realtime output port trigger input
P52/TMBI
Timer B event input
PMR5
P51
None
Port 5
P53 to P50 I/O ports
P50/
$'75*
A/D conversion start external trigger
input
ADTSR
Port 6
P67 to P60 I/O ports
P67/RP7 to
P60/RP0
Realtime output port
PMR6
Port 7
P77 to P70 I/O ports
P77/PPG7 to
P70/PPG0
PPG output
PMR7
P87 to P84
None
P83/SV2
P82/SV1
Servo monitor output
P81/EXCAP
Capstan external synchronous signal
input
Port 8
P87 to P80 I/O ports
(High-current ports)
P80/EXTTRG
External trigger signal input
PMR8
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 237 of 1037
11.1.3
MOS Pull-Up Transistors
The MOS pull-up transistors in ports 1 to 3 can be switched on or off by the MOS pull-up select
registers 1 to 3 (PUR1 to PUR3) in units of bits. Settings in PUR1 to PUR3 are valid when the
pin function is set to an input by PCR1 to PCR3. If the pin function is set to an output, the MOS
pull-up transistor is turned off. Figure 11.1 shows the circuit configuration of a pin with a MOS
pull-up transistor.
When the pin whose peripheral function is used both as an alternative function is set to the
alternative output function, the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off. When the pin is set to the
alternative input function, the MOS pull-up transistor is controlled according to the PUR setting
regardless of PCR.
V
CC
PUR
LPWRM
LPWRM
PCR
PDR
PUR
PCR
PDR
: Low power consumption mode signal
(The MOS pull-up transistor is turned off in reset, standby, and
watch modes.)
: MOS pull-up select register
: Port control register
: Port data register
Input data
V
CC
V
SS
Figure 11.1 Circuit Configuration of Pin with MOS Pull-Up Transistor
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 238 of 1037
11.2
Port 0
11.2.1
Overview
Port 0 is an 8-bit input-only port. Table 11.2 shows the port 0 configuration.
Port 0 consists of pins that are used both as standard input ports (P07 to P00) and analog input
channels (AN7 to AN0). It is switched by port mode register 0 (PMR0).
Table 11.2 Port 0 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P07 (standard input port)
AN7 (analog input channel)
P06 (standard input port)
AN6 (analog input channel)
P05 (standard input port)
AN5 (analog input channel)
P04 (standard input port)
AN4 (analog input channel)
P03 (standard input port)
AN3 (analog input channel)
P02 (standard input port)
AN2 (analog input channel)
P01 (standard input port)
AN1 (analog input channel)
Port 0
P00 (standard input port)
AN0 (analog input channel)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 239 of 1037
11.2.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.3 shows the port 0 register configuration.
Table 11.3 Port 0 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 0
PMR0
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFCD
Port data register 0
PDR0
R
Byte
H'FFC0
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
(1) Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR04
PMR03
PMR02
PMR01
PMR00
PMR07
PMR06
PMR05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR0 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR0 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0: P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Pin Switching (PMR07 to PMR00)
PMR07 to PMR00 sets whether the P0n/ANn pin is used as a P0n input pin or an ANn pin for
the analog input channel of an A/D converter.
Bit n
PMR0n
Description
0
The P0n/ANn pin functions as a P0n input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P0n/ANn pin functions as an ANn input pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 240 of 1037
(2) Port Data Register 0 (PDR0)
0
1
R
2
R
3
4
R
R
5
7
PDR04
PDR03
PDR02
PDR01
PDR00
R
PDR07
R
R
R
PDR06
PDR05
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Port data register 0 (PDR0) reads the port states. When the corresponding bit of PMR0 is 0
(general input port), the pin state is read if PDR0 is read. When the corresponding bit of PMR0
is 1 (analog input channel), 1 is read if PDR0 is read.
PDR0 is an 8-bit read-only register. When PDR0 is reset, its values become undefined.
11.2.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the pin functions of port 0 and their selection methods.
(1) P07/AN7 to P00/AN0
P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 are switched according to the PMR0n bit of PMR0 as shown below.
PMR0n
Pin Function
0
P0n input pin
1
ANn input pin
(n = 7 to 0)
11.2.4
Pin States
Table 11.4 shows the pin 0 states in each operation mode.
Table 11.4 Port 0 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
PN7/AN7 to
P00/AN0
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 241 of 1037
11.3
Port 1
11.3.1
Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.5 shows the port 1 configuration.
Port 1 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P17 to P10) and frequency
division clock output (TMOW), input capture input (
,&), or external interrupt request inputs
(
,54 to ,54). It is switched by port mode register 1 (PMR1) and port control register 1
(PCR1).
Port 1 can select the functions of MOS pull-up transistors.
Table 11.5 Port 1 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P17 (standard I/O port)
TMOW (frequency division clock output)
P16 (standard I/O port)
,&
(input capture input)
P15 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
P14 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
P13 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
P12 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
P11 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
Port 1
P10 (standard I/O port)
,54
(external interrupt request input)
11.3.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.6 shows the port 1 register configuration.
Table 11.6 Port 1 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 1
PMR1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFCE
Port control register 1
PCR1
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD1
Port data register 1
PDR1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC1
MOS pull-up select
register 1
PUR1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFE1
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 242 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR14
PMR13
PMR12
PMR11
PMR10
PMR17
PMR16
PMR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00.
Note the following items when the pin functions are switched by PMR1.
(1) If port 1 is set to an
,& input pin and ,54 to ,54 by PMR1, the pin level needs be set to
the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. The
pin level must not be set to an intermediate level.
(2) When the pin functions of P16/
,& and P15/,54 to P10/,54 are switched by PMR1, they
are incorrectly recognized as edge detection according to the state of a pin signal and a
detection signal may be generated. To prevent this, perform the operation in the following
procedure.
(a) Before switching the pin functions, inhibit an interrupt enable flag from being
interrupted.
(b) After having switched the pin functions, clear the relevant interrupt request flag to 0 by a
single instruction.
(Program Example)
:
MOV.B ROL,@IENR
Interrupt disabled
MOV.B R1L,@PMR1
Pin function change
NOP
Optional instruction
BCLR m @IRQR
Applicable interrupt clear
MOV.B R1L,@IENR
Interrupt enabled
:
Bit 7: P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17)
PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for the
frequency division clock output.
Bit 7
PMR17
Description
0
The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW output pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 243 of 1037
Bit 6: P16/
,&
,& Pin Switching (PMR16)
PMR16 sets whether the P16/
,& pin as a P16 I/O pin or an ,& pin for the input capture input of
the prescalar unit. The
,& pin has a built-in noise cancel circuit. See section 21, Prescalar Unit.
Bit 6
PMR16
Description
0
The P16/
,&
pin functions as a P16 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P16/
,&
pin functions as an
,&
input pin
Bits 5 to 0: P15/
,54
,54 to P10/,54
,54 Pin Switching (PMR15 to PMR10)
PMR15 to PMR10 set whether the P1n/
,54Q pin is used as a P1n I/O pin or an ,54Q pin for the
external interrupt request input.
Bit n
PMR1n
Description
0
The P1n/
,54Q
pin functions as a P1n I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P1n/
,54Q
pin functions as an
,54Q
input pin
(n = 5 to 0)
(2) Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 1 (PCR1) controls the I/Os of pins P17 to P10 of port 1 in a unit of bit.
When PCR1 is set to 1, the corresponding P17 to P10 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR1, settings of
PCR1 and PDR1 become valid.
PCR1 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR1 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR1 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR1n
Description
0
The P1n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P1n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 244 of 1037
(3) Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR14
PDR13
PDR12
PDR11
PDR10
PDR17
PDR16
PDR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 1 (PDR1) stores the data for the pins P17 to P10 of port 1. When PCR1 is 1
(output), the PDR1 values are directly read if port 1 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR1 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 1 is read.
PDR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PDR1 is initialized to H'00.
(4) MOS Pull-Up Select Register 1 (PUR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR14
PUR13
PUR12
PUR11
PUR10
PUR17
PUR16
PUR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 1 (PUR1) controls the on and off of the MOS pull-up transistor of
port 1. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR1 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid.
When the corresponding bit of PCR1 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR1 becomes
invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PUR1 is initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PUR1n
Description
0
The P1n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor
(Initial value)
1
The P1n pin has a MOS pull-up pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 245 of 1037
11.3.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 1 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P17/TMOW
P17/TMOW is switched as shown below according to the PMR17 bit in PMR1 and the
PCR17 bit in PCR1.
PMR17
PCR17
Pin Function
0
P17 input pin
0
1
P17 output pin
1
*
TMOW output pin
(2) P16/
,&
P16/
,& is switched as shown below according to the PMR16 bit in PMR1, the NC on/off bit
in prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR), and the PCR16 bit in PCR1.
PMR16
PCR16
NC on/off
Pin Function
0
P16 input pin
0
1
*
P16 output pin
0
Noise cancel invalid
1
*
1
,&
input pin
Noise cancel valid
(3) P15/
,54 to P10/,54
P15/
,54 to P10/,54 are switched as shown below according to the PMR1n bit in PMR1
and the PCR1n bit in PCR1.
PMR1n
PCR1n
Pin Function
0
P1n input pin
0
1
P1n output pin
1
*
,54Q
input pin
(n = 5 to 0)
Notes: 1.
*
Don't care.
2. The
,54
to
,54
input pins can select the leading or falling edge as an edge sense
(the
,54
pin can select both edges). See section 6.2.4, Edge Select Register
(IEGR).
3.
,54
or
,54
can be used as a timer J event input and
,54
can be used as a timer
R input capture input. For details, see section 14, "Timer J" or section 16, "Timer R".
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 246 of 1037
11.3.4
Pin States
Table 11.7 shows the port 1 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.7 Port 1 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P17/TMOW
P16/
,&
P15/
,54
to
P10/
,54
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: If the
,&
input pin and
,54
to
,54
input pins are set, the pin level need be set to the
high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note
that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 247 of 1037
11.4
Port 2
11.4.1
Overview
Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.8 shows the port 2 configuration.
Port 2 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P27 to P20) and SCI clock I/O
(SCK1, SCK2), receive data input (SI1, SI2), send data output (SO1, SO2), I
2
C bus interface
clock I/O (SCL), or data I/O (SCL). It is switched by port mode register 2 (PRM2), serial mode
register (SMR), serial control register 2 (SCR), I
2
C bus control register (ICCR), and port control
register (PCR2).
Port 2 can select the MOS pull-up function.
Table 11.8 Port 2 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P27 (standard I/O port)
SCK2 (SCI2 clock I/O)
P26 (standard I/O port)
SO2 (SCI2 transmit data output)
P25 (standard I/O port)
SI2 (SCI2 receive data input)
P24 (standard I/O port)
SCL (I
2
C bus interface clock I/O)
P23 (standard I/O port)
SDA (I
2
C bus interface data I/O)
P22 (standard I/O port)
SCK1 (SCI1 clock I/O)
P21 (standard I/O port)
SO1 (SCI1 transmit data output)
Port 2
P20 (standard I/O port)
SI1 (SCI1 receive data input)
11.4.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.9 shows the port 2 register configuration.
Table 11.9 Port 2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 2
PMR2
R/W
Byte
H'1E
H'FFCF
Port control register 2
PCR2
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD2
Port data register 2
PDR2
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC2
MOS pull-up select
register 2
PUR2
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFE2
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 248 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 2 (PMR2)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR20
PMR27
PMR26
PMR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 2 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 2. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
The switching of the P22/SCK1, P21/SO1, and P20/SI1 pin functions is controlled by SMR and
SCR. See section 23, SCI1.
PMR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR2 is initialized to H'1E.
If the SCK1, SCK2, SI1, and SI1 input pins are set, the pin level need be set to the high or low
level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level
must not reach an intermediate level
Bit 7: P27/SCK2 Pin Switching (PMR27)
PMR27 sets whether the P27/SCK2 pin is used as a P27 I/O pin or an SKC2 pin for the SCI2
clock I/O.
Bit 7
PMR27
Description
0
The P27/SCK2 pin functions as a P27 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P27/SCK2 pin functions as an SCK2 I/O pin
Bit 6: P26/SO2 Pin Switching (PMR26)
PMR26 sets whether the P26/SO2 pin as a P26 I/O pin or an SO2 pin for the SCI2 send data
output.
Bit 6
PMR26
Description
0
The P26/SO2 pin functions as a P26 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P26/SO2 pin functions as an SO2 input pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 249 of 1037
Bit 5: P25/SI2 Pin Switching (PMR25)
PMR26 sets whether the P25/SI2 pin as a P25 I/O pin or an SI2 pin for the SCI2 receive data
input.
Bit 5
PMR25
Description
0
The P25/SI2 pin functions as a P25 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P25/SI2 pin functions as an SI2 input pin
Bits 4 to 1: Reserved Bits
When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
Bit 0: P26/SO2 Pin PMOS Control (PMR20)
PMR20 controls the PMOS ON and OFF of the P26/SO2 pin output buffer.
Bit 0
PMR20
Description
0
The P26/SO2 pin functions as CMOS output
(Initial value)
1
The P26/SO2 pin functions as NMOS open drain output
(2) Port Control Register 2 (PCR2)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 2 (PCR2) controls the I/Os of pins P27 to P20 of port 2 in a unit of bit.
When PCR2 is set to 1, the corresponding P27 to P20 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR1, settings of
PCR2 and PDR2 are valid.
PCR2 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR2 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR2 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR2n
Description
0
The P2n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P2n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 250 of 1037
(3) Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR24
PDR23
PDR22
PDR21
PDR20
PDR27
PDR26
PDR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 2 (PDR2) stores the data for the pins P27 to P20 of port 2. When PCR2 is 1
(output), the PDR2 values are directly read if port 2 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR2 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 2 is read.
PDR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR2 is initialized to H'00.
(4) MOS Pull-Up Select Register 2 (PUR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR24
PUR23
PUR22
PUR21
PUR20
PUR27
PUR26
PUR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 2 (PUR2) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor
of port 2. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR1 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If
the corresponding bit of PCR2 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR2 becomes
invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR2 is initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PMR2n
Description
0
The P2n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor
(Initial value)
1
The P2n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 251 of 1037
11.4.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 2 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P27/SCK2
P27/SCK2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR27 bit in PMR2, the PCR27 bit
in PCR2, and the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in serial control register 2 (SCR2).
PMR27
PCR27
CKS2 to CKS0
Pin Function
0
P27 input pin
0
1
*
P27 output pin
Other than 111
SCK2 output pin
1
*
111
SCK2 input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(2) P26/SO2
P26/SO2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR26 bit in PMR2 and the PCR26
bit in PCR2.
PMR26
PCR26
Pin Function
0
P26 input pin
0
1
P26 output pin
1
*
SO2 output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(3) P25/SI2
P25/SI2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR25 bit in PMR2 and the PCR25 bit
in PCR2.
PMR25
PCR25
Pin Function
0
P25 input pin
0
1
P25 output pin
1
*
SI2 input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 252 of 1037
(4) P24/SCL
P24/SCL2 is switched as shown below according to the ICE bit in the I
2
C bus control register
and the PCR24 bit in PCR2.
ICE
PCR24
Pin Function
0
P24 input pin
0
1
P24 output pin
1
*
SCL I/O pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(5) P23/SDA
P23/SDA is switched as shown below according to the ICE bit in the I
2
C bus control register
and the PCR23 bit in PCR2.
ICE
PCR23
Pin Function
0
P23 input pin
0
1
P23 output pin
1
*
SDA I/O pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(6) P22/SCK1
P22/SCK1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR22 bit in PCR2, the C/
bit in
SMR, and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR.
CKE1
C/
CKE0
PCR22
Pin Function
0
P22 input pin
0
1
P22 output pin
0
1
0
1
SCK1 output pin
1
*
*
*
SCK1 input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(7) P21/SO1
P21/SO1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR21 bit in PCR2 and the TE bit in
SCR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 253 of 1037
TE
PCR21
Pin Function
0
P21 input pin
0
1
P21 output pin
1
*
SO1 output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(8) P20/SI1
P20/SI1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR20 bit in PCR2 and the RE bit in
SCR.
RE
PCR20
Pin Function
0
P20 input pin
0
1
P20 output pin
1
*
SI1 input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
11.4.4
Pin States
Table 11.10 shows the port 2 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.10 Port 2 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P27/SCK2
P26/SO2
P25/SI2
P24/SCL
P23/SDA
P22/SCK1
P21/SO1
P20/SI1
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: If the SCK1, SCK2, SI1, and SI2 input pins are set, the pin level needs be set to the high
or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that
the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 254 of 1037
11.5
Port 3
11.5.1
Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.11 shows the port 3 configuration.
Port 3 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P37 to P30) and timer J timer
output (TMO), buzzer output (BUZZ), 8-bit PWN outputs (PWN3 to PWN0), SCI2 strobe output
(STRB), or chip select input (
$). It is switched by port mode register 3 (PMR3) and port
control register 3 (PCR3).
Port 3 can select the MOS pull-up function.
Table 11.11 Port 3 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P37 (standard I/O port)
TMO (timer J timer output)
P36 (standard I/O port)
BUZZ (timer J buzzer output)
P35 (standard I/O port)
PWM3 (8-bit PWM output)
P34 (standard I/O port)
PWM2 (8-bit PWM output)
P33 (standard I/O port)
PWM1 (8-bit PWM output)
P32 (standard I/O port)
PWM0 (8-bit PWM output)
P31 (standard I/O port)
STRB (SCI2 strobe output)
Port 3
P30 (standard I/O port)
$
(SCI2 chip select input)
11.5.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.12 shows the port 3 register configuration.
Table 11.12 Port 3 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 3
PMR3
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD0
Port control register 3
PCR3
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD3
Port data register 3
PDR3
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC3
MOS pull-up select
register 3
PUR3
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFE3
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 255 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR34
PMR33
PMR32
PMR31
PMR30
PMR37
PMR36
PMR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls switching of each pin function of port 3. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR3 is initialized to H'00.
If the
$ input pin is set, the pin level need be set to the high or low level regardless of the
active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an
intermediate level.
Bit 7: P37/TMO Pin Switching (PMR37)
PMR37 sets whether the P37/TMO pin is used as a P37 I/O pin or a TMO pin for the timer J
output timer.
Bit 7
PMR37
Description
0
The P37/TMO pin functions as a P37 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P37/TMO pin functions as a TMO output pin
Note: If the TMO pin is used for remote control sending, a careless timer output pulse may be
output when the remote control mode is set after the output has been switched to the
TMO output. Perform the switching and setting in the following order.
[1] Set the remote control mode.
[2] Set the TMJ-1 and 2 counter data of the timer J.
[3] Switch the P37/TMO pin to the TMO output pin.
[4] Set the ST bit to 1.
Bit 6:
P36/BUZZ Pin Switching (PMR36)
PMR36 sets whether the P36/BUZZ pin as a P36 I/O pin or an BUZZ pin for the timer J buzzer
output. For the selection of the BUZZ output, see the 14.2.2, Timer J Control Register (TMJC).
Bit 6
PMR36
Description
0
The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a P36 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a BUZZ output pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 256 of 1037
Bits 5 to 2: P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32)
PMR35 to PMR32 set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as a P3n I/O pin or a PWMm pin for
the 8-bit PWM output.
Bit n
PMR3n
Description
0
The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a P3n I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a PWMm output pin
(n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0)
Bit 1: P31/STRB Pin Switching (PMR31)
PMR31 sets whether the P31/STRB pin is used as a P31 I/O pin or an STRB pin for the SCI2
strobe output.
Bit 1
PMR31
Description
0
The P31/STRB pin functions as a P31 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P31/STRB pin functions as an STRB output pin
Bit 0: P30/
$
$ Pin Switching (PMR30)
PMR30 sets whether the P30/
$ pin is used as a P30 I/O pin or a $ pin for the SCI2 chip select
input.
Bit 0
PMR30
Description
0
The P30/
$
pin functions as a P30 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P30/
$
pin functions as a
$
input pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 257 of 1037
(2) Port Control Register 3 (PCR3)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR34
PCR33
PCR32
PCR31
PCR30
PCR37
PCR36
PCR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 3 (PCR3) controls the I/Os of pins P37 to P30 of port 3 in a unit of bit.
When PCR3 is set to 1, the corresponding P37 to P30 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR3, settings of
PCR3 and PDR3 become valid.
PCR3 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR3 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR3 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR3n
Description
0
The P3n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P3n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
(3) Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR34
PDR33
PDR32
PDR31
PDR30
PDR37
PDR36
PDR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 3 (PDR3) stores the data for the pins P37 to P30 of port 3. When PCR3 is 1
(output), the PDR3 values are directly read if port 3 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR3 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 3 is read.
PDR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR3 is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 258 of 1037
(4) MOS Pull-Up Select Register 3 (PUR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR34
PUR33
PUR32
PUR31
PUR30
PUR37
PUR36
PUR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 3 (PUR3) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor
of port 3. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR3 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If
the corresponding bit of PCR3 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR3 becomes
invalid and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR3 is initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR3n
Description
0
The P3n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor
(Initial value)
1
The P3n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor
(n = 7 to 0)
11.5.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 3 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P37/TMO
P37/TMO is switched as shown below according to the PMR37 bit in PMR3 and the PCR37
bit in PCR3.
PMR37
PCR37
Pin Function
0
P37 input pin
0
1
P37 output pin
1
*
TMO output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 259 of 1037
(2) P36/BUZZ
P36/BUZZ is switched as shown below according to the PMR36 bit in PMR3 and the PCR36
bit in PCR3.
PMR36
PCR36
Pin Function
0
P36 input pin
0
1
P36 output pin
1
*
BUZZ output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(3) P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0
P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 are switched as shown below according to the PMR3n bit in
PMR3 and the PCR3n bit in PCR3.
PMR3n
PCR3n
Pin Function
0
P3n input pin
0
1
P3n output pin
1
*
PWMm output pin
(n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0)
Note:
*
Don't care.
(4) P31/STRB
P31/STRB is switched as shown below according to the PMR31 bit in PMR3 and the PCR31
bit in PCR3.
PMR31
PCR31
Pin Function
0
P31 input pin
0
1
P31 output pin
1
*
STRB output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(5) P30/
$
P30/
$ is switched as shown below according to the PMR30 bit in PMR3 and the PCR30 bit
in PCR3.
PMR30
PCR30
Pin Function
0
P30 input pin
0
1
P30 output pin
1
*
$
input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 260 of 1037
11.5.4
Pin States
Table 11.13 shows the port 3 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.13 Port 3 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P37/TMO
P36/BUZZ
P35/PWM3
to
P32/PWM0
P31/STRB
P30/
&6
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: If the
&6
input pin is set, the pin level need be set to the high or low level regardless of the
active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an
intermediate level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 261 of 1037
11.6
Port 4
11.6.1
Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.14 shows the port 4 configuration.
Port 4 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P47 to P40) and output compare
output (FTOA, FTOB), input capture input (FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID) or 14-bit PWM output
(PWM14). It is switched by port mode register 4 (PRM4), timer output compare control register
(TOCR), and port control register 4 (PCR4).
Table 11.14 Port 4 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P47 (standard I/O port)
None
P46 (standard I/O port)
FTOB (timer X1 output compare output)
P45 (standard I/O port)
FTOA (timer X1 output compare output)
P44 (standard I/O port)
FTID (timer X1 input capture input)
P43 (standard I/O port)
FTIC (timer X1 input capture input)
P42 (standard I/O port)
FTIB (timer X1 input capture input)
P41 (standard I/O port)
FTIA (timer X1 input capture input)
Port 4
P40 (standard I/O port)
PWM14 (14-bit PWM output)
11.6.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.15 shows the port 4 register configuration.
Table 11.15 Port 4 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 4
PMR4
R/W
Byte
H'FE
H'FFDB
Port control register 4
PCR4
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD4
Port data register 4
PDR4
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC4
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 262 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 4 (PMR4)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
R/W
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
PMR40
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 4 (PMR4) controls switching of the P40/PWM14 pin function. The
switchings of the P46/FTOB and P45/FTOA functions are controlled by TOCR. See section 17,
Timer X1. The FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function.
PMR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR4 is initialized to H'FE.
Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, the alternative pin need
always be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption
mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level (excluding reset, standby,
and watch modes).
Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, each input uses the input edge
to the alternative general I/O pins P44, P43, P42, and P41 as input signals.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved Bits
When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
Bit 0: P40/PWM14 Pin Switching (PMR40)
PMR40 sets whether the P40/PWM pin is used as a P40 I/O pin or a PWM14 pin for the 14-bit
PWM square wave output.
Bit 0
PMR40
Description
0
The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a P40 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a PWM14 output pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 263 of 1037
(2) Port Control Register 4 (PCR4)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR44
PCR43
PCR42
PCR41
PCR40
PCR47
PCR46
PCR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 4 (PCR4) controls the I/Os of pins P47 to P40 of port 4 in a unit of bit.
When PCR4 is set to 1, the corresponding P47 to P40 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR4, settings of
PCR4 and PDR4 become valid.
PCR4 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR4 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR4 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR4n
Description
0
The P4n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P4n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
(3) Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR44
PDR43
PDR42
PDR41
PDR40
PDR47
PDR46
PDR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 4 (PDR4) stores the data for the pins P47 to P40 of port 4. When PCR4 is 1
(output), the PDR4 values are directly read if port 3 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR4 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 4 is read.
PDR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR4 is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 264 of 1037
11.6.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 4 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P47/FTCI
P47/FTCI is switched as shown below according to the PCR47 bit in PCR4.
PCR47
Pin Function
0
P47 input pin
1
P47 output pin
(2) P46/FTOB
P46/FTOB is switched as shown below according to the PCR46 bit in PCR4 and the OEB bit
in TOCR.
OEB
PCR46
Pin Function
0
P46 input pin
0
1
P46 output pin
1
*
FTOB output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(3) P45/FTOA
P45/FTOA is switched as shown below according to the PCR45 bit in PCR4 and the OEA bit
in TOCR.
OEA
PCR45
Pin Function
0
P45 input pin
0
1
P45 output pin
1
*
FTOA output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(4) P44/FTID
P44/FTID is switched as shown below according to the PCR44 bit in PCR4.
PCR44
Pin Function
0
P44 input pin
1
P44 output pin
FTID input pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 265 of 1037
(5) P43/FTIC
P43/FTIC is switched as shown below according to the PCR43 bit in PCR4.
PCR43
Pin Function
0
P43 input pin
1
P43 output pin
FTIC input pin
(6) P42/FTIB
P42/FTIB is switched as shown below according to the PCR42 bit in PCR4.
PCR42
Pin Function
0
P42 input pin
1
P42 output pin
FTIB input pin
(7) P41/FTIA
P41/FTIA is switched as shown below according to the PCR41 bit in PCR4.
PCR41
Pin Function
0
P41 input pin
1
P41 output pin
FTIA input pin
(8) P40/PWM14
P40/PWM14 is switched as shown below according to the PMR40 bit in PMR4 and the
PCR40 bit in PCR4.
PMR40
PCR40
Pin Function
0
P40 input pin
0
1
P40 output pin
1
*
PWM14 input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 266 of 1037
11.6.4
Pin States
Table 11.16 shows the port 4 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.16 Port 4 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P47
P46/FTOB
P45/FTOA
P44/FTID
P43/FTIC
P42/FTIB
P41/FTIA
P40/
PWM14
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, the alternative pin need
be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption
mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level (excluding reset,
standby, and watch modes).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 267 of 1037
11.7
Port 5
11.7.1
Overview
Port 5 is a 4-bit I/O port. Table 11.17 shows the port 5 configuration.
Port 5 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P53 to P50) and realtime output
port trigger input (TRIG), timer B event input (TMBI), or A/D conversion start external trigger
input (
'75*). It is switched by port mode register 5 (PMR5), A/D trigger select register
(ADTSR), and port control register 5 (PCR5).
Table 11.17 Port 5 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P53 (standard I/O port)
TRIG (realtime output port trigger input)
P52 (standard I/O port)
TMBI (timer B event input)
P51 (standard I/O port)
None
Port 5
P50 (standard I/O port)
$'75*
(A/D conversion start external
trigger input)
11.7.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.18 shows the port 5 register configuration.
Table 11.18 Port 5 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 5
PMR5
R/W
Byte
H'F1
H'FFDC
Port control register 5
PCR5
W
Byte
H'F0
H'FFD5
Port data register 5
PDR5
R/W
Byte
H'F0
H'FFC5
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 268 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
0
1
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
PMR51
0
R/W
PMR52
0
R/W
PMR53
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 5 (PMR5) controls switching of each pin function of port 5 and specifies the
edge sense of the timer B event input (TMBI).
The switching of the P50/
$'75* pin function is controlled by ADTSR. See section 26, A/D
Converter.
PMR5 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR5 is initialized to H'F1.
If the TRIG, TMBI, and
$'75* pin pins are set, the alternative pin need always be set to the
high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the
pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved Bits
When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
Bit 3: P53/TRIG Pin Switching (PMR53)
PMR53 sets whether the P53/TRIG pin is used as a P53 I/O pin or a TRIG pin for the realtime
output port trigger input.
Bit 3
PMR53
Description
0
The P53/TRIG pin functions as a P53 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P53/TRIG pin functions as a TRIG input pin
Bit 2: P52/TMBI Pin Switching (PMR52)
PMR52 sets whether the P52/TMBI pin is used as a P52 I/O pin or a TMBI pin for the timer B
event input.
Bit 2
PMR52
Description
0
The P52/TMBI pin functions as a P52 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P52/TMBI pin functions as a TMBI input pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 269 of 1037
Bit 1: Timer B event input edge select (PMR51)
PMR51 selects the input edge sense of the TMBI pin.
Bit 1
PMR51
Description
0
The timer B event input detects the falling edge
(Initial value)
1
The timer B event input detects the rising edge
Bit 0: Reserved Bit
When the bit is read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
(2) Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)
0
0
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
PCR51
W
PCR50
0
W
PCR52
0
W
PCR53
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 5 (PCR5) controls the I/Os of pins P53 to P50 of port 5 in a unit of bit.
When PCR5 is set to 1, the corresponding P53 to P50 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O, settings of PCR5 and
PDR5 are valid.
PCR5 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR5 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR5 is
initialized to H'F0.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved bits.
Bit n
PCR5n
Description
0
The P5n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P5n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 3 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 270 of 1037
(3) Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)
0
0
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
PDR51
R/W
PDR50
0
R/W
PDR52
0
R/W
PDR53
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 5 (PDR5) stores the data for the pins P53 to P50 of port 5. When PCR5 is 1
(output), the PDR5 values are directly read if port 5 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR5 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 5 is read.
PDR5 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR5 is initialized to H'F0.
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved bits.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 271 of 1037
11.7.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 5 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P53/TRIG
P53/TRIG is switched as shown below according to the PMR53 bit in PMR5 and the PCR53
bit in PCR5.
PMR53
PCR53
Pin Function
0
P53 input pin
0
1
P53 output pin
1
*
TRIG input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(2) P52/TMBI
P52/TMBI is switched as shown below according to the PMR52 bit in PMR5 and the PCR52
bit in PCR5.
PMR52
PCR52
Pin Function
0
P52 input pin
0
1
P52 output pin
1
*
TMBI input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(3) P51
P51 is switched as shown below according to the PCR51 bit in PCR5.
PCR51
Pin Function
0
P51 input pin
1
P51 output pin
(4) P50/
$'75*
P50/
$'75* is switched as shown below according to the PCR50 bit in PCR5 and the
TRGS1 and TRG0 bits in ADTSR.
TRGS1, TRGS0
PCR31
Pin Function
0
P50 input pin
Other than 11
1
P50 output pin
11
*
$'75*
input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 272 of 1037
11.7.4
Pin States
Table 11.19 shows the port 5 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.19 Port 3 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P53/TRIG
P52/TMBI
P51
P50/
$'57*
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: If the TRIG, TMBI, and
$'75*
input pins are set, the alternative pin need always be set
to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode.
Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 273 of 1037
11.8
Port 6
11.8.1
Overview
Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.20 shows the port 6 configuration.
Port 6 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P67 to P60) and realtime output
ports (RP7 to RP0). It is switched by port mode register 6 (PMR6) and port control register 6
(PCR6).
The realtime output function can instantaneously switch the output data by an external or
internal trigger input.
Table 11.20 Port 6 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P67 (standard I/O port)
RP7 (realtime output port pin)
P66 (standard I/O port)
RP6 (realtime output port pin)
P65 (standard I/O port)
RP5 (realtime output port pin)
P64 (standard I/O port)
RP4 (realtime output port pin)
P63 (standard I/O port)
RP3 (realtime output port pin)
P62 (standard I/O port)
RP2 (realtime output port pin)
P61 (standard I/O port)
RP1 (realtime output port pin)
Port 6
P60 (standard I/O port)
RP0 (realtime output port pin)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 274 of 1037
11.8.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.21 shows the port 6 register configuration.
Table 11.21 Port 6 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 6
PMR6
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFDD
Port control register 6
PCR6
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD6
Port data register 6
PDR6
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC6
Realtime output trigger
select register
RTPSR
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFE5
Realtime output trigger
edge select register
RTPEGR
R/W
Byte
H'FC
H'FFE4
Port control register
slave 6
PCRS6
Byte
H'00
Port data register slave 6
PDRS6
Byte
H'00
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
(1) Port Mode Register 6 (PMR6)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR64
PMR63
PMR62
PMR61
PMR60
0
R/W
PMR67
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR66
PMR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 6 (PMR6) controls switching of each pin function of port 6. The switching is
specified in units of bits.
PMR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR6 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0: P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 Pin Switching (PMR67 to PMR60)
PMR67 to PMR60 set whether the P6n/RPn pin is used as a P6n I/O pin or an RPn pin for the
realtime output port.
Bit n
PMR6n
Description
0
The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 275 of 1037
(2) Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
0
W
PCR67
W
W
W
PCR66
PCR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 6 (PCR6) selects the general I/O of port 6 and controls the realtime output
in a unit of bit together with PMR6.
When PMR6 = 0, the corresponding P67 to P60 pins become general output pins if PCR6 is set
to 1, and they become general input pins if it is set to 0.
When PMR6 = 1, PCR6 controls the corresponding RP7 to RP0 realtime output pins. For
details, see section 11.8.4, Operation.
PCR6 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR6 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR6 is
initialized to H'00.
PMR6
PCR6
Bit n
Bit n
PMR6n
PCR6n
Description
0
The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general I/O input pin
(Initial value)
0
1
The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general output pin
1
*
The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn realtime output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(n = 7 to 0)
(3) Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR64
PDR63
PDR62
PDR61
PDR60
0
R/W
PDR67
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR66
PDR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 6 (PDR6) stores the data for the pins P67 to P60 of port 6.
For PMR6 = 0, when PCR6 is 1 (output), the PDR6 values are directly read if port 6 is read.
Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR6 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if
port 6 is read.
For PMR6 = 1, port 6 becomes a realtime output pin. For details, see section 11.8.4, Operation.
PDR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR6 is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 276 of 1037
(4) Realtime Output Trigger Select Register (RTPSR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
RTPSR4
RTPSR3
RTPSR2
RTPSR1
RTPSR0
0
R/W
RTPSR7
R/W
R/W
R/W
RTPSR6
RTPSR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The realtime output trigger select register (RTPSR) sets whether the external trigger (TRIG pin
input) or the internal trigger (HSW) is used as an trigger input for the realtime output in a unit of
bit. For the internal trigger HSW, see section 28.4, HSW Timing Generation Circuit.
RTPSR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPSR is initialized to H'00.
Bit n
RTPSRn
Description
0
Selects the external trigger (TRIG pin input) as a trigger input
(Initial value)
1
Selects the internal trigger (HSW) a trigger input
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 277 of 1037
(5) Real Time Output Trigger Edge Select Register (RTPEGR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
1
3
1
4
1
1
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The realtime output trigger edge select register (RTPEGR) specifies the edge sense of the
external or internal trigger input for the realtime output.
RTPEGR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPEGR is initialized to H'FC.
Bits 7 to 2: Reserved Bits
When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
Bits 1 and 0: Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select (RTPEGR1, RTPEGR0)
RTPEGR1 and RTPEGR0 select the edge sense of the external or internal trigger input for the
realtime output.
Bit 1
Bit 0
RTPEGR1
RTPEGR0
Description
0
Inhibits a trigger input
(Initial value)
0
1
Selects the rising edge of a trigger input
0
Selects the falling edge of a trigger input
1
1
Selects both the leading and falling edges of a trigger input
11.8.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 6 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P67/RP7 to P60/RP0
P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 are switched as shown below according to the PMR6n bit in PMR6 and
the PCR6n bit in PCR6.
PMR6n
PCR6n
Pin Function
Output Value
Value When PDR6n
was read
0
P6n input pin
P6n pin
0
1
P6n output pin
PDR6n
0
High-impedance
*
1
1
RPn output pin
PDRS6n
*
PDR6n
Note:
*
When PMR6n = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR6n setup
value has been transferred to PCRS6n by a trigger input.
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 278 of 1037
11.8.4
Operation
Port 6 can be used as a realtime output port or general I/O output port by PMR6. Port 6
functions as a realtime output port when PMR6 = 1 and as a general I/O port when PMR6 = 0.
The operation per port 6 function is shown below. (See figure 11.2.)
P6/RP
RTPEGR write
[Legend]
PMR6
PCR6
PDR6
PCRS6
PDRS6
RTPSR
RTPEGR
HSW
TRIG
: Port mode register 6
: Port control register 6
: Port data register 6
: Port control register slave 6
: Port data register slave 6
: Realtime output trigger select register
: Realtime output trigger edge select register
: Internal trigger signal
: External trigger pin
RTPSR write
RMR6 write
RDR6 write
RCR6 write
RDR6 read
RTPEGR
Selection
circuit
Selection
circuit
Internal data bus
External trigger
TRIG
Internal trigger
HSW
CK
RTPSR
CK
RMR6
CK
RDR6
CK
RCR6
CK
RDRS6
CK
RCRS6
CK
Figure 11.2 Port 6 Function Block Diagram
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 279 of 1037
(1) Operation of the Realtime Output Port (PMR6 = 1)
When PMR6 is 1, it operates as a realtime output port. When a trigger is input, PMR6
transfers the PDR6 data to PDRS6 and the PCR6 data to PCRS6, respectively. In this case,
when PCRS6 is 1, the PDRS6 data of the corresponding bit is output to the RP pin. When
PCRS6 is 0, the RP pin of the corresponding bit is output to the high-impedance state. In
other words, the pin output state (High or Low) or high-impedance state can instantaneously
be switched by a trigger input.
Adversely, when PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read regardless of the PCR6 and PCRS6
values.
(2) Operation of the general I/O port (PMR6 = 0)
When PMR6 is 0, it operates as a general I/O port. When data is written to PDR6, the same
data is also written to PDRS6. Accordingly, because both PDR6 and PDRS6 and both PCR6
and PCRS6 can be handled as one register, respectively, they can be used in the same way as
a normal general I/O port. In other words, if PCR6 is 1, the PDR6 data of the corresponding
bit is output to the P6 pin. If PCR6 is 0, the P6 pin of the corresponding bit becomes an
input.
Adversely, assuming that PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read when PCR6 is 1 and the
pin values are read when PCR6 is 0.
11.8.5
Pin States
Table 11.22 shows the port 6 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.22 Port 6 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P67/RP7 to
P60/RP0
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 280 of 1037
11.9
Port 7
11.9.1
Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.23 shows the port 7 configuration.
Port 7 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P77 to P70) and HSW timing
generation circuit (programmable pattern generator: PPG) outputs (PPG7 to PPG0). It is
switched by port mode register 7 (PMR7) and port control register 7 (PCR7).
For the programmable generator (PPG), see section 28.4, HSW Timing Generation Circuit.
Table 11.23 Port 7 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P77 (standard I/O port)
PPG7 (HSW timing output)
P76 (standard I/O port)
PPG6 (HSW timing output)
P75 (standard I/O port)
PPG5 (HSW timing output)
P74 (standard I/O port)
PPG4 (HSW timing output)
P73 (standard I/O port)
PPG3 (HSW timing output)
P72 (standard I/O port)
PPG2 (HSW timing output)
P71 (standard I/O port)
PPG1 (HSW timing output)
Port 7
P70 (standard I/O port)
PPG0 (HSW timing output)
11.9.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.24 shows the port 7 register configuration.
Table 11.24 Port 7 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 7
PMR7
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFDE
Port control register 7
PCR7
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD7
Port control register 7
PDR7
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC7
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 281 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 7 (PMR7)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR74
PMR73
PMR72
PMR71
PMR70
0
R/W
PMR77
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR76
PMR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 7 (PMR7) controls switching of each pin function of port 7. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR7 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0: P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 Pin Switching (PMR77 to PMR70)
PMR77 to PMR70 set whether the P7n/PPGn pin is used as a P7n I/O pin or a PPGn pin for the
HSW timing generation circuit output.
Bit n
PMR7n
Description
0
The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a P7n I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a PPGn output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
(2) Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
0
W
PCR77
W
W
W
PCR76
PCR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 7 (PCR7) controls the I/Os of pins P77 to P70 of port 7 in a unit of bit.
When PCR7 is set to 1, the corresponding P77 to P70 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the corresponding pin is set to the general I/O by PMR7,
settings of PCR7 and PDR7 become valid.
PCR7 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR7 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR7 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR7n
Description
0
The P7n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P7n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 282 of 1037
(3) Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR74
PDR73
PDR72
PDR71
PDR70
0
R/W
PDR77
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR76
PDR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 7 (PDR7) stores the data for the pins P77 to P70 of port 7.
When PCR7 is 1 (output), the PDR7 values are directly read if port 7 is read. Accordingly, the
pin states are not affected. When PCR7 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 7 is read.
PDR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR7 is initialized to H'00.
11.9.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 7 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0
P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 are switched as shown below according to the PMR7n bit in PMR7
and the PCR7n bit in PCR7.
PMR7n
PCR7n
Pin Function
0
P7n input pin
0
1
P7n output pin
1
*
PPGn input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(n = 7 to 0)
11.9.4
Pin States
Table 11.25 shows the port 7 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.25 Port 7 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P77/PPG7
to
P70/PPG0
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 283 of 1037
11.10
Port 8
11.10.1
Overview
Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 11.26 shows the port 8 configuration.
Port 8 is a CMOS high-current I/O port. The sink current is 20 mA max. (V
OL
= 1.5 V) and up
to four pins can simultaneously be set on.
Port 8 consists of pins that are used both as high-current I/O ports (P87 to P80) and servo
monitor output (SV1, SV2), capstan external synchronous signal input (EXCAP), or external
trigger signal input (EXTTRG). It is switched by port mode register 8 (PMR8) and port control
register 8 (PCR8).
Table 11.26 Port 8 Configuration
Port
Function
Alternative Function
P87 (high-current I/O port)
None
P86 (high-current I/O port)
None
P85 (high-current I/O port)
None
P84 (high-current I/O port)
None
P83 (high-current I/O port)
SV2 (servo monitor output)
P82 (high-current I/O port)
SV1 (servo monitor output)
P81 (high-current I/O port)
EXCAP (capstan external synchronous signal input)
Port 8
P80 (high-current I/O port)
EXTTRG (external trigger signal input)
11.10.2
Register Configuration
Table 11.27 shows the port 8 register configuration.
Table 11.27 Port 8 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Port mode register 8
PMR8
R/W
Byte
H'F0
H'FFDF
Port control register 8
PCR8
W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD8
Port data register 8
PDR8
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFC8
Note:
*
The address indicates the low-order 16 bits.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 284 of 1037
(1) Port Mode Register 8 (PMR8)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
1
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
PMR83
PMR82
PMR81
PMR80
1
R/W
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 8 (PMR8) controls switching of each pin function of port 8. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR8 is initialized to H'F0.
If the EXCAP and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always be set to the high or
low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin
level must not reach an intermediate level.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved Bits
When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write operation is valid.
Bit 3: P83/SV2 Pin Switching (PMR83)
PMR83 sets whether the P83/SV2 pin is used as a P83 I/O pin or an SV2 pin for the servo
monitor output. For the selection of the SV2 output, see section 28, Servo Circuit.
Bit 3
PMR83
Description
0
The P83/SV2 pin functions as a P83 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P83/SV2 pin functions as an SV2 output pin
Bit 2: P82/SV1 Pin Switching (PMR82)
PMR82 sets whether the P82/SV1 pin is used as a P82 I/O pin or an SV1 pin for the servo
monitor output. For the selection of the SV1 output, see section 27, Servo Circuit.
Bit 2
PMR82
Description
0
The P82/SV1 pin functions as a P82 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P82/SV1 pin functions as an SV1 output pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 285 of 1037
Bit 1: P81/EXCAP Pin Switching (PMR81)
PMR81 sets whether the P83/EXCAP pin is used as a P81 I/O pin or an EXTTRG pin for the
capstan external synchronous signal input.
Bit 1
PMR81
Description
0
The P81/EXCAP pin functions as a P81 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P81/EXCAP pin functions as an EXCAP input pin
Bit 0: P80/EXTTRG Pin Switching (PMR80)
PMR80 sets whether the P80/EXTTRG pin is used as a P80 I/O pin or an EXTTRG pin for the
external trigger signal input.
Bit 0
PMR80
Description
0
The P80/EXTTRG pin functions as a P80 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P80/EXTTRG pin functions as an EXTTRG input pin
(2) Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
0
W
PCR87
W
W
W
PCR86
PCR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 8 (PCR8) controls the I/Os of pins P87 to P80 of port 8 in a unit of bit.
When PCR8 is set to 1, the corresponding P87 to P80 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the corresponding pin is set to a general I/O, settings of
PCR8 and PDR8 become valid.
PCR8 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR8 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR8 is
initialized to H'00.
Bit n
PCR8n
Description
0
The P8n pin functions as an input pin
(Initial value)
1
The P8n pin functions as an output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 286 of 1037
(3) Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR84
PDR83
PDR82
PDR81
PDR80
0
R/W
PDR87
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR86
PDR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 8 (PDR8) stores the data for the pins P87 to P80 of port 8.
When PCR8 is 1 (output), the PDR8 values are directly read if port 8 is read. Accordingly, the
pin states are not affected. When PCR8 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 8 is read.
PDR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR8 is initialized to H'00.
11.10.3
Pin Functions
This section describes the port 8 pin functions and their selection methods.
(1) P87 to P84
P87 to P84 are switched as shown below according to the PCR8n bit in PCR8.
PCR8n
Pin Function
0
P8n input pin
1
P8n output pin
(n = 7 to 4)
Note:
*
Don't care.
(2) P83/SV2
P83/SV2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR83 bit in PMR8 and the PCR83
bit in PCR8.
PMR83
PCR83
Pin Function
0
P83 input pin
0
1
P83n output pin
1
*
SV2 output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 287 of 1037
(3) P82/SV1
P82/SV1 is switched as shown below according to the PMR82 bit in PRM8 and the PCR82
bit in PCR8.
PMR82
PCR82
Pin Function
0
P82 input pin
0
1
P82 output pin
1
*
SV1 output pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(4) P81/EXCAP
P81/EXCAP is switched as shown below according to the PMR81 bit in PRM8 and the
PCR81 bit in PCR8.
PMR81
PCR81
Pin Function
0
P81 input pin
0
1
P81 output pin
1
*
EXCAP input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
(5) P80/EXTTRG
P80/EXTTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR80 bit in PRM8 and the
PCR80 bit in PCR8.
PMR80
PCR80
Pin Function
0
P80 input pin
0
1
P80 output pin
1
*
EXTTRG input pin
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 288 of 1037
11.10.4
Pin States
Table 11.28 shows the port 8 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 11.28 Port 8 Pin States
Pins
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P87 to P84
P83/SV2
P83/SV1
P81/
EXCAP
P80/
EXTTRG
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation
Holding
Note: If the EXCAP and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always be set to the high
or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that
the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 289 of 1037
Section 12 Timer A
12.1
Overview
The Timer A is an 8-bit interval timer. It can be used as a clock timer when connected to a
32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.
12.1.1
Features
Features of the Timer A are as follows:
Choices of eight different types of internal clocks (
/16384,
/8192,
/4096,
/1024,
/512,
/256,
/64 and
/16) are available for your selection.
Four different overflowing cycles (1s, 0.5s, 0.25s and 0.03125s) are selectable as a clock
timer. (When using a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.)
Requests for interrupt will be output when the counter overflows.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 290 of 1037
12.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer A.
[Legend]
TMA
32 kHz
Crystal oscillator
Overflowing of
the interval
timer
System
clock
w
w/128
/16384, /8192,
/4096, /1024,
/512, /256,
/64, /16
TCA
: Timer mode register A
: Timer counter A
Note:
*
Selectable only when the prescaler W output ( w/128) is
working as the input clock to the TCA.
Prescaler S
(PSS)
Interrupting
circuit
Prescaler unit
Prescaler W
(PSW)
TCA
1/4
TMA
Interrupt
requests
Internal data bus
8
*
64
*
128
*
256
*
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of the Timer A
12.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 12.1 shows the register configuration of the Timer A.
Table 12.1 Register configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Timer mode register A
TMA
R/W
Byte
H'30
H'FFBA
Timer counter A
TCA
R
Byte
H'00
H'FFBB
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 291 of 1037
12.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
12.2.1
Timer Mode Register A (TMA)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
--
--
--
--
1
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)
*
TMAOV
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer mode register A (TMA) works to control the interrupts of the Timer A and to select
the input clock.
TMA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMA will be initialized to H'30.
Bit 7: Timer A Overflow Flag (TMAOV)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the TCA is overflowing (H'FF
H'00).
Bit 7
TMAOV
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written to the TMAOV flag after reading the TMAOV flag under the status
where TMAOV = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the TCA overflows
Bit 6: Enabling Interrupt of the Timer A (TMAIE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) when the TCA
overflows and when the TMAOV of the TMA is set to 1.
Bit 6
TMAIE
Description
0
Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI)
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI)
Bits 5 and 4: Reserved
When they are read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 292 of 1037
Bit 3: Selection of the Clock Source and Prescaler (TMA3)
This bit works to select the PSS or PSW as the clock source for the Timer A.
Bit 3
TMA3
Description
0
Selects the PSS as the clock source for the Timer A
(Initial value)
1
Selects the PSW as the clock source for the Timer A
Bits 2 to 0: Clock Selection (TMA2 to TMA0)
These bits work to select the clock to input to the TCA. In combination with the TMA3 bit, the
choices are as follows:
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
Prescaler division ratio (interval timer)
or overflow cycle (time base)
Operation
mode
0
PSS,
/16384 (Initial value)
0
1
PSS,
/8192
0
PSS,
/4096
0
1
1
PSS,
/1024
0
PSS,
/512
0
1
PSS,
/256
0
PSS,
/64
0
1
1
1
PSS,
/16
Interval
timer mode
0
1s
0
1
0.5s
0
0.25s
0
1
1
0.03125s
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Works to clear the PSW and TCA to H'00
Clock time
base mode
Note:
= f osc
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 293 of 1037
12.2.2
Timer Counter A (TCA)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
5
6
7
R
R
TCA3
0
R
TCA4
0
R
TCA5
0
R
TCA6
0
R
TCA7
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer counter A (TCA) is an 8-bit up-counter which counts up on inputs from the internal
clock. The inputting clock can be selected by TMA3 to TMA0 bits of the TMA
When the TCA overflows, the TMAOV bit of the TMA is set to 1.
The TCA can be cleared by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the TMA to 11.
The TCA is always readable. When reset, the TCA will be initialized into H'00.
12.2.3
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP15 bit is set to 1, the Timer A stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode. When reset, the MSTPCR will be initialized into H'FFFF.
Bit 7: Module Stop (MSTP15)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer A.
MSTPCRH
Bit 7
MSTP15
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer A
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer A
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 294 of 1037
12.3
Operation
The Timer A is an 8-bit timer for use as an interval timer and as a clock time base connecting to
a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator.
12.3.1
Operation as the Interval Timer
When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is cleared to 0, the Timer A works as an 8-bit interval timer.
When resetince the TCA is cleared to H'00 and as the TMA3 bit is cleared to 0, the Timer A
continues counting up as the interval counter without interrupts right after resetting.
As the operation clock for the Timer A, selection can be made from eight different types of
internal clocks being output from the PSS by the TMA2 to TMA0 bits of the TMA.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCA reaches H'FF, the Timer A
overflows and the TMAOV bit of the TMA will be set to 1. At this time, when the TMAIE bit
of the TMA is 1, interrupt occurs.
When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCA returns to H'00 before resuming counting up.
Consequently, it works as the interval timer to produce overflow outputs periodically at every
256 input clocks.
12.3.2
Operation of the Timer for Clocks
When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is set to 1, the Timer A works as a time base for the clock.
As the overflow cycles for the Timer A, selection can be made from four different types by
counting the clock being output from the PSW by the TMA1 bit and TMA0 bit of the TMA.
12.3.3
Initializing the Counts
When the TMA3 and TMA2 bits are set to 11, the PSW and TCA will be cleared to H'00 to
come to a stop.
At this state, writing 10 to the TMA3 bit and TMA2 bit makes the Timer A to start counting
from H'00 under the time base mode for clocks.
After clearing the PSW and TCA using the TMA3 and TMA2 bits, writing 00 or 01 to the
TMA3 bit and TMA2 bit work to make the Timer A to start counting from H'00 under the
interval timer mode. However, since the PSS is not cleared, the period to the first count is not
constant.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 295 of 1037
Section 13 Timer B
13.1
Overview
The Timer B is an 8-bit up-counter. The Timer B is equipped with two different types of
functions namely, the interval function and the auto reloading function.
13.1.1
Features
Selection from choices of seven different types of internal clocks (
/16384,
/4096,
/1024,
/512,
/128,
/32 and
/8) or selection of external clock are possible.
When the counter overflows, a interrupt request will be issued.
13.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer B.
[Legend]
TMB
/16384
/4096
/1024
/512
/128
/32
/8
TMBI
TCB
: Timer mode register B
: Timer counter B
TLB
TMBI
: Timer re-loading register B
: Event input terminal of the Timer B
Re-loading
Clock sources
Overflowing
Timer B
Interrupt requests
Internal data bus
TCB
TMB
TLB
Interrupting
circuit
Figure 13.1 Block diagram of the Timer B
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 296 of 1037
13.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 13.1 shows the pin configuration of the Timer B.
Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Event inputs to the Timer B
TMBI
Input
Event input pin for inputs to the TCB
13.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 13.2 shows the register configuration of the Timer B.
The TCB and TLB are being allocated to the same address. Reading or writing determines the
accessing register.
Table 13.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Timer mode register B
TMB
R/W
Byte
H'18
H'D110
Timer counter B
TCB
R
Byte
H'00
H'D111
Timer load register B
TLB
W
Byte
H'00
H'D111
Port mode register 5
PMR5
R/W
Byte
H'F1
H'FFDC
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 297 of 1037
13.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
13.2.1
Timer Mode Register B (TMB)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
--
--
--
--
1
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
TMBIE
R/(W)
*
TMBIF
0
R/W
TMB17
TMB12
TMB11
TMB10
Note: Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TMB is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the interrupts, to select the auto
reloading function and to select the input clock.
When reset, the TMB is initialized to H'18.
Bit 7: Selecting the Auto Reloading Function (TMB17)
This bit works to select the auto reloading function of the Timer B.
Bit 7
TMB17
Description
0
Selects the interval function
(Initial value)
1
Selects the auto reloading function
Bit 6: Interrupt Requesting Flag for the Timer B (TMBIF)
This is an interrupt requesting flag for the Timer B. It indicates the fact that the TCB is
overflowing.
Bit 6
TMBIF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the TCB overflows
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 298 of 1037
Bit 5: Enabling Interrupt of the Timer B (TMBIE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of interrupt of the Timer B when the TCB
overflows and when the TMBIF is set to 1.
Bit 5
TMBIE
Description
0
Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer B
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer B
Bits 4 to 3: Reserved
When they are read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Bits 2 to 0: Clock Selection (TMB12 to TMB10)
These bits work to select the clock to input to the TCB. Selection of the rising edge or the
falling edge is workable with the external event inputs.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TMB12
TMB11
TMB10
Descriptions
0
0
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/16384
(Initial value)
0
0
1
Internal clock: Counts at
/4096
0
1
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/1024
0
1
1
Internal clock: Counts at
/512
1
0
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/128
1
0
1
Internal clock: Counts at
/32
1
1
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/8
1
1
1
Counts at the rising edge and the falling edge of external
event inputs (TMBI)
*
Note:
*
The edge selection for the external event inputs is made by setting the PMR51 of the
port mode register 5 (PMR5). See section 13.2.4, Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 299 of 1037
13.2.2
Timer Counter B (TCB)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
4
5
0
6
0
7
R
R
TCB15
0
R
TCB14
0
R
TCB13
R
TCB16
0
R
TCB17
TCB12
TCB11
TCB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCB is an 8-bit readable register which works to count up by the internal clock inputs and
external event inputs. The input clock can be selected by the TMB12 to TMB10 of the TMB.
When the TCB overflows (H'FF
H'00 or H'FF
TLB setting), a interrupt request of the
Timer B will be issued.
When reset, the TCB is initialized to H'00.
13.2.3
Timer Load Register B (TLB)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
5
0
6
0
7
W
W
TLB15
0
W
TLB14
0
W
TLB13
W
TLB16
0
W
TLB17
TLB12
TLB11
TLB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TLB is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading value of the TCB.
When the reloading value is set to the TLB, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCB
and the TCB starts counting up from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation,
when the TCB overflows, the value of the TLB will be loaded to the TCB. Consequently, the
overflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks.
When reset, the TLB is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 300 of 1037
13.2.4
Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
1
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
PMR52
0
R/W
PMR53
PMR51
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register 5 (PMR5) works to changeover the pin functions of the port 5 and to
designate the edge sense of the event inputs of the Timer B (TMBI).
The PMR5 is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the PMR5 will be initialized to H'F1.
See section 11.7, Port 5 for other information than bit 1.
Bit 1: Selecting the Edges of the Event Inputs to the Timer B (PMR51)
This bit works to select the input edge sense of the TMBI pins.
Bit 1
PMR51
Description
0
Detects the falling edge of the event inputs to the Timer B
(Initial value)
1
Detects the rising edge of the event inputs to the Timer B
13.2.5
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP14 bit is set to 1, the Timer B stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module stop
mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 301 of 1037
Bit 6: Module Stop (MSTP14)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer B.
MSTPCRH
Bit 6
MSTP14
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer B
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer B
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 302 of 1037
13.3
Operation
13.3.1
Operation as the Interval Timer
When the TMB17 bit of the TMB is set to 0, the Timer B works as an 8-bit interval timer.
When reset, since the TCB is cleared to H'00 and as the TMB17 bit is cleared to 0, the Timer B
continues counting up as the interval timer without interrupts right after resetting.
As the clock source for the Timer B, selection can be made from seven different types of
internal clocks being output from the prescaler unit by the TMB12 to TMB10 bits of the TMB or
an external clock through the TMBI input pin can be chosen instead.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, the Timer B overflows
and the TMBIF bit of the TMB will be set to 1. At this time, when the TMBIE bit of the TMB is
1, interrupt occurs.
When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCB returns to H'00 before resuming counting up.
When a value is set to the TLB while the interval timer is in operation, the value which has been
set to the TLB will be loaded to the TCB simultaneously.
13.3.2
Operation as the Auto Reload Timer
When the TMB17 of the TMB is set to 1, the Timer B works as an 8-bit auto reload timer.
When a reload value is set in the TLB, the value is loaded onto the TCB at the same time, and
the TCB starts counting up from the value.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, the Timer B overflows
and the TLB value is loaded onto the TCB, then the TCB continues counting up from the loaded
value. Accordingly, overflow interval can be set within the range of 1 to 256 clocks depending
on the TLB value.
Clock source and interrupts in the auto reload operation are the same as those in the interval
operation. When the TLB value is re-set while the auto reload timer is in operation, the value
which has been set to the TLB will be loaded onto the TCB simultaneously.
13.3.3
Event Counter
The Timer B works as an event counter using the TMBI pin as the event input pin. When the
TMB12 to TMB10 are set to 111, the external event will be selected as the clock source and the
TCB counts up at the leading edge or the trailing edge of the TMBI pin inputs.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 303 of 1037
Section 14 Timer J
14.1
Overview
The Timer J consists of twin 8-bit counters. It carries seven different operation modes such as
reloading and event counting.
14.1.1
Features
The Timer J consists of twin 8-bit reloading timers and it is usable under the various functions as
follows:
(a) Twin 8-bit reloading timers (Among the two, one is capable to make timer outputs)
(b) Twin 8-bit event counters (Capable to make reloading)
(c) 8-bit event counter (Capable to make reloading) + 8-bit reload timer
(d) 16-bit event counter (Capable to make 16-bit reloading)
(e) 16-bit reload timer (Capable to make 16-bit reloading)
(f) Remote controlled transmissions
(g) "Take up/Supply reel pulse" dividing (8 bit
2 units)
14.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 14.1 is a block diagram of the Timer J. The Timer J consists of two reload timers
namely, TMJ-1 and TMJ-2.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 304 of 1037
[Legend]
TCJ
Note:
*
At the Low level under the timer mode.
TLJ
: Timer counter J
: Timer load register J
TCK
TLK
: Timer counter K
: Timer load register K
TMO
REMOout
: TMJ-1 timer output
: TMJ-2 toggle output
(Remote controller
transmission data)
BUZZ
Reloading register
(Burst/space
width register
PS21,20
: Buzzer output
TGL
: TMJ-2 toggle plug
PS21,20
ST
: TMJ-2 input clock selection
: Starting the remote controlled operation
PS11,10
: TMJ-1 input clock selection
8/16
T/R
: 8-bit/16-bit operation changeover
: Timer output/Remote controller output changeover
Internal data bus
Edge
detection
Toggle
T/R
Down-counter
(8-bit)
BUSS
Output
Control
Monitor
Output
Control
Toggle
Reloading
register
8/16
ST
PS11,10
Down-
counter (8-bit)
Under
flow
Under-
flow
TCJ
TMJ-1
TMJ-2
TCK
PB/REC-CTL
DVCTL
TCA7
/4096
/8192
TGL
REMOout
TMO
TMO
BUZZ
Clock sources
IRQ2
/1024 (only for the H8S/2194C series)
/2048
/16384
Clock sources
IRQ1
/4
/256
/512
*
Synchronization
TLJ
Reloading
Reloading
TLK
TMJ-1
Interrupting circuit
Interrupt request
by the TMJ1
Interrupt request
by the TMJ2
TMJ-2
Interrupting circuit
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of the Timer J
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 305 of 1037
14.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 14.1 shows the pin configuration of the Timer J.
Table 14.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Event input pin
,54
Input
Event inputs to the TMJ-1
Event input pin
,54
Input
Event inputs to the TMJ-2
14.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 14.2 shows the register configuration of the Timer J.
The TCJ and TLJ or the TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address respectively.
Reading or writing determines the accessing register.
Table 14.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
2
Timer mode register J
TMJ
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'D13A
Timer J control register
TMJC
R/W
Byte
H'09
H'D13B
Timer J status register
TMJS
R/(W)
*
1
Byte
H'3F
H'D13C
Timer counter J
TCJ
R
Byte
H'FF
H'D139
Timer counter K
TCK
R
Byte
H'FF
H'D138
Timer load register J
TLJ
W
Byte
H'FF
H'D139
Timer load register K
TLK
W
Byte
H'FF
H'D138
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
2. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 306 of 1037
14.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
14.2.1
Timer Mode Register J (TMJ)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ST
R/W
PS10
0
R/W
PS11
8/16
PS21
PS20
TGL
T/R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer mode register J (TMJ) works to select the inputting clock for the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2
and to set the operation mode.
The TMJ is an 8-bit register and Bit-1 is for read only and all the remaining bits are applicable
to read/write.
When reset, the TMJ is initialized to H'00.
Under all other modes than the remote controlling mode, writing into the TMJ works to initialize
the counters (TCJ and TCK) to H'FF.
Bits 7 and 6: Selecting the Inputting Clock to the TMJ-1 (PS11 and PS10)
These bits work to select the clock to input to the TMJ-1. Selection of the rising edge or the
falling edge is workable for counting by use of an external clock.
Bit 7
Bit 6
PS11
PS10
Description
0
Counting by the PSS,
/512
(Initial value)
0
1
Counting by the PSS,
/256
0
Counting by the PSS,
/4
1
1
Counting at the rising edge or the falling edge of the external clock
inputs (
,54
)
*
Note:
*
The edge selection for the external clock inputs is made by setting the edge select
register (IEGR). See section 6.2.4, Edge Select Register (IEGR) for more information.
When using an external clock under the remote controlling mode, set the opposite
edge with the IRQ1 and the IRQ2 when using an external clock under the remote
controlling mode. (When IRQ1 falling, select IRQ2 rising and when IRQ1 rising, select
IRQ2 falling)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 307 of 1037
Bit 5: Starting the Remote Controlled Operation (ST)
This bit works to start the remote controlled operations.
When this bit is set to 1, clock signal is supplied to the TMJ-1 to start signal transmissions.
When this bit is cleared to 0, clock supply stops to discontinue the operation. The ST bit will be
valid under the remote controlling mode, namely, when the Bit 0 (T/R bit) is 1 and the Bit 4
(8/16 bit) is 0.
Under other modes than the remote controlling mode, it will be fixed to 0. When a shift to the
low power consumption mode is made during remote controlled operation, the ST bit will be
cleared to 0. When resuming operation after returning to the active mode, write 1.
Bit 5
ST
Description
0
Works to stop clock signal supply to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode
(Initial value)
1
Works to supply clock signal to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode
Bit 4: Switching Over Between 8-bit/16-bit Operations (8/16)
This bit works to choose if using the Timer J as two units of 8-bit timer/counter or if using it as a
single unit of 16-bit timer/counter. Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from
the TMJ-1 will be valid.
Bit 4
8/16
Description
0
Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate separately
(Initial value)
1
Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate altogether as 16-bit timer/counter
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 308 of 1037
Bits 3 and 2: Selecting the Inputting Clock to the TMJ-2 (PS21 and PS20)
This bit works to select the clock to input to the TMJ-2. Selection of the leading edge or the
trailing edge is workable for counting by use of an external clock.
TMJC:Bit0
Bit 3
Bit 2
PS22
*
3
PS21
PS20
Description
0
Counting by the PSS,
/16384
(Initial value)
0
1
Counting by the PSS,
/2048
0
Counting at underflowing of the TMJ-1
1
1
1
Counting at the leading edge or the trailing edge of
the external clock inputs (
,54
)
*
1
0
*
*
2
*
*
2
Counting by the PSS,
/1024 (available only the
H8S/2194C series)
Notes: 1. The edge selection for the external clock inputs is made by setting the edge select
register (IEGR). See section 6.2.4, Edge Select Register (IEGR) for more information.
2. Don't care.
3. Available only in the H8S/2194C series.
Bit 1: TMJ-2 Toggle Flag (TGL)
This flag indicates the toggled status of the underflowing with the TMJ-2. Reading only is
workable.
It will be cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 1
TGL
Description
0
The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 0
(Initial value)
1
The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 0
Bit 0: Switching Over Between Timer Output/Remote Controlling Output (T/R)
This bit works to select if using the timer outputs from the TMJ-1 as the output signal through
the TMO pin or if using the toggle outputs (remote controlled transmission data) from the TMJ-2
as the output signal through the TMO pin.
Bit 0
T/R
Description
0
Timer outputs from the TMJ-1
(Initial value)
1
Toggle outputs from the TMJ-2 (remote controlled transmission data)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 309 of 1037
Selecting the Operation Mode
The operation mode of the Timer J is determined by the Bit 4 (8/16) and Bit 0 (T/R) of the TMJ.
TMJ
Bit 4
Bit 0
8/16
T/R
Description
0
8-bit timer
2
(Initial value)
0
1
Remote controlling mode
1
*
16-bit timer
Note:
*
Don't care.
When writing is made into the TMJ under the timer mode, the counters (TCJ and TCK) will be
initialized (H'FF). Consequently, writing into the reloading registers (TLJ an TLK) should be
conducted after finishing settings with the TMJ.
Under the remote controlling mode, although the TLJ and the TLK will not be initialized even
when writing is made into the TMJ, follow the sequence listed below when starting a remote
controlling operation.
(1) Make setting to the remote controlling mode with the TMJ.
(2) Write the data into the TLJ and TLK.
(3) Start the remote controlled operation by use of the TMJ. (ST bit = 1)
Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from the TMJ-1 will be valid.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 310 of 1037
14.2.2
Timer J Control Register (TMJC)
0
1
0
2
0
R/W
3
(PS22)
*
--
(R/W)
*
--
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
MON1
R/W
BUZZ0
0
R/W
BUZZ1
MON0
TMJ2IE
TMJ1IE
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Bit 0 is readable/writable only in the H8S/2194C series.
The timer J control register works to select the buzzer output frequency and to control
permission/prohibition of interrupts.
The TMJC is an 8-bit read/write register.
When reset, the TMJC is initialized to H'09.
Bits 7 and 6: Selecting the Buzzer Output (BUZZ1 or BUZZ0)
This bit works to select if using the buzzer outputs as the output signal through the BUZZ pin or
if using the monitor signals as the output signal through the BUZZ pin.
When setting is made to the monitor signals, choose the monitor signal using the MON1 bit and
MON0 bit.
Bit 7
Bit 6
BUZZ1
BUZZ0
Description
Frequency when
= 10MHz
0
/4096
(Initial value)
2.44 kHz
0
1
/8192
1.22 kHz
0
Works to output monitor signals
1
1
Works to output BUZZ signals from the Timer J
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 311 of 1037
Bits 5 and 4: Selecting the Monitor Signals (MON1 or MON0)
These bits work to select the type of signals being output through the BUZZ pin for monitoring
purpose. These settings are valid only when the BUZZ1 and BUZZ0 bits are being set to 1 and
0.
When PB-CTL or REC-CTL is chosen, signal duties will be output as they are.
In case of DVCTL signals, signals from the CTL dividing circuit will be toggled before being
output. Signal waveforms divided by the CTL dividing circuit into "n-divisions" will further be
divided into halves. (Namely, "2n" divisions, 50% duty waveform).
In case of TCA7, Bit 7 of the counter of the Timer A will be output. (50% duty)
When the prescaler is being used with the Timer A, 1Hz outputs are available.
Bit 5
Bit 4
MON1
MON0
Description
0
PB or REC-CTL
(Initial value)
0
1
DVCTL
1
*
Outputs TCA7
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bits 3: Reserved
When this is read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Bit 2: Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ2I (TMJ2IE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the
TMJ2I.
Bit 2
TMJ2IE
Description
0
Prohibits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt
Bit 1: Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ1I (TMJ1IE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the
TMJ1I.
Bit 1
TMJ1IE
Description
0
Prohibits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 312 of 1037
Bit 0: Reserved (for H8S/2194 series)
When this is read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Bit 0: Selecting the Input clock for TMJ-2 (PS22) (for H8S/2194C series)
This bit, together with bits 3 and 2 (PS21, PS20) in TMJ, selects the input clock for TMJ-2. For
details, see section 14.2.1, Timer Mode Register J (TMJ).
14.2.3
Timer J Status Register (TMJS)
0
1
2
3
4
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
TMJ1I
0
R/(W)
*
TMJ2I
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer J status register (TMJS) works to indicate issuance of the interrupt request of the
Timer J. The TMJS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMJS is initialized to H'3F.
Bit 7: TMJ2I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ2I)
This is the TMJ2I interrupt requesting flag. This flag is set when the TMJ-2 underflows.
Bit 7
TMJ2I
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the TMJ-2 underflows
Bit 6: TMJ1I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ1I)
This is the TMJ1I interrupt requesting flag. This flag is set out when the TMJ-1 underflows.
TMJ1I interrupt requests will also be made under a 16-bit operation.
Bit 6
TMJ1I
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the TMJ-1 underflows
Bits 5 to 0: Reserved
When they are read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 313 of 1037
14.2.4
Timer Counter J (TCJ)
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
R
R
R
TDR15
R
TDR16
1
R
TDR17
TDR14
TDR13
TDR12
TDR11
TDR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The time counter J (TCJ) is an 8-bit readable down-counter which works to count down by the
internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by the PS11
and PS10 bits of the TMJ. TCJ values can be readout always. Nonetheless, when the 8/16 bit of
the TMJ is being set to 1 (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), reading is possible
under the word command only.
At this time, the TCK of the TMJ-2 can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ can be read by
the lower 8 bits.
When the TCJ underflows (H'00
Reloading value), regardless of the operation mode setting
of the 8/16 bit, the TMJ1I bit of the TMJS will be set to 1. The TCJ and TLJ are being allocated
to the same address.
When reset, the TCJ is initialized to H'FF.
14.2.5
Timer Counter K (TCK)
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
R
R
R
TDR25
R
TDR26
1
R
TDR27
TDR24
TDR23
TDR22
TDR21
TDR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The time counter K (TCK) is an 8-bit readable down-counter which works to count down by the
internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by the PS21
and PS20 bits of the TMJ. TCK values can be readout always. Nonetheless, when the 8/16 bit
of the TMJ is being set to 1 (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), reading is possible
under the word command only.
At this time, the TCK can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ of the TMJ-1 can be read by
the lower 8 bits.
When the TCK underflows (H'00
Reloading value), the TMJ2I bit of the TMJS will be set to
1.
The TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TCK is initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 314 of 1037
14.2.6
Timer Load Register J (TLJ)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
W
TLR15
W
TLR16
1
W
TLR17
TLR14
TLR13
TLR12
TLR11
TLR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer load register J (TLJ) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading
value of the TCJ.
When the reloading value is set to the TLJ, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCJ
and the TCJ starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation,
when the TCJ underflows, the value of the TLJ will be loaded to the TCJ. Consequently, the
underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the
8/16 bit of the TMJ is being set to 1 (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), writing is
possible under the word command only.
At this time, the upper 8 bits can be written into the TLK of the TMJ-2 and the lower 8 bits can
be written into the TLJ.
The TLJ and TCJ are being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TLJ is initialized to H'FF.
14.2.7
Timer Load Register K (TLK)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
W
TLR25
W
TLR26
1
W
TLR27
TLR24
TLR23
TLR22
TLR21
TLR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer load register K (TLK) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading
value of the TCK.
When the reloading value is set to the TLK, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCK
and the TCK starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation,
when the TCK underflows, the value of the TLK will be loaded to the TCK. Consequently, the
underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the
8/16 bit of the TMJ is being set to 1 (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), writing is
possible under the word command only. At this time, the upper 8 bits can be written into the
TLK and the lower 8 bits can be written into the TLJ of the TMJ-1. The TLK and TCK are
being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TLK is initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 315 of 1037
14.2.8
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP13 bit is set to 1, the Timer J stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 5: Module Stop (MSTP13)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer J.
MSTPCRH
Bit 5
MSTP13
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer J
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer J
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 316 of 1037
14.3
Operation
14.3.1
8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1)
The TMJ-1 is an 8-bit reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock or edge signals through
the
,54 pin are being used. By selecting the edge signals through the ,54 pin, it can also be
used as an event counter. While it is working as an event counter, its reloading function is
workable simultaneously. When data are written into the reloading register TLJ, these data will
be written into the counter TCJ simultaneously. Also, when the counter TCJ underflows, the
data of the reloading register TLJ will be reloaded to the counter TCJ.
When the counter underflows, TMJ1I interrupt requests will be issued.
The underflow will be toggled and, by a appropriate selection of the dividing clock, buzzer
outputs will be issued or carrier frequencies for remote controlling transmissions can be
acquired.
The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit reload timer. Nonetheless, when
they are being used, in combination, as a 16-bit timer, word command only is valid and the TCK
works as the down counter for the upper 8 bits and the TCJ works as the down counter for the
lower 8 bits, means a reloading register of total 16 bits.
When data are written into a 16-bit reloading register, the same data will be written into the 16-
bit counter.
Also, when the 16-bit counter underflows, the data of the 16-bit reloading register will be
reloaded into the counter.
Even when they are making a 16-bit operation, the TMJ1I interrupt requests of the TMJ-1 and
BUZZ outputs are effective. In case these functions are not necessary, make them invalid by
programming.
The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used for remote controlled data transmission.
Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 14.3.3, Remote Controlled Data
Transmission.
14.3.2
8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2)
The TMJ-2 is an 8-bit down-counting reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock, edge
signals through the
,54 pin or the underflow signals from the TMJ-1 are being used. By
selecting the edge signals through the
,54 pin, it can also be used as an event counter. While
it is working as an event counter, its reloading function is workable simultaneously.
When data are written into the reloading register TLK, these data will be written into the counter
TCK simultaneously. Also, when the counter TCK underflows, the data of the reloading register
TLK will be made to the data counter TCK.
When the counter underflows, TMJ2I interrupt requests will be issued.
The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit reload timer. For more
information on the 16-bit reload timer, see section 14.3.1, 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1).
The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be operated by remote controlled data transmission.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 317 of 1037
Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 14.3.3, Remote Controlled Data
Transmission.
14.3.3
Remote Controlled Data Transmission
The Timer J is capable of making remote controlled data transmission. The carrier frequencies
for the remote controlled data transmission can be generated by the TMJ-1 and the burst width
duration and the space width duration can be setup by the TMJ-2.
The data having been written into the reloading register TMJ-1 and into the burst/space duration
register (TLK) of the TMJ-2 will be loaded to the counter at the same time as the remote
controlled data transmission starts. (Remote controlled data transmission starting bit (ST)
1)
While remote controlled data transmission is being made, the contents of the burst/space
duration register will be loaded to the counter only while reloading is being made by underflow
signals. Even when a writing is made to the burst/space duration register while remote
controlled data transmission is being made, reloading operation will not be made until an
underflow signal is issued. The TMJ-2 issues TMJ2I interrupt requests by the underflow signals.
The TMJ-1 performs normal reloading operation (including the TMJ1I interrupt requests).
Figure 14.2 shows the output waveform for the remote controlled data transmission function.
When a shift to the low power consumption mode is effected while remote controlled data
transmission is being made, the ST bit will be cleared to 0. When resuming the remote
controlled data transmission after returning to the active mode, write 1.
Burst width
Space width
Burst width
TMJ-2 toggle output
= 1
TMJ-2 toggle output
= 0
TMJ-2 toggle
output = 1
Setting the
space width
Setting the
burst width
Setting the
space width
ST bit
1
Underflow
Underflow
Underflow
TMJ-1 can generate
the carrier frequencies
Remote controlled data
transmission outputs
Setting the remote
controlled mode
Setting the burst width
Figure 14.2 Remote Controlled Data Transmission Output Waveform
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 318 of 1037
TMJ-1
UDF
TMO
(BUZZ)
TMJ-2
UDF
REMOout
TMO
Remote controlled data
transmission output
Figure 14.3 Timer Output Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 319 of 1037
When the Timer J is set to the remote controlled operation mode, since the start bit (ST) is being
set or cleared in synchronization with the inputting clock to the TMJ-2, a delay upto a cycle of
the inputting clock at the maximum occurs, namely, after the ST bit has been set to 1 until the
remote controlled data transmission starts. Consequently, when the TLK is updated during the
period after setting the ST bit to 1 until the next cycle of the inputting clock comes, the initial
burst width will be changed like shown in figure 14.4.
Therefore, when making remote controlled data transmission, determine I/O of the TGL bit at
the time of the first burst width control operation without fail. (Or, set the space width to the
TLK after waiting for a cycle of the inputting clock.)
After that, operations can be continued by interrupts.
Similarly, pay attention to the control works when ending remote controlled data transmission.
Exemple)
1) Set the burst width with the TLK.
2) ST bit
1
3) Execute the procedure 4) if the TGL flag = 1.
4) Set the space width with the TLK under the status where the TGL flag = 1.
5] Make TMJ-2 interrupt.
6] Set the burst width with the TLK.
:
n) After making TMJ-2 interrupt, make setting of the ST
0 under the status where the
TGL flag = 0.
The period during which the
space width settig can be
made. (S)
Delay
Interrupt
Interrupt
TLK setting
(Burst width)
(B)
Burst width
according to (B)
Space width
according to (S)
Stopping the remote controlled
data transmission
TGL flag
Inputting clock
to the TMJ-2
ST
0
Delay
ST
1
Remote controlled data
transmission starts here.
If an updating is made with the
TLK during this period, the burst
width will be changed.
Figure 14.4 Controls of the Remote Controlled Data Transmission
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 320 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 321 of 1037
Section 15 Timer L
15.1
Overview
The Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter using the control pulses or the CFG division signals as
the clock source.
15.1.1
Features
Features of the Timer L are as follows:
Choices of two different types of internal clocks (
/128 and
/64), DVCFG2 (CFG division
signal 2), PB and REC-CTL (control pulses) are available for your selection.
--
In case the PB-CTL is not available, such as when reproducing un-recorded tapes, tape
count can be made by the DVCFG2.
--
Selection of the leading edge or the trailing edge is workable with the CTL pulse
counting.
Interrupts occur when the counter overflows or underflows and at occurrences of compare
match clear.
It is possible to switch over between the up-counting and down-counting functions with the
counter.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 322 of 1037
15.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer L.
[Legend]
Internal data bus
DVCFG2 : Division signal 2 of the CFG
PB and REC-CTL : Control pluses necessary when making
reproduction and storage
LMR : Timer L mode register
LTC : Linear time counter
RCR : Reload/compare match register
OVF : Overflow
UDF : Underflow
LMR
LTC
RCR
Comparator
Write
OVF/UDF
Reloading
Match clear
Interrupt request
Interrupting
circuit
DVCFG2
PB and
REC-CTL
INTERNAL CLOCK
/128
/64
Read
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of the Timer L
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 323 of 1037
15.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 15.1 shows the register configuration of the Timer L. The linear time counter (LTC) and
the reload compare patch register (RCR) are being allocated to the same address.
Reading or writing determines the accessing register.
Table 15.1 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Timer L mode register
LMR
R/W
Byte
H'30
H'D112
Linear time counter
LTC
R
Byte
H'00
H'D113
Reload/compare match
register
RCR
W
Byte
H'00
H'D113
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 324 of 1037
15.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
15.2.1
Timer L Mode Register (LMR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
--
--
--
--
1
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
LMIE
0
R /(W)
*
LMIF
IMR3
IMR2
IMR1
IMR0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer L mode register (LMR) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the
interrupts, to select between up-counting and down-counting and to select the clock source.
When reset, the LMR is initialized to H'30.
Bit 7: Timer L Interrupt Requesting Flag (LMIF)
This is the Timer L interrupt requesting flag. It indicates occurrence of overflow or underflow
of the LTC or occurrence of compare match clear.
Bit 7
LMIF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the LTC overflows, underflows or when compare match clear has occurred
Bit 6: Enabling Interrupt of the Timer L (LMIE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of interrupt of the Timer L when the LTC
overflows, underflows or when compare match clear has occurred.
Bit 6
LMIE
Description
0
Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer L
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer L
Bits 5 and 4: Reserved
When they are read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
Bit 3: Up-count/Down-count Control (LMR3)
This bit is for selection if the Timer L is to be controlled to the up-counting function or down-
counting function.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 325 of 1037
(1) When Controlled to the Up-counting Function
When any other values than H'00 are input to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00
before starting counting up. When the LTC value and the RCR value match, the LTC
will be cleared to H'00. Also, interrupt requests will be issued by the match signal.
(Compare patch clear function)
When H'00 is set to the RCR, the counter makes 8-bit interval timer operation to issue a
interrupt request when overflowing occurs. (Interval timer function)
(2) When Controlled to the Down-counting Function
When a value is set to the RCR, the set value is reloaded to the LTC and counting down
starts from that value. When the LTC underflows, the value of the RCR will be reloaded
to the LTC. Also, when the LTC underflows, a interrupt request will be issued. (Auto
reload timer function)
Bit 3
LMR3
Description
0
Controlling to the up-counting function
(Initial value)
1
Controlling to the up-counting function
Bits 2 to 0: Clock Selection (LMR2 to LMR0)
The bits LMR2 to LMR0 work to select the clock to input to the Timer L. Selection of the
leading edge or the trailing edge is workable for counting by the PB and the REC-CTL.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
R2
LMR1
LMR0
Description
0
Counts at the rising edge of the PB and REC-CTL
(Initial value)
0
1
Counts at the falling edge of the PB and REC-CTL
0
1
*
Counts the DVCFG2
0
*
Counts at
/128 of the internal clock
1
1
*
Counts at
/64 of the internal clock
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 326 of 1037
15.2.2
Linear Time Counter (LTC)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
3
0
4
5
6
0
7
R
R
R
R
LTC6
0
R
LTC5
0
R
LTC4
0
R
LTC7
LTC3
LTC2
LTC1
LTC0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The linear time counter (LTC) is a readable 8-bit up/down-counter. The inputting clock can be
selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR.
When reset, the LTC is initialized to H'00.
15.2.3
Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
3
0
4
5
6
0
7
W
W
W
W
RCR6
0
W
RCR5
0
W
RCR4
0
W
RCR7
RCR3
RCR2
RCR1
RCR0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reload/compare match register (RCR) is an 8-bit write only register.
When the Timer L is being controlled to the up-counting function, when a compare match value
is set to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared at the same time and the LTC will then start counting
up from the initial value (H'00).
While, when the Timer L is being controlled to the down-counting function, when a reloading
value is set to the RCR, the same value will be loaded to the LTC at the same time and the LTC
will then start counting up from said value. Also, when the LTC underflows, the value of the
RCR will be reloaded to the LTC.
When reset, the RCR is initialized to H'00.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 327 of 1037
15.2.4
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP12 bit is set to 1, the Timer L stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 4: Module Stop (MSTP12)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer L.
MSTPCRH
Bit 4
MSTP12
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer L
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer L
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 328 of 1037
15.3
Operation
The Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter.
The inputting clock for the Timer L can be selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR
from the choices of the internal clock (
/128 and
/64), DVCDG2, PB and REC-CTL.
The Timer L is provided with three different types of operation modes, namely, the compare
match clear mode when controlled to the up-counting function, the auto reloading mode when
controlled to the down-counting function and the interval timer mode.
Respective operation modes and operation methods will be explained below.
15.3.1
Compare Match Clear Operation
When the LMR3 bit of the LMR is cleared to 0, the Timer L will be controlled to the up-
counting function.
When any other values than H'00 are written into the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00
simultaneously before starting counting up.
Figure 15.2 shows the clear timing of the LTC. When the LTC value and the RCR value match
(compare match), the LTC readings will be cleared to H'00 to resume counting from H'00.
Figure 15.3 indicated on the next page shows the compare match clear timing.
RCR
LTC
Write signal
1 state
N
H' 00
Figure 15.2 RCR Writing and LTC Clearing Timing Chart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 329 of 1037
LTC
RCR
N
H' 00
N-1
N
Interrupt
request
Count-up
signal
Compare match
clear signal
PB-CTL
Figure 15.3 Compare Match Clearing Timing Chart
(In case the rising edge of the PB-CTL is selected)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 330 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 331 of 1037
Section 16 Timer R
16.1
Overview
The Timer R consists of triple 8-bit down-counters. It carries VCR mode identification function
and slow tracking function in addition to the reloading function and event counter function.
16.1.1
Features
The Timer R consists of triple 8-bit reloading timers. By combining the functions of three units
of reloading timers/counters and by combining three units of timers, it can be used for the
following applications:
(1) Applications making use of the functions of three units of reloading timers.
(2) For identification of the VCR mode.
(3) For reel controls.
(4) For acceleration and braking of the capstan motor when being applied to intermittent
movements.
(5) Slow tracking mono-multi applications.
16.1.2
Block Diagram
The Timer R consists of three units of reload timer counters, namely, two units of reload timer
counters equipped with capturing function (TMRU-1 and TMRU-2) and a unit of reload timer
counter (TMRU-3).
Figure 16.1 is a block diagram of the Timer R.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 332 of 1037
Notes:
Internal bus
Internal bus
Clock sources
DVCTL
CFG
Clock
selection (2 bits)
Reloading register
(8 bits)
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Capture register
(8 bits)
TMRI2
Interrupt request
TMRI1
Interrupt
request
TMRI3
Interrupt
request
TMRU-1
TMRCP1
*
2
Under
flow
TMRU-3
Underflow
*
1
TMRL3
PS31,30
External signals
IRQ3
/1024
/2048
/4096
Clock source
/64
/128
/256
Clock sources
/4
/256
/512
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Latch
clock
selection
Clock
selection (2 bits)
Resetting Available/
Not
available
CP/
SLM
SLW
CAPF
Capture register
(8 bits)
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Reloading register
(8 bits)
Acceleration/
braking
Reloading Available/
not
available
Reloading
clock
selection
Reloading register
(8 bits)
RLD/
CAP
Clock
selection
(2 bits)
CPS
LAT
PS21,20
CLR2
Res
Res
TMRCP2
Under
flow
TMRU-2
CFG mask F/F
R
S
Q
R
S
Q
Acceleration
braking
AC/BR
TMRL2
RLD
RLCK
TMRL1
PS11,10
Interrupting circuit
1.
When the DVCTL is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made when the counter underflows and when
the dividing clock is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made by the DVCTL.
2.
When the LAT bit = 0, the capture signal against the TMRU-1 will not be output.
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of the Timer R
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 333 of 1037
16.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 16.1 shows the pin configuration of the Timer R.
Table 16.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Input capture inputting pin
,54
Input
Input capture inputting for the Timer R
16.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 16.2 shows the register configuration of the Timer R.
Table 16.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Timer R mode register 1
TMRM1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'D118
Timer R mode register 2
TMRM2
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'D119
Timer R control/status
register
TMRCS
R/W
Byte
H'03
H'D11F
Timer R capture register 1
TMRCP1
R
Byte
H'FF
H'D11A
Timer R capture register 2
TMRCP2
R
Byte
H'FF
H'D11B
Timer R load register 1
TMRL1
W
Byte
H'FF
H'D11C
Timer R load register 2
TMRL2
W
Byte
H'FF
H'D11D
Timer R load register 3
TMRL3
W
Byte
H'FF
H'D11E
Note: Memories of respective registers will be preserved even under the low power consumption
mode. Nonetheless, the CAPF flag and SLW flag of the TMRM2 will be cleared to 0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 334 of 1037
16.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
16.2.1
Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
RLD
R/W
AC/BR
0
R/W
CLR2
RLCK
PS21
PS20
RLD/CAP
CPS
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) works to control the acceleration and braking processes
and to select the inputting clock for the TMRU-2. This is an 8-bit read/write register.
When reset, the TMRM1 is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7: Selecting Clearing/Not Clearing of TMRU-2 (CLR2)
This bit is used for selecting if the TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared or not as it is
captured.
Bit 7
CLR2
Description
0
TMRU-2 counter reading is not to be cleared as soon as it is captured. (Initial value)
1
TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared as soon as it is captured
Bit 6: Selecting the Acceleration/Braking Processing (AC/BR)
This bit works to control occurrences of interrupt requests to detect completion of acceleration
or braking while the capstan motor is making intermittent revolutions.
For more information, see section 16.3.6, Acceleration and Braking of the Capstan Motor.
Bit 6
AC/BR
Description
0
Acceleration
(Initial value)
1
Braking
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 335 of 1037
Bit 5: Selection if Using the TMRU-2 for Reloading or Not Doing So (RLD)
This bit is used for selecting if the TMRU-2 reload function is to be turned on or not.
Bit 5
RLD
Description
0
Not using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer
(Initial value)
1
Using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer
Bit 4: Selection of the Reloading Timing for the TMRU-2 (RLCK)
This bit works to select if the TMRU-2 is reloading by the CFG or by underflowing of the
TMRU-2 counter. This choice is valid only when the bit 5 (RLD) is being set to 1.
Bit 4
RLCK
Description
0
Reloading at the rising edge of the CFG
(Initial value)
1
Reloading by underflowing of the TMRU-2
Bits 3 and 2: Selecting the Clock Source for the TMRU-2 (PS21 and PS20)
These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-2.
Bit 3
Bit 2
PS21
PS20
Description
0
Counting by underflowing of the TMRU-1
(Initial value)
0
1
Counting by the PSS,
/256
0
Counting by the PSS,
/128
1
1
Counting by the PSS,
/64
Bit 1: Selection of the Operation Mode of the TMRU-1 (RLD/CAP)
This bit works to select if the operation mode of the TMRU-1 is reload timer mode or capture
timer mode.
Under the capture timer mode, reloading operation will not be made. Also, the counter reading
will be cleared as soon as capture has been made.
Bit 1
RLD/CAP
Description
0
The TMRU-1 works as the reloading timer
(Initial value)
1
The TMRU-1 works as the capture timer
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 336 of 1037
Bit 0: Selection of the Capture Signals of the TMRU-1 (CPS)
In combination with the LAT bit (Bit 7) of the TMR2, this bit works to select the capture signals
of the TMRU-1. This bit becomes valid when the LAT bit is being set to 1. It will also become
valid when the RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set to 1. Nonetheless, it will be invalid when the
RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set to 0.
Bit 0
CPS
Description
0
Capture signals at the rising edge of the CFG
(Initial value)
1
Capture signals at the edge of the IRQ3
16.2.2
Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/W
R/W
PS10
R/W
PS11
0
R/W
LAT
PS31
PS30
CP/SLM
CAPF
SLW
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to identify the
operation mode and to control the slow tracking processing.
When reset, the TMRM2 is initialized to H'00.
Note: *
The CAPF bit and the SLW bit, respectively, works to latch the interrupt causes and
writing 0 only is valid. Consequently, when these bits are being set to 1, respective
interrupt requests will not be issued. Therefore, it is necessary to check these bits
during the course of the interrupt processing routine to have them cleared.
Also, priority is given to the set and, when an interrupt cause occur while the a
clearing command (BCLR, MOV, etc.) is being executed, the CAPF bit and the SLW
bit will not be cleared respectively and it thus becomes necessary to pay attention to
the clearing timing.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 337 of 1037
Bit 7: Selection of the Capture Signals of the TMRU-2 (LAT)
In combination with the CPS bit (Bit 0) of the TMRM1, this bit works to select the capture
signals of the TMRU-2.
TMRM2
TMRM1
Bit 7
Bit 0
LAT
CPS
Description
0
*
Captures when the TMRU-3 underflows
(Initial value)
0
Captures at the rising edge of the CFS
1
1
Captures at the edge of the IRQ3
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bits 6 and 5: Selecting the Clock Source for the TMRU-1 (PS11 and PS10)
These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-1.
Bit 6
Bit 5
PS11
PS10
Description
0
Counting at the rising edge of the CFG
(Initial value)
0
1
Counting by the PSS,
/4
0
Counting by the PSS,
/256
1
1
Counting by the PSS,
/512
Bits 4 and 3: Selecting the Clock Source for the TMRU-3 (PS31 and PS30)
These bits work to select the inputting clock to the TMRU-3.
Bit 4
Bit 3
PS31
PS30
Description
0
Counting at the rising edge of the DVCTL from the dividing circuit.
(Initial value)
0
1
Counting by the PSS,
/4096
0
Counting by the PSS,
/2048
1
1
Counting by the PSS,
/1024
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 338 of 1037
Bit 2: Selection of Interrupt Causes (CP/SLM)
This bit works to select the interrupt causes for the TMRI3.
Bit 2
CP/SLM
Description
0
Makes interrupt requests upon the capture signals of the TMRU-2 valid (Initial value)
1
Makes interrupt requests upon ending of the slow tracking mono-multi valid
Bit 1: Capture Signal Flag (CAPF)
This is a flag being set out by the capture signal of the TMRU-2. Although both reading/writing
are possible, 0 only is valid for writing.
Also, priority is being given to the set and, when the "capture signal" and "writing 0" occur
simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the interrupt request will not be issued
and it is necessary to be attentive about this fact.
When the CP/SLM bit (Bit 2) is being set to 1, this CAPF bit should always be set to 0.
The CAPF flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 1
CAPF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
At occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals while the CP/SLM bit is being set to 0
Bit 0: Slow Tracking Mono-multi Flag (SLW)
This is a flag being set out when the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends. Although both
reading/writing are possible, 0 only is valid for writing.
Also, priority is being given to the set and, when "ending of the slow tracking mono-multi
processing" and "writing 0" occur simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the
interrupt request will not be issued and it is necessary to be attentive about this fact.
When the CP/SLM bit (Bit 2) is being set to 0, this SLW bit should always be set to 0.
The SLW flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 0
SLW
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends while the CP/SLM bit is being set
to 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 339 of 1037
16.2.3
Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS)
0
1
1
--
--
--
--
1
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/W
TMRI1E
R/W
TMRI2E
0
R/W
TMRI3E
TMRI3
TMRI2
TMRI1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R control/status register (TMRCS) works to control the interrupts of the Timer R.
The TMRCS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'03.
Bit 7: Enabling the TMRI3 Interrupt (TMRI3E)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI3 interrupt when an interrupt cause
being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2 has occurred, such as occurrences of the
TMRU-2 capture signals or when the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends, and the TMRI3
has been set to 1.
Bit 7
TMRI3E
Description
0
Prohibits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts
Bit 6: Enabling the TMRI2 Interrupt (TMRI2E)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI2 interrupt when the TMRI2 has been
set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of the TMRU-2 or by ending of the slow tracking
mono-multi processing.
Bit 6
TMRI2E
Description
0
Prohibits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 340 of 1037
Bit 5: Enabling the TMRI1 Interrupt (TMRI1E)
This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence of the TMRI1 interrupt when the TMRI1 has been
set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of the TMRU-1.
Bit 5
TMRI1E
Description
0
Prohibits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts
(Initial value)
1
Permits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts
Bit 4: TMRI3 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI3)
This is the TMRI3 interrupt requesting flag.
It indicates occurrence of an interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2,
such as occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals or ending of the slow tracking mono-multi
processing.
Bit 4
TMRI3
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
At occurrence of the interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the
TMRM2
Bit 3: TMRI2 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI2)
This is the TMRI2 interrupt requesting flag.
It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration/braking
processing of the capstan motor.
Bit 3
TMRI2
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting conditions]
At occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration
/braking processing of the capstan motor
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 341 of 1037
Bit 2: TMRI1 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI1)
This is the TMRI1 interrupt requesting flag.
It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-1 underflow signals.
Bit 2
TMRI1
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1.
1
[Setting conditions]
When the TMRU-1 underflows.
Bits 1 and 0: Reserved
When they are read, 1 will always be readout. Writes are disabled.
16.2.4
Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC17
R
TMRC16
R
TMRC15
R
TMRC14
R
TMRC13
R
TMRC12
R
TMRC11
R
TMRC10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R capture register 1 (TMRCP1) works to store the capture data of the TMRU-1.
During the course of the capturing operation, the TMRU-1 counter readings are captured by the
TMRCP1 at the CFG edge or the IRQ3 edge. The capturing operation of the TMRU-1 is being
performed using 16 bits, in combination with the capturing operation of the TMRU-2.
The TMRCP1 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'FF.
Notes: 1. When the TMRCP1 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading
data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out.
2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made while the capturing
operating is in progress, the counter reading becomes unstable. After returning to the
active mode, always write "H'FF" into the TMRL1 to initialize the counter.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 342 of 1037
16.2.5
Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC27
R
TMRC26
R
TMRC25
R
TMRC24
R
TMRC23
R
TMRC22
R
TMRC21
R
TMRC20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R capture register 2 (TMRCP2) works to store the capture data of the TMRU-2. At
each CFG edge, IRQ3 edge, or at occurrence of underflow of the TMRU-3, the TMRU-2 counter
readings are captured by the TMRCP2.
The TMRCP2 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS will be initialized into
H'FF.
Notes: 1. When the TMRCP2 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading
data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out.
2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made, the counter reading
becomes unstable. After returning to the active mode, always write "H'FF" into the
TMRL2 to initialize the counter.
16.2.6
Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR17
W
TMR16
W
TMR15
W
TMR14
W
TMR13
W
TMR12
W
TMR11
W
TMR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 1 (TMRL1) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-1.
When a load value is set to the TMRL1, the same value will be set to the TMRU-1 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows during the course of the reload timer operation, the TMRL1 value will be set to the
counter.
When reset, the TMRL1 is initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 343 of 1037
16.2.7
Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR27
W
TMR26
W
TMR25
W
TMR24
W
TMR23
W
TMR22
W
TMR21
W
TMR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 2 (TMRL2) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-2.
When a load value is set to the TMRL2, the same value will be set to the TMRU-2 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows or a CFG edge is detected during the course of the reload timer operation, the
TMRL2 value will be set to the counter.
When reset, the TMRL2 is initialized to H'FF.
16.2.8
Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR37
W
TMR36
W
TMR35
W
TMR34
W
TMR33
W
TMR32
W
TMR31
W
TMR30
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 3 (TMRL3) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-3.
When a load value is set to the TMRL3, the same value will be set to the TMRU-3 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows or a DVCTL edge is detected, the TMRL2 value will be set to the counter.
(Reloading will be made by the underflowing signals when the DVCTL signal is selected as the
clock source, and reloading will be made by the DVCTL signals when the dividing clock is
selected as the clock source.)
When reset, the TMRL3 is initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 344 of 1037
16.2.9
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, the Timer R stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 3: Module Stop (MSTP11)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer R.
MSTPCRH
Bit 3
MSTP11
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer R
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer R
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 345 of 1037
16.3
Operation
16.3.1
Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1
The reload timer counter equipped with capturing function, TMRU-1, consists of an 8-bit down-
counter, a reloading register and a capture register.
The clock source can be selected from among the leading edge of the CFG signals and three
types of dividing clocks. It is also selectable whether using it as a reload counter or as a capture
counter. Even when the capturing function is selected, the counter readings can be updated by
writing the values into the reloading register.
When the counter underflows, the TMRI1 interrupt request will be issued.
The initial values of the TMRU-1 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF.
(1) Operation of the Reload Timer
When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the
counter simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, the reloading register value will
be reloaded to the counter. The TMRU-1 is a dividing circuit for the CFG. In combination
with the TMRU-2 and TMRU-3, it can also be used for the mode identification purpose.
(2) Capturing Operation
Capturing operation is carried out in combination with the TMRU-2 using the combined 16
bits. It can be so programmed that the counter may be cleared by the capture signal. The
CFG edges or IRQ3 edges are used as the capture signals. It is possible to issue the TMRI3
interrupt request by the capture signal.
In addition to the capturing function being worked out in combination with the TMRU-2, the
TMRU-1 can be used as a 16-bit CFG counter. Selecting the IRQ3 as the capture signal, the
CFG within the duration of the reel pulse being input into the
,54 pin can be counted by
the TMRU-1.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 346 of 1037
16.3.2
Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2
The reload timer counter equipped with capturing function, TMRU-2, consists of an 8-bit down-
counter, a reloading register and a capture register.
The clock source can be selected from among the undedrflowing signal of the TMRU-1 and
three types of dividing clocks. Also, although the reloading function is workable during its
capturing operation, equipping or not of the reloading function is selectable. Even when
without-reloading-function is chosen, the counter reading can be updated by writing the values
to the reloading register.
When the counter underflows, the TMRI2 interrupt request will be issued.
The initial values of the TMRU-2 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF.
(1) Operation of the Reload Timer
When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the
counter, simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, the reloading register value
will be reloaded to the counter.
The TMRU-2 can make acceleration and braking work for the capstan motor using the reload
timer operation.
(2) Capturing Operation
Using the capture signals, the counter reading can be latched into the capturing register. As
the capture signal, you can choose from among edges of the CFG, edges of the IRQ3 or the
underflow signals of the TMRU-3. It is possible to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request by the
capture signal.
The capturing function (stopping the reloading function) of the TMRU-2, in combination
with the TMRU-1 and TMRU-3, can also be used for the mode identification purpose.
16.3.3
Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3
The reload counter timer TMRU-3 consists of an 8-bit down-counter and a reloading register.
Its clock source can be selected from between the undedrflowing signal of the counter and the
edges of the DVCTL signals. (When the DVCTL signal is selected as the clock source,
reloading will be effected by the underflowing signals and when the dividing clock is selected as
the clock source, reloading will be effected by the DVCTL signals.) The reloading signal works
to reload the reloading register value into the counter. Also, when a value is written into to the
reloading register, the same value will be written into the counter, simultaneously.
The initial values of the counter and the reloading register are H'FF.
The underflowing signals can be used as the capturing signal for the TMRU-2.
The TMRU-3 can also be used as a dividing circuit for the DVCTL. Also, in combination with
the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2 (capturing function), the TMRU-3 can be used for the mode
identification purpose. Since the divided signals of the DVCTL are being used as the clock
source, CTL signals (DVCTL) conforming to the double speed can be input when making
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 347 of 1037
searches. These DVCTL signals can also be used for phase controls of the capstan motor.
Also, by selecting the dividing clock as the clock source, it is possible to make a delay with the
edges of the DVCTL to provide the slow tracking mono-multi function.
16.3.4
Mode Identification
When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing
tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading
function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of the Timer R should be used.
The Timer R will become to the aforementioned status after a reset.
Under the aforementioned status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register
of the TMRU-1 and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-
3. When the TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such
capturing register value represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle.
As aforementioned, the Timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to "n"
times of DVCTL's or to identify the mode being searched.
For exemplary settings for the register, see section 16.5.1, Mode Identification.
16.3.5
Reeling Controls
CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and
TMRU-2. By choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal, and by counting the CFG within the
duration of the reel pulse being input through the
,54 pin, reeling controls, etc. can be
effected.
For exemplary settings for the register, see section 16.5.2, Reeling Controls.
16.3.6
Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still
reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan
motor. The acceleration and braking processes will function to check if the revolution of a
capstan motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the
TMRU-2 (reloading function) should be used.
When making accelerations:
(1) Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to acceleration. (Set to 1). Also, use the rising edge of
the CFG as the reloading signal.
(2) Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to deem as the acceleration has been finished,
into the reloading register.
(3) The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 348 of 1037
(4) In case the acceleration has not been finished (in case the CFG signal is not input even when
the prescribed time has elapsed = underflowing of down-counting has occurred), such
underflowing works to set to CFG mask F/F (masking movement) and the reload timer will
be cleared by the CFG.
(5) When the acceleration has been finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed
time has elapsed = reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows),
an interrupt request will be issued because of the CFG.
When making breaking:
(1) Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to braking. (Clear to 0). Also, use the rising edge of the
CFG as the reloading signal.
(2) Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to deem as the braking has been finished, into
the reloading register.
(3) The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data.
(4) In case the braking has not been finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed
time has elapsed = reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows),
the reload timer movement will continue.
(5) When the acceleration has been finished (when the CFG signal is not input even when the
prescribed time has elapsed = underflowing of down-counting has occurred), interrupt
request will be issued because of the underflowing signal.
The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions,
in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function being outlined below.
For exemplary settings for the register, see section 16.5.4, Acceleration and Braking Processes
of the Capstan Motor.
16.3.7
Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function
When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan
motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi
function works to measure the time from the rising edge of the DVCTL signal down to the
desired point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used
to activate the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time
measurements for the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be
made using the TMRU-2. Figure 16.2 below shows the exemplary time series movements when
a slow reproduction is being performed.
For exemplary settings for the register, see section 16.5.3, Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 349 of 1037
HSW
FG acceleration detection
Compensation for vertical vibrations
(Supplementary V-pulse)
DVCTL
Interrupt
Reloading
Reverse
rotation
Frame feeds
Compensation for
horizontal vibrations
Compensation for
horizontal vibrations
Braking
process
Acceleration
process
Slow tracking
delay
C.Rotary
H.AmpSW
Accelerating the
capstan motor
Braking the
drum motor
Slow tracking
moto-multi
Braking the
capstan motor
Servo
Hi-Z
[Legend]
Hi-Z : High impedance state
In case of 4-head SP mode.
In case of 2-head application, H.AmpSW and
C.Rotary should be "Low".
FG stopping detection
Forward
rotation
Figure 16.2 Exemplary Time Series Movements when a Slow Reproduction
Is Being Performed
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 350 of 1037
16.4
Interrupt Cause
The interrupt causes for the Timer R are 3-causes of the TMRI3 bit through TMRI1 bit of the
timer R control/status register (TMRCS).
(a) Interrupts being caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-1 (TMRI1)
These interrupts will constitute the timing for reloading with the TMRU-1.
(b) Interrupts being caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-2 or by an end of the acceleration
or braking process (TMRI2)
When interrupts occur at the reload timing of the TMRU-2, clear the AC/BR
(acceleration/braking) bit of the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) to 0.
(c) Interrupts being caused by the capture signals of the TMRU-3 and by ending the slow
tracking mono-multi process (TMRI3)
Since these two interrupt causes are constituting the OR, it becomes necessary to determine
which interrupt cause is occurring using the software.
Respective interrupt causes are being set to the CAPF flag or the SLW flag of the timer R
mode register 2 (TMRM2), have the software determine which.
Since the CAPF flag and the SLW flag will not be cleared automatically, program the
software to clear them. (Writing 0 only is valid for these flags.) Unless these flags are
cleared, detection of the next cause becomes unworkable. Also, if the CP/SLM bit is
changed leaving these flags un-cleared as they are, these flags will get cleared.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 351 of 1037
16.5
Exemplary Settings for Respective Functions
16.5.1
Mode Identification
When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing
tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading
function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of the Timer R should be used.
The Timer R will become to the aforementioned status after a reset.
Under the aforementioned status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register
of the TMRU-1 and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-
3. When the TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such
capturing register value represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle.
As aforementioned, the Timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to "n"
times of DVCTL's or to identify the mode being searched.
Exemplary settings
(1) Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
CLR2 bit (Bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture.
RLD bit (Bit 5) = 0: Sets the TMRU-3 without reloading function.
PS21 and PS20 (Bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are
to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2.
RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) = 0: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the reload timer operation.
(2) Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
LAT bit (Bit 7) = 0: The underflowing signals of the TMRU-3 are to be used as the
capture signal for the TMRU-2.
PS11 and PS10 (Bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the CFG signal is to be
used as the clock source for the TMRU-1.
PS31 and PS30 (Bits 4 and 3) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the DVCTL signal is to be
used as the clock source for the TMRU-3.
CP/SLM bit (Bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt
request.
(3) Setting the timer R load register 1 (TMRL1)
Set the dividing value for the CFG. The set value should become (n - 1) when divided by
"n".
(4) Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3)
Set the dividing value for the DVCTL. The set value should become (n - 1) when divided
by "n".
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 352 of 1037
16.5.2
Reeling Controls
CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and
TMRU-2. By choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal, and by counting the CFG within the duration
of the reel pulse being input through the
,54 pin, reeling controls, etc. can be effected.
Exemplary settings
(1) Setting P13/
,54 pin as the ,54 pin
Set the PMR13 bit (Bit 3) of the port mode register 1 (PMR1) to 1. See section 22.2.2,
Port Mode Register (PMR1).
(2) Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
CLR2 bit (Bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture.
PS21 and PS20 (Bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are
to be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2.
RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) = 1: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the capturing operation.
CPS bit (Bit 0) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for the
TMRU-1 and TMRU-2.
(3) Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
LAT bit (Bit 7) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for
the TMRU-1 and TMRU-2.
PS11 and PS10 (Bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The rising edge of the CFG signal is to be used
as the clock source for the TMRU-1.
CP/SLM bit (Bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt
request.
16.5.3
Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function
When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan
motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi
function works to measure the time from the leading edge of the DVCTL signal down to the
desired point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used
to activate the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time
measurements for the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be
made using the TMRU-2.
Exemplary settings
(1) Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
PS31 and PS30 (Bits 4 and 3) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-3.
CP/SLM bit (Bit 2) = 1: The slow tracking delay signal is to work to issue the TMRI3
interrupt request.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 353 of 1037
(2) Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3)
Set the slow tracking delay value. When the delay count is "n", the set value should be
(n - 1).
Regarding the delaying duration, see figure 16.2 Exemplary time series movements
when a slow reproduction is being performed.
16.5.4
Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still
reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan
motor. The acceleration and braking processes will function to check if the revolution of a
capstan motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the
TMRU-2 (reloading function) should be used.
The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions,
in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function.
Exemplary settings for the acceleration process
(1) Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
AC/BR bit (Bit 6) = 1: Acceleration process
RLD bit (Bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer.
RLCK bit (Bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG.
PS21 and PS20 (Bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-2.
(2) Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2)
Set the count reading for the duration until the acceleration process finishes. When the
count is "n", the set value should be (n - 1).
Regarding the duration until the acceleration process finishes, see figure 16.2 Exemplary
time series movements when a slow reproduction is being performed.
Exemplary settings for the braking process
(1) Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
AC/BR bit (Bit 6) = 0: Braking process
RLD bit (Bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer.
RLCK bit (Bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG.
PS21 and PS20 (Bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-2.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 354 of 1037
(2) Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2)
Set the count reading for the duration until the braking process finishes. When the count
is "n", the set value should be (n - 1).
Regarding the duration until the braking process finishes, see figure 16.2 Exemplary time
series movements when a slow reproduction is being performed.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 355 of 1037
Section 17 Timer X1
17.1
Overview
The Timer X1 is capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms using the
free running counter (FRC) as the basic means and it is also applicable to measurements of the
durations of input pulses and the cycles external clocks.
17.1.1
Features
Listed below are the features of the Timer X1.
Choices of 4 different types of counter inputting clocks are available for your selection.
You can select from among three different types of internal clocks (
/4,
/16 and
/64) and
the DVCFG.
Two independent output comparing functions
Capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms.
Four independent input capturing functions
The rising edge or falling edge can be selected for use. The buffer operation can also be
designated.
Counter clearing designation is workable.
The counter readings can be cleared by compare match A.
Seven types of interrupt causes
Comparing match
2 causes, input capture
4 causes and overflow
1 cause are available
for use and they can make respective interrupt requests independently.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 356 of 1037
17.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer X1.
Internal data bus
[Legend]
TIER
ICRA
ICRB
ICRC
ICRD
TCRX
OCRB
Comparison circuit
FRC
Comparison circuit
OCRA
TOCR
TCSRX
TIER
Input
capture
control
Output comparing output
Interrupt
request 7
FTOA
FTOB
FTIA
*
(HSW)
FTIB
*
(VD)
FTIC
*
(DVCTL)
FTID
*
(NHSW)
(DVCFG)
/ 4
/ 16
/ 64
TCSRX
FRC
OCRA
OCRB
TCRX
TOCR
ICRA
ICRB
ICRC
ICRD
: Timer interrupt enabling register
: Timer control/status register X
: Free running counter
: Output comparing register A
: Output comparing register B
: Timer control register X
: Output comparing control register
: Input capture register A
: Input capture register B
: Input capture register C
: Input capture register D
Note:
*
stands for the external terminal.
( ) stands for the internal signal.
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of the Timer X1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 357 of 1037
17.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 17.1 shows the pin configuration of the Timer X1.
Table 17.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Output comparing A output-pin
FTOA
Output
Output pin for the output comparing A
Output comparing B output-pin
FTOB
Output
Output pin for the output comparing B
Input capture A input-pin
FTIA
Input
Input-pin for the input capture A
Input capture B input-pin
FTIB
Input
Input-pin for the input capture B
Input capture C input-pin
FTIC
Input
Input-pin for the input capture C
Input capture D input-pin
FTID
Input
Input-pin for the input capture D
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 358 of 1037
17.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 17.2 shows the register configuration of the Timer X1.
Table 17.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
3
Timer interrupt enabling register
TIER
R/W
H'00
H'D100
Timer control/status register X
TCSRX
R/ (W)
*
1
H'00
H'D101
Free running counter H
FRCH
R/W
H'00
H'D102
Free running counter L
FRCL
R/W
H'00
H'D103
Output comparing register AH
OCRAH
R/W
H'FF
H'D104
*
2
Output comparing register AL
OCRAL
R/W
H'FF
H'D105
*
2
Output comparing register BH
OCRBH
R/W
H'FF
H'D104
*
2
Output comparing register BL
OCRBL
R/W
H'FF
H'D105
*
2
Timer control register X
TCRX
R/W
H'00
H'D106
Timer output comparing control register
TOCR
R/W
H'00
H'D107
Input capture register AH
ICRAH
R
H'00
H'D108
Input capture register AL
ICRAL
R
H'00
H'D109
Input capture register BH
ICRBH
R
H'00
H'D10A
Input capture register BL
ICRBL
R
H'00
H'D10B
Input capture register CH
ICRCH
R
H'00
H'D10C
Input capture register CL
ICRCL
R
H'00
H'D10D
Input capture register DH
ICRDH
R
H'00
H'D10E
Input capture register DL
ICRDL
R
H'00
H'D10F
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1. Bit 0 is readable/writable.
2. The addresses of the OCRA and OCRB are the same. Changeover between them
are to be made by use of the TOCR bit and OCRS bit.
3. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 359 of 1037
17.2
Descriptions of Respective Registers
17.2.1
Free Running Counter (FRC)
Free running counter H (FRCH)
Free running counter L (FRCL)
0
3
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
7
0
9
0
R/W
11
0
13
0
15
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
1
0
2
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
6
0
8
0
R/W
10
0
12
0
14
FRC
FRCH
FRCL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The FRC is a 16-bit read/write up-counter which counts up by the inputting internal
clock/external clock. The inputting clock is to be selected from the CKS1 and CKS0 of the
TCRX.
By the setting of the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX, the FRC can be cleared by comparing match A.
When the FRC overflows (H'FFFF
H'0000), the OVF of the TCSRX will be set to 1.
At this time, when the OVIE of the TIER is being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to
the CPU.
Reading/writing can be made from and to the FRC through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
The FRC is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 360 of 1037
17.2.2
Output Comparing Register A and B (OCRA and OCRB)
Output comparing register AH and BH (OCRAH and OCRBH)
Output comparing register AL and BL (OCRAL and OCRBL)
1
3
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
7
1
9
1
R/W
11
1
13
1
15
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
R/W
R/W
1
1
2
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
6
1
8
1
R/W
10
1
12
1
14
OCRA, OCRB
OCRAH, OCRBH
OCRAL, OCRBL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The OCR consists of twin 8-bit read/write registers (OCRA and OCRB). The contents of the
OCR are always being compared with the FRC and, when the value of these two match, the
OCFA and OCRB of the TCSRX will be set to 1. At this time, if the OCIAE and OCIB of the
TIER are being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU.
When performing compare matching, if the OEA and OEB of the TOCR are being set to 1, the
level value having been set to the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR will be output through the
FTOA and FTOB pins. After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until
the first compare matching occurs.
Reading/writing can be made from and to the OCR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
The OCR is cleared to H'FFFF when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 361 of 1037
17.2.3
Input Capture Register A Through D (ICRA Through ICRD)
Input capture register AH to DH (ICRAH to ICRDH)
Input capture register AL to DL (ICRAL to ICRDL)
0
3
0
R
5
0
R
7
0
9
0
R
11
0
13
0
15
R
R
R
0
R
R
1
0
2
0
R
4
0
R
6
0
8
0
R
10
0
12
0
14
ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, ICRD
ICRAH, ICRBH, ICRCH, ICRDH
ICRAL, ICRBL, ICRCL, ICRDL
R
R
R
R
0
R
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The ICR consists of four 16-bit read only registers (ICRA through ICRD).
When the falling edge of the input capture input signal is detected, the value is transferred to the
ICRA through ICRD. At this time, the ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1
simultaneously. At this time, if the IDIAE through IDIDE of the TCRX are all being set to 1,
due interrupt request will be issued to the CPU. The edge of the input signal can be selected by
setting the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX.
Also, the ICRC and ICRD can be used as the buffer register, respectively, of the ICRA and
ICRB by setting the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX to perform buffer operations. Figure
17.2 shows the connections necessary when using the ICRC as the buffer register of the ICRA.
(BUFEA = 1)
When the ICRC is used as the buffer of the ICRA, by setting IEDGA
IEDGC, both of the
rising and falling edges can be designated for use. In case of IEDGA = IEDGC, either one of the
rising edge or the falling edge only is usable. Regarding selection of the input signal edge, see
table 17.3.
Note:
Transference from the FRC to the ICR will be performed regardless of the value of the
ICF.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 362 of 1037
Edge detection and
capture signal
generating circuit.
BUFEA
IEDGA
FTIA
IEDGC
ICRC
ICRA
FRC
Figure 17.2 Buffer Operation (an example)
Table 17.3 Input Signal Edge Selection when Making Buffer Operation
IEDGA
IEDGC
Selection of the Input Signal Edge
0
Captures at the rising edge of the input capture input A (Initial value)
0
1
0
Captures at both rising and falling edges of the input capture input A
1
1
Captures at the rising edge of the input capture input A
Reading can be made from the ICR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
For stable input capturing operation, maintain the pulse duration of the input capture input
signals at 1.5 system clock (
) or more in case of single edge capturing and at 2.5 system clock
(
) or more in case of both edge capturing.
The ICR is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 363 of 1037
17.2.4
Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICICE
R/W
ICIBE
0
R/W
ICIAE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
ICSA
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TIER is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control permission/prohibition of
respective interrupt requests.
The TIER is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Bit 7: Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt A (ICIAE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA when the ICFA of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 7
ICIAE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA
Bit 6: Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt B (ICIBE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB when the ICFB of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 6
ICIBE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB
Bit 5: Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt C (ICICE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC when the ICFC of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 5
ICICE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 364 of 1037
Bit 4: Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt D (ICIDE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD when the ICFD of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 4
ICIDE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD
Bit 3: Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt A (OCIAE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA when the OCFA of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 3
OCIAE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA
Bit 2: Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt B (OCIBE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB when the OCFB of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 2
OCIBE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB
Bit 1: Enabling the Timer Overflow Interrupt (OVIE)
This bit works to permit/prohibit interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF when the OVF of the
TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 1
OVIE
Description
0
Prohibits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF
(Initial value)
1
Permits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 365 of 1037
Bit 0: Selecting the Input Capture A Signals (ICSA)
This bit works to select the input capture A signals.
Bit 0
ICSA
Description
0
Selects the FTIA pin for inputting of the input capture A signals
(Initial value)
1
Selects the HSW for inputting of the input capture A signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 366 of 1037
17.2.5
Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
ICFB
0
R/(W)
*
ICFA
R/(W)
*
ICFD
R/(W)
*
ICFC
R/(W)
*
OCFB
R/(W)
*
OCFA
CCLRA
R/(W)
*
OVF
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCSRX is an 8-bit register which works to select counter clearing timing and to control
respective interrupt requesting signals. The TCSRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under
the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Meanwhile, as for the timing, see section 17.3, Operation.
The FTIA through FTID pins are for fixed inputs inside the LSI under the low power
consumption mode excluding the sleep mode. Consequently, when such shifts as "active mode
low power consumption mode
active mode" are made, wrong edges may be detected
depending on the pin status or on the type of the detecting edge.
To avoid such error, clear the interrupt requesting flag once immediately after shifting to the
active mode from the low power consumption mode.
Bit 7: Input Capture Flag A (ICFA)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the
ICRA by the input capture signals.
When the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFA indicates the status that the FRC
value has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals and that the ICRA value
before being updated has been transferred to the ICRC.
This flag should be cleared by use of of the software. Such setting should only be made by use
of the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 7
ICFA
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFA after reading the ICFA under the setting of ICFA = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture
signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 367 of 1037
Bit 6: Input Capture Flag B (ICFB)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the
ICRB by the input capture signals.
When the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFB indicates the status that the FRC
value has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals and that the ICRB value
before being updated has been transferred to the ICRC.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 6
ICFB
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFB after reading the ICFB under the setting of ICFB = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture
signals
Bit 5: Input Capture Flag C (ICFC)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the
ICRC by the input capture signals.
When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, although
the ICFC will be set out, data transference to the ICRC will not be performed.
Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFC can be used as an external interrupt by setting the
ICICE bit to 1.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 5
ICFC
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFC after reading the ICFC under the setting of ICFC = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the input capture signal has occurred
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 368 of 1037
Bit 4: Input Capture Flag D (ICFD)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of the FRC has been transferred to the
ICRD by the input capture signals.
When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, although
the ICFD will be set out, data transference to the ICRD will not be performed.
Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFD can be used as an external interrupt by setting the
ICIDE bit to 1.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 4
ICFD
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFD after reading the ICFD under the setting of ICFD = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the input capture signal has occurred
Bit 3: Output Comparing Flag A (OCFA)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the FRC and the OCRA have come to a comparing
match.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 3
OCFA
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OCFA after reading the OCFA under the setting of OCFA
= 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the FRC and the OCRA have come to the comparing match
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 369 of 1037
Bit 2: Output Comparing Flag B (OCFB)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the FRC and the OCRB have come to a comparing
match.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 2
OCFB
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OCFB after reading the OCFB under the setting of OCFB
= 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the FRC and the OCRB have come to the comparing match
Bit 1: Time Over Flow (OVF)
This is a status flag indicating the fact that the FRC overflowed. (H'FFFF
H'0000).
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 1
OVF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OVF after reading the OVF under the setting of OVF = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the FRC value has become H'FFFF
H'0000
Bit 0: Counter Clearing (CCLRA)
This bit works to select if or not to clear the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A
(matching signal of the FRC and OCRA).
Bit 0
CCLRA
Description
0
Prohibits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A
(Initial value)
1
Permits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 370 of 1037
17.2.6
Timer Control Register X (TCRX)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
IEDGB
0
R/W
IEDGA
R/W
IEDGD
R/W
IEDGC
R/W
BUFEB
R/W
BUFEA
CKS0
R/W
CKS1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCRX is an 8-bit read/write register which works to select the input capture signal edge, to
designate the buffer operation and to select the inputting clock for the FRC.
The TCRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Bit 7: Input Capture Signal Edge Selection A (IEDGA)
This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal A (FTIA).
Bit 7
IEDGA
Description
0
Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal A
(Initial value)
1
Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal A
Bit 6: Input Capture Signal Edge Selection B (IEDGB)
This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal B (FTIB).
Bit 6
IEDGB
Description
0
Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal B
(Initial value)
1
Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal B
Bit 5: Input Capture Signal Edge Selection C (IEDGC)
This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal C (FTIC).
However, when the DVCTL has been selected as the signal for the input capture signal edge
selection C, this bit will not influence the operation.
Bit 5
IEDGC
Description
0
Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal C
(Initial value)
1
Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal C
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 371 of 1037
Bit 4: Input Capture Signal Edge Selection D (IEDGD)
This bit works to select the rising edge or falling edge of the input capture signal D (FTID).
Bit 4
IEDGD
Description
0
Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal D
(Initial value)
1
Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal D
Bit 3: Buffer Enabling A (BUFEA)
This bit works to select if or not to use the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA.
Bit 3
BUFEA
Description
0
Using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA
(Initial value)
1
Not using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA
Bit 2: Buffer Enabling B (BUFEB)
This bit works to select if or not to use the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB.
Bit 2
BUFEB
Description
0
Using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB
(Initial value)
1
Not using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB
Bits 1 and 0: Clock Select (CKS1, 0)
These bits work to select the inputting clock to the FRC from among three types of internal
clocks and the DVCFG.
The DVCFG is the edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/4
(Initial value)
0
1
Internal clock: Counts at
/16
1
0
Internal clock: Counts at
/64
1
1
DVCFG: The edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 372 of 1037
17.2.7
Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
ICSC
0
R/W
ICSB
R/W
OSRS
R/W
ICSD
R/W
OEB
R/W
OEA
OLVLB
R/W
OLVLA
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TOCR is an 8-bit read/write register which works to select input capture signals and output
comparing output level, to permit output comparing outputs and to control switching over of the
access of the OCRA and OCRB. See the section 17.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register
(TIER) regarding the input capture inputs A.
The TOCR is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Bit 7: Selecting the Input Capture B Signals (ICSB)
This bit works to select the input capture B signals.
Bit 7
ICSB
Description
0
Selects the FTIB pin for inputting of the input capture B signals
(Initial value)
1
Selects the VD as the input capture B signals
Bit 6: Selecting the Input Capture C Signals (ICSC)
This bit works to select the input capture C signals. The DVCTL is the edge detecting pulse
selected by the CTL dividing timer.
Bit 6
ICSC
Description
0
Selects the FTIC pin for inputting of the input capture C signals
(Initial value)
1
Selects the DVCTL as the input capture C signals
Bit 5: Selecting the Input Capture D Signals (ICSD)
This bit works to select the input capture D signals.
Bit 5
ICSD
Description
0
Selects the FTID pin for inputting of the input capture D signals
(Initial value)
1
Selects the NHSW as the input capture D signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 373 of 1037
Bit 4: Selecting the Output Comparing Register (OCRS)
The addresses of the OCRA and OCRB are the same. The OCRS works to control which
register to choose when reading/writing this address. The choice will not influence the operation
of the OCRA and OCRB.
Bit 4
OCRS
Description
0
Selects the OCRA register
(Initial value)
1
Selects the OCRB register
Bit 3: Enabling the Output A (OEA)
This bit works to control the output comparing A signals.
Bit 3
OEA
Description
0
Prohibits the output comparing A signal outputs
(Initial value)
1
Permits the output comparing A signal outputs
Bit 2: Enabling the Output B (OEB)
This bit works to control the output comparing B signals.
Bit 2
OEB
Description
0
Prohibits the output comparing B signal outputs
(Initial value)
1
Permits the output comparing B signal outputs
Bit 1: Output Level A (OLVLA)
This bit works to select the output level to output through the FTOA pin by use of the comparing
match A (matching signal between the FRC and OCRA).
Bit 1
OLVLA
Description
0
Low level
(Initial value)
1
High level
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 374 of 1037
Bit 0: Output Level B (OLVLB)
This bit works to select the output level to output through the FTOB pin by use of the comparing
match B (matching signal between the FRC and OCRB).
Bit 0
OLVLB
Description
0
Low level
(Initial value)
1
High level
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 375 of 1037
17.2.8
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
0
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
0
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR consists of twin 8-bit read/write registers and it works to control the module stop
mode.
When the MSTP10 bit is set to 1, the Timer X1 stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 2: Module Stop (MSTP10)
This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer X1.
MSTPCRH
Bit 2
MSTP10
Description
0
Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer X1
1
Sets the module stop mode of the Timer X1
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 376 of 1037
17.3
Operation
17.3.1
Operation of the Timer X1
(1) Output Comparing Operation
Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting
clock can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external
clock by setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX.
The contents of the FRC are always being compared with the OCRA and OCRB and, when
the value of these two match, the level set by the the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR is
output through the FTOA pin and FTOB pin.
After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until the first compare
matching occurs.
Also, when the CCLRA of the TCSRX is being set to 1, the FRC will be cleared to H'0000
when the comparing match A occurs.
(2) Input Capturing Operation
Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting
clock can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external
clock by setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX.
The inputs are transferred to the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX through the FTIA
through FTID pins and, at the same time, the ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1.
At this time, if the ICIAE through ICIED of the TIER are being set to 1, due interrupt request
will be issued to the CPU.
When the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX are set to 1, the ICRC and ICRD work as the
buffer register, respectively, of the ICRA and ICRB. When the edge selected by setting the
IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX is input through the FTIA and FTIB pins, the value at
the time of the FRC is transferred to the ICRA and ICRB and, at the same time, the values of
the ICRA and ICRB before updating are transferred to the ICRC and ICRD. At this time,
when the ICFA and ICFB are being set to 1 and if the ICIAE and ICIBE of the TIER are
being set to 1, due interrupt request will be issued to the CPU.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 377 of 1037
17.3.2
Counting Timing of the FRC
The FRC is counted up by the inputting clock. By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX, the
inputting clock can be selected from among three different types of clocks (
/4,
/16 and
/64)
and the DVCFG.
(1) In Case of Internal Clock Operation
By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX, three types of internal clocks (
/4,
/16
and
/64), generated by dividing the system clock (
) can be selected. Figure 17.3 shows the
timing chart at this time.
FRC
Internal clock
FRC input
clock
N
N-1
N+1
Figure 17.3 Count Timing in Case of Internal Clock Operation
(2) In Case of DVCFG Clock Operation
By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX to 1, DVCFG clock input can be selected.
The DVCFG clock makes counting by use of the edge detecting pulse being selected by the
CFG dividing timer.
Figure 17.4 shows the timing chart at this time.
FRC
CFG
FRC input
clock
N
N+1
DVCFG
Figure 17.4 Count Timing in Case of CFG Clock Operation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 378 of 1037
17.3.3
Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing
When a comparing match occurs, the output level having been set by the OLVL of the TOCR is
output through the output comparing signal outputting pins (FTOA and FTOB).
Figure 17.5 shows the timing chart in case of the output comparing signal outputting A.
FRC
OLVLA
FTOA
Output comparing
signal outputting
A pin
N
N
Clearing
*
1
N
N
N+1
N+1
Comparing match
signal
OCRA
Note: 1. Execution of the command is to be designated by the software.
Figure 17.5 Output Comparing Signal Outputting A Timing
17.3.4
FRC Clearing Timing
The FRC can be cleared when the comparing match A occurs. Figure 17.6 shows the timing
chart when doing so.
FRC
Comparing match
A signal
N
H' 0000
Figure17.6 FRC Clearing Timing by Occurrence of the Comparing Match A
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 379 of 1037
17.3.5
Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing
(1) Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing
As for the input capture signal inputting, rising or falling edge is selected by settings of the
IEDGA through IEDGD bits of the TCRX.
Figure 17.7 shows the timing chart when the rising edge is selected (IEDGA through IEDGD
= 1).
Input capture signal
inputting pin
Input capture signal
Figure 17.7 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing (under normal state)
(2) Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing when Making Buffer Operation
Buffer operation can be made using the ICRA or ICRD as the buffer of the ICRA or ICRB.
Figure 17.8 shows the input capture signal inputting timing chart in case both of the rising
and falling edges are designated (IEDGA = 1 and IEDGC = 0, or IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC =
1), using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA (BUFEA = 1).
Input capture
signal
FTIA
FRC
ICRA
ICRC
n
n+1
N
M
n
m
M
n
M
N
n
Figure 17.8 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing Chart Under the Buffer Mode
(under normal state)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 380 of 1037
Even when the ICRC or ICRD is used as the buffer register, the input capture flag will be set up
corresponding to the designated edge change of respective input capture signals.
For example, when using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA, when an edge change
having been designated by the IEDGC bit is detected with the input capture signals C and if the
ICIEC bit is duly set, an interrupt request will be issued.
However, in this case, the FRC value will not be transferred to the ICRC.
17.3.6
Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing
The input capture signal works to set the ICFA through ICFD to "1" and, simultaneously, the
FRC value is transferred to the corresponding ICRA through ICRD. Figure 17.9 shows the
timing chart for the above.
Input capture
signal
ICFA to ICFD
ICRA to ICRD
FRC
N
N
Figure 17.9 ICFA through ICFD Setting Up Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 381 of 1037
17.3.7
Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing
The OCFA and OCFB are being set to 1 by the comparing match signal being output when the
values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match. The comparing match signal is generated at the
last state of the value match (the timing of the FRC's updating the matching count reading).
After the values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match, up until the count up clock signal is
generated, the comparing match signal will not be issued. Figure 17.10 shows the OCFA and
OCFB setting timing chart.
Comparing match
signal
OCFA, OCFB
OCRA, OCRB
FRC
N
N
N+1
Figure 17.10 OCF Setting Up Timing
17.3.8
Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing
The OVF is set to when the FRC overflows (H'FFFF
H'0000). Figure 17.11 shows the timing
chart for this case.
Overflowing
signal
FRC
H'FFFF
H'0000
OVF
Figure 17.11 OVF Setting Up Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 382 of 1037
17.4
Operation Mode of the Timer X1
Table 17.4 indicated below shows the operation mode of the Timer X1.
Table 17.4 Operation Mode of the Timer X1
Operation
mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive
Standby
Subsleep
Module
stop
FRC
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
OCRA, OCRB
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
ICRA to ICRD
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
TIER
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
TCRX
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
TOCR
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
TCSRX
Reset
Functions
Functions
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 383 of 1037
17.5
Interrupt Causes
Total seven interrupt causes exist with the Timer X1, namely, ICIA through ICID, OCIA, OCIB
and FOVI. Table 17.5 given below lists the contents of respective interrupt causes. Respective
interrupt requests can be permitted or prohibited by setting of respective interrupt enabling bits
of the TIER. Also, independent vector addresses are being allocated to respective interrupt
causes.
Table 17.5 Interrupt Causes of the Timer X1
Abbreviations of the Interrupt Causes
Priority Degree
Contents
ICIA
Interrupt request by the ICFA
ICIB
Interrupt request by the ICFB
ICIC
Interrupt request by the ICFC
ICID
Interrupt request by the ICFD
OCIA
Interrupt request by the OCFA
OCIB
Interrupt request by the OCFB
FOVI
Interrupt request by the OVF
High
Low
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 384 of 1037
17.6
Exemplary Uses of the Timer X1
Figure 17.12 indicated below shows an example of outputting at optional phase difference of the
pulses of the 50% duty. For this setting, follow the procedures listed below.
(1) set the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX to "1".
(2) Each time a comparing match occurs, the OLVIA bit and the OLVLB bit are reversed by use
of the software.
H'FFFF
OCRA
OCRB
H'0000
FTOA
FTOB
Clearing the
counter
FRC
Figure 17.12 An Exemplary Pulse Outputting
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 385 of 1037
17.7
Precautions when Using the Timer X1
Pay great attention to the fact that the following competitions and operations occur during
operation of the Timer X1.
17.7.1
Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC
When a counter clearing signal is issued under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing
cycle, writing into the FRC will not be effected and the priority will be given to clearing of the
FRC.
Figure 17.13 shows the timing chart in this case.
Address
FRC address
Internal writing
signal
Counter clearing
signal
FRC
N
H'0000
T1
T2
Writing cycle with the FRC
Figure 17.13 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 386 of 1037
17.7.2
Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC
When a counting up cause occurs under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing cycle,
the counting up will not be effected and the priority will be given to count writing.
Figure 17.14 shows the timing chart in this case.
Address
FRC address
Internal writing
signal
Inputting clock
to the FRC
Writing data
FRC
N
M
T1
T2
Writing cycle with the FRC
Figure 17.14 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 387 of 1037
17.7.3
Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR
When a comparing match occurs under the T2 state where the OCRA and OCRB are under the
writing cycle, the priority will be given to writing of the OCR and the comparing match signal
will be prohibited.
Figure 17.15 shows the timing chart in this case.
Address
OCR address
Internal writing
signal
Comparing match
signal
FRC
Writing data
Will be prohibited
OCR
N
M
N
N+1
T1
T2
Writing cycle with the OCR
Figure 17.15 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 388 of 1037
17.7.4
Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations
Depending on the timing of changing over the internal clocks, the FRC may count up. Table
17.6 indicated below shows the relations between the timing of changing over the internal clocks
(Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0) and the FRC operations.
When using an internal clock, the counting clock is being generated detecting the falling edge of
the internal clock dividing the system clock (
). For this reason, like Item No. 3 of table 17.6,
count clock signals are issued deeming the timing before the changeover as the falling edge to
have the FRC to count up.
Also, when changing over between an internal clock and the external clock, the FRC may count
up.
Table 17.6 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and the FRC Operation
No.
Re-writing timing
for the CKS1 and
CKS0
FRC operation
1
Low
Low level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0
N
N+1
2
Low
High level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0
N
N+1
N+2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 389 of 1037
No.
Re-writing timing
for the CKS1 and
CKS0
FRC operation
3
High
Low level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0
N
*
N+1
N+2
4
High
High level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Re-writing of the CKS1 and CKS0
N
N+1
N+2
Note:
*
The count clock signals are issued deeming the changeover timing as the falling edge
to have the FRC to count up.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 390 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 391 of 1037
Section 18 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
18.1
Overview
This LSI has an on-chip watchdog timer with one channel (WDT) for monitoring system
operation. The WDT outputs an overflow signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from
writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also
generate an internal reset signal or internal NMI interrupt signal.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In
interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
18.1.1
Features
WDT features are listed below.
Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
--
WOVI interrupt generation in interval timer mode
Internal reset or internal interrupt generated when the timer counter overflows
--
Choice of internal reset or NMI interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode
Choice of 8 counter input clocks
--
Maximum WDT interval: system clock period
131072
256
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 392 of 1037
18.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 18.1 shows block diagram of WDT.
Overflow
Interrupt
control
Reset
control
WOVI
(Interrupt request signal)
Internal reset signal
*
WTCNT
WTCSR
/ 2
/ 64
/ 128
/ 512
/ 2048
/ 8192
/ 32768
/ 131072
Clock
Clock
select
Internal clock
source
Bus
interface
Module bus
WTCSR
WTCNT
Note:
*
The internal reset signal can be generated by means of a register setting.
: Timer control/status register
: Timer counter
Internal bus
WDT
[Legend]
Internal NMI
interrupt request signal
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of WDT
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 393 of 1037
18.1.3
Register Configuration
The WDT has two registers, as summarized in table 18.2. These registers control clock
selection, WDT mode switching, the reset signal, etc.
Table 18.2 WDT Registers
Address
*
1
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Write
*
2
Read
Watchdog timer
control/status register
WTCSR
R/ (W)
*
3
H'00
H'FFBC
H'FFBC
Watchdog timer counter
WTCNT
R/W
H'00
H'FFBC
H'FFBD
System control register
SYSCR
R/W
H'09
H'FFE8
H'FFE8
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details of write operations, see section 18.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 394 of 1037
18.2
Register Descriptions
18.2.1
Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter.
When the TME bit is set to 1 in WTCSR, WTCNT starts counting pulses generated from the
internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR. When the count overflows
(changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF flag in WTCSR is set to 1.
WTCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0.
Note: *
WTCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For
details see section 18.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
18.2.2
Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)
7
OVF
0
R/(W)
*
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
RSTS
0
R/W
3
RST/NMI
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
WTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source
to be input to WTCNT, and the timer mode.
WTCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Note: *
WTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For
details see section 18.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 395 of 1037
Bit 7: Overflow Flag (OVF)
A status flag that indicates that WTCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 7
OVF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
(1) Write 0 in the TME bit
(2) Read WTCSR when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
1
[Setting condition]
When WTCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is
cleared automatically by the internal reset
Bit 6: Timer Mode Select (WT/
,7
,7)
Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. If used as an interval
timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when TCNT overflows. If
used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset or NMI interrupt when TCNT overflows.
Bit 6
WT/
,7
,7
Description
0
Interval timer mode: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when
WTCNT overflows
(Initial value)
1
Watchdog timer mode: Sends the CPU a reset or NMI interrupt request when
WTCNT overflows
Bit 5: Timer Enable (TME)
Selects whether WTCNT runs or is halted.
Bit 5
TME
Description
0
WTCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted
(Initial value)
1
WTCNT counts
Bit 4: Reset Select (RSTS)
Reserved. This bit should not be set to 1.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 396 of 1037
Bit 3: Reset or NMI (RST/
10,
10,)
Specifies whether an internal reset or NMI interrupt is requested on WTCNT overflow in
watchdog timer mode.
Bit 3
RST/
1,0,
1,0,
Description
0
An NMI interrupt request is generated
(Initial value)
1
An internal reset request is generated
Bits 2 to 0: Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0)
These bits select an internal clock source, obtained by dividing the system clock (
) for input to
WTCNT.
T
T WDT input clock selection
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Description
CSK2
CSK1
CSK0
Clock
Overflow Period
*
(when
= 10 MHz)
0
/2 (Initial
value)
51.2
s
0
1
/64
1.6 ms
0
/128
3.3 ms
0
1
1
/512
13.1 ms
0
/2048
52.4 ms
0
1
/8192
209.7 ms
0
/32768
838.9 ms
1
1
1
/131072
3.36 s
Note:
*
The overflow period is the time from when WTCNT starts counting up from H'00 until
overflow occurs.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 397 of 1037
18.2.3
System Control Register (SYSCR)
7
--
0
--
6
--
0
--
5
INTM1
0
R
4
INTM0
0
R/W
3
XRST
1
R
0
--
1
--
2
NMIEG1
0
R/W
1
NMIEG0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Only bit 3 is described here. For details on functions not related to the watchdog timer, see
sections 3.2.2 and 6.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant
modules.
Bit 3: External Reset (XRST)
Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by
watchdog timer overflow in addition to external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to
1 by an external reset, and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow.
Bit 3
XRST
Description
0
Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
1
Reset is generated by external reset input
(Initial value)
18.2.4
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer's WTCNT and WTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more
difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below.
(1) Writing to WTCNT and WTCSR
These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to
with byte transfer instructions.
Figure 18.2 shows the format of data written to WTCNT and WTCSR. WTCNT and
WTCSR both have the same write address. For a write to WTCNT, the upper byte of the
written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write
to WTCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must
contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to WTCNT or
WTCSR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 398 of 1037
<WTCNT write>
<WTCSR write>
Address : H'FFBC
Address : H'FFBC
H'5A
Write data
15
8 7
0
0
H'A5
Write data
15
8 7
0
0
Figure 18.2 Format of Data Written to WTCNT and WTCSR
(2) Reading WTCNT and WTCSR
These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFBC
for WTCSR, and H'FFBD for WTCNT.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 399 of 1037
18.3
Operation
18.3.1
Watchdog Timer Operation
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/
,7 and TME bits in WTCSR to 1. Software
must prevent WTCNT overflows by rewriting the WTCNT value (normally by writing H'00)
before overflow occurs. This ensures that WTCNT does not overflow while the system is
operating normally. If WTCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or
other error, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt is generated, for 518 system clock periods (518
). This is illustrated in figure 18.3.
An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and reset input from the
5(6 pin are handled
via the same vector. The reset source can be identified from the value of the XRST bit in
SYSCR.
If a reset caused by an input signal from the
5(6 pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur
simultaneously, the
5(6 pin reset has priority, and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1.
An NMI interrupt request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin
are handled via the same vector. Simultaneous handling of a watchdog timer NMI interrupt
request and an NMI pin interrupt request must therefore be avoided.
WTCNT value
H'00
Time
H'FF
WT/IT=1
TME=1
H'00 written
to WTCNT
WT/IT=1
TME=1
H'00 written
to WTCNT
518 system clock period
Internal reset
signal
WT/IT
TME
Overflow
Internal reset
generated
WOVF=1
*
: Timer mode select bit
: Timer enable bit
Note:
*
Cleared to 0 by an internal reset when WOVF is set to 1. XRST is cleared to 0.
Figure 18.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 400 of 1037
18.3.2
Interval Timer Operation
To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/
,7 bit in WTCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to
1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time WTCNT overflows, provided that
the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 18.4. This function can be used to
generate interrupt requests at regular intervals.
WTCNT value
H'00
Time
H'FF
WT/IT=0
TME=1
WOVI
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
WOVI : Interval timer interrupt request generation
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
Figure 18.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 401 of 1037
18.3.3
Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
The OVF bit in WTCSR is set to 1 if WTCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the
same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 18.5.
If NMI request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, when WTCNT overflows the
OVF bit in WTCSR is set to 1 and at the same time an NMI interrupt is requested.
CK
WTCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
Figure 18.5 Timing of OVF Setting
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 402 of 1037
18.4
Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in WTCSR. OVF
must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When NMI interrupt request generation is
selected in watchdog timer mode, an overflow generates an NMI interrupt request.
18.5
Usage Notes
18.5.1
Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a WTCNT write cycle, the
write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 18.6 shows this operation.
Internal address
Internal
Internal write
signal
WTCNT input
clock
WTCNT
N
M
T
1
T
2
WTCNT write cycle
Counter write data
Figure 18.6 Contention between WTCNT Write and Increment
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 403 of 1037
18.5.2
Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0
If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur
in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0)
before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0.
18.5.3
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is
operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 404 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 405 of 1037
Section 19 8-Bit PWM
19.1
Overview
The 8-bit PWM incorporates 4 channels of the duty control method. Its outputs can be used to
control a reel motor or loading motor.
19.1.1
Features
Conversion period: 256-state
Duty control method
19.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit PWM (1 channel).
PWMn
(n=3 to 0)
2
0
2
7
OVF
Match signal
[Legend]
PWRn
PW8CR
: 8-bit PWM data register n
: 8-bit PWM control register
PWMn
OVF
: 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin n
: Overflow signal from FRC lower 8-bit
PWRn
Free-running counter (FRC)
Comparator
PW8CR
Polarity
specification
Internal data bus
R
S
Q
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit PWM
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 406 of 1037
19.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 19.1 shows the 8-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 19.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin
0
PWM0
Output
8-bit PWM square-wave output 0
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin
1
PWM1
Output
8-bit PWM square-wave output 1
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin
2
PWM2
Output
8-bit PWM square-wave output 2
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin
3
PWM3
Output
8-bit PWM square-wave output 3
19.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 19.2 shows the 8-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 19.2 8-Bit PWM Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
8-bit PWM data register 0
PWR0
W
Byte
H'00
H'D126
8-bit PWM data register 1
PWR1
W
Byte
H'00
H'D127
8-bit PWM data register 2
PWR2
W
Byte
H'00
H'D128
8-bit PWM data register 3
PWR3
W
Byte
H'00
H'D129
8-bit PWM control register
PW8CR
R/W
Byte
H'F0
H'D12A
Port mode register 3
PMR3
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFD0
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 407 of 1037
19.2
Register Descriptions
19.2.1
Bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3)
(1) PWR0
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW04
PW03
PW02
PW01
PW00
0
W
PW07
W
W
W
PW06
PW05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(2) PWR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW14
PW13
PW12
PW11
PW10
0
W
PW17
W
W
W
PW16
PW15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(3) PWR2
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW24
PW23
PW22
PW21
PW20
0
W
PW27
W
W
W
PW26
PW25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(4) PWR3
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW34
PW33
PW32
PW31
PW30
0
W
PW37
W
W
W
PW36
PW35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
8-bit PWM data registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3) control the duty cycle at
8-bit PWM pins. The data written in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 correspond to the high-
level width of one PWM output waveform cycle (256 states).
When data is set in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3, the contents of the data are latched in the
PWM waveform generators, updating the PWM waveform generation data.
PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are write-only registers. When read, all bits are always read
as 1.
PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 408 of 1037
19.2.2
8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
PWC3
PWC2
PWC1
PWC0
R/W
R/W
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 8-bit PWM control register (PW8CR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls
PWM functions. PW8CR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved
They are always read as 1. Writes are disabled.
Bits 3 to 0: Output Polarity Select (PWC3 to PWC0)
These bits select the output polarity of PWMn pin between positive or negative (reverse).
Bit n
PWCn
Description
0
PWMn pin output has positive polarity
(Initial value)
1
PWMn pin output has negative polarity
(n = 3 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 409 of 1037
19.2.3
Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR34
PMR33
PMR32
PMR31
PMR30
0
R/W
PMR37
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR36
PMR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls function switching of each pin in the port 3.
Switching is specified for each bit.
The PMR3 is a 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
For bits other than 5 to 2, see section 11.5, Port 3.
Bits 5 to 2: P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32)
These bits set whether the P3n/PWMn pin is used as I/O pin or it is used as 8-bit PWM output
PWMm pin.
Bit n
PMR3n
Description
0
P3n/PMWm pin functions as P3n I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
P3n/PMWm pin functions as PWMm output pin
(n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 410 of 1037
19.2.4
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode.
When MSTP4 bit is set to 1, the 8-bit PWM stops its operation upon completion of the bus cycle
and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 4:
Module Stop (MSTP4)
This bit sets the module stop mode of the 8-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 4
MSTP4
Description
0
8-bit PWM module stop mode is released
1
8-bit PWM module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 411 of 1037
19.3
8-Bit PWM Operation
The 8-bit PWM outputs PWM pulses having a cycle length of 256 states and a pulse width
determined by the data registers (PWR).
The output PWM pulse can be converted to a DC voltage through integration in a low-pass filter.
Figure 19.2 shows the output waveform example of 8-bit PWM. The pulse width (Twidth) can
be obtained by the following expression:
Twidth = (1/
)
(PWR setting value)
T width
Pulse width
T width
Pulse cycle
(256 states)
T width
Pulse width
T width
Pulse cycle
(256 states)
H'00
PWRn setting
value
H'FF
FRC lower
8-bit value
PWRn pin
output
(Positive
polarity)
(n=3 to 0)
(Negative
polarity)
Figure 19.2 8-bit PWM Output Waveform (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 412 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 413 of 1037
Section 20 12-Bit PWM
20.1
Overview
The 12-bit PWM incorporates 2 channels of the pulse pitch control method and functions as the
drum and capstan motor controller.
20.1.1
Features
Two on-chip 12-bit PWM signal generators are provided to control motors. These PWMs use
the pulse-pitch control method (periodically overriding part of the output). This reduces low-
frequency components in the pulse output, enabling a quick response without increasing the
clock frequency. The pitch of the PWM signal is modified in response to error data
(representing lead or lag in relation to a preset speed and phase).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 414 of 1037
20.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the 12-bit PWM (1 channel). The PWM signal is
generated by combining quantizing pulses from a 12-bit pulse generator with quantizing pulses
derived from the contents of a data register. Low-frequency components are reduced because
the two quantizing pulses have different frequencies. The error data is represented by an
unsigned 12-bit binary number.
Internal data bus
[Legend]
CAPPWM
or
DRMPWM
CAPPWM
/2
/4
/8
/16
/32
/64
/128
DRMPWM
: Capstan mix pin
: Drum mix pin
PWM control register
Digital filter
circuit
Error data
PTON
PWM data register
Output control circuit
Pulse generator
Counter
DFUCR
CP/DP
Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of 12-Bit PWM (1 channel)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 415 of 1037
20.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 20.1 shows the 12-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 20.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Capstan mix
CAPPWM
Drum mix
DRMPWM
Output
12-bit PWM square-wave output
20.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 20.2 shows the 12-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 20.2 12-Bit PWM Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
CPWCR
W
Byte
H'42
H'D07B
12-bit PWM control register
DPWCR
W
Byte
H'42
H'D07A
CPWDR
R/W
Word
H'F000
H'D07C
12-bit PWM data register
DPWDR
R/W
Word
H'F000
H'D078
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 416 of 1037
20.2
Register Descriptions
20.2.1
12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR)
(1) CPWCR
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
1
7
CH/L
CSF/DF
CCK2
CCK1
CCK0
0
W
CPOL
W
W
W
CDC
CHiZ
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(2) DPWCR
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
1
7
DH/L
DSF/DF
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
0
W
DPOL
W
W
W
DDC
DHiZ
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPWCR is the PWM output control register for the capstan motor. DPWCR is the PWM output
control register for the drum motor. Both are 8-bit writable registers.
CPWCR and DPWCR are initialized to H'42 by a reset, or in sleep mode, standby mode, watch
mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or module stop mode of the servo circuit.
Bit 7: Polarity Invert (POL)
This bit can invert the polarity of the modulated PWM signal for noise suppression and other
purposes. This bit is invalid when fixed output is selected (when bit DC is set to 1).
Bit 7
POL
Description
0
Output with positive polarity
(Initial value)
1
Output with inverted polarity
Bit 6: Output Select (DC)
Selects either PWM modulated output, or fixed output controlled by the pin output bits (Bits 5
and 4).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 417 of 1037
Bits 5 and 4: PWM Pin Output (HiZ, H/L)
When bit DC is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM output pins (CAPPWM, DRMPWM) output a value
determined by the HiZ and H/L bits. The output is not affected by bit POL.
In power-down modes, the 12-bit PWM circuit and pin statuses are retained. Before making a
transition to a power-down mode, first set bits 6 (DC), 5 (HiZ), and 4 (H/L) of the 12-bit PWM
control registers (CPWCR and DPWCR) to select a fixed output level. Choose one of the
following settings:
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
DC
HiZ
H/L
Output state
0
Low output
(Initial value)
0
1
High output
1
1
*
High-impedance
0
*
*
Modulation signal output
Note:
*
Don't care
Bit 3: Output Data Select (SF/DF)
Selects whether the data to be converted to PWM output is taken from the data register or from
the digital filter circuit.
Bit
SF/DF
Description
0
Modulation by error data from the digital filter circuit
(Initial value)
1
Modulation by error data written in the data register
Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and
phase filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the CAPPWM and
DRMPWM pins. However, it is possible to output only drum phase filter results from
CAPPWM pin and only capstan phase filter result from DRMPWM pin, by DFUCR settings
of the digital filter circuit. See the section 28.11 Digital Filters.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 418 of 1037
Bit 2 to 0: Carrier Frequency Select (CK2 to CK0)
Selects the carrier frequency of the PWM modulated signal. Do not set them to 111.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CK2
CK1
CK0
Description
0
2
0
1
4
0
8
(Initial value)
0
1
1
16
0
32
0
1
64
0
128
1
1
1
(Do not set)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 419 of 1037
20.2.2
12-Bit PWM Data Registers (CPWDR, DPWDR)
(1) CPWDR
1
0
R/W
CPWDR1
0
0
R/W
CPWDR0
3
0
R/W
CPWDR3
2
0
R/W
CPWDR2
5
0
R/W
CPWDR5
4
0
R/W
CPWDR4
7
0
R/W
CPWDR7
6
0
R/W
CPWDR6
9
0
R/W
CPWDR9
8
0
R/W
CPWDR8
11
0
R/W
CPWDR11
10
0
R/W
CPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(2) DPWDR
1
0
R/W
DPWDR1
0
0
R/W
DPWDR0
3
0
R/W
DPWDR3
2
0
R/W
DPWDR2
5
0
R/W
DPWDR5
4
0
R/W
DPWDR4
7
0
R/W
DPWDR7
6
0
R/W
DPWDR6
9
0
R/W
DPWDR9
8
0
R/W
DPWDR8
11
0
R/W
DPWDR11
10
0
R/W
DPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 12-bit PWM data registers (CPWDR and DPWDR) are 12-bit readable/writable registers
in which the data to be converted to PWM output is written.
The data in these registers is converted to PWM output only when bit SF/DF of the
corresponding control register is set to 1. The error data from the digital filter circuit is
written in the data register, and then modulated by PWM. At this time, the error data from
the digital filter circuit can be monitored by reading the data register.
These registers can be accessed by word only, and cannot be accessed by byte. Byte access
gives unassured results.
CPWDR and DPWDR are initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in sleep mode, standby mode,
watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or module stop mode of the servo circuit.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 420 of 1037
20.2.3
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode.
When the MSTP1 bit is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM and Servo circuit, stops their operation upon
completion of the bus cycle and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5,
Module Stop Mode.
The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 1:
Module Stop (MSTP1)
This bit sets the module stop mode of the 12-bit PWM. This bit also controls the module stop
mode of the servo circuit.
MSTPCRL
Bit 1
MSTP1
Description
0
Module stop mode of the 12-bit PWM and servo circuit is released
1
Module stop mode of the 12-bit PWM and servo circuit is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 421 of 1037
20.3
Operation
20.3.1
Output Waveform
The PWM signal generator combines the error data with the output from an internal pulse
generator to produce a pulse-width modulated signal.
When Vcc/2 is set as the reference value, the following conditions apply:
When the motor is running at the correct sped and phase, the PWM signal is output with a
50% duty cycle.
When the motor is running behind the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically
holding part of the PWM signal low. The part held low depends on the size of the error.
When the motor is running ahead of the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically
holding part of the PWM signal high. The part held high depends on the size of the error.
When the motor is running at the correct speed and phase, the error data is a 12-bit value
representing 1/2 (1000 0000 0000), and the PWM output has the same frequency as the selected
division clock.
After the error data has been converted into a PWM signal, the PWM signal can be smoothed
into a DC voltage by an external low-pass filter (LPF). The smoothes error data can be used to
control the motor.
Figure 20.2 shows sample waveform outputs.
The 12-bit PWM pin outputs a low-level signal upon reset, in power-down mode or at module-
stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 422 of 1037
1
Counter
Pulse Generator
PWM data register
C10
C11
C12
C13
Corresponds to Pwr3=1
Corresponds to Pwr2=1
Corresponds to Pwr1=1
Corresponds to Pwr0=1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Pwr3 2 1 0
"L"
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
Figure 20.2 Sample Waveform Output by 12-Bit PWM (4 Bits)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 423 of 1037
Section 21 14-Bit PWM
21.1
Overview
The 14-bit PWM is a pulse division type PWM which can be used for V-synthesizer, etc.
21.1.1
Features
Features of the 14-bit PWM are given below:
Choice of two conversion periods
A conversion period of 32768/
with a minimum modulation width of 2/
, or a conversion
period of 16384/
with a minimum modulation width of 1/
, can be selected.
Pulse division method for less ripple
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 424 of 1037
21.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the 14-bit PWM.
[Legend]
PWCR
/4
/2
PWDRL
: PWM control register
: PWM data register L
PWDRU
PWM14
: PWM data register U
: PWM14 output pin
Internal data bus
PWCR
PWDRL
PWDRU
PWM waveform
generator
PWM14
Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM
21.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 21.1 shows the 14-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 21.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
PWM 14-bit square-wave output pin
PWM14
*
Output
14-bit PWM square-wave output
Note:
*
This pin also functions as P40 general I/O pin. When using this pin, set the pin
function by the port mode register 4 (PMR4). For details, see section 11.6, Port 4.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 425 of 1037
21.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 21.2 shows the 14-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 21.2 14-Bit PWM Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
PWM control register
PWCR
R/W
Byte
H'FE
H'D122
PWM data register U
PWDRU
W
Byte
H'00
H'D121
PWM data register L
PWDRL
W
Byte
H'00
H'D120
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 426 of 1037
21.2
Register Descriptions
21.2.1
PWM Control Register (PWCR)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
PWCR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The PWM control register (PWCR) is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the 14-bit PWM
functions. PWCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved
They are always read as 1. Writes are disabled.
Bit 0: Clock Select (PWCR0)
Selects the clock supplied to the 14-bit PWM.
Bit 0
PWCR0
Description
0
The input clock is
/2 (t
= 2/
)
(Initial value)
The conversion period is 16384/
, with a minimum modulation width of 1/
1
The input clock is
/4 (t
= 4/
)
The conversion period is 32768/
, with a minimum modulation width of 2/
Note: t/
: Period of PWM clock input
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 427 of 1037
21.2.2
PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)
(1) PWDRU
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
W
PWDRU0
W
PWDRU1
W
PWDRU2
W
PWDRU3
W
PWDRU4
W
PWDRU5
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(2) PWDRL
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
7
W
PWDRL0
W
PWDRL1
W
PWDRL2
W
PWDRL3
W
PWDRL4
W
PWDRL5
0
W
PWDRL6
W
PWDRL7
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU and PWDRL) indicate high level width in one PWN
waveform cycle.
PWDRU and PWDRL form a 14-bit write-only register, with the upper 6 bits assigned to
PWDRU and the lower 8 bits to PWDRL. The value written in PWDRU and PWDRL gives the
total high-level width of one PWM waveform cycle. Both PWDRU and PWDRL are accessible
by byte access only. Word access gives unassured results.
When 14-bit data is written in PWDRU and PWDRL, the contents are latched in the PWM
waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated. When writing the 14-
bit data, follow these steps:
(1) Write the lower 8 bits to PWDRL.
(2) Write the upper 6 bits to PWDRU.
Write the data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU.
PWDRU and PWDRL are write-only registers. When read, all bits always read 1.
PWDRU and PWDRL are initialized to H'C000 by a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 428 of 1037
21.2.3
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The module stop control register (MSTPCR) consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that
control the module stop mode functions.
When the MSTP5 bit is set to 1, the 14-bit PWM operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and
a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 5: Module Stop (MSTP5)
Specifies the module stop mode of the 14-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 5
MSTP5
Description
0
14-bit PWM module stop mode is released
1
14-bit PWM module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 429 of 1037
21.3
14-Bit PWM Operation
When using the 14-bit PWM, set the registers in this sequence:
(1) Set bit PMR40 to 1 in port mode register 4 (PMR4) so that pin P40/PWM14 is designated for
PWM output.
(2) Set bit PWCR0 in the PWM control register (PWCR) to select a conversion period of either
32768/
(PWCR0 = 1) or 16384/
(PWCR0 = 0).
(3) Set the output waveform data in PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL). Be sure
to write byte data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU. When the data is written in
PWDRU, the contents of these registers are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the
PWM waveform generation data is updated in synchronization with internal signals.
One conversion period consists of 64 pulses, as shown in figure 21.2. The total high-level width
during this period (T
H
) corresponds to the data in PWDRU and PWDRL. This relation can be
expressed as follows:
T
H
= (data value in PWDRU and PWDRL + 64)
t
/2
where t
is the period of PWM clock input: 2/
(bit PWCR0 = 0) or 4/
(bit PWCR0 = 1).
If the data value in PWDRU and PWDRL is from H'3FC0 to H'3FFF, the PWM output stays
high.
When the data value is H'0000, T
H
is calculated as follows:
T
H
= 64
t
/2 = 32
t
t H64
t H63
t H3
t H2
t H1
T H = t H1 + t H2 + t H3 + ... + t H64
t f1 = t f2 = t f3 = ... = t f64
t f1
t f2
t f63
t f64
1 conversion period
Figure 21.2 Waveform Output by 14-Bit PWM
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 430 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 431 of 1037
Section 22 Prescalar Unit
22.1
Overview
The prescalar unit (PSU) has a 18-bit free running counter (FRC) that uses
as a clock source
and a 5-bit counter that uses
W as a clock source.
22.1.1
Features
Prescalar S (PSS):
Generates frequency division clocks that are input to peripheral functions.
Prescalar W (PSW):
When a timer A is used as a clock time base, the PSW frequency-divides subclocks and
generates input clocks.
Stable oscillation wait time count:
During the return from the low power consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, the FRC
counts the stable oscillation wait time.
8-bit PWM
The lower 8 bits of the FRC is used as 8-bit PWM cycle and duty cycle generation counters.
(Conversion cycle: 256 states)
8-bit input capture by
,& pins
Catches the 8 bits of 2
15
to 2
8
of the FRC according to the edge of the
,& pin for remote
control receiving.
Frequency division clock output:
Can output the frequency division clock for the system clock or the frequency division clock
for the subclock from the frequency division clock output pin (TMOW).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 432 of 1037
22.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the prescalar unit.
PWM3
ICR1
PCSR
18-bit free running counter (FRC)
w/128
Prescalar W
/131072 to /2
Prescalar S
Internal data bus
MSB
LSB
w/4
w/8
w/16
w/32
/32
/16
/8
/4
Interrupt
request
5-bit counter
IC pin
Stable oscillation
wait time count output
2
12
2
15
2
8
2
17
2
7
2
8
TMOW
pin
MSB
LSB
8 bits
6 bits
8 bits
PWM2
PWM1
PWM0
[Legend]
ICR1
PCSR
: Input capture register 1
: Prescalar unit control/status register
IC
TMOW
: Input capture input pin
: Frequency division clock output pin
Figure 22.1 Block Diagram of Prescalar Unit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 433 of 1037
22.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 22.1 shows the pin configuration of the prescalar unit.
Table 22.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Input capture input
,&
Input
Prescalar unit input capture input pin
Frequency division clock
output
TMOW
Output
Prescalar unit frequency division clock
output pin
22.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 22.2 shows the register configuration of the prescalar unit.
Table 22.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Input capture register 1
ICR1
R
Byte
H'00
H'D12C
Prescalar unit
control/status register
PCSR
R/W
Byte
H'08
H'D12D
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 434 of 1037
22.2
Registers
22.2.1
Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
0
R
5
6
0
7
ICR14
ICR13
ICR12
ICR11
ICR10
0
R
ICR17
R
R
R
ICR16
ICR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Input capture register 1 (ICR1) captures 8-bit data of 2
15
to 2
8
of the FRC according to the edge
of the
,& pin.
ICR1 is an 8-bit read-only register. The write operation becomes invalid. The ICR1 values are
undefined until the first capture is generated after the mode has been set to the standby mode,
watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleeve mode. When reset, ICR1 is initialized to H'00.
22.2.2
Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
--
--
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
ICEG
R/W
ICIE
0
R/(W)
*
ICIF
NCon/off
DCS2
DCS1
DCS0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR) controls the input capture function and selects
the frequency division clock that is output from the TMOW pin.
PCSR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PCSR is initialized to H'08.
Bit 7: Input Capture Interrupt Flag (ICIF)
Input capture interrupt request flag. This indicates that the input capture was performed
according to the edge of the
,& pin.
Bit 7
ICIF
Description
0
[Clear condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after 1 has been read
1
[Set condition]
When the input capture was performed according to the edge of the
,&
pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 435 of 1037
Bit 6:
Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE)
When ICIF was set to 1 by the input capture according to the edge of the
,& pin, ICIE enables
and disables the generation of an input capture interrupt.
Bit 6
ICIE
Description
0
Disables the generation of an input capture interrupt
(Initial value)
1
Enables the generation of an input capture interrupt
Bit 5:
,&
,& Pin Edge Select (ICEG)
ICEG selects the input edge sense of the
,& pin.
Bit 5
ICEG
Description
0
Detects the falling edge of the
,&
pin input
(Initial value)
1
Detects the rising edge of the
,&
pin input
Bit 4: Noise Cancel ON/OFF (NCon/off)
NCon/off selects enable/disable of the noise cancel function of the
,& pin. For the noise cancel
function, see section 22.3, Noise Cancel Circuit.
Bit 4
NCon/off
Description
0
Disables the noise cancel function of the
,&
pin
(Initial value)
1
Enables the noise cancel function of the
,&
pin
Bit 3: Reseved Bit
When the bit is read, 1 is always read. The write operation is invalid.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 436 of 1037
Bits 2 to 0: Frequency Division Clock Output Select (DCS2 to DCS0)
DCS2 to DCS0 select eight types of frequency division clocks that are output from the TMOW
pin.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
DCS2
DCS1
DCS0
Description
0
Outputs PSS,
/32
(Initial value)
0
1
Outputs PSS,
/16
0
Outputs PSS,
/8
0
1
1
Outputs PSS,
/4
0
Outputs PSW,
W/32
0
1
Outputs PSW,
W/16
0
Outputs PSW,
W/8
1
1
1
Outputs PSW,
W/4
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 437 of 1037
22.2.3
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
7
PMR17
0
R/W
6
PMR16
0
R/W
5
PMR15
0
R/W
4
PMR14
0
R/W
3
PMR13
0
R/W
0
PMR10
0
R/W
2
PMR12
0
R/W
1
PMR11
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The
switching is specified in a unit of bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7: P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17)
PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for division
clock output.
Bit 7
PMR17
Description
0
The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW pin for division clock output
Bit 6: P16/
,&
,& Pin Switching (PMR16)
PMR16 sets whether the P16/
,& pin is used as a P16 I/O pin or an ,& pin for the input capture
input of the prescalar unit.
Bit 6
PMR16
Description
0
The P16/
,&
pin functions as a P16 I/O pin
(Initial value)
1
The P16/
,&
pin functions as an
,&
input function
22.3
Noise Cancel Circuit
The
,& pin has a built-in a noise cancel circuit. The circuit can be used for noise protection such
as remote control receiving. The noise cancel circuit samples the input values of the
,& pin
twice at an interval of 256 states. If the input values are different, they are assumed to be noise.
The
,& pin can specify enable/disable of the noise cancel function according to the bit 4
(NCon/off) of the prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 438 of 1037
22.4
Operation
22.4.1
Prescalar S (PSS)
The PSS is a 17-bit counter that uses the system clock (
=fosc) as an input clock and generates
the frequency division clocks (
/131072 to
/2) of the peripheral function. The low-order 17 bits
of the 18-bit free running counter (FRC) correspond to the PSS. The FRC is incremented by one
clock. The PSS output is shared by the timer and serial communication interface (SCI), and the
frequency division ratio can independently be set by each built-in peripheral function.
When reset, the FRC is initialized to H'00000, and starts increment after reset has been released.
Because the system clock oscillator is stopped in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
and subsleep mode, the PSS operation is also stopped. In this case, the FRC is also initialized to
H'00000.
The FRC cannot be read and written from the CPU.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 439 of 1037
22.4.2
Prescalar W (PSW)
PSW is a counter that uses the subclock as an input clock. The PSW also generates the input
clock of the timer A. In this case, the timer A functions as a clock time base.
When reset, the PSW is initialized to H'00, and starts increment after reset has been released.
Even if the mode has been shifted to the standby mode *, watch mode *, subactive mode *, and
subsleep mode *, the PSW continues the operation as long as the clocks are supplied by the X1
and X2 pins.
The PSW can also be initialized to H'00 by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the timer mode
register A (TMA) to 11.
Note: *
When the timer A is in module stop mode, the operation is stopped.
Figure 22.2 shows the supply of the clocks to the peripheral function by the PSS and PSW.
/131072 to /2
Timer
SCI
OSC1
fosc
OSC2
w/128
w/4
w
Timer A
Prescalar S
X1
(fx)
X2
CPU
ROM
RAM
TMOW pin
Peripheral register
I/O port
Medium
speed clock
frequency divider
Prescalar W
System clock
selection
Subclock
frequency
dividers
(1/2, 1/4, and 1/8)
Subclock
oscillator
System
clock
oscillator
System
clock
duty
correction
circuit
Figure 22.2 Clock Supply
22.4.3
Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count
For the count of the stable oscillation stable wait time during the return from the low power
consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, see section 4, Power-Down State.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 440 of 1037
22.4.4
8-Bit PWM
This 8-bit PWM controls the duty control PWM signal in the conversion cycle 256 states. It
counts the cycle and the duty cycle at 2
7
to 2
0
of the FRC. It can be used for controlling reel
motors and loading motors. For details, see section 19, 8-Bit PWM.
22.4.5
8-Bit Input Capture Using
,&
,& Pin
This function catches the 8-bit data of 2
15
to 2
8
of the FRC according to the edge of the
,& pin. It
can be used for remote control receiving.
For the edge of the
,& pin, the rising and falling edges can be selected.
The
,& pin has a built-in noise cancel circuit. See section 22.3, Noise Cancel Circuit.
An interrupt request is generated due to the input capture using the
,& pin.
Note:
Rewriting the ICEG bit, NCon/off bit, or PMR16 bit is incorrectly recognized as edge
detection according to the combinations between the state and detection edge of the
,&
pin and the ICIF bit may be set after up to 384
seconds.
22.4.6
Frequency Division Clock Output
The frequency division clock can be output from the TMOW pin. For the frequency division
clock, eight types of clocks can be selected according to the DCS2 to DCS0 bits in PCSR.
The clock in which the system clock was frequency-divided is output in active mode and sleep
mode and the clock in which the subclock was frequency-divided is output in active mode*,
sleep mode*, and subactive mode.
Note: *
When the timer A is in module stop mode, no clock is output.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 441 of 1037
Section 23 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
23.1
Overview
The serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) can handle both asynchronous and clocked
synchronous serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication
between processors (multiprocessor communication function).
23.1.1
Features
SCI1 features are listed below.
(1) Choice of asynchronous or clock synchronous serial communication mode
(a)
Asynchronous mode
Serial data communication is executed using an asynchronous system in which
synchronization is achieved character by character
Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous
communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA)
A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data
communication with a number of processors
Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0
Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the SI1 pin level directly in case of
a framing error
(b) Clock synchronous mode
Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock
Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a
synchronous communication function
One serial data transfer format
Data length: 8 bits
Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 442 of 1037
(2) Full-duplex communication capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and
reception to be executed simultaneously
Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data
(3) Built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
(4) Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from
SCK1 pin
(5) Four interrupt sources
Four interrupt sources (transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive
error) that can issue requests independently
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 443 of 1037
23.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 23.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI1.
SI1
SO1
SCK1
Clock
External clock
/4
/16
/64
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
RSR
RDR1
TSR
TDR1
SMR1
SCR1
SSR1
SCMR1
BRR1
: Receive shift register
: Receive data register1
: Transmit shift register
: Transmit data register1
: Serial mode register1
: Serial control register1
: Serial status register1
: Serial interface mode register1
: Bit rate register1
SCMR1
SSR1
SCR1
SMR1
Transmission/
reception
control
Baud rate
generator
BRR1
Module data bus
Bus interface
Internal data bus
RDR1
TSR
RSR
Parity gfeneration
Parity check
[Legend]
TDR1
Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of SCI1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 444 of 1037
23.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 23.1 shows the serial pins used by the SCI1.
Table 23.1 SCI Pins
Channel
Pin Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Serial clock pin 1
SCK1
I/O
SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1
SI1
Input
SCI1 receive data input
1
Transmit data pin 1
SO1
Output
SCI1 transmit data output
23.1.4
Register Configuration
The SCI1 has the internal registers shown in table 23.2. These registers are used to specify
asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control the
transmitter/receiver.
Table 23.2 SCI Registers
Channel
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
1
Serial mode register 1
SMR1
R/W
H'00
H'D148
Bit rate register 1
BRR1
R/W
H'FF
H'D149
Serial control register 1
SCR1
R/W
H'00
H'D14A
Transmit data register 1
TDR1
R/W
H'FF
H'D14B
Serial status register 1
SSR1
R/(W)
*
2
H'84
H'D14C
Receive data register 1
RDR1
R
H'00
H'D14D
1
Serial interface mode register 1
SCMR1
R/W
H'F2
H'D14E
MSTPCRH
R/W
H'FF
H'FFEC
Common
Module stop control register
MSTPCRL
R/W
H'FF
H'FFED
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 445 of 1037
23.2
Register Descriptions
23.2.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
0
--
2
--
1
--
Bit :
R/W :
RSR is a register used to receive serial data.
The SCI1 sets serial data input from the SI1 pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the
LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is
transferred to RDR1 automatically.
RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
23.2.2
Receive Data Register (RDR1)
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RDR1 is a register that stores received serial data.
When the SCI1 has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from
RSR to RDR1 where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is
receive-enabled.
Since RSR and RDR1 function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can
be performed.
RDR1 is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU.
RDR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 446 of 1037
23.2.3
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
0
--
2
--
1
--
Bit :
R/W :
TSR is a register used to transmit serial data.
To perform serial data transmission, the SCI1 first transfers transmit data from TDR1 to TSR,
then sends the data to the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0).
When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR1 to
TSR, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR1 to TSR is not
performed if the TDRE bit in SSR1 is set to 1.
TSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
23.2.4
Transmit Data Register (TDR1)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
TDR1 is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission.
When the SCI1 detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR1 to TSR
and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the
next transmit data to TDR1 during serial transmission of the data in TSR.
TDR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
TDR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 447 of 1037
23.2.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR1)
7
C/A
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SMR1 is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI1's serial transfer format and select the baud rate
generator clock source.
SMR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SMR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bit 7: Communication Mode (C/
)
Selects asynchronous mode or clock synchronous mode as the SCI1 operating mode.
Bit 7
C/
Description
0
Asynchronous mode
(Initial value)
1
Clock synchronous mode
Bit 6: Character Length (CHR)
Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, a fixed data
length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6
CHR
Description
0
8-bit data
(Initial value)
1
7-bit data
*
Note:
*
When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR1 is not transmitted, and LSB-
first/MSB-first selection is not available.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 448 of 1037
Bit 5: Parity Enable (PE)
In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is performed in transmission,
and parity bit checking in reception. In synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is
used, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the PE bit setting.
Bit 5
PE
Description
0
Parity bit addition and checking disabled
(Initial value)
1
Parity bit addition and checking enabled
*
Note:
*
When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/
bit is added
to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the
parity (even or odd) specified by the O/
bit.
Bit 4: Parity Mode (O/
)
Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and checking.
The O/
bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and
checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/
bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, when
parity bit addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor
format is used.
Bit 4
O/
Description
0
Even parity
*
1
(Initial value)
1
Even parity
*
2
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the
total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception,
a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus
the parity bit is even.
2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a
check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the
parity bit is odd.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 449 of 1037
Bit 3: Stop Bit Length (STOP)
Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode. The STOP bit setting is only
valid in asynchronous mode. If synchronous mode is set the STOP bit setting is invalid since
stop bits are not added.
Bit 3
STOP
Description
0
1 stop bit
*
1
(Initial value)
1
2 stop bits
*
2
Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of a transmit character
before it is sent.
2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit character
before it is sent.
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit
character.
Bit 2: Multiprocessor Mode (MP)
Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format is selected, the PE bit and O/
bit
parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode; it is invalid
in synchronous mode.
For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 23.3.3, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
Bit 2
MP
Description
0
Multiprocessor function disabled
(Initial value)
1
Multiprocessor format selected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 450 of 1037
Bits 1 and 0: Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0)
These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected
from
,
/4,
/16, and
/64, according to the setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0.
For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see
section 23.2.8, Bit Rate Register.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS1
CKS0
Description
0
clock
(Initial value)
0
1
/4 clock
0
/16 clock
1
1
/64 clock
23.2.6
Serial Control Register (SCR1)
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SCR1 is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI1 transfer operations, serial clock
output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source.
SCR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SCR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bit 7: Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE)
Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request generation when serial transmit
data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR and the TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE
Description
0
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled
*
(Initial value)
1
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled
Note:
*
TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag,
then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 451 of 1037
Bit 6: Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE)
Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI)
request generation when serial receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR1 and the RDRF flag
in SSR1 is set to 1.
Bit 6
RIE
Description
0
Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request
disabled
*
(Initial value)
1
Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request
enabled
Note:
*
RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the
RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to
0.
Bit 5: Transmit Enable (TE)
Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI1.
Bit 5
TE
Description
0
Transmission disabled
*
1
(Initial value)
1
Transmission enabled
*
2
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR1 is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR1 and
the TDRE flag in SSR1 is cleared to 0.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the
TE bit to 1.
Bit 4: Receive Enable (RE)
Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI1.
Bit 4
RE
Description
0
Reception disabled
*
1
(Initial value)
1
Reception enabled
*
2
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which
retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE
bit to 1.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 452 of 1037
Bit 3: Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE)
Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE bit setting is only valid in
asynchronous mode when receiving with the MP bit in SMR1 set to 1.
The MPIE bit setting is invalid in clock synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
MPIE
Description
0
Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed)
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
(2) When data with MPB = 1 is received
1
Multiprocessor interrupts enabled
*
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting
of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the
multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
Note:
*
When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to
RDR1, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in
SSR1, is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in
SSR1 is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and
ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR1 are set to 1) and FER and ORER
flag setting is enabled.
Bit 2: Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE)
Enables or disables transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request generation if there is no valid transmit
data in TDR1 when the MSB is transmitted.
Bit 2
TEIE
Description
0
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request disabled
*
(Initial value)
1
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request enabled
*
Note:
*
TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR1, then
clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
Bits 1 and 0: Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0)
These bits are used to select the SCI1 clock source and enable or disable clock output from the
SCK1 pin. The combination of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK1 pin
functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or the serial clock input pin.
The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in
asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, and in the case of
external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). Note that the SCI1's operating mode must be decided
using SMR1 before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits.
For details of clock source selection, see table 23.9 in section 23.3, Operation.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 453 of 1037
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKE1
CKE0
Description
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as I/O
port
*
1
0
Clock synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock output
*
1
Asynchronous mode
Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
output
*
2
0
1
Clock synchronous
mode
Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock output
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
input
*
3
0
Clock synchronous
mode
External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock input
Asynchronous mode
External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
input
*
3
1
1
Clock synchronous
mode
External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock input
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
23.2.7
Serial Status Register (SSR1)
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)
*
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)
*
5
ORER
0
R/(W)
*
4
FER
0
R/(W)
*
3
PER
0
R/(W)
*
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SSR1 is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI1,
and multiprocessor bits.
SSR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags
TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be
read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified.
SSR1 is initialized to H'84 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 454 of 1037
Bit 7: Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE)
Indicates that data has been transferred from TDR1 to TSR and the next serial data can be
written to TDR1.
Bit 7
TDRE
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR and data can be written to TDR1
Bit 6: Receive Data Register Full (RDRF)
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR1.
Bit 6
RDRF
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to
RDR1
Note: RDR1 and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error
is detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun
error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 455 of 1037
Bit 5: Overrun Error (ORER)
Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 5
ORER
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
*
1
When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1
*
2
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1
is cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR1, and the data received
subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
ORER flag is set to 1. In clock synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be
continued, either.
Bit 4: Framing Error (FER)
Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing
abnormal termination.
Bit 4
FER
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
*
1
When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When the SCI1 checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception
ends, and the stop bit is 0
*
2
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is
cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 1; the second stop
bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1
but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued
while the FER flag is set to 1. In clock synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot
be continued, either.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 456 of 1037
Bit 3: Parity Error (PER)
Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous
mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 4
PER
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
*
1
When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does
not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/
bit in SMR1
*
2
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is
cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is
not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is
set to 1. In clock synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Bit 2: Transmit End (TEND)
Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR1 when the last bit of the transmit character is sent,
and transmission has been ended.
The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TEND
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
1
[Setting conditions]
(Initial value)
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit
character
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 457 of 1037
Bit 1: Multiprocessor Bit (MPB)
When reception is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPB stores
the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.
MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified.
Bit 1
MPB
Description
0
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
*
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
1
[Setting conditions]
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received
Note:
*
Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor
format.
Bit 0: Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT)
When transmission is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT
stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data.
The MPBT bit setting is invalid when a multiprocessor format is not used, when not
transmitting, and in synchronous mode.
Bit 0
MPBT
Description
0
Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
(Initial value)
1
Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
23.2.8
Bit Rate Register (BRR1)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
BRR1 is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate
generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR1.
BRR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
BRR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Table 23.3 shows sample BRR1 settings in asynchronous mode, and table 23.4 shows sample
BRR1 settings in clock synchronous mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 458 of 1037
Table 23.3 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency
(MHz)
2
2.097152
2.4576
3
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
1
141
0.03
1
148
-
0.04
1
174
-
0.26
1
212
0.03
150
1
103
0.16
1
108
0.21
1
127
0.00
1
155
0.16
300
0
207
0.16
0
217
0.21
0
255
0.00
1
77
0.16
600
0
103
0.16
0
108
0.21
0
127
0.00
0
155
0.16
1200
0
51
0.16
0
54
-
0.70
0
63
0.00
0
77
0.16
2400
0
25
0.16
0
26
1.14
0
31
0.00
0
38
0.16
4800
0
12
0.16
0
13
-
2.48
0
15
0.00
0
19
-
2.34
9600
0
6
-
2.48
0
7
0.00
0
9
-
2.34
19200
0
3
0.00
0
4
-
2.34
31250
0
1
0.00
0
0
2
0.00
38400
0
1
0.00
Operating Frequency
(MHz)
3.6864
4
4.9152
5
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
64
0.70
2
70
0.03
2
86
0.31
2
88
-
0.25
150
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
300
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
600
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1200
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
2400
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
4800
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
-
1.36
9600
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
19200
0
5
0.00
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
31250
0
3
0.00
0
4
-
1.70
0
4
0.00
38400
0
2
0.00
0
3
0.00
0
3
1.73
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 459 of 1037
Operating Frequency
(MHz)
6
6.144
7.3728
8
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
106
-
0.44
2
108
0.08
2
130
-
0.07
2
141
0.03
150
2
77
0.16
2
79
0.00
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
300
1
155
0.16
1
159
0.00
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
600
1
77
0.16
1
79
0.00
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
1200
0
155
0.16
0
159
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
2400
0
77
0.16
0
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
4800
0
38
0.16
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
9600
0
19
-
2.34
0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
19200
0
9
-
2.34
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
31250
0
5
0.00
0
5
2.40
0
7
0.00
38400
0
4
-
2.34
0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00
Operating Frequency
(MHz)
9.8304
10
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
174
-
0.26
2
177
-
0.25
150
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
300
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
600
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
1200
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
2400
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
4800
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
9600
0
31
0.00
0
32
-
1.36
19200
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
31250
0
9
-
1.70
0
9
0.00
38400
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 460 of 1037
Table 23.4 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency
(MHz)
2
4
8
10
Bit
Rate
(bits/s)
n
N
n
N
n
N
n
N
110
3
70
250
2
124
2
249
3
124
500
1
249
2
124
1
249
1 k
1
124
1
249
2
124
2.5 k
0
199
1
99
1
199
1
249
5 k
0
99
0
199
1
99
1
124
10 k
0
49
0
99
0
199
0
249
25 k
0
19
0
39
0
79
0
99
50 k
0
9
0
19
0
39
0
49
100 k
0
4
0
9
0
19
0
24
250 k
0
1
0
3
0
7
0
9
500 k
0
0
*
0
1
0
3
0
4
1 M
0
0
*
0
1
2.5 M
0
0
*
5 M
Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%.
Legend:
Blank: Cannot be set.
--:
Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.
*
:
Continuous transfer is not possible.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 461 of 1037
The BRR1 setting is found from the following equations.
Asynchronous mode:
N=
10
6
-
1
64
2
2n
-
1
B
Clock synchronous mode:
N=
10
6
-
1
8
2
2n
-
1
B
Where
B: Bit rate (bits/s)
N: BRR1 setting for baud rate generator (0
N
255)
: Operating frequency (MHz)
n:
Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3)
(See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.)
SMR1 Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
/4
0
1
2
/16
1
0
3
/64
1
1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following equation:
Error (%) = {
10
6
-
1 }
100
(N+1)
B
64
2
2n
-
1
Table 23.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 23.6
and 23.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 462 of 1037
Table 23.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
(MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
n
N
2
62500
0
0
2.097152
65536
0
0
2.4576
76800
0
0
3
93750
0
0
3.6864
115200
0
0
4
125000
0
0
4.9152
153600
0
0
5
156250
0
0
6
187500
0
0
6.144
192000
0
0
7.3728
230400
0
0
8
250000
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
10
312500
0
0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 463 of 1037
Table 23.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
(MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2
0.5000
31250
2.097152
0.5243
32768
2.4576
0.6144
38400
3
0.7500
46875
3.6864
0.9216
57600
4
1.0000
62500
4.9152
1.2288
76800
5
1.2500
78125
6
1.5000
83750
6.144
1.5360
96000
7.3728
1.8432
115200
8
2.0000
125000
9.8304
2.4576
153600
10
2.5000
156250
Table 23.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clock Synchronous Mode)
(MHz)
External Input Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2
0.3333
333333.3
4
0.6667
666666.7
6
1.0000
1000000.0
8
1.3333
1333333.3
10
1.6667
1666666.7
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 464 of 1037
23.2.9
Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR1)
7
--
1
--
6
--
1
--
5
--
1
--
4
--
1
--
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
SMIF
0
R/W
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
--
1
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SCMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select SCI1 functions.
SCMR1 is initialized to H'F2 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved
These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 3: Data Transfer Direction (SDIR)
Selects the serial/parallel conversion format.
Bit 3
SDIR
Description
0
TDR1 contents are transmitted LSB-first
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR1 LSB-first
1
TDR1 contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR1 MSB-first
Bit 2: Data Invert (SINV)
Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the
parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the O/
bit in SMR1.
Bit 2
SINV
Description
0
TDR1 contents are transmitted without modification
(Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR1 without modification
1
TDR1 contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in RDR1 in inverted form
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 465 of 1037
Bit 1: Reserved
This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 0: Serial Communication Interface Mode Select (SMIF)
1 should not be written in this bit.
Bit 0
SMIF
Description
0
Normal SCI mode
(Initial value)
1
Reserved mode
23.2.10
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
MSTPCRH
MSTPCRL
MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8
MSTP7
MSTP6 MSTP5
MSTP4
MSTP3
MSTP2
MSTP1
MSTP0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control.
When bit MSTP8 is set to 1, SCI1 operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is
made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 0: Module Stop (MSTP8)
Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode.
MSTPCRH
Bit 0
MSTP8
Description
0
SCI1 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI1 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 466 of 1037
23.3
Operation
23.3.1
Overview
The SCI1 can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved with clock pulses.
Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using
SMR1 as shown in table 23.8. The SCI1 clock is determined by a combination of the C/
bit in
SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1, as shown in table 23.9.
(1) Asynchronous Mode
Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits
Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the
combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length)
Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception
Choice of internal or external clock as SCI1 clock source
--
When internal clock is selected:
The SCI1 operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same
frequency as the bit rate can be output
--
When external clock is selected:
A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the built-in baud rate
generator is not used)
(2) Clock Synchronous Mode
Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data
Detection of overrun errors during reception
Choice of internal or external clock as SCI1 clock source
--
When internal clock is selected:
The SCI1 operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-
chip
--
When external clock is selected:
The built-in baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI1 operates on the input serial
clock
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 467 of 1037
Table 23.8 SMR1 Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection
SMR1 Settings
SCI1 Transfer Format
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 3
C/
CHR
MP
PE
STOP
Mode
Data
length
Multiproc
-essor bit
Parit
y bit
Stop bit
length
0
1 bit
0
1
No
2 bits
0
1 bit
0
1
1
8-bit
data
Yes
2 bits
0
1 bit
0
1
No
2 bits
0
1 bit
1
0
1
1
Asynchro-
nous mode
7-bit
data
No
Yes
2 bits
0
1 bit
0
1
8-bit
data
2 bits
0
1 bit
0
1
1
1
Asynchro-
nous mode
(multi-
processor
format)
7-bit
data
Yes
2 bits
1
Clock
synchronous
mode
8-bit
data
No
No
Table 23.9 SMR1 and SCR1 Settings and SCI1 Clock Source Selection
SMR1
SCR1 Setting
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCI1 Transfer Clock
C/
CKE1
CKE0
Mode
Clock Source
SCK1 Pin Function
0
SCI1 does not use SCK1 pin
0
1
Internal
Outputs clock with same frequency
as bit rate
0
0
1
1
Asynchronous
mode
External
Inputs clock with frequency of 16
times the bit rate
0
0
1
Internal
Outputs serial clock
0
1
1
1
Clock
synchronous
mode
External
Inputs serial clock
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 468 of 1037
23.3.2
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the
start of communication and followed by one or two stop bits indicating the end of
communication. Serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a
character-by-character basis.
Inside the SCI1, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so
that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
Figure 23.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication.
In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state
(high level). The SCI1 monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low
level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication.
One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-
first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level).
In asynchronous mode, the SCI1 performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in
reception. The SCI1 samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times
the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit.
LSB
Start
bit
MSB
Idle state
(mark state)
Stop
bit(s)
0
Transmit/receive data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1
1
Serial
data
Parity
bit
1 bit
1 or 2 bits
7 or 8 bits
1 bit,
or none
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 23.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 469 of 1037
(1) Data Transfer Format
Table 23.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of
12 transfer formats can be selected by settings in SMR1.
Table 23.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
PE
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
--
--
--
--
S
8-bit data
STOP
S
7-bit data
STOP
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
S
8-bit data
P STOP
S
7-bit data
STOP
P
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
S
7-bit data
STOP
MPB
S
7-bit data
STOP
MPB
STOP
S
7-bit data
STOP
STOP
CHR
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
MP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
STOP
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SMR1 Settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
STOP
S
8-bit data
P STOP
S
7-bit data
STOP
P
STOP
[Legend]
S
STOP
P
MPB
: Start bit
: Stop bit
: Parity bit
: Multiprocessor bit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 470 of 1037
(2) Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external clock
input at the SCK1 pin can be selected as the SCI1's serial clock, according to the setting of
the C/
bit in SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details of SCI1 clock
source selection, see table 23.9.
When an external clock is input at the SCK1 pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the
bit rate used.
When the SCI1 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK1 pin.
The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such
that the rising edge of the clock is at the center of each transmit data bit, as shown in figure
23.3.
0
1 frame
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
Figure 23.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 471 of 1037
(3) Data Transfer Operations
(a) SCI1 Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then
initialize the SCI1 as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be
cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is
cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE
bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the
contents of RDR1.
When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation,
including initialization, since operation is uncertain.
Figure 23.4 shows a sample SCI1 initialization flowchart.
Wait
<Initialization completed>
Start initialization
Set data transfer format
in SMR1 and SCMR1
[1]
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1
(TE, RE bits 0)
No
Yes
Set value in BRR1
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0
[2]
[3]
Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1,
and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[4]
1-bit interval elapsed?
Set the clock selection in SCR1.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
When the clock is selected in
asynchronous mode, it is output
immediately after SCR1 settings are made.
Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and
SCMR1.
Write a value corresponding to the bit rate
to BRR1. This is not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1. Also set the
RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
SO1 and SI1 pins to be used.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 23.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 472 of 1037
(b) Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 23.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1
[1]
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
No
Yes
[4]
Clear PDR to 0
and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0
TDRE=1
All data transmitted?
TEND=1
Break output?
SCI1 initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI1 status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR1, and then
clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial transmission, set
PCR for the port corresponding to the SO1
pin to 1, clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE
bit in SCR1 to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 23.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 473 of 1037
In serial transmission, the SCI1 operates as described below.
[1] The SCI1 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been
written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR, the SCI1 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Parity bit or multiprocessor bit:
One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output.
A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be
selected.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI1 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR, the stop bit is
sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then
the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to
1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
Figure 23.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 474 of 1037
TDRE
TEND
0
1 frame
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
0
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
1
1
Data
Start
bit
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
TXI interrupt
request
generated
Data written to TDR1 and
TDRE flag cleared to 0
in TXI interrupt handling
routine
TEI interrupt request
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
TXI interrupt request
generated
Figure 23.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 475 of 1037
(c) Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 23.7 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
No
Yes
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
[4]
[5]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Read ORER, PER,
FER flags in SSR1
Error handling
(Continued on next page)
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1, and clear
RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
PER FER ORER=1
RDRF=1
All data received?
SCI1 initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
Receive error handling and break
detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER,
PER, and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the
error. After performing the appropriate
error handling, ensure that the ORER,
PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if any of
these flags are set to 1. In the case of a
framing error, a break can be detected by
reading the value of the input port
corresponding to the SI1 pin.
SCI1 status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that RDRF = 1, then
read the receive data in RDR1 and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF
flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an
RXI interrupt.
Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is received,
read the RDRF flag, read RDR1, and clear
the RDRF flag to 0.
[1]
[2][3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 23.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 476 of 1037
< End >
[3]
Error handling
Parity error handling
Yes
No
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
flags in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Framing error handling
No
Yes
Overrun error handling
ORER=1
FER=1
Break?
PER=1
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Figure 23.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 477 of 1037
In serial reception, the SCI1 operates as described below.
[1] The SCI1 monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal
synchronization and starts reception.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
[3] The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving these bits, the SCI1 carries out the following checks.
[a] Parity check:
The SCI1 checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity
(even or odd) set in the O/
bit in SMR1.
[b] Stop bit check:
The SCI1 checks whether the stop bit is 1.
If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked.
[c] Status check:
The SCI1 checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR1.
If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored
in RDR1.
If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 23.11.
Note: *
Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has
occurred.
Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must
be cleared to 0.
[4] If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full
interrupt (RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a
receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Table 23.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence
Receive Error
Abbrev.
Occurrence Condition
Data Transfer
Overrun error
ORER
When the next data reception is
completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR1 is set to 1
Receive data is not transferred
from RSR to RDR1
Framing error
FER
When the stop bit is 0
Receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR1
Parity error
PER
When the received data differs
from the parity (even or odd) set
in SMR1
Receive data is transferred
from RSR to RDR1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 478 of 1037
Figure 23.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode.
RDRF
FER
0
1 frame
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
0
D0
D1
D7
0/1
0
1
1
Data
Start
bit
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
Idle state
(mark state)
RDR1 data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
handling routine
RXI interrupt
request
generation
Figure 23.8 Example of SCI1 Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
23.3.3
Multiprocessor Communication Function
The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using a
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in
asynchronous mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number
of processors sharing transmission lines.
When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a
unique ID code.
The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle
which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is
used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle.
The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform
serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as
data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with
its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID
does not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
In this way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors.
Figure 23.9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using a multiprocessor format.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 479 of 1037
(1) Data Transfer Format
There are four data transfer formats.
When a multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid.
For details, see table 23.10.
(2) Clock
See the section on asynchronous mode.
Transmitting
station
Receiving
station A
(ID=01)
Receiving
station B
(ID=02)
Receiving
station C
(ID=03)
Receiving
station D
(ID=04)
Serial communication line
Serial
data
ID transmission cycle:
receiving station
specification
Data transmission cycle:
data transmission to
receiving station
specified by ID
(MPB=1)
(MPB=0)
H'01
H'AA
[Legend] MPB : Multiprocessor bit
Figure 23.9 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
(3) Data Transfer Operations
(a) Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 23.10 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 480 of 1037
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1
[2]
Write transmit data to TDR1
and set MPBT bit in SSR1
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
No
Yes
[4]
Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0
TDRE=1
Transmission end?
TEND=1
Break output?
Clear TDRE flag to 0
SCI1 initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI1 status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to
TDR1. Set the MPBT bit in SSR1 to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR1,
and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial transmission, set
the port PCR to 1, clear PDR to 0, then
clear the TE bit in SCR1 to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 23.10 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 481 of 1037
In serial transmission, the SCI1 operates as described below.
[1] The SCI1 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been
written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR, the SCI1 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO2 pin in the following order.
[a] Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
[b] Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
[c] Multiprocessor bit
One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
[d] Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
[e] Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
[3] The SCI1 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR, the stop bit is sent,
and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then
the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to
1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 482 of 1037
Figure 23.11 shows an example of SCI1 operation for transmission using a multiprocessor
format.
TDRE
TEND
0
1 frame
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
0
D0
D1
D7
0/1
1
1
Data
Data
TXI interrupt
request
general
Data written to TDR1 and
TDRE flag cleared to 0
in TXI interrupt handling
routine
TEI interrupt
request
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
TXI interrupt request
generated
Start
bit
Multi-
processor
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Stop
bit 1
Multi-
processor
bit
Figure 23.11 Example of SCI1 Operation in Transmission
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
(b) Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 23.12 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 483 of 1037
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
No
Yes
[4]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Error handling
(Continued on
next page)
[5]
No
Yes
FER
ORER=1
RDRF=1
All data received?
Set MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1
[2]
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1
No
Yes
This station's ID?
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
No
Yes
FER
ORER=1
Read receive data in RDR1
RDRF=1
SCI1 initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1.
SCI1 status check, ID reception and
comparison:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and compare it with this station's ID.
If the data is not this station's ID, set the
MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF
flag to 0.
If the data is this station's ID, clear the
RDRF flag to 0.
SCI1 status check and data reception:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the data in RDR1.
Receive error handling and break
detectioon:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the error.
After performing the appropriate error
handling, ensure that the ORER and FER
flags are both cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if either of
these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a break can
be detected by reading the SI1 in value.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 23.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 484 of 1037
< End >
Error handling
Yes
No
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
flags in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Framing error handling
Overrun error handling
ORER=1
FER=1
Break?
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
[5]
Figure 23.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Figure 23.13 shows an example of SCI1 operation for multiprocessor format reception.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 485 of 1037
MPIE
RDR1
value
0
D0
D1
D7
1
1
0
D0
D1
D7
0
1
1
1
Data (ID1)
Start
bit
MPB
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data (Data 1)
MPB
Stop
bit
RXI interrupt
request (multi-
processor
interrupt)
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
RDR1 data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
handling routine
If not this station's
ID, MPIE bit is set
to 1 again
RXI interrupt request
is not generated, and
RDR1 retains its state
ID1
(a) Data does not match station's ID
MPIE
RDR1
value
0
D0
D1
D7
1
1
0
D0
D1
D7
0
1
1
1
Data (ID2)
Start
bit
MPB
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data (Data 2)
MPB
Stop
bit
RXI interrupt
request (multi-
processor
interrupt)
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
RDR1 data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
handling routine
Matches this station's
ID, so reception continues,
and data is received in RXI
interrupt handling routine
MPIE bit set
to 1 again
ID2
(b) Data matches station's ID
Data2
ID1
MPIE=0
MPIE=0
Figure 23.13 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 486 of 1037
23.3.4
Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode
In clock synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses,
making it suitable for high-speed serial communication.
Inside the SCI1, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a
double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception,
enabling continuous data transfer.
Figure 23.14 shows the general format for clock synchronous serial communication.
Don't care
Don't care
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Bit 0
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
Bit 1
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
LSB
MSB
Bit 2
Bit 6
Bit 7
*
*
Note:
*
High except in continuous transmit/reception
Figure 23.14 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communication
In clock synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one
falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rising edge of the
serial clock.
In clock synchronous serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with
the LSB and ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the
MSB state.
In clock synchronous mode, the SCI1 receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the
serial clock.
(1) Data Transfer Format
A fixed 8-bit data format is used.
No parity or multiprocessor bits are added.
(2) Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external serial
clock input at the SCK1 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/
bit in SMR1
and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details on SCI clock source selection, see table
23.9.
When the SCI1 is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK1 pin.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 487 of 1037
Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is
performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however,
the serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. To
perform receive operations in units of one character, select an external clock as the clock
source.
(3) Data Transfer Operations
(a) SCI1 Initialization (Synchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then
initialize the SCI1 as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be
cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is
cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE
bit to 0 does not change the settings of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the
contents of RDR1.
Figure 23.15 shows a sample SCI1 initialization flowchart.
Wait
<Transfer start>
Start initialization
Set data transfer format
in SMR1 and SCMR1
No
Yes
Set value in BRR1
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0
[2]
[3]
Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1,
and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
bits
[4]
1-bit interval elapsed?
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in
SCR1 (TE, RE bits 0)
[1]
Set the clock selection in SCR1. Be sure to
clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE
and RE, to 0.
Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and
SCMR1.
Write a value corresponding to the bit rate
to BRR1. This is not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
SO1 and SI1 pins to be used.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared
to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 23.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 488 of 1037
(b) Serial Data Transmission (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Figure 23.16 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1
[2]
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
Clear TE bit in
SCR1 to 0
TDRE=1
All data transmitted?
TEND=1
SCI1 initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI1 status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR1,
and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 23.16 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 489 of 1037
In serial transmission, the SCI1 operates as described below.
[1] The SCI1 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been
written to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR.
[2] After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR, the SCI1 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is
generated.
When clock output mode has been set, the SCI1 outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of
an external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending
with the MSB (bit 7).
[3] The SCI1 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR, and serial
transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and
the SO1 pin maintains its state.
If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is
generated.
[4] After completion of serial transmission, the SCK1 pin is held in a constant state.
Figure 23.17 shows an example of SCI1 operation in transmission.
Transfer
direction
Bit 0
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
Data written to TDR1
and TDRE flag cleared
to 0 in TXI interrupt
handling routine
TXI interrupt
request
generated
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TXI interrupt
request
generated
TEI interrupt
request
generated
Figure 23.17 Example of SCI1 Operation in Transmission
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 490 of 1037
(c) Serial Data Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Figure 23.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to synchronous, be sure to check
that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor
receive operations will be possible.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 491 of 1037
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
No
Yes
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
[4]
[5]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Error handling
(Continued below)
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1,
and clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
ORER=1
RDRF=1
All data received?
Read ORER flag in SSR1
< End >
Error handling
Clear ORER flag in
SSR1 to 0
Overrun error handling
[3]
SCI1 initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
Receive error handling:
IF a receive error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SSR1, and after performing the
appropriate error handling, clear the ORER
flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if
the ORER flag is set to 1.
SCI1 status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by and RXI interrupt.
Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,
finish reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0
[1]
[2][3]
[4]
Figure 23.18 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 492 of 1037
In serial reception, the SCI1 operates as described below.
[1] The SCI1 performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output.
[2] The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order.
After reception, the SCI1 checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR1.
If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR1. If a
receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 23.11.
Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error
has been found in the error check.
[3] If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full
interrupt (RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive-error
interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Figure 23.19 shows an example of SCI1 operation in reception.
Bit 7
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
1 frame
RDRF
ORER
ERI interrupt request
generated by
overrun error
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR1 data read and
RDRF flag cleared to 0
in RXI interrupt
handling routine
RXI interrupt
request
generated
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 23.19 Example of SCI1 Operation in Reception
(d) Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Figure 23.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive
operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 493 of 1037
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start transfer
[5]
Error handling
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
ORER=1
All data received?
[2]
Read TDRE flag in SSR1
No
Yes
TDRE=1
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
RDR=1
Read ORER flag in SSR1
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
Clear TE and RE
bits in SCR1 to 0
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation
to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear
the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1
simultaneously.
SCI1 initialization:
The SO1 pin is designated as the transmit
data output pin, and the SI1 pin is
designated as the receive data input pin,
enabling simultaneous transmit and receive
operations.
SCI1 status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by a TXI interrupt.
Receive error handling:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SSR1, and after performing the
appropriate error handling, clear the ORER
flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot
be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1.
SCI1 status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by an RXI interrupt.
Serial transmission/reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission/reception,
before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame
is received, finish reading the RDRF flag,
reading RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag
to 0. Also before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is transmitted, read 1 from
the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR1 and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 23.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 494 of 1037
23.4
SCI1 Interrupts
The SCI1 has four interrupt sources:
the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error
interrupt (ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty
interrupt (TXI) request. Table 23.13 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities.
Individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in
SCR1. Each kind of interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently.
When the TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND
flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
When the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the
ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
Table 23.13 SCI1 Interrupt Sources
Channel
Interrupt Source
Description
Priority
*
ERI
Interrupt by receive error (ORER, FER, or PER)
RXI
Interrupt by receive data register full (RDRF)
TXI
Interrupt by transmit data register empty (TDRE)
1
TEI
Interrupt by transmit end (TEND)
High
Low
The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The
TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a
TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt will have priority for acceptance,
and the TDRE flag and TEND flag may be cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be
accepted in this case.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 495 of 1037
23.5
Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI1.
(1) Relation between Writes to TDR1 and the TDRE Flag
The TDRE flag in SSR1 is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred
from TDR1 to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR1 to TSR, the TDRE flag is set
to 1.
Data can be written to TDR1 regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data
is written to TDR1 when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR1 will be lost
since it has not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR1.
(2) Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously
If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR1 is as
shown in table 23.14. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR1,
and the receive data is lost.
Table 23.14 State of SSR1 Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
SSR1 Status Flags
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
Receive Data
Transfer
RSR
RDR1
Receive Errors
1
1
0
0
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
{
Framing error
0
0
0
1
{
Parity error
1
1
1
0
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
{
Framing error + parity error
1
1
1
1
Overrun error + framing error + parity error
Notes:
{
: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR1.
: Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR1.
(3) Break Detection and Processing
When a framing error (FER) is detected, a break can be detected by reading the SI1 pin value
directly. In a break, the input from the SI1 pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set,
and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set.
Note that, since the SCI1 continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the
FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
(4) Sending a Break
The SO1 pin has a dual function as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) is
determined by PDR and PCR. This feature can be used to send a break.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 496 of 1037
Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is
replaced by the value of PDR (the pin does not function as the SO1 pin until the TE bit is set
to 1). Consequently, PCR and PDR for the port corresponding to the SO1 pin should first be
set to 1.
To send a break during serial transmission, first clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current
transmission state, the SO1 pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the SO1 pin.
(5) Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1,
even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before
starting transmission.
Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
(6) Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI1 operates on a base clock with a frequency of 16 times the
transfer rate.
In reception, the SCI1 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the base clock, and
performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the
8th pulse of the base clock. This is illustrated in figure 23.21.
Internal
base clock
16 clocks
8 clocks
Receive data
Synchronization
sampling timing
Start bit
D0
D1
Data sampling
timing
15 0
7
15 0
0
7
Figure 23.21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 497 of 1037
Thus the receive margin in asynchronous mode is given by equation (1) below.
M =
(0.5
-
1
)
-
(L
-
0.5) F
-
D
-
0.5
(1+F)
100%
2N
N
.....(1)
Where M: Receive margin (%)
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
D: Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F: Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in equation (1), a receive margin of 46.875% is given by
equation (2) below.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M =(0.5
-
1
)
100%
2
16
=46.875%
.....(2)
However, this is only a theoretical value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in
system design.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 498 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 499 of 1037
Section 24 Serial Communication Interface 2 (SCI2)
24.1
Overview
The serial communication interface 2 (SCI2) that has a 32-byte data buffer carries out clocked
synchronous serial transmission of 32 bytes by a single operation.
24.1.1
Features
SCI2 features are listed below.
32 bytes data transfer can be automatically carried out
Choice of 7 internal clocks (
/256,
/64,
/32,
/16,
/8,
/4, and
/2) and an external clock
as serial clock source
Interrupt occurs when transmission has been completed or an error has occurred
Data transfer at intervals of 1 byte can be set
Data transfer can be carried out at intervals of 1 byte. The interval can be selected from a
multiple of internal clock cycle by 56, 24, or 8 times
Start of data transfer can be controlled by input of chip select
Strobe pulse is output for each 1-byte transfer
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 500 of 1037
24.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 24.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI2.
[Legend]
STAR
/256, /64, /32,
/16, /8, /4, /2
EDAR
: Starting address register
: Ending address register
SCK2
STRB
: SCI2 clock input/output pin
: SCI2 strobe signal output pin
SCR2
SCSR2
: Serial control register 2
: Serial control status register
CS
SO2
: SCI2 chip select signal input pin
: SCI2 transmit data output pin
SI2
: SCI2 receive data input pin
Internal clock
SCK2
Interrupt request
SI2
SO2
CS
STRB
SCK2
Shift register
STAR
EDAR
SCR2
SCSR2
Data buffer
(32 bytes)
Interrupt
generation
circuit
Transmit/
receive
control
circuit
Internal data bus
Figure 24.1 Block Diagram of SCI2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 501 of 1037
24.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 24.1 shows pin configuration of the SCI2.
Table 24.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
SCI2 Clock
SCK2
I/O
SCI2 clock input/output pin
SCI2 Data input
SI2
Input
SCI2 receive data input pin
SCI2 Data output
SO2
Output
SCI2 transmit data output pin
SCI2 Strobe
STRB
Output
SCI2 strobe signal output pin
SCI2 Chip select
$
Input
SCI2 chip select signal input pin
24.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 24.2 shows register configuration of the SCI2.
Table 24.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
Starting address register
STAR
R/W
H'E0
H'D0E0
Ending address register
EDAR
R/W
H'E0
H'D0E1
Serial control register 2
SCR2
R/W
H'20
H'D0E2
Serial control status register 2
SCSR2
R/W
H'60
H'D0E3
Serial data buffer (32 bytes)
R/W
Undefined
H'D0C0 to H'D0DF
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address..
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 502 of 1037
24.2
Register Descriptions
24.2.1
Starting Address Register (STAR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
STA4
STA3
STA2
STA1
STA0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The STAR is a readable/writable register that specifies the transfer starting address within the
address space (H'FFD0C0 to H'FFD0DF) to which a 32-byte data buffer is assigned. The 5 low-
order bits of the STAR correspond to the 5 low-order bits of the address of 32-byte buffer. The
range for executing continuous data transfer on STAR and EDAR is specified. When the value
of STAR is equal to that of EDAR, only one-byte transfer is carried out.
Since the 7 to 5 bits of the STAR are reserved, writes are disabled. When each bit is read, 1 is
read at all times.
The STAR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset.
24.2.2
Ending Address Register (EDAR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
EDA4
EDA3
EDA2
EDA1
EDA0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The EDAR is a readable/writable register that specifies the transfer ending address within the
address space (H'FFD0C0 to H'FFD0DF) to which 32-byte data buffer is assigned. The 5 low-
order bits of EDAR correspond to the 5 low-order bits of the address of 32-byte buffer. The
range for executing continuous data transfer is specified by the EDAR and the STAR. If the
value of the STAR is equal to that of the EDAR, only one-byte transfer is carried out.
Since the 7 to 5 bits of the EDAR are reserved, writes are disabled. When each bit is read, 1 is
read at all times.
The EDAR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 503 of 1037
24.2.3
Serial Control Register 2 (SCR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
--
--
6
7
R/W
R/W
GAP1
0
R/W
ABTIE
R/W
TEIE
GAP0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The SCR 2 is a readable/writable register that enables or disables generation of SCI2 interrupt
and selects an data transfer interval and transfer clock when an internal clock is used.
The SCR2 is initialized to H'20 by a reset.
Bit 7: Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE)
Enables or disables the occurrence of transmit-end interrupt when data transfer has been
completed and TEI of the SCR2 has been set to 1.
Bit 7
TEIE
Description
0
Transmit-end interrupt disabled
(Initial value)
1
Transmit-end interrupt enabled
Bit 6: Transmit Cutoff Interrupt (ABTIE)
Enables or disables the occurrence of transmit-cutoff interrupt when the
$ pin has entered a
high level during transmission and ABT of the SCRS2 has been set to 1.
Bit 6
ABTIE
Description
0
Transmit-cutoff interrupt disabled
(Initial value)
1
Transmit-cutoff interrupt enabled
Bit 5: Reserved
When read, 1 is read at all times. Writes are disabled.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 504 of 1037
Bits 4 and 3: Transmit Data Interval Select 1 and 0 (GAP1, GAP0)
When an internal clock is used, data can be transmitted at 1-byte intervals. During that time, the
SCK2 pin retains the high level. When data is transmitted without intervals, the STRB signal
retains the low level.
Bit 4
Bit 3
GAP1
GAP0
Description
0
0
Data transmission without intervals
(Initial value)
0
1
Data intervals: 8 clocks
1
0
Data intervals: 24 clocks
1
1
Data intervals: 56 clocks
Bits 2 to 0: Transfer Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0)
Selects transfer clock.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Transfer clock cycle
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
SCK2
pin
Clock
source
Prescaler division
ratio
= 10 MHz
= 5 MHz
0
0
0
/256 (Initial value)
25.6
s
51.2
s
0
0
1
/64
6.4
s
12.8
s
0
1
0
/32
3.2
s
6.4
s
0
1
1
/16
1.6
s
3.2
s
1
0
0
/8
0.8
s
1.6
s
1
0
1
/4
0.4
s
0.8
s
1
1
0
SCK2
output
Prescaler
S
/2
0.4
s
1
1
1
SCK2
input
External
clock
24.2.4
Serial Control Status Register 2 (SCSR2)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
--
--
--
--
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
SOL
R/(W)
*
TEI
ORER
WT
ABT
STF
0
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The SCSR2 is an 8-bit register that indicates the SCI2's state of operation and error.
The SCSR2 is initialized to H'60 by a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 505 of 1037
Bit 7: Transmit End Interrupt Request Flag (TEI)
Indicates that data transmission or reception has been completed.
Bit 7
TEI
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting condition]
When transmission or reception has been completed
Bits 6 and 5: Reserved
When each bit is read, 1 is read at all times. Writes are disabled.
Bit 4: Extension Data Bit (SOL)
The SOL sets the output level of the SO2 pin. When read, the output level of the SO2 pin is
read. Output of the SO2 pin after completion of transmission retains the value of final bit of
transfer data, but the output level of the SO2 pin can be changed by operating this bit before or
after transmission. However, setting of the SOL bit becomes invalid when the next transmission
is started. Therefore, if the output level of the SO2 pin is changed after completion of
transmission, write operation for SOL must be performed every time when transmission is
terminated. Since writing to this register during data transfer may cause malfunction, write
operation must not be performed during transmission.
Bit 4
SOL
Description
Read
The SO2 pin output is at a low level
(Initial value)
0
Write
The SO2 pin output is changed to a low level
Read
The SO2 pin output is at a high level
1
Write
The SO2 pin output is changed to a high level
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 506 of 1037
Bit 3: Overrun Error Flag (ORER)
The ORER indicates an occurrence of overrun error while an external clock is used. When
excessive pulses are overlapped with the normal transfer clock caused by external noise, etc.
during transmission, this bit is set to 1. At this time data transfer cannot be assured. When a
clock is input after completion of transmission, it is also found to be in the state of overrun and
this bit is set to 1. However, overrun is not detected when the
$ pin is at a high level.
Bit 3
ORER
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting condition]
When excessive pulses are overlapped with a normal transfer clock while an
external clock is used, or when a clock is input after completion of transmission
Bit 2: Wait Flag (WT)
The WT indicates that read/ or write to serial data buffer (32 bytes) has been executed during
transmission and in the
$ input standby mode. The instruction at that time is ignored and this
bit is set to 1.
Bit 2
WT
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting condition]
When an instruction to read/write to serial data buffer (32 bits) is directed during
transmission and in the
$
input standby mode
Bit 1: Abort Flag (ABT)
The ABT indicates that the
$ pin has entered a high level during transmission. When a high
level of the
$ pin is detected during transfer, the transfer is immediately cut off, and this bit is
set to 1, and then the SCK2 and SO2 pins go into the high impedance state. At this time values
of internal registers other than SCSR2 and serial data buffer (32 bytes) are retained. Transfer
cannot be carried out while this bit is set to 0. Resume transfer after clearing to 0.
Bit 1
ABT
Description
0
[Clearing condition]
(Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting condition]
During transfer and when
$
pin has entered a high level
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 507 of 1037
Bit 0: Start Flag (STF)
The STF controls the start of transfer operations. When this bit is set to 1 and PMR30 of PMR3
is 0, transfer operation of the SCI2 is started. When PMR30 of PMR3 is 1, the low level of the
$ pin is detected and transfer is started. This bit retains 1 during transfer and in the $ input
standby mode, and it is cleared to 0 after completion of transfer and when transfer is cut off by
the
$ pin. Therefore, this bit can be used as a busy flag. When this bit is cleared to 0 during
transfer, the transfer is cut off and the SCI2 is initialized. At this time the contents of internal
registers other than the SCR2 and the serial data buffer (32 bytes) are retained.
Bit 0
STF
Description
Read
Transfer operations stops
(Initial value)
0
Write
Transfer operation discontinues and the SCI2 is initialized
Read
During transfer operation or in
$
input standby mode
1
Write
Transfer operation starts
24.2.5
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode
control. When the MSTPCR is set to 1, the SCI2 stops at the end of bus cycle and a transition is
made to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5 Module Stop Mode.
The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 7: Module Stop (MSTP7)
Specifies the SCI2 module stop mode.
MSTPCRL
Bit 7
MSTP7
Description
0
SCI2 module stop mode is cleared
1
SCI2 module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 508 of 1037
24.3
Operation
The SCI2, comprising 32 bytes serial data buffer, can continuously transmit a maximum of 32
bytes data by a single operation, synchronized with clock pulse. Installation of a register enables
to select transmit, receive, or simultaneous transmit/receive. When transmit is set, the value of
serial data buffer is retained even after completion of transmission.
An internal or external clock can be selected as transfer clock. When an internal clock is
selected, data can be transmitted at 1-byte intervals. The strobe signal can also be output from
the STRB pin. When an external clock is selected, malfunction due to clock can be detected by
the overrun flag.
The start of transfer and its forced cutoff can be controlled by
$ input. Forced cutoff can be
detected by the abort flag.
24.3.1
Clock
Selection of a transfer clock can be made from seven internal clocks and an external clock.
When an internal clock is selected, the SCK2 pin becomes a clock output pin.
24.3.2
Data Transfer Format
Figures 24.2 and 24.3 show transfer format of the SCI2.
LSB-first transfer that allows to transmit/receive from the lowest-order bit of data is performed.
Transmit data is output from the fall of the transfer clock to its next fall. Receive data is
collected at the rise of the transfer clock.
When an internal clock is selected as a transfer clock, data can be transferred at intervals of 1
byte. The SCK2 output is retained at a high level between transfer data. The strobe signal can
be output from the STRB pin.
Selection of interval of transfer data is set at GAP1 or GAP0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 509 of 1037
SO2/SI2
SCK2
Start of transfer
Bit 0
End of transfer
CS
STRB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 24.2 Transfer Format (Transfer Data without Intervals)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 510 of 1037
SO2/SI2
SCK2
Start of transfer
8, 24, and 56 clocks
Bit 0
End of transfer
CS
STRB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 24.3 Transfer Format (Transfer Data with Intervals)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 511 of 1037
24.3.3
Data Transfer Operations
(1) SCI2 Initialization
To carry out data transfer, first initialize the SCI2 using software. Initialization is performed
as described below:
(1) Use PMR2, PMR3, STAR, EDAR and SCR2 to set the pin and transmission mode while
STF of SCSR2 is set to 0.
(2) The SCI2 pin is also used as a port. Switching of a port is performed on PMR.
The SO2 pin allows to select CMOS output or NMOS open drain output on PMR2.
Transfer clock and transfer data intervals can be set on SCR2.
(3) The starting and ending addresses in the transfer data area are set on STAR and EDAR.
If the value of the ending address is smaller than that of the starting address, transfer data
at H'FFD0DF and then return to H'FFD0C0 so that transfer to the ending address can be
carried out as shows in figure 24.4. If the value of the starting address is equal to that of
the ending address is equal, perform one-byte transfer.
End
H' FFD0C0
Ending address
Starting address
H' FFD0DF
Start
Figure 24.4 If The Value of The Ending Address is Smaller Than That of
The Starting Address
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 512 of 1037
(2) Transmit Operations
Transmit operations are performed as described below:
(1) Set PMR26 and PMR27 of PMR2 to 1 and set them to the SO2 and SCK2 pins,
respectively.
Set the SO2 pin to the open drain output using PMR20 of PMR2 and set them to the
$
and STRB pins, respectively, using PMR30 and PMR31 of PMR3, as necessary.
(2) Set the transfer clock and transfer data intervals (only when an internal clock is in
operation) by setting SCR2.
(3) Write transmit data to serial data buffer. In transmit operations, the contents of the data
buffer will be retained even after the end of transmission. When the same data is
transmitted again, it is not necessary to write data.
(4) Set STAR to the 5 low-order bits at the transmission starting address and EDAR to the 5
low-order bits at the transmission ending address.
(5) Set STF to 1. When PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 0, transmission is started by setting STF.
While PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 1, transmission is started when low level of the
$ pin is
detected.
(6) After completion of transmission, TEI of SCSR2 is set to 1. STF is cleared to 0.
When an internal clock is selected, synchronous clock is output from the SCK2 pin at the time of
starting transmission. When transmission has been completed, synchronous clock is not output
until the next STF is set. During that time, the SO2 pin continues to output the value of final bit
of the immediately preceding data.
When an external clock is selected, data is transmitted, synchronized with the clock input from
the SCK2 pin. If the synchronous clock is continuously input after completion of transmission,
no transmission is performed as the overrun state has been found and then ORER of the SCSR2
is set to 1. The SO2 pin continues to retain the value of final bit of the preceding data.
However, if the
$ of PMR3 is set to 1, overrun is not detected when the $ pin is at a high
level.
The output value of the SO2 pin while transmission is being stopped can be changed by SOL of
SCSR2. Data buffer cannot be read or written from CPU during transmission or in the
$
standby mode.
When a Read instruction has been executed, H'FF is read. Even if a Write instruction is
executed, buffer does not change. When a Read/Write instruction has been executed during
transmission or in the
$ input standby mode, WT of the SCSR2 is set.
While PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 0, transmission is immediately cut off when a high level of the
$ pin has been detected during transmission, and ABT is set to 1, and then STF is cleared to 0.
The SCK2 and SO2 pins enter the high impedance state. Therefore, note that transmission may
not be carried out while ABT is set to 1, and thus transmission must be resumed after clearing to
0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 513 of 1037
(3) Receive Operations
Receive operations are performed as described below:
(1) Set PMR25 and PMR27 of PMR2 to 1 and set them to the SI2 and SCK2 pins,
respectively. Set them to the
$ pin, using PMR30 of PMR3 as necessary.
(2) Set the transfer clock and transfer data intervals (only when an internal clock is in
operation) by setting SCR2.
(3) Set STAR to 5 low-order bits at the receive starting address and EDAR to 5 low-order
bits at the receive ending address. This enables to determine the area in the serial data
buffer where receive data is stored.
(4) Set STF to 1. When PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 0, reception is started by setting STF.
While PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 1, reception is started when low level of the
$ pin is
detected.
(5) After completion of reception, TEI of SCSR2 is set to 1. STF is cleared to 0.
(6) Read the receive data stored from the serial data buffer.
When an internal clock is selected, synchronous clock is output from the SCK2 pin at the time of
starting reception. When reception has been completed, synchronous clock is not output until
the next STF is set.
When an external clock is selected, data is received, synchronized with the clock input from the
SCK2 pin. If the synchronous clock is continuously input after completion of reception, no
reception is performed as the overrun state has been found and then ORER of the SCSR2 is set
to 1. However, if the
$ of PMR3 is set to 1, overrun is not detected when the $ pin is at a
high level.
Data buffer cannot be read or written from CPU during reception or in the
$ standby mode.
When a Read instruction has been executed, H'FF is read. Even if a Write instruction is
executed, buffer does not change. When a Read/Write instruction has been executed during
reception or in the
$ input standby mode, WT of the SCSR2 is set.
While
$ of PMR3 is set to 1, transmission is immediately cut off when a high level of the $
pin has been detected during transmission, and ABT is set to 1, and then STF is cleared to 0.
The SCK2 and SO2 pins enter the high impedance state. Therefore, note that transmission may
not be carried out while ABT is set to 1, and thus transmission must be resumed after clearing to
0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 514 of 1037
(4) Simultaneous Transmit/Receive Operations
Simultaneous transmit/receive operations are performed as described below:
(1) Set PMR25, PMR26 and PMR27 of PMR2 to 1 and set them to the SI2, SO2 and SCK2
pins, respectively.
Set the SO2 pin to open drain output, using PMR20 of PMR2, and set them to the
$ and
STRB pins, respectively, using PMR30 and PMR31, as necessary.
(2) Set the transfer clock and transfer data intervals (only when an internal clock is in
operation) by setting SCR2.
(3) Write transmit data to serial data buffer. In the simultaneous transmit/receive operations,
the receive data is stored in the same address alternately with the transmit data.
(4) Set STAR to 5 low-order bits at the transmission starting address and EDAR to 5 low-
order bits at the transmission ending address.
(5) Set STF to 1. When PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 0, transmission is started by setting STF.
While PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 1, transmission is started when low level of the
$ pin is
detected.
(6) After completion of transmission, TEI of SCSR2 is set to 1. STF is cleared to 0.
(7) Read the receive data stored from the serial data buffer.
When an internal clock is selected, synchronous clock is output from the SCK2 pin at the time of
starting transmission. When transmission has been completed, synchronous clock is not output
until the next STF is set. During that time, the SO2 pin continues to output the value of final bit
of the preceding data.
When an external clock is selected, data is transmitted, synchronized with the clock input from
the SCK2 pin. If the synchronous clock is continuously input after completion of transmission,
no transmission is performed as the overrun state has been found and then ORER of the SCSR2
is set to 1. The SO2 pin continues to retain the value of final bit of the preceding data.
However, if the CS of PMR3 is set to 1, overrun is not detected when the
$ pin is at a high
level.
The output value of the SO2 pin while transmission is being stopped can be changed by SOL of
SCSR2. Data buffer cannot be read or written from CPU during transmission or in the
$
standby mode. When a Read instruction has been executed, H'FF is read. Even if a Write
instruction is executed, buffer does not change. When a Read/Write instruction has been
executed during transmission or in the
$ input standby mode, WT of the SCSR2 is set.
While the CS of PMR3 is set to 1, transmission is immediately cut off when a high level of the
$ pin has been detected during transmission, and ABT is set to 1, and then STF is cleared to 0.
The SCK2 and SO2 pins enter the high impedance state. Therefore, note that transmission may
not be carried out while ABT is set to 1, and thus transmission must be resumed after clearing to
0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 515 of 1037
24.4
Interrupt Sources
An interrupt source of the SCI2 is transmission cutoff by completion of transmission and the
$
pin, to which different vector addresses are assigned.
On completion of data transfer, TEI of SCSR2 is set to 1, and transfer-end interrupt request is
generated. This interrupt can specify enable/disable by setting TEIE of SCR2.
While PMR30 of PMR3 is set to 1, transfer is cut off when the
$ pin enters a high level during
data transfer, and ABT of SCSR2 is set to 1 and then transfer cutoff interrupt request is
generated.
This interrupt can specify enable/disable by setting ABTIE of SCR2. In the case of transfer
cutoff by the
$ pin, overrun error, and read/write to serial data buffer during transfer and in the
$ standby mode, ABT, ORER, and WT of the SCSR2 is set to 1, respectively. These bits
allow to determine error factors.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 516 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 517 of 1037
Section 25 I
2
C Bus Interface (IIC)
25.1
Overview
The I
2
C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I
2
C bus (inter-IC bus)
interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I
2
C bus differs partly from the
Philips configuration, however.
Each I
2
C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to
transfer data, saving board and connector space.
25.1.1
Features
Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format
--
I
2
C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation
--
Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only
Conforms to Philips I
2
C bus interface (I
2
C bus format)
Two ways of setting slave address (I
2
C bus format)
Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I
2
C bus format)
Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I
2
C bus format)
Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I
2
C bus format)
Wait function in master mode (I
2
C bus format)
--
A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag.
Wait function in slave mode (I
2
C bus format)
--
A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible.
Three interrupt sources
--
Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I
2
C bus format and address
reception after loss of master arbitration)
--
Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in
slave receive mode (I
2
C bus format)
--
Stop condition detection
Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode)
Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins)
--
Two pins-P24/SCL and P23/SDA- (normally CMOS pins) function as NMOS-only
outputs when the bus drive function is selected.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 518 of 1037
25.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 25.1 shows a block diagram of the I
2
C bus interface.
Figure 25.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. I/O pins are driven
only by NMOS and apparently function as NMOS open-drain outputs. However, applicable
voltages to input pins depend on the power (Vcc) voltage of this LSI.
SCL
PS
Noise
canceller
Bus state
decision
circuit
Output data
control
circuit
ICCR
Clock
control
ICMR
ICSR
ICDRS
Address
comparator
Arbitration
decision
circuit
SAR, SARX
SDA
Noise
canceler
Interrupt
generator
Interrupt
request
Internal data bus
[Legend]
ICCR
ICMR
ICSR
ICDR
SAR
SARX
PS
: I
2
C control register
: I
2
C mode register
: I
2
C status register
: I
2
C data register
: Slave address register
: Slave address register X
: Prescaler
ICDRR
ICDRT
Figure 25.1 Block Diagram of I
2
C Bus Interface
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 519 of 1037
V
CC
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Master)
This chip
SDA
SCL
SDA
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Slave 1)
SDA
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Slave 2)
SDA
V
CC
Figure 25.2 I
2
C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This Chip as Master)
25.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 25.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I
2
C bus interface.
Table 25.1 I
2
C Bus Interface Pins
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Serial clock pin
SCL
I/O
IIC serial clock input/output
Serial data pin
SDA
I/O
IIC serial data input/output
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 520 of 1037
25.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 25.2 summarizes the registers of the I
2
C bus interface.
Table 25.2 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
1
I
2
C bus control register
ICCR
R/W
H'01
H'D158
I
2
C bus status register
ICSR
R/W
H'00
H'D159
I
2
C bus data register
ICDR
R/W
--
H'D15E
*
2
I
2
C bus mode register
ICMR
R/W
H'00
H'D15F
*
2
Slave address register
SAR
R/W
H'00
H'D15F
*
2
Second slave address register
SARX
R/W
H'01
H'D15E
*
2
Serial timer control register
STCR
R/W
H'00
H'FFEE
MSTPCRH
R/W
H'FF
H'FFEC
Module stop control register
MSTPCRL
R/W
H'FF
H'FFED
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. The register that can be written or read depends on the ICE bit in the I
2
C bus control
register. The slave address register can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the I
2
C bus
mode register can be accessed when ICE = 1.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 521 of 1037
25.2
Register Descriptions
25.2.1
I
2
C Bus Data Register (ICDR)
7
ICDR7
--
R/W
6
ICDR6
--
R/W
5
ICDR5
--
R/W
4
ICDR4
--
R/W
3
ICDR3
--
R/W
0
ICDR0
--
R/W
2
ICDR2
--
R/W
1
ICDR1
--
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRR
7
ICDRR7
--
R
6
ICDRR6
--
R
5
ICDRR5
--
R
4
ICDRR4
--
R
3
ICDRR3
--
R
0
ICDRR0
--
R
2
ICDRR2
--
R
1
ICDRR1
--
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRS
7
ICDRS7
--
--
6
ICDRS6
--
--
5
ICDRS5
--
--
4
ICDRS4
--
--
3
ICDRS3
--
--
0
ICDRS0
--
--
2
ICDRS2
--
--
1
ICDRS1
--
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRT
7
ICDRT7
--
W
6
ICDRT6
--
W
5
ICDRT5
--
W
4
ICDRT4
--
W
3
ICDRT3
--
W
0
ICDRT0
--
W
2
ICDRT2
--
W
1
ICDRT1
--
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
TDRE, RDRF (Internal flag)
--
RDRF
0
--
--
TDRE
0
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 522 of 1037
ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when
transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift
register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read
or written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the
three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and
affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF.
After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I
2
C bus is in transmit
mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from
ICDRT to ICDRS. After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I
2
C
bus is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF flag is 0), data is
transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 523 of 1037
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB
side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the
LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS
= 1.
ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE
bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset.
The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the
TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags.
TDRE
Description
0
The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot be started
[Clearing conditions]
(Initial value)
(1) When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1)
(2) When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is
issued with the I
2
C bus format or serial format selected
(3) When a stop condition is detected with the I
2
C bus format selected
(4) In receive mode (TRS = 0)
(A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an
acknowledge bit)
1
The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT)
[Setting conditions]
(1) In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line
state after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I
2
C bus format or
serial format selected
(2) When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS
(Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS
is empty)
(3) When a switch is made from receive mode (TRS = 0) to transmit mode (TRS = 1)
after detection of a start condition
RDRF
Description
0
The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode
1
The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read
[Setting condition]
When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR
(Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0
and RDRF = 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 524 of 1037
25.2.2
Slave Address Register (SAR)
7
SVA6
0
R/W
6
SVA5
0
R/W
5
SVA4
0
R/W
4
SVA3
0
R/W
3
SVA2
0
R/W
0
FS
0
R/W
2
SVA1
0
R/W
1
SVA0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected),
if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start
condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned
to the same address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0
in ICCR.
SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 1: Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0)
Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices
connected to the I
2
C bus.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 525 of 1037
Bit 0: Format Select (FS)
Used together with the FSX bit in SARX to select the communication format.
I
2
C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master
mode only
The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode.
SAR
Bit 0
SARX
Bit 0
FS
FSX
Operating Mode
0
I
2
C bus format
SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
0
1
I
2
C bus format
(Initial value)
SAR slave address recognized
SARX slave address ignored
0
I
2
C bus format
SAR slave address ignored
SARX slave address recognized
1
1
Clock synchronous serial format
SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 526 of 1037
25.2.3
Second Slave Address Register (SARX)
7
SVAX6
0
R/W
6
SVAX5
0
R/W
5
SVAX4
0
R/W
4
SVAX3
0
R/W
3
SVAX2
0
R/W
0
FSX
1
R/W
2
SVAX1
0
R/W
1
SVAX0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected),
if the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start
condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is
assigned to the same address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is
cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1: Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0)
Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave
devices connected to the I
2
C bus.
Bit 0: Format Select X (FSX)
Used together with the FS bit in SAR to select the communication format.
I
2
C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode
only
The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in SAR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 527 of 1037
25.2.4
I
2
C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
7
MLS
0
R/W
6
WAIT
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
2
BC2
0
R/W
1
BC1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred
first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency
and the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written
and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS)
Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or LSB-first.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB
side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the
LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS
= 1.
Do not set this bit to 1 when the I
2
C bus format is used.
Bit 7
MLS
Description
0
MSB-first
(Initial value)
1
LSB-first
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 528 of 1037
Bit 6: Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT)
Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data and the acknowledge bit, in master
mode with the I
2
C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final
data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins (with SCL at the low level).
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is
transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively
with no wait inserted.
The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of
the WAIT setting.
The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode.
Bit 6
WAIT
Description
0
Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively
(Initial value)
1
Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 529 of 1037
Bits 5 to 3: Transfer Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0)
These bits, together with the IICX bit in the STCR register, select the serial clock frequency in
master mode. They should be set according to the required transfer rate.
STCR
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Transfer Rate
IICX
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Clock
= 5 MHz
= 8 MHz
= 10 MHz
0
/28
179 kHz
286 kHz
357 kHz
0
1
/40
125 kHz
200 kHz
250 kHz
0
/48
104 kHz
167 kHz
208 kHz
0
1
1
/64
78.1 kHz
125 kHz
156 kHz
0
/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
0
1
/100
50.0 kHz
80.0 kHz
100 kHz
0
/112
44.6 kHz
71.4 kHz
89.3 kHz
0
1
1
1
/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
0
/56
89.3 kHz
143 kHz
179 kHz
0
1
/80
62.5 kHz
100 kHz
125 kHz
0
/96
52.1 kHz
83.3 kHz
104 kHz
0
1
1
/128
39.1 kHz
62.5 kHz
78.1 kHz
0
/160
31.3 kHz
50.0 kHz
62.5 kHz
0
1
/200
25.0 kHz
40.0 kHz
50.0 kHz
0
/224
22.3 kHz
35.7 kHz
44.6 kHz
1
1
1
1
/256
19.5 kHz
31.3 kHz
39.1 kHz
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 530 of 1037
Bits 2 to 0: Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0)
Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be transferred next. With the I
2
C bus format
(when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the data is transferred with one addition
acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer
frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while
the SCL line is low.
The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value
returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bits/Frame
BC2
BC1
BC0
Synchronous Serial Format
I
2
C Bus Format
0
8
9 (Initial value)
0
1
1
2
0
2
3
0
1
1
3
4
0
4
5
0
1
5
6
0
6
7
1
1
1
7
8
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 531 of 1037
25.2.5
I
2
C Bus Control Register (ICCR)
7
ICE
0
R/W
6
IEIC
0
R/W
5
MST
0
R/W
4
TRS
0
R/W
3
ACKE
0
R/W
0
SCP
1
W
2
BBSY
0
R/W
1
IRIC
0
R/(W)
*
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I
2
C bus interface, enables
or disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or
disables acknowledgement, confirms the I
2
C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions,
and performs interrupt flag confirmation.
ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset.
Bit 7: I
2
C Bus Interface Enable (ICE)
Selects whether or not the I
2
C bus interface is to be used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins
function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer operations are enabled. When ICE is
cleared to 0, the I
2
C bus interface module is disabled, and the internal state is initialized.
The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers
can be accessed when ICE is 1.
Bit 7
ICE
Description
0
I
2
C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function
SAR and SARX can be accessed. The internal state of the I
2
C bus interface module
is initialized.
(Initial value)
1
I
2
C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SCA are
driving the bus)
ICMR and ICDR can be accessed
Bit 6: I
2
C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC)
Enables or disables interrupts from the I
2
C bus interface to the CPU.
Bit 6
IEIC
Description
0
Interrupts disabled
(Initial value)
1
Interrupts enabled
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 532 of 1037
Bit 5: Master/Slave Select (MST)
Bit 4: Transmit/Receive Select (TRS)
MST selects whether the I
2
C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode.
TRS selects whether the I
2
C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode.
In master mode with the I
2
C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by
hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing
format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according
to the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition.
Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the
acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer.
MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows.
Bit 5
Bit 4
MST
TRS
Description
0
Slave receive mode
(Initial value)
0
1
Slave transmit mode
0
Master receive mode
1
1
Master transmit mode
Bit 5
MST
Description
0
Slave mode
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written by software
(2) When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I
2
C bus format master
mode
1
Master mode
[Setting conditions]
(1) When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition 2)
(2) When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition 2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 533 of 1037
Bit 4
TRS
Description
0
Receive mode
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition 3)
(2) When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of setting condition 3)
(3) When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I
2
C bus format master
mode
1
Transmit mode
[Setting conditions]
(1) When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions 3)
(2) When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions 3)
(3) When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I
2
C bus format slave
mode
Bit 3: Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE)
Specifies whether the value of the acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when
using the I
2
C bus format is to be ignored and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be
aborted and error handling, etc., performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is
0, the value of the received acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always
0.
When the ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data
transmission, regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the
TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge
bit is 0, and the IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge
bit is 1.
Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating
completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no
significance.
Bit 3
ACKE
Description
0
The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed
(Initial value)
1
If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 534 of 1037
Bit 2: Bus Busy (BBSY)
The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I
2
C bus (SCL, SDA) is busy or free. In master
mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions.
A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting
BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop
condition, clearing BBSY to 0.
To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A
retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV
instruction to write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I
2
C bus interface must be set to master
transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS should both be set to 1 before
writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
Bit 2
BBSY
Description
0
Bus is free
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When a stop condition is detected
1
Bus is busy
[Setting condition]
When a start condition is detected
Bit 1: I
2
C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC)
Indicates that the I
2
C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at
the end of a data transfer, when a slave address or general call address is detected in slave
receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost in master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is
detected. IRIC is set at different times depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in
ICMR. See section 25.3.6, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which
IRIC is set also differ depending on the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR.
IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC.
When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed
continuously without CPU intervention.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 535 of 1037
Bit 1
IRIC
Description
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
(1) When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
1
Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
T
I
2
C bus format master mode
(1) When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is
issued
(when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
(2) When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1
(3) At the end of data transfer
(at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse, and at the fall of the 8th
transmit/receive clock pulse when a wait is inserted)
(4) When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost
(when the AL flag is set to 1)
(5) When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
T
I
2
C bus format slave mode
(1) When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches
(when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1)
and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When the general call address is detected
(when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1)
and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(3) When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
(4) When a stop condition is detected
(when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
T
Synchronous serial format
(1) At the end of data transfer
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
When conditions are occured such that the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 536 of 1037
When, with the I
2
C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags
must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a
corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer.
When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set.
The IRTR flag (the DTC* start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to
detection of a retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or
general call address match in I
2
C bus format slave mode.
Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set.
The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in
continuous transfer using the DTC*. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the
specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed.
Table 25.3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states.
Note: *
This LSI does not incorporate DTC.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 537 of 1037
Table 25.3 Flags and Transfer States
MST
TRS
BBSY ESTP
STOP IRTR
AASX AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB State
1/0
1/0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Idle state (flag clearing
required)
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Start condition
issuance
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Start condition
established
1
1/0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Master mode wait
1
1/0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0/1
Master mode
transmit/receive end
0
0
1
0
0
0
1/0
1
1/0
1/0
0
Arbitration lost
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
SAR match by first
frame in slave mode
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
General call address
match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
SARX match
0
1/0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(except after SARX
match)
0
0
1/0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(after SARX match)
0
1/0
0
1/0
1/0
0
0
0
0
0
0/1
Stop condition detected
Bit 0: Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP)
Controls the issuing of start and stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write
1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop
condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is
not stored.
Bit 0
SCP
Description
0
Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag
1
Reading always returns a value of 1
(Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 538 of 1037
25.2.6
I
2
C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
7
ESTP
0
R/(W)
*
6
STOP
0
R/(W)
*
5
IRTR
0
R/(W)
*
4
AASX
0
R/(W)
*
3
AL
0
R/(W)
*
0
ACKB
0
R/W
2
AAS
0
R/(W)
*
1
ADZ
0
R/(W)
*
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge
confirmation and control.
ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP)
Indicates that a stop condition has been detected during frame transfer in I
2
C bus format slave
mode.
Bit 7
ESTP
Description
0
No error stop condition
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
(1) When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1
T
In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
T
In other modes
No meaning
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 539 of 1037
Bit 6: Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP)
Indicates that a stop condition has been detected after completion of frame transfer in I
2
C bus
format slave mode.
Bit 6
STOP
Description
0
No normal stop condition
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
(1) When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1
T
In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
T
In other modes
No meaning
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 540 of 1037
Bit 5: I
2
C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag
(IRTR)
Indicates that the I
2
C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the source is
completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception for
which DTC* activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1
at the same time.
IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by
reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared
automatically when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0.
Note: *
This LSI does not incorporate DTC.
Bit 5
IRTR
Description
0
Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
(1) When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1
Continuous transfer state
[Setting condition]
T
In I
2
C bus interface slave mode
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1
T
In other modes
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 541 of 1037
Bit 4: Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX)
In I
2
C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start
condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX.
AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is
also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected.
Bit 4
AASX
Description
0
Second slave address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
(1) When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
(2) When a start condition is detected
(3) In master mode
1
Second slave address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0
Bit 3: Arbitration Lost (AL)
This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The I
2
C bus interface monitors the
bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at nearly the same time, if the
I
2
C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the
bus has been taken by another master.
AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is
reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 3
AL
Description
0
Bus arbitration won (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
1
Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
(1) If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit
mode
(2) If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 542 of 1037
Bit 2: Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS)
In I
2
C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start
condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected.
AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition,
AAS is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in
receive mode.
Bit 2
AAS
Description
0
Slave address or general call address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
(3) In master mode
1
Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode
Bit 1: General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ)
In I
2
C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start
condition is the general call address (H'00).
ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition,
ADZ is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in
receive mode.
Bit 1
ADZ
Description
0
General call address not recognized
(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
(3) In master mode
1
General call address recognized
[Setting condition]
If the general call address is detected when FSX = 0 or FS = 0 is selected in the
slave receive mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 543 of 1037
Bit 0: Acknowledge Bit (ACKB)
Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the receiving device receives data, it returns
acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In receive mode, after data has been
received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the transmitting device.
When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line
(returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal
software is read.
Bit 0
ACKB
Description
0
Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing
(Initial value)
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data
(signal is 0)
1
Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data
(signal is 1)
25.2.7
Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
7
--
0
--
6
IICX
0
R/W
5
IICRST
0
R/W
4
--
0
--
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
--
0
--
2
--
0
--
1
--
0
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the I
2
C bus interface operating mode.
STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 6: I
2
C Transfer Select (IICX)
This bit, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR of I
2
C, selects the transfer rate in master
mode. For details, see section 25.2.4, I
2
C Bus Mode Register (ICMR).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 544 of 1037
Bit 5: I
2
C Controller Reset (IICRST)
This bit controls the initialization of the internal state of the I
2
C bus interface. When the I
2
C bus
interface operating mode is hung because of communications error, and the IICRST bit is then
set to 1, the I
2
C bus interface controller is initialized of the internal state, and this allows the
internal state of the I
2
C bus interface to be initialized without making port settings or initializing
registers.
For the detail, refer to section 25.3.9, Initialization of Internal State.
The initialization is continuous and the I
2
C bus interface cannot operate, when the IICST bit
remains set to 1. Therefore, be sure to clear the IICST bit after setting it.
Bit 5
IICRST
Description
0
I
2
C bus interface controller is not reset
(Initial value)
1
I
2
C bus interface controller is reset
Bits 3: Flash Memory Control Resister Enable (FLSHE)
This bit selects the control resister of the flash memory. For details, refer to section 7.3.4 or
8.5.5, Serial Timer Control Resister.
Bits 4 and 2 to 0: Reserved
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 545 of 1037
25.2.8
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop
mode control.
When the corresponding bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, operation of the corresponding I
2
C module is
halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see
section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. It is not initialized in standby mode.
MSTPCRL Bit 6: Module Stop (MSTP6)
Specifies I
2
C module stop mode.
MSTPCRL
Bit 6
MSTP6
Description
0
I
2
C module stop mode is cleared
1
I
2
C module stop mode is set (Initial value)
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 546 of 1037
25.3
Operation
25.3.1
I
2
C Bus Data Format
The I
2
C bus interface has serial and I
2
C bus formats.
The I
2
C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in figure
25.3. The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits.
The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure
25.4.
Figure 25.5 shows the I
2
C bus timing.
The symbols used in figures 25.3 to 25.5 are explained in table 25.4.
S
A
SLA
7
n
R/W
DATA
A
1
1
m
1
1
1
A/A
1
P
1
Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
Transfer frame count
(m = 1 or above)
S
SLA
7
n1
7
R/W
A
DATA
1
1
1
m1
1
A/A
1
S
1
SLA
R/W
1
1
m2
A
1
DATA
n2
A/A
1
P
1
Upper: Transfer bit count (n1 and N2 = 1 to 8)
Lower: Transfer frame count (m1 and m2 = 1 or above)
(a) FS = 0 or FSX = 0
(b) Start condition transmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0
Figure 25.3 I
2
C Bus Data Formats (I
2
C Bus Formats)
S
DATA
8
n
DATA
1
1
m
P
1
Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
Transfer frame count
(m = 1 or above)
FS = 1 and FSX = 1
Figure 25.4 I
2
C Bus Data Format (Serial Format)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 547 of 1037
SDA
SCL
S
SLA
R/W
A
9
8
1-7
9
8
1-7
9
8
1-7
DATA
A
DATA
A/A
P
Figure 25.5 I
2
C Bus Timing
Table 25.4 I
2
C Bus Data Format Symbols
S
Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is hig
SLA
Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device
R/
:
Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device
when R/
:
is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/
:
is 0
A
Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the
master in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer
DATA
Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-
first or LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR
P
Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high
25.3.2
Master Transmit Operation
In I
2
C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and
transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure
and operations synchronize with the ICDR writing are described below.
[1] Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX
in STCR, according to the operating mode.
[2] Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free.
[3] Set bits MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode.
[4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and
generates the start condition.
[5] Then IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
[6] Write the data (slave address + R/
:) to ICDR. After the start condition instruction has been
issued and the start conditon has been generated, write data to ICDR. If this procedure is not
followed, data may not be output correctly. With the I
2
C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR
or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the
7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. As indicating the end of the transfer, and
so the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute
other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been transmitted before the IRIC
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 548 of 1037
clearing, it can not be determine the end of transmission. The master device sequentially
sends the transmission clock and the data written to ICDR using the timing shown in figure
25.6. The selected slave device (i.e. the slave device with the matching slave address) drives
SDA low at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal.
[7] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low
in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[8] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that ACKB is cleared to 0. When the slave device
has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission, and retry
the transmit operation.
[9] Write the transmit data to ICDR. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so the IRIC flag
is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other interrupt
handling routine. The master device sequentially sends the transmission clock and the data
written to ICDR. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the
internal clock.
[10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low
in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[11] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR and confirm ACKB is cleared to 0. When there is data to be
transmitted, go to the step [6] to continue next transmission. When the slave device has not
acknowledged (ACKB bit is set to 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission.
[12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. And write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from
low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 549 of 1037
SDA
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
2
1
R/
4
3
6
5
8
7
1
2
9
A
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
bit 7
bit 6
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
SCL
(master output)
Start condition
Geberation
Slave address
Data 1
[9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear
[6] ICDR write
[6] IRIC clear
address + R/
[7]
[5]
Note: Data write
timing in ICDR
ICDR Writing
prohibited
[4] Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0
(start condition
issuance)
ICDR Writing
enable
Data 1
User processing
These processes are executed continuously.
These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 25.6 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 550 of 1037
25.3.3
Master Receive Operation
In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns
an acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data. I
2
C bus interface module consists of
the data buffers of ICDRR and ICDRS, so data can be received continuously in master receive
mode. For this construction, when stop condition issuing timing delayed, it may occurs the
internal contention between stop condition issuance and SCL clock output for next data
receiving, and then the extra SCL clock would be outputted automatically or the SCL line would
be held to low. And for I
2
C bus interface system, the acknowledge bit must be set to 1 at the last
data receiving, so the change timing of ACKB bit in ICSR should be controlled by software. To
take measures against these problems, the wait function should be used in master receive mode.
The reception procedure and operations with the wait function in master receive mode are
described below.
[1] Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode, and set the
WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. Also clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting).
[2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output,
and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. In order to detect wait
operation, set the IRIC flag in ICCR must be cleared to 0. After reading ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately not to execute other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been
received before the IRIC clearing, it can not be determine the end of reception.
[3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has
been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If the first frame is the
last receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception.
[4] Clear the IRIC flag to release from the Wait State. The master device outputs the 9th clock
and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal.
[5] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag in ICCR and the IRTR flag in ICSR
are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. The master device outputs SCL clock to
receive next data.
[6] Read ICDR.
[7] Clear the IRIC flag to detect next wait operation. From clearing of the IRIC flag to negation
of a wait as described in step [4] (and [9]) to clearing of the IRIC flag as described in steps
[5], [6], and [7], must be performed within the time taken to transfer one byte.
[8] The IRIC flags set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed
low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If this frame is
the last receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception.
[9] Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to cancel wait operation. The master device outputs the 9th
clock and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal. Data
can be received continuously by repeating step [5] to [9].
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 551 of 1037
[10] Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 so as to return "No acknowledge" data. Also set the TRS bit
to 1 to switch from receive mode to transmit mode.
[11] Clear IRIC flag to 0 to release from the Wait State.
[12] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
receive clock pulse.
[13] Clear the WAIT bit to 0 to switch from wait mode to no wait mode. Read ICDR and the
IRIC flag to 0. Clearing of the IRIC flag should be after the WAIT = 0.
[14] Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is
high, and generates the stop condition.
9
A
Bit7
Master receive mode
Master transmit mode
SCL
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
User processing
[1] TRS cleared to 0
WAIT set to 1
ACKB cleared to 0
[2] ICDR read
(dummy read)
[2] IRIC clearance
[4] IRC clearance
[6] ICDR read
(Data 1)
[7] IRIC clearance
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[3]
[5]
A
9
1
2
3
4
5
Data 1
Data 2
Data 1
These processes are executed continuously.
These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 25.7 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 552 of 1037
8
Bit0
Data 2
SCL
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
User processing
[9] IRIC clearance
[6] ICDR read
(Data 2)
[7] IRIC clearance
[9] IRIC Clearance
[6] ICDR read
(Data 3)
[7] IRIC clearance
Bit7
[8]
[5]
A
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit7
Bit6
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[8]
[5]
A
8
9
1
2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 3
Data 2
Data 1
These processes are executed continuously.
These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 25.8 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) continued
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 553 of 1037
25.3.4
Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The receive procedure and operations in slave
receive mode are described below.
[1] Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according
to the operating mode.
[2] A start condition output by the master device sets the BBSY flag to 1 in ICCR.
[3] After the slave device detects the start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address,
it functions as the slave device designated as the master device. If the 8th bit data (R/
:) is
0, TRS bit in ICCR remains 0 and executes slave receive operation.
[4] At the ninth clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low to
acknowledge the transfer. At the same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR. If IEIC is 1 in
ICCR, a CPU interrupt is requested. If the RDRF internal flag is 0, it is set to 1 and
continuous reception is performed. If the RDRF internal flag is 1, the slave device holds
SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until it has read the data in ICDR.
[5] Read ICDR and clear IRIC to 0 in ICCR. At this time, the RDFR flag is cleared to 0.
Steps [4] and [5] can be repeated to receive data continuously. When a stop condition is
detected (a low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 in
ICCR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 554 of 1037
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
2
1
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
9
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRR
RDRF
SCL
(Master output)
Start condition
issurance
SCL
(Slave output)
Interrupt request
generated
Address + R/W
Address + R/W
[5] Read ICDR
[5] Clear IRIC
User processing
Slave address
Data 1
[4]
A
R/W
Figure 25.9 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0) (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 555 of 1037
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
9
8
7
9
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRR
RDRF
SCL
(Master output)
SCL
(Slave output)
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Data 2
Data 2
Data 1
Data 1
[5] Read ICDR
[5] Clear IRIC
User processing
Data 2
Data 1
[4]
[4]
A
A
Figure 25.10 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0) (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 556 of 1037
25.3.5
Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, and the master device outputs
the transmit clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmit procedure and operations in
slave transmit mode are described below.
[1] Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according
to the operating mode.
[2] After the slave device detects a start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address, at
the ninth clock pulse the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the
same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and if the IEIC bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this
time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the eighth data bit (R/
:) is 1, the TRS bit is
set to 1 in ICCR, automatically causing a transition to slave transmit mode. The slave device
holds SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR.
[3] Clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write data in ICDR. The written data is transferred to ICDRS,
and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. Clear IRIC to 0,
then write the next data in ICDR. The slave device outputs the written data serially in step
with the clock output by the master device, with the timing shown in figure 25.11.
[4] When one frame of data has been transmitted, at the rise of the ninth transmit clock pulse
IRIC is set to 1 in ICCR. If the TDRE internal flag is 1, the slave device holds SCL low
from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR. The master device drives
SDA low at the ninth clock pulse to acknowledge the data. The acknowledge signal is stored
in the ACKB bit in ICSR, and can be used to check whether the transfer was carried out
normally. If TDRE internal flag is set to 0, the data written in ICDR is transferred to ICDRS,
then transmission starts and TDRE internal flag and IRIC and IRTR flags are all set to 1
again.
[5] To continue transmitting, clear IRIC to 0, then write the next transmit data in ICDR.
Steps [4] and [5] can be repeated to transmit continuously. To end the transmission, write H'FF
in ICDR so that the SDA may be freed on the slave side. When a stop condition is detected (a
low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag will be cleared to 0 in ICCR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 557 of 1037
SDA
(Slave output)
SDA
(Master output)
SCL
(Slave output)
2
1
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
9
9
8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRT
TDRE
SCL
(Master output)
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Slave receive mode
Slave transmit mode
Data 1
Data 2
[3] Clear IRIC
[5] Clear IRIC
[3] Write ICDR
[3] Write ICDR
[5] Write ICDR
User
processing
Data 1
Data 1
Data 2
Data 2
A
R/W
A
[3]
[2]
Figure 25.11 Example of Timing in Slave Transmit Mode (MLS = 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 558 of 1037
25.3.6
IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR,
the FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1,
SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized
with the internal clock. Figure 25.12 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 559 of 1037
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing
Clear
IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
1
A
8
7
1
9
8
7
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing
Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
1
A
8
1
9
8
Clear IRIC
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
1
8
7
1
8
7
(a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I
2
C bus format, no wait)
(b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I
2
C bus format, wait inserted)
(c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format)
Figure 25.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 560 of 1037
25.3.7
Noise Canceler
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being
latched internally. Figure 25.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit.
The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless
the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
SCL or SDA
input signal
Internal SCL
or SDA signal
Sampling clock
Sampling
clock
System clock
period
C
Latch
Q
D
C
Latch
Q
D
Match
detector
Figure 25.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler
25.3.8
Sample Flowcharts
Figures 25.14 to 25.17 show sample flowcharts for using the I
2
C bus interface in each mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 561 of 1037
Start
Initialize
Read BBSY in ICCR
No
BBSY = 0?
Yes
Set MST = 1 and
TRS = 1 in ICCR
Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
Yes
IRIC = 1?
Write transmit data in ICDR
Read ACKB in ICSR
ACKB = 0?
No
Yes
No
Yes
Transmit mode?
Write transmit data in ICDR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
No
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read ACKB in ICSR
End of transmission
or ACKB = 1?
No
Yes
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
End
Master receive mode
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
IRIC = 1?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[1] Initialize
[2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.
[3] Select master transmit mode.
[4] Start condition issuance
[5] Wait for a start condition generation
[6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave
address + R/
).
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately)
[7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[8] Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from
slave device.
[10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[11] Test for end of transfer
[12] Stop condition issuance
[9] Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately)
Figure 25.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 562 of 1037
Master receive mode
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Last receive ?
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Read ICDR
Read IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Last receive ?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
Set TRS = 1 in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR
Read ICDR
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
End
No
IRIC = 1?
No
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[1] Select receive mode
[2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy
read. After reading ICDR, please clear
IRIC immediately.
[3] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
(8th clock falling edge)
[4] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
[5] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
(9th clock risig edge)
[6] Read the received data.
[7] Clear IRIC
[8] Wait for the next data to be received.
(8th clock falling edge)
[9] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
[10] Set ACKB = 1 so as to return No
acknowledge, or set TRS = 1 so as not
to issue Extra clock.
[12] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
[14] Stop condition issuance.
[13] Set WAIT = 0.
Read ICDR.
Clear IRIC.
(Note: After setting WAIT = 0, IRIC
should be cleared to 0)
[11] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
Figure 25.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 563 of 1037
Start
End
Initialize
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Read AAS and ADZ flags in ICSR
Read TRS bit in ICCR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read ICDR
Read ICDR
Read ICDR
Set ACKB=0 in ICSR
General call address processing
*
Description omitted
Set MST=0 and
TRS=0 in ICCR
IRIC=1?
No
Yes
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Set ACKB=0 in ICSR
IRIC=1?
No
Yes
TRS=0?
IRIC=1?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
AAS=1 and
ADZ=0?
[2]
[1]
[3]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[7]
Slave transmit mode
Last receive?
No
No
Yes
Select slave receive mode.
Wait for 1 byte to be received (slave
address)
Start receiving. The first read is a dummy
read.
Wait for the transfer to end.
Set acknowledge data for the last receive.
Start the last receive.
Wait for the transfer to end.
Read the last receive data.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Figure 25.16 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 564 of 1037
End
Write transmit data in ICDR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read ACKB bit in ICSR
Set TRS=0 in ICCR
Read ICDR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
IRIC=1?
Yes
Yes
No
No
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Slave transmit mode
End of transmission
(ACKB=1)?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
Test for end of transfer.
Select slave receive mode.
Dummy read (to release the SCL line).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 25.17 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 565 of 1037
25.3.9
Initialization of Internal State
This I
2
C is capable of forcibly initializing internal state of I
2
C if deadlock develops during
communication.
The initialization is done by setting IICRST bit in STCR register, or clearing ICE bit.
For details, see section 25.2.7, Serial/Time control Register (STCR).
(1) Range of Initialization
The following is initialized by this function:
Internal flags of TDRE and RDRF
Programmable logic controller for signal receiving and sending.
Internal latches used for holding outputs from SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data output,
etc.).
The following is not initialized by this function:
Register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, and STCR).
Internal latches employed for maintaining data read from the registers which is used for
setting or clearing flags on ICMR, ICCR, and ICSR registers.
Values on the ICMR register bit counters (BC2 to BC0).
Interrupt factors currently generated (interrupt factors transferred to the interrupt controller).
(2) Precautions on Initialization
Interrupt flags and interrupt factors are not cleared by this function. Thus, you need to clear
them own as needed.
Other register flags are not basically cleared, too. Thus, you need to clear them as needed.
When this I
2
C is initialized with IICRST bit, write data specified by IICRST bit is
maintained. When clearing I
2
C, set IICRST bit once, then clear it using the MOV
instruction. The I
2
C cannot operate with the IICRST bit set to 1. Don't try to use bit
operation instructions such as BCLR.
If you try to clear a flag while data sending or receiving is taking place, I
2
C module stops
sending or receiving at that moment and frees the SCL and SDA pins. When resuming the
communication, initialize registers as needed so that the system communication capability
may function as intended.
Clear function of this module does not directly rewrite value of BBSY bit. However, depending
on state of SCL and SDA pins and the timing in which they are made free, BBSY bit can be
cleared. Other bits and flags can also be affected by status change.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 566 of 1037
In order to avoid these troubles, the following procedures must be observed in initialization of
I
2
C.
(1) Implement initialization of internal state by setting IICRST bit or ICE bit.
(2) Execute the stop condition issue instruction (setting BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 to write) and
wait for a duration equivalent to 2 clocks of the transfer rate.
(3) Execute initialization of internal state again by setting IICRST bit or ICE bit.
(4) Initialize each I
2
C register (re-setting).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 567 of 1037
25.4
Usage Notes
(1) In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an
instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output
consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start
condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the
instruction that generates the stop condition.
(2) Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these
conditions when reading or writing to ICDR.
(a) Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRT to ICDRS)
(b) Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRS to ICDRR)
(3) Table 25.5 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal
clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the
bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance.
Table 25.5 I
2
C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output)
Item
Symbol
Output Timing
Unit
Notes
SCL output cycle time
t
SCLO
28t
cyc
to 256t
cyc
ns
SCL output high pulse width
t
SCLHO
0.5t
SCLO
ns
SCL output low pulse width
t
SCLLO
0.5t
SCLO
ns
SDA output bus free time
t
BUFO
0.5t
SCLO
-1t
cyc
ns
Start condition output hold time
t
STAHO
0.5t
SCLO
-1t
cyc
ns
Retransmission start condition
output setup time
t
STASO
1t
SCLO
ns
Stop condition output setup time
t
STOSO
0.5t
SCLO
+2t
cyc
ns
Data output setup time (master)
1t
SCLLO
-3t
cyc
ns
Data output setup time (slave)
t
SDASO
1t
SCLL
- (6t
cyc
or 12t
cyc
*
1
)
ns
Data output hold time
t
SDAHO
3t
cyc
ns
Figure 28.10
(reference)
Note:
1. 6t
cyc
when IICX is 0, 12t
cyc
when 1.
(4) SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing
therefore depends on the system clock cycle t
cyc
, as shown in table 29.6 in section 29,
Electrical Characteristics. Note that the I
2
C bus interface AC timing specifications will not
be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 568 of 1037
(5) The I
2
C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for
high-speed mode). In master mode, the I
2
C bus interface monitors the SCL line and
synchronizes one bit at a time during communication. If t
sr
(the time for SCL to go from low
to V
IH
) exceeds the time determined by the input clock of the I
2
C bus interface, the high
period of SCL is extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and
load capacitance of the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust
the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the
values given in table 25.6.
Table 25.6 Permissible SCL Rise Time (t
sr
) Values
Time Indication [ns]
IICX
t
cyc
Indication
I
2
C Bus
Specification
(Max.)
= 5 MHz
= 8 MHz
= 10 MHz
Normal
mode
1000
937
750
0
7.5t
cyc
High-speed
mode
300
Normal
mode
1000
1
17.5t
cyc
High-speed
mode
300
(6) The I
2
C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000
ns and 300 ns. The I
2
C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by t
Scyc
and
t
cyc
, as shown in table 25.5. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I
2
C bus interface
specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 25.7 shows output
timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of
rise and fall times.
t
BUFO
fails to meet the I
2
C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either
(a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1
s) between issuance
of a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input
timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I
2
C bus.
t
SCLLO
in high-speed mode and t
STASO
in standard mode fail to satisfy the I
2
C bus interface
specifications for worst-case calculations of t
Sr
/t
Sf
. Possible solutions that should be
investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and
capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting
devices whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to
the I
2
C bus.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 569 of 1037
Table 25.7 I
2
C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of t
Sr
/t
Sf
)
Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns]
Item
t
cyc
Indication
t
Sr
/t
Sf
Influence
(Max.)
I
2
C Bus
Specification
(Min.)
= 5 MHz
= 8 MHz
= 10 MHz
Normal mode
-
1000
4000
4000
t
SCLHO
0.5t
SCLO
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
600
950
Normal mode
-
250
4700
4750
t
SCLLO
0.5t
SCLO
(-t
Sf
)
High-speed
mode
-
250
1300
1000
*
1
Normal mode
-
1000
4700
3800
*
1
3875
*
1
3900
*
1
t
BUFO
0.5t
SCLO
-1t
cyc
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
1300
750
*
1
825
*
1
850
*
1
Normal mode
-
250
4000
4550
4625
4650
t
STAHO
0.5t
SCLO
-1t
cyc
(-t
Sf
)
High-speed
mode
-
250
600
800
875
900
Normal mode
-
1000
4700
9000
9000
9000
t
STASO
1t
SCLO
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
600
2200
2200
2200
Normal mode
-
1000
4000
4400
4250
4200
t
STOSO
0.5t
SCLO
+2t
cyc
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
600
1350
1200
1150
Normal mode
-
1000
250
3100
3325
3400
t
SDASO
(master)
1t
SCLLO
*
3
-3t
cyc
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
100
400
625
700
Normal mode
-
1000
250
1300
2200
2500
t
SDASO
(slave)
1t
SCLL
*
3
-12t
cyc
*
2
(-t
Sr
)
High-speed
mode
-
300
100
-
1400
*
1
-
500
*
1
-
200
*
1
Normal mode 0
0
600
375
300
t
SDAHO
3t
cyc
High-speed
mode
0
0
Notes: 1. Does not meet the I
2
C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the
following is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust
the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce
the transfer rate; (d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output
timing.
The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and
bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the
maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I
2
C bus interface specifications
are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions.
2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (t
SCLL
- 6t
cyc
).
3. Calculated using the I
2
C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; high-
speed mode: 1300 ns min.).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 570 of 1037
(7) Precautions on reading ICDR at the end of master receive mode
When terminating the master receive mode, set TRS bit to 1, and select "write" for ICCR
BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0. This forces to move SDA from low to high level when SCL is at
high level, thereby generating the stop condition.
Now you can read received data from ICDR. If, however, any data is remaining on the
buffer, received data on ICDRS is not transferred to ICDR, thus you won't be able to read the
second byte data.
When it is required to read the second byte data, issue the stop condition from the master
receive state (TRS bit is 0).
Before reading data from ICDR register, make sure that BBSY bit on ICCR register is 0, stop
condition is generated and bus is made free.
If you try to read received data after the stop condition issue instruction (setting ICCR's
BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 to write) has been executed but before the actual stop condition is
generated, clock may not be appropriately signaled when the next master sending mode is
turned on. Thus, reasonable care is needed for determining when to read the received data.
After the master receive is complete, if you want to re-write I
2
C control bit (such as clearing
MST bit) for switching the sending/receiving mode or modifying settings, it must be done
during period (a) indicated in figure 25.18 (after making sure ICCR register BBSY bit is
cleared to 0).
SDA
SCL
Internal clock
BBSY bit
Bit 0
A
(a)
8
9
Stop condition
Start
condition
Start condition
is issued
Generation of the stop
condition is checked
(BBSY = 0 is set to read)
The stop condition
issue instruction
(BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0
set to write) is executed
Master receive mode
ICDR read
inhibit period
Figure 25.18 Precautions on Reading the Master Receive Data
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 571 of 1037
(8) Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission
Figure 25.19 shows the timing of start conditon issuance for retransmission, and the timing for
subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. After start
condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit data to ICDR.
IRIC=1 ?
SCL=Low ?
IRIC=1 ?
Write transmit data to ICDR
Write BBSY=1,
SCP=0 (ICSR)
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read SCL pin
Start condition
issuance?
Other processing
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
[1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer
[2] Determine wheter SCL is low
[3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission
[4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not
[5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/
)
Note: Program so that processing instruction [3] to [5] is
executed continuously.
[5] ICDR write (next transmit data)
[4] IRIC determination
[2] Determination of SCL=Low
[1] IRIC determination
SCL
SDA ACK
bit 7
9
IRIC
Start condition
(retransmission)
[3] Issue restart condition instruction
for retransmission
Figure 25.19 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for
Retransmission
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 572 of 1037
(9) Notes on I
2
C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance
If the rise time of the 9th SCL acknowledge exceeds the specification because the bus load
capacitance is large, or if there is a slave device of the type that drives SCL low to effect a
wait, issue the stop condition instruction after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as
shown below.
As waveform rise is late,
SCL is detected as low
9th clock
SCL
SDA
IRIC
High period secured
Stop condition
[2] Stop condition instruction issuance
[1] Determination of SCL=Low
VIH
Figure 25.20 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 573 of 1037
Section 26 A/D Converter
26.1
Overview
This LSI incorporates a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter that allows up to 12
analog input channels to be selected.
26.1.1
Features
A/D converter features are listed below.
10-bit resolution
12 input channels
Sample and hold function
Choice of software, hardware (internal signal) triggering or external triggering for A/D
conversion start.
A/D conversion end interrupt request generation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 574 of 1037
26.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 26.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
/2
/4
ADTRG
Interrupt request
AN0
Vref
AV
CC
AV
SS
Reference Voltage
Sample-and-
hold circuit
Chopper type
comparator
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN8
AN9
ANA
ANB
DFG
ADTRG
(HSW timing generator)
Internal data bus
[Legend]
ADR
AHR
: Software trigger A/D result register
: Hardware trigger A/D result register
ADTRG, DFG
ADTRG
: Hardware trigger
: A/D external trigger input
ADCR
ADCSR
: A/D control register
: A/D control/status register
ADTSR: A/D trigger selection register
-
+
10-bit
D/A
Hardware
control
circuit
Control circuit
Analog multiplexer
Successive
approximation register
A
D
R
A
H
R
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
A
D
T
S
R
Figure 26.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 575 of 1037
26.1.3
Pin Configuration
Table 26.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter.
Table 26.1 A/D Converter Pins
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AV
CC
Input
Analog block power supply
Analog ground pin
AV
SS
Input
Analog block ground and A/D conversion
reference voltage
Analog input pin 0
AN0
Input
Analog input channel 0
Analog input pin 1
AN1
Input
Analog input channel 1
Analog input pin 2
AN2
Input
Analog input channel 2
Analog input pin 3
AN3
Input
Analog input channel 3
Analog input pin 4
AN4
Input
Analog input channel 4
Analog input pin 5
AN5
Input
Analog input channel 5
Analog input pin 6
AN6
Input
Analog input channel 6
Analog input pin 7
AN7
Input
Analog input channel 7
Analog input pin 8
AN8
Input
Analog input channel 8
Analog input pin 9
AN9
Input
Analog input channel 9
Analog input pin A
ANA
Input
Analog input channel A
Analog input pin B
ANB
Input
Analog input channel B
A/D external trigger input pin
$'75*
Input
External trigger input for starting A/D
conversion
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 576 of 1037
26.1.4
Register Configuration
Table 26.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter.
Table 26.2 A/D Converter Registers
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
2
Software trigger A/D
result register H
ADRH
R
Byte
H'00
H'D130
Software trigger A/D
result register L
ADRL
R
Byte
H'00
H'D131
Hardware trigger A/D
result register H
AHRH
R
Byte
H'00
H'D132
Hardware trigger A/D
result register L
AHRL
R
Byte
H'00
H'D133
A/D control register
ADCR
R/W
Byte
H'40
H'D134
A/D control/status
register
ADCSR
R (W)
*
1
Byte
H'01
H'D135
A/D trigger selection
register
ADTSR
R/W
Byte
H'FC
H'D136
Port mode register 0
PMR0
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FFCD
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag. Bits 3 to 1 are read-only.
2. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 577 of 1037
26.2
Register Descriptions
26.2.1
Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR)
ADRH
ADRL
1
0
3
2
5
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
0
R
12
13
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The software-triggered A/D result register (ADR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D
conversion started by software.
The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of software-triggered A/D conversion,
the 10-bit result data is transferred to ADR and the data is retained until the next software-
triggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are stored in the upper bytes
(bits 15 to 8) of ADR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes (bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to
0 are always read as 0.
ADR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADR value during A/D conversion is not
fixed. The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred
via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 26.3, Interface to Bus Master.
ADR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop
mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
26.2.2
Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR)
AHRH
AHRL
1
0
3
2
5
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2 AHR1 AHR0
0
R
12
13
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D
conversion started by hardware (internal signal: ADTRG and DFG) or by external trigger input
(
$'75*).
The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion, the 10-bit result data is transferred to AHR and the data is retained until the next
hardware- or external- triggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are
stored in the upper bytes (bits 15 to 8) of AHR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes
(bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 578 of 1037
AHR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the AHR value during A/D conversion is not
fixed. The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred
via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 26.3, Interface to Bus Master.
AHR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop
mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 579 of 1037
26.2.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
--
--
1
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
HCH1
0
R/W
CK
HCH0
SCH3
SCH2
SCH1
SCH0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ADCR is a register that sets A/D conversion speed and selects analog input channel. When
executing ADCR setting, make sure that the SST and HST flags in ADCSR is set to 0.
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in module
stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bit 7: Clock Select (CK)
Sets A/D conversion speed.
Bit 7
CK
Description
0
Conversion frequency is 266 states
(Initial value)
1
Conversion frequency is 134 states
Note: A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST, or when HST is set to 1. The conversion
period is the time from when this start flag is set until the flag is cleared at the end of
conversion. Actual sample-and-hold takes place (repeatedly) during the conversion
frequency shown in figure 26.2.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 580 of 1037
Conversion frequency
Note: IRQ sampling;
Conversion period (134 or 266 states)
Interrupt request flag
IRQ sampling
(CPU)
States
Instruction execution
MOV.B
WRITE
Start flag
When conversion ends, the start flag is cleared and the interrupt request flag is
set. The CPU recognizes the interrupt in the last execution state of an instruction,
and executes interrupt exception handling after completing the instruction.
Figure 26.2 Internal Operation of A/D Converter
Bit 6: Reserved
This bit cannot be modified and always reads 1. Writes are disabled.
Bits 5 and 4: Hardware Channel Select (HCH1, HCH0)
These bits select the analog input channel that is converted by hardware triggering or triggering
by an external input. Only channels AN8 to ANB are available for hardware- or external-
triggered conversion.
Bit 5
Bit 4
HCH1
HCH0
Analog Input Channel
0
AN8
(Initial value)
0
1
AN9
0
ANA
1
1
ANB
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 581 of 1037
Bits 3 to 0: Software Channel Select (SCH3 to SCH0)
These bits select the analog input channel that is converted by software triggering.
When channels AN0 to AN7 are used, appropriate pin settings must be made in port mode
register 0 (PMR0). For pin settings, see section 26.2.6, Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0).
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SCH3
SCH2
SCH1
SCH0
Analog Input Channel
0
AN0
(Initial value)
0
1
AN1
0
AN2
0
1
1
AN3
0
AN4
0
1
AN5
0
AN6
0
1
1
1
AN7
0
AN8
0
1
AN9
0
ANA
0
1
1
ANB
1
1
*
*
No channel selected for software-triggered conversion
Notes: 1. If conversion is started by software when SCH3 to SCH0 are set to 11
**
, the
conversion result is undetermined. Hardware- or external-triggered conversion,
however, will be performed on the channel selected by HCH1 and HCH0.
2.
*
: Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 582 of 1037
26.2.4
A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
0
--
--
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
7
R/(W)
*
R
R/W
ADIE
0
R/(W)
*
SEND
SST
HST
BUSY
SCNL
HEND
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag.
The A/D status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit register that can be used to start or stop A/D
conversion, or check the status of the A/D converter.
A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST flag. A/D conversion can also start by setting
HST flag to 1 by hardware- or external-triggering.
For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator in hardware triggering, see section 28.4, HSW
Timing Generator.
When conversion ends, the converted data is stored in the software-triggered A/D result register
(ADR) or hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR), and the SST or HST bit is cleared to 0.
If software-triggering and hardware- or external-triggering are generated at the same time,
priority is given to hardware- or external-triggering.
ADCSR is an 8-bit register which is initialized to H'01 by a reset, and in module stop mode,
standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bit 7: Software A/D End Flag (SEND)
Indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
SEND
Description
0
[Clearing Conditions]
(Initial value)
0 is written after reading 1
1
[Setting Conditions]
Software-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Bit 6: Hardware A/D End Flag (HEND)
Indicates that hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has ended.
Bit 6
HEND
Description
0
[Clearing Conditions]
(Initial value)
0 is written after reading
1
[Setting Conditions]
Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 583 of 1037
Bit 5: A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE)
Selects enable or disable of interrupt (ADI) generation upon A/D conversion end.
Bit 5
ADIE
Description
0
Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is disabled
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is enabled
Bit 4: Software A/D Start Flag (SST)
Starts software-triggered A/D conversion and indicates or controls the end of conversion. This
bit remains 1 during software-triggered A/D conversion.
When 0 is written in this bit, software-triggered A/D conversion operation can forcibly be
aborted.
Bit 4
SST
Description
Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion has ended or been stopped
(Initial value)
0
Write: Software-triggered A/D conversion is aborted
Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion is in progress
1
Write: Starts software-triggered A/D conversion
Bit 3: Hardware A/D Status Flag (HST)
Indicates the status of hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion. When 0 is written in this
bit, A/D conversion is aborted regardless of whether it was hardware-triggered or external-
triggered.
Bit 3
HST
Description
Read: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is not in progress(Initial
value)
0
Write: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is aborted.
1
Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is in progress.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 584 of 1037
Bit 2: Busy Flag (BUSY)
During hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, if software attempts to start A/D
conversion by writing to the SST bit, the SST bit is not modified and instead the BUSY flag is
set to 1.
This flag is cleared when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is read.
Bit 2
BUSY
Description
0
No contention for A/D conversion
(Initial value)
1
Indicates an attempt to execute software-triggered A/D conversion while hardware-
or external-triggered A/D conversion was in progress
Bit 1: Software-Triggered Conversion Cancel Flag (SCNL)
Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion was canceled by the start of hardware-triggered
A/D conversion.
This flag is cleared when A/D conversion is started by software.
Bit 1
SCNL
Description
0
No contention for A/D conversion
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion was canceled by the start of
hardware-triggered A/D conversion
Bit 0: Reserved
This bit cannot be modified and always reads 1. Writes are disabled.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 585 of 1037
26.2.5
Trigger Select Register (ADTSR)
0
1
2
3
0
4
R/W
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TRGS1
0
R/W
TRGS0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The trigger select register (ADTSR) selects hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion start
factor.
ADTSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'FC by a reset, and in module
stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bits 7 to 2: Reserved
These bits are reserved and are always read as 1. Writes are disabled.
Bits 1 and 0: Trigger Select
These bits select hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion start factor. Set these bits
when A/D conversion is not in progress.
Bit 1
Bit 0
TRGS1
TRGS0
Description
0
Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is disabled
(Initial value)
0
1
Hardware-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion is selected
0
Hardware-triggered (DFG) A/D conversion is selected
1
1
External-triggered (
$'75*
) A/D conversion is selected
26.2.6
Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR04
PMR03
PMR02
PMR01
PMR00
0
R/W
PMR07
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR06
PMR05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. Switching is
specified for each bit.
PMR0 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7 to 0: P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 pin switching (PMR07 to PMR00)
These bits set the P0n/ANn pin as the input pin for P0n or as the ANn pin for A/D conversion
analog input channel.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 586 of 1037
Bit n
PMR0n
Description
0
P0n/ANn functions as a general-purpose input port
(Initial value)
1
P0n/ANn functions as an analog input channel
(n = 7 to 0)
26.2.7
Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR consists of 8-bit readable/writable registers and performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTP2 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset
Bit 2: Module Stop (MSTP2)
Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode.
MSTPCRL
Bit 2
MSTP2
Description
0
A/D converter module stop mode is cleared
1
A/D converter module stop mode is set
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 587 of 1037
26.3
Interface to Bus Master
ADR and AHR are 16-bit registers, but the data bus to the bus master is only 8 bits wide.
Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte
is accessed via a temporary register (TEMP).
A data reading from ADR and AHR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the
upper byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP.
Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading ADR and AHR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to
read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 26.3 shows the data flow for ADR access. The data flow for AHR access is the same.
Bus master
(H'AA)
ADRH
(H'AA)
ADRL
(H'40)
Lower byte read
Bus master
(H'40)
ADRH
(H'AA)
ADRL
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
Module data bus
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus
interface
Upper byte read
Figure 26.3 ADR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 588 of 1037
26.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution.
26.4.1
Software-Triggered A/D Conversion
A/D conversion starts when software sets the software A/D start flag (SST bit) to 1. The SST bit
remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends.
Conversion can be software-triggered on any of the 12 channels provided by analog input pins
AN0 to ANB. Bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR select the analog input pin used for software-
triggered A/D conversion. Pins AN8 to ANB are also available for hardware- or external-
triggered conversion.
When conversion ends, SEND flag in ADCSR bit is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set
to 1, an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs.
If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D
conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the SST bit to 0 to halt A/D conversion.
If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or
external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has
priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in
ADCSR is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result
register (AHR) is read. If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered
conversion is in progress, the software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the
SST flag is cleared to 0, and SCNL flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The SCNL flag is cleared when
software writes 1 in the SST bit to start conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 589 of 1037
26.4.2
Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion
The system contains the hardware trigger function that allows to turn on A/D conversion at a
specified timing by use of the hardware trigger (internal signals: ADTRG and DFG) and the
incoming external trigger (
$'75*). This function can be used to measure an analog signal that
varies in synchronization with an external signal at a fixed timing.
To execute hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, select appropriate start factor in
TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits in ADTSR. When the selected triggering occurs, HST flag in ADCSR
is set to 1 and A/D conversion starts. The HST flag remains 1 during A/D conversion, and is
automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator
in hardware triggering, see section 28.4, HSW Timing Generator. Setting of the analog input
pins on four channels from AN8 to ANB can be modified with the hardware trigger or the
incoming external trigger. Setting is done from HCH1 and HCH0 bits on ADCR. Pins AN8 to
ANB are also available for software-triggered conversion.
When conversion ends, HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set to
1, an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs.
If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D
conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the HST flag to 0 to halt A/D conversion.
If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or
external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has
priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in
ADCSR is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result
register (AHR) is read.
If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered conversion is in progress, the
software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the SST flag is cleared to 0, and
SCNL flag in ADCSR is set to 1 (the SCNL flag is cleared when software writes 1 in the SST bit
to start conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends). The analog input channel
changes automatically from the channel that was undergoing software-triggered conversion
(selected by bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR) to the channel selected by bits HCH1 and HCH0 in
ADCR for hardware- or external-triggered conversion. After the hardware- or external-triggered
conversion ends, the channel reverts to the channel selected by the software-triggered conversion
channel select bits in ADCR.
Hardware- or external-triggered conversion has priority over software-triggered conversion, so
the A/D interrupt-handling routine should check the SCNL and BUSY flags when it processes
the converted data.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 590 of 1037
26.5
Interrupt Sources
When A/D conversion ends, SEND or HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The A/D conversion
end interrupt can be enabled or disabled by ADIE bit in ADCSR.
Figure 26.4 shows the block diagram of A/D conversion end interrupt.
A/D conversion end
interrupt (ADI)
To interrupt controller
A/D control/status register (ADCSR)
SEND
HEND
ADIE
Figure 26.4 Block Diagram of A/D Conversion End Interrupt
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 591 of 1037
Section 27 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
27.1
Overview
The address trap controller (ATC) is capable of generating interrupt by setting an address to
trap, when the address set appears during bus cycle.
27.1.1
Features
Address to trap can be set independently at three points.
27.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 27.1 shows a block diagram of the address trap controller.
TRCR
TAR0 to 2
Interrupt request
Modules bus
Internal bus
TRCR
TAR0
TAR1
TAR2
Trap condition comparator
Bus
interface
: Trap control register
: Trap address register 0 to 2
Figure 27.1 Block Diagram of ATC
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 592 of 1037
27.1.3
Register Configuration
Table 27.1 Register List
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Initial Value
Address
*
Address trap control register
ATCR
R/W
H'F8
H'FFB9
Trap address register 0
TAR0
R/W
H'F00000
H'FFB0 to H'FFB2
Trap address register 1
TAR1
R/W
H'F00000
H'FFB3 to H'FFB5
Trap address register 2
TAR2
R/W
H'F00000
H'FFB6 to H'FFB8
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
27.2
Register Descriptions
27.2.1
Address Trap Control Register (ATCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
TRC2
TRC1
TRC0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bits 7 to 3: Reserved
When read, 1 is read at all times. Writes are disabled.
Bit 2: Trap Control 2 (TRC2)
Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 2.
Bit 2
TRC2
Description
0
Address trap function 2 disabled
(Initial value)
1
Address trap function 2 enabled
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 593 of 1037
Bit 1: Trap Control 1 (TRC1)
Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 1.
Bit 1
TRC1
Description
0
Address trap function 1 disabled
(Initial value)
1
Address trap function 1 enabled
Bit 0: Trap Control 0 (TRC0)
Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 0.
Bit 0
TRC0
Description
0
Address trap function 0 disabled
(Initial value)
1
Address trap function 0 enabled
27.2.2
Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
R/W
A18
A17
A16
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A23
A22
A21
0
0
R/W
R/W
A20
A19
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
R/W
A10
A9
A8
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A15
A14
A13
0
0
R/W
R/W
A12
A11
0
--
--
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
A2
A1
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A7
A6
A5
0
0
R/W
R/W
A4
A3
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TAR is composed of three 8-bit readable/writable registers (TARnA, B, and C)(n = 2 to 0)
The TAR sets the address to trap. The function of the TAR2 to TAR0 is the same.
The TAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 594 of 1037
TARA bits 7 to 0: Addresses 23 to 16 (A23 to A16)
TARB bits 7 to 0: Addresses 15 to 8 (A15 to A8)
TARC bits 7 to 0: Addresses 7 to 1 (A7 to A1)
If the value installed in this register and internal address buses A23 to A1 match as a result of
comparison, an interruption occurs.
For the address to trap, set to the address where the first byte of an instruction exists. In the case
of other addresses, it may not be considered that the condition has been satisfied.
Bit 0 of this register is fixed at 0. The address to trap becomes an even address.
The range where comparison is made is H'000000 to H'FFFFFE.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 595 of 1037
27.3
Precautions in Usage
Address trap interrupt arises 2 states after prefetching the trap address. Trap interrupt may occur
after the trap instruction has been executed, depending on a combination of instructions
immediately preceding the setting up of the address trap.
If the instruction to trap immediately follows the branch instruction or the conditional branch
instruction, operation may differ, depending on whether the condition was satisfied or not, or the
address to be stacked may be located at the branch. Figures 27.2 to 27.22 show specific
operations.
For information as to where the next instruction prefetch occurs during the execution cycle of
the instruction, see appendix A.5 of this manual or section 2.7 Bus State during Execution of
Instruction of the H8S/2600, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual. (R:W NEXT is the next
instruction prefetch.)
27.3.1
Basic Operations
After terminating the execution of the instruction being executed in the second state from the
trap address prefetch, the address trap interrupt exception handling is started.
(1) Figure 27.2 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address
is that of 3 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in
the state before the last 2 states. The address to be stacked is 0260.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
MOV
execution
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
Data
read
Start of exception
handling
Immediately
preceding
Instruction
Address
025E MOV.B @ER3+,R2L
0260 NOP
(ER3 = H'0000)
0262 NOP
0264 NOP
025E
0260
0000
0262
*
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.2 Basic Operations (1)
Note:
In the figure above, the NOP instruction is used as the typical example of instruction
with execution cycle of 1 state. Other instructions with the execution cycle of 1 state
also apply (Ex. MOV.B, Rs, Rd).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 596 of 1037
(2) Figure 27.3 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address
is that of 2 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in
the second state from the last. The address to be stacked is 0268.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
MOV
execution
NOP
execution
Start of exception
handling
Immediately
preceding
instruction
Address
0266 MOV.B R2L, @0000
0268 NOP
026A NOP
026C NOP
*
0266
026A
0268 0000
026C
Data
read
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.3 Basic Operations (2)
(3) Figure 27.4 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address
is that of 1 state or 2 states or more and the prefetch occurs in the last state. The address to
be stacked is 025C.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Start of
exception
handling
Immediately
preceding
instruction
Address
0256 NOP
0258 NOP
025A NOP
025C NOP
025E NOP
*
0256
025C
0258 025A
025E
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.4 Basic Operations (3)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 597 of 1037
27.3.2
Enable
The address trap function becomes valid after executing one instruction following the setting of
the enable bit of the address trap control register (TRCR) to 1.
029C BSET #0, @TRCR
*
029E MOV.W R0, R1
02A0 MOV.B R1L, R3H
02A2 NOP
02A4 CMP.W R0, R1
02A6 NOP
*
Trap setting address
After executing the MOV instruction,
the address trap interrupt does not
arise, and the next instruction is
executed.
Figure 27.5 Enable
27.3.3
Bcc Instruction
(1) When the condition is satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is satisfied
by the Bcc instruction and then branched, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after
executing the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02A8.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
BEQ
execu-
tion
CMP
execu-
tion
029C
02A8
029E 02A6
02AA
029C BEQ NEXT:8
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
02A6 CMP.W R0, R1
02A8 NOP
(NEXT = H'02A6)
*
Start of
exception
handling
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.6 When the Condition is Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-bit Displacement)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 598 of 1037
(2) When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not
satisfied by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address
trap interrupt after executing the trap address instruction and prefetching the next instruction.
The address to be stacked is 02A2.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
029E
02A2
02A0 02A8
02A4
029E BEQ NEXT:8
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
02A6 NOP
02A8 CMP.W R0, R1
02AA NOP
(NEXT = H'02A8)
*
BEQ
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Start of
exception
handling
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
NEXT:
Figure 27.7 When the Condition is Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-bit Displacement)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 599 of 1037
(3) When condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (16-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not
satisfied by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address
trap interrupt after executing the trap address instruction (if the trap address instruction is
that of 2 states or more. If the instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions).
The address to be stacked is 02C0.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception handling
02B8
02C0
02BC 02BE
02C2
02BA
02B8 BEQ NEXT:16
02BC NOP
02BE NOP
02C0 NOP
02C2 NOP
02C4 NOP
(NEXT = H'02C4)
*
BEQ
execution
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Data
fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NEXT:
Figure 27.8 When the Condition is Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (16-bit Displacement)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 600 of 1037
(4) When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (Trap address at branch)
When the trap address is at the branch of the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied
by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made into the address trap
interrupt after executing the next instruction (if the next instruction is that of 2 states or
more. If the next instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions). The address
to be stacked is 0262.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
025C
0262
0266
025E
0260
0264
025C BEQ NEXT:8
025E NOP
0260 NOP
0262 NOP
0264 NOP
0266 CMP.W R0, R1
0268 NOP
(NEXT = H'0266)
BEQ
execution
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
*
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
NEXT:
Figure 27.9 When the Condition is Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction
(Trap Address at Branch)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 601 of 1037
27.3.4
BSR Instruction
(1) BSR Instruction (8-bit displacement)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the BSR instruction and the addressing mode
is an 8-bit displacement, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C2.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
BSR execution
Stack
saving
0294
SP-4
02C2
0296
SP-2
02C4
0294 BSR @ER0
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02C2 MOV.W R4, @OUT
02C4 NOP
: :
(@ER0 = H'02C2)
*
Start of
exception handling
BSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.10 BSR Instruction (8-bit Displacement)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 602 of 1037
27.3.5
JSR Instruction
(1) JSR Instruction (Register indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode
is a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C8.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JSRexecution
Stack
saving
Start of
exception
handling
029A
SP-4
02C8
029C
SP-2
02CA
029A JSR @ER0
029C NOP
029E NOP
02C8 MOV.W R4, @OUT
02CE NOP
: :
(@ER0 = H'02C8)
*
JSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.11 JSR Instruction (Register indirect)
(2) JSR Instruction (Memory indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode
is memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02EA.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JSR execution
Stack
saving
Start of
exception
handling
0294
SP-2 SP-4 02EA
006C
0296
006E
02EC
0294 JSR @@H'6C:8
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02EA NOP
02EC NOP
: :
006C H'02EA
: :
*
Data
fetch
JSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.12 JSR Instruction (Memory Indirect)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 603 of 1037
27.3.6
JMP Instruction
(1) JMP Instruction (Register indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode
is a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02AA.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JMP
execution
MOV.L
execution
Data
fetch
Start of
exception
handling
029A
02A8 02AA
02A4
029C
02A6
02AC
029A JMP @ER0
029C NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 MOV.L #DATA, ER1
02AA NOP
(@ER0 = H'02A4)
*
JMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.13 JMP Instruction (Register Indirect)
(2) JMP Instruction (Memory indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode
is memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02E4.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JMP execution
Start of
exception
handling
0294
006C 02E4
006C
0296
006E
02E6
0294 JMP @@H'6C:8
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02E4 NOP
02E6 NOP
: :
006C H'02E4
: :
*
Data
fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
JMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.14 JMP Instruction (Memory Indirect)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 604 of 1037
27.3.7
RTS Instruction
When the trap address is the next instruction to the RTS instruction, transition is made to the
address trap interrupt after reading the CCR and PC from the stack and prefetching the
instruction at the return location. The address to be stacked is 0298.
Address bus
Break interrupt
request signal
RTS execution
Start of
exception
handling
02AC
SP
0298
SP
02AE
SP+2
029A
Stack
storing
0296 BSR SUB
0298 NOP
029A NOP
02AC RTS
02AE NOP
*
: :
Internal
opera-
tion
RTS
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.15 RTS Instruction
27.3.8
SLEEP Instruction
(1) SLEEP Instruction 1
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle
immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 2 states or more and prefetch does
not occur in the last state, the SLEEP instruction is not executed and transition is made to the
address trap interrupt without going into SLEEP mode. The address to be stacked is 0274.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
0272
FFF9
0274
SP-4
SP-2
0276
0272 MOV.B R2L, @FFF8
0274 SLEEP
0276 NOP
0278 NOP
: :
*
Data
write
MOV
execution
SLEEP
cancel
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.16 SLEEP Instruction (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 605 of 1037
(2) SLEEP Instruction 2
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle
immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state 2 states or more and prefetch
occurs in the last state, this puts in the SLEEP mode after execution of the SLEEP
instruction, and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by the address trap interrupt and transition is
made to the exception handling. The address to be stacked is 0264.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
0260 0262
SP-2 SP-4
0264
0260 NOP
0262 SLEEP
0264 NOP
0266 NOP
: :
*
NOP
execution
SLEEP
execution
SLEEP
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.17 SLEEP Instruction (2)
(3) SLEEP Instruction 3
When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the
SLEEP mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction, and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by
the address trap interrupt and transition is made to the exception handling. The address to be
stacked is 0282.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception h
andling
0280
SP-2 SP-4
0282
027E NOP
0280 SLEEP
0282 NOP
0284 NOP
: :
*
SLEEP
execution
SLEEP mode
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
*
Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Figure 27.18 SLEEP Instruction (3)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 606 of 1037
(4) SLEEP Instruction 4 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction immediately preceding
the SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state or 2 states or more and prefetch occurs in the last
state, this puts in the standby (watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After
that, if the standby (watch) mode is cancelled by the NMI interrupt, transition is made to
NMI interrupt following the CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector
reading. However, if the address trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI
interrupt processing, transition is made to the address trap exception handling. The address
to be stacked is the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Address trap
interruption
0262 0264
0266
SP-2
SP-2
0262 NOP
0264 SLEEP
0266 NOP
*
Trap setting address
*
SLEEP
execution
NMI
interrupt
Standby
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Figure 27.19 SLEEP Instruction (4) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 607 of 1037
(5) SLEEP Instruction 5 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the
standby (watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After that, if the standby
(watch) mode is cancelled by the NMI interruption, transition is made to the NMI interrupt
following the CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector reading.
However, if the address trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI interrupt
processing, transition is made to the address trap exception handling. The address to be
stacked is the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing.
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Address trap
interrupt
0280 0282
0284
SP-2
SP-2
0280 NOP
0282 SLEEP
0284 NOP
*
Trap setting address
*
SLEEP
execution
NMI
interruption
Standby
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Figure 27.20 SLEEP Instruction (5) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
27.3.9
Competing Interrupt
(1) General Interrupt (Interrupt other than NMI)
When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the general interrupt
request, the interruption appears to take place in the ATC at the timing earlier than usual,
because higher priority is assigned to the ATC interrupt processing (Simultaneous interrupt
with the general interrupt has no effect on processing). The address to be stacked is 029E.
For comparison, the case where the trap address is set at 02A0 if no general interrupt request
was made is shown in (2). The address to be stacked is 02A4.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 608 of 1037
Address bus
General Interrupt
request signal
Interrupt
request signal
MOV execution
Data
write
Data
write
Start of general
interrupt processing
Range of start of ATC
interrupt processing
(1)
029C NOP
0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port
029A NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
0296
Port
029E
SP-2 SP-4 Vector Vector
0298
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
MOV execution
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
029A
029C
02A0
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Data
read
Data
read
Start of ATC interrupt
processing
Set one of these to the
trap address
(2)
029C NOP
0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port
029A NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP Trap address
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
0296
Port
029E
0298
02A0 02A2 02A4
SP-2
029A
029C
02A6
(A)
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Address
to be
stacked
Figure 27.21 Competing Interrupt (General Interrupt)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 609 of 1037
(2) In case of NMI
When the NMI interruption request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the ATC
interrupt request, the interrupt appears to take place in NMI at the timing earlier than usual,
because higher priority is assigned to the NMI interrupt processing. The ATC interrupt
processing starts after fetching the instruction at the starting address of the NMI interrupt
processing. The address to be stacked is 02E0 for the NMI and 340 for the ATC.
When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (2) (B) against the NMI interrupt
request, the ATC interrupt processing starts after fetching the instruction at the starting
address of the NMI interrupt processing. The address to be stacked is 02E6 for the NMI and
0340 for the ATC.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 610 of 1037
Address bus
NMI interrupt
request signal
ATC interrupt
request signal
Start of ATC inter-
rupt processing
(1)
02E0 NOP
02DC NOP
02DE NOP
02E2 NOP
02E4 NOP
02E6 NOP
02E8 NOP
02DC
SP-4
0340
SP-6
SP-8
Vector
Vector
Vector
Vector
02DE
NMI vector
read
02E0
0342
SP-2
02E2
(2) Set one of these to
the trap address
(1) Set to the trap address
*
NMI interrupt
processing
Start of ATC interrupt processing
Address bus
NMI interrupt
request signal
ATC interrupt
request signal
Start of ATC
Interrupt processing
(2)
02DC
02E2
02E4
SP-4
SP-2
0340
Vector
Vector
Vector
02DE
02E0
0342
02E6
02E8
(B)
(A)
NMI interrupt
processing
: :
0340 The starting address of NMI
interrupt
: :
NOP execu-
tion
NOP execu-
tion
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Figure 27.22 Competing Interrupt (In Case of NMI)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 611 of 1037
Section 28 Servo Circuits
28.1
Overview
28.1.1
Functions
Servo circuits for a video cassette recorder are included on-chip.
The functions of the servo circuits can be divided into four groups, as listed in table 28.1.
Table 28.1 Servo Circuit Functions
Group
Function
Description
CTL I/O amplifier
Gain variable input amplifier
Output amplifier with rewrite mode
CFGDuty compensation
input
Duty accuracy: 50
2%
(Zero cross type comparator)
DFG, DPG
separation/overlap input
Overlap input available: Three-level input
method, DFG noise mask function
Reference signal
generators
V compensation, field detection, external signal
sync, V sync when in REC mode, REF30 signal
output to outside
HSW timing generator
Head-switching signals, FIFO 20 stages
Compatible with DFG counter soft-reset
Four-head high-speed
switching circuit for
special playback
Chroma-rotary/head-amplifier switching output
12-bit PWM
Improved speed of carrier frequency
Frequency division
circuit
With CFG mask, no CFG for phase or CTL
mask
(1) Input and output
circuits
Sync detection circuit
Noise count, field discrimination, Hsync
compensation, Hsync detection noise mask
Drum speed error
detector
Lock detector function, pause at the counter
overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function
Drum phase error
detector
Latch signal selectable, R/W error latch register
Capstan speed error
detector
Lock detector function, pause at the counter
overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function
Capstan phase error
detector
R/W error latch register
(2) Error detectors
X-value adjustment and
tracking adjustment
circuit
(Separate setting available)
(3) Phase and gain
compensation
Digital filter computation
circuit
Computations performed automatically by
hardware
Output gain variable:
2 to
64 (exponents of 2)
(Partial write in Z
-1
(high-order 8 bits) available)
Additional V signal
circuit
Valid when in special playback
(4) Other circuits
CTL circuit
Duty discrimination circuit, CTL head R/W
control, compatible with wide aspect
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 612 of 1037
28.1.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.1 shows a block diagram of the servo circuits.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 613 of 1037
4-head
special
playback
controller
- +
SV1(P82)
EXCAP(P81)
( )
SV2(P83)
( )
EXCTL(PS4)
)
+
+
+
+
+
- +
+ -
-
CTL
Head
CTL Amp
CTL
Head
CFG
CA P
PWM
DRM
PWM
DFG
DPG(PS3)
VIDEOFF
AUDIOFF
Vpulse
H.Amp SW(PS1)
C.ROTARY(PS0)
COMP(PS2)
Csync
EXTTRG/(P80)
OSCH
REC:ON
ADTRIG
(HSW)
Ep
PWM
Es
Es
Ep
REC
REC
PB.ASM
CTLFB
PB.CTL
PB.
ASM
(NTSC)
DVCTL
Gain control
by register
setting
REF30,REF30X,CREF,
CTLMONI,DVCFG,
DFG,DPG,DFG,etc
Internal signal
monitor
controller
(PAL)
REF30X
REC-CTL
DutyI/O
(Duty deter-
minator)
(Assemble
recording)
DVCFG
DVCFG2
Gain up.
XE:ON
VD
PR0 to 7/
(P60 to 67)
Sync
detector
REC-CTL
generator
VISS
circuit
Noise
Det.
A/D
converter
Timer X1
Timer L
Timer R
AN pins
PWM
X-value
adjustment
Gain up.
PR0 to 7/
(P60 to 67)
PPG0 to 7/
(P70 to 77)
PPG0 to 7/
(P70 to 77)
REF30P(PB:30Hz,REC:1/2VD)
CREF
Res
System
clock
Additional
V pulse
generator
Head-switch
timing
generator
Drum system
reference
signal
Capstan
system
reference
signal
Phase
error
detector
Phase
error
detector
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Frequency
divider
Frequency
divider
Speed
error
detector
Speed
error
detector
Figure 28.1 Block Diagram of Servo Circuits
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 614 of 1037
28.2
Servo Port
28.2.1
Overview
This LSI is equipped with seventeen pins dedicated to servo module and twenty-five dual-
purpose pins used also for general-purpose port. It has also built-in input amplifier to amplify
CTL signals, CTL output amplifier, CTL Schmitt comparator, and CFG zero cross type
comparator. The CTL input amplifier allows gain adjustment by software. DFG and DPG
signals, which are the signals to control the drum, allow selection between separate or overlap
input.
SV1 and SV2 pins allow to output to monitor the inside signals of the servo section. The signals
to be output can be selected out of eight kinds of signals. See section 28.2.5 (4), Servo Monitor
Control Register (SVMCR).
28.2.2
Block Diagram
(1) DFG and DPG input circuits
The DFG and DPG input pins have on-chip Schmitt circuits. Figure 28.2 shows the input
circuits of DFG and DPG.
DPG SW
DFG
DPG
DFG
DPG
DPG SW
RES+LPM
Figure 28.2 Input Circuits of DFG and DPG
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 615 of 1037
(2) CFG Input Circuit
The CFG input pin has built-in an amplifier and a zero cross type comparator. Figure 28.3
shows the input circuit of CFG.
+
-
+
-
+
-
CFGCOMP
CFGCOMP
P250
REF
M250
S
R
F/F O
stp
VREF
VREF
CFG
BIAS
CFG
RES+ModuleSTOP
Figure 28.3 CFG Input Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 616 of 1037
(3) CTL Input Circuit
The CTL input pin has built-in an amplifier. Figure 28.4 shows the input circuit of CTL.
-
+
+
-
CTLFB
CTLSMT(i)
CTLFB
CTLREF
CTLBias
CTLGR0
CTLGR3 to 1
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
PB-CTL(+)
Note: Be sure to set a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i)
Note
PB-CTL(-)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
- +
CTLAmp(o)
CTL(+)
CTL(
-
)
Figure 28.4 CTL Input Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 617 of 1037
28.2.3
Pin Configuration
Table 28.2 shows the pin configuration of the servo section. P6n, P7n, P80 to P38, and PS1 to
PS4 are general-purpose ports. As for P6, P7, and P8, see section 10, I/O Port.
Table 28.2 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Servo V
cc
pin
SV
CC
Input
Power source pin for servo section
Servo V
ss
pin
SV
SS
Input
Power source pin for servo section
Audio head switching pin
Audio FF
Output
Audio head switching signal output
Video head switching pin
Video FF
Output
Video head switching signal output
Capstan mix pin
CAPPWM
Output
12-bit PWM square wave output
Drum mix pin
DRMPWM
Output
12-bit PWM square wave output
Additional V pulse pin
Vpulse
Output
Additional V signal output
Color rotary signal output pin
C.Rotary/PS0
Output, I/O
Control signal output port for processing
color signals/general-purpose port
Head amplifier switching pin
H.Amp. SW/
PS1
Output, I/O
Pre-amplifier output selection signal
output/general-purpose port
Compare signal input pin
COMP/PS2
Input, I/O
Pre-amplifier output result signal
input/general-purpose port
CTL (+) I/O pin
CTL (+)
I/O
CTL signal input/output
CTL (
-
) I/O pin
CTL (-)
I/O
CTL signal input/output
CTL Bias input pin
CTLBias
Input
CTL primary amplifier bias supply
CTL Amp (O) output pin
CTLAMP (O)
Output
CTL amplifier output
CTL SMT (i) input pin
CTLSMT (I)
Input
CTL Schmitt amplifier input
CTL FB input pin
CTLFB
Input
CTL amplifier high-range characteristics
control
CTL REF output pin
CTLREF
Output
CTL amplifier reference voltage output
Capstan FG amplifier input pin
CFG
Input
CFG signal amplifier input
Drum FG input pin
DFG
Input
DFG signal input
Drum PG input pin
DPG/PS3
Input, I/O
DPG signal input/general-purpose port
External CTL signal input pin
EXCTL/PS4
Input, I/O
External CTL signal input/general-purpose
port
Complex sync signal input pin
Csync
Input
Complex sync signal input
External reference signal input
pin
P80/EXTTRG
I/O, input
General-purpose port/external reference
signal input
External capstan signal input pin
P81/EXCAP
I/O, input
General-purpose port/external capstan signal
input
Servo monitor signal output pin 1
P82/SV1
I/O, output
General-purpose port/servo monitor signal
output
Servo monitor signal output pin 2
P83/SV2
I/O, output
General-purpose port/servo monitor signal
output
PPG output pin
P7n/PPGn
I/O, output
General-purpose port/PPG output
RTP output pin
P6n/RPn
I/O, output
General-purpose port/RTP output
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 618 of 1037
28.2.4
Register Configuration
Table 28.3 shows the register configuration of the servo port section.
Table 28.3 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Servo port mode register
SPMR
R/W
Byte
H'40
H'FD0A0
Servo control register
SPCR
W
Byte
H'E0
H'FD0A1
Servo data register
SPDR
R/W
Byte
H'E0
H'FD0A2
Servo monitor control register
SVMCR
R/W
Byte
H'C0
H'FD0A3
CTL gain control register
CTLGR
R/W
Byte
H'C0
H'FD0A4
28.2.5
Register Descriptions
(1) Servo Port Mode Register (SPMR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
--
--
7
EXCTLON DPGSW
COMP
H.Amp.SW
C.Rot
0
R/W
CTLSTOP
R/W
R/W
CFGCOMP
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
A register to switch the servo port/general-purpose port, and the CFG input system.
SPMR is an 8-bit read/write register. Bit 6 is reserved; writing in it is invalid. If read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'40 by a reset or stand-by.
Bit 7: CTLSTOP Bit (CTLSTOP)
Controls whether the CTL circuits are operated or stopped.
Bit 7
CTLSTOP
Description
0
CTL circuits operate
(Initial value)
1
CTL circuits stop operation
Bit 6: Reserved
This bit is reserved. It cannot be written or read. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is
read out.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 619 of 1037
Bit 5: CFG Input System Switching Bit (CFGCOMP)
Selects whether the CFG input signal system is set to the zero cross type comparator system or
digital signal input system.
Bit 5
CFGCOMP
Description
0
CFG signal input system is set to the zero cross type comparator system
(Initial value)
1
CFG signal input system is set to the digital signal input system
Bit 4: EXCTL Pin Switching Bit (EXCTLON)
Selects whether the EXCTL/PS4 pin is used as the EXCTL input pin or PS4 (general-purpose
I/O pin).
Bit 4
EXCTLON
Description
0
EXCTL/PS4 pin functions as EXCTL input pin
(Initial value)
1
EXCTL/PS4 pin functions as PS4 I/O
Bit 3: DPG Pin Switching Bit (DPGSW)
Selects the drum control system input signals (DFG, DPG) as separate or overlapped inputs.
Bit 3
DPGSW
Description
0
Drum control system inputs are separate inputs
(Initial value)
(DPG/PS3 pin functions as DPG input pin)
1
Drum control system inputs are overlapped inputs
(DPG/PS3 pin functions as PS3 I/O pin)
Bit 2: COMP Pin Switching Pin (COMP)
Selects whether the COMP/PS2 pin is used as the COMP input pin or PS2 (general-purpose I/O
pin).
Bit 2
COMP
Description
0
COMP/PS2 pin functions as COMP input pin
(Initial value)
1
COMP/PS2 pin functions as PS2 I/O pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 620 of 1037
Bit 1: H.Amp SW Pin Switching Bit (H.Amp.SW)
Selects whether the H.Amp SW/PS1 pin is used as the H.Amp SW output pin or PS1 (general-
purpose I/O pin).
Bit 1
H.Amp.SW
Description
0
H.Amp SW/PS1 pin functions as H.Amp SW output pin
(Initial value)
1
H.Amp SW/PS1 pin functions as PS1 I/O pin
Bit 0: C.Rotary Pin Switching Bit (C.Rot)
Selects whether the C.Rotary/PS0 pin is used as the C.Rotary output pin or PS0 (general-purpose
I/O pin).
Bit 0
C.Rot
Description
0
C.Rotary/PS0 pin functions as C.Rotary output pin
(Initial value)
1
C.Rotary/PS0 pin functions as PS0 I/O pin
(2) Servo Control Register (SPCR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPCR4
SPCR3
SPCR2
SPCR1
SPCR0
W
W
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Controls input and output of each pin (PS4 to PS0) for each bit when the servo port/general-
purpose port dual-purpose pin is used as the general-purpose port. If SPCR is set to 1, the
corresponding PS4 to PS0 pins function as output pins; if cleared to 0, they function as input
pins. Settings of SPCR and SPDR are valid if the corresponding pins are set to general-purpose
I/O by SPMR.
SPCR is an 8-bit write-only register. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. Writes are disabled.
SPCR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset or stand-by.
Bit n
SPCRn
Description
0
PSn pin functions as input
(Initial value)
1
PSn pin functions as output
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 621 of 1037
(3) Servo Data Register (SPDR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPDR4
SPDR3
SPDR2
SPDR1
SPDR0
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Stores the data of each pin (PS4 to PS0) when the servo port/general-purpose dual-purpose pin is
used as general-purpose port. If the port is accessed for read when SPCR is 1 (output), the
SPDRn value is read directly. Accordingly, this register is not affected by the state of the pin. If
the port is accessed for read when SPCR is 0 (input), the state of the pin is read out.
SPDR is an 8-bit read/write register. Bits 7-5 are reserved. No write in it is valid. If read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
SPCR is initialized to H'E0 by reset or stand-by.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 622 of 1037
(4) Servo Monitor Control Register (SVMCR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
SVMCR5
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Selects the monitor signal output to the SV1 and SV2 pins when the P82/SV1 pin is used as the
SV1 monitor output pin or when the P83/SV2 pin is used as the SV2 monitor output pin.
SVMCR is an 8-bit read/write register. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. Writes are disabled. If read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or stand-by.
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
SVMCR5
SVMCR4
SVMCR3
Description
0
Outputs REF30 signal to SV2 output pin
(Initial value)
0
1
Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV2 output pin
0
Outputs CREF signal to SV2 output pin
0
1
1
Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV2 output pin
0
Outputs DVCFG signal to SV2 output pin
0
1
Outputs CFG signal to SV2 output pin
0
Outputs DFG signal to SV2 output pin
1
1
1
Outputs DPG signal to SV2 output pin
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SVMCR2
SVMCR1
SVMCR0
Description
0
Outputs REF30 signal to SV1 output pin
(Initial value)
0
1
Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV1 output pin
0
Outputs CREF signal to SV1 output pin
0
1
1
Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV1 output pin
0
Outputs DVCFG signal to SV1 output pin
0
1
Outputs CFG signal to SV1 output pin
0
Outputs DFG signal to SV1 output pin
1
1
1
Outputs DPG signal to SV1 output pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 623 of 1037
(5) CTL Gain Control Register (CTLGR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
CTLFB
CTLGR3
CTLGR2
CTLGR1
CTLGR0
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
CTLE/
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Sets the CTLFB switch in the CTL amplifier circuit to on/off and CTL amplifier gain.
CTLGR is an 8-bit read/write register. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. No write in it is valid. If read
is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or stand-by.
Bit 7 to 6: Reserved
Reserved bits; writes are disabled. If read was attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 5: CTL Selection Bit (CTLE/
$
$)
Controls whether the amplifier output or EXCTL is used as the CTLP signal supplied to the CTL
circuit.
Bit 5
CTLE/
Description
0
AMP output
(Initial value)
1
EXCTL
Bit 4: SW Bit of the Feedback Section of CTL Amplifier (CTLFB)
Turning on/off the SW of the feedback section allows adjustment of gain.
See figure 28.4, CTL Input Circuit.
Bit 4
CTLFB
Description
0
Turns off CTLFB SW
(Initial value)
1
Turns on CTLFB SW
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 624 of 1037
Bits 3 to 0: CTL Amplifier Gain Setting Bits (CTLGR3 to 0)
Set the output gain of the CTL amplifier.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CTLGR3
CTLGR2
CTLGR1
CTLGR0
CTL Output Gain
0
34.0 dB
(Initial value)
0
1
36.5 dB
0
39.0 dB
0
1
1
41.5 dB
0
44.0 dB
0
1
46.5 dB
0
49.0 dB
0
1
1
1
51.5 dB
0
54.0 dB
0
1
56.5 dB
0
59.0 dB
0
1
1
61.5 dB
0
64.0 dB
*
0
1
66.5 dB
*
0
69.0 dB
*
1
1
1
1
71.5 dB
*
Note:
*
With a setting of 64.0 dB or more, the CTLAMP is in a very sensitive status. When
configuring the set board, be concerned about countermeasure against noise around
the control head signal input port. Also, thoroughly set the filter between the CTLAMP
and CTLSMT.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 625 of 1037
28.2.6
DFG/DPG Input Signals
DFG and DPG signals allow either separate or overlapped input. If the latter was selected
(DPGSW = 1), take care in the input levels of DFG and DPG. Figure 28.5 shows DFG/DPG
input signals.
DPG
DPG Schmitt level
3.45/3.55
V
IL
/V
IH
DFG Schmitt level
1.85/1.95
V
IL
/V
IH
DFG
(1) DPG/DFG separate input (DPGSW=0)
DPG Schmitt level
DFG/DPG
(2) DPG/DFG overlapped input (DPGSW=1)
DFG Schmitt level
Figure 28.5 DFG/DPG Input Signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 626 of 1037
28.3
Reference Signal Generators
28.3.1
Overview
The reference signal generators consist of REF30 signal generator and CREF signal generator,
and they create the reference signals (REF30 and CREF signals) used in phase comparison, etc.
The REF30 signal is used to control the phase of the drum and capstan. The CREF signal is
used if the reference signal to control the phase of the capstan cannot be shared with the REF30
signal in REC mode. Each signal generator consists of a 16-bit counter which has the servo
clock
s/2 (or
s/4) as its clock source, a reference period register and a comparator.
The value set in the reference period register should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal
period.
28.3.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.6 shows the block diagram of the REF30 signal generator. Figure 28.7 shows that of
the CREF signal generator.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 627 of 1037
s = fosc/2
s/2
s/4
Dummy read
External
frequency
signal
(EXTTRG)
Field
detection
signal
WW
W
W
WW
PB
REC
PB
,
ASM
REC/PB
V noise detection signal
REF30
REF30P
Video FF
VD
Match
Mask
Clear
W
R/W
W
Internal bus
R/W
Internal bus
Toggle
RCS
REF30 counter register (16 bit)
OD/EV
VST
FDS
VEG
Edge
detec-
tion
Edge
detec-
tion
VNA
R/W
*
TBC
CVS
REX
Reference period buffer 1 (16 bit)
Reference period register 1 (16 bit)
Comparator (16 bit)
Counter (16 bit)
Note:
*
The TBC bit is available only in the H8S/2194C Series.
Figure 28.6 REF30 Signal Generator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 628 of 1037
s/2
s/4
W
W
CREF
DVCFG2
PB(ASM)
REC
Match
Clear
Counter clear
Toggle
Edge
detection
CRD
W
RCS
Reference period register 2 (16 bit)
Reference period buffer 2 (16 bit)
Comparator (16 bit)
Counter (16 bit)
Internal bus
S
R
Q
Dummy read
s = fosc/2
Figure 28.7 Block Diagram of CREF Signal Generator
28.3.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.4 shows the register configuration of the reference signal generators.
Table 28.4 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Reference period mode
register
RFM
W
Byte
H'00
H'FD096
Reference period register 1
RFD
W
Word
H'FFFF
H'FD090
Reference period register 2
CRF
W
Word
H'FFFF
H'FD092
REF30 counter register
RFC
R/W
Word
H'0000
H'FD094
Reference period mode
register 2
RFM2
R/W
Byte
H'FE
H'FD097
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 629 of 1037
28.3.4
Register Descriptions
(1) Reference Period Mode Register (RFM)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
REX
CRD
OD/EV
VST
VEG
0
W
RCS
W
W
W
VNA
CVS
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RFM is an 8-bit write-only register which determines the operational state of the reference signal
generators. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
RFM is accessible by byte access only. If accessed by a word, its operation is not assured.
Bit 7: Clock Source Selection Bit (RCS)
Selects the clock source supplied to the counter. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 7
RCS
Description
0
s/2
(Initial value)
1
s/4
Bit 6: Mode Selection Bit (VNA)
Selects whether the transition to free-run operation when the REF30 signals are being generated
in sync with the VD signals in REC mode is controlled automatically by the V noise detection
signal, which has been detected by the sync signal detection circuit, or is controlled manually by
software.
Bit 6
VNA
Description
0
Manual mode
(Initial value)
1
Auto mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 630 of 1037
Bit 5: Manual Selection Bit (CVS)
Selects whether the REF30 signals are generated in sync with VD or operated free-run in manual
mode (VNA = 0). (No selection is reflected in PB mode, except in TBC mode.)
Bit 5
CVS
Description
0
Sync with VD
(Initial value)
1
Free-run operation
Bit 4: External Signals Sync Selection Bit (REX)
Selects whether the REF30 signals are generated in sync with VD or in free-run or in sync with
the external signals. (Valid in both PB and REC modes.)
Bit 4
REX
Description
0
VD signals or free-run
(Initial value)
1
Sync with external signals
Bit 3: DVCFG2 Sync Selection Bit (CRD)
Selects whether the reset timing in the CREF signals generation is immediately after switching
from PB (ASM) mode to REC mode or is in sync with the DVCFG2 signals immediately after
the switching.
Bit 3
CRD
Description
0
On switching modes
(Initial value)
1
In sync with DVCFG2 signals
Bit 2: ODD/EVEN Edge Switching Selection Bit (OD/EV)
Selects whether REF30P signals are generated by ODD of the field signals or EVEN when in
REC mode.
Bit 2
OD/EV
Description
0
Generated at the rising edge (EVEN) of the field signals
(Initial value)
1
Generated at the falling edge (ODD) of the field signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 631 of 1037
Bit 1: Video FF Counter Set (VST)
Selects whether the REF30 counter register value is set on or off by the Video FF signal when
the drum phase is in FIX on in PB mode.
Bit 1
VST
Description
0
Counter set off by Video FF signal
(Initial value)
1
Counter set on by Video FF signal
Bit 0: Video FF Edge Selection Bit (VEG)
Selects the edge at which the REF30 counter is set (VST = 1) by the Video FF signal.
Bit 0
VEG
Description
0
Set at the rising edge of Video FF signal
(Initial value)
1
Set at the falling edge of Video FF signal
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 632 of 1037
(2) Reference Period Register 1 (RFD)
15
1
REF15
W
14
1
REF14
W
13
1
REF13
W
12
1
REF12
W
11
1
REF11
W
10
1
REF10
W
9
1
REF9
W
8
1
REF8
W
7
1
REF7
W
6
1
REF6
W
5
1
REF5
W
4
1
REF4
W
3
1
REF3
W
2
1
REF2
W
1
1
REF1
W
0
1
REF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reference period register 1 (RFD) is a buffer register which generates the reference signals
for playback (REF30), VD compensation for recording and the reference signals for free-
running. It is a 16-bit write-only register accessible by a word only. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out.
The value set in RFD should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period. Care is required when
VD is unstable, such as when the field is weak (Synchronization with VD cannot be acquired if a
value less than 1/2 is set when in REC). When data is written in RFD, it is stored in the buffer
once, and then fetched into RFD by a match signal of the comparator. (The data which
generates the reference signal is updated from time to time by the match signal.) An enforced
write, such as initial setting, etc., should be done by a dummy read of RFD.
If a byte-write in RFD is attempted, no operation is assured. RFD is initialized to H'FFFF by a
reset, stand-by, or module stop.
Use bit 7 (ASM) and bit 6 (REC/PB) in the CTL mode register (CTLM) in the CTL circuit to
switch between record and playback modes. Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error
detection control register (CPGCR) to switch between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase
control.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 633 of 1037
(3) Reference Period Register 2 (CRF)
15
1
CRF15
W
14
1
CRF14
W
13
1
CRF13
W
12
1
CRF12
W
11
1
CRF11
W
10
1
CRF10
W
9
1
CRF9
W
8
1
CRF8
W
7
1
CRF7
W
6
1
CRF6
W
5
1
CRF5
W
4
1
CRF4
W
3
1
CRF3
W
2
1
CRF2
W
1
1
CRF1
W
0
1
CRF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reference period register 2 (CRF) is a 16-bit write-only buffer register which generates the
reference signals to control the capstan phase (CREF). CRF is accessibly by a word only. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. The value set in CRF should be 1/2 of the
desired reference signal period.
When data is written in CRF, it is stored in the buffer once, and then fetched into CRF by a
match signal of the comparator. (The data which generates the reference signal is updated from
time to time by the match signal.) An enforced write, such as initial setting, etc., should be done
by a dummy read of CRF.
If a byte-write in CRF is attempted, no operation is assured. CRF is initialized to H'FFFF by a
reset, stand-by, or module stop.
Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR) to switch
between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase control. (See section 28.9, Capstan Phase Error
Detector)
(4) REF30 Counter Register (RFC)
15
0
RFC15
14
0
RFC14
13
0
RFC13
12
0
RFC12
11
0
RFC11
10
0
RFC10
9
0
RFC9
8
0
RFC8
7
0
RFC7
6
0
RFC6
5
0
RFC5
4
0
RFC4
3
0
RFC3
2
0
RFC2
1
0
RFC1
0
0
RFC0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The REF30 counter register (RFC) is a register which determines the initial value of the free-run
counter when it generates REF30 signals when in playback. When data is written in RFC, its
value is written in the counter by a match signal of the comparator. If bit 1 (VST) in RFM is set
to 1, the counter is set by the Video FF signal when the drum phase is in FIX ON. The counter
setting by the Video FF signal should be done by setting RFM's bit 1 (VST) and bit 0 (VEG).
Don't set the RFC value at a value greater than 1/2 of the reference period register 1 (RFD).
RFC is a read/write register. If a read is attempted, the value of the counter is read out. If a
byte-access is attempted, no operation is assured. RFC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, stand-
by, or module stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 634 of 1037
(5) Reference Period Mode Register 2 (RFM2)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
(TBC)
--
--
--
--
--
--
(R/W)
*
FDS
1
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Writable only in the H8S/2194C Series.
RFM2 is an 8-bit read/write register which determines the operational state of the reference
signal generators. Bits 7 to 1 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out.
It is initialized to H'FE by a reset, stand-by or module stop. RFM2 is a byte access-only register;
if accessed by a word, no operation is assured.
Bits 7: TBC Selection Bit (TBC)
Selects whether the reference signals are generated by VD or in free-run in PB mode.
Bit 7
TBC
Description
0
Reference signals are generated by VD (This function is effective only in the
H8S/2194C series)
1
Reference signals are generated in free-run
(Initial value)
Bits 6 to 1: Reserved
No write is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 0: Field Selection Bit (FDS)
Determines whether selection between ODD or EVEN is made for the field signals when PB
mode was switched over to REC mode, or these signals are synchronized with VD signals within
phase error of 90
immediately after the switching over.
Bit 0
FDS
Description
0
Generated by the VD signal of ODD or EVEN selected
(Initial value)
1
Generated by the VD signal within mode transition phase error of 90
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 635 of 1037
28.3.5
Description of Operation
(1) Operation of REF30 Signal Generators
The REF30 signal generators generate the reference signals required to control the phase of
the drum and capstan.
To generate REF30 signals, set the half-period value to the reference period register 1 (RFD)
corresponding to the 50% duty cycle. When in playback, REF30 signals are generated by
operating REF30 signal generator in free-run. The generator has the external signal
synchronization function built-in, and if bit 4 (REX) of the reference period mode register
(RFM) is set to 1, it generates REF30 signals from external signals (EXTTRG).
In record mode, the reference signals are generated from the VD signal generated in the sync
signal detection circuit. Any VD drop-out caused by weak field intensity, etc., is
compensated by a set value of RFD. To cope with the VD noises, the generator performs
automatically the VD masking for a time period about 75% of the RFD setting after REF30
signal was changed due to VD. In record mode, the generation of the reference signals either
by VD or free-run operation can be controlled automatically or by software, using the V
noise detection signal detected in the sync signal detection circuit. Select which is used by
setting bit 6 (VNA) or 5 (CVS) of RFM.
The phase of the toggle output of the REF30 signal is cleared to L level when the signal
mode transits from PB to REC (ASM). Also the frame servo function can be set, allowing to
control the phase of REF30 signals with the field signal detected in the sync signal detection
circuit. Use bit 2 (OD/EV) of RFM for such control.
See section 28.13.5(2), CTL Mode Register (CTLM) as for switching over between PB,
ASM and REC.
(2) Operation of the Mask Circuit
The REF30 signal generators have a toggle mask circuit and counter mask (counter set signal
mask) circuit built-in. Each mask circuit masks irregular VD signals which may occur when
the VD signal is unstable because of weak field intensity, etc., in record mode.
The toggle mask and counter mask circuits mask the VD automatically for about 75% of
double the time period set in the reference period register 1 (RFD) after a VD signal was
detected (see figure 28.9). If a VD signal dropped out and V was compensated, the toggle
mask circuit begins masking. The counter mask circuit does not do so for about 25% of the
time period. If a VD signal was detected during such time period, it does masking for about
75% of the time period. If not detected, it does for the same time period after V was
compensated (see figures 28.10 and 28.11).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 636 of 1037
(3) Timing of the REF30 Signal Generation
Figures 28.8, 28.9, 28.10, 28.11 and 28.12 show the timing of the generation of REF30 and
REF30P signals.
Counter set
Counter set
Counter set
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
REF30P
Figure 28.8 REF30 Signals in Playback Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 637 of 1037
Sampling
Sampling
Sampling
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV=0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
T
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.9 Generation of Reference Signal in Record Mode (Normal Operation)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 638 of 1037
Sampling
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Drop-out of V
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV=0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
Sampling
T
Sampling
About 75%
About 75%
About 75%
About 75%
About
25%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.10 Generation of Reference Signal in Record Mode (V Dropped Out)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 639 of 1037
Sampling
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Dislocation of V
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV=0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
Sampling
T
Sampling
About 75%
About 75%
About 75%
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.11 Generation of Reference Signal in Record Mode (V Dislocated)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 640 of 1037
Cleared
Cleared
Reset
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
External sync
signal
REF30
REF30P
Figure 28.12 Generation of REF30 Signal by External Sync Signal
(4) CREF Signal Generator
The CREF signal generator generates a CREF signal which is the reference signal to control
the phase of the capstan.
To generate CREF signals, set the half-period value to the reference period register 2 (CRF).
If the set value matches the counter value, a toggle waveform is generated corresponding to
the 50% duty cycle, and a one-shot pulse signal is output at the rising edge of the waveform.
The counter of the CREF signal generator is initialized to H'0000 and the phase of the toggle
is cleared to L level at the mode transition of PB (ASM) to REC. The timing of clearing is
selectable between immediately after the transition from PB (ASM) to REC and the timing
of DVCFG2 after the transition. Use bit 3 (CRD) of the reference period mode register
(RFM) for the selection.
In the capstan phase error detection circuit, either the REF30 signal or CREF signal can be
selected for the reference signal. Use either of them according to the use of the system.
Use the CREF signal to control the phase of the capstan at a period which is different from
the period used to control the phase of the drum. As for the switching between REF30 and
CREF in the capstan phase control, see section 28.9.4(3) Capstan Phase Error Detection
Control Register (CPGCR).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 641 of 1037
(5) Timing Chart of the CREF Signal Generation
Figures 28.13, 28.14 and 28.15 show the generation of the CREF signal.
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Toggle signal
CREF
Figure 28.13 Generation of CREF Signal
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 642 of 1037
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Time period when CRF is set
REC
PB(ASM)
Toggle signal
REC/PB
CREF
Figure 28.14 CREF Signal when PB is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 0)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 643 of 1037
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Time period when
CRF is set
Toggle signal
REC/PB
CREF
DVCFG2
REC
PB(ASM)
Figure 28.15 CREF Signal when PB is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 644 of 1037
Figures 28.16 and 28.17 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC.
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
*
(OD/EV=0)
*
When in the field discrimination mode
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
Field signal
REC/PB
REF30P
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.16 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 645 of 1037
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV=0)
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
Field signal
REC/PB
REF30P
About
50%
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.17 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 646 of 1037
Figures 28.18, 28.19, 28.20 and 28.21 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC
(where FDS bit = 1).
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = "1"
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 28.18 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit is 1 (1)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 647 of 1037
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = "1"
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
25%
25%
25%
Figure 28.19 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit is 1 (when VD Signal is Not Detected) (2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 648 of 1037
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = "1"
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
Max. 25%
Figure 28.20 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit is 1 (3)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 649 of 1037
Cleared
Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = "1"
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)
PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
Max. 25%
Figure 28.21 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit is 1 (4)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 650 of 1037
28.4
HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator
28.4.1
Overview
The HSW timing generator consists of one 5-bit counter and one 16-bit counter, matching
circuit, and two 31-bit 10-stage FIFOs.
The 5-bit counter counts the DFG pulses following a DPG pulse. Each of them determines the
timing to reset the 16-bit timer for each field. The matching circuit compares the timing data in
the most significant 16 bits of FIFO with the 16-bit timer, and controls the output of pattern data
set in the least significant 15 bits of FIFO. The 16-bit timer is a timer clocked by a
s/4 clock
source, and can be used as a PPG (Programmable Pattern Generator) as well as a free-running
counter (FRC). If used as a free-running counter, it is cleared by overflow (FRCOVF) of the
Prescaler unit. Accordingly, two free-running counter operate in sync.
28.4.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.22 shows a block diagram of the HSW timing generator.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 651 of 1037
R
W
W
R/W
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
STRIG
IRRHSW2
ISEL2
AudioFF
VideoFF
HSW
NHSW
Mlevel
Vpulse
ADTRG
IRRHSW1
R
VD
PB
W
R/W
R/W
Cleared
Cleared
CLK
W
R
,
NCDFG
FRCOVF
DPG
CKSL
VFF/NFF
Internal bus
W
FPDRA
FPDRB
FTPRA
FTPRB
W
ISEL1
OFG
FIFO output pattern
register 1
FIFO output pattern
register 2
SOFG
LOP
R/W
R/W
R
R
WW
CLRA,B
OVWA,B
EMPA,B
FLA,B
R/W
R/W
HSM2
HSM1
HSLP
EDG
HSW loop stage
number setting
register
Internal bus
FGR20FF
FRT
CCLR
Edge
detector
Control
circuit
FIFO 1
(31 bits
10 stages)
15 bits
P77 to 70
(PPG output)
FIFO timing pattern
register 1
FIFO timing pattern
register 2
16 bits
FIFO2
(31 bits
10 stages)
15 bits
16 bits
FIFO output selector & output buffer
15 bits
16 bits
DFCRB
DFCRA
DFCRA
HSM2
HSM2
Capture
HSM2
DFCRA
DFCRA
DFG reference
register 1
Comparator
(5 bits)
Comparator
(5 bits)
DFG reference
register 2
DFCTR
Counter (5 bits)
Compare circuit (16 bits)
FTCTR (16 bits)
Timer counter (16 bits)
s/4
s/8
Figure 28.22 Composition of the HSW Timing Generator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 652 of 1037
28.4.3
Composition
The HSW timing generator is composed of the elements shown in table 28.5.
Table 28.5 Composition of the HSW Timing Generator
Element
Function
HSW mode register 1 (HSM1)
Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating
status
HSW mode register 2 (HSM2)
Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating
status
HSW loop stage number setting register
(HSLP)
Setting of number of loop stages in loop mode
FIFO output pattern register 1 (FPDRA)
Output pattern data register of FIFO1
FIFO output pattern register 2 (FPDRB)
Output pattern data register of FIFO2
FIFO timing pattern register 1 (FTPRA)
Output timing register of FIFO1
FIFO timing pattern register 2 (FTPRB)
Output timing register of FIFO2
DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA)
Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO1
DFG reference register 2 (DFCRB)
Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO2
FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR)
Capture register of timer counter
DFG reference count register (DFCTR)
DFG edge count
FIFO control circuit
Controls FIFO status
DFG count compare circuit (
2)
Detection of match between DFCR and DFG counters
16-bit timer counter
16-bit free-run timer counter
31-bit x 20 stage FIFO
First In First Out data buffer
31-bit FIFO data buffer
Data storing buffer for the first stage of FIFO
16-bit compare circuit
Detection of match between timer counter and FIFO
data buffer
FPDRA and FPDRB are intermediate buffers; an FTPRA and FTPRB write results in
simultaneous writing of all 31 bits to the FIFO. The FIFO has two 31-bit x 10-stage data
buffers, its operating status being controlled by HSM1 and HSM2. Data is stored in the 31-bit
data buffer. The values of FTPRA, FTPRB and the timer counter are compared, and if they
match, the 15-bit pattern data is output to each function. AudioFF, VideoFF and PPG (P70 to
P77) are pin outputs, ADTRG is the A/D converter hardware start signal, Vpulse and Mlevel
signals are the signals to generate the additional V pulses, and HSW and NHSW signals are the
same with VideoFF signals used for the phase control of the drum. In free-run mode (when FRT
bit of HSM2 = 1), the 16-bit timer counter is initialized when the prescaler unit overflows, or by
a signal indicating a match between DFCRA, DFCRB and the DFG counter in DFG reference
mode.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 653 of 1037
28.4.4
Register Configuration
Table 28.6 shows the register configuration of the HSW timing generator.
Table 28.6 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
HSW mode register 1
HSM1
R/W
Byte
H'30
H'FD060
HSW mode register 2
HSM2
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD061
HSW loop stage number setting
register
HSLP
R/W
Byte
Undetermined
H'FD062
FIFO output pattern register 1
FPDRA
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD064
FIFO timing pattern register 1
*
FTPRA
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD066
FIFO output pattern register 2
FPDRB
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD068
FIFO timing pattern register 2
FTPRB
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD06A
DFG reference register 1
*
DFCRA
W
Byte
Undetermined
H'FD06C
DFG reference register 2
DFCRB
W
Byte
Undetermined
H'FD06D
FIFO timer capture register
*
FTCTR
R
Word
H'0000
H'FD066
DFG reference count register
*
DFCTR
R
Byte
H'E0
H'FD06C
Note:
*
FTPRA and FTCTR, as well as DFCRA and DFCTR, are allocated to the same
addresses.
28.4.5
Register Descriptions
(1) HSW Mode Register 1 (HSM1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
1
R
1
R
5
6
0
7
EMPA
OVWB
OVWA
CLRB
CLRA
0
R
FLB
R/W
R/(W)
*
R
FLA
EMPB
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
HSM1 is a register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing
generator.
HSM1 is an 8-bit register. Bits 7 to 4 are read-only bits, and write is disabled. All the other bits
accept both read and write. It is initialized to H'30 by a reset or stand-by.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 654 of 1037
Bit 7: FIFO2 Full Flag (FLB)
When the FLB bit is 1, it indicates that the timing pattern data and the output pattern data of
FIFO2 are full. If a write is attempted in this state, the write operation becomes invalid, an
interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag (bit 3) is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until
space becomes available in the FIFO2, then write again.
Bit 7
FLB
Description
0
FIFO2 is not full, and can accept data input
(Initial value)
1
FIFO2 is full
Bit 6: FIFO1 Full Flag (FLA)
When the FLA bit is 1, it indicates that the timing pattern data and the output pattern data of
FIFO1 are full. If a write is attempted in this state, the write operation becomes invalid, an
interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag (bit 2) is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until
space becomes available in the FIFO1, then write again.
Bit 6
FLA
Description
0
FIFO1 is not full, and can accept data input
(Initial value)
1
FIFO1 is full
Bit 5: FIFO2 Empty Flag (EMPB)
Indicates that FIFO2 has no data, or that all the data has been output in single mode.
Bit 5
EMPB
Description
0
FIFO2 contains data
1
FIFO2 contains no data
(Initial value)
Bit 4: FIFO1 Empty Flag (EMPA)
Indicates that FIFO1 has no data, or that all the data has been output in single mode.
Bit 4
EMPA
Description
0
FIFO1 contains data
1
FIFO1 contains no data
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 655 of 1037
Bit 3: FIFO2 Overwrite Flag (OVWB)
If a write is attempted when the timing pattern data and the output pattern data of FIFO2 are full
(FLB bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag is
set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO2, then write
again.
Write 0 to clear the OVWB flag, because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 3
OVWB
Description
0
Normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that a write in FIFO2 was attempted when FIFO2 was full. Clear this flag
by 0 writing
Bit 2: FIFO1 Overwrite Flag (OVWA)
If a write is attempted when the timing pattern data and the output pattern data of FIFO1 are full
(FLA bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag is
set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO1, then write
again.
Write 0 to clear the OVWA flag, because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 2
OVWA
Description
0
Normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that a write in FIFO1 was attempted when FIFO1 was full. Clear this flag
by 0 writing
Bit 1: FIFO2 Pointer Clear (CLRB)
Clears the FIFO2 write position pointer. After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0.
Writing 0 in this bit has no effect.
Bit 1
CLRB
Description
0
Normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Clears the FIFO2 pointer
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 656 of 1037
Bit 0: FIFO1 Pointer Clear (CLRA)
Clears the FIFO1 write position pointer. After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0.
Writing 0 in this bit has no effect.
Bit 0
CLRA
Description
0
Normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Clears the FIFO1 pointer
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 657 of 1037
(2) HSW Mode Register 2 (HSM2)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
EDG
ISEL1
SOFG
OFG
VFF/NFF
0
R/W
FRT
W
R/W
R
FGR20FF
LOP
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HSM2 is a register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing
generator.
HSM2 is an 8-bit register. Bits 6 and 1 are read-only bits, and write is disabled. Bit 0 is a write-
only bit, and if a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. All the other bits accept
both read and write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset or stand-by.
Bit 7: Free-run Bit (FRT)
Selects whether timing is matched to the DPG counter and timer, or to free-running counter.
Bit 7
FRT
Description
0
5-bit DFG counter + 16-bit timer counter
(Initial value)
1
16-bit FRC
Bit 6: FRG2 Clear Stop Bit (FGR2OFF)
Nullifies the clearing of the counter by the DFG reference register 2. The FIFO group, including
both FIFO1 and FIFO2, is available.
Bit 6
FGR2OFF
Description
0
Validates the clearing of the 16-bit timer counter by DFG reference register 2
(Initial value)
1
Nullifies the clearing of the 16-bit timer counter by DFG reference register 2
Bit 5: Mode Selection Bit (LOP)
Selects the output mode of FIFO. If the loop mode is selected, LOB3 to LOB0 bits and LOA3 to
LOA0 bits become valid. If the LOP bit is rewritten, the pointer which counts the writing
position of FIFO is cleared. In this case, the ultimate output date is kept.
Bit 5
LOP
Description
0
Single mode
(Initial value)
1
Loop mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 658 of 1037
Bit 4: DFG Edge Selection Bit (EDG)
Selects the edge by which to count DFG.
Bit 4
EDG
Description
0
Counts by the rising edge of DFG
(Initial value)
1
Counts by the falling edge of DFG
Bit 3: Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL1)
Selects the factor which causes an interrupt. (IRRHSW1)
Bit 3
ISEL1
Description
0
Generates an interrupt request by the rising edge of the STRIG signal of FIFO
(Initial value)
1
Generates an interrupt request by the matching signal of FIFO
Bit 2: FIFO Output Group Selection Bit (SOFG)
Selects whether 20 stages of FIFO1 + FIFO2 or only 10 stages of FIFO1 are used.
If 20-stage output mode is used in single mode, data write in FIFO1 and FIFO2 is required.
Monitor the output FIFO group flag (OFG) and control it by software. Output all the data of
FIFO2 after all the data of FIFO1 was output. Repeat this step again. If 10-stage output mode is
used, the data of FIFO2 is not reflected.
Rewriting the SOFG bit 0
1
0 initializes the control signal of the FIFO output stage to the
FIFO1 side.
Bit 2
SOFG
Description
0
20-stage output of FIFO1 + FIFO2
(Initial value)
1
10-stage output of FIFO1 only
Bit 1: Output FIFO Group Flag (OFG)
Indicates the FIFO group which is outputting.
Bit 1
OFG
Description
0
Pattern is being output by FIFO1
(Initial value)
1
Pattern is being output by FIFO2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 659 of 1037
Bit 0: Output Switching Bit Between VideoFF and NarrowFF (VFF/NFF)
Switches the signal output to the VideoFF pin.
Bit 0
VFF/NFF
Description
0
VideoFF output
(Initial value)
1
NarrowFF output
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 660 of 1037
(3) HSW Loop Stage Number Setting Register (HSLP)
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
5
*
6
*
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
LOB1
R/W
LOB2
*
R/W
LOB3
LOB0
LOA3
LOA2
LOA1
LOA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
HSLP sets the number of the loop stages when the HSW timing generator is in loop mode. It is
valid if bit 5 (LOP) of HSM2 is 1. Bits 7 to 4 set the number of FIFO2 stages. Bits 3 to 0 set the
number of FIFO1 stages.
HSLP is an 8-bit read/write register. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module stop,
accordingly be sure to set the number of the stages when the loop mode is used.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 661 of 1037
Bits 7 to 4: FIFO2 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOB3 to LOB0)
Set the number of FIFO2's stages in loop mode. They are valid only if the loop mode is set
(LOP bit of HSM2 is 1).
HSM2
HSLP
Bit 5
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
LOP
LOB3
LOB2
LOB1
LOB0
Description
0
*
*
*
*
Single mode
(Initial value)
0
Only 0th stage of FIFO2 is output
0
1
0th and 1st stages of FIFO2 are output
0
0th to 2nd stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
1
0th to 3rd stages of FIFO2 are output
0
0th to 4th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
0th to 5th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
0th to 6th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
1
1
0th to 7th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
0th to 8th stages of FIFO2 are output
1
1
0
0
1
0th to 9th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Setting prohibited
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 662 of 1037
Bits 3 to 0: FIFO1 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOA3 to LOA0)
Set the number of FIFO1's stages in loop mode. They are valid only if the loop mode is set
(LOP bit of HSM2 is 1).
HSM2
HSLP
Bit 5
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
LOP
LOA3
LOA2
LOA1
LOA0
Description
0
*
*
*
*
Single mode
(Initial value)
0
Only 0th stage of FIFO1 is output
0
1
0th and 1st stages of FIFO1 are output
0
0th to 2nd stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
1
0th to 3rd stages of FIFO1 are output
0
0th to 4th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
0th to 5th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
0th to 6th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
1
1
0th to 7th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
0th to 8th stages of FIFO1 are output
1
1
0
0
1
0th to 9th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Setting prohibited
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 663 of 1037
(4) FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 (FPDRA)
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
13
14
*
15
--
--
NarrowFFA
VFFA
AFFA
VpulseA
MlevelA
1
W
W
W
ADTRGA
STRIGA
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
5
6
*
7
PPGA4
PPGA3
PPGA2
PPGA1
PPGA0
*
W
PPGA7
W
W
W
PPGA6
PPGA5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
FPDRA is a buffer register for the output pattern register of FIFO1. When the timing pattern is
written in FTPRA the output pattern data written in FPDRA is written at the same time to the
position pointed by the buffer pointer of FIFO1. Be sure to write the output pattern data in
FPDRA before writing it in FTPRA.
FPDRA is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, resulting operation is not assured. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module stop,
accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Bit 15: Reserved
It cannot be written in or read out.
Bit 14: A/D Trigger A Bit (ADTRGA)
A signal for starting the A/D converter hardware.
Bit 13: S-TRIGA Bit (STRIGA)
A signal for generating an interrupt by pattern data. When STRIGA is selected by ISEL, pattern
data changes from 0 to 1, and thus generates an interrupt.
Bit 12: NarrowFFA Bit (NarrowFFA)
Controls the Narrow Video Head.
Bit 11: VideoFFA Bit (VFFA)
Controls the Video Head.
Bit 10: AudioFFA Bit (AFFA)
Controls the Audio Head.
Bit 9: VpulseA Bit (VpulseA)
Used for generating an additional V signal. See section 28.12, Additional V Signal Generator,
for more information.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 664 of 1037
Bit 8: MlevelA Bit (MlevelA)
Used for generating an additional V signal. See section 28.12, Additional V Signal Generator,
for more information.
Bits 7 to 0: PPG Output Signal A Bits (PPGA7 to PPGA0)
Used for timing control output of port 7 (PPG).
(5) FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB)
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
13
14
*
15
--
--
NarrowFFB
VFFB
AFFB
VpulseB
MlevelB
1
W
W
W
ADTRGB
STRIGB
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
5
6
*
7
PPGB4
PPGB3
PPGB2
PPGB1
PPGB0
*
W
PPGB7
W
W
W
PPGB6
PPGB5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
FPDRB is a buffer register for the output pattern register of FIFO2. When the timing pattern is
written in FTPRB the output pattern data written in FPDRB is written at the same time to the
position pointed by the buffer pointer of FIFO2. Be sure to write the output pattern data in
FPDRB before writing it in FTPRB.
FPDRB is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, resulting operation is not assured. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module stop,
accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Bit 15: Reserved
It cannot be written in or read out.
Bit 14: A/D Trigger B Bit (ADTRGB)
A signal for starting the A/D converter hardware.
Bit 13: S-TRIGB Bit (STRIGB)
A signal for generating an interrupt by pattern data. When STRIGB is selected by ISEL, pattern
data changes from 0 to 1, and thus generates an interrupt.
Bit 12: NarrowFFB Bit (NarrowFFB)
Controls the Narrow Video Head.
Bit 11: VideoFFB Bit (VFFB)
Controls the Video Head.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 665 of 1037
Bit 10: AudioFFB Bit (AFFB)
Controls the Audio Head.
Bit 9: VpulseB Bit (VpulseB)
Used for generating an additional V signal. See section 28.12, Additional V Signal Generator,
for more information.
Bit 8: MlevelB Bit (MlevelB)
Used for generating an additional V signal. See section 28.12, Additional V Signal Generator,
for more information.
Bits 7 to 0: PPG Output Signal B Bits (PPGB7 to PPGB0)
Used for timing control output of port 7 (PPG).
(6) FIFO Timing Pattern Register 1 (FTPRA)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
FTPRA15 FTPRA14 FTPRA13 FTPRA12 FTPRA11 FTPRA10 FTPRA9 FTPRA8 FTPRA7 FTPRA6 FTPRA5 FTPRA4 FTPRA3 FTPRA2 FTPRA1 FTPRA0
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
FTPRA is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO1. The timing data written in
FTPRA is written at the same time to the position pointed by the buffer pointer of FIFO1
together with the buffer data of FPDRA.
FTPRA is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, resulting operation is not assured. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module
stop, accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Note:
Its address is shared with the FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR). Accordingly, the
value of FTCTR is read out if a read is attempted.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 666 of 1037
(7) FIFO Timing Pattern Register 2 (FTPRB)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
FTPRB15 FTPRB14 FTPRB13 FTPRB12 FTPRB11 FTPRB10 FTPRB9 FTPRB8 FTPRB7 FTPRB6 FTPRB5 FTPRB4 FTPRB3 FTPRB2 FTPRB1 FTPRB0
Note:
*
Undetermined
FTPRB is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO2. The timing data written in
FTPRB is written at the same time to the position pointed by the buffer pointer of FIFO2
together with the buffer data of FPDRB.
FTPRB is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, resulting operation is not assured. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module
stop, accordingly be sure to write data before use.
(8) DFG Reference Register 1 (DFCRA)
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
DFCRA4
DFCRA3
DFCRA2
DFCRA1
DFCRA0
0
W
ISEL2
W
W
W
CCLR
CKSL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
DFCRA is a register which determines the operation of the HSW timing generator as well as the
starting point of the timing of FIFO1.
DFCRA is an 8-bit write-only register. It is not initialized by a reset, stand-by or module stop,
accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Note:
Its address is shared with the DFG reference counter register (DFCTR). Accordingly,
the value of DFCTR is read out in the low-order five bits if a read is attempted.
Bit 7: Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL2)
Selects the factor which causes an interrupt. (IRRHSW2)
Bit 7
ISEL2
Description
0
Generates an interrupt request by the clear signal of the 16-bit timer counter
(Initial value)
1
Generates an interrupt request by the VD signal in PB mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 667 of 1037
Bit 6: DFG Counter Clear Bit (CCLR)
Enforces clearing of the 5-bit counter which counts DFG by software. Writing 1 returns 0
immediately. Writing 0 causes no effect on operation.
Bit 6
CCLR
Description
0
Normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Clears the 5-bit DFG counter
Bit 5: 16-bit Timer Counter Clock Source Selection Bit (CKSL)
Selects the clock source of the 16-bit timer counter.
Bit 5
CKSL
Description
0
s/4
(Initial value)
1
s/8
Bits 4 to 0: FIFO1 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRA4 to DFCRA0)
Determine the starting point of the timing of FIFO1. The initial value is undetermined. Be sure
to set a value after a reset or stand-by. It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0.
(9) DFG Reference Register 2 (DFCRB)
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
DFCRB4
DFCRB3
DFCRB2
DFCRB1
DFCRB0
W
W
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Undetermined
DFCRB is a register which determines the starting point of the timing of FIFO2.
DFCRB is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. No write is valid. If a read is attempted, 1 is read out. It is not
initialized by a reset or stand-by, accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Bits 4 to 0: FIFO2 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRB4 to DFCRB0)
Determine the starting of the FIFO2 output. The initial values are undetermined, accordingly be
sure to write values in the bits after a reset or stand-by.
It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 668 of 1037
(10) FIFO Timer Capture Register (FTCTR)
0
R
13
0
R
14
0
R
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
FTCTR15 FTCTR14 FTCTR13 FTCTR12 FTCTR11 FTCTR10 FTCTR9 FTCTR8 FTCTR7 FTCTR6 FTCTR5 FTCTR4 FTCTR3 FTCTR2 FTCTR1 FTCTR0
FTCTR is a register to display the count of the 16-bit timer counter.
FTCTR is a 16-bit read-only register. It stores the counter value if a VD signal was detected in
PB mode. Only a word access is accepted. If a byte access is attempted, resulting operation is
not assured. It is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or stand-by.
Note:
Its address is shared with the FIFO timing pattern register 1 (FTPRA). Accordingly, if a
write is attempted, the value is written in FTPRA.
(11) DFG Reference Count Register (DFCTR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
DFCTR4
DFCTR3
DFCTR2
DFCTR1
DFCTR0
R
R
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFCTR is a register to count the DFG pulses.
DFCTR is an 8-bit read-only register. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. If a read is attempted, 1 is read
out. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset or stand-by.
Note:
Its address is shared with the DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA). Accordingly, if a
write is attempted, the value is written in DFCRA.
Bits 4 to 0: DFG Pulse Count Bits (DFCTR4 to DFCTR0)
Count the number of pulses of DFG.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 669 of 1037
28.4.6
Description of Operation
(a) 5-bit DFG counter
The 5-bit DFG counter takes counts by the edges of DFG selected by the EDG bit of HSW
mode register 2. The 5-bit DFG counter is cleared by the DPG's rise or when 1 was written
in the CCLR bit of DFG reference register 1.
(b) 16-bit Timer Counter
DFG reference mode or free-run mode can be selected for the 16-bit timer counter.
DFG Reference Mode
DFG reference mode is based on the DFG signal. When the DFG reference registers 1
and 2 and the 5-bit DFG counter value match, the 16-bit timer counter is initialized, and
that point becomes the starting of the FIFO output.
In DFG reference mode, the FGR2OFF bit of the HSW mode register 2 can be used to
select between using only the DFG reference register 1 to set the starting of the FIFO
output or using both DFG reference registers 1 and 2 to set the starting of the FIFO1 and
FIFO2 outputs, respectively. When using only the DFG reference register 1 to set the
starting, continuous values should be set as the timing patterns for FIFO1 and FIFO2.
Free-run Mode
Free-run mode is to operate together with the prescaler unit. An overflow of the 18-bit
free-running counter in the prescaler unit initializes the 16-bit timer counter, and that
point becomes the starting of the FIFO output.
(c) Matching Circuit
The matching circuit compares the timing pattern value of FIFO with the 16-bit timer
counter value, and if they match, it generates a trigger signal to output the pattern data for
the FIFO's next stage.
(d) FIFO
FIFO generates the head-switching signal used in the VCR and the pattern data necessary for
servo control. Data is set in FIFO by the FIFO timing pattern registers 1 and 2 and the FIFO
output pattern registers 1 and 2.
FIFO has two modes, i.e. single mode and loop mode. In either mode, output of 20 stages of
FIFO1 + FIFO2 or output of only 10 stages of FIFO1 can be selected.
Single Mode
In single mode, the output pattern data is output each time the timing data matches. The
data, once output, is lost, and the internal pointer is decremented by 1. When the last
data was output, it stops operation until data is written again. When it is used in the 20-
stage output mode, writing in FIFO1 and FIFO2 has to be controlled by software.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 670 of 1037
Loop Mode
In loop mode, the output pattern cycles repeatedly from stage 0 through the final stage
selected in the HSW loop number setting register. As in single mode, the output pattern
data is output each time the timing data matches. In loop mode, the FIFO data is
retained.
When loop mode is active, data can be rewritten for each FIFO group.
After confirming with the OFG bit of the HSW mode register 2 which FIFO group is
outputting, clear the FIFO group which is not outputting and write data for the entire
FIFO group. Writing has to be completed before the rewritten FIFO group starts
operation.
Partial rewriting in the FIFO is not possible, because the write pointer is outside the loop
stages.
Figures 28.23 and 28.24 show examples of the timing waveform and its operation of the
HSW timing generator.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 671 of 1037
DPG
01
tA1
tA2
tB1
tA3
tA1
234567891
0
1
1
0
12
V.FF
A.FF
Clear A
Clear B
Example of setting: DFCRA=H'02, DFCRB=H'08, HSLP=H'21, DFG falling edge
DFG
Figure 28.23 Example of Timing Waveform of HSW (when DFG is 12 Shots)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 672 of 1037
Output pattern data
s/4
W
W
FTPRB
FIFO2
tB0
PB9
tB5
PB4
tB4
PB3
tB3
PB2
tB2
PB1
tB1
PB0
W
W
FPDRA
Output select buffer Output select buffer
Comparator
FTPRA
FIFO1
tA0
PA9
tA5
PA4
tA4
PA3
tA3
PA2
tA2
PA1
tA1
PA0
Internal bus
FPDRB
Timer counter
Figure 28.24 Example of Operation of the HSW Timing Generator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 673 of 1037
(1) Example of operation in single mode (20 stages of FIFO used)
(a) Set to single mode (LOP = 0)
(b) Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA.
(c) Write the output timing (t
A1
) to FTPRA. tA1 is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PA0.
(d) Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set.
(e) Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB.
(f) Write the output timing (t
B1
) to FTPRB. t
B1
is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PB0.
(g) Repeat these steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set.
From (c), the pattern data of PA0 is output.
If t
A1
matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA1 is output.
If t
A2
matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA2 is output.
.
.
.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 674 of 1037
After this sequence is repeated and all the pattern data set in FIFO1 is output, the pattern data of
FIFO2 is output. After the pattern data is output, the pointer is decremented by 1. Care is
required, however, because matching of t
A0
is not detected until data is written in FIFO2.
Matching of t
B0
also is not detected until data is written in FIFO1 again.
(2) Example of operation in loop mode
(a) Set the number of loop stages in the HSLP register (e.g. HSLP = H'44)
(b) Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA.
(c) Write the output timing (t
A1
) to FTPRA. t
A1
is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PA0.
(d) Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set.
(e) Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB.
(f) Write the output timing (t
B1
) to FTPRB. t
B1
is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PB0.
(g) Repeat the steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set.
From (c), the pattern data PA0 is output.
If t
A1
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA1 is output.
If t
A2
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA2 is output.
.
.
.
If t
A4
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA4 is output.
If t
A5
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB0 is output.
If t
B1
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB1 is output.
.
.
.
If t
B4
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB4 is output.
If t
B5
matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA0 is output.
.
.
.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 675 of 1037
28.4.7
Interrupt
The HSW timing generator generates an interrupt under the following conditions.
(1) IRRHSW1 occurred when pattern data was written (OVWA, OVWB = 1) and FIFO was full
(FULL).
(2) IRRHSW1 occurred when matching was detected and the STRIG bit of FIFO was 1.
(3) IRRHSW1 occurred when the values of the 16-bit timer counter and 16-bit timing pattern
register matched.
(4) IRRHSW2 occurred when the 16-bit timer counter was cleared.
(5) IRRHSW2 occurred when a VD signal (capture signal of the timer capture register) was
received in PB mode.
(2) and (3), as well as (4) and (5), are switched over by ISEL1 and ISEL2.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 676 of 1037
28.4.8
Cautions
(1) When both the 5-bit DFG counter and 16-bit timer counter are operating, the latter is not
cleared if input of DPG and DFG signals is stopped. This leads to free-running of the 16-bit
timer counter, and periodical detection of matching by the 16-bit timer counter. In such a
case, the period of the output from the HSW timing generator is independent from DPG or
DFG.
(2) Specify the mode setting bit (LOP) of the HSW mode register 2 (HSM2) immediately before
writing the FIFO data.
(3) Input the rising edge of DPG and DFG count edge at different timings. If the same timing
was input, counting up of DFG and clearing of the 5-bit DFG counter occurs simultaneously.
In this case, the latter will take precedence. This leads to the 5-bit DFG counter's lag by 1.
Figure 28.25 shows the input timing of DPG and DFG.
(4) If stop of the drum system is required when FIFO output is being used in the 20-stage output
mode, rewrite the SOFG bit of HSM2 register 0
1
0 by software, and initialize the
FIFO output stage to the FIFO1 side without fail. Also clear and rewrite the data of FIFO1
and FIFO2.
DPG
I T
P FG
I > (1 state)
T
P FG
DFG
Note: When the DFG counter takes count at the rising edges of DFG
Figure 28.25 Input Timing of DPG and DFG
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 677 of 1037
28.5
Four-head High-speed Switching Circuit for Special Playback
28.5.1
Overview
This four-head high-speed switching circuit generates a color rotary signal (C.Rotary) and head-
amplifier switching signal (H.Amp SW) for use in four-head special playback.
A pre-amplifier output comparison result signal is input from the COMP pin. The signal output
at the C.Rotary pin is a Chroma signal processing control signal. The signal output at the
H.Amp SW pin is a pre-amplifier output select signal. To reduce the width of noise bars, the
C.Rotary and H.Amp SW signals are synchronized to the horizontal sync signal (OSCH). OSCH
is made by adding supplemented H, which has been separated from the Csync signal in the sync
signal detector circuit. For more details of OSCH, see section 28.15, Sync Signal Detector.
If the C.Rotary, H.Amp SW or COMP pin does not require this circuit to configure a VCR
system, it can be used as an I/O port.
28.5.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.26 shows the block diagram of this circuit.
W
W
Synchronization
control
CHCR
W
CHCR
RTP0
H.Amp SW
C.Rotary
OSCH
(Synchronization)
COMP
Narrow.FF
Video.FF
W
CHCR
Internal bus
Internal bus
HAH
CRH
W
CHCR
SIG3 to 0
HSWPOL
V/N
Decoding circuit
Figure 28.26 Four-Head High-Speed Switching Circuit for Special Playback
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 678 of 1037
28.5.3
Pin Configuration
Table 28.7 summarizes the pin configuration of the high-speed switching circuit used in four-
head special playback. They can also be used as I/O ports when not in use. See section 28.2,
Servo Port.
Table 28.7 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Compare input pin
COMP
Input
Input of pre-amplifier output result signal
Color rotary signal output
pin
C.Rotary
Output
Output of chroma processing control
signal
Head-amplifier switching pin
H.Amp SW
Output
Output of pre-amplifier output select
signal
28.5.4
Register Description
(1) Register Configuration
Table 28.8 shows the register configuration of the high-speed switching circuit used in four-
head special playback.
Table 28.8 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Special playback control
register
CHCR
W
Byte
H'00
H'FD06E
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 679 of 1037
(2) Special Playback Control Register (CHCR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
HAH
SIG3
SIG2
SIG1
SIG0
0
W
V/N
W
W
W
HSWPOL
CRH
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The special playback control register (CHCR) is an 8-bit write-only register. It cannot be read.
If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset,
stand-by or module stop.
Bit 7: HSW Signal Selection Bit (V/N)
Selects the HSW signal to be used at special playback.
Bit 7
V/N
Description
0
Video FF signal output
(Initial value)
1
Narrow FF signal output
Bit 6: COMP Polarity Selection Bit (HSWPOL)
Selects the polarity of the COMP signal.
Bit 6
HSWPOL
Description
0
Positive
(Initial value)
1
Negative
Bit 5: C.Rotary Synchronization Control Bit (CRH)
Synchronizes the C.Rotary signal with the OSCH signal.
Bit 5
CRH
Description
0
Synchronous
(Initial value)
1
Asynchronous
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 680 of 1037
Bit 4: H.Amp SW Synchronization Control Bit (HAH)
Synchronizes the H.Amp SW signal with the OSCH signal.
Bit 4
HAH
Description
0
Synchronous
(Initial value)
1
Asynchronous
Bits 3 to 0: Signal Control Bits (SIG3 to SIG0)
These bits, combined with the state of the COMP input pin, control the outputs at the C.Rotary
and H.Amp SW pins.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Output Pins
SIG3
SIG2
SIG1
SIG0
C.Rotary
H.Amp SW
0
*
*
L
L
(Initial value)
0
HSW
L
0
1
+6:
H
0
L
HSW
0
1
1
1
H
+6:
0
HSW EX-OR
COMP
COMP
0
1
HSW EX-NOR
COMP
COMP
0
HSW E-OR RTP0
RTP0
1
1
1
*
HSW EX-NOR
RTP0
RTP0
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 681 of 1037
28.6
Drum Speed Error Detector
28.6.1
Overview
Drum speed error control operates so as to hold the drum at a constant revolution speed by
measuring the period of the DFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed deviation from a
preset value. The speed error data is processed and added to phase error data in a digital filter.
This filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed
and phase of the drum.
The DFG input signal is reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit, and sent to the
speed error detector as the DFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DFG signal, and
detects the deviation from a preset data value. The preset data is the value that would result
from measuring the DFG signal period with the clock signal if the drum motor was running at
the correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DFG
signal. The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on.
The digital filter processes and adds the speed error data to phase error data from the drum phase
control system, then sends the result to the pulse-width modulator as drum error data.
28.6.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.27 shows a block diagram of the drum speed error detector.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 682 of 1037
W
W
R
UDF
OVF
Rock 2 up
Clear
Latch
Preset
DFVCR
DFRLOR
DFVCR
DFPR
DFVCR
DFVCR
DFVCR
DFUCR
FGCR
DFER
DFRVCR
Error data
(16 bits)
To DFU
ADDFGN
NCDFG
DFRUDR
Internal bus
W
R/W
Internal bus
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
(R)/W
Rock 1 up
S
R
F/F
Q
S
R
F/F
DFRCS1,0
DF-R/UNR
Lock counter
(2 bits)
Q
S
R
F/F
Q
Lock range
detector
Lock range data 1 (16bit)
DPCNT
Error data
limitter
control circuit
DFEFON
DFESS
DRF
Edge
detector
,
Error data (16bit)
Counter (16bit)
DFOVF
IRRDRM2
IRRDRM1
To DROCKON
DFU
Preset data
(16 bits)
Lock range data 2
(16 bits)
DFCS1,0
s
s/2
s/4
s/8
Figure 28.27 Block Diagram Of The Drum Speed Error Detector
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 683 of 1037
28.6.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.9 shows the register configuration of the drum speed error detector.
Table 28.9 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Specified DFG speed
preset data register
DFPR
W
Word
H'0000
H'FD030
DFG speed error data
register
DFER
R/W
Word
H'0000
H'FD032
DFG lock UPPER data
register
DFRUDR
W
Word
H'7FFF
H'FD034
DFG lock LOWER data
register
DFRLDR
W
Word
H'8000
H'FD036
Drum speed error
detection control register
DFVCR
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD038
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 684 of 1037
28.6.4
Register Descriptions
(1) Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR)
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The specified DFG speed preset data is set in DFPR. When the data is written, a 16-bit preset
data is sent to the preset circuit. The preset data is referenced to H'8000*, and can be calculated
from the following equation.
s/n
Specified DFG speed preset data =H'8000
-
(
-
2)
DFG frequency
s:
Servo clock frequency (fosc/2) in Hz
DFG frequency: In Hz
The constant 2 is the presetting interval (see Figure 28.28).
s/n
Clock source of selected counter
DFPR is a 16-bit write-only register, and is accessible by word access only. Byte access gives
unassured results. Reads are disabled. DFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby
mode and module stop mode.
Note: *
The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the
error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the DFG speed error
data register (DFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 685 of 1037
(2) DFG Speed Error Data Register (DFER)
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
DFER is a register that stores 16-bit DFG speed error data. When the drum motor speed is
correct, the data latched in DFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the speed is too
fast, and positive data if the speed is too slow. The DFER value is sent to the digital filter either
automatically or by software.
DFER is a 16-bit readable/writable register. DFER is accessible by word access only. Byte
access gives unassured results. DFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode
and module stop mode.
Refer to the Note in 28.6.4 (1) Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR).
(3) DFG Lock UPPER Data Register (DFRUDR)
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFRUDR is a register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when drum speed lock is
detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when the limiter function is in use. Set a
signed data to DFRUDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit).
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock
counter which has been set by DFRCS 1 and 0 bits of the DFVCR register counts down. If the
set value of DFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the
computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also,
if the DFG speed error data is beyond the DFRUDR value while the limiter function is in use,
the DFRUDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter.
DFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 686 of 1037
(4) DFG Lock LOWER Data Register (DFRLDR)
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFRLDR is a register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when drum speed lock is
detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when the limiter function is in use. Set a
signed data to DFRLDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit).
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock
counter which has been set by the DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits of the DFVCR register counts
down. If the set value of DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 matches the number of times of occurrence of
locking, the computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled
automatically. Also, if the DFG speed error data is under the DFRLDR value when the limiter
function is in use, the DFRLDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital
filter.
DFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
(5) Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register (DFVCR)
0
0
1
0
(R)
*
2
/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*
1
5
6
0
7
DFRFON DF-R/UNR
DPCNT
DFRCS1
DFRCS0
0
R/W
DFCS1
(R)
*
2
/W
R
R/W
DFCS0
DFOVF
Notes:
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out.
DFVCR controls the operation of drum speed error detection.
DFVCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only
read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 687 of 1037
Bits 7 and 6: Clock Source Selection Bits (DFCS1, DFCS0)
DFCS1 and DFCS0 select the clock to be supplied to the counter. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 7
Bit 6
DFCS1
DFCS0
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
0
1
s/2
0
s/4
1
1
s/8
Bit 5: Counter Overflow Flag (DFOVF)
The DFOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 16-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0
after reading 1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs
simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Bit 5
DFOVF
Description
0
Normal state
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that overflow has occurred in the counter
Bit 4: Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (DFRFON)
Makes the error data limit function valid. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data
register (DFRUDR, DFRLDR)).
Bit 4
DFRFON
Description
0
Limit function off
(Initial value)
1
Limit function on
Bit 3: Drum Lock Flag (DF-R/UNR)
Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the drum lock counter.
Bit 3
DF-R/UNR
Description
0
Indicates that the drum speed system is not locked
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that the drum speed system is locked
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 688 of 1037
Bit 2: Drum Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (DPCNT)
Sets on the filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the drum lock
counter.
Bit 2
DPCNT
Description
0
Does not perform the filter computation by detection of the drum lock (Initial value)
1
Sets on the filter computation of the phase system when drum lock is detected
Bits 1 and 0: Drum Lock Counter Setting Bits (DFRCS1, DFRCS0)
Set the number of times where drum lock has been determined (DFG has been detected in the
range set by the lock range data register). It sets the drum lock flag if it detected the set number
of times of occurrence of drum lock. If an NCDFG signal is detected outside the lock range
after data is written in DFRCS1 and 0, data is stored in the lock counter.
Note:
If DFRCS1 or DFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (drum
lock flag) is 1 and the drum lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the drum speed
system is locked. The drum look counter stops until lock is released after underflow.
Bit 1
Bit 0
DFRCS1
DFRCS0
Description
0
Underflow after lock was detected once
(Initial value)
0
1
Underflow after lock was detected twice
0
Underflow after lock was detected three times
1
1
Underflow after lock was detected four times
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 689 of 1037
28.6.5
Description of Operation
The drum speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the
DFG specified speed preset register (DFPR). The reference value set in DFPR is preset in the
counter by the NCDFG signal, and counts down by the selected clock. The timing of the counter
presetting and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or falling edge of the
NCDFG signal. See section 28.14.4, DFG Noise Removal Circuit. The error data detected is
sent to the digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binaries. It takes a positive number (+)
if the speed is slower than the specified speed, a negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if
it correct (revolving at the specified speed). Figure 28.28 shows an example of operation to
detect the drum speed.
(a) Setting the error data limit
A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit using the DFG lock data
register (DFRUDR, DFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in DFRUDR and the
lower limit in DFRLDR, and write 1 in the DFRFON bit. If the error data is beyond the limit
range, the DFRLDR value is sent if a negative number is latched, or the DFRUDR value is
sent if a positive one is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off the limit setting
(DFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit setting on
(DFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured.
(b) Lock detection
If an error data was detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the drum lock
flag (DF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of occurrence of locking set by the
DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits, and an interrupt is requested (IRRDRM2) at the same time. The
number of the occurrence of locking (once to 4 times) can be specified when setting the flag.
Use the DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits for this purpose. Also, if bit 5 (DPHA bit) of the drum
system digital filter control register (DFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off)
and the DPCNT bit is 1, turning on/off of the phase system digital filter computation can be
controlled automatically by the status of lock detection.
(c) Drum system speed error detection counter
The drum system speed error detection counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag
(DFOVF) when the overflow occurred. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request
(IRRDRM1). Clear DFOVF by writing 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0
take place simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 690 of 1037
(d) Interrupt request
IRRDRM1 is generated by the NCDFG signal latch and the overflow of the error detection
counter. IRRDRM2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the number of
times of setting).
value+value
Specified speed value
Latch data 0
(no error)
Preset value
Preset period
(2 counts)
Counter
NCDFG signal
Error data latch
signal (DFG )
Preset data
load
Figure 28.28 Example of the Operation of the Drum Speed Error Detection
(Selection of the Rising Edge of DFG)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 691 of 1037
28.6.6
f
H
Correction in Trick Play Mode
In trick play mode, the tape speed changes relative to the video head. This change alters the
horizontal sync signal (f
H
), causing skew. To correct the skew, the drum motor speed must be
shifted to a different speed in each trick play mode, so as to obtain the normal horizontal sync
frequency. To shift the drum motor speed, software should modify the value written in the DFG
preset data register in the speed error detector.
This f
H
correction can be expressed in terms of the basic frequency f
F
of the drum as follows.
N
0
f
F
=
f
F0
N
0
+
H
(1
-
n)
Legend:
n:
Speed multiplier (FWD = positive, REV = negative)
H
:
H alignment (1.5H in standard mode, 0.75H in 2x mode, and 0.5H in 3x mode for
VHS and
systems; 1H for an 8-mm VCR)
N
0
:
Standard H numbers within field
f
F0
:
Field frequency
NTSC: N
0
= 262.5, f
F0
= 59.94
PAL:
N
0
= 312.5, f
F0
= 50.00
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 692 of 1037
28.7
Drum Phase Error Detector
28.7.1
Overview
Drum phase control must start operating after the drum motor is brought to the correct revolution
speed by the speed control system. Drum phase control works as follows in record and
playback.
Record: Phase is controlled so that the vertical blanking intervals of the recorded video signal
will line up along the bottom edge of the tape.
Playback: Phase is controlled so as to trace the recorded tracks accurately.
A digital counter detects the phase deviation from a preset value. The phase error data is
processed and added to speed error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width
modulated (PWM) output, which controls the rotational phase and speed of the drum.
The DPG signal from the drum motor is reshaped into a rectangular pulse waveform by a
reshaping circuit, and sent to the phase error detector.
The phase error detector compares the phase of the DPG pulse (tackle pulse), which contains
video head phase information, with a reference signal. In the actual circuit, the comparison is
carried out by comparing the head-switching (HSW) signal, which is delayed by a counter that is
reset by DPG, with a reference signal value. The reference signal is the REF30 signal, which
differs between record and playback as follows.
Record: Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded (frame rate signal, actually
1/2 Vsync)
Playback: 30 Hz or 25 Hz signal divided from the system clock
28.7.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.29 shows a block diagram of the drum phase error detector.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 693 of 1037
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
REF30P
HSW
(Video FF)
NHSW
(Narrow FF)
DPGCR
DPGCR
DPGCR
DFUCR
DPGCR
DPPR1
DPPR2
R/(W)
S
R
F/F
Q
W
W
Internal bus
Internal bus
OVF
LSB
MSB
DPER1
DPER2
LSB
MSB
DPOVF
DFEPS
HSWES
N/V
Latch
Preset
Error data (20 bits)
To DFU
Edge
detector
Sequence
controller
,
Error data
(16bit)
Error data
(4bit)
Preset data
(16bit)
Preset data
(4bit)
Counter (20bit)
IRRDRM3
DPCS1,0
s
s/2
s/4
s/8
s = fosc/2
Figure 28.29 Block Diagram of Drum Phase Error Detector
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 694 of 1037
28.7.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.10 shows the register configuration of the drum phase error detector.
Table 28.10 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Drum phase preset data
register 1
DPPR1
W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD03C
Drum phase preset data
register 2
DPPR2
W
Word
H'0000
H'FD03A
Drum phase error data
register 1
DPER1
R/W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD03D
Drum phase error data
register 2
DPER2
R/W
Word
H'0000
H'FD03E
Drum phase error
detection control register
DPGCR
R/W
Byte
H'07
H'FD039
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 695 of 1037
28.7.4
Register Descriptions
(1) Drum Phase Preset Data Registers (DPPR1, DPPR2)
DPPR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPPR2
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified drum phase is set in DPPR1 and DPPR2. The
20 bits are weighted as follows. Bit 3 of DPPR1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPPR2 is the LSB.
When data is written to DPPR2, the 20-bit preset data, including DPPR1, is loaded into the
preset circuit. Write to DPPR1 first, and DPPR2 next. The preset data is referenced to
H'80000*, and can be calculated from the following equation.
Target phase difference = (reference signal frequency/2)
-
6.5H
Drum phase preset data = H'80000 - (
s/n
target phase difference)
s:
Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2)
s/n:
Clock source of selected counter
DPPR2 is accessible by word access only. Byte access gives unassured results. Reads are
disabled. DPPR1 and DPPR2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby
mode.
Note: *
The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the
error value is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the drum phase
error data registers (DPER1 and DPER2), however, it is converted to a value
referenced to H'00000.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 696 of 1037
(2) Drum Phase Error Data Registers (DPER1, DPER2)
DPER1
0
0
1
0
R
*
/W
2
0
R
*
/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPER2
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
DPER1 and DPER2 consist of a 20-bit DPG phase error data register. The 20 bits are weighted
as follows. Bit 3 of DPER1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPER2 is the LSB. When the rotational
phase is correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the drum leads the
correct phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in DPER1 and DPER 2 are transferred to the
digital filter circuit.
DPER1 and DPER2 are 20-bit readable/writable registers. When writing data to DPER1 and
DPER2, write to DPER1 first, and then write to DPER2. DPER2 is accessible by word access
only. Byte access gives unassured results. DPER1 and DPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and
H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
See the note on the drum phase preset data registers (DPPR1 and DPPR2) in section 28.7.4 (1).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 697 of 1037
(3) Drum Phase Error Detection Control Register (DPGCR)
0
1
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
DPOVF
R/W
DPCS0
0
R/W
DPCS1
N/V
HSWES
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
DPGCR controls the operation of drum phase error detection.
DPGCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bits 2 to 0 are reserved, bit 5 accepts only read
and 0 write.
It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or stand-by.
Bits 7 and 6: Clock Source Selection Bits (DPCS1, DPCS0)
Select the clock supplied to the counter. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 7
Bit 6
DPCS1
DPCS0
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
0
1
s/2
0
s/3
1
1
s/4
Bit 5: Counter Overflow Flag (DPOVF)
The DPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0
after reading 1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs
simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Bit 5
DPOVF
Description
0
Normal state
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that an overflow has occurred in the counter
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 698 of 1037
Bit 4: Error Data Latch Signal Selection Bit (N/V)
Selects the latch signal of error data.
Bit 4
N/V
Description
0
HSW (VideoFF) signal
(Initial value)
1
NHSW (NarrowFF) signal
Bit 3: Edge Selection Bit (HSWES)
Selects the edge of the error data latch signal (HSW or NHSW).
Bit 3
HSWES
Description
0
Latches at the rising edge
(Initial value)
1
Latches at the falling edge
Bits 2 to 0: Reserved
No read or write is valid.
28.7.5
Description of Operation
The drum phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the
drum phase preset data register 1 and 2 (DPPR1, DPPR2). The reference values set in DPPR1
and DPPR2 are preset in the counter by the REF30P signal, and counted up by the clock
selected. The latch of the error data can be selected between the rising or falling edge of HSW
(NHSW). The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (DFEPS bit of
DFUCR = 0) is sent to the digital filter circuit automatically. In software transmission mode
(DFEPS bit of DFUCR = 1), the data written in DPER1 and DPER2 is sent to the digital filter
circuit. The error data is signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the
specified phase, a negative number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no
phase error (revolving at the specified phase). Figures 28.30 and 28.31 show examples of
operation to detect a drum phase error.
(a) Drum phase error detection counter
The drum phase error detection counter stops the counter when overflow or latch occurred.
At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRDRM3), setting the overflow flag
(DPOVF) if overflow occurred. Clear DPOVF by writing 0 after reading 1. If setting the
flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
(b) Interrupt request
IRRDRM3 is generated by the HSW (NHSW) signal latch and the overflow of the error
detection counter.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 699 of 1037
Latch
Latch
Preset value
Counter
HSW (NHSW)
*
REF30P
Preset value
Preset
Note:
*
Edge selectable
Preset
Figure 28.30 Drum Phase Control in Playback Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected)
Latch
Latch
Preset value
Counter
HSW (NHSW)
*
VD
REF30P
Preset value
Preset
Note:
*
Edge selectable
Preset
Reset
Reset
Figure 28.31 Drum Phase Control in Record Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 700 of 1037
28.7.6
Phase Comparison
The phase comparison circuit takes measures of the difference of time between the reference
signal and the comparing signal with a digital counter. The REF30 signal is used for the
reference signal, and the HSW signal (VideoFF) or HHSW signal (NarrowFF) from the HSW
timing generator is used for the comparing signal. In record mode, however, the phase of the
REF30 signal is the same as that of the vertical sync signal (Vsync) because the reference signal
generator (REF30 generator) is reset by the vertical sync signal (Vsync) in the video signals.
The error detection counter performs the data latching operation at the rising or falling edge of
the HSW signal. The digital filter circuit performs computation using this data as 20-bit phase
error data. After processing and adding the phase error data and the speed error data from the
drum speed control system, the digital filter circuit sends the data as the error data of the drum
system to the PWM modulation circuit.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 701 of 1037
28.8
Capstan Speed Error Detector
28.8.1
Overview
Capstan speed control operates so as to hold the capstan motor at a constant revolution speed, by
measuring the period of the CFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed deviation from a
preset value. The speed error data is added to phase error data in a digital filter. This filter
controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed and phase
of the capstan motor.
The CFG input signal is downloaded by the comparator circuit, then reshaped into a square wave
by a reshaping circuit, divided by the CFG divider, and sent to the speed error detector as the
DVCFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DVCFG signal, and
detects the deviation from a preset data value. The preset data is the value that would result
from measuring the DVCFG signal period with the clock signal if the capstan motor was running
at the correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DVCFG
signal. The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on.
The digital filter adds the speed error data to phase error data from the capstan phase control
system, then sends the result to the pulse-width modulator as capstan error data.
28.8.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.32 shows a block diagram of the capstan speed error detector.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 702 of 1037
W
W
R
UDF
OVF
Lock 2 up
Clear
Latch
Preset
CFVCR
CFRLDR
CFVCR
CFPR
CFVCR
CFVCR
CFVCR
CFUCR
CFER
CFRVCR
Error data
(16 bits)
To DFU
DVCFG
CFRUDR
Internal bus
R/W
Internal bus
R/W
W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
(R)/W
Lock 1 up
S
R
F/F
Q
S
R
F/F
CFRCS1,0
CF-R/UNR
Lock counter
(2 bits)
Q
S
R
F/F
Q
Lock range
detector
Lock range data 2 (16 bits)
Lock range data 1 (16 bits)
CPCNT
Error data
limitter
control
circuit
CFRFON
CFESS
Error data (16 bits)
Counter (16 bits)
CFOVF
IRRCAP2
IRRCAP1
CROCKON
To DFU
Preset data (16bit)
CFCS1,0
s
s/2
s/4
s/8
Figure 28.32 Block Diagram of Capstan Speed Error Detector
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 703 of 1037
28.8.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.11 shows the register configuration of the capstan speed error detector.
Table 28.11 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
CFG speed preset data
register
CFPR
W
Word
H'0000
H'FD050
CFG speed error data
register
CFER
R/W
Word
H'0000
H'FD052
CFG lock UPPER data
register
CFRUDR
W
Word
H'7FFF
H'FD054
CFG lock LOWER data
register
CFRLDR
W
Word
H'8000
H'FD056
Capstan speed error
detection control register
CFVCR
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD058
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 704 of 1037
28.8.4
Register Descriptions
(1) CFG Speed Preset Data Register (CFPR)
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 16-bit preset data that defines the specified CFG speed is set in CFPR. The preset data is
referenced to H'8000*, and can be calculated from the following equation.
s/n
CFG speed preset data =H'8000
-
(
-
2)
DVCFG frequency
s:
Servo clock frequency in Hz (f
OSC
/2)
DVCFG frequency: In Hz
The constant 2 is the preset interval (see figure 28.33).
s/n:
Clock source of the selected counter
CFPR is a 16-bit write-only register. CFPR is accessible by word access only. Byte access
gives unassured results. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. CFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Note: *
The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the
error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the CFG speed error
data register (CFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 705 of 1037
(2) CFG Speed Error Data Register (CFER)
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
CFER is a 16-bit data register. When the speed of the capstan motor is correct, the data latched
in CFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the speed is too fast, and positive data if the
speed is too slow. The CFER value is sent to the digital filter either automatically or by
software.
CFER is a 16-bit readable/writable register. CFER is accessible by word access only. Byte
access gives unassured results. CFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in module stop
mode and standby mode.
See the note on the CFG speed preset data register (CFPR) in section 28.8.4 (1).
(3) CFG Lock UPPER Data Register (CFRUDR)
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFRUDR is a register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when capstan speed lock is
detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when the limiter function is in use.
When lock is being detected, if the capstan speed is detected within the lock range, the lock
counter which has been set by the CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits of the CFVCR register counts
down. If the set value of CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 matches the number of times of occurrence of
locking, the computation of the digital filter in the capstan phase system can be controlled
automatically. Also, if the CFG speed error data is beyond the CFRUDR value when the limiter
function is in use, the CFRUDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital
filter.
CFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. A read is invalid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 706 of 1037
(4) CFG Lock LOWER Data Register (CFRLDR)
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFRLDR is a register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when capstan speed lock is
detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when limiter function is in use.
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock
counter which has been set by the CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits of the CFVCR register counts
down. If the set value of CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 matches the number of times of occurrence of
locking, the computation of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled
automatically. Also, if the CFG speed error data is under the CFRLDR value when the limiter
function is in use, the CFRLDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital
filter.
CFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
(5) Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register (CFVCR)
0
0
1
0
(R)
*
2
/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*
1
5
6
0
7
CFRFON CF-R/UNR CPCNT
CFRCS1
CFRCS0
0
R/W
CFCS1
(R)
*
2
/W
R
R/W
CFCS0
CFOVF
Notes:
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out.
CFVCR controls the operation of capstan speed error detection.
CFVCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only
read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module-stop.
Bits 7 and 6: Clock Source Selection Bits (CFCS1, CFCS0)
CFCS1 and CFCS0 select the clock to be supplied to the counter. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 7
Bit 6
CFCS1
CFCS0
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
0
1
s/2
0
s/4
1
1
s/8
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 707 of 1037
Bit 5: Counter Overflow Flag (CFOVF)
The CFOVF flag indicates overflow of the 16-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0
after reading 1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs
simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Bit 5
CFOVF
Description
0
Normal state
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that an overflow has occurred in the counter
Bit 4: Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (CFRFON)
Makes the error data limit function valid. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data
register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR)).
Bit 4
CFRFON
Description
0
Limit function off
(Initial value)
1
Limit function on
Bit 3: Capstan Lock Flag (CF-R/UNR)
Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock counter.
Bit 3
CF-R/UNR
Description
0
Indicates that the capstan speed system is not locked
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that the capstan speed system is locked
Bit 2: Capstan Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (CPCNT)
Sets on the filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock
counter.
Bit 2
CPCNT
Description
0
Does not perform the filter computation by detection of the capstan lock
(Initial value)
1
Set on the filter computation of the phase system when capstan lock is detected
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 708 of 1037
Bits 1 and 0: Capstan Lock Counter Setting Bits (CFRCS1, CFRCS0)
Sets the number of times where drum lock has been determined (DVCFG has been detected in
the range set by the lock range data register). It sets the capstan lock flag if it detected the set
number of times of occurrence of capstan lock. If a DVCFG signal is detected outside the lock
range after data is written in CFRCS1 and CFRCS0, data is stored in the lock counter.
Note:
If CFRCS1 or CFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (capstan
lock flag) is 1 and the capstan lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the capstan
speed system is locked. The capstan look counter stops until lock is released after
underflow.
Bit 1
Bit 0
CFRCS1
CFRCS0
Description
0
Underflow after lock was detected once
(Initial value)
0
1
Underflow after lock was detected twice
0
Underflow after lock was detected three times
1
1
Underflow after lock was detected four times
28.8.5
Description of Operation
The capstan speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the
CFG speed preset register (CFPR). The reference value set in CFPR is preset in the counter by
the DVCFG signal, and counts down by the selected clock. The timing of the counter presetting
and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or falling edge of the DVCFG
signal. See section 28.14.3, CFG Frequency Divider. The error data detected is sent to the
digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binaries. It takes a positive number (+) if the speed
is slower than the specified speed, a negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if it had no
error (revolving at the specified speed). Figure 28.33 shows an example of operation to detect
the capstan speed.
(a) Setting the error data limit
A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit using the CFG lock data
register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in CFRUDR and the
lower limit in CFRLDR, and write 1 in the CFRFON bit. If the error data is beyond the limit
range, the CFRLDR value is sent if a negative number is latched, or the CFRUDR value is
sent if a positive one is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off the limit setting
(CFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit setting on
(CFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 709 of 1037
(b) Lock detection
If error data was detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the capstan lock
flag (CF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of occurrence of locking set by the
CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits, and an interrupt is requested (IRRCAP2) at the same time. The
number of the occurrence of locking (once to 4 times) can be specified when setting the flag.
Use the CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits for this purpose. Also, if bit 5 (CPHA bit) of the capstan
system digital filter control register (CFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off)
and the DPCNT bit is 1, turning on/off of the phase system digital filter computation can be
controlled automatically by the status of lock detection.
(c) Capstan system speed error detection counter
The capstan system speed error detection counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag
(CFOVF) when overflow occurred. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request
(IRRCAP1). Clear CFOVF by writing 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0
take place simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
(d) Interrupt request
IRRCAP1 is generated by the DVCFG signal latch and the overflow of the error detection
counter. IRRCAP2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the number of
times of setting).
value +value
Specified speed value
Latch data 0
(no error)
Preset value
Preset period
(2 counts)
Counter
Error data
latch signal
(DVCFG)
Preset data
load
Figure 28.33 Example of the Operation of the Capstan Speed Error Detection
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 710 of 1037
28.9
Capstan Phase Error Detector
28.9.1
Overview
The capstan phase control system is required to start operation after the capstan motor has
arrived at the specified speed under the control of the speed control system. The capstan phase
control system operates in the following way in record/playback mode.
In record mode: Controls the tape running so that it may run at a specified speed together with
the speed control system.
In playback mode: Controls the tape running so that the recorded track may be traced correctly.
Any error deviated from the reference phase is detected by the digital counter. This phase error
data and the speed error data is processed and added by the digital filter circuit to control the
PWM output. The phase and speed of the capstan, in turn, is controlled by this PWM output.
The control signal of the capstan phase control in REC mode differs from that in PB mode. In
REC mode, the control is performed by the DVCFG2 signal which is generated by dividing the
frequencies of the reference signal (REF30P or CREF) and the CFG signal. In PB mode, it is
performed by divided rising signal (DVCTL) of the reference signal (CAPREF30) and the
playback control pulse (PB-CTL).
The reference signal in record and playback modes are as follows.
In record mode: 1/2 Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded
In playback mode: Signal generated by dividing the PB-CTL signal (DVCTL) at its rising edge
28.9.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.34 shows the block diagram of the capstan phase error detector.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 711 of 1037
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CREF
REF30P
CAPREF30
RECREF
DVCFG2
DVCTL
CPGCR
R/W
CR/RF
CPGCR
DFUCR
CPGCR
CPPR1
CPPR2
R/(W)
S
R
F/F
Q
W
W
Internal bus
Internal bus
OVF
LSB
MSB
CPER1
CPER2
LSB
MSB
CPOVF
CFEPS
SELCFG2
R/W
CTLM
R/P
ASM
Latch
Preset
Error data (20 bits)
To DFU
Sequence
controller
Error data
(16 bit)
Error data
(4 bit)
Preset data
(16 bit)
Preset
PB: X value + TRK value = CAPREF30
REC: REF30P or CREF
Latch
PB : DVCTL
REC : DVCFG2
Preset data
(4 bit)
Counter (20 bits)
IRRCAP3
CPCS1,0
s
s/2
s/4
s/8
s = fosc/2
Figure 28.34 Block Diagram of Capstan Phase Error Detector
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 712 of 1037
28.9.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.12 shows the register configuration of the capstan phase error detector.
Table 28.12 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
Capstan phase preset
data register 1
CPPR1
W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD05C
Capstan phase preset
data register 2
CPPR2
W
Word
H'0000
H'FD05A
Capstan phase error
data register 1
CPER1
R/W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD05D
Capstan phase error
data register 2
CPER2
R/W
Word
H'0000
H'FD05E
Capstan phase error
detection control register
CPGCR
R/W
Byte
H'07
H'FD059
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 713 of 1037
28.9.4
Register Descriptions
(1) Capstan Phase Preset Data Registers (CPPR1, CPPR2)
CPPR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPPR2
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified capstan phase is set in CPPR1 and CPPR2. The
20 bits are weighted as follows. Bit 3 of CPPR1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPPR2 is the LSB. When
CPPR2 is written to, the 20-bit preset data, including CPPR1, is loaded into the preset circuit.
Write to CPPR1 first, and CPPR2 next. The preset data is referenced to H'80000*, and can be
calculated from the following equation.
Target phase difference = Rreference signal frequency/2
Capstan phase preset data = H'80000
-
(
s/n
target phase difference)
s:
Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2)
s/n:
Clock source of selected counter
CPPR2 is accessible by word access only. Byte access gives unassured results. Reads are
disabled. If read is attempted to CPPR1 or CPPR2, an undetermined value is read out. CPPR1
and CPPR2 are initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
Note: *
The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the
error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the capstan phase
error data registers (CPER1 and CPER2), however, it is converted to a value
referenced to H'00000.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 714 of 1037
(2) Capstan Phase Error Data Registers (CPER1, CPER2)
0
0
1
0
R
*
/W
2
0
R
*
/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
CPER1 and CPER2 constitute a 20-bit capstan phase error data register. The 20 bits are
weighted as follows. Bit 3 of CPER1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPER2 is the LSB. When the
rotational phase is correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the
phase leads the correct phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in CPER1 and CPER 2 are
transferred to the digital filter circuit.
CPER1 and CPER are 20-bit readable/writable registers. When writing data to CPER1 and
CPER2, write to CPER1 first, and then write to CPER2. CPER2 is accessible by word access
only. Byte access gives unassured results. CPER1 and CPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and
H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
See the note on the capstan phase preset data registers (CPPR1 and CPPR2) in section 28.9.4 (1).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 715 of 1037
(3) Capstan Phase Error Detection Control Register (CPGCR)
0
1
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
CPOVF
R/W
CPCS0
0
R/W
CPCS1
CR/RF
SELCFG2
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPGCR controls the operation of capstan phase error detection.
CPGCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bits 2 to 0 are reserved, bit 5 accepts only read
and 0 write.
It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or stand-by.
Bits 7 and 6: Clock Source Selection Bits (CPCS1, CPCS0)
Select the clock supplied to the counter. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 7
Bit 6
CPCS1
CPCS0
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
0
1
s/2
0
s/4
1
1
s/8
Bit 5: Counter Overflow Flag (CPOVF)
CPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0
after reading 1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs
simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Bit 5
CPOVF
Description
0
Normal state
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that an overflow has occurred in the counter
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 716 of 1037
Bit 4: Preset Signal Selection Bit (CR/RF)
Selects the preset signal.
Bit 4
CR/RF
Description
0
Presets REF30P signal
(Initial value)
1
Presets CREF signal
Bit 3: Preset and Latch Signal Selection Bit (SELCFG2)
Selects the counter preset signal and the error data latch signal data in PB (ASM) mode.
Bit 3
SELCFG2
Description
0
Presets CAPREF30 signal; latches DVCTL signal
(Initial value)
1
Presets REF30P (CREF) signal; latches DVCFG2 signal
Bits 2 to 0: Reserved
No read or write is valid.
28.9.5
Description of Operation
The capstan phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the
capstan specified phase preset data register 1 and 2 (CPPR1, CPPR2). The reference values set
in CPPR1 and CPPR2 are preset in the counter by the REF30P (CREF) signal or CAPREF30
signal, and counted up by the clock selected. The latching of the error data is performed by
DVCTL or DVCFG2.
The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (CFEPS bit of DFUCR =
0) is sent to the digital filter circuit automatically. In software transmission mode (CFEPS bit of
DFUCR = 1), the data written in CPER1 and CPER2 is sent to the digital filter circuit. The error
data is signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the specified phase, a
negative number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no phase error (revolving
at the specified phase). Figures 28.35 and 28.36 show examples of operation to detect a capstan
phase error.
(a) Capstan phase error detection counter
The capstan phase error detection counter stops the counter when overflow or latch occurred.
At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRCAP3), setting the overflow flag
(CPOVF) if overflow occurred. Clear CPOVF by writing 0 after reading 1. If setting the
flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 717 of 1037
(b) Interrupt request
IRRCAP3 is generated by the DVCTL or DVCFG2 signal latch and the overflow of the error
detection counter.
Latch
Latch
Preset value
Counter
PB-CTL
CAPREF30
DVCTL
or
DVCFG2
Preset
Preset
Figure 28.35 Capstan Phase Control in Playback Mode
Latch
Latch
Preset value
Counter
DVCFG2
REF30P
or
CREF
Preset
Preset
Figure 28.36 Capstan Phase Control in Record Mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 718 of 1037
28.10
X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit
28.10.1
Overview
To maintain compatibility with other VCRs, an on-chip adjustment circuit adjusts the phase of
the reference signal (internal reference signal (REF30) or external reference signal (EXCAP))
during playback. Because of manufacturing tolerances, the physical distance between the video
head and control head (the X-value:
79.244 mm) may vary from set to set, so when a
tape that was recorded on a different set is played back, the phase of the reference signal may
need to be adjusted. The adjustment can be made by a register setting. The same setting can
adjust the rotational phase of the capstan motor to maintain positional alignment (tracking
alignment) of the video head with the recorded tracks in autotracking, or when tracks that were
recorded with an EP head are traced by a wider head. These tracking adjustments can be made
by acquisition of the envelope signal by the A/D converter.
28.10.2
Block Diagram
The adjustment circuit consists of a 10-bit counter clocked by the servo clock (
s or
s/2), and
two down-counters with load register. Individual setting of X-value adjustment can be made by
the X-value data register (XDR) and tracking adjustment by the TRK data register (TRDR). The
reference signal clears the 10-bit counter and sets the load register value in the down-counter
with two load registers. After the adjusted reference signal is generated, clock supply stops and
the circuit halts until the next reference signal is input. The REF30 signal can be divided (by 2
to 4) as necessary.
Figure 28.37 shows a block diagram.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 719 of 1037
R
*
/W
Note:
*
When DVREF1 and DVREF0 are read, values in the down counter (2 bits) are read out.
s = fosc/2
s
s /2
EXCAP
REF30P
XTCR
W
W
XCS
XTCR
W
AT/MU
ASM
REC/PB
XTCR
W
TRK/X
S
R
Q
S
R
Q
Internal bus
Internal bus
DVREF1, 0
CAPRF
EXC/REF
W
W
XTCR
XTCR
Down counter
Edge
selection
(2bit)
Counter
(10bit)
CAPREF30
REF30X
W
X-value data
register
XDR
(12bit)
TRK value data
register
TRDR
(12bit)
Down counter
(12bit)
(12bit)
Down counter
Figure 28.37 Block Diagram of X-Value Adjustment Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 720 of 1037
28.10.3
Register Descriptions
(1) Register Configuration
Table 28.13 shows the register configuration of X-value adjustment and tracking adjustment
circuits.
Table 28.13 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
*
X-value and TRK-value
control register
XTCR
R/W
Byte
H'80
H'FD074
X-value data register
XDR
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD070
TRK-value data register
TRDR
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD072
(2) X-value and TRK-value Control Register (XTCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
0
7
--
--
R/W
W
W
AT/MU
W
CAPRF
TRK/X
EXC/REF
XCS
DVREF1
DVREF0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
XTCR is an 8-bit register to determine the X-value and TRK-value adjustment circuits. Bits 6 to
2 are write-only bits. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bits 1 and 0 are readable/writable bits. XTCR accepts only a byte access. If a word access is
attempted, operation is unassured.
It is initialized to H'80 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bit 7: Reserved
No write is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 6: External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CAPRF)
Selects the EXCAP edge when a selection is made to generate external sync signals.
Bit 6
CAPRF
Description
0
Signal generated at the rising edge of EXCAP
(Initial value)
1
Signal generated at both edges of EXCAP
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 721 of 1037
Bit 5: Capstan Phase Correction Auto/Manual Selection Bit (AT/
08
08)
Selects whether the generation of the correction reference signal (CAPREF30) for capstan phase
control is controlled automatically or manually depending on the status of the ASM and REC/
!
bits of the CTL mode register.
Bit 5
AT/
&
&
Description
0
Manual mode
(Initial value)
1
Auto mode
Bit 4: Capstan Phase Correction Register Selection Bit (TRK/
;
;)
Determines the method to generate the CAPREF30 signal when the AT/
08 bit is 0.
Bit 4
TRK/
;
;
Description
0
Generates CAPREF30 only by the set value of XDR
(Initial value)
1
Generates CAPREF30 by the set values of XDR and TRDR
Bit 3: Reference Signal Selection Bit (EXC/REF)
Selects the reference signal to generate the correction reference signal (CAPREF30).
Bit 3
EXC/REF
Description
0
Generates the signal based on REF30P
(Initial value)
1
Generates the signal based on the external reference signal
Bit 2: Clock Source Selection Bit (XCS)
Selects the clock source to be supplied to the 10-bit counter.
Bit 2
XCS
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
1
s/2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 722 of 1037
Bits 1 and 0: REF30P Division Ratio Selection Bits (DVREF1, DVREF0)
Select the division value of REF30P. If it is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. (The
selected division value is set by the UDF of the counter.)
Bit 1
Bit 0
DVREF1
DVREF0
Description
0
Division in 1
(Initial value)
0
1
Division in 2
0
Division in 3
1
1
Division in 4
(3) X-value Data Register (XDR)
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XD1
XD0
XD3
XD2
XD5
XD4
XD7
XD6
XD9
XD8
XD11 XD10
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The X-value data register (XDR) is a 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is
attempted, an undefined value is read out. XDR accepts only a word-access. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured.
Set X-value correction data to XDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL pulse.
If AT/
08 = 0, TRK/; = 0 was set, CAPREF30 can be generated only by the setting of XDR.
Set an X-value and TRK correction value in PB mode, and an X-value in REC mode.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
(4) TRK-value Data Register (TRDR)
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TRD1 TRD0
TRD3 TRD2
TRD5 TRD4
TRD7 TRD6
TRD9 TRD8
TRD11 TRD10
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TRK-value data register (TRDR) is a 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read
is attempted, an undefined value is read out. TRDR accepts only a word-access. If a byte access
is attempted, operation is not assured.
Set a TRK-value correction data to TRDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL
pulse. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 723 of 1037
28.11
Digital Filters
28.11.1
Overview
The digital filters required in servo control make extensive use of multiply-accumulate
operations on signed integers (error data) and coefficients. A filter computation circuit (digital
filter computation circuit) is provided in on-chip hardware to reduce the load on software, and to
improve processing efficiency. Figure 28.38 shows a block diagram of the digital filter
computation circuit configuration.
The filter computation circuit includes a high-speed 24-bit
16-bit multiplier-accumulator, an
arithmetic buffer, and an I/O processor. The digital filter computations are carried out by the
high-speed multiplier-accumulator. The arithmetic buffer stores coefficients and gain constants
needed in the filter computations, which are referenced by the high-speed multiplier-
accumulator.
The I/O processor is activated by a frequency generator signal, and determines what operation is
carried out. When activated, it reads the speed error and phase error from the speed and phase
error detectors and sends them to the accumulator.
When the filter computation is completed, the I/O processor reads the result from the
accumulator and sends it to a 12-bit PWM. At this time, the accumulation result gain can be
controlled.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 724 of 1037
28.11.2
Block Diagram
Data bus
Accumulator
End
Start
Error latch signal
Error data
(from the error detector)
Motor control data
(to PWM circuit)
Buffer/
register
select &
R/W
Address bus
Error check
Accumulation
controller
LA (16 bits),
lower accumulator
UA (32 bits),
upper accumulator
MD (32 bits),
multiplied data
Data
shifter
Accumulation
sequence circuit
Buffer circuit
A, B, G, etc.
Write-only
Read-only
Accumu-
lator
Calculation register Coefficient register Constant register
Sign
controller
Figure 28.38 Block Diagram of Digital Filter Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 725 of 1037
16
24
8
Z
-1
-+
*
Usn-1
GKs
+
+
Ofs
+
-
+
+
24
8
Ws
24
8
VBs
14
4
24
8
XAs
24
8
XSn
24
8
VSn
24
8
DFUout
12
24
8
Es
Error detector
Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point
Add the same 8-bit value as MSB
Right-bit shift of the decimal point
along with Go
PWM
Note: Go =
64,
32 are optional.
Go =
64,
32,
16,
8,
4,
2
24
8
Usn
16
DZs11 to 0
CZs11 to 0
DBs15 to 0
CBs15 to 0
16
DGKs15 to 0
CGKs15 to 0
DOfs15 to 0
COfs15 to 0
DFIC
CFIC
DFER15 to 0
CFER15 to 0
DAs15 to 0
CAs15 to 0
Bs
As
GS
KS
Go
16
Es
PWM
Digital filter
control register
Speed system
24
8
Z
-1
-+
*
Upn-1
GKp
+
+
OfP
+
-
24
8
Tp
24
8
VBp
24
8
XAp
24
8
VPn
24
8
Y
Phase direct test output
*
: See figure 28.42, Z
-1
initialization circuit.
12
24
8
Ep
Error detector
Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point
Add the same 8-bit value as MSB
PWM
Notes: 1.
24
8
Upn
DZp11 to 0
CZp11 to 0
DBp15 to 0
CBp15 to 0
16
16
DGKp15 to 0
CGKp15 to 0
DOfp15 to 0
COfp15 to 0
DPER19 to 0
CPER19 to 0
DAp15 to 0
CAp15 to 0
BP
AP
GP
KP
20
16
16
Ep
PWM
PTON
Note 2
DFUCR
OPTION
CP/DP
Phase system
Overflows during accumulation are ignored, and
values below the decimal point are always omitted.
2.
Gain control is disabled during phase output.
Figure 28.39 Digital Filter Representation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 726 of 1037
28.11.3
Arithmetic Buffer
This buffer stores computational data used in the digital filters. See table 28.14. Write access is
limited to the gain and coefficient data (Z
-1
). Other data is used by hardware. None of the data
can be read.
Table 28.14 Arithmetic Buffer Register Configuration
Buffer Data Length
Arithmetic
Data
Gain or
Coefficient
Processing
Data
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
Phase
system
Ep
Upn
Upn-1 (Zp
-1
)
Vpn
Tp
Y
Ap
Bp
GKp
Ofp
Ap
Epn
Bp
Vpn
Speed
system
Es
Xsn
Usn
Usn-1 (Z
-1
s)
Vsn
Ws
As
Bs
GKs
Ofs
As
Xsn
Bs
Vsn
Error
output
PWM
Legend:
Valid bits
Non-existent bits
Decimal point
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 727 of 1037
28.11.4
Register Configuration
Table 28.15 shows the register configuration of the digital filter computation circuit.
Table 28.15 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Capstan phase gain
constant
CGKp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD010
Capstan speed gain
constant
CGKs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD012
Capstan phase coefficient A
CAp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD014
Capstan phase coefficient B
CBp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD016
Capstan speed coefficient A
CAs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD018
Capstan speed coefficient B
CBs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD01A
Capstan phase offset
COfp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD01C
Capstan speed offset
COfs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD01E
Drum phase gain constant
DGKp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD000
Drum speed gain constant
DGKs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD002
Drum phase coefficient A
DAp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD004
Drum phase coefficient B
DBp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD006
Drum speed coefficient A
DAs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD008
Drum speed coefficient B
DBs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD00A
Drum phase offset
DOfp
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD00C
Drum speed offset
DOfs
W
Word
Undetermined
H'FD00E
Drum system speed delay
initialization register
DZs
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD020
Drum system phase delay
initialization register
DZp
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD022
Capstan system speed
delay initialization register
CZs
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD024
Capstan system phase
delay initialization register
CZp
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD026
Drum system digital filter
control register
DFIC
R/W
Byte
H'80
H'FD028
Capstan system digital filter
control register
CFIC
R/W
Byte
H'80
H'FD029
Digital filter control register
DFUCR
R/W
Byte
H'C0
H'FD02A
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 728 of 1037
28.11.5
Register Descriptions
(1) Gain Constants (DGKp, DGKs, CGKp, CGKs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set accumulation gain of the digital filter. They
cannot be read. They can be accessed by word access only. Accumulation gain can be set to
gain 1 value as the maximum value. Byte access gives unassured results. If read is attempted,
an undetermined value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output
gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
(2) Coefficients (DAp, DBp, DAs, DBs, CAp, CBp, CAs, CBs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that determine the cutoff frequency f1 and f2. They
cannot be read. They can be accessed by word access only. Byte access gives unassured results.
If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output
gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 729 of 1037
(3) Offsets (DOfp, DOfs, COfp, COfs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set the offset level of digital filter output. They
cannot be read. They can be accessed by word access only. Byte access gives unassured results.
If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In this digital filter, output gain adjustment (
1, 2, 4, 8 ,16, 32, 64) after offset adding is
enabled. Take output gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
(4) Delay Initialization Registers (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs)
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The delay initialization register is a 16-bit write-only register. It accepts only a word-access. If
a byte access is attempted, operation is not assured. If a read is attempted, an undefined value is
read out. Bits 12 to 15 are reserved, and no write in them is valid.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop. The MSB of 12-bit data (bit 11) is
a sign bit.
Loading to Z
-1
is performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON,
DZPON, DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z
-1
is not possible
when the digital filter is performing calculation processing in relation to such register. In such a
case, loading to Z
-1
will be done the next time computation begins.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 730 of 1037
(5) Drum System Digital Filter Control Register (DFIC)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)
*
DROV
DZPON
DZSON
DSG2
DSG1
DSG0
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFIC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the status of the drum system digital
filter and operating mode. It can be accessed by byte access only. Word access gives unassured
results.
Bit 7 is a reserved bit. Writes are disabled. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. DFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode.
Bit 7: Reserved
Reads and writes are both disabled.
Bit 6: Drum System Range Over Flag (DROV)
This flag is set to 1 when the result of a drum system filter computation exceeds 12 bits in width.
To clear this flag, write 0.
Bit 6
DROV
Description
0
Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits
Bit 5: Drum Phase System Filter Computation Start Bit (DPHA)
Starts or stops filter processing for the drum phase system.
Bit 5
DPHA
Description
0
Phase system filter computations are disabled
Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 28.39)
(Initial value)
1
Phase system filter computations are enabled
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 731 of 1037
Bit 4: Drum Phase System Z
-1
Initialization Bit (DZPON)
Reflects the DZp value on Z
-1
of the phase system when computation processing of the drum
phase system begins. If 1 was written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0.
Set this bit after writing data to DZp.
Bit 4
DZPON
Description
0
DZp value is not reflected on Z
-1
of the phase system
(Initial value)
1
DZp value is reflected on Z
-1
of the phase system
Bit 3: Drum Speed System Z
-1
Initialization Bit (DZSON)
Reflects the DZs value on Z
-1
of the speed system when computation processing of the drum
speed system begins. If 1 was written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0.
Set this bit after writing data to DZs.
Bit 3
DZSON
Description
0
DZs value is not reflected on Z
-1
of the speed system
(Initial value)
1
DZs value is reflected on Z
-1
of the speed system
Bits 2 to 0: Drum System Output Gain Control Bits (DSG2, DSG1, DSG0)
Control the gain output to DRMPWM.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
DSG2
DSG1
DSG0
Description
0
1
(Initial value)
0
1
2
0
4
0
1
1
8
0
16
0
1
(
32)
*
0
(
64)
*
1
1
1
Invalid (Do not set)
Note:
*
Setting optional
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 732 of 1037
(6) Capstan System Digital Filter Control Register (CFIC)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)
*
DROV
DZPON
DZSON
DSG2
DSG1
DSG0
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFIC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the status of the capstan system digital
filter and operating mode. It can be accessed by byte access only. Word access gives unassured
results.
Bit 7 is a reserved bit. Writes are disabled. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. CFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode.
Bit 7: Reserved
Reads and writes are both disabled.
Bit 6: Capstan System Range Over Flag (CROV)
This flag is set to 1 when the result of a capstan system filter computation exceeds 12 bits in
width. To clear this flag, write 0.
Bit 6
CROV
Description
0
Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits
(Initial value)
1
Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits
Bit 5: Capstan Phase System Filter Start Bit (CPHA)
Starts or stops filter processing for the capstan phase system.
Bit 5
CPHA
Description
0
Phase filter computations are disabled
Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 28.39)
(Initial value)
1
Phase filter computations are enabled
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 733 of 1037
Bit 4: Capstan Phase System Z
-1
Initialization Bit (CZPON)
Reflects the CZp value on Z
-1
of the capstan phase system when computation processing of the
phase system begins. If 1 was written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0.
Set this bit after writing data to CZp.
Bit 4
CZPON
Description
0
CZp value is not reflected on Z
-1
of the phase system
(Initial value)
1
CZp value is reflected on Z
-1
of the phase system
Bit 3: Capstan Speed System Z
-1
Initialization Bit (CZSON)
Reflects the CZs value on Z
-1
of the capstan speed system when computation processing of the
speed system begins. If 1 was written, it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0.
Set this bit after writing data to CZs.
Bit 3
CZSON
Description
0
CZs value is not reflected on Z
-1
of the speed system
(Initial value)
1
CZs value is reflected on Z
-1
of the speed system
Bits 2 to 0: Capstan System Gain Control Bits (CSG2, CSG1, CSG0)
Control the gain output to CAPPWM.
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 0
CSG2
CSG1
CSG0
Description
0
1
(Initial value)
0
1
2
0
4
0
1
1
8
0
16
0
1
(
32)
*
0
(
64)
*
1
1
1
Invalid (Do not set)
Note:
*
Setting optional
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 734 of 1037
(7) Digital Filter Control Register (DFUCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
7
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
R/W
PTON
CP/DP
CFEPS
DFEPS
CFESS
DFESS
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFUCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register which controls the operation of the digital filter. It
accepts a byte-access only. If it was word-accessed, operation is not assured.
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. No write in them is valid. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by
or module stop.
Bits 7 and 6: Reserved
No read or write is valid. If a read is attempted, an undefined value is read out.
Bit 5: Phase System Computation Result PWM Output Bit (PTON)
Outputs the computation results of only the phase system to PWM. (The computation results of
the drum phase system is output to the CAPPWM pin, and that of the capstan phase system is
output to the DRMPWM pin.)
Bit 5
PTON
Description
0
Outputs the results of ordinary computation of the filter to PWM pin
(Initial value)
1
Outputs the computation results of only the phase system to PWM pin
Bit 4: PWM Output Selection Bit (CP/
!
!)
Selects whether the phase system computation results when PTON was set to 1 is output to the
drum or capstan. The PWM of the selected side outputs ordinary filter computation results
(speed system of MIX).
Bit 4
CP/
'3
'3
Description
0
Outputs the drum phase system computation results (CAPPWM)
(Initial value)
1
Outputs the capstan phase system computation results (DRMPWM)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 735 of 1037
Bit 3: Capstan Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFEPS)
Transfers the capstan phase system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 3
CFEPS
Description
0
Error data is transferred by DVCFG2 signal latching
(Initial value)
1
Error data is transferred when the data is written
Bit 2: Drum Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFEPS)
Transfers the drum phase system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 2
DFEPS
Description
0
Error data is transferred by HSW (NHSW) signal latching
(Initial value)
1
Error data is transferred when the data is written
Bit 1: Capstan Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFESS)
Transfers the capstan speed system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 1
CFESS
Description
0
Error data is transferred by DVCFG signal latching
(Initial value)
1
Error data is transferred when the data is written
Bit 0: Drum Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFESS)
Transfers the drum speed system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 0
DFESS
Description
0
Error data is transferred by NCDFG signal latching
(Initial value)
1
Error data is transferred when the data is written
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 736 of 1037
28.11.6
Filter Characteristics
(1) Lag-Lead Filter
A filter required for a servo loop is built in the hardware. This filter uses an IIR (Infinite
Impulse Response) type digital filter (another type of the digital filter is FIR, i.e. Finite
Impulse Response type). This digital filter circuit implements a lag-lead filter, as shown in
figure 28.40.
R1
R2
C
+
INPUT
OUTPUT
Figure 28.40 Lag-lead Filter
The transfer function G (S) is expressed by the following equation.
S
1+
2
f
2
Transfer function G (S) =
S
1+
2
f
1
f
1
=1/2
C (R1+R2)
f
2
=1/2
CR2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 737 of 1037
(2) Frequency Characteristics
The computation circuit repeats computation of the function, which is obtained by s-z
conversion according to bi-linear approximation of the transfer function on the s-plane.
Figure 28.41 shows the frequency characteristics of the lag-lead filter.
f1
0
f2
Frequency (Hz)
20log(f1/f2)
gain(dB)
phase(deg)
Figure 28.41 Frequency Characteristics of the Lag-Lead Filter
The pulse transfer function G(Z) is obtained by the bi-linear approximation of the transfer
function G (S).
In the transfer G (S),
2 1
-
Z
-1
S=
Ts 1+Z
-1
Where, assumed that Z
-1
= e
-j
Ts
,
2 1+AZ
-1
G (Z) = G
Ts 1+BZ
-1
1 1 1
Ts+ Ts
-
Ts
-
f
2
f
2
f
1
G (Z) = A = B =
1 1 1
Ts+ Ts+ Ts+
f
1
f
2
f
1
Ts:
Sampling cycle (sec)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 738 of 1037
28.11.7
Operations in Case of Transient Response
In case of transient response when the motor is activated, the digital filter computation circuit
must prevent computation due to a large error. The convergence of the computations becomes
slow and servo retraction becomes deteriorating if a large error is input to the filter circuit when
it is performing repeated computations. To prevent them from occurring, operate the filter (set
constants A and B) after pulling in the speed and phase within a certain range of error, initialize
Z
-1
(set initial values in CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs)(see section 28.11.8, Initialization of Z
-1
), or use
the error data limit function (see section regarding the error detector).
28.11.8
Initialization of Z
-1
Z
-1
can be initialized by its delay initialization register (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs). Loading to Z
-1
is
performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON, DZPON,
DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z
-1
is not possible when the
digital filter is performing calculation processing in relation to such register. In such a case,
loading to Z
-1
will be done the next time computation begins. Figure 28.42 shows the
initialization circuit of Z
-1
.
The delay initialization register sets 12-bit data. The MSB (bit 11) is a signed bit. Z
-1
has 24 bits
for integers and 8 bits for decimals. Accordingly, the same value as the signed bits should be set
in the 13 bits on the MSB side of Z
-1
, and 0 in the entire decimal section.
Example: Value set for the delay initialization register
Value set for Z
-1
MSB
0
MSB
Set here the value in the
signed bits
Fixed
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 739 of 1037
W
W
Internal bus
Z
-1
initiali-
zation bit
DZSON
DZPON
CZSON
CZSON
W
16
16
12
24
8
W
Delay initialization
register
Z
-1
USn
-
+
Res
Note: MSB of 12-bit data to be written in the delay initialization register is a sign bit.
Usn-1
+
+
Xn
Vn
DBs15 to 0
DBp15 to 0
CBs15 to 0
CBp15 to 0
DZs11 to 0
DZp11 to 0
CZs11 to 0
CZp11 to 0
DAs15 to 0
DAp15 to 0
CAs15 to 0
CAp15 to 0
A
B
Figure 28.42 Z
-1
Initialization Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 740 of 1037
28.12
Additional V Signal Generator
28.12.1
Overview
The circuit described in this section outputs an additional vertical sync signal to take the place of
Vsync in special playback. It is activated at both edges of the HSW signal output by the head-
switch timing generator. The head-switch timing generator also outputs a Vpulse signal
containing the additional vertical sync pulse itself, and an Mlevel signal that defines the width of
the additional vertical sync signal including the equalizing pulses.
The additional V signal is output at a three-level output pin (Vpulse).
Figure 28.43 shows the additional V signal control circuit.
Csync
Additional V pulse
OSCH
Vpulse signal
Mlevel signal
Sync detector
HSW timing
generator
Additional V
pulse generator
Figure 28.43 Additional V Pulse Control Circuit
(a) HSW timing generator
This circuit generates signals that are synchronized with head switching. It should be
programmed to generate the Mlevel and Vpulse signals at edges of the HSW signal
(VideoFF). For details, see section 28.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator.
(b) Sync detector
This circuit detects pulses of the width specified by VTR or HTR from the signal input at the
Csync pin and generates an internal horizontal sync signal (OSCH). The sync detector has
an interpolation function, so OSCH has a regular period even if there are horizontal sync
dropouts in the signal received at the pin. For details, see section 28.15, Sync Signal
Detector.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 741 of 1037
28.12.2
Pin Configuration
Table 28.16 summarizes the pin configuration of the additional V signal.
Table 28.16 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Additional V pulse pin
Vpulse
Output
Output of additional V signal synchronized to
VideoFF
28.12.3
Register Configuration
Table 28.17 summarizes the register that controls the additional V signal.
Table 28.17 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Additional V control register
ADDVR
R/W
Byte
H'E0
H'FD06F
28.12.4
Register Description
Additional V Control Register (ADDVR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
1
6
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
HMSK
HiZ
CUT
VPON
POL
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ADDVR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset, and in standby
mode.
Bits 7 to 5: Reserved
Writes are disabled. If a read is attempted, an undefined value is read out.
Bit 4: OSCH Mask Bit (HMSK)
Masks the OSCH signal in the additional V pulse.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 742 of 1037
Bit 4
HMSK
Description
0
OSCH is added in
(Initial value)
1
OSCH is not added in
Bit 3: High Impedance Bit (HiZ)
Set to 1 when the intermediate level is generated by an external circuit.
Bit 3
HiZ
Description
0
Vpulse is a three-level output pin
(Initial value)
1
Vpulse is a three-state output pin (high, low, or high-impedance)
Bits 2 to 0: Additional V Output Control Bit (CUT, VPON, POL)
These bits control the output at the additional V pin.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CUT
VPON
POL
Description
0
*
Low level
(Initial value)
0
Negative polarity (see figure 28.46)
0
1
1
Positive polarity (see figure 28.45)
0
Intermediate level (high impedance if HiZ bit = 1)
1
*
1
High level
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 743 of 1037
28.12.5
Additional V Pulse Signal
Figure 28.44 shows the additional V pulse signal. The Mlevel and Vpulse signals are generated
by the head-switch timing generator. The OSCH signal is combined with these to produce
equalizing pulses. The polarity can be selected by the POL bit in the additional V register
(ADDVR). The Vpulse pin outputs a low level by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop
mode.
R/W
R/W
ADDVR
ADDVR
R/W
Internal bus
R/W
R/W
CUT
VPON
HMSK
POL
HiZ
STBY
V
CC
V
CC
V
SS
V
SS
Rs
Rs
Vpulse pin
OSCH
Vpulse
Mlevel
[Legend]
STBY : Power-down mode signal
Vpulse, Mlevel : Signal from the HSW timing generator
Rs : Voltage division resistance (20 k : Reference value)
Figure 28.44 Additional V Pin
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 744 of 1037
(a) Additional V pulses when sync signal is not detected
With additional V pulses, the pulse signal (OSCH) detected by the sync detector is
superimposed on the Vpulse and Mlevel signals generated by the head-switch timing
generator. If there is a lot of noise in the input sync signal (Csync), or a pulse is missing,
OSCH will be a complementary pulse, and therefore an H pulse of the period set in HRTR
and HPWR will be superimposed. In this case, there may be slight timing drift compared
with the normal sync signal, depending on the HRTR and FPWR setting, with resultant
discontinuity.
If no sync signal is input, the additional V pulse is generated as a complementary pulse. Set
the sync detector registers and activate the sync detector by manipulating the SYCT bit in the
sync signal control register (SYNCR). See section 28.15.7, Sync Signal Detector Activation.
Figures 28.45 and 28.46 show the additional V pulse timing charts.
HSW signal edge
OSCH
VPON=1, CUT=0, POL=1
Additional
V pulse
Vpulse
signal
Mlevel
signal
Figure 28.45 Additional V Pulse When Positive Polarity is Specified
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 745 of 1037
HSW signal edge
OSCH
VPON=1, CUT=0, POL=0
Additional
V pulse
Vpulse
signal
Mlevel
signal
Figure 28.46 Additional V Pulse When Negative Polarity is Specified
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 746 of 1037
28.13
CTL Circuit
28.13.1
Overview
The CTL circuit includes a Schmitt amplifier that amplifies and reshapes the CTL input, then
outputs it as the PB-CTL signal to the servo, linear time counter, and other circuits.
The PB-CTL signal is also sent to a duty discriminator in the CTL circuit that detects and
records VISS, ASM, and VASS marks. A REC-CTL amplifier is included in the record circuits.
Detection and recording whether the CTL pulse pattern is long or short can also be enabled to
correspond to the wide-aspect.
The following operating modes can be selected by settings in the CTL mode register:
Duty discrimination
VISS detect, ASM detect, VASS detect, L/S bit pattern detect
CTL record
VISS record, ASM record, VASS record, L/S bit pattern detect
Rewrite
Trapezoid waveform generator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 747 of 1037
28.13.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.47 shows a block diagram of the CTL circuit.
+ -
PB-CTL
FW/RV
CTL(-)
CTL(+)
Schmitt
amplifier
CTL mode
CTL
detector
Duty des-
criminator
Bit pattern
register
VISS detect
VISS
control circuit
VISS write
Duty I/O flag
Write control
circuit
REC-
CTL amplifier
Internal bus
REF30X
IRRCTL
Figure 28.47 Block Diagram of CTL Circuit
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 748 of 1037
28.13.3
Pin Configuration
Table 28.18 summarizes the pin configuration of the CTL circuit.
Table 28.18 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
CTL (+) I/O pin
CTL (+)
I/O
CTL signal input/output
CTL () I/O pin
CTL ()
I/O
CTL signal input/output
CTL Bias input pin
CTL Bias
Input
CTL primary amplifier bias supply
CTL Amp (O) output pin
CTLAmp (O)
Output
CTL amplifier output
CTL SMT (i) input pin
CTLSMT (i)
Input
CTL Schmitt amplifier input
CTL FB input pin
CTL FB
Input
CTL amplifier high-range characteristics
control
CTL REF output pin
CTL REF
Output
CTL amplifier reference voltage output
28.13.4
Register Configuration
Table 28.19 shows the register configuration of the CTL circuit.
Table 28.19 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
CTL control register
CTCR
R/W
Byte
H'30
H'FD080
CTL mode register
CTLM
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD081
REC-CTL duty data
register 1
RCDR1
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD082
REC-CTL duty data
register 2
RCDR2
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD084
REC-CTL duty data
register 3
RCDR3
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD086
REC-CTL duty data
register 4
RCDR4
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD088
REC-CTL duty data
register 5
RCDR5
W
Word
H'F000
H'FD08A
Duty I/O register
DI/O
R/W
Byte
H'F1
H'FD08C
Bit pattern register
BTPR
R/W
Byte
H'FF
H'FD08D
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 749 of 1037
28.13.5
Register Descriptions
(1) CTL Control Register (CTCR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
W
5
1
6
0
7
W
W
W
FSLB
W
FSLC
0
W
NT/PL
FSLA
CCS
LCTL
UNCTL
SLWM
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The CTL control register (CTCR) controls PB-CTL rewrite and sets the slow mode. When a
CTL pulse cannot be detected with the input amplifier gain set at the CTL gain control register
(CTLGR) in the PB-CTL circuit, bit 1 (UNCTL) of CTCR is set to 1. It is automatically cleared
to 0 when a CTL pulse is detected.
CTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. However, bit 1 is read-only, and the rest is write-
only.
CTCR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in standby and module stop mode.
Bit 7: NTSC/PAL Selection Bit (NT/PL)
Selects the period of the rewrite circuit.
Bit 7
NT/PL
Description
0
NTSC mode (frame rate: 30 Hz)
(Initial value)
1
PAL mode (frame rate: 25 Hz)
Bits 6 to 4: Frequency Selection Bits (FSLA, FSLB, FSLC)
These bits select the operating frequency of the CTL rewrite circuit. They should be set
according to fosc.
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
FSLC
FSLB
FSLA
Description
0
Reserved (do not set)
0
1
Reserved (do not set)
0
fosc = 8 MHz
0
1
1
fosc = 10 MHz
(Initial value)
1
*
*
Reserved (do not set)
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 750 of 1037
Bits 3: Clock Source Selection Bit (CCS)
Selects clock source of CTL.
Bit 3
CCS
Description
0
s
(Initial value)
1
s/2
Bit 2: Long CTL Bit (LCTL)
Sets the long CTL detection mode.
Bit 2
LCTL
Description
0
Clock source (CCS) operates at the setting value
(Initial value)
1
Clock source (CCS) operates for further 8-division after operating at the setting
value
Bit 1: CTL Undetected Bit (UNCTL)
Indicates the CTL pulse detection status at the CTL input amplifier sensitivity set at the CTL
gain control register (CTLGR).
Bit 1
UNCTL
Description
0
Detected
(Initial value)
1
Undetected
Bit 0: Mode Selection Bit (SLWM)
Selects CTL mode.
Bit 0
SLWM
Description
0
Normal mode
(Initial value)
1
Slow mode
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 751 of 1037
(2) CTL Mode Register (CTLM)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
FW/RV
R/W
REC/PB
0
R/W
ASM
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The CTL mode register (CTLM) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operating
state of the CTL circuit. If 1 is written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be cleared to 0 one
cycle (
) later.
CTLM is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. When CTL
is being stopped, only bits 7, 6 and 5 operate.
Note:
Do not set any value other than the setting value for each mode (see table 28.20, CTL
Mode Functions).
Bits 7 and 6: Record/Playback Mode Bits (ASM, REC/PB)
These bits switch between record and playback. Combined with bits 4 to 0 (MD4 to MD0), they
support the VISS, VASS, and ASM mark functions.
Bit 7
Bit 6
ASM
REC/
3%
3%
Description
0
Playback mode
(Initial value)
0
1
Record mode
0
Assemble mode
1
1
Invalid (do not set)
Bit 5: Direction Bit (FW/RV)
Selects the direction in playback. Clear this bit to 0 during record. Figure 28.48 shows the PB-
CTL signal in forward and reverse.
Bit 5
FW/RV
Description
0
FORWARD
(Initial value)
1
REVERSE
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 752 of 1037
CTL input
PB-CTL
FWD
REV
Figure 28.48 Internal PB-CTL Signal in Forward and Reverse
Bits 4 to 0: CTL Mode Selection Bits (MD4 to MD0)
These bits select the detect, record, and rewrite modes for VISS, VASS, and ASM marks. If 1 is
written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be cleared to 0 one cycle (
) later.
The 5 bits from MD4 to MD0 are used in combination with bits 7 and 6 (ASM and REC/
3%).
Table 28.20 describes the modes.
Table 28.20 CTL Mode Functions
Bit
ASM
REC
/
!
!
FW/
RV
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Mode
Description
0
0
0/1
0
0
0
0
0
VASS
detect
(duty
detect)
PB-CTL duty discrimination
(Initial value)
Duty I/O flag is set to 1 if duty
44% is detected
Duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 if duty
< 44% is detected
Interrupt request is generated
when one CTL pulse has been
detected
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
VASS
record
If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag,
REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set
by register RCDR2 or RCDR3
If 1 is written in the duty I/O flag,
REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set
by register RCDR4 or RCDR5
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
VASS
rewrite
Same as above (VASS record;
trapezoid waveform circuit
operation)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 753 of 1037
Bit
ASM
REC
/
!
!
FW/
RV
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Mode
Description
0
0
0/1
0
1
0
0
1
VISS
detect
(index
detect)
The duty I/O flag is set to 1 at the
point of write access to register
CTLM
The 1 pulses recognized by the
duty discrimination circuit are
counted in the VISS control
circuit
The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0,
indicating VISS detection, when
the value set at VCTR register is
repeatedly detected
An interrupt request is generated
when VISS is detected
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
VISS
record
(index
record)
64 pulse data with 0 pulse data at
both edges are written (index
record)
The index bit string is written
through the duty I/O flag
An interrupt request is generated
at the end of VISS recording
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
VISS
rewrite
Same as above (VISS record;
trapezoid waveform circuit
operation)
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
VISS
initialize
VISS write is forcibly aborted
1
0
0/1
0
0
0
0
0
ASM
mark
detect
ASM mark detection
The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0
when PB-CTL duty
66% is
detected
An interrupt request is generated
when an ASM mark is detected
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
ASM
mark
record
An ASM mark is recorded by
writing 0 in the duty I/O flag
An interrupt is requested for
every one CTL pulse
REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set
by register RCDR3
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 754 of 1037
(3) REC-CTL Duty Data Register 1 (RCDR1)
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT11
W
12
1
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
CMT10
W
0
CMT13
W
0
CMT12
W
0
CMT15
W
0
CMT14
W
0
CMT17
W
0
CMT16
W
0
CMT19
W
0
CMT18
W
0
CMT1B
W
0
CMT1A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR1 is a register that sets the REC-CTL rising timing. This setting is valid only for
recording and rewriting, and is not used in detection.
RCDR1 is a 12-bit write-only register, and can be accessed by word access only. Byte access
gives unassured results. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12
are reserved and are not affected by write access.
RCDR1 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode and CTL
stop mode.
The value to set in RCDR1 can be calculated from the transition timing T1 and the servo clock
frequency
s by the equation given below. See figure 28.60, REC-CTL Signal Generation
Timing. Any transition timing can be set. However, the timing should be selected with
attention to playback tracking compensation and the latch timing for phase control.
RCDR1 = T1
s/64
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T1 is the set timing (s).
Note:
0 cannot be set to RCDR1. Set a value 1 or above.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 755 of 1037
(4) REC-CTL Duty Data Register 2 (RCDR2)
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT21
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
CMT20
W
0
CMT23
W
0
CMT22
W
0
CMT25
W
0
CMT24
W
0
CMT27
W
0
CMT26
W
0
CMT29
W
0
CMT28
W
0
CMT2B
W
0
CMT2A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR2 is a register that sets 1 pulse (short) falling timing of REC-CTL at recording and
rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting.
RCDR2 is a 12-bit write-only register, and can be accessed by word access only. Byte access
gives unassured results. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12
are reserved and are not affected by write access.
RCDR2 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL
stop mode.
At recording, the value to set in RCDR2 can be calculated from the transition timing T2 and the
servo clock frequency
s by the equation given below, and the set value should be 25% of the
duty obtained by the equation. See figure 28.60, REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing.
RCDR2 = T2
s/64
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T2 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 28.56,
Duty Discriminator.
RCDR2 = T2'
s/64
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T2' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value
at FWD (s).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 756 of 1037
(5) REC-CTL Duty Data Register 3 (RCDR3)
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT31
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
CMT30
W
0
CMT33
W
0
CMT32
W
0
CMT35
W
0
CMT34
W
0
CMT37
W
0
CMT36
W
0
CMT39
W
0
CMT38
W
0
CMT3B
W
0
CMT3A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR3 is a register that sets 1 pulse (long) and assemble mark falling timing of REC-CTL at
recording and rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting.
RCDR3 is a 12-bit write-only register, and can be accessed by word access only. Byte access
gives unassured results. If read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12
are reserved and are not affected by write access.
RCDR3 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL
stop mode.
At recording, the value to set in RCDR3 can be calculated from the transition timing T3 and the
servo clock frequency
s by the equation given below. The set value should be 30% of the duty
when the RCDR3 is used for REC-CTL 1 pulse (long), and 67 to 70% when used for assemble
mark. The set value must not exceed the value of REF30X. See figure 28.60, REC-CTL Signal
Generation Timing.
RCDR3 = T3
s/64
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T3 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 28.56,
Duty Discriminator.
RCDR3 = T3'
s/64
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T3' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value
at FWD (s).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 757 of 1037
(6) REC-CTL Duty Data Register 4 (RCDR4)
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT41
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
CMT40
W
0
CMT43
W
0
CMT42
W
0
CMT45
W
0
CMT44
W
0
CMT47
W
0
CMT46
W
0
CMT49
W
0
CMT48
W
0
CMT4B
W
0
CMT4A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR4 sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (short) of REC-CTL in record or rewrite
mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse.
RCDR4 is a 12-bit write-only register. It accepts only a word-access. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. If a read is attempted, an undefined value is read out. Bits
15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in them is valid.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by, module stop or CTL stop.
In record mode, set a value with the 57.5% duty cycle obtained from the transition timing T4
corresponding to the servo clock frequency
s according to the following equation. See figure
28.60, REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing.
RCDR4 = T4
s/64
is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T4 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 28.56,
Duty Discriminator.
RCDR4 = H'FFF
-
(T4'
s/80)
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T4' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value
at REV (s).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 758 of 1037
(7) REC-CTL Duty Data Register 5 (RCDR5)
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT51
W
12
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
CMT50
W
0
CMT53
W
0
CMT52
W
0
CMT55
W
0
CMT54
W
0
CMT57
W
0
CMT56
W
0
CMT59
W
0
CMT58
W
0
CMT5B
W
0
CMT5A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR5 sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (long) of REC-CTL in record or rewrite
mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse.
RCDR5 is a 12-bit write-only register. It accepts only a word-access. If a byte access is
attempted, operation is not assured. If a read is attempted, an undefined value is read out. Bits
15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in them is valid.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by, module stop or CTL stop.
In record mode, set a value with the 62.5% duty cycle obtained from the transition timing T5
corresponding to the servo clock frequency
s according to the following equation. See figure
28.60, REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing.
RCDR5 = T5
s/64
is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T5 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 28.56,
Duty Discriminator.
RCDR5 = H'FFF
-
(T5'
s/80)
s is the servo clock frequency (= f
OSC
/2) in Hz, and T5' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value
at REV (s).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 759 of 1037
(8) Duty I/O Register (DI/O)
0
1
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
W
3
0
4
--
--
5
1
6
7
R/W
W
W
VCTR0
1
W
VCTR1
1
W
VCTR2
BPON
BPS
BPF
DI/O
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The duty I/O register is an 8-bit register that confirms and determines the operating status of the
CTL circuit.
It is initialized to H'F1 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop mode.
Bits 7, 6, and 5: VISS Interrupt Setting Bits (VCTR2, VCTR1, VCTR0)
Combination of VCTR2, VCTR1 and VCTR0 sets number of 1 pulse detection in VISS
detection mode. Detecting the set number of pulse detection is considered as VISS detection,
and an interrupt request is generated.
Note:
When changing the detection pulse number during VISS detection, initialize VISS first,
then resume the VISS detection setting.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
VCTR2
VCTR1
VCTR0
Number of 1-pulse for Detection
0
2
0
1
4 (SYNC mark)
0
6
0
1
1
8 (mark A, short)
0
12 (mark A, long)
0
1
16
0
24 (mark B)
1
1
1
32
Bit 4: Reserved
Writes are disabled. When read, undefined values are obtained.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 760 of 1037
Bit 3: Bit Pattern Detection ON/OFF Bit (BPON)
Determines ON or OFF of bit pattern detection.
Note:
When writing 1 to the BPON bit, be sure to set appropriate data to RCDR2 to RCDR5
beforehand.
Bit 3
BPON
Description
0
Bit pattern detection OFF
(Initial value)
1
Bit pattern detection ON
Bit 2: Bit Pattern Detection Start Bit (BPS)
Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection. When 1 is written to this bit, it returns to 0 after one cycle.
Writing 0 to this bit does not affect operation.
Bit 2
BPS
Description
0
Normal status
(Initial value)
1
Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection
Bit 1: Bit Pattern Detection Flag (BPF)
Sets the flag every time 8-bit PB-CTL is detected in PB or ASM mode. To clear the flag, write
0 after reading 1.
Bit 1
BPF
Description
0
Bit pattern (8-bit) is not detected
(Initial value)
1
Bit pattern (8-bit) is detected
Bit 0: Duty I/O Register (DI/O)
This flag has different functions for record and playback.
In VISS detect mode, VASS detect mode, and ASM mark detect mode, this flag indicates the
detection result.
In VISS record or rewrite mode, this flag controls the write control circuit so as to write an index
code, operating according to a control signal from the VISS control circuit.
In VASS record or rewrite mode and ASM mark record mode, this flag is used for write control,
one CTL pulse at a time.
This bit can always be written to, but this does not affect the write control circuit in modes other
than VISS record or rewrite, and ASM record.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 761 of 1037
VISS Detect Mode and VASS Detect Mode:
The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty
cycle of the PB-CTL signal is equal to or above 44% (a 0 pulse in the CTL signal). The duty I/O flag
is 0 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 43% (a 1 pulse in the CTL signal).
ASM Mark Detect Mode:
The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is 0 when the
duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is equal to or above 66% (when an ASM mark is detected).
The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 65% (when an ASM
mark is not detected).
VISS Record Mode and VISS Rewrite Mode:
The duty I/O flag operates according to a control signal from the VISS control circuit, and
controls the write control circuit so as to write an index code. The write timing is set in the
REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to RCDR5). For VISS recording, registers RCDR1 to
RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X. For VISS rewrite, registers RCDR2 to RCDR5 are
set with reference to the low-to-high transition of the previously recorded CTL signal, and the
write is carried out through the trapezoid waveform generator.
Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0 pulse
(short) in RCDR4, and for a 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5.
While an index code is being written, the value of the bit being written can be read by reading
the duty I/O flag. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 0 pulse, the duty I/O flag will
read 1. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 1 pulse, the duty I/O flag will read 0.
VASS Record Mode and VASS Rewrite Mode:
The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. The write timing is set in
the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to RCDR5). For VASS recording, registers RCDR1
to RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X. For VASS rewrite, registers RCDR2 to RCDR5
are set with reference to the low-to-high transition of the previously recorded CTL signal, and
the write is carried out through the trapezoid waveform generator.
Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0 pulse
(short) in RCDR4, and for a 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5.
If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR2
and RCDR3, referenced to the immediately following REF30X. If 1 is written in the duty I/O
flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR4 and RCDR5, referenced to the
immediately following REF30X.
ASM Record Mode:
The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. The write timing is set in
the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 and RCDR3). If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, a
CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle of 67% to 70% as set in RCDR3, referenced to the
immediately following REF30X.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 762 of 1037
(9) Bit Pattern Register (BTPR)
0
1
1
1
R/W
*
2
1
R/W
*
3
1
4
5
1
6
7
R/W
*
R/W
*
R/W
*
LSP5
1
R/W
*
LSP4
1
R/W
*
LSP6
1
R/W
*
LSP7
LSP3
LSP2
LSP1
LSP0
Note:
*
Write is prohibited when bit pattern detection is selected.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The bit pattern register (BTPR) is an 8-bit shift register which detects and records the bit pattern
of the CTL pulses. If a CTL pulse is detected in PB or ASM mode, the register is shifted
leftward at the rising edge of PB-CTL, and reflects the determined result of long/short on bit 0
(long pulse = 1, short pulse = 0).
If the BPON bit is set to 1 in PB mode, the register starts detection of bit pattern immediately
after the CTL pulse. To exit the bit pattern detection, set the BPON bit at 0.
If 1 was written in the BPS bit when the bit pattern is being detected, the BPF bit is set at 1 when
an 8-bit bit pattern was detected. If continuous detection of 8-bits is required, write 0 in the BPF
bit, and then write 1 in the BPS bit.
At the time of VISS detection, the bit pattern detection is disabled. Set the BPON bit to 0 at the
time of VISS detection.
In REC mode, the register records the long/short in the bit pattern set in BTPR. The pulse in
record mode is determined always by bit 7 (LSP7) of BTPR. BTPR records one pulse, shifts
leftward, and stores the data of bit 7 to bit 0.
BTPR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, stand-by, module stop, or CTL stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 763 of 1037
28.13.6
Operation
(a) CTL circuit operation
As shown in figure 28.49, the CTL discrimination/record circuit is composed of a 16-bit
up/down counter and 12-bit registers (
5).
In playback (PB) mode, the 16-bit up/down counter counts on a
s/4 clock when the PB-CTL
pulse is high, and on a
s/5 clock when low. In record (REC) or slow mode, this counter
counts up on a
s/8 clock when the pulse is high, and on a
s/4 clock when low.
This counter always counts up in record and slow modes.
In playback or slow mode, it is cleared on the rise of a PB-CTL signal. In record mode, it is
cleared on the rise of an REF30X signal.
s/4
( s/8)
s/5
( s/4)
REC-CTL (L0)
RCDR5
REC-CTL (S0)
RCDR4
REC-CTL (L1and ASM)
RCDR3
REC-CTL (S1)
RCDR2
REC-CTL
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
RCDR1
12-bit register
UDF:
DOWN
UDF
Upper 12 bits
UP
UP/DOWN counter (16 bits)
Duty
detection
Counter clear signal
REF30X (REC)
PB-CTL (PB, ASM)
UP/DOWN control signal
REC: UP
PB, ASM:
UP when PB-CTL is high
Down when PB-CTL is low
Underflows when PB-CTL
duty is 43% or less
Figure 28.49 CTL Discrimination/Record Circuit
(b) CTL mode register (CTLM) switchover timing
CTLM is enabled immediately after data is written to the register. Care must be taken with
changes in the operating state.
Capstan phase control is performed by the VD sync REF30X (X-value + tracking value) and
PB-CTL in ASM mode, and by the REF30X or CREF and CFG division signal (DVCFG2) in
REC mode. If the CAPREF30 signal to be used for capstan phase control is always
generated by XDR, the value of XDR must be overwritten when switching between PB and
REC modes. Figures 28.50 and 28.51 show examples of switchover timing of CTLM and
XDR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 764 of 1037
VD
DVCFG2
REF30X
16bit
UP/DOWN
counter
HSW
CTL
Tx
Latch
Preset
The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed
before REF30P in the cycle in which the X-value is changed.
X-value
X-value
after
change
RCDR3
RCDR1
RCDR2
REF30P
Ta
PB-CTL
Tb
1 pulse
UDF
0 pulse
0 pulse
CDIVR2
Register write
Ta is the interval calculated from RDCR3.
Tb is the interval in which switchover is performed
from ASM mode to REC mode.
Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period is
shortened due to the change of XDR.
1 pulse
X-value (XDR) is
rewritten in this
cycle
RCDR1
Capstan phase control
ASM mode, PB mode : REF30X-PB-CTL
REC mode : REF30P-DVCFG2
/4
/5
/4
REC-CTL
Figure 28.50 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing
(When Phase Control is Performed by REF30P and DVCFG2 in REC Mode)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 765 of 1037
VD
CREF
REF30X
16bit
UP/DOWN
counter
HSW
CTL
Tx
Latch
Preset
The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed
before REF30P in the cycle in which the X-value is changed.
X value
X-value after
change
RCDR3
RCDR1
RCDR2
REF30P
Ta
PB-CTL
Tb
1 pulse
0 pulse
0 pulse
ASM-REC
switchover
Ta is the interval calculated from RDCR3.
Tb is the interval in which switchover is
performed from ASM mode to REC mode.
Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period
is shortened due to the change of XDR.
With CREF and DVCFG2
phase alignment, the
frequency need not be 25 Hz
or 30 Hz.
1 pulse
X-value (XDR) is
rewritten in this
cycle
DVCFG2
RCDR1
Capstan phase control
ASM mode, PB mode: REF30X-PB-CTL
Capstan phase control
REC mode : REF30P-DVCFG2
/4
/5
/4
REC-CTL
CDIVR2
Register write
UDF
Figure 28.51 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing
(When Phase Control is Performed by CREF and DVCFG2 in REC Mode)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 766 of 1037
28.13.7
CTL Input Section
The CTL input section consists of an input amplifier whose gain can be controlled by register
setting and a Schmitt amplifier. Figure 28.52 shows a block diagram of the CTL input section.
A trivial CTL pulse signal is received from the CTL head, amplified by the input amplifier,
reshaped into a square wave by the Schmitt amplifier, and sent to the servo circuits and timer L
as the PB-CTL signal. Control the CTL input amplifier gain by bits 3 to 0 in the CTL gain
control register (CTLGR) of the servo port.
+
+
CTLFB
CTLSMT(i)
CTLFB
CTLREF
CTLBias
CTLGR0
CTLGR3 to 1
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
PB-CTL(+)
Note : Be sure to set a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i).
Note
PB-CTL(-)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
+
CTLAmp(o)
CTL(+)
CTL(-)
Figure 28.52 Block Diagram of CTL Input Section
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 767 of 1037
(1) CTL Detector
If the CTL detector fails to detect a CTL pulse, it sets bit 1 of the CTL control register
(CTCR) to high indicating that the pulse has not been detected. If a CTL pulse is detected
after that, the bit is automatically cleared to 0. Duration used for determining detection or
non-detection of the pulse depends on magnitude of phase shift of the last detected pulse
from the reference phase (phase difference between REF30 and CTL signal). Typically,
detection or non-detection is determined within 3 to 4 cycles of the reference period.
If settings of the CTL gain control register are maintained in a table format, you can refer to
it when the CTL detector failed to detect CTL pulses. From the table, you can control input
sensitivity of the CTL according to the state of the UNCTL bit, thereby selecting an optimum
CTL amplifier gain depending on the state of the pulse recorded.
Figure 28.53 illustrates the concept of gain control for detecting the CTL input pulse.
*
V+TH (fixed)
*
V-TH (fixed)
Note:
*
CTL input sensitivity is variable depending on CTL
gain control register (CTLGR) setting.
Figure 28.53 CTL Input Pulse Gain Control
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 768 of 1037
(2) PB-CTL Waveform Shaper in Slow Mode Operation
If bit 0 in the CTL control register (CTCR) is set to slow mode, slow reset function is
activated. In slow mode, if the falling edge is not detected within the specified time from
rising edge detection, PB-CTL is forcibly shut down (slow reset).
The time T
FS
(s) until the signal falls is the following interval after the rising edge of the
internal CTL signal is detected:
T
FS
= 16384
4
s
(
s = f
OSC
/2)
When f
OSC
= 10 MHz, T
FS
= 13.1 ms.
Figure 28.54 shows the PB-CTL waveform in slow mode.
CTL waveform
Internal CTL signal
1 frame
1 frame
1 frame
Slow tracking delay
Slow tracking delay
Slow tracking delay
Accelera-
tion
Accelera-
tion
Accelera-
tion
Decelera-
tion
Decelera-
tion
Slow reset
Stop
Stop
CTLP
CTLP
CTLP
Figure 28.54 PB-CTL Waveform in Slow Mode Operation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 769 of 1037
28.13.8
Duty Discriminator
The duty discriminator circuit measures the period of the control signal recorded on the tape
(PB-CTL signal) and discriminates its duty cycle. In VISS or VASS detection, the duty I/O flag
is set or cleared according to the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is set to 1 when
the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is equal to or above 44%, and is cleared to 0 when the duty
cycle is below 43%.
In ASM detection, an ASM mark is recognized (and the duty I/O flag is cleared to 0) when the
duty cycle is equal to or above 66%. When the duty cycle is below 65%, no ASM mark is
recognized and the duty I/O flag is set to 1.
The detection direction can be switched between forward and reverse by bit 5 (FW/RV) in the
CTL mode register.
A long or short pulse can be detected by comparing the REC-CTL duty data register (RCDR2 to
RCDR5) and UP/DOWN counter. Long or short pulse is discriminated at PB-CTL signal
falling. Discrimination result is stored in bit 0 (LSP0) of the bit pattern register (BTPR). At the
same time, BTPR is shifted to the left. LSP0 indicates 0 when a short pulse is detected, and 1
when a long pulse is detected.
Set the threshold value of a long/short pulse in RCDR2 to RCDR5. See (4), Detection of the
Long/Short Pulse.
Figure 28.55 shows the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 770 of 1037
Input signal
Short 1 pulse
250.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Long 1 pulse
300.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Short 0 pulse
57.50.5%
62.50.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Long 0 pulse
PB-CTL
Input signal
ASM Mark
67 to 70%
PB-CTL
Figure 28.55 PB-CTL Signal Duty Cycle
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 771 of 1037
Figure 28.56 shows the duty discrimination circuit. A 44% duty cycle is discriminated by
counting with the 16-bit up/down counter, using a
s/4 clock for the up-count and a
s/5 clock
for the down-count. An up-count is performed when the PB-CTL signal is high, and a down-
count when low. Long or short pulse is discriminated by comparing with RCDR2 to RCDR5.
Counter
PB-CTL
1 pulse
PB-CTL
PB-CTL
s/4
s/5
Counter
PB-CTL
0 pulse
s/4
s/5
Counter
FWD
PB-CTL
Short pulse
(0 pulse)
s/4
s/5
RCDR3
RCDR2
0 pulse L/S threshold value
1 pulse L/S threshold value
Counter
REV
PB-CTL
Long pulse
(1 pulse)
s/5
s/4
RCDR4
RCDR5
0 pulse L/S threshold value
1 pulse L/S threshold value
UP/DOWN
Comparison of upper
12-bit
UP/DOWN counter (16 bits)
*
RCDR2or4 (12bit)
*
FWD : Discriminated by RCDR2 and RCDR3
REV : Discriminated by RCDR4 and RCDR5
*
RCDR3or5 (12bit)
0/1
discrimination
UDF
Clear
R
S
Q
s/4
s/5
L/S
discrimination
Figure 28.56 Duty Discriminator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 772 of 1037
(1) VISS (Index) Detect/Record Mode
VISS detection is carried out by the VISS control circuit, which counts 1 pulses in the PB-
CTL signal. If the pulse count detects any value set in the VISS interrupt setting bits (bits 5,
6 and 7 in the duty I/O register), an interrupt request is generated and the duty I/O flag is
cleared to 0.
At VISS record or rewrite, INDEX code is automatically written. INDEX code is composed
of continuous 62-bit data with 0 pulse data at both edges.
Examples of bit strings and the duty I/O flag at VISS detection/record are illustrated in figure
28.57.
0
Tape direction
Duty I/O flag
(a) VISS detection (INDEX: Thirty-two 1 pulse setting)
1
1
1
1
613 bits
Thirty-two 1 pulses
detected
IRRCTL
633 bits
Start
1
1
1
1
0
0
Tape direction
Duty I/O flag
(b) VISS record
1
1
1
1
62 bits
IRRCTL
64 bits
Start
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
62 63 64
Figure 28.57 Examples of VISS Bit Strings and Duty I/O Flag
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 773 of 1037
(2) VASS Detect Mode
VASS detection is carried out by the duty discriminator. Software can detect index
sequences by reading the duty I/O flag at each CTL pulse.
At each CTL pulse, the duty discriminator sends the result of duty discrimination to the duty
I/O flag, and simultaneously generates an interrupt request. The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0
if the CTL pulse is a 1 (duty cycle below 43%), and is set to 1 if the CTL pulse is a 0 (duty
cycle equal to or above 44%).
The duty I/O flag is modified at each CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling
routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal. The VASS detection format is illustrated in
figure 28.58.
1
Tape direction
Written three times
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
M
S
B
L
S
B
L
S
B
M
S
B
M
S
B
L
S
B
L
S
B
M
S
B
Thousands
Header (11 bits)
Hundreds
Data (16 bits: 4 digits of 4-bit BCD)
Tens
Ones
Figure 28.58 VASS (Index) Format
(3) Assemble (ASM) Mark Detect Mode
ASM mark detection is carried out by the duty discriminator. If the duty discriminator
detects that the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is 66% or higher, it generates an interrupt
request, and simultaneously clears the duty I/O flag to 0.
The duty I/O flag is updated at every CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling
routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 774 of 1037
(4) Detection of the Long/Short Pulse
The Long/Short pulse is detected in PB mode by the L/S determination based on the
comparison of the REC-CTL duty registers (RCDR2 to RCDR5) with the up/down counter
and the results of the duty I/O flag. The results of the determination are stored in bit 0
(LSP0) of the bit pattern register (BTPR) at the rising edge of PB-CTL, shifting BTPR
leftward at the same time.
RCDR2 to RCDR5 set the L/S thresholds for each of FWD/REV. Set to RCDR2 a threshold
of 1 pulse L/S for FWD, to RCDR3 a threshold of 0 pulse L/S for FWD, to RCDR4 a
threshold of 0 pulse L/S for REV, and to RCDR5 a threshold of 1 pulse L/S for REV. Figure
28.59 shows the detection of the Long/Short pulse.
Also, the bit pattern of eight bits can be detected by BTPR. Check that an 8-bit detection has
been done by bit 1 (BPF bit) of the duty I/O register, and then read BTPR.
Bit pattern register (8-bit)
UP/DOWN counter (16-bit)
RCDR2 (12bit)
High-order 12-bit data
L/S is determined at the rising edge of PB-CTL.
After the determination, the bit pattern register is
shifted leftward, and the results of the determination
are stored in the LSB.
RCDR3 (12bit)
Internal bus
LSB
FW/RV
DI/O
Shift leftward
BTPR
R
R
S
Q
RCDR4 (12bit)
RCDR5 (12bit)
R
S
Q
s/4
Figure 28.59 Detection of Long/Short Pulse
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 775 of 1037
28.13.9
CTL Output Section
An on-chip control head amplifier is provided for writing the REC-CTL signal generated by the
write control circuit onto the tape.
The write control circuit controls the duty cycle of the REC-CTL signal in the writing of VISS
and VASS sequences and ASM marks and the rewriting of VISS and VASS sequences. The
duty cycle of the REC-CTL signal is set in REC-CTL duty data registers 1 to 5 (RCDR1 to
RCDR5). Times calculated in terms of
s (= f
OSC
/2) should be converted to appropriate data to
be set in these registers. In VISS or VASS mode, set RCDR2 for a duty cycle of 25%
0.5%,
RCDR3 for a duty cycle of 30%
0.5%, RCDR4 for a duty cycle of 57.5
0.5%, and RCDR5 for
a duty cycle of 62.5
0.5%. When 1 is written in the duty I/O flag, the REC-CTL signal will be
written on the tape with a 25%
0.5% duty cycle when 0 is written in bit 7 (LSP7) in the bit
pattern register (BTPR) and with a 30
0.5% duty cycle when 1 is written. Table 28.21 shows
the relationship between the REC-CTL duty register and CTL outputs.
In ASM mark write mode, set RCDR3 for a duty cycle of 67% to 70%. An ASM mark will be
written when 0 is written in the duty I/O flag.
An interrupt request is generated at the rise of the reference signal after one CTL pulse has been
written. The reference signal is derived from the output signal (REF30X) of the X-value
adjustment circuit, and has a period of one frame.
Figure 28.60 shows the timings that generate the REC-CTL signal.
Table 28.21 REC-CTL Duty Register and CTL Outputs
MODE
D/IO
LSP7
Pulse
RCDR
Duty
0
S1
RCDR2
25
0.5%
0
1
L1
RCDR3
30
0.5%
0
S0
RCDR4
57.5
0.5%
VISS and VASS
modes
1
1
L0
RCDR5
65.5
0.5%
ASM mode
0
*
RCDR3
67 to 70%
Note:
*
Don't care.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 776 of 1037
W
Internal bus
RCDR2or4
(12bit)
W
RCDR1
(12bit)
UP/DOWN counter (12 bits)
Counter
REF30X
REC-CTL
Counter
reset
Match detection
Match detection
End of writing of one CTL
pulse (except VISS) IRRCTL
RCDR2 (VISS/VASS S1 pulse)
RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse, or ASM)
RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse)
RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse)
RCDR1
Clear
Upper 12 bits
REC-CTL 0 pulse fall
timing
REC-CTL rise timing
REC-CTL 1 pulse,
ASM fall timing
RESET
REF30X
W
RCDR3or5
(12bit)
s/4
Compare
Compare
Compare
Figure 28.60 REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 777 of 1037
The 16-bit counter in the REC-CTL circuit continues counting on a clock derived by dividing
the system clock
s (= f
OSC
/2) by 4. The counter is cleared on the rise of REF30X in record
mode, and on the rise of PB-CTL in rewrite mode. The REC-CTL match detection is carried out
by comparing the counter value with each RCDR value.
RCDR1 to RCDR5 can be written to by software at all times. If RCDR is changed before the
respective match detection is performed, match detection is performed using the new value. The
value changed after match detection becomes valid on the rise of REF30X following the change.
Figure 28.61 shows an example of RCDR change timing.
REF30X
REC-CTL
RCDR1 RCDR2
RCDR1
1 pulse (Short)
0 pulse (Short)
Rewritten 0 pulse
(Short)
RCDR1
RCDR1
Counter
RCDR4
RCDR2
RCDR1
RCDR4
RCDR4
RCDR4
Interval in which
RCDR4 can be
written to
Figure 28.61 Example of RCDR Change Timing (Example Showing RCDR4)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 778 of 1037
28.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit
In rewriting, the trapezoid waveform circuit leaves the rising edge of the already-recorded PB-
CTL signal intact, but changes the duty cycle.
In rewriting, the CTL pulse is written with reference to the rise of PB-CTL. The CTL duty cycle
for a rewrite is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR2 to RCDR5). Time values T2 to
T5 are referenced to the rise of PB-CTL.
Figure 28.62 shows the rewrite waveform.
W
Internal bus
RCDR3or5
(12bit)
W
Not used when
rewriting
RCDR2or4
(12bit)
UP/DOWN counter (16 bits)
Clear
Upper 12 bits
REC-CTL 0 pulse
fall timing
REC-CTL 1 pulse
fall timing
RESET
PB-CTL
W
T
2
to T
5
Eliminated
pulse
High-impedance
interval
End of writing of one
CTL pulse (except
VISS) IRRCTL
RCDR1
(12bit)
s/4
Compare
Compare
RCDR2 (VISS/VASS S1 pulse)
RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse)
RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse)
RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse)
PB-CTL
REC-CTL when
rewriting
New pulse
Figure 28.62 Relationship between REC-CTL and RCDR2 to RCDR5 when Rewriting
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 779 of 1037
28.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt
Following a reset, the CTL circuit is in the VASS detect (duty detect) mode.
Depending on the CTL pin states, a false PB-CTL input pulse may be recognized and an
interrupt request generated. If the interrupt request will be enabled, first clear the CTL interrupt
request flag.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 780 of 1037
28.14
Frequency Dividers
28.14.1
Overview
On-chip frequency dividers are provided for the pulse signal picked up from the control track
during playback (PB-CTL signal), and the pulse signal received from the capstan motor (CFG
signal). An on-chip noise canceller is provided for the drum motor pulse signal (DFG signal).
The CTL frequency divider generates a CTL divided control signal (DVCTL) from the PB-CTL
signal, for use in capstan phase control during high-speed search, for example. The CFG
frequency divider generates two divided signals (DVCFG for speed control and DVCFG2 for
phase control) from the CFG signal. The DFG noise canceller is a circuit which considers a
signal less than 2
as noise and masks it.
28.14.2
CTL Frequency Divider
(1) Block Diagram
Figure 28.63 shows a block diagram of the CTL frequency divider.
EXCTL
PB-CTL
,
DVCTL
UDF
R/W
W
(8bit)
R/W
Internal bus
CEX
CTL division register
Down counter (8 bits)
CEG
Edge
detector
CTVC
CTLR
CTVC
Figure 28.63 CTL Frequency Divider
(2) Register Configuration
Register configuration
Table 28.22 shows the register configuration of the CTL dividers.
Table 28.22 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
DVCTL control register
CTVC
R/W
Byte
Undefined
H'FD098
CTL division register
CTLR
W
Byte
H'00
H'FD099
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 781 of 1037
DVCTL control register (CTVC)
0
*
1
*
R
2
*
R
3
4
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
6
7
R
CFG
HSW
0
W
0
W
CEX
CEG
CTL
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Initial value is uncertain.
The DVCTL control register (CTVC) is a register consisting of the external input signal
selection bit and the flags which show the CFG, HSW and CTL levels.
Note:
It has an undetermined value by a reset or stand-by.
Bit 7: DVCTL Signal Generation Selection Bit (CEX)
Selects whether the PB-CTL signal or the external input signal is used to generate the DVCTL
signal.
Bit 7
CEX
Description
0
Generates DVCTL signal with PB-CTL signal
(Initial value)
1
Generates DVCTL signal with external input signal
Bit 6: External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CEG)
Selects the edge of the external signal at which the frequency division is made when the external
signal was selected to generate the DVCTL signal.
Bit 6
CEG
Description
0
Rising edge
(Initial value)
1
Falling edge
Bits 5 to 3: Reserved
No write in them is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 2: CFG Flag (CFG)
Shows the CFG level.
Bit 2
CFG
Description
0
CFG is at Low level
(Initial value)
1
CFG is at High level
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 782 of 1037
Bit 1: HSW Flag (HSW)
Shows the level of the HSW signal selected by the VFF/NFF bit of the HSW mode register 2
(HSM2).
Bit 1
HSW
Description
0
HSW is at Low level
(Initial value)
1
HSW is at High level
Bit 0: CTL Flag (CTL)
Shows the CTL level.
Bit 0
CTL
Description
0
REC or PB-CTL is at Low level
(Initial value)
1
REC or PB-CTL is at High level
CTL frequency division register (CTLR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
CTL4
CTL3
CTL2
CTL1
CTL0
0
W
CTL7
W
W
W
CTL6
CTL5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The CTL frequency division register (CTLR) is an 8-bit write-only register to set the frequency
dividing value (N-1 if divided by N) for PB-CTL. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value
is read out.
PB-CTL is divided by N at its rising edge. If the register value was 0, no division operation is
performed, and the DVCTL signal with the same cycle with PB-CTL is output. It is initialized
to H'00 by a reset or stand-by.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 783 of 1037
(3) Operation
During playback, control pulses recorded on the tape are picked up by the control head and
input to the CTL pin. The control pulse signal is amplified by a Schmitt amplifier, reshaped,
then input to the CTL frequency divider as the PB-CTL signal.
This circuit is employed when the control pulse (PB-CTL signal) is used for phase control of
the capstan motor. The divided signal is sent as the DVCTL signal to the capstan phase
system in the servo circuits, and the Timer R.
The CTL frequency divider is an 8-bit reload timer consisting of a reload register and a
down-counter. Frequency division is obtained by setting frequency-division data in bits 7 to
0 in the CTL frequency division register (CTLR), which is the reload register. When a
frequency-division value is written in this reload register, it is also written into the down-
counter. The down-counter is decremented on rising edges of the PB-CTL signal.
Figure 28.64 shows examples of the PB-CTL signal and DVCTL waveforms.
CTL input signal
CTLR : CTL frequency division register
PB-CTL or external
sync signal
CTLR=00
CTLR=01
CTLR=02
Figure 28.64 CTL Frequency Division Waveforms
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 784 of 1037
28.14.3
CFG Frequency Divider
(1) Block Diagram
Figure 28.65 shows a block diagram of the 7-bit CFG frequency divider and its mask timer.
W
R/W
W
R/W
W
W
W
R
R/W
Internal bus
CMN
CRF
UDF
UDF
UDF
CFG
DVCFG
DVCFG2
,
MCGin
Internal bus
CFG
clock
select
CTMR(6bit)
CDIVR2(7bit)
DVTRG
PB(ASM)
REC
s = fosc/2
s/1024
s/512
s/256
s/128
Down counter (7 bits)
Down counter (7 bits)
Down counter (6 bits)
CDIVR(7bit)
CMK
S
R
Edge
select
CDVC
CDVC
CDVC
CDVC
CDVC
Figure 28.65 CFG Frequency Divider
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 785 of 1037
(2) Register Descriptions
Register configuration
Table 28.23 shows the register configuration of the CFG frequency divider.
Table 28.23 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
DVCFG control register
CDVC
R/W
Byte
H'60
F'FD09A
CFG frequency division
register 1
CDIVR1
W
Byte
H'80
H'FD09B
CFG frequency division
register 2
CDIVR2
W
Byte
H'80
H'FD09C
DVCFG mask period
register
CTMR
W
Byte
H'FF
H'FD09D
DVCFG control register (CDVC)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
1
6
--
--
1
7
W
R
CMK
CMN
W
DVTRG
0
R/W
*
MCGin
CRF
CPS1
CPS0
0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CDVC is an 8-bit register to control the capstan frequency division circuit.
It is initialized to H'60 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bit 7: Mask CFG Flag (MCGin)
MCGin is a flag to indicate occurrence of a frequency division signal during the mask timer's
mask period. To clear it, write 0. To clear it by software, write 0 after reading 1. Also, setting
has the highest priority in this flag. If a condition setting the flag and 0 write occurs
simultaneously, the latter is nullified.
Bit 7
MCGin
Description
0
CFG is in normal operation
(Initial value)
1
Shows that DVCFG was detected during masking (runaway detected)
Bit 6: Reserved
No write in it is valid. If a read is attempted, 1 is read out.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 786 of 1037
Bit 5: CFG Mask Status Bit (CMK)
Indicates the status of the mask. It is initialized to 1 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bit 5
CMK
Description
0
Indicates that the capstan mask timer has released masking
1
Indicates that the capstan mask timer is currently masking
(Initial value)
Bit 4: CFG Mask Selection Bit (CMN)
Selects the turning ON/OFF of the mask function.
Bit 4
CMN
Description
0
Capstan mask timer function ON
(Initial value)
1
Capstan mask timer function OFF
Bit 3: PB (ASM)
REC Transition Timing Sync ON/OFF Selection Bit (DVTRG)
Selects the ON/OFF of the timing sync of the transition from PB (ASM) to REC when the
DVCFG2 signal is generated.
Bit 3
DVTRG
Description
0
PB (ASM)
REC transition timing sync ON
(Initial value)
1
PB (ASM)
REC transition timing sync OFF
Bit 2: CFG Frequency Division Edge Selection Bit (CRF)
Selects the edge of the CFG signal to be divided.
Bit 2
CRF
Description
0
Performs frequency division at the rising edge of CFG
(Initial value)
1
Performs frequency division at both edges of CFG
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 787 of 1037
Bits 1 and 0: CFG Mask Timer Clock Selection Bits (CPS1, CPS0)
Selects the clock source for the CFG mask timer. (
s = fosc/2)
Bit 1
Bit 0
CPS1
CPS0
Description
0
s/1024
(Initial value)
0
1
s/512
0
s/256
1
1
s/128
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 788 of 1037
CFG frequency division register 1 (CDIVR1)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
0
6
7
--
--
W
W
CDV15
CDV14
0
W
CDV16
0
W
CDV13
CDV12
CDV11
CDV10
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The CFG frequency division register 1 (CDIVR1) is an 8-bit write-only register to set the
CFG division value (N-1 for N division). If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is
read out. Bit 7 is reserved.
The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the
same time.
CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges. If the register value was
0, no division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle
with the CFG signal is output. The DVCFG signal is sent to the capstan speed error
detector. It is initialized to H'80 by a reset or stand-by together with the capstan
frequency division register and the down counter.
CFG frequency division register 2 (CDIVR2)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
0
6
7
--
--
W
W
CDV25
CDV24
0
W
CDV26
0
W
CDV23
CDV22
CDV21
CDV20
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The CFG frequency division register 2 (CDIVR2) is an 8-bit write-only register to set the
CFG division value (N-1 for N division). If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is
read out. Bit 7 is reserved.
The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the
same time.
CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges. If the register value was
0, no division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle
with the CFG signal is output. The DVCFG2 signal is sent to the capstan speed error
detector and the Timer L.
The DVCFG2 circuit has no mask timer function.
The frequency division counter for the DVCFG2 signal starts its division operation at the
point data was written in CDIVR2. If synchronization is required for phase matching, for
example, do it by writing in CDIVR2. If the DVTRG bit of the CDVC register was 0, the
register synchronizes with the switching timing from PB (ASM) to REC.
It is initialized to H'80 by a reset or stand-by together with the capstan frequency division
register and the down counter.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 789 of 1037
DVCFG mask period register (CTMR)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
4
1
W
5
1
6
7
--
--
--
--
W
W
CPM5
CPM4
1
W
CPM3
CPM2
CPM1
CPM0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The DVCFG mask period register (CTMR) is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out. CTMR is a reload register for the mask
timer (down counter). Set in it the mask period of CFG. The mask period is determined
by the clock specified by bits 1 and 0 of CDVC and the set value (N-1). If data is written
in CTMR, it is written also in the mask timer at the same time.
It is initialized to H'FF by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Mask period = N
clock cycle
(3) Operation
Frequency divider
The CFG pulses output from the capstan motor are sent to internal circuitry as the CFG
signal via the zero-cross type comparator. The CFG signal, shaped into a rectangular
waveform by a reshaping circuit, is divided by the CFG frequency dividers, and used in
servo control. The rising edge or both edges of the CFG signal can be selected for the
frequency divider.
The CFG frequency dividers comprises a 7-bit frequency divider with a mask timer for
capstan speed control (DVCFG signal generator) and a 7-bit frequency divider for capstan
phase control (DVCFG2 signal generator).
The DVCFG signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division
register1: CDIVR1), a 7-bit down-counter, and a 6-bit mask timer (with settable mask
interval). Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in 7-
bit CDIVR1. When the frequency-division value is written in CDIVR1, it is also written
in the down-counter. After frequency division of a CFG signal for which the edge has
been selected, the signal is sent via the mask timer to the capstan speed error detector as
the DVCFG signal.
The DVCFG2 signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division
register 2: CDIVR2) and a 7-bit down-counter. The 7-bit frequency divider does not have
a mask timer. Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in
CDIVR2. When the frequency-division value is written in CDIVR2, it is also written in
the down-counter. After frequency division of a CFG signal for which the edge has been
selected, the signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector and the Timer L as the
DVCFG2 signal. Frequency division starts when the frequency-division value is written.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 790 of 1037
When the DVTRG bit in the CDVC register is set to 0, reloading is executed with the
switchover timing from PB (ASM) mode to REC mode. To switch from REF30 to
CREF, change the settings of bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection
control register (CPGCR). If synchronization is necessary for phase control, this can be
provided by writing the frequency-division value in CDIVR2.
The down-counters are decremented on rising edges of the CFG signal when the CRF bit
is 0 in the DVCFG control register (CDVC), and on both edges when the CRF bit is 1.
Figure 28.66 shows examples of CFG frequency division waveforms.
CFG
CRF bit=1
CDIVR=00
CRF bit=0
CDIVR=00
CRF bit=0
CDIVR=01
CRF bit=0
CDIVR=02
Figure 28.66 Frequency Division Waveforms
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 791 of 1037
Mask timer
The capstan mask timer is a 6-bit reload timer that uses a prescaled clock as a clock
source.
The mask timer is used for masking the DVCFG signal intended for controlling the
capstan speeds.
The capstan mask timer prevents edge detection to be carried out for an unnecessarily
long duration by masking the edge detection for a certain period. The above trouble can
result from abnormal revolution (runout) of the capstan motor because its revolution has
to cover a wide range speeds from the slow/still up to the high speed search.
The capstan mask timer is started by output of a pulse edge in the divided CFG signal
(DVCFG). While the timer is running, a mask signal disables the output of further
DVCFG pulses. The mask signal is shown in Figure 28.67.
The mask timer status can be recognized by reading the CMK flag in the DVCFG control
register (CDVC).
Mask
DVCFG
Mask timer
underflow
Figure 28.67 Mask Signal
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 792 of 1037
Figures 28.68 and 28.69 show examples of CFG mask timer operations.
CFG (racing)
Edge detect
Cleared by writing 0
after reading 1
Capstan motor
mask timer
Mask interval
Mask interval
DVCFG
MCGin flag
Figure 28.68 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor is Racing)
CFG
Edge detect
Capstan motor
mask timer
Mask interval
Mask interval
Figure 28.69 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor is Operating Normally)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 793 of 1037
28.14.4
DFG Noise Removal Circuit
(1) Block Diagram
Figure 28.70 shows the block diagram of the DFG noise removal circuit.
Edge
detection
Delay circuit
DFG
S
Q
R
NCDFG
delay = 2
Edge
detection
Figure 28.70 DFG Noise Removal Circuit
(2) Register Descriptions
Register configuration
Table 28.24 shows the register configuration of the DFG mask circuit.
Table 28.24 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
FG control register
FGCR
W
Byte
H'FE
H'FD09E
FG Control Register (FGCR)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
DRF
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Selects the edge of the DFG noise removal signal (NCDFG) to be sent to the drum speed error
detector. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 7 to 1 are reserved. No
write in them is valid.
It is initialized to H'FE by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
The edge selection circuit is located in the drum speed error detector, and outputs the register
output to the drum speed error detector.
Bits 7 to 1: Reserved
No write in them is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 794 of 1037
Bit 0: DFG Edge Selection Bit (DRF)
Selects the edge of the NCDFG signal used in the drum speed error detector.
Bit 0
DRF
Description
0
Selects the rising edge of NCDFG signal
(Initial value)
1
Selects the falling edge of NCDFG signal
(3) Description of Operation
The DFG noise removal circuits generates a signal (NCDFG signal) with a delay circuit as a
result of removing noise (signal fluctuation smaller than 2
) from the DFG signal. The
resulted NCDFG signal is behind the time when the DFG signal was detected by 2
. Figure
28.71 shows the NCDFG signal.
DFG
NCDFG
Noise
2
2
2
= fosc
Figure 28.71 NCDFG signal
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 795 of 1037
28.15
Sync Signal Detector
28.15.1
Overview
This block performs detection of the horizontal sync signal (Hsync) and vertical sync signal
(Vsync) from the composite sync signal (Csync), noise counting, and field detection.
It detects the horizontal and vertical sync signals by setting threshold in the register and based on
the servo clock (
s = fosc/2). Noise masking is possible during the detection of the horizontal
sync signals, and if any Hsync is missing, it can be supplemented. Also, if total volume of the
noise detected in one frame of Csync amounted over a specified volume, the detector generates a
noise detection interrupt.
Note:
This circuit detects a pulse with a specific width set by the threshold register. It does not
classify or restore the sync signal to a formal one.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 796 of 1037
28.15.2
Block Diagram
Figure 28.72 shows the block diagram of the sync signal detector.
W
H threshold
register
W
V threshold
register
(6bit)
(4bit)
HTR
VTR
W
W
H supplement
start time register
Supplemented H pulse width
register
(8bit)
(4bit)
HPWR
HRTR
W
W
(6bit)
(8bit)
NDR
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
R
NOIS
H counter (8-bit)
Noise detector
Supplement control &
noise mask control circuit
Up/Down
counter (6-bit)
SEPH
Selection of
polarity
Noise detection
window
Noise detection interrupt
VD interrupt
Csync
Sync signal detector
H reload counter (8-bit)
Field detector
Noise counter (10-bit)
Toggle
circuit
Clear
FLD
SYCT
VD(SEPV)
FILED
NOISE
IRRSNC
OSCH
NIS/VD
SYNCR
NWR
Internal bus
s = fosc/2
s/2
Noise detection
window register
Noise
detection register
Figure 28.72 Block Diagram of the Sync Signal Detector
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 797 of 1037
28.15.3
Pin Configuration
Table 28.25 shows the pin configuration of the sync signal detector.
Table 28.25 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
I/O
Function
Composite sync signal input pin
Csync
Input
Composite sync signal input
28.15.4
Register Configuration
Table 28.26 shows the register configuration of the sync signal detector.
Table 28.26 Register Configuration
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Vertical sync signal
threshold register
VTR
W
Byte
H'C0
H'FD0B0
Horizontal sync signal
threshold register
HTR
W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD0B1
H supplement start time
setting register
HRTR
W
Byte
H'00
H'FD0B2
Supplemented H pulse
width setting register
HPWR
W
Byte
H'F0
H'FD0B3
Noise detection window
setting register
NWR
W
Byte
H'C0
H'FD0B4
Noise detector register
NDR
W
Byte
H'00
H'FD0B5
Sync signal control
register
SYNCR
R/W
Byte
H'F8
H'FD0B6
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 798 of 1037
28.15.5
Register Descriptions
(1) Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
W
W
W
VTR5
VTR4
VTR3
VTR2
VTR1
VTR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/ W :
Sets the threshold for the vertical sync signal when the signal is detected from the composite
sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 5 to 0 (VTR5 to VTR0). Bits 7 and 6 are reserved.
VTR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 799 of 1037
(2) Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
HTR3
HTR2
HTR1
HTR0
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Sets the threshold for the horizontal sync signal when the signal is detected from the
composite sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 3 to 0 (HTR3 to HTR0). Bits 7 and 4 are
reserved.
HTR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. It is initialized to H'F0 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Figure 28.73 shows threshold and separated sync signals.
[Legend]
TH
Hpuls
TH
SEPV
Hpuls
: Cycle of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC: 63.6, PAL: 64 [ s])
: Pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC, PAL: 4.7 [ s])
VVTH
HVTH
: Value set as the threshold of the vertical sync signal
: Value set as the threshold of the horizontal sync signal
SEPV
SEPH
: Detected vertical sync signal
: Detected horizontal sync signal (before supplement)
TH
SEPH
Csync
H'00
Counter value
1/2 Hpuls
VD interrupt
Hpuls
VVTH
HVTH
Figure 28.73 Threshold and Separated Sync Signals
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 800 of 1037
Example
The set values to detect the vertical and horizontal sync signals (SEPV and SEPH) from
Csync are required to meet the following conditions. Assumed that the set values in the
VTHR register were VVTH and HVTH,
(VVTH-1)
2/
s > Hpuls
(HVTH-2)
2/
s
Hpuls/2 < (HVTH-1) )
2/
s
Where, Hpuls is pulse width (
s) of the horizontal sync signal, and
s is servo clock
(fosc/2).
Thus, if
s = 5 MHz, NTSC system is used,
(VVTH-1)
0.4
s > 4.7
s
VVTH
H'D
(HVTH-2)
0.4
s
2.35
s < (HVTH-1)
0.4
s
HVTH
H'7
Note:
This circuits detects the pulse with the width set in the VTHR register. If a noise pulse
with the width greater than the set value was input, the circuit regards that it detected a
sync signal.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 801 of 1037
(3) H Supplement Start Time Setting Register (HRTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
HRTR4
HRTR3
HRTR2
HRTR1
HRTR0
0
W
HRTR7
W
W
W
HRTR6
HRTR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Sets the timing to generate a supplementary pulse if a drop-out of a pulse of the horizontal
sync signal occurred.
HRTR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
((Value of HRTR7 to HRTR0) + 1)
2/
s = TH
where, TH is the cycle of the horizontal sync signal (
s), and
s is the servo clock (fosc/2).
Whether the horizontal sync signal exists or not is determined one clock before the
supplementary pulse is generated. Accordingly, set to HRTR7 to HRTR0 a value obtained
from the equation shown above plus one.
Also, HRTR7 to HRTR0 set the noise mask period. If the horizontal sync signal had the
normal pulses, it is masked in the mask period.
The start and end of the mask period are computed frm the rising edge of OSCH and SEPH,
respectively. See figure 28.75.
(4) Supplemented H Pulse Width Setting Register (HPWR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
W
W
HPWR3
HPWR2
HPWR1
HPWR0
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HPWR sets the pulse width of the supplemented pulse which is generated if a drop-out of a
pulse of the horizontal sync signal occurs. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved.
HRWR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. It is initialized to H'F0 by a reset or stand-by.
((Value of HPWR3 to HPWR0) + 1)
2/
s = Hpulse
Where, Hpuls is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (
s), and
s is the servo clock
(fosc/2).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 802 of 1037
(5) Noise Detection Window Setting Register (NWR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
W
W
W
NWR5
NWR4
NWR3
NWR2
NWR1
NWR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
NWR sets the period (window) when the drop-out of the pulse of the horizontal sync signal is
detected and the noise is counted. Set the timing of the noise detection window in bits 5 to 0.
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved.
NWR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read
out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Set the value of the noise detection window timing according to the following equation.
((Value of NWR5 to NWR0) + 1)
2/
s = 1/4
TH
Where, TH is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (
s), and
s is the servo clock
(fosc/2).
It is recommended that this timing value is set at about 1/4 of the cycle of the horizontal sync
signal.
(6) Noise Detection Register (NDR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
0
W
NDR7
W
W
W
NDR6
NDR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
NDR sets the noise detection level when the noise of the horizontal sync signal is detected
(when NWR is set). Set the noise detection level in bits 7 to 0.
NDR is an 8-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
The noise detector takes counts of the drop-outs of the horizontal sync signals and the noises
within the pulses, and if they amount to a count greater than four times of the value set in
NDR7 to NDR0, the detector sets the NOIS flag in the sync signal control register (SYNCR).
Set the noise detection level at 1/4 of the noise counts in one frame.
The noise counter is cleared whenever Vsync was detected twice.
See section 28.15.6, Noise Detection, for the details of the noise detection window and the
noise detection level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 803 of 1037
(7) Sync Signal Control Register (SYNCR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
1
4
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
R/W
NIS/VD
NOIS
FLD
SYCT
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SYNCR controls the noise detection, field detection, polarity of the sync signal input, etc.
SYNCR is an 8-bit register. It is initialized to H'F8 by a reset, stand-by or module stop. Bits
7 to 4 are reserved. No write is valid. Bit 1 is valid for read only.
Bits 7 to 4: Reserved
Writes are disabled. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 3: Interrupt Selection Bit (NIS/VD)
Selects whether an interrupt request is generated when a noise level was detected or when the
VD signal was detected.
Bit 3
NIS/VD
Description
0
Interrupt at the noise level
1
Interrupt at VD
(Initial value)
Bit 2: Noise Detection Flag (NOIS)
NOIS is a status flag indicating that the noise counts reached at more than four times of the
value set in NDR. The flag is cleared only by writing 0 after reading 1. Care is required
because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 2
NOIS
Description
0
Noise count is smaller than four times of the value set in NDR
(Initial value)
1
Noise count is equal to or greater than four times of the value set in NDR
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 804 of 1037
Bit 1: Field Detection Flag (FLD)
Indicates whether the field currently being scanned is even or odd. See figure 28.74.
Bit 1
FLD
Description
0
Odd field
(Initial value)
1
Even field
Bit 0: Sync Signal Polarity Selection Bit (SYCT)
Selects the polarity of the sync signal (Csync) to be input.
Bit 0
SYCT
Description
Polarity
0
(Initial value)
Positive
1
Negative
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 805 of 1037
Field detection
flag (FLD)
SEPV
Noise detection
window
Composite sync
signal
(Csync)
Even field
(a) Even field (EVEN)
Field detection
flag (FLD)
SEPV
Noise detection
window
Composite sync
signal
(Csync)
Odd field
(b) Odd field (ODD)
Figure 28.74 Field Detection
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 806 of 1037
28.15.6
Noise Detection
If drop-out of a pulse of the horizontal sync signal occurred, set a supplemented pulse at the
timing set in HPWR and with the set pulse width.
Set the noise detection window with HWR of about 1/4 of the horizontal sync signal, and the
pulse with equal High and Low periods will be obtained.
(1) Example of Setting
Assumed that a supplemented pulse is set when fosc = 10MHz under the conditions
s =
5MHz, NTSC:TH = 63.6 (
s) and Hpuls = 4.7 (
s), the set values of the supplemented pulse
timing (HRTR7-0), supplemented pulse width (HPWR3-0) and noise detection window
timing (NWR5-0) are expressed by the following equations.
(Value of HRTR7-0)
2/
s = TH
((Value of HPWR3-0) + 1)
2/
s = Hpuls
((Value of NWR5-0) + 1)
2/
s = 1/4
TH
Where, TH is the cycle of the horizontal sync signal (
s), Hpuls is the pulse width of the
horizontal sync signal (
s) and
s is the servo clock (Hz) (fosc/2).
Accordingly,
(Value of HRTR7 to HRTR0)
0.4 (
s) = 63.6 (
s)
HRTR7-0=H'9F
((Value of HPWR3 to HPWR0) + 1)
0.4 (
s) = 4.7 (
s)
HRTR3-0=H'B
((Value of NWR5 to NWR0) + 1)
0.4 (
s) = 16 (
s)
NWR5-0=H'27
Also, the noise mask period is computed as follows.
((Value of HRTR7 to HRTR0) + 1)
-
24)
2/
s = 54 (
s)
Where, 24 is a constant required for a structural reason.
Figure 28.75 shows the set period for HRTR, HPWR and NWR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 807 of 1037
[Legend]
SEPH
Noise detection
window
Noise mask for
OSCH
OSCH
Noise mask for
H counter
H reload
counter
H counter
SEPH
c
OSCH
: Horizontal sync signal after detection
: Horizontal sync signal after supplement
a
b
: Value set for the noise detection window (NWR5 to NWR0)
: Value set for the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NPWR3 to NPWR0)
c
a, b, c
: Value set for supplement timing (HRTR7 to HRTR0)
: Complements of 1 of a,b,c, respectively
H ' E 8
TH
:Complement of 2 of multiplier 24 in the equation for the noise mask period
(The noise mask period ends 24 counts before the overflow of H reload counter.)
: Cycle of the horizontal sync signal
(NTSC:63.6 [ms], PAL:64[ms])
TM : Timing at which the noise mask period ends.
Drop-out of the horizontal
sync signal
Ignore signal during noise
mask period.
TH
a
b
H'00
OVF
H'E8
c
a
Mask
period
Period determined
by NWR5 to NWR0
Mask
period
TM
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
TH
Don't mask
immediately
after
supplement
period deter-
mined
by a and a
Period determined
by HRTR7 to HRTR0
period determined
by c and H'E8
Period determined
by HPWR3 to HPER0
period
determined
by b
Do mask also im-
mediately after
supplement.
Figure 28.75 Set Period for HRTR, HPWR and NWR
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 808 of 1037
(2) Operation to Detect Noise
The noise detector considers an irregular pulse of the composite sync signal (Csync) and a
chip of a pulse of the horizontal sync signal within a frame as noise. The noise counter takes
counts of the irregular pulses during the High period of the noise detection window and the
chips and drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal pulses during the Low period. Also, it
counts more than one irregular pulses as one. The noise counter is cleared at every frame
(Vsync is detected twice).
The equivalent pulse contained in 9H of the vertical sync signal is counted also as an
irregular pulse.
It sets the noise detection flag (NOIS) in the sync signal control register (SYNCR) at 1 if the
count of the irregular pulses + the count of the pulse chips and drop-outs of the horizontal
sync signal > 4
(value of NDR7 to NDR0).
See section 28.15.5 (7), Sync Signal Control Register (SYNCR) for the NOIS bit.
Figure 28.76 shows the operation of the noise detection.
Csync
Noise detection
window
Noise detection
flag (NOIS)
Noise counter
Noise detection
level
Noise detection
flag is set.
NOIS : Bit 2 of the sync signal control register (SYNCR)
Noise
Figure 28.76 Operation of the Noise Detection
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 809 of 1037
28.15.7
Sync Signal Detector Activation
The sync signal detector starts operation by release of reset, or by accepting input of a sync
signal after its transition from power-down mode to active mode and release of module stop.
The signal given to the detector is the polarity pulse assigned by the SYCT bit of the sync signal
control register (SYNCR). The detector starts operation even if this pulse was a noise pulse with
a width short of the regular width. The minimum pulse width which can activate the detector is
not constant depending on the internal operation of the input circuit. Accordingly, if the assured
activation of the detector is required, input a pulse with a width greater than 4/
s (
s = fosc/2
(Hz)). In such a case, care is required to noise, etc., because even a pulse with a width smaller
than 4
/s may cause activation.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 810 of 1037
28.16
Servo Interrupt
28.16.1
Overview
The interrupt exception processing of the servo module is started by one of ten factors, i.e. the
drum speed error detector (
2), drum phase error detector, capstan speed error detector (
2),
capstan phase error detector, HSW timing generator (
2), sync detector and CTL circuit. For
these interrupt factors, see each of their circuit sections in this manual.
Also, see section 5, Exception Handling.
28.16.2
Register Configuration
Table 28.27 shows the list of the registers which control the interrupt of the servo section.
Table 28.27 Registers which Control the Interrupt of the Servo Section
Name
Abbrev.
R/W
Size
Initial Value
Address
Servo interrupt
permission register 1
SIENR1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD0B8
Servo interrupt
permission register 2
SIENR2
R/W
Byte
H'FC
H'FD0B9
Servo interrupt request
register 1
SIRQR1
R/W
Byte
H'00
H'FD0BA
Servo interrupt request
register 2
SIRQR2
R/W
Byte
H'FC
H'FD0BB
28.16.3
Register Description
(1) Servo Interrupt Permission Register 1 (SIENR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
IECAP3
IECAP2
IECAP1
IEHSW2
IEHSW1
0
R/W
IEDRM3
R/W
R/W
R/W
IEDRM2
IEDRM1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIENR1 controls the permission and prohibition of the interrupt of the servo section. SIENR1 is
an 8-bit readable/writable register. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 811 of 1037
Bit 7: Drum Phase Error Detection Interrupt Permission Bit (IEDRM3)
Bit 7
IEDRM3
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRDRM3
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRDRM3
Bit 6: Drum Speed Error Detection (lock detection) Interrupt Permission Bit (IEDRM2)
Bit 6
IEDRM2
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRDRM2
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRDRM2
Bit 5: Drum Speed Error Detection (OVF, latch) Interrupt Permission Bit (IEDRM1)
Bit 5
IEDRM1
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRDRM1
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRDRM1
Bit 4: Capstan Phase Error Detection Interrupt Permission Bit (IECAP3)
Bit 4
IECAP3
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRCAP3
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRCAP3
Bit 3: Capstan Speed Error Detection (lock detection) Interrupt Permission Bit (IECAP2)
Bit 3
IECAP2
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRCAP2
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRCAP2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 812 of 1037
Bit 2: Capstan Speed Error Detection (OVF, latch) Interrupt Permission Bit (IECAP1)
Bit 2
IECAP1
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRCAP1
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRCAP1
Bit 1: HSW Timing Generation (counter clear, capture) Interrupt Permission bit
(IEHSW2)
Bit 1
IEHSW2
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRHSW2
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRHSW2
Bit 0: HSW Timing Generation (OVW, matching, STRIG) Interrupt Permission bit
(IEHSW1)
Bit 0
IEHSW1
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRHSW1
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRHSW1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 813 of 1037
(2) Servo Interrupt Permission Register 2 (SIENR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/W
IESNC
IECTL
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIENR2 controls the permission and prohibition of the interrupt of the servo section. SIENR2 is
an 8-bit readable/writable register. It is initialized to H'FC by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bits 7 to 2: Reserved
No read or write is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 1: Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Permission Bit (IESNC)
Bit 1
IESNC
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt (interrupt to the vertical sync signal) request through IRRSNC
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRSNC
Bit 0: CTL Interrupt Permission Bit (IECTL)
Bit 0
IECTL
Description
0
Prohibits the interrupt request through IRRCTL
(Initial value)
1
Permits the interrupt request through IRRCTL
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 814 of 1037
(3) Servo Interrupt Request Register 1 (SIRQR1)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
0
R/(W)
*
5
6
0
7
IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1
0
R/(W)
*
IRRDRM3
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIRQR1 displays an occurrence of an interrupt request of the servo section. If the interrupt
request occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
SIRQR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Writing is allowed only in the case of writing 0 to
clear the flag. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bit 7: Drum Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM3)
Bit 7
IRRDRM3
Description
0
No interrupt request from the drum phase error detector
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the drum phase error detector
Bit 6: Drum Speed Error Detector (lock detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM2)
Bit 6
IRRDRM2
Description
0
No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (lock detection)
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection)
Bit 5: Drum Speed Error Detector (OVF, latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM1)
Bit 5
IRRDRM1
Description
0
No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) (Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 815 of 1037
Bit 4: Capstan Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP3)
Bit 4
IRRCAP3
Description
0
No interrupt request from the capstan phase error detector
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the capstan phase error detector
Bit 3: Capstan Speed Error Detector (lock detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP2)
Bit 3
IRRCAP2
Description
0
No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (lock detection)
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection)
Bit 2: Capstan Speed Error Detector (OVF, latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP1)
Bit 2
IRRCAP1
Description
0
No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch)(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch)
Bit 1: HSW Timing Generator (counter clear, capture) Interrupt Permission Bit
(IRRHSW2)
Bit 1
IRRHSW2
Description
0
No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture)
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture)
Bit 0: HSW Timing Generator (OVW, matching, STRIG) Interrupt Permission Bit
(IRRHSW1)
Bit 0
IRRHSW1
Description
0
No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG)
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 816 of 1037
(4) Servo Interrupt Request Register 2 (SIRQR2)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
R/(W)
*
IRRSNC
IRRCTL
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIRQR2 displays an occurrence of an interrupt request of the servo section. If the interrupt
request occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
SIRQR2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Writing 0 after reading 1 is allowed; no other
writing is allowed. It is initialized to H'FC by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bits 7 to 2: Reserved
No read or write is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bit 1: Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRSNC)
Bit 1
IRRSNC
Description
0
No interrupt request from the sync signal detector (VD, noise)
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from the sync signal detector (VD, noise)
Bit 0: CTL Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCTL)
Bit 0
IRRCTL
Description
0
No interrupt request from CTL
(Initial value)
1
Interrupt requested from CTL
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 817 of 1037
28.17
Module Stop Control Reigster (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, that perform module stop mode
control. When the MSTP1 bit is set to 1, servo circuit and 12-bit PWM stop the operation at the
end of the bus cycle and enter to the module stop mode. For details, see 4.5 Module stop mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 1: Module Stop 1 (MSTP1)
This bit specifies module stop mode of the servo circuit and 12-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 1
MSTP1
Description
0
Clear the module stop mode of the Servo Circuit and 12-bit PWM
1
Set the module stop mode of the Servo Circuit and 12-bit PWM
(Initial value)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 818 of 1037
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 819 of 1037
Section 29 Electrical Characteristics
29.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 29.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 29.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Power supply voltage
Vcc
-
0.3 to +7.0
V
Input voltage (ports other than port 0)
Vin
-
0.3 to Vcc+0.3
V
Input voltage (port 0)
Vin
-
0.3 to AVcc+0.3
V
A/D converter power supply voltage
AVcc
-
0.3 to +7.0
V
A/D converter input voltage
AVin
-
0.3 to AVcc+0.3
V
Servo power supply voltage
SVcc
-
0.3 to +7.0
V
Servo amplifier input voltage
Vin
-
0.3 to SVcc +
0.3
V
Operating temperature
Topr
-
20 to +75
C
Operating temperature (At Flash memory
program/erase)
Topr
0 to +75
C
Storage temperature
Tstr
-
55 to +125
C
Notes: 1. Permanent damage may occur to the chip if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded.
Normal operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics.
Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
2. All voltages are relative to Vss = SVss = AVss = 0.0 V.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 820 of 1037
29.2
Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194
29.2.1
DC Characteristics of HD64F2194
Table 29.2 DC Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
MD0
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.9 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
5(6
,
10,
, FWE,
,&
,
,54
to
,54
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.9 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
Vcc0.5
Vcc+0.3
OSC1, X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
Vcc0.3
Vcc+0.3
0.7 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
Input high
voltage
V
IH
Csync
0.7 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 821 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
MD0
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.3
0.1 Vcc
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
5(6
,
10,
, FWE,
,&
,
,54
to
,54
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.1 Vcc
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
-
0.3
0.5
OSC1, X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.3
-
0.3
0.3 Vcc
P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
Input low
voltage
V
IL
Csync
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
V
-
I
OH
=1.0mA
Vcc1.0
V
-
I
OH
=0.5mA
Vcc
0.5
V
Refer-
ence
value
Output
high
voltage
V
OH
SO1, SO2, SCK1,
SCK2, PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM4, PWM14,
STRB, BUZZ, TMO,
TMOW, FTOA, FTOB,
PPG70 to PPG77,
RP0 to RP7,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
-
I
OH
=0.1mA
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
Vcc0.5
V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 822 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
SO1, SO2, SCK1,
SCK2, PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM4,
PWM14, STRB, BUZZ,
TMO, TMOW, FTOA,
FTOB, PPG70 to
PPG77,
RP0 to RP7,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
PS0 to PS4
I
OL
=0.4mA
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.4
V
I
OL
=20mA
1.5
V
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
Output
low
voltage
V
OL
P80 to P87,
I
OL
=0.4mA
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
0.4
V
MD0, OSC1
5(6
,
10,
, FWE,
,54
to
,54
,
,&
Vin=0.5 to Vcc
0.5V
1.0
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
Vin=0.5 to Vcc
0.5V
1.0
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P53,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
Vin=0.5 to Vcc
0.5V
1.0
Input
/output
leakage
current
I
IL
P00 to P07,
AN8 to ANB
Vin=0.5 to
AVcc0.5V
1.0
A
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 823 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Pull-up
MOS
current
-
Ip
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
Vcc=5.0V,
Vin=0V
50
300
A
Note 1
All input pins except
power supply, P13, P23,
P24 and analog system
pins
fin=1 MHz,
Vin=0V,
Ta=25
C
15
pF
Input
capaci-
tance
Cin
P13, P23, P24
fin=1 MHz,
Vin=0V,
Ta=25
C
20
pF
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz,
High-speed
mode
50
70
mA
Note 2
Active
mode
current
dissipa-
tion (CPU
operating)
I
OPE
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz,
Medium-speed
mode (1/64)
35
mA
Refer-
ence
value
Active
mode
current
dissipa-
tion (reset)
I
RES
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
--
30
45
mA
Note 2
Sleep
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SLEEP
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
High-speed
mode
20
30
mA
Note 2
Vcc=2.7V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/2)
90
150
Note 2
Subactive
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SUB
Vcc
Vcc=2.7V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/8)
40
A
Refer-
ence
value,
Note 2
Vcc=2.7V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/2)
15
30
Note 2
Subsleep
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SUBSLP
Vcc
Vcc=2.7V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/8)
10
A
Refer-
ence
value,
Note 2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 824 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Vcc=2.7V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
5
10
A
Note 2
Watch
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
WATCH
Vcc
Vcc=5.0V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
10
A
Reference
value
Note 2
Standby
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
STBY
Vcc
X1=Vcc,
Without 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
5
A
Note 2
RAM data
retaining
voltage in
standby
mode
V
STBY
2.0
V
Notes: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use.
1. Current value when the relevant bit of the pull-up MOS select register (PUR1 to PUR3)
is set to 1.
2. The current on the pull-up MOS or the output buffer excluded.
Table 29.3 Pin Status at Current Dissipation Measurement
Mode
RES pin
Internal State
Pin
Oscillator Pin
Active mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc
Operating
Vcc
Sleep mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc
CPU and servo
circuits stopped.
Vcc
Reset
Vss
Reset
Vcc
Standby mode
Vcc
All stopped
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
X1 pin = Vcc
Subactive mode
Vcc
CPU and timer A
operating
Vcc
Subsleep mode
Vcc
Timer A operating
Vcc
Watch mode
Vcc
Timer A operating
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
Crystal oscillator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 825 of 1037
Table 29.4 Bus Drive Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless otherwise
specified.) Applicable pin: SCL, SDA
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
V
T
-
0.2Vcc
V
V
T
+
0.7Vcc
V
Schmidt
trigger
input
voltage
V
T
+
V
T
-
SCL, SDA
0.05Vcc
V
Input High
voltage
V
IH
SCL, SDA
0.7Vcc
Vcc+0.5
V
Input Low
voltage
V
IL
SCL, SDA
-
0.5
0.2Vcc
V
I
OL
=8mA
0.5
Output
Low
voltage
V
OL
SCL, SDA
I
OL
=3mA
0.4
V
SCL and
SDA
output fall
time
t
of
SCL, SDA
20+
0.1Cb
250
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 826 of 1037
29.2.2
Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
The specifications for the digital pins are shown below.
Table 29.5 Allowable Output Currents
(Conditions: Vcc = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C)
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Notes
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
2
mA
1
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
22
mA
2
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
10
mA
3
Allowable output current (from chip)
-
I
O
2
mA
4
Total allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
80
mA
5
Total allowable output current (from
chip)
-
I
O
50
mA
6
Notes: 1. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
(except for port 8, SCL and SDA).
2. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
. This applies to port 8.
3. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
. This applies to SCL and SDA.
4. The allowable output current is the maximum value of the current flowing from V
CC
to
each I/O pin.
5. The total allowable input current is the sum of the currents flowing from all I/O pins to
V
SS
simultaneously.
6. The total allowable output current is the sum of the currents flowing from V
CC
to all I/O
pins.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 827 of 1037
29.2.3
AC Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
Table 29.6 AC Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Clock oscillation
frequency
f
OSC
OSC1, OSC2
8
10
MHz
Clock cycle time
t
cyc
OSC1, OSC2
100
125
ns
Figure 29.1
Subclock
oscillation
frequency
f
X
X1, X2
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
32.768
kHz
Subclock cycle
time
t
subcyc
X1, X2
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
30.518
s
Figure 29.2
OSC1, OSC2
Crystal oscillator
10
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
t
rc
X1, X2
32kHz crystal
oscillator
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
2
s
External clock high
width
t
CPH
OSC1
40
ns
External clock low
width
t
CPL
OSC1
40
ns
External clock rise
time
t
CPr
OSC1
10
ns
External clock fall
time
t
CPf
OSC1
10
ns
Figure 29.1
External clock
stabilization delay
time
t
DEXT
OSC1
500
s
Figure 29.3
Subclock input low
level pulse width
t
EXCLL
X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
15.26
s
Subclock input high
level pulse width
t
EXCLH
X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
15.26
s
Subclock input rise
time
t
EXCLr
X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
10
ns
Subclock input fall
time
t
ECXLf
X1
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
10
ns
Figure 29.2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 828 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
5(6
pin low level
width
t
REL
5(6
Vcc=2.7V to
5.5V
20
t
cyc
Figure
29.4
Input pin high level
width
t
IH
,54
to
,54
,
10,
,
,&
,
$'75*
,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG
Vcc=2.7V to
5.5V
2
t
cyc
t
subcyc
Input pin low level
width
t
IL
,54
to
,54
,
10,
,
,&
,
$'75*
,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG
Vcc=2.7V to
5.5V
2
t
cyc
t
subcyc
Figure
29.5
t
cyc
t
CPH
V
IL
V
IH
OSC1
t
CPL
t
CPf
t
CPr
Figure 29.1 System Clock Timing
t
EXCLf
t
subcyc
t
EXCLH
t
EXCLL
t
EXCLr
V
IL
V
IH
X1
Vcc 0.5
Figure 29.2 Subclock Input Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 829 of 1037
Vcc
OSC1
t
DEXT
*
RES
(Internal)
4.0V
The t
DEXT
includes the RES pin Low level width 20 t
cyc
.
Note:
*
Figure 29.3 External Clock Stabilization Delay Timing
RES
V
IL
t
REL
Figure 29.4 Reset Input Timing
t
IL
t
IH
V
IH
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
NMI, IC,
ADTRG, TMBI,
FTIA, FTIB,
FTIC, FTID,
TRIG
V
IL
Figure 29.5 Input Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 830 of 1037
29.2.4
Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
Table 29.7 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
Asynchroniza-
tion
4
SCK1
Clock
synchronization
6
Input clock cycle
t
scyc
SCK2
2
t
cyc
Input clock pulse
width
t
SCKW
SCK1,
SCK2
0.4
0.6
t
scyc
SCK1
1.5
t
cyc
Input clock rise time
t
SCKr
SCK2
60
ns
SCK1
1.5
t
cyc
Input clock fall time
t
SCKf
SCK2
60
ns
Figure
29.6
Transmit data delay
time (clock sync)
t
TXD
SO1
100
ns
Receive data setup
time (clock sync)
t
RXS
SI1
100
ns
Receive data hold
time (clock sync)
t
RXH
SI1
100
ns
Figure
29.7
Transmit data output
delay time
t
TXD
SO2
200
ns
Receive data setup
time (clock sync)
t
RXS
SI2
180
ns
Receive data hold
time (clock sync)
t
RXH
SI2
180
ns
Figure
29.7
&6
setup time
t
CSS
&6
1
t
scyc
&6
hold time
t
CSH
&6
1
t
scyc
Figure
29.8
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 831 of 1037
t
SCKf
t
SCKr
V
IL
or V
OL
V
IH
or V
OH
SCK1
t
SCKW
t
scyc
Figure 29.6 SCK1 Clock Timing
V
IL
V
IH
t
TXD
SCK1,
SCK2
SO1,
SO2
SI1,
SI2
t
RXS
t
RXH
Figure 29.7 SCI I/O Timing/Clock Synchronization Mode
V
IH
V
IH
V
IL
CS
SCK2
t
CSH
t
CSS
Figure 29.8 SCI2 Chip Select Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 832 of 1037
LSI output pin
Timing reference level
V
OH
: 2.0V
V
OL
: 0.8V
30pF
12k
2.4k
Vcc
Figure 29.9 Output Load Conditions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 833 of 1037
Table 29.8 I
2
C Bus Interface Timing of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
SCL input cycle time
t
SCL
12
t
cyc
SCL input high pulse width
t
SCLH
3
t
cyc
SCL input low pulse width
t
SCLL
5
t
cyc
SCL, SDA input rise time
t
sr
7.5
*
1
t
cyc
SCL, SDA input fall time
t
sf
300
ns
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
t
sp
1
t
cyc
SDA input bus free time
t
BUF
5
t
cyc
Start condition input hold time
t
STAH
3
t
cyc
Re-transmit start condition
input setup time
t
STAS
3
t
cyc
Stop condition input setup time
t
STOS
3
t
cyc
Data input setup time
t
SDAS
0.5
t
cyc
Data input hold time
t
SDAH
0
ns
SCL, SDA capacity load
C
b
400
pF
Figure
29.10
Note:
1. Can also be set to 17.5 t
cyc
depending on the selection of clock to be used by the I
2
C
module.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 834 of 1037
t
STAH
t
Sr
t
SDAH
t
SCL
t
SCLL
t
SCLH
t
Sf
t
STAS
t
SP
t
STOS
t
SDAS
V
IL
V
IH
SDA
SCL
P
*
S
*
Sr
*
P
*
S, P and Sr denote the following:
S : Start conditions
P : Stop conditions
Sr: Re-transmit start conditions
Note:
*
t
BUF
Figure 29.10 I
2
C Bus Interface I/O Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 835 of 1037
29.2.5
A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
Table 29.9 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVcc
AVcc
Vcc-
0.3
Vcc
Vcc+
0.3
V
Analog input
voltage
A
VIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
AVss
AVcc
V
A
ICC
AVcc
AVcc=5.0V
2.0
mA
Analog power
supply current
A
ISTOP
AVcc
Vcc=2.7 to 5.5V
At reset and in
power-down mode
10
A
Analog input
capacitance
C
AIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
30
pF
Allowable signal
source impedance
R
AIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
10
k
Resolution
10
Bit
Absolute accuracy
AVcc=5.0V
4
LSB
Conversion time
13.4
26.6
s
Note: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use. Set AVcc
= Vcc and AVss = Vss.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 836 of 1037
29.2.6
Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
Table 29.10 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(reference values)
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25
C unless otherwise specified.)
Reference Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
32.0
34.0
36.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
34.5
36.5
38.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
37.0
39.0
41.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
39.5
41.5
43.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
42.0
44.0
46.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
44.5
46.5
48.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
47.0
49.0
51.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
49.5
51.5
53.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
52.0
54.0
56.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
54.5
56.5
58.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
57.0
59.0
61.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
59.5
61.5
63.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
62.0
64.0
66.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
64.5
66.5
68.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
67.0
69.0
71.0
PB-CTL
input
amplifier
voltage
gain
CTL (+)
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
69.5
71.5
73.5
dB
V+TH
AC coupling,
C=0.1
F Typ (non pol)
250
PB-CTL
Schmidt
input
V
-
TH
CTLSMT (i)
AC coupling,
C=0.1
F Typ (non pol)
-
250
mVp
Analog
switch ON
resistance
REB
150
CTL (+)
8
REC-CTL
output
current
ICTL
CTL (
-
)
Series resistance = 0
8
mA
REC-CTL
inter-pin
resistance
RCTL
10
k
CTL
reference
output
voltage
CTLREF
1/2
SVcc
V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 837 of 1037
Reference Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
CFG pin bias
voltage
CFG
1/2
SV
CC
V
CFG input level
CFG
AC coupling,
C=1
F Typ, f=1kHz
1.0
Vpp
CFG input
impedance
CFG
10
k
V+THCF
Rise threshold level
2.25
CFG input
threshold voltage
V
-
THCF
CFG
Fall threshold level
2.75
V
V+THDF
Rising edge
Schmidt level
1.95
DFG Schmidt input
V
-
THDF
DFG
Falling edge
Schmidt level
1.85
V
V+THDP
Rising edge
Schmidt level
3.55
DPG Schmidt input
V
-
THDP
DPG
Falling edge
Schmidt level
3.45
V
V
OH
-
I
OH
=0.1mA
4.0
V
OM
No load, Hiz=1
2.5
3-level output
voltage
V
OL
Vpulse
I
OL
=0.1mA
1.0
V
3-level output pin
divided voltage
resistance
Vpulse
15
k
CFG Duty
CFG
AC coupling,
C=1
F Typ, f=1kHz
48
52
%
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 838 of 1037
Table 29.11 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25
C unless otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
Digital input high
voltage
V
IH
0.8
Vcc
Vcc+
0.3
Digital input low
voltage
V
IL
COMP,
EXCTL,
EXCAP,
EXTTRG
-
0.3
0.2
Vcc
V
Digital output high
voltage
V
OH
-
I
OH
=1mA
Vcc
1.0
Digital output low
voltage
V
OL
H.AmpSW,
C.Rotary,
VIDEOFF,
AUDIOFF,
DRMPWM,
CAPPWM,
SV1, SV2
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
Current dissipation
I
CCSV
SVcc
At no load
5
10
mA
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 839 of 1037
29.2.7
FLASH Memory Characteristics
Table 29.12 shows the flash memory characteristics.
Table 29.12 Flash Memory Characteristics (Preliminary)
Conditions: Vcc = 5.0 V
10%, AVcc = 5.0 V
10%, Vss = AVss = 0 V, Ta = 0 to +75
C
(operating temperature range at programming/erasing)
Item
Symbol
Test
conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Programming time
*
1
*
2
*
4
t
P
10
200
ms/
32 bytes
Erasing time
*
1
*
3
*
5
t
E
100
1200
ms/
block
No. of reprogramming
N
WEC
100
Times
Wait time after SWE-bit setting
*
1
x
10
s
Wait time after PSU-bit setting
*
1
y
50
s
Wait time after P-bit setting
*
1
*
4
z
150
200
s
Wait time after P-bit clearing
*
1
10
s
Wait time after PSU-bit clearing
*
1
10
s
Wait time after PV-bit setting
*
1
4
s
Wait time after dummy write
*
1
2
s
Wait time after PV-bit clearing
*
1
4
s
At
programming
Maximum No. of programmings
*
1
*
4
*
5
N
When z
= 200
s
1000
Times
Wait time after SWE-bit setting
*
1
x
10
s
Wait time after ESU-bit setting
*
1
y
200
s
Wait time after E-bit setting
*
1
*
6
z
5
10
ms
Wait time after E-bit clearing
*
1
10
s
Wait time after ESU-bit clearing
*
1
10
s
Wait time after EV-bit setting
*
1
20
s
Wait time after dummy write
*
1
2
s
Wait time after EV-bit clearing
*
1
5
s
At erasing
Maximum No. of erasings
*
1
*
6
N
120
240
Times
Notes: 1. Perform each time setting according to the programming/erasing algorithm.
2. Programming time per 32 bytes (total time of setting P-bit of the flash memory control
register. Programming verify time is not included).
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 840 of 1037
3. Time to erase 1 block (total time of setting E-bit of the flash memory control register.
Erasing verify time is not included).
4. Maximum programming time (t
P
(max.)) = Wait time after P-bit setting (z)
Maximum
No. of programming (N)
5. No. of times when wait time after P-bit setting (z) = 200
s. Set maximum No. of
programming shall be set less than maximum programming time (t
P
(max.)) according
to the actual setting (z).
6. Relationship between wait time after E-bit setting (z) and maximum No. of erasing (N)
for maximum erasing time (t
E
(max.)) is as follows:
t
E
(max.) = Wait time after E-bit setting
Maximum No. of erasing (N)
Set the (z) and (N) values so that they satisfy the above equation.
(Ex.) When z = 5 [ms], N = 240 times
(Ex.) When z = 10 [ms], N = 120 times
29.2.8
Usage Note
The F-ZTAT version and the Mask ROM version satisfy the electrical characteristics indicated
in this manual, but the actual power value, operating margin, and noise margin may differ from
those in this manual, due to the difference of production process, on-chip ROM, layout pattern,
etc.
When executing the system examination using the F-ZTAT version, be sure to execute the same
system examination using the Mask ROM version when changing to the Mask ROM version.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 841 of 1037
29.3
Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
29.3.1
DC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
Table 29.13 DC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
MD0
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
0.9 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
5(6
,
10,
,
,&
,
,54
to
,54
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
0.9 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
Vcc0.5
Vcc+0.3
OSC1, X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
Vcc0.3
Vcc+0.3
0.7 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
0.8 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
Input high
voltage
V
IH
Csync
0.7 Vcc
Vcc+0.3
V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 842 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
MD0
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.1 Vcc
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
5(6
,
10,
,
,&
,
,54
to
,54
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.1 Vcc
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
-
0.3
0.5
OSC1, X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.3
-
0.3
0.3 Vcc
P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
Input low
voltage
V
IL
Csync
-
0.3
0.2 Vcc
V
-
I
OH
=1.0mA
Vcc1.0
V
-
I
OH
=0.5mA
Vcc
0.5
V
Refer-
ence
value
Output
high
voltage
V
OH
SO1, SO2, SCK1,
SCK2, PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM4,
PWM14, STRB, BUZZ,
TMO, TMOW, FTOA,
FTOB, PPG70 to
PPG77,
RP0 to RP7,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PS0 to PS4
-
I
OH
=0.1mA
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
Vcc0.5
V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 843 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
SO1, SO2, SCK1,
SCK2, PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM4,
PWM14, STRB, BUZZ,
TMO, TMOW, FTOA,
FTOB, PPG70 to
PPG77,
RP0 to RP7,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
PS0 to PS4
I
OL
=0.4mA
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
0.4
V
I
OL
=20mA
1.5
V
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
Output
low
voltage
V
OL
P80 to P87
I
OL
=0.4mA
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
0.4
V
MD0, OSC1
5(6
,
10,
,
,54
to
,54
,
,&
Vin=0.5 to
Vcc0.5V
1.0
SCK1, SCK2, SI1, SI2,
&6
, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
$'75*
Vin=0.5 to
Vcc0.5V
1.0
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
PS0 to PS4
Vin=0.5 to
Vcc0.5V
1.0
Input
/output
leakage
current
I
IL
P00 to P07,
AN8 to ANB
Vin=0.5 to
AVcc0.5V
1.0
A
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 844 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Pull-up
MOS
current
-
Ip
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37
Vcc=5.0V,
Vin=0V
50
300
A
Note 1
Input
capacity
Cin
All input pins except
power supply, P23, P24
and analog system pins
fin=1 MHz,
Vin=0V,
Ta=25
C
15
pF
P23, P24
fin=1 MHz,
Vin=0V,
Ta=25
C
20
pF
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
High-speed
mode
50
70
mA
Note 2
Active
mode
current
dissipa-
tion (CPU
operating)
I
OPE
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
Medium-speed
mode (1/64)
35
mA
Refer-
ence
value
Active
mode
current
dissipa-
tion (reset)
I
RES
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
25
45
mA
Note 2
Sleep
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SLEEP
Vcc
Vcc=5V,
f
OSC
=10 MHz
High-speed
mode
20
30
mA
Note 2
Vcc=2.5V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/2)
40
100
Note 2
Subactive
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SUB
Vcc
Vcc=2.5V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/8)
20
A
Refer-
ence
value,
Note 2
Vcc=2.5V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/2)
15
30
Note 2
Subsleep
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
SUBSLP
Vcc
Vcc=2.5V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
(
sub=
w/8)
10
A
Refer-
ence
value,
Note 2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 845 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Vcc=2.5V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
5
10
A
Note 2
Watch
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
WATCH
Vcc
Vcc=5.0V,
With 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
10
A
Reference
value
Note 2
Standby
mode
current
dissipa-
tion
I
STBY
Vcc
X1=Vcc,
Without 32kHz
crystal
oscillator
5
A
Note 2
RAM data
retaining
voltage in
standby
mode
V
STBY
Vcc
2.0
V
Notes: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use.
1. Current value when the relevant bit of the pull-up MOS select register (PUR1 to PUR3)
is set to 1.
2. The current on the pull-up MOS or the output buffer excluded.
Table 29.14 Pin Status at Current Dissipation Measurement
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Pin
Oscillator Pin
Active mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc
Operating
Vcc
Sleep mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc
CPU and servo
circuits stopped
Vcc
Reset
Vss
Reset
Vcc
Standby mode
Vcc
All stopped
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
X1 pin = Vcc
Subactive mode
Vcc
CPU and timer A
operating
Vcc
Subsleep mode
Vcc
Timer A operating
Vcc
Watch mode
Vcc
Timer A operating
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
Crystal oscillator
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 846 of 1037
Table 29.15 Bus Drive Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless otherwise
specified.) Applicable pin: SCL, SDA
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
V
T
-
0.2 Vcc
V
V
T
+
0.7 Vcc
V
Schmidt
trigger
input
voltage
V
T
+
-
V
T
-
SCL, SDA
0.05 Vcc
V
Input High
voltage
V
IH
SCL, SDA
0.7 Vcc
Vcc+0.5
V
Input Low
voltage
V
IL
SCL, SDA
-
0.5
0.2 Vcc
V
I
OL
=8mA
0.5
Output
Low
voltage
V
OL
SCL, SDA
I
OL
=3mA
0.4
V
SCL and
SDA
output fall
time
t
of
SCL, SDA
20+
0.1Cb
250
ns
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 847 of 1037
29.3.2
Allowable Output Currents of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
The specifications for the digital pins are shown below.
Table 29.16 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C)
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Notes
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
2
mA
1
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
22
mA
2
Allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
10
mA
3
Allowable output current (from chip)
-
I
O
2
mA
4
Total allowable input current (to chip)
I
O
80
mA
5
Total allowable output current (from
chip)
-
I
O
50
mA
6
Notes: 1. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
(except for port 8, SCL and SDA).
2. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
. This applies to port 8.
3. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to V
SS
. This applies to SCL and SDA.
4. The allowable output current is the maximum value of the current flowing from V
CC
to
each I/O pin.
5. The total allowable input current is the sum of the currents flowing from all I/O pins to
V
SS
simultaneously.
6. The total allowable output current is the sum of the currents flowing from V
CC
to all I/O
pins.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 848 of 1037
29.3.3
AC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
Table 29.17 AC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Clock oscillation
frequency
f
OSC
OSC1, OSC2
8
10
MHz
Clock cycle time
t
cyc
OSC1, OSC2
100
125
ns
Figure
29.11
Subclock
oscillation
frequency
f
X
X1, X2
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
32.768
kHz
Subclock cycle
time
t
subcyc
X1, X2
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
30.518
s
Figure
29.12
OSC1, OSC2
Crystal oscillator
10
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
t
rc
X1, X2
32kHz crystal
oscillator
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
2
s
External clock high
width
t
CPH
OSC1
40
ns
External clock low
width
t
CPL
OSC1
40
ns
External clock rise
time
t
CPr
OSC1
10
ns
External clock fall
time
t
CPf
OSC1
10
ns
Figure
29.11
External clock
stabilization delay
time
t
DEXT
OSC1
500
s
Figure
29.13
Subclock input low
level pulse width
t
EXCLL
X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
15.26
s
Subclock input high
level pulse width
t
EXCLH
X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
15.26
s
Figure
29.12
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 849 of 1037
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
Subclock input rise
time
t
EXCLr
X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
10
ns
Subclock input fall
time
t
EXCLf
X1
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
10
ns
Figure
29.12
5(6
pin low level
width
t
REL
5(6
Vcc=2.5V to
5.5V
20
t
cyc
Figure
29.14
Input pin high level
width
t
IH
,54
to
,54
,
10,
,
,&
,
$'75*
,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG
Vcc=2.5V to
5.5V
2
t
cyc
t
subcyc
Input pin low level
width
t
IL
,54
to
,54
,
10,
,
,&
,
$'75*
,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG
Vcc=2.5V to
5.5V
2
t
cyc
t
subcyc
Figure
29.15
t
cyc
t
CPH
V
IL
V
IH
OSC1
t
CPL
t
CPf
t
CPr
Figure 29.11 System Clock Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 850 of 1037
t
EXCLf
t
subcyc
t
EXCLH
t
EXCLL
t
EXCLr
V
IL
V
IH
X1
Vcc 0.5
Figure 29.12 Subclock Input Timing
Vcc
OSC1
t
DEXT
*
RES
(Internal)
4.0V
The t
DEXT
includes the RES pin Low level width 20 t
cyc
.
Note:
*
Figure 29.13 External Clock Stabilization Delay Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 851 of 1037
RES
V
IL
t
REL
Figure 29.14 Reset Input Timing
t
IL
t
IH
V
IH
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
NMI, IC,
ADTRG, TMBI,
FTIA, FTIB,
FTIC, FTID,
TRIG
V
IL
Figure 29.15 Input Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 852 of 1037
29.3.4
Serial Interface Timing of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
Table 29.18 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191,
HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
Asynchroniza-
tion
4
SCK1
Clock
synchronization
6
Input clock cycle
t
scyc
SCK2
2
t
cyc
Input clock pulse
width
t
SCKW
SCK1,
SCK2
0.4
0.6
t
scyc
SCK1
1.5
t
cyc
Input clock rise time
t
SCKr
SCK2
60
ns
SCK1
1.5
t
cyc
Input clock fall time
t
SCKf
SCK2
60
ns
Figure
29.16
Transmit data delay
time (clock sync)
t
TXD
SO1
100
ns
Receive data setup
time (clock sync)
t
RXS
SI1
100
ns
Receive data hold
time (clock sync)
t
RXH
SI1
100
ns
Figure
29.17
Transmit data output
delay time
t
TXD
SO2
200
ns
Receive data setup
time (clock sync)
t
RXS
SI2
180
ns
Receive data hold
time (clock sync)
t
RXH
SI2
180
ns
Figure
29.17
&6
setup time
t
CSS
&6
1
t
scyc
&6
hold time
t
CSH
&6
1
t
scyc
Figure
29.18
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 853 of 1037
t
SCKf
t
SCKr
V
IL
or V
OL
V
IH
or V
OH
SCK1
t
SCKW
t
scyc
Figure 29.16 SCK1 Clock Timing
V
IL
V
IH
t
TXD
SCK1,
SCK2
SO1,
SO2
SI1,
SI2
t
RXS
t
RXH
Figure 29.17 SCI I/O Timing/Clock Synchronization Mode
V
IH
V
IH
V
IL
CS
SCK2
t
CSH
t
CSS
Figure 29.18 SCI2 Chip Select Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 854 of 1037
LSI output pin
Timing reference level
V
OH
: 2.0 V
V
OL
: 0.8 V
30 pF
12k
2.4k
Vcc
Figure 29.19 Output Load Conditions
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 855 of 1037
Table 29.19 I
2
C Bus Interface Timing of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Test
Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Figure
SCL input cycle time
t
SCL
12
t
cyc
SCL input high pulse width
t
SCLH
3
t
cyc
SCL input low pulse width
t
SCLL
5
t
cyc
SCL, SDA input rise time
t
sr
7.5
*
t
cyc
SCL, SDA input fall time
t
sf
300
ns
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
t
sp
1
t
cyc
SDA input bus free time
t
BUF
5
t
cyc
Start condition input hold time
t
STAH
3
t
cyc
Re-transmit start condition
input setup time
t
STAS
3
t
cyc
Stop condition input setup time
t
STOS
3
t
cyc
Data input setup time
t
SDAS
0.5
t
cyc
Data input hold time
t
SDAH
0
ns
SCL, SDA capacity load
C
b
400
pF
Figure
29.10
Note:
*
Can also be set to 17.5 t
cyc
depending on the selection of clock to be used by the I
2
C
module.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 856 of 1037
t
STAH
t
Sr
t
SDAH
t
SCL
t
SCLL
t
SCLH
t
Sf
t
STAS
t
SP
t
STOS
t
SDAS
V
IL
V
IH
SDA
SCL
P
*
S
*
Sr
*
P
*
S, P and Sr denote the following:
S : Start conditions
P : Stop conditions
Sr: Re-transmit start conditions
Note:
*
t
BUF
Figure 29.20 I
2
C Bus Interface I/O Timing
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 857 of 1037
29.3.5
A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
Table 29.20 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 20 to +75
C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVcc
AVcc
Vcc
0.3
Vcc
Vcc+
0.3
V
Analog input
voltage
A
VIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
AVss
AVcc
V
A
ICC
AVcc
AVcc=5.0V
2.0
mA
Analog power
supply current
A
ISTOP
AVcc
Vcc=2.5 to 5.5V
At reset and in
power-down mode
10
A
Analog input
capacitance
C
AIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
30
pF
Allowable signal
source impedance
R
AIN
AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
10
k
Resolution
10
Bit
Absolute accuracy
AVcc=5.0V
4
LSB
Conversion time
13.4
26.6
s
Note: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use. Set AVcc
= Vcc and AVss = Vss.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 858 of 1037
29.3.6
Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192,
HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
Table 29.21 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193,
HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(reference values)
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25
C unless otherwise specified.)
Reference Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
32.0
34.0
36.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
34.5
36.5
38.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
37.0
39.0
41.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
39.5
41.5
43.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
42.0
44.0
46.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
44.5
46.5
48.5
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
47.0
49.0
51.0
CTLGR3=0, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
49.5
51.5
53.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
52.0
54.0
56.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
54.5
56.5
58.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
57.0
59.0
61.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=0, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
59.5
61.5
63.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
62.0
64.0
66.0
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=0,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
64.5
66.5
68.5
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=0, f=10kHz
67.0
69.0
71.0
PB-CTL
input
amplifier
voltage
gain
CTL (+)
CTLGR3=1, CTLGR2=1, CTLGR1=1,
CTLGR0=1, f=10kHz
69.5
71.5
73.5
dB
V+TH
AC coupling,
C=0.1
F Typ (non pol)
250
PB-CTL
Schmidt
input
V
-
TH
CTLSMT (i)
AC coupling,
C=0.1
F Typ (non pol)
-
250
mVp
Analog
switch ON
resistance
REB
150
CTL (+)
8
REC-CTL
output
current
ICTL
CTL (
-
)
Series resistance = 0
8
mA
REC-CTL
inter-pin
resistance
RCTL
10
k
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 859 of 1037
Reference Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
CTL reference
output voltage
CTLREF
1/2
SV
CC
V
CFG pin bias
voltage
CFG
1/2
SV
CC
V
CFG input level
CFG
AC coupling,
C=1
F Typ, f=1kHz
1.0
Vpp
CFG input
impedance
CFG
10
k
V+THCF
Rise threshold level
2.25
CFG input
threshold value
V
-
THCF
CFG
Fall threshold level
2.75
V
V+THDF
Rising edge
Schmidt level
1.95
DFG Schmidt input
V
-
THDF
DFG
Falling edge
Schmidt level
1.85
V
V+THDP
Rising edge
Schmidt level
3.55
DPG Schmidt input
V
-
THDP
DPG
Falling edge
Schmidt level
3.45
V
V
OH
-
I
OH
=0.1mA
4.0
V
OM
No load, Hiz=1
2.5
3-level output
voltage
V
OL
Vpulse
I
OL
=0.1mA
1.0
V
3-level output pin
divided voltage
resistance
Vpulse
15
k
CFG Duty
CFG
AC coupling,
C=1
F Typ, f=1kHz
48
52
%
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 860 of 1037
Table 29.22 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193,
HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25
C unless otherwise specified.)
Values
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Note
Digital input high
voltage
V
IH
0.8
Vcc
Vcc+
0.3
Digital input low
voltage
V
IL
COMP,
EXCTL,
EXCAP,
EXTTRG
-
0.3
0.2
Vcc
V
Digital output high
voltage
V
OH
-
I
OH
=1mA
Vcc
1.0
Digital output low
voltage
V
OL
H.AmpSW,
C.Rotary,
VIDEOFF,
AUDIOFF,
DRMPWM,
CAPPWM,
SV1, SV2
I
OL
=1.6mA
0.6
V
Current dissipation
I
CCSV
SVcc
At no load
5
10
mA
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 861 of 1037
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1
Instructions
[Operation Notation]
Rd
General register (destination)
*
1
Rs
General register (source)
*
1
Rn
General register
*
1
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
MAC
Multiplication-Addition register (32-bit register)
*
2
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
EXR
Extend register
CCR
Condition code register
N
N (negative flag) in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
-
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Logical AND
Logical OR
Exclusive logical OR
Move from the left to the right
Logical complement
( ) <>
Contents of operand
:8/:16/:24/:32
8/16/24/32 bit length
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 862 of 1037
Notes: 1. General register is 8-bit (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit (R0 to R7) or 32-bit (ER0 to
ER7).
2. MAC register cannot be used in this LSI.
[Condition Code Notation]
Symbol
Description
Modified according to the instruction result
*
Not fixed (value not guaranteed)
0
Always cleared to 0
1
Always set to 1
-
Not affected by the instruction execution result
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 863 of 1037
Table A.1
List of Instruction Set
(1) Data Transfer Instruction
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
LDM @SP+,(ERm-ERn)
STM (ERm-ERn),@-SP
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
W
L
W
L
L
L
2
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
8
4
8
4
8
4
8
6
10
6
10
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
6
2
4
6
4
6
4
6
6
8
6
8
MOV
POP
PUSH
LDM
STM
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
Mnemonic
Size
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
#xx:8
Rd8
Rs8
Rd8
@ERs
Rd8
@(d:16,ERs)
Rd8
@(d:32,ERs)
Rd8
@ERs
Rd8,ERs32+1
ERs32
@aa:8
Rd8
@aa:16
Rd8
@aa:32
Rd8
Rs8
@ERd
Rs8
@(d:16,ERd)
Rs8
@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-1
ERd32,Rs8
@ERd
Rs8
@aa:8
Rs8
@aa:16
Rs8
@aa:32
#xx:16
Rd16
Rs16
Rd16
@ERs
Rd16
@(d:16,ERs)
Rd16
@(d:32,ERs)
Rd16
@ERs
Rd16,ERs32+2
ERs32
@aa:16
Rd16
@aa:32
Rd16
Rs16
@ERd
Rs16
@(d:16,ERd)
Rs16
@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-2
ERd32,Rs16
@ERd
Rs16
@aa:16
Rs16
@aa:32
#xx:32
ERd32
ERs32
ERd32
@ERs
ERd32
@(d:16,ERs)
ERd32
@(d:32,ERs)
ERd32
@ERs
ERd32,ERs32+4
ERs32
@aa:16
ERd32
@aa:32
ERd32
ERs32
@ERd
ERs32
@(d:16,ERd)
ERs32
@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-4
ERd32,ERs32
@ERd
ERs32
@aa:16
ERs32
@aa:32
@SP
Rn16,SP+2
SP
@SP
ERn32,SP+4
SP
SP-2
SP,Rn16
@SP
SP-4
SP,ERn32
@SP
(@SP
ERn32,SP+4
SP)
Repeat for the number of returns
(SP-4
SP,ERn32
@SP)
Repeat for the number of returns
Operation
Condition
Code
No of
Execution
States
*
1
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
1
1
2
3
5
3
2
3
4
2
3
5
3
2
3
4
2
1
2
3
5
3
3
4
2
3
5
3
3
4
3
1
4
5
7
5
5
6
4
5
7
5
5
6
3
5
3
5
7/9/11 [1]
7/9/11 [1]
[2]
[2]
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Cannot be used in this LSI
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 864 of 1037
(2) Arithmetic Instructions
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs,Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
ADDS #1,ERd
ADDS #2,ERd
ADDS #4,ERd
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1,Rd
INC.W #2,Rd
INC.L #1,ERd
INC.L #2,ERd
DAA Rd
SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
SUBS #1,ERd
SUBS #2,ERd
SUBS #4,ERd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1,Rd
DEC.W #2,Rd
DEC.L #1,ERd
DEC.L #2,ERd
DAS Rd
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
TAS @ERd
*
3
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
CLRMAC
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
L
L
L
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
L
L
L
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
B
W
B
W
B
W
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
L
W
L
W
L
B
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
2
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADD
ADDX
ADDS
INC
DAA
SUB
SUBX
SUBS
DEC
DAS
MULXU
MULXS
DIVXU
DIVXS
CMP
NEG
EXTU
EXTS
TAS
MAC
CLRMAC
LDMAC
STMAC
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
Rd8+#xx:8
Rd8
Rd8+Rs8
Rd8
Rd16+#xx:16
Rd16
Rd16+Rs16
Rd16
ERd32+#xx:32
ERd32
ERd32+ERs32
ERd32
Rd8+#xx:8+C
Rd8
Rd8+Rs8+C
Rd8
ERd32+1
ERd32
ERd32+2
ERd32
ERd32+4
ERd32
Rd8+1
Rd8
Rd16+1
Rd16
Rd16+2
Rd16
ERd32+1
ERd32
ERd32+2
ERd32
Rd8 10 Decimal adjust
Rd8
Rd8-Rs8
Rd8
Rd16-#xx:16
Rd16
Rd16-Rs16
Rd16
ERd32-#xx:32
ERd32
ERd32-ERs32
ERd32
Rd8-#xx:8-C
Rd8
Rd8-Rs8-C
Rd8
ERd32-1
ERd32
ERd32-2
ERd32
ERd32-4
ERd32
Rd8-1
Rd8
Rd16-1
Rd16
Rd16-2
Rd16
ERd32-1
ERd32
ERd32-2
ERd32
Rd8 10 Decimal adjust
Rd8
Rd8 Rs8
Rd16(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16 Rs16
ERd32
(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd8 Rs8
Rd16(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16 Rs16
ERd32
(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16 Rs8
Rd16 (RdH: Rmainder, RdL:
Quatient)(Division w/o sign)
ERd32 Rs16
ERd32 (Ed:Remainder,
Rd: Quatient)(Division with sign)
Rd16 Rs8
Rd16(RdH: Rmainder, RdL:
Quatient)(Division w/o sign)
ERd32 Rs16
ERd32 (Ed:Remainder,
Rd: Quatient)(Division with sign)
Rd8-#xx:8
Rd8-Rs8
Rd16-#xx:16
Rd16-Rs16
ERd32-#xx:32
ERd32-ERs32
0-Rd8
Rd8
0-Rd16
Rd16
0-ERd32
ERd32
0
(<Bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
0
(<Bits 31 to 16> of ERd32)
(<Bit7> of Rd16)
(<Bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
(<Bit15> of ERd32)
(<Bits31 to 16> of ERd32)
@ERd-0
CCR set, (1)
(<Bit7> of @ERd)
Operation
Condition
Code
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
4
--
--
--
*
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
20
13
21
12
20
13
21
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
*
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
*
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
[6]
[6]
[8]
[8]
0
0
[5]
[5]
--
--
--
[5]
[5]
--
--
--
--
--
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
*
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
Cannot be used in this LSI
[2]
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 865 of 1037
(3) Logic Operations Instructions
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
L
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
Rd8 #xx:8
Rd8
Rd8 Rs8
Rd8
Rd16 #xx:16
Rd16
Rd16 Rs16
Rd16
ERd32 #xx:32
ERd32
ERd32 ERs32
ERd32
Rd8 #xx:8
Rd8
Rd8 Rs8
Rd8
Rd16 #xx:16
Rd16
Rd16 Rs16
Rd16
ERd32 #xx:32
ERd32
ERd32 ERs32
ERd32
Rd8 #xx:8
Rd8
Rd8 Rs8
Rd8
Rd16 #xx:16
Rd16
Rd16 Rs16
Rd16
ERd32 #xx:32
ERd32
ERd32 ERs32
ERd32
~Rd8
Rd8
~Rd16
Rd16
~ERd32
ERd32
Operation
Condition
Code
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 866 of 1037
(4) Shift Instructions
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2,Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2,Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2,ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2,Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2,Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2,ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2,Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2,Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2,ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2,Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2,Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2,ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2,Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.B #2,Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2,ERd
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2,Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2,Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2,ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2,Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2,Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2,ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
ROTL
ROTR
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
Operation
Condition
Code
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
0
MSB
LSB
C MSB
LSB
C MSB
LSB
C
MSB
LSB
C
MSB
LSB
C
0
MSB
LSB
C
0
MSB
LSB
C
MSB
LSB
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 867 of 1037
(5) Bit Manipulation Instructions
BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
BSET
BCLR
BNOT
BTST
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
BAND
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
1
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
1
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
1
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
1
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
1
(Rn8 of Rd8)
1
(Rn8 of @ERd)
1
(Rn8 of @aa:8)
1
(Rn8 of @aa:16)
1
(Rn8 of @aa:32)
1
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
0
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
0
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
0
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
0
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
0
(Rn8 of Rd8)
0
(Rn8 of @ERd)
0
(Rn8 of @aa:8)
0
(Rn8 of @aa:16)
0
(Rn8 of @aa:32)
0
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
[~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
[~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
[~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
[~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
[~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
(Rn8 of Rd8)
[~(Rn8 of Rd8)]
(Rn8 of @ERd)
[~(Rn8 of @ERd)]
(Rn8 of @aa:8)
[~(Rn8 of @aa:8)]
(Rn8 of @aa:16)
[~(Rn8 of @aa:16)]
(Rn8 of @aa:32)
[~(Rn8 of @aa:32)]
~(#xx:3 of Rd8)
Z
~(#xx:3 of @ERd)
Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
Z
~(Rn8 of Rd8)
Z
~(Rn8 of @ERd)
Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:8)
Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:16)
Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:32)
Z
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
~(#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
~(#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
C
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
~C
(#xx:3 of Rd8)
~C
(#xx:3 of @ERd)
~C
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
~C
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
~C
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C (#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
Operation
Condition
Code
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
3
3
4
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 868 of 1037
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
BIAND
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
C [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
C
C (#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
C [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
C
C (#xx:3 of Rd8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @ERd)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
C [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
C
C [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
C
Operation
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Condition
Code
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 869 of 1037
(6) Branch Instructions
BRA d:8(BT d:8)
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
BRN d:8(BF d:8)
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
BHI d:8
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8(BHS d:8)
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
BCS d:8(BLO d:8)
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
Bcc
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
Operation
I
Branch
Condition
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
Always
Never
C Z=0
C Z=1
C=0
C=1
Z=0
Z=1
V=0
V=1
N=0
N=1
N V=0
N V=1
if condition is true then
PC
PC+d
else next;
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Operation
Code
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
RTS
JMP
BSR
JSR
RTS
PC
ERn
PC
aa:24
PC
@aa:8
PC
@-SP,PC
PC+d:8
PC
@-SP,PC
PC+d:16
PC
@-SP,PC
ERn
PC
@-SP,PC
aa:24
PC
@-SP,PC
@aa:8
PC
@SP+
2
2
4
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Z (N V)=0
Z (N V)=1
5
4
5
4
5
6
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 870 of 1037
(7) System Control Instructions
TRAPA #xx:2
RTE
SLEEP
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
STC CCR,Rd
STC EXR,Rd
STC CCR,@ERd
STC EXR,@ERd
STC CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC CCR,@-ERd
STC EXR,@-ERd
STC CCR,@aa:16
STC EXR,@aa:16
STC CCR,@aa:32
STC EXR,@aa:32
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
NOP
--
--
--
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
B
B
--
TRAPA
RTE
SLEEP
LDC
STC
ANDC
ORC
XORC
NOP
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
PC
@-SP,CCR
@-SP,
EXR
@-SP,<Vector>
PC
EXR
@SP+,CCR
@SP+,
PC
@SP+
Transition to power-down state
#xx:8
CCR
#xx:8
EXR
Rs8
CCR
Rs8
EXR
@ERs
CCR
@ERs
EXR
@(d:16,ERs)
CCR
@(d:16,ERs)
EXR
@(d:32,ERs)
CCR
@(d:32,ERs)
EXR
@ERs
CCR,ERs32+2
ERs32
@ERs
EXR,ERs32+2
ERs32
@aa:16
CCR
@aa:16
EXR
@aa:32
CCR
@aa:32
EXR
CCR
Rd8
EXR
Rd8
CCR
@ERd
EXR
@ERd
CCR
@(d:16,ERd)
EXR
@(d:16,ERd)
CCR
@(d:32,ERd)
EXR
@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-2
ERd32,CCR
@ERd
ERd32-2
ERd32,EXR
@ERd
CCR
@aa:16
EXR
@aa:16
CCR
@aa:32
EXR
@aa:32
CCR #xx:8
CCR
EXR #xx:8
EXR
CCR #xx:8
CCR
EXR #xx:8
EXR
CCR #xx:8
CCR
EXR #xx:8
EXR
PC
PC+2
Operation
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
6
6
10
10
6
6
10
10
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
6
6
8
8
2
5 [9]
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
5
5
1
1
3
3
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
5
5
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
8 [9]
Condition
Code
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 871 of 1037
(8) Block Transfer Instructions
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
--
--
EEPMOV
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
--
Operation
I
H N Z V C
Advanced Mode
4
4
4+2n
*
2
4+2n
*
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Condition
Code
if R4L 0
Repeat @ER5
@ER6
ER5+1
ER5
ER6+1
ER6
R4L-1
R4L
Until R4L=0
else next;
if R4 0
Repeat @ER5
@ER6
ER5+1
ER5
ER6+1
ER6
R4-1
R4
Until R4=0
else next;
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*
1
Notes: 1. The values indicated in the column of number of execution states apply when
instruction code and operand exist in the on-chip memory.
2. n is the initial setting value of R4L or R4.
3. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
[1] 7 states when the number of return/retract registers is 2, 9 states when the number of
registers is 3, and 11 states when the number of registers is 4.
[2] Cannot be used in this LSI.
[3] Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11, otherwise cleared to 0.
[4] Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27, otherwise cleared to 0.
[5] Retains the value before computation when the computation result is 0, otherwise
cleared to 0.
[6] Set to 1 when the divisor is negative, otherwise cleared to 0.
[7] Set to 1 when the divisor is 0, otherwise cleared to 0.
[8] Set to 1 when the quotient is negative, otherwise cleared to 0.
[9] 1 is added to the number of execution states when EXR is valid.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 872 of 1037
A.2
Instruction Codes
A.2 Instruction Codes
ADD
ADDS
ADDX
AND
ANDC
BAND
Bcc
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs,Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
ADDS #1,ERd
ADDS #2,ERd
ADDS #4,ERd
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:8
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
8
0
7
0
7
0
0
0
0
9
0
E
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
6
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
rd
8
9
9
A
A
B
B
B
rd
E
rd
6
9
6
A
1
6
1
6
C
E
A
A
0
8
1
8
2
8
3
8
4
8
5
8
6
8
7
8
8
8
9
8
rs
1
rs
1
1 ers
0
8
9
rs
rs
6
rs
6
F
4
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IMM
IMM
IMM
IMM
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
rd
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 IMM
0 IMM
0
0
6
0
7
7
IMM
IMM
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
IMM
IMM
abs
6
6
6
6
0 IMM
0
7
6
0 IMM
0
7
6
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7the byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
0 ers
0 erd
IMM
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 873 of 1037
Bcc
(Cont.)
BCLR
BIAND
BILD
BIOR
BIST
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
A
8
B
8
C
8
D
8
E
8
F
8
2
D
F
A
A
2
D
F
A
A
6
C
E
A
A
7
C
E
A
A
4
C
E
A
A
7
D
F
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
rn
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
abs
abs
abs
abs
abs
abs
0
0
0
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
2
2
abs
2
2
abs
6
6
abs
7
7
abs
4
4
abs
7
7
abs
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
7
6
7
7
7
6
2
2
6
7
4
7
0 IMM
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
7
7
7
6
2
2
6
7
4
7
0 IMM
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 874 of 1037
BIXOR
BLD
BNOT
BOR
BSET
BSR
BST
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
--
--
B
B
B
B
B
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
5
5
6
7
7
6
6
5
C
E
A
A
7
C
E
A
A
1
D
F
A
A
1
D
F
A
A
4
C
E
A
A
0
D
F
A
A
0
D
F
A
A
5
C
7
D
F
A
A
1 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
disp
0
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
0
rd
0
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
abs
7
7
abs
1
1
abs
1
1
abs
4
4
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
disp
7
7
abs
1 IMM
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
7
7
7
6
7
7
6
6
5
7
1
1
4
0
0
7
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
7
7
6
6
5
7
1
1
4
0
0
7
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 875 of 1037
BTST
BXOR
CLRMAC
CMP
DAA
DAS
DEC
DIVXS
DIVXU
EEPMOV
EXTS
EXTU
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
CLRMAC
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
DAA Rd
DAS Rd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1,Rd
DEC.W #2,Rd
DEC.L #1,ERd
DEC.L #2,ERd
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
Cannot be used in this LSI
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
--
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
B
W
--
--
W
L
W
L
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
A
1
7
1
7
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
5
5
7
7
1
1
1
1
3
C
E
A
A
3
C
E
A
A
5
C
E
A
A
rd
C
9
D
A
F
F
F
A
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
3
B
B
7
7
7
7
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
IMM
rs
2
rs
2
1 ers
0
0
0
5
D
7
F
D
D
rs
rs
5
D
D
F
5
7
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
rd
0 erd
C
4
rd
0 erd
rd
0 erd
7
7
6
6
7
7
5
5
5
5
3
3
abs
3
3
abs
5
5
abs
IMM
1
3
9
9
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rs
rs
8
8
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
IMM
rd
0 erd
F
F
7
6
7
3
3
5
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
7
6
7
3
3
5
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 876 of 1037
INC
JMP
JSR
LDC
LDM
LDMAC
MAC
MOV
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1,Rd
INC.W #2,Rd
INC.L #1,ERd
INC.L #2,ERd
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+1)
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+2)
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+3)
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
Cannot be used in this LSI
1st byte
B
W
W
L
L
--
--
--
--
--
--
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
--
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
6
6
7
6
2
6
6
6
6
7
A
B
B
B
B
9
A
B
D
E
F
7
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
rd
C
8
E
8
C
rd
A
A
8
E
8
0
5
D
7
F
0 ern
abs
0 ern
abs
IMM
4
0
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
IMM
rs
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
abs
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
1
rs
rs
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0
rd
rd
rd
rs
rs
0
abs
abs
0
6
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
9
9
F
F
8
8
D
D
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
disp
A
abs
disp
A
IMM
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
0
2
2
7
7
7
2
A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ern+1
0 ern+2
0 ern+3
rd
abs
rs
6
6
disp
disp
B
B
abs
abs
2
2
0
0
abs
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10 byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 877 of 1037
MOV
(Cont.)
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
MULXS
MULXU
NEG
NOP
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa :16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,Rd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16 ,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32 ,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
*
1
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
NOP
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
Cannot be used in this LSI
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
W
B
W
B
W
L
--
6
3
6
6
7
0
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
1
1
1
0
C
rs
A
A
9
D
9
F
8
D
B
B
9
F
8
D
B
B
A
F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
7
7
7
0
1 erd
abs
8
A
0
rs
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
1 erd
8
A
0
1 ers
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
C
rs
rs
8
9
B
0
rs
rs
rs
rd
rd
rd
rd
0
rd
rd
rd
rs
rs
0
rs
rs
rs
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
rd
0 erd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
5
5
abs
IMM
disp
B
abs
disp
B
abs
9
F
8
D
B
B
9
F
8
D
B
B
0
2
2
A
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
1 erd
8
A
rs
rs
abs
rd
abs
rs
abs
IMM
0 erd
0 erd
0
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 ers
0 ers
0
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
rd
0 erd
6
6
disp
B
abs
disp
B
abs
2
A
disp
disp
0 erd
abs
0 ers
abs
disp
disp
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 878 of 1037
NOT
OR
ORC
POP
PUSH
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL
ROTXR
RTE
RTS
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2, Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2, Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2, ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2, Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2, Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2, ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2, Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2, Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2, ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.B #2, Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2, Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2, ERd
RTE
RTS
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
B
W
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
L
W
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
--
--
1
1
1
C
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
6
0
6
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
7
7
7
rd
4
9
4
A
1
4
1
D
1
D
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
4
0
1
3
IMM
rs
4
rs
4
F
IMM
4
7
0
F
0
8
C
9
D
B
F
8
C
9
D
B
F
0
4
1
5
3
7
0
4
1
5
3
7
7
7
rd
rd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
rn
0
rn
0
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
6
0
6
6
IMM
4
4
D
D
0 ers
IMM
7
F
IMM
0 erd
0 ern
0 ern
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 879 of 1037
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
SLEEP
STC
STM
STMAC
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2, Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2, Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2, ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2, Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2, Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2, ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2, Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2, Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2, ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2, Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2, Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2, ERd
SLEEP
STC.B CCR,Rd
STC.B EXR,Rd
STC.W CCR,@ERd
STC.W EXR,@ERd
STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@-ERd
STC.W EXR,@-ERd
STC.W CCR,@aa:16
STC.W EXR,@aa:16
STC.W CCR,@aa:32
STC.W EXR,@aa:32
STM.L(ERn-ERn+1) , @-SP
STM.L (ERn-ERn+2) , @-SP
STM.L (ERn-ERn+3) , @-SP
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
--
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
C
9
D
B
F
8
C
9
D
B
F
0
4
1
5
3
7
0
4
1
5
3
7
8
0
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
rd
rd
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
F
F
8
8
D
D
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
1 erd
1 erd
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
0 erd
1 erd
1 erd
8
8
A
A
F
F
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ern
0 ern
0 ern
6
6
disp
disp
B
B
abs
abs
A
A
0
0
abs
abs
disp
disp
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Cannot be used in this LSI
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 880 of 1037
SUB
SUBS
SUBX
TAS
TRAPA
XOR
XORC
SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
SUBS #1,ERd
SUBS #2,ERd
SUBS #4,ERd
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
TAS @ERd
*
2
TRAPA #x:2
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
Mnemonic
Instruction Format
1st byte
B
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
--
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
1
7
1
7
1
1
1
1
B
1
0
5
D
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
8
9
9
A
A
B
B
B
rd
E
1
7
rd
5
9
5
A
1
5
1
rs
3
rs
3
1 ers
0
8
9
IMM
rs
E
IMM
IMM
rs
5
rs
5
F
IMM
4
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
7
6
0
IMM
B
IMM
5
5
0 erd
0 ers
IMM
IMM
C
IMM
0 erd
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
Size
Instruction
Notes:
*
1 Either 1 or 0 can be set to bit 7 in 4th byte of MOV.L Ers, @(d: 32, Erd) instruction.
*
2 Only register ER0,ER1,ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
00
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 881 of 1037
[Legend]
IMM:
Immediate data (2, 3, 8, 16, 32 bits)
abs:
Absolute address (8, 16, 24, 32 bits)
disp:
Displacement (8, 16, 32 bits)
rs, rd, rn:
Register fields (8-bit register or 16-bit register is selected in 4 bits. rs, rd and
rn correspond to the operand type Rs, Rd, and Rn respectively.)
ers, erd, ern, erm: Register fields (address register or 32-bit register is selected in 3 bits. ers, erd
ern and erm correspond to the operand type ERs, ERd, ERn and Rm
respectively.)
The following table shows the correspondence between the register field and the general
register.
Address Register, 32-bit
Register
16-bit Register
8-bit Register
Register
Field
General
Register
Register
Field
General
Register
Register
Field
General
Register
000
001
:
:
:
:
111
ER0
ER1
:
:
:
:
ER7
0000
0001
:
:
:
:
0111
1000
1001
:
:
:
:
1111
R0
R1
:
:
:
:
R7
E0
E1
:
:
:
:
E7
0000
0001
:
:
:
:
0111
1000
1001
:
:
:
:
1111
R0H
R1H
:
:
:
:
R7H
R0L
R1L
:
:
:
:
R7L
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 882 of 1037
A.3
Operation Code Map
Table A.3 shows an operation code map.
Instruction code:
1st byte
2nd byte
AH
AL
BH
BL
BH highest bit is set to 0.
BH highest bit is set to 1
0
NOP
BRA
MULXU
BSET
AH
AL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
BRN
DIVXU
BNOT
2
BHI
MULXU
BCLR
3
BLS
DIVXU
BTST
STC
STMAC
LDC
LDMAC
4
ORC
OR
BCC
RTS
OR
BOR
BIOR
6
ANDC
AND
BNE
RTE
AND
5
XORC
XOR
BCS
BSR
XOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
7
LDC
BEQ
TRAPA
BST
BIST
BLD
BILD
8
BVC
MOV
9
BVS
A
BPL
JMP
B
BMI
EEPMOV
C
BGE
BSR
D
BLT
MOV
E
ADDX
SUBX
BGT
JSR
F
BLE
MOV.B
ADD
ADDX
CMP
SUBX
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
ADD
SUB
MOV
MOV
CMP
Table A.3(3)
Table A.3 Operation Code Map (1)
**
Note:
*
Cannot be used in this LSI
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Table
A.3(2)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 883 of 1037
Instruction code:
1st byte
2nd byte
AH
AL
BH
BL
01
0A
0B
0F
10
11
12
13
17
1A
1B
1F
58
6A
79
7A
0
MOV
INC
ADDS
DAA
DEC
SUBS
DAS
BRA
MOV
MOV
MOV
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
NOT
1
LDM
BRN
ADD
ADD
2
BHI
MOV
CMP
CMP
3
STM
NOT
BLS
SUB
SUB
4
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
BCC
MOVFPE
OR
OR
5
INC
EXTU
DEC
BCS
XOR
XOR
6
MAC
BNE
AND
AND
7
INC
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
EXTU
DEC
BEQ
LDC
STC
8
SLEEP
BVC
MOV
ADDS
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
NEG
SUBS
9
BVS
A
CLRMAC
BPL
MOV
B
NEG
BMI
ADD
MOV
SUB
CMP
C
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
BGE
MOVTPE
D
INC
EXTS
DEC
BLT
E
TAS
BGT
F
INC
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
EXTS
DEC
BLE
BH
AH AL
Table A.3 Operation Code Map (2)
*
*
Note:
*
Cannot be used in this LSI
*
*
Table
A.3(4)
Table
A.3(3)
Table
A.3(3)
Table
A.3(3)
Table
A.3(4)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 884 of 1037
Instruction code:
1st byte
2nd byte
AH
AL
BH
BL
3rd byte
4th byte
CH
CL
DH
DL
r is the register specification section.
Absolute address is set at aa.
DH highest bit is set to 0.
DH highest bit is set to 1.
Notes:
AH AL BH BL CH
CL
01C05
01D05
01F06
7Cr06
*
1
7Cr07
*
1
7Dr06
*
1
7Dr07
*
1
7Eaa6
*
2
7Eaa7
*
2
7Faa6
*
2
7Faa7
*
2
0
MULXS
BSET
BSET
BSET
BSET
1
DIVXS
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
2
MULXS
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
3
DIVXS
BTST
BTST
BTST
BTST
4
OR
5
XOR
6
AND
789
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.
2.
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
Table A.3 Operation Code Map (3)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 885 of 1037
Instruction code:
1st byte
2nd byte
AH
AL
BH
BL
3th byte
4th byte
CH
CL
DH
DL
FH highest bit is set to 0.
FH highest bit is set to 1.
5th byte
6th byte
EH
EL
FH
FL
Instruction code:
1st byte
2nd byte
AH
AL
BH
BL
3rd byte
4th byte
CH
CL
DH
DL
HH highest bit is set to 0.
HH highest bit is set to 1.
Note:
*
Absolute address is set at aa.
5th byte
6th byte
EH
EL
FH
FL
7th byte
8th byte
GH
GL
HH
HL
6A10aaaa6
*
6A10aaaa7
*
6A18aaaa6
*
6A18aaaa7
*
AHALBHBLCHCLDHDLEH
EL
0
BSET
1
BNOT
2
BCLR
3
BTST
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
456789
A
B
C
D
E
F
6A30aaaaaaaa6
*
6A30aaaaaaaa7
*
6A38aaaaaaaa6
*
6A38aaaaaaaa7
*
AHALBHBL ... FHFLGH
GL
0
BSET
1
BNOT
2
BCLR
3
BTST
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
456789
A
B
C
D
E
F
Table A.3 Operation Code Map (4)
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 886 of 1037
A.4
Number of Execution States
This section explains execution state and how to calculate the number of execution states for
each instruction of the H8S/2194 CPU.
Table A.5 indicates number of cycles of instruction fetch and data read/write during instruction
execution, and table A.4 indicates number of states required for each instruction size.
The number of execution states can be obtained from the equation below.
Number of execution states = I
S
I
+ J
S
J
+ K
S
K
+ L
S
L
+ M
S
M
+ N
S
N
(1) Examples of execution state number calculation
The conditions are as follows: In advanced mode, program and stack areas are set in the on-chip
memory, a wait is inserted every 2 states in the on-chip supporting module access with 8-bit bus
width.
1. BSET #0, @FFFFC7:8
From Table A.5,
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N = 0
From Table A.4,
S
I
= 1, S
L
= 2
Number of execution states = 2
1 + 2
2 = 6
2. JSR @@30
From Table A.5,
I = J = K = 2, L = M = N = 0
From Table A.4,
S
I
= S
J
= S
K
= 1
Number of execution states = 2
1 + 2
1 + 2
1 = 6
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 887 of 1037
Table A.4
Number of States Required for Each Execution Status (Cycle)
Target of Access
On-Chip Supporting Module
Execution Status (Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
8-bit bus
16-bit bus
Instruction fetch S
I
Branch address read S
J
Stack operation S
K
--
--
Byte data access S
L
2
2
Word data access S
M
1
4
Internal operation S
N
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 888 of 1037
Table A.5
Instruction Execution Status (No. of Cycles)
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
ADD
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs, Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
1
ADDS
ADDS #1/2/4,ERd
1
ADDX
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
1
1
AND
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx.16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
ANDC
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
BAND
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3@aa:8
BAND #xx:3@aa:16
BAND #xx:3@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
Bcc
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BHI d:8
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
BEQ d:8
BVC d:8
BVS d:8
BPL d:8
BMI d:8
BGE d:8
BLT d:8
BGT d:8
BLE d:8
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:16
BLS d:16
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:16
BEQ d:16
BVC d:16
BVS d:16
BPL d:16
BMI d:16
BGE d:16
BLT d:16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 889 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
Bcc
BGT d:16
BLE d:16
2
2
1
1
BCLR
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BIAND
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BILD
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BIOR
BIOR #xx:8,Rd
BIOR #xx:8,@ERd
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BIST
BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
BIXOR
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BLD
BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BNOT
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 890 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
BNOT
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
4
2
BOR
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BSET
BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BSR
BSR d:8
2
2
BSR d:16
2
2
1
BST
BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
BTST
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BXOR
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
CLRMAC
CLRMAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
CMP
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
1
DAA
DAA Rd
1
DAS
DAS Rd
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 891 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
DEC
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1/2,Rd
DEC.L #1/2 ERd
1
1
1
DIVXS
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
2
2
11
19
DIVXU
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
1
1
11
19
EEPMOV
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
2
2
2n+2
*
2
2n+2
*
2
EXTS
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
1
1
EXTU
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
1
1
INC
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1/2,Rd
INC.L #1/2,ERd
1
1
1
JMP
JMP @ERN
JMP @aa:24
2
2
1
JMP @@aa:8
2
2
1
JSR
JSR @ERn
2
2
JSR @aa:24
2
2
1
JSR @@aa:8
2
2
2
LCD
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
1
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LDM
LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn
-
ERn+1)
LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn
-
ERn+2)
LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn
-
ERn+3)
2
2
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
LDMAC
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
MAC
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 892 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
MOV
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOVFPE
MOVFPE @:aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE
MOVTPE Rs,@:aa:16
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MULXS
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
2
11
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
2
19
MULXU
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
1
11
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
1
19
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 893 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
NEG
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
1
1
1
NOP
NOP
1
NOT
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
1
1
1
OR
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
ORC
ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
POP
POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
1
2
1
2
1
1
PUSH
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
1
2
1
2
1
1
ROTL
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2,Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2,Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTR
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2,Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2,Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTXL
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2,Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
RPTXR.B #2,Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
RTE
RTE
2
2/3
*
1
1
RTS
RTS
2
2
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 894 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2,Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2,Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHAR
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2,Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2,Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHLL
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2,Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2,Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHLR
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2,Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2,Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
1
STC
STC.B CCR.Rd
STC.B EXR,Rd
STC.W CCR,@ERd
STC.W EXR,@ERd
STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@-ERd
STC.W EXR,@-ERd
STC.W CCR,@aa:16
STC.W EXR,@aa:16
STC.W CCR,@aa:32
STC.W EXR,@aa:32
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
STM
STM.L (ERn-ERn+1),
@-Sp
STM.L (ERn-ERn+2),
@-Sp
STM.L (ERn-ERn+3),
@-Sp
2
2
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
STMAC
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
Cannot be used in this LSI.
SUB
SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
1
2
1
3
1
SUBS
SUBS #1/2/4,ERd
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 895 of 1037
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic
I
J
K
L
M
N
SUBX
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
1
1
TAS
TAS @ERd
*
3
2
2
TRAPA
TRAPA #x:2
2
2
2/3
*
1
2
XOR
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
XORC
XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
Notes: 1. 3 applies when EXR is valid, and 2 applies when invalid.
2. Applies when the transfer data is n bytes.
3. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 896 of 1037
A.5
Bus Status During Instruction Execution
Table A.6 indicates execution status of each instruction available in this LSI. For the number of
states required for each execution status, see table A.4, Number of States Required for Each
Execution Status (Cycle).
[How to see the table]
Instruction
JMP@aa:24
R:W 2nd
Internal operation
1 state
R:W EA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
End of instruction
Order of execution
Effective address is read by word.
Read/write not executed
The 2nd word of the instruction currently being
executed is read by word.
[Legend]
R : B
Read by byte
R : W
Read by word
W : B
Write by byte
W : W
Write by word
: M
Bus not transferred immediately after this cycle
2nd
Address of the 2nd word (3rd and 4th bytes)
3rd
Address of the 3rd word (5th and 6th bytes)
4th
Address of the 4th word (7th and 8th bytes)
5th
Address of the 5th word (9th and 10th bytes)
NEXT
The head address of the instruction immediately after the instruction
currently being executed
EA
Execution address
VEC
Vector address
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 897 of 1037
Table A.6
Instruction Execution Status
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
ADD.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
ADD.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
ADD.L ERs,ERd
R:W NEXT
ADDS #1/2/4,ERd
R:W NEXT
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
ADDX Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
AND.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
AND.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
AND.L ERs,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
R:W NEXT
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
BAND #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BRN d:8 (BT d:8)
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BHI d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BLS d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BNE d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BEQ d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BVC d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BVS d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BPL d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BMI d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BGE d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BLT d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BGT d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BLE d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
BRA d:16 (BT d:16) R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BRN d:16 (BF d:16) R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BHI d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BLS d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BCC d:16 (BHS
d:16)
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BNE d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BEQ d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BVC d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BVS d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BPL d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BMI d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BGE d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 898 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BLT d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BGT d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BLE d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,Rd
R:W NEXT
BCLR Rn,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BILD #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIST #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BLD #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BNOT #xx:3,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn,Rd
R:W NEXT
BNOT Rn,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn @aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 899 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BNOT Rn @aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:W EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn @aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BOR #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BOR #xx:3,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W NEXT
BSET #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,Rd
R:W NEXT
BSET Rn,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BSR d:8
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W stack(L)
BSR d:16
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W stack(L)
BST #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BST #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B:M EA
R:W:M NEXT
W:B EA
BTST #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST Rn,Rd
R:W NEXT
BTST Rn,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,Rd
R:W NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:B EA
R:W:M NEXT
CLRMAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
CMP.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
CMP.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
CMP.L ERs,ERd
R:W NEXT
DAA Rd
R:W NEXT
DAS Rd
R:W NEXT
DEC.B Rd
R:W NEXT
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 900 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DEC.W #1/2,Rd
R:W NEXT
DEC.W #1/2,ERd
R:W NEXT
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 11 state
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 19 state
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 11 state
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 19 state
EEPMOV.B
R:W 2nd
R:B EAs
*
1
R:B EAd
*
1
R:B EAs
*
2
W:B EAd
*
2
R:W NEXT
EEPMOV.W
R:W 2nd
R:B EAs
*
1
R:B EAd
*
1
R:B EAs
*
2
W:B EAd
*
2
R:W NEXT
EXTS.W Rd
R:W NEXT
Repeat n times
*
2
EXTS.L ERd
R:W NEXT
EXTU.W Rd
R:W NEXT
EXTU.L ERd
R:W NEXT
INC.B Rd
R:W NEXT
INC.W #1/2,Rd
R:W NEXT
INC.L #1/2,ERd
R:W NEXT
JMP @ERn
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
JMP @aa:24
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
JMP @@aa:8
R:W NEXT
R:W:M aa:8
R:W:M aa:8
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
JSR @ERn
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W stack (L)
JSR @aa:24
R:W 2nd
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W stack (L)
JSR @@aa:8
R:W NEXT
R:W:M aa:8
R:W aa:8
W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W stack (L) R:W EA
LCD #xx.8,CCR
R:W NEXT
LCD #xx.8,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
LCD Rs,CCR
R:W NEXT
LCD Rs,EXR
R:W NEXT
LCD @ERs,CCR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @ERs,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @(d:16,ERs),CCR R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @(d:16,ERs),EXR R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @(d:32,ERs),CCR R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @(d:32,ERs),EXR R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @ERs+,CCR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
LCD @ERs+,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
LCD @aa:16,CCR
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @aa:16,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @aa:32,CCR
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LCD @aa:32,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+1)
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W:M
stack(H)
*
3
R:W
stack(L)
*
3
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+2)
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W:M
stack(H)
*
3
R:W
stack(L)
*
3
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+3)
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W:M
stack(H)
*
3
R:W
stack(L)
*
3
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 901 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
MOV.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:B EA
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
MOV.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:W EA
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:B EA
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
MOV.L ERs,ERd
R:W NEXT
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W:M 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W NEXT
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd
R:W:W 3rd
R:W:M 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 902 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W:M 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 11 state
MULXS.W Rs,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 19 state
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 11 state
MULXU.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
Internal operation 19 state
NEG.B Rd
R:W NEXT
NEG.W Rd
R:W NEXT
NEG.L ERd
R:W NEXT
NOP
R:W NEXT
NOT.B Rd
R:W NEXT
NOT.W Rd
R:W NEXT
NOT.L ERd
R:W NEXT
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
OR.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
OR.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
OR.L ERs,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
ORC #xx:8,CCR
R:W NEXT
ORC #xx:8,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
POP.W Rn
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W EA
POP.L ERn
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W:M EA
R:W EA+2
PUSH.W Rn
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W EA
PUSH.L ERn
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W:M EA
W:W EA+2
ROTL.B Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTL.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTL.W Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTL.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTL.L ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTL.L #2, ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.B Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.W Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.L ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTR.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.B Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.B #2.Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.W Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.L ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTXR.B Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXR.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXR.W Rd
R:W NEXT
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 903 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ROTXR.L ERd
R:W NEXT
ROTXR.L #2.ERd
R:W NEXT
RTE
R:W NEXT
R:W
stack(EXR)
R:W stack(H)
R:W stack(L)
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W
*
4
RTS
R:W NEXT
R:W:M
stack(H)
R:W stack(L)
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W
*
4
SHAL.B Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAL B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAL.W Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAL.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAL.L ERd
R:W NEXT
SHAL.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.B Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.W Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.L ERd
R:W NEXT
SHAR.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.B Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.W Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.L ERd
R:W NEXT
SHLL.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.B Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.B #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.W Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.W #2,Rd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.L ERd
R:W NEXT
SHLR.L #2,ERd
R:W NEXT
SLEEP
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation: M
STC CCR,Rd
R:W NEXT
STC EXR,Rd
R:W NEXT
STC CCR,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC EXR,@ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC CCR,@(d:16,ERd) R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC EXR,@(d:16,ERd) R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC CCR,@(d:32,ERd) R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC EXR,@(d:32,ERd) R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W 5th
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC CCR,@-ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W EA
STC EXR,@-ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W EA
STC CCR,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC EXR,@aa:16
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC CCR,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STC EXR,@aa:32
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W 4th
R:W NEXT
W:W EA
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+1),@-SP
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W:M
stack (H)
*
3
W:W
stack (L)
*
3
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+2),@-SP
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W:M
stack (H)
*
3
W:W
stack (L)
*
3
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+3),@-SP
R:W 2nd
R:W:M NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W:M
stack (H)
*
3
W:W
stack (L)
*
3
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 904 of 1037
Instruction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
Cannot be used in this LSI.
SUB.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
SUB.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3nd
R:W NEXT
SUB.L ERs,ERd
R:W NEXT
SUB #1/2/4,ERd
R:W NEXT
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
SUBX Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
TAS @ERd
*
8
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
R:B:M EA
W:B EA
TRAPA #x:2
R:W NEXT
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W stack(L)
W:W stack(H)
W:W
stack(EXR)
R:W:M VEC
R:W VEC+2
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W
*
7
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
R:W NEXT
XOR.B Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
XOR.W Rs,Rd
R:W NEXT
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W 3rd
R:W NEXT
XOR.L ERs,ERd
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
XORC #xx:8,CCR
R:W NEXT
XORC #xx:8,EXR
R:W 2nd
R:W NEXT
Reset exception
handling
R:W:M VEC
R:W VEC+2
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W
*
5
Interrupt exception
handling
R:W
*
6
Internal
operation 1
state
W:W stack(L)
W:W stack(H)
W:W
stack(EXR)
R:W:M VEC
R:W VEC+2
Internal
operation 1
state
R:W
*
7
Notes: 1. EAs is the contents of ER5, and EAd is the contents of ER6.
2. 1 is added to EAs and EAd after execution. n is the initial value of R4L or R4. When
0 is set to n, R4L or R4 is not executed.
3. Repeated twice for 2-unit retract/return, three times for 3-unit retract/return, and four
times for 4-retract/return.
4. Head address after return.
5. Start address of the program.
6. Pre-fetch address obtained by adding 2 to the PC to be retracted.
When returning from sleep mode, standby mode or watch mode, internal operation is
executed instead of read operation.
7. Head address of the interrupt process routine.
8. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 905 of 1037
A.6
Change of Condition Codes
This section explains change of condition codes after instruction execution of the CPU. Legend
of the following tables is as follows.
m = 31: Longword size
m = 15: Word size
m = 7:
Byte size
Si:
Bit i of source operand
Di:
Bit i of destination operand
Ri:
Bit i of result
Dn:
Specified bit of destination operand
-
:
No affection
:
Changes depending on execution result
0:
Always cleared to 0
1:
Always set to 1
*:
Value undetermined
Z':
Z flag before execution
C':
C flag before execution
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 906 of 1037
Table A.7
Change of Condition Code
Instruc-
tion
H
N
Z
V
C
Definition
ADD
H=Sm-4
Dm-4+Dm-4
5P
+Sm-4
5P
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=Sm
Dm
5P
+
6P
'P
Rm
C=Sm
Dm+Dm
5P
+Sm
5P
ADDS
-
-
-
-
-
ADDX
H=Sm-4
Dm-4+Dm-4
5P
+Sm-4
5P
N=Rm
Z=Z'
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=Sm
Dm
5P
+
6P
'P
Rm
C=Sm
Dm+Dm
5P
+Sm
5P
AND
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
ANDC
Value in the bit corresponding to execution
result is stored.
No flag change when EXR.
BAND
-
-
-
-
C=C'
Dn
Bcc
-
-
-
-
-
BCLR
-
-
-
-
-
BIAND
-
-
-
-
C=C'
'Q
BILD
-
-
-
-
C=
'Q
BIOR
-
-
-
-
C=C'+
'Q
BIST
-
-
-
-
-
BIXOR
-
-
-
-
C=C'
Dn+
&
'Q
BLD
-
-
-
-
C=Dn
BNOT
-
-
-
-
-
BOR
-
-
-
-
C=C'+Dn
BSET
-
-
-
-
-
BSR
-
-
-
-
-
BST
-
-
-
-
-
BTST
-
-
-
-
Z=
'Q
BXOR
-
-
-
-
C=C'
'Q
+
&
Dn
CLRMAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 907 of 1037
Instruc-
tion
H
N
Z
V
C
Definition
CMP
H=Sm-4
'P
+
'P
Rm-4+Sm-4
Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=
6P
Dm
5P
+Sm
'P
Rm
C=Sm
'P
+
'P
Rm+Sm
Rm
DAA
*
*
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C: Decimal addition carry
DAS
*
*
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C: Decimal subtraction borrow
DEC
-
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=Dm
5P
DIVXS
-
-
-
N=Sm
'P
+
6P
Dm
Z=
6P
6P
RRRRRR
6
DIVXU
-
-
-
N=Sm
Z=
6P
6P
RRRRRR
6
EEPMOV
-
-
-
-
-
EXTS
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
EXTU
-
0
0
-
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
INC
-
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=
'P
5P
JMP
-
-
-
-
-
JSR
-
-
-
-
-
LDC
Value in the bit corresponding to execution
result is stored.
No flag change when EXR.
LDM
-
-
-
-
-
LDMAC
MAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOV
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 908 of 1037
Instruc-
tion
H
N
Z
V
C
Definition
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MULXS
-
-
-
N=R2m
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
MULXU
-
-
-
-
-
NEG
H=Dm-4+Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=Dm
Rm
C=Dm+Rm
NOP
-
-
-
-
-
NOT
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
OR
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
ORC
Value in the bit corresponding to execution
result is stored. No flag change when EXR.
POP
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
PUSH
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
ROTL
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=Dm(In case of 1 bit), C=Dm-1(In case of 2
bits)
ROTR
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=D0
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=D-1
(In case of 2 bits)
ROTXL
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=Dm
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=Dm-1
(In case of 2 bits)
ROTXR
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=D0
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=D1
(In case of 2 bits)
RTE
Value in the bit corresponding to execution
result is stored.
RTS
-
-
-
-
-
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 909 of 1037
Instruc-
tion
H
N
Z
V
C
Definition
SHAL
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=Dm
Dm-1+
'P
'P
(In case of 1 bit)
V=Dm
Dm-1
Dm-2
'P
'P
'P
(In case of 2bits)
C=Dm
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=Dm-1
(In case of 2 bits)
SHAR
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=D0
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=D1
(In case of 2 bits)
SHLL
-
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=Dm
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=Dm-1
(In case of 2 bits)
SHLR
-
0
0
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
C=D0
(In case of 1 bit)
, C=D1
(In case of 2 bits)
SLEEP
-
-
-
-
-
STC
-
-
-
-
-
STM
-
-
-
-
-
STMAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
SUB
H=Sm-4
'P
+
'P
Rm-4+Sm-4
Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=
6P
Dm
5P
+Sm
'P
Rm
C=Sm
'P
+
'P
Rm+Sm
Rm
SUBS
-
-
-
-
-
SUBX
H=Sm-4
'P
+
'P
Rm-4+Sm-4
Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Z'
5P
RRRRRR
5
V=
6P
Dm
5P
+Sm
'P
Rm
C=Sm
'P
+
'P
Rm+Sm
Rm
TAS
-
0
-
N=Dm
Z=
'P
'P
RRRRRR
'
TRAPA
-
-
-
-
-
XOR
-
0
-
N=Rm
Z=
5P
5P
RRRRRR
5
XORC
Value in the bit corresponding to execution
result is stored. No flag change when EXR.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 910 of 1037
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
B.1
Addresses
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D000
DGKp15
DGKp14
DGKp13
DGKp12
DGKp11
DGKp10
DGKp9
DGKp8
H'D001
DGKp
W
16
16
DGKp7
DGKp6
DGKp5
DGKp4
DGKp3
DGKp2
DGKp1
DGKp0
H'D002
DGKs15
DGKs14
DGKs13
DGKs12
DGKs11
DGKs10
DGKs9
DGKs8
H'D003
DGKs
W
16
16
DGKs7
DGKs6
DGKs5
DGKs4
DGKs3
DGKs2
DGKs1
DGKs0
H'D004
DAp15
DAp14
DAp13
DAp12
DAp11
DAp10
DAp9
DAp8
H'D005
DAp
W
16
16
DAp7
DAp6
DAp5
DAp4
DAp3
DAp2
DAp1
DAp0
H'D006
DBp15
DBp14
DBp13
DBp12
DBp11
DBp10
DBp9
DBp8
H'D007
DBp
W
16
16
DBp7
DBp6
DBp5
DBp4
DBp3
DBp2
DBp1
DBp0
H'D008
DAs15
DAs14
DAs13
DAs12
DAs11
DAs10
DAs9
DAs8
H'D009
DAs
W
16
16
DAs7
DAs6
DAs5
DAs4
DAs3
DAs2
DAs1
DAs0
H'D00A
DBs15
DBs14
DBs13
DBs12
DBs11
DBs10
DBs9
DBs8
H'D00B
DBs
W
16
16
DBs7
DBs6
DBs5
DBs4
DBs3
DBs2
DBs1
DBs0
H'D00C
DOfp15
DOfp14
DOfp13
DOfp12
DOfp11
DOfp10
DOfp9
DOfp8
H'D00D
DOfp
W
16
16
DOfp7
DOfp6
DOfp5
DOfp4
DOfp3
DOfp2
DOfp1
DOfp0
H'D00E
DOfs15
DOfs14
DOfs13
DOfs12
DOfs11
DOfs10
DOfs9
DOfs8
H'D00F
DOfs
W
16
16
DOfs7
DOfs6
DOfs5
DOfs4
DOfs3
DOfs2
DOfs1
DOfs0
Drum digital
filter
H'D010
CGKp15
CGKp14
CGKp13
CGKp12
CGKp11
CGKp10
CGKp9
CGKp8
H'D011
CGKp
W
16
16
CGKp7
CGKp6
CGKp5
CGKp4
CGKp3
CGKp2
CGKp1
CGKp0
H'D012
CGKs15
CGKs14
CGKs13
CGKs12
CGKs11
CGKs10
CGKs9
CGKs8
H'D013
CGKs
W
16
16
CGKs7
CGKs6
CGKs5
CGKs4
CGKs3
CGKs2
CGKs1
CGKs0
H'D014
CAp15
CAp14
CAp13
CAp12
CAp11
CAp10
CAp9
CAp8
H'D015
CAp
W
16
16
CAp7
CAp6
CAp5
CAp4
CAp3
CAp2
CAp1
CAp0
H'D016
CBp15
CBp14
CBp13
CBp12
CBp11
CBp10
CBp9
CBp8
H'D017
CBp
W
16
16
CBp7
CBp6
CBp5
CBp4
CBp3
CBp2
CBp1
CBp0
H'D018
CAs15
CAs14
CAs13
CAs12
CAs11
CAs10
CAs9
CAs8
H'D019
CAs
W
16
16
CAs7
CAs6
CAs5
CAs4
CAs3
CAs2
CAs1
CAs0
H'D01A
CBs15
CBs14
CBs13
CBs12
CBs11
CBs10
CBs9
CBs8
H'D01B
CBs
W
16
16
CBs7
CBs6
CBs5
CBs4
CBs3
CBs2
CBs1
CBs0
H'D01C
COfp15
COfp14
COfp13
COfp12
COfp11
COfp10
COfp9
COfp8
H'D01D
COfp
W
16
16
COfp7
COfp6
COfp5
COfp4
COfp3
COfp2
COfp1
COfp0
H'D01E
COfs15
COfs14
COfs13
COfs12
COfs11
COfs10
COfs9
COfs8
H'D01F
COfs
W
16
16
COfs7
COfs6
COfs5
COfs4
COfs3
COfs2
COfs1
COfs0
Capstan
digital filter
H'D020
-
-
-
-
DZs11
DZs10
DZs9
DZs8
H'D021
DZs
W
16
16
DZs7
DZs6
DZs5
DZs4
DZs3
DZs2
DZs1
DZs0
H'D022
-
-
-
-
DZp11
DZp10
DZp9
DZp8
H'D023
DZp
W
16
16
DZp7
DZp6
DZp5
DZp4
DZp3
DZp2
DZp1
DZp0
H'D024
-
-
-
-
CZs11
CZs10
CZs9
CZs8
H'D025
CZs
W
16
16
CZs7
CZs6
CZs5
CZs4
CZs3
CZs2
CZs1
CZs0
H'D026
-
-
-
-
CZp11
CZp10
CZp9
CZp8
H'D027
CZp
W
16
16
CZp7
CZp6
CZp5
CZp4
CZp3
CZp2
CZp1
CZp0
H'D028
DFIC
R/W
8
-
DROV
DPHA
DZPON
DZSON
DSG2
DSG1
DSC0
H'D029
CFIC
R/W
8
16
-
CROV
CPHA
CZPON
CZSON
CSG2
CSG1
CSG0
H'D02A
DFUCR
R/W
8
16
-
-
PTON
CP/
'3
CFEPS
DFEPS
CFESS
DFESS
Digital filter
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 911 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D030
DFPR15
DFPR14
DFPR13
DFPR12
DFPR11
DFPR10
DFPR9
DFPR8
H'D031
DFPR
W
16
16
DFPR7
DFPR6
DFPR5
DFPR4
DFPR3
DFPR2
DFPR1
DFPR0
H'D032
DFER15
DFER14
DFER13
DFER12
DFER11
DFER10
DFER9
DFER8
H'D033
DFER
R/W
16
16
DFER7
DFER6
DFER5
DFER4
DFER3
DFER2
DFER1
DFER0
H'D034
DFRUDR1
5
DFRUDR1
4
DFRUDR1
3
DFRUDR1
2
DFRUDR1
1
DFRUDR1
0
DFRUDR9
DFRUDR8
H'D035
DFRUDR
W
16
16
DFRUDR7
DFRUDR6
DFRUDR5
DFRUDR4
DFRUDR3
DFRUDR2
DFRUDR1
DFRUDR0
H'D036
DFRLDR15 DFRLDR14 DFRLDR13 DFRLDR12 DFRLDR11 DFRLDR10 DFRLDR9
DFRLDR8
H'D037
DFRLDR
W
16
16
DFRLDR7
DFRLDR6
DFRLDR5
DFRLDR4
DFRLDR3
DFRLDR2
DFRLDR1
DFRLDR0
H'D038
DFVCR
R/W
8
16
DFCS1
DFCS0
DFOVF
DFRFON
DF-R/UNR
OPCNT
DFRCS1
DFRCS0
H'D039
DPGCR
R/W
8
16
DPCS1
DPCS0
DPOVF
N/V
HSWES
-
-
-
H'D03A
DPPR15
DPPR14
DPPR13
DPPR12
DPPR11
DPPR10
DPPR9
DPPR8
H'D03B
DPPR2
W
16
16
DPPR7
DPPR6
DPPR5
DPPR4
DPPR3
DPPR2
DPPR1
DPPR0
H'D03C
DPPR1
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
DPPR19
DPPR18
DPPR17
DPPR16
H'D03D
DPER1
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
DPER19
DPER18
DPER17
DPER16
H'D03E
DPER15
DPER14
DPER13
DPER12
DPER11
DPER10
DPER9
DPER8
H'D03F
DPER2
W
16
16
DPER7
DPER6
DPER5
DPER4
DPER3
DPER2
DPER1
DPER0
Drum error
detector
H'D050
CFPR15
CFPR14
CFPR13
CFPR12
CFPR11
CFPR10
CFPR9
CFPR8
H'D051
CFPR
W
16
16
CFPR7
CFPR6
CFPR5
CFPR4
CFPR3
CFPR2
CFPR1
CFPR0
H'D052
CFER15
CFER14
CFER13
CFER12
CFER11
CFER10
CFER9
CFER8
H'D053
CFER
R/W
16
16
CFER7
CFER6
CFER5
CFER4
CFER3
CFER2
CFER1
CFER0
H'D054
CFRUDR1
5
CFRUDR1
4
CFRUDR1
3
CFRUDR1
2
CFRUDR1
1
CFRUDR1
0
CFRUDR9
CFRUDR8
H'D055
CFRUDR
W
16
16
CFRUDR7
CFRUDR6
CFRUDR5
CFRUDR4
CFRUDR3
CFRUDR2
CFRUDR1
CFRUDR0
H'D056
CFRLDR15 CFRLDR14 CFRLDR13 CFRLDR12 CFRLDR11 CFRLDR10 CFRLDR9
CFRLDR8
H'D057
CFRLDR
W
16
16
CFRLDR7
CFRLDR6
CFRLDR5
CFRLDR4
CFRLDR3
CFRLDR2
CFRLDR1
CFRLDR0
H'D058
CFVCR
R/W
8
16
CFCS1
CFCS0
CFOVF
CFRFON
CF-R/UNR
CPCNT
CFRCS1
CFRCS0
H'D059
CPGCR
R/W
8
16
CPCS1
CPCS0
CPOVF
CR/RF
SELCFG2
-
-
-
H'D05A
CPH15
CPH14
CPH13
CPH12
CPH11
CPH10
CPH9
CPH8
H'D05B
CPPR2
W
16
16
CPH7
CPH6
CPH5
CPH4
CPH3
CPH2
CPH1
CPH0
H'D05C
CPPR1
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
CPH19
CPH18
CPH17
CPH16
H'D05D
CPER1
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
CPER19
CPER18
CPER17
CPER16
H'D05E
CPER15
CPER14
CPER13
CPER12
CPER11
CPER10
CPER9
CPER8
H'D05F
CPER2
W
16
16
CPER7
CPER6
CPER5
CPER4
CPER3
CPER2
CPER1
CPER0
Capstan
error detector
H'D060
HSM1
R/W
8
FLB
FLA
EMPB
EMPA
OVWB
OVWA
CLRB
CLRA
H'D061
HSM2
R/W
8
16
FRT
FGR2OFF
LOP
EDG
ISEL
SOFG
OFG
VFF/NFF
H'D062
HSLP
W
8
16
LOB3
LOB2
LOB1
LOB0
LOA3
LOA2
LOA1
LOA0
H'D064
-
ADTRGA
STRIGA
NarrowFFA VFFA
AFFA
VpulseA
MlevelA
H'D065
FPDRA
W
16
16
PPGA7
PPGA6
PPGA5
PPGA4
PPGA3
PPGA2
PPGA1
PPGA0
H'D066
FTPRA
*
W
16
FTPRA15
FTRPA14
FTRPA13
FTRPA12
FTRPA11
FTRPA10
FTRPA9
FTRPA8
H'D066
FTCTR
*
R
16
16
FTCTR15
FTCTR14
FTCTR13
FTCTR12
FTCTR11
FTCTR10
FTCTR9
FTCTR8
H'D067
FTPRA
*
W
16
FTPRA7
FTPRA6
FTPRA5
FTPRA4
FTPRA3
FTPRA2
FTPRA1
FTPRA0
H'D067
FTCTR
*
R
16
16
FTCTR7
FTCTR6
FTCTR5
FTCTR4
FTCTR3
FTCTR2
FTCTR1
FTCTR0
H'D068
-
ADTRGB
STRIGB
NarrowFFB VFFB
AFFB
VpulseB
MlevelB
H'D069
FPDRB
W
16
16
PPGB7
PPGB6
PPGB5
PPGB4
PPGB3
PPGB2
PPGB1
PPGB0
H'D06A
FTPRB15
FTPRB14
FTPRB13
FTPRB12
FTPRB11
FTPRB10
FTPRB9
FTPRB8
H'D06B
FTPRB
W
16
16
FTPRB7
FTPRB6
FTPRB5
FTPRB4
FPTRB3
FPTRB2
FPTRB1
FPTRB0
H'D06C
DFCTR
*
W
8
ISEL2
CCLR
CKSL
DFCRA4
DFCRA3
DFCRA2
DFCRA1
DFCRA0
H'D06C
DFCRB
R
8
16
-
-
-
DFCTR4
DFCTR3
DFCTR2
DFCTR1
DFCTR0
H'D06D
DFCRB
W
8
16
-
-
-
DFCRB4
DFCRB3
DFCRB2
DFCRB1
DFCRB0
HSW timing
generator
*
Assign to
the same
address.
H'D06E
CHCR
W
8
V/N
HSWPOL
CRH
HAH
SIG3
SIG2
SIG1
SIG0
4-head
special-
effects
playback
H'D06F
ADDVR
R/W
8
16
-
-
-
HMSK
HIZ
CUT
VPON
POL
Additional V
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 912 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D070
-
-
-
-
XR11
XR10
XR9
XR8
H'D071
XDR
W
16
16
XR7
XR6
XR5
XR4
XR3
XR2
XR1
XR0
H'D072
-
-
-
-
TRD11
TRD10
TRD9
TRD8
H'D073
TRDR
W
16
16
TRD7
TRD6
TRD5
TRD4
TRD3
TRD2
TRD1
TRD0
H'D074
XTCR
R/W
8
16
-
CAPRF
AT/
08
TRK/
;
EXC/REF
XCS
DVRER1
DVREF0
X-value,
TRK-value
H'D078
-
-
-
-
DPWDR11 DPWDR10 DPWDR9
DPWDR8
H'D079
DPWDR
R/W
16
16
DPWDR7
DPWDR6
DPWDR5
DPWDR4
DPWDR3
DPWDR2
DPWDR1
DPWDR0
H'D07A
DPWCR
W
8
DPOL
DDC
DHIZ
DH/L
DSFDF
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
Drum 12-bit
PWM
H'D07B
CPWCR
W
8
16
CPOL
CDC
CHIZ
CH/L
CSF/DF
CCK2
CCK1
CCK0
H'D07C
-
-
-
-
CPWDR11 CPWDR10 CPWDR9
CPWDR8
H'D07D
CPWDR
R/W
16
16
CPWDR7
CPWDR6
CPWDR5
CPWDR4
CPWDR3
CPWDR2
CPWDR1
CPWDR0
Capstan 12-
bit PWM
H'D080
CTCR
W
8
NT/PAL
FLSC
FLSB
FSLA
CCS
LCTL
UNCTL
SLWM
H'D081
CTLM
R/W
8
16
ASM
REC/
3%
FW/RV
MD4
MD3
MD3
MD1
MD0
H'D082
-
-
-
-
CMT1B
CMT1A
CMT19
CMT18
H'D083
RCDR1
W
16
16
CMT17
CMT16
CMT15
CMT14
CMT13
CMT12
CMT11
CMT10
H'D084
-
-
-
-
CMT2B
CMT2A
CMT29
CMT28
H'D085
RCDR2
W
16
16
CMT27
CMT26
CMT25
CMT24
CMT23
CMT22
CMT21
CMT20
H'D086
-
-
-
-
CMT3B
CMT3A
CMT39
CMT38
H'D087
RCDR3
W
16
16
CMT37
CMT36
CMT35
CMT34
CMT33
CMT32
CMT31
CMT30
H'D088
-
-
-
-
CMT4B
CMT4A
CMT49
CMT48
H'D089
RCDR4
W
16
16
CMT47
CMT46
CMT45
CMT44
CMT43
CMT42
CMT41
CMT40
H'D08A
-
-
-
-
CMT5B
CMT5A
CMT59
CMT58
H'D08B
RCDR5
W
16
16
CMT57
CMT56
CMT55
CMT54
CMT53
CMT52
CMT51
CMT50
H'D08C
DI/O
R/W
8
VCTR2
VCTR1
VCTR0
-
BPON
BPS
BPF
DI/O
H'D08D
BTPR
R/W
8
16
LSP7
LSP6
LSP5
LSP4
LSP3
LSP2
LSP1
LSP0
CTL circuit
H'D090
REF15
REF14
REF13
REF12
REF11
REF10
REF9
REF8
H'D091
RFD
W
16
16
REF7
REF6
REF5
REF4
REF3
REF2
REF1
REF0
H'D092
CRF15
CRF14
CRF13
CRF12
CRF11
CRF10
CRF9
CRF8
H'D093
CRF
W
16
16
CRF7
CRF6
CRF5
CRF4
CRF3
CRF2
CRF1
CRF0
H'D094
RFC15
RFC14
RFC13
RFC12
RFC11
RFC10
RFC9
RFC8
H'D095
RFC
R/W
16
16
RFC7
RFC6
RFC5
RFC4
RFC3
RFC2
RFC1
RFC0
H'D096
RFM
R/W
8
RCF
VNA
CVS
REX
CRD
OD/EV
VST
VEG
H'D097
RFM2
R/W
8
16
(TBC)
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
FDS
Reference
signal
generator
*
The TBC
bit is
available
only in the
H8S/2194C
series.
H'D098
CTVC
R/W
8
CEX
CEG
-
-
-
CFG
HSW
CTL
H'D099
CTLR
W
8
16
CTL7
CTL6
CTL5
CTL4
CTL3
CTL2
CTL1
CTL0
H'D09A
CDVC
R/W
8
MCGain
CMK
CMN
DVTRG
CRF
CPS1
CPS0
H'D09B
CDIVR1
W
8
16
-
CDV16
CDV15
CDV14
CDV13
CDV12
CDV11
CDV10
H'D09C
CDIVR2
W
8
-
CDV26
CDV25
CDV24
CDV23
CDV22
CDV21
CDV20
H'D09D
CTMR
W
8
16
-
-
CPM5
CPM4
CPM3
CPM2
CPM1
CPM0
H'D09E
FGCR
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DRF
Frequency
divider
H'D0A0
SPMR
R/W
8
8
CTLSTOP
-
CFGCOMP EXCELON
DPGSW
COMP
H.Amp.SW C.Rot
H'D0A1
SPCR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
SPCR4
SPCR3
SPCR2
SPCR1
SPCR0
H'D0A2
SPDR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
SPDR4
SPDR3
SPDR2
SPDR1
SPDR0
H'D0A3
SVMCR
R/W
8
8
-
-
SVMCR5
SVMCR4
SVMCR3
SVMCR2
SVMCR1
SVMCR0
H'D0A4
CTLGR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
CTLFB
CTLGR3
CTLGR2
CTLGR1
CTLGR0
Servo port
control
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 913 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D0B0
VTR
W
8
16
-
-
VTR5
VTR4
VTR3
VTR2
VTR1
VTR0
H'D0B1
HTR
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
HTR3
HTR2
HTR1
HTR0
H'D0B2
HRTR
W
8
16
HRTR7
HRTR6
HRTR5
HRTR4
HRTR3
HRTR2
HRTR1
HRTR0
H'D0B3
HPWR
W
8
16
-
-
-
-
HPWR3
HPWR2
HPWR1
HPWR0
H'D0B4
NWR
W
8
16
-
-
NWR5
NWR4
NWR3
NWR2
NWR1
NWR0
H'D0B5
NDR
W
8
16
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
H'D0B6
SYNCR
R/W
8
16
-
-
-
-
NID/VD
NOIS
FLD
SYCT
Sync
detector
H'D0B8
SIENR1
R/W
8
16
IEDR3
IEDR2
IEDR1
IECAP3
IECAP2
IECAP1
IEHSW2
IEHSW1
H'D0B9
SIENR2
R/W
8
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
IESNC
IESTL
H'D0BA
SIRQR1
R/W
8
16
IRRDRM3
IRRDRM2
IRRDRM1
IRRCAP3
IRRCAP2
IRRCAP1
IRRHSW2
IRRHSW1
H'D0BB
SIRQR2
R/W
8
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
IRRSNC
IRRCTL
Servo
interrupt
control
H'D0C0
R/W
8
8
H'D0C1
R/W
8
8
H'D0C2
R/W
8
8
H'D0C3
R/W
8
8
H'D0C4
R/W
8
8
H'D0C5
R/W
8
8
H'D0C6
R/W
8
8
H'D0C7
R/W
8
8
H'D0C8
R/W
8
8
H'D0C9
R/W
8
8
H'D0CA
R/W
8
8
H'D0CB
R/W
8
8
H'D0CC
R/W
8
8
H'D0CD
R/W
8
8
H'D0CE
R/W
8
8
H'D0CF
32 byte Data
Buffer
R/W
8
8
32-byte
buffer SCI2
H'D0D0
R/W
8
8
H'D0D1
R/W
8
8
H'D0D2
R/W
8
8
H'D0D3
R/W
8
8
H'D0D4
R/W
8
8
H'D0D5
R/W
8
8
H'D0D6
R/W
8
8
H'D0D7
R/W
8
8
H'D0D8
R/W
8
8
H'D0D9
R/W
8
8
H'D0DA
R/W
8
8
H'D0DB
R/W
8
8
H'D0DC
R/W
8
8
H'D0DD
R/W
8
8
H'D0DE
R/W
8
8
H'D0DF
32 byte Data
Buffer
R/W
8
8
32-byte
buffer SCI2
H'D0E0
STAR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
STA4
STA3
STA2
STA1
STA0
H'D0E1
EDAR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
EDA4
EDA3
EDA2
EDA1
EDA0
H'D0E2
SCR2
R/W
8
8
TEIE
ABTIE
-
GAP1
GAP0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'D0E3
SCSR2
R/W
8
8
TEI
-
-
SOL
ORER
WT
ABT
STF
32-byte
buffer SCI2
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 914 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D100
TIER
R/W
8
16
ICIAE
ICIBE
ICICE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
ICSA
H'D101
TCSRX
R/W
8
16
ICFA
ICFB
ICFC
ICFD
OCFA
OCFB
OVF
CCLRA
H'D102
FRCH
FRCH7
FRCH6
FRCH5
FRCH4
FRCH3
FRCH2
FRCH1
FRCH0
H'D103
FRCL
R/W
8/16
16
FRCL7
FRCL6
FRCL5
FRCL4
FRCL3
FRCL2
FRCL1
FRCL0
H'D104
OXRAH
*
OCRAH7
OCRAH6
OCRAH5
OCRAH4
OCRAH3
OCRAH2
OCRAH1
OCRAH0
H'D105
OCRAL
*
R/W
8/16
16
OCRAL7
OCRAL6
OCRAL5
OCRAL4
OCRAL3
OCRAL2
OCRAL1
OCRAL0
H'D104
OCRBH
*
OCRBH7
CORBH6
OCRBH5
OCRBH4
OCRBH3
OCRBH2
OCRBH1
OCRBH0
H'D105
OCRBL
*
R/W
8/16
16
OCRBL7
OCRBL6
OCRBL5
CORBL4
CORBL3
CORBL2
CORBL1
CORBL0
H'D106
TCRX
R/W
8
16
IEDGA
IEDGB
IEDGC
IEDGD
BUFEA
FUFEB
CKS1
CKS0
H'D107
TOCR
R/W
8
16
ICSB
ICSC
ICSD
OCRS
OEA
OEB
OLVLA
OLVLB
H'D108
ICRAH
ICRAH7
ICRAH6
ICRAH5
ICRAH4
ICRAH3
ICRAH2
ICRAH1
ICRAH0
H'D109
ICRAL
R
8/16
16
ICRAL7
ICRAL6
ICRAL5
ICRAL4
ICRAL3
ICRAL2
ICRAL1
ICRAL0
H'D10A
ICRBH
ICRBH7
ICRBH6
ICRBH5
ICRBH4
ICRBH3
ICRBH2
ICRBH1
ICRBH0
H'D10B
ICRBL
R
8/16
16
ICRBL7
ICRBL6
ICRBL5
ICRBL4
ICRBL3
ICRBL2
ICRBL1
ICRBL0
H'D10C
ICRCH
ICRCH7
ICRCH6
ICRCH5
ICRCH4
ICRCH3
ICRCH2
ICRCH1
ICRCH0
H'D10D
ICRCL
R
8/16
16
ICRCL7
ICRCL6
ICRCL5
ICRCL4
ICRCL3
ICRCL2
ICRCL1
ICRCL0
H'D10E
ICRDH
ICRDH7
ICRDH6
ICRDH5
ICRDH4
ICRDH3
ICRDH2
ICRDH1
ICRDH0
H'D10F
ICRDL
R
8/16
16
ICRDL7
ICRDL6
ICRDL5
ICRDL4
ICRDL3
ICRDL2
ICRDL1
ICRDL0
Timer X1
*
OCRA and
OCRB
addresses
are the
same.
Switched by
OCSR bit in
IOCR.
H'D110
TMB
R/W
8
8
TMB17
TMBIF
TMPIE
-
-
TMP12
TMP11
TCB10
H'D111
TCB
R
8
8
TCB17
TCB16
TCB15
TCB14
TCB13
TCB12
TCB11
TCB10
H'D111
TLB
W
8
8
TLB17
TLB16
TLB15
TLB14
TLB13
TLB12
TLB11
TLB10
Timer B
H'D112
LMR
R/W
8
8
LMIF
LMIE
-
-
LMR3
LMR2
LMR1
LMR0
H'D113
LTC
R
8
8
LTC7
LTC6
LTC5
LTC4
LTC3
LTC2
LTC1
LTC0
H'D113
RCR
W
8
8
RCR7
RCR6
RCR5
RCR4
RCR3
RCR2
RCR1
RCR0
Timer L
H'D118
TMRM1
R/W
8
8
CLR2
AC/BR
RLD
RLCK
PS21
PC20
RLD/CAP
CPS
H'D119
TMRM2
R/W
8
8
LAT
RS11
PS10
PS31
PS30
CP/SLM
CAPF
SLW
H'D11A
TMRCP1
R
8
8
TMRC17
TMRC16
TMRC15
TMRC14
TMRC13
TMRC12
TMRC11
TMRC10
H'D11B
TMRCP2
R
8
8
TMRC27
TMRC26
TMRC25
TMRC24
TMRC23
TMRC22
TMRC21
TMRC20
H'D11C
TMRL1
W
8
8
TMR17
TMR16
TMR15
TMR14
TMR13
TMR12
TMR11
TMR10
H'D11D
TMRL2
W
8
8
TMR27
TMR26
TMR25
TMR24
TMR23
TMR22
TMR21
TMR20
H'D11E
TMRL3
W
8
8
TMR37
TMR36
TMR35
TMR34
TMR33
TMR32
TMR31
TMR30
H'D11F
TMRCS
R/W
8
8
TMRI3E
TMRI2E
TMRI1E
TMRI3
TMRI2
TMRI1
-
-
Timer R
H'D120
PWDRL
W
8
8
PWDRL7
PWDRL6
PWDRL5
PWDRL4
PWDRL3
PWDRL2
PWDRL1
PWDRL0
H'D121
PWDRU
W
8
8
-
-
PWDRU5
PWDRU4
PWDRU3
PWDRU2
PWDRU1
PWDRU0
H'D122
PWCR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PWMCR0
14-bit PWM
H'D126
PWR0
W
8
8
PW07
PW06
PW05
PW04
PW03
PW02
PW01
PW00
H'D127
PWR1
W
8
8
PW17
PW16
PW15
PW14
PW13
PW12
PW11
PW10
H'D128
PWR2
W
8
8
PW27
PW26
PW25
PW24
PW23
PW22
PW21
PW20
H'D129
PWR3
W
8
8
PW37
PW36
PW35
PW34
PW33
PW32
PW31
PW30
H'D12A
PW8CR
R/W
8
8
-
-
-
-
PWC3
PWC2
PWC1
PWC0
8-bit PWM
H'D12C
ICR1
R
8
8
ICR17
ICR16
ICR15
ICR14
ICR13
ICR12
ICR11
CIR10
H'D12D
PCSR
R/W
8
8
ICIF
ICIE
ICEG
NCon/off
-
DCS2
DCS1
DCS0
PSU
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 915 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D130
ADRH
ADR9
ADR8
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
H'D131
ADRL
R
16
8
ADR1
ADR0
H'D132
AHRH
AHR9
AHR8
AHR7
AHR6
AHR5
AHR4
AHR3
AHR2
H'D133
AHRL
R
16
8
AHR1
AHR0
H'D134
ADCR
R/W
8
8
CK
HCH1
HCH0
SCH3
SCH2
SCH1
SCH0
H'D135
ADCSR
R/W
8
8
SEND
HEND
ADIE
SST
HST
BUSY
SCNL
H'D136
ADTSR
R/W
8
8
TRGS1
TRGS0
A/D
H'D138
TLK
W
8/16
16
TLR27
TLR26
TLR25
TLR24
TLR23
TLR22
TLR21
TLR20
H'D138
TCK
R
8/16
16
TLR17
TLR16
TLR15
TLR14
TLR13
TLR12
TLR11
TLR10
H'D139
TLJ
W
8/16
16
TDR27
TDR26
TDR25
TDR24
TDR23
TDR22
TDR21
TDR20
H'D139
TCJ
R
8/16
16
TDR17
TDR16
TDR15
TDR14
TDR13
TDR12
TDR11
TDR10
H'D13A
TMJ
R/W
8/16
16
PS11
PS10
ST
8/16
PS21
PS20
TGL
T/R
H'D13B
TMJC
R/W
8/16
16
BUZZ1
BUZZ0
MON1
MON0
TMJ2IE
TMJ1IE
(PS22)
*
H'D13C
TMJS
R/W
8/16
16
TMJ2I
TMJ1I
Timer J
*
The PS22
bit is
available
only in the
H8S/2194C
series.
H'D148
SMR1
R/W
8
8
C/
$
CHR
PE
O/
(
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
H'D149
BRR1
R/W
8
8
H'D14A
SCR1
R/W
8
8
TEI
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
H'D14B
TDR1
R/W
8
8
H'D14C
SSR1
R/W
8
8
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FER
PER
TEMD
MPB
MPBT
H'D14D
RDR1
R
8
8
H'D14E
SCMR1
R/W
8
8
SDIR
SINV
SMIF
Clock
synchronizati
on/start-stop
sync SCI
H'D158
ICCR
R/W
8
8
ICE
IEIC
MST
TRS
ACKE
BBSY
IRIC
SCP
H'D159
ICSR
R/W
8
8
ESTP
STOP
IRTR
AASX
AL
AAS
ADZ
ACKB
H'D15E
ICDR
*
R/W
8
8
ICDR7
ICDR6
ICDR5
ICDR4
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
ICDR0
H'D15E
SARX
*
R/W
8
8
SVAX6
SVAX5
SVAX4
SVAX3
SVAX2
SVAX1
SVAX0
FSX
H'D15F
ICMR
*
R/W
8
8
MLS
WAIT
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
BC2
BC1
BC0
H'D15F
SAR
*
R/W
8
8
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
IIC interface
*
Access
varies
depending
on ICE bit.
H'FFB0
TA023
TA022
TA021
TA020
TA019
TA018
TA017
TA016
H'FFB1
TA015
TA014
TA013
TA012
TA011
TA010
TA009
TA008
H'FFB2
TAR0
R/W
8
8
TA007
TA006
TA005
TA004
TA003
TA002
TA001
H'FFB3
TA123
TA122
TA121
TA120
TA119
TA118
TA117
TA116
H'FFB4
TA115
TA114
TA113
TA112
TA111
TA110
TA109
TA108
H'FFB5
TAR1
R/W
8
8
TA107
TA106
TA105
TA104
TA103
TA102
TA101
H'FFB6
TA223
TA222
TA221
TA220
TA219
TA218
TA217
TA216
H'FFB7
TA215
TA214
TA213
TA212
TA211
TA210
TA209
TA208
H'FFB8
TAR2
R/W
8
8
TA207
TA206
TA205
TA204
TA203
TA202
TA201
H'FFB9
TRCR
R/W
8
8
TRC2
TRC1
TRC0
ATC
H'FFBA
TMA
R/W
8
8
TMAOV
TMAIE
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
H'FFBB
TCA
R
8
8
TCA7
TCA6
TCA5
TCA4
TCA3
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
Timer A
H'FFBC
WTCSR
R/W
8/16
16
OVF
WT/
,7
TME
RSTS
RST/
10,
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
H'FFBD
WTCNT
R/W
8/16
16
WDT
H'FFC0
PDR0
R
8
8
PDR07
PDR06
PDR05
PDR04
PDR03
PDR02
PDR01
PDR00
H'FFC1
PDR1
R/W
8
8
PDR17
PDR16
PDR15
PDR14
PDR13
PDR12
PDR11
PDR10
H'FFC2
PDR2
R/W
8
8
PDR27
PDR26
PDR25
PDR24
PDR23
PDR22
PDR21
PDR20
H'FFC3
PDR3
R/W
8
8
PDR37
PDR36
PDR35
PDR34
PDR33
PDR32
PDR31
PDR30
H'FFC4
PDR4
R/W
8
8
PDR47
PDR46
PDR45
PDR44
PDR43
PDR42
PDR41
PDR40
H'FFC5
PDR5
R/W
8
8
PDR53
PDR52
PDR51
PDR50
H'FFC6
PDR6
R/W
8
8
PDR67
PDR66
PDR65
PDR64
PDR63
PDR62
PDR61
PDR60
H'FFC7
PDR7
R/W
8
8
PDR77
PDR76
PDR75
PDR74
PDR73
PDR72
PDR71
PDR70
H'FFC8
PDR8
R/W
8
8
PDR87
PDR86
PDR85
PDR84
PDR83
PDR82
PDR81
PDR80
Port data
register
H'FFCD
PMR0
R/W
8
8
PMR07
PMR06
PMR05
PMR04
PMR03
PMR02
PMR01
PMR00
H'FFCE
PMR1
R/W
8
8
PMR17
PMR16
PMR15
PMR14
PMR13
PMR12
PMR11
PMR10
H'FFCF
PMR2
R/W
8
8
PMR27
PMR26
PMR25
PMR20
Port mode
register
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 916 of 1037
Address
*
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'FFD0
PMR3
R/W
8
8
PMR37
PMR36
PMR35
PMR34
PMR33
PMR32
PMR31
PMR30
Port mode
register
H'FFD1
PCR1
W
8
8
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
H'FFD2
PCR2
W
8
8
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
H'FFD3
PCR3
W
8
8
PCR37
PCR36
PCR35
PCR34
PCR33
PCR32
PCR31
PCR30
H'FFD4
PCR4
W
8
8
PCR47
PCR46
PCR45
PCR44
PCR43
PCR42
PCR41
PCR40
H'FFD5
PCR5
W
8
8
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
H'FFD6
PCR6
W
8
8
PCR67
PCR66
PCR65
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
H'FFD7
PCR7
W
8
8
PCR77
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
H'FFD8
PCR8
W
8
8
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR380
Port control
register
H'FFDB
PMR4
R/W
8
8
PMR40
H'FFDC
PMR5
R/W
8
8
PMR53
PMR52
PMR51
PMR50
H'FFDD
PMR6
R/W
8
8
PMR67
PMR66
PMR65
PMR64
PMR63
PMR62
PMR61
PMR60
H'FFDE
PMR7
R/W
8
8
PMR77
PMR76
PMR75
PMR74
PMR73
PMR72
PMR71
PMR70
H'FFDF
PMR8
R/W
8
8
PMR83
PMR82
PMR81
PMR80
Port mode
register
H'FFE1
PUR1
R/W
8
8
PUR17
PUR16
PUR15
PUR14
PUR13
PUR12
PUR11
PUR10
H'FFE2
PUR2
R/W
8
8
PUR27
PUR26
PUR25
PUR24
PUR23
PUR22
PUR21
PUR20
H'FFE3
PUR3
R/W
8
8
PUR37
PUR36
PUR35
PUR34
PUR33
PUR32
PUR31
PUR30
Port pull-up
select
register
H'FFE4
RTPEGR
R/W
8
8
RTPEGR1
RTPEGR0
H'FFE5
RTPSR
R/W
8
8
RTPSR7
RTPSR6
RTPSR5
RTPSR4
RTPSR3
RTPSR2
RTPSR1
RTPSR0
RTP TRG
select
H'FFE8
SYSCR
R/W
8
8
INTM1
INTM0
XRST
NMIEG1
NMIEG0
H'FFE9
MDCR
R/W
8
8
MDS0
H'FFEA
SBYCR
R/W
8
8
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
SCK1
SCK0
H'FFEB
LPWRCR
R/W
8
8
DTON
LSON
NESEL
SA1
SA0
H'FFEC
MSTPCRH
R/W
8
8
MSTP15
MSTP14
MSTP13
MSTP12
MSTP11
MSTP10
MSTP9
MSTP8
H'FFED
MSTPCRL
R/W
8
8
MSTP7
MSTP6
MSTP5
MSTP4
MSTP3
MSTP2
MSTP1
MSTP0
H'FFEE
STCR
R/W
8
8
IICX
IICRST
FLASHE
System
control
register
H'FFF0
IEGR
R/W
8
8
IRQ5EG
IRQ4EG
IRQ3EG
IRQ2EG
IRQ1EG
IRQ0EG1
IRQ0EG0
IRQ edge
H'FFF1
IENR
R/W
8
8
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
IRQ enable
H'FFF2
IRQR
R/W
8
8
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
IRQ status
H'FFF3
ICRA
R/W
8
8
ICRA7
ICRA6
ICRA5
ICRA4
ICRA3
ICRA2
ICRA1
ICRA0
H'FFF4
ICRB
R/W
8
8
ICRB7
ICRB6
ICRB5
ICRB4
ICRB3
ICRB2
ICRB1
ICRB0
H'FFF5
ICRC
R/W
8
8
ICRC7
ICRC6
ICRC5
ICRC4
ICRC3
ICRC2
ICRC1
ICRC0
H'FFF6
ICRD
R/W
8
8
ICRD7
ICRD6
ICRD5
ICRD4
ICRD3
ICRD2
ICRD1
ICRD0
IRQ priority
control
H'FFF8
FLMCR1
R/W
8
8
FWE
SWE
EV
PV
E
P
H'FFF9
FLMCR2
R/W
8
8
FLER
ESU
PSU
H'FFFA
EBR1
R/W
8
8
EB9
EB8
H'FFFB
EBR2
R/W
8
8
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
Only for
FLASH
version.
H'FFF8
FLMCR1
R/W
8
8
FWE
SWE
ESU1
PSU1
EV1
PV1
E1
P1
H'FFF9
FLMCR2
R/W
8
8
FLER
ESU2
PSU2
EV2
PV2
E2
P2
F'FFFA
EBR1
R/W
8
8
EB13
EB12
EB11
EB10
EB9
EB8
F'FFFB
EBR2
R/W
8
8
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
Only for
FLASH
version in the
H8S/2194C
Note:
*
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 917 of 1037
B.2
Function List
H'D000: Gain Constant DGKp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D001: Gain Constant DGKp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D002: Gain Constant DGKs: Drum Digital Filter
H'D003: Gain Constant DGKs: Drum Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
H'D004: Coefficient DAp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D005: Coefficient DAp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D006: Coefficient DBp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D007: Coefficient DBp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D008: Coefficient DAs: Drum Digital Filter
H'D009: Coefficient DAs: Drum Digital Filter
H'D00A: Coefficient DBs: Drum Digital Filter
H'D00B: Coefficient DBs: Drum Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 918 of 1037
H'D00C: Offset DOfp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D00D: Offset DOfp: Drum Digital Filter
H'D00E: Offset DOfs: Drum Digital Filter
H'D00F: Offset DOfs: Drum Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
H'D010: Gain Constant CGKp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D011: Gain Constant CGKp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D012: Gain Constant CGKs: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D013: Gain Constant CGKs: Capstan Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 919 of 1037
H'D014: Coefficient CAp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D015: Coefficient CAp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D016: Coefficient CBp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D017: Coefficient CBp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D018: Coefficient CAs: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D019: Coefficient CAs: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D01A: Coefficient CBs: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D01B: Coefficient CBs: Capstan Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
H'D01C: Offset COfp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D01D: Offset COfp: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D01E: Offset COfs: Capstan Digital Filter
H'D01F: Offset COfs: Capstan Digital Filter
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
*
*
*
*
*
*
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 920 of 1037
H'D020: Delay Initialization Register DZs: Digital filter
H'D021: Delay Initialization Register DZs: Digital filter
H'D022: Delay Initialization Register DZp: Digital filter
H'D023: Delay Initialization Register DZp: Digital filter
H'D024: Delay Initialization Register CZs: Digital filter
H'D025: Delay Initialization Register CZs: Digital filter
H'D026: Delay Initialization Register CZp: Digital filter
H'D027: Delay Initialization Register CZp: Digital filter
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 921 of 1037
H'D028: Drum System Digital Filter Control Register DFIC: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)
*
DROV
DZPON
DZSON
DSG2
DSG1
DSG0
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Note:
*
Optional
Drum system range over flag
0 Filter computation result does not exceed 12 bits.
1 Filter computation result exceeds 12 bits.
Drum phase system filter computation start bit
0 Phase system filter computation is OFF.
Phase system computation result Y is not added to Es.
1 Phase system filter computation is ON.
Drum phase system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Phase system Z
-1
reflects DZp value.
1 Phase system Z
-1
does not relect DZp value.
Drum speed system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Speed system Z
-1
reflects DZs value.
1 Speed system Z
-1
does not relect DZs value.
Drum system gain control bit
DSG2 DSG1 DSG0 Description
0 0 0 x 1
1 x 2
1 0 x 4
1 x 8
1 0 0 x 16
1 (x 32)
*
1 0 (x 64)
*
1 Invalid (do not set)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 922 of 1037
H'D029: Capstan System Digital Filter Control Register CFIC: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/(W)
CPHA
R/(W)
*
CROV
CZPON
CZSON
CSG2
CSG1
CSG0
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Capstan system range over flag
0 Filter computation result does not exceed 12 bits.
1 Filter computation result exceeds 12 bits.
Capstan phase system filter computation start bit
0 Phase system filter computation is OFF.
Phase system computation result Y is not added to Es.
1 Phase system filter computation is ON.
Capstan phase system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Phase system Z
-1
reflects CZp value.
1 Phase system Z
-1
does not relect CZp value.
Capstan speed system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Speed system Z
-1
reflects CZs value.
1 Speed system Z
-1
does not relect CZs value.
Capstan system gain control bit
CSG2 CSG1 CSG0 Description
0 0 0 x 1
1 x 2
1 0 x 4
1 x 8
1 0 0 x 16
1 (x 32)
*
1 0 (x 64)
*
1 Invalid (do not set)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 923 of 1037
H'D02A: Digital Filter Control Register DFUCR: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
PTON
CP/DP
CFEPS
DFEPS
CFESS
DFESS
1
1
Phase system computation result PWM output bit
0 Output normal filter computation result to PWM pin.
1 Output only phase system computation result to PWM pin.
PWM output select bit
0 Output drum phase system computation result (CAPPWM)
1 Output capstan phase system computation result (DRMPWM)
Drum phase system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by HSW (NHSW) signal latch.
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Capstan phase system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by DVCFG2 signal latch.
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Capstan speed system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by DVCFG signal latch.
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Drum speed system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by NCDFG signal latch.
1 Transfer data at the time of error data
write.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D030: Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register DFPR: Drum Error Detector
H'D031: Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register DFPR: Drum Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D032: DFG Speed Error Data Register DFER: Drum Error Detector
H'D033: DFG Speed Error Data Register DFER: Drum Error Detector
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 924 of 1037
H'D034: DFG Lock Upper Data Register DFRUDR: Drum Error Detector
H'D035: DFG Lock Upper Data Register DFRUDR: Drum Error Detector
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D036: DFG Lock Lower Data Register DFRLDR: Drum Error Detector
H'D037: DFG Lock Lower Data Register DFRLDR: Drum Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 925 of 1037
H'D038: Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register DFVCR: Drum Error Detector
0
0
1
0
(R)/W
*
2
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*
1
5
6
0
7
DFRFON DF-R/UNR
DPCNT
DFRCS1
DFRCS0
0
R/W
DFCS1
(R)/W
*
2
R
R/W
DFCS0
DFOVF
Notes:
Clock source select bit
DFCS1 DFCS0
0 0
s
1
s/2
1 0
s/4
1
s/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status
1 Counter overflows.
Error data limit function select bit
0 Limit function OFF
1 Limit function ON
Drum lock flag
0 Drum speed system is not locked.
1 Drum speed system is locked.
Drum phase system filter computation auto start bit
0 Filter computation by drum lock detection is not excuted.
1 Filter computation of phase system is executed at the time of
drum lock detection.
Drum lock counter setting bit
DFRCS1 DFRCS0 Description
0 0 Underflow by 1 lock detection
1 Underflow by 2 lock detections
1 0 Underflow by 3 lock detections
1 Underflow by 4 lock detections
Description
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. When read, counter value is read.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 926 of 1037
H'D039: Drum Phase Error Detection Control Register DPGCR: Drum Error Detector
0
1
1
2
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
DPOVF
R/W
DPCS0
0
R/W
DPCS1
N/V
HSWES
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Error data latch signal select bit
0 HSW (VideoFF) signal
1 NHSW (NarrowFF) signal
Edge select bit
0 Latch at rising edge
1 Latch at falling edge
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Clock source select bit
DPCS1 DPCS0
0 0
s
1
s/2
1 0
s/3
1
s/4
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status
1 Counter overflows.
Description
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D03A: Specified Drum Phase Preset Data Register 2 DPPR2: Drum Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D03C: Specified Drum Phase Preset Data Register 1 DPPR1: Drum Error Detector
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 927 of 1037
H'D03D: Drum Phase Error Data Register 1 DPER1: Drum Error Detector
0
0
1
0
R
*
/W
2
0
R
*
/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D03E: Drum Phase Error Data Register 2 DPER2: Drum Error Detector
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
H'D050: Specified CFG Speed Preset Data Register CFPR: Capstan Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D052: CFG Speed Error Data Register CFER: Capstan Error Detector
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
H'D054: CFG Lock Upper Data Register CFRUDR: Capstan Error Detector
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D056: CFG Lock Lower Data Register CFRLDR: Capstan Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 928 of 1037
H'D058: Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register
CFVCR: Capstan Error Detector
0
0
1
0
(R)/W
*
2
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*
1
5
6
0
7
CFRFON CF-R/UNR CPCNT
CFRCS1
CFRCS0
0
R/W
CFCS1
(R)/W
*
2
R
R/W
CFCS0
CFOVF
Notes:
Capstan phase system filter computation auto start bit
0 Filter computation by capstan lock detection is not excuted.
1 Filter computation of phase system is executed at the time of
drum lock detection.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Capstan lock counter setting bit
CFRCS1 CFRCS0 Description
0 0 Underflow by 1 lock detection
1 Underflow by 2 lock detections
1 0 Underflow by 3 lock detections
1 Underflow by 4 lock detections
Clock source select bit
CFCS1 CFCS0
0 0
s
1
s/2
1 0
s/4
1
s/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status
1 Counter overflows.
Error data limit function select bit
0 Limit function OFF
1 Limit function ON
Capstan lock flag
0 Capstan speed system is not locked.
1 Capstan speed system is locked.
Description
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. When read, counter value is read.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 929 of 1037
H'D059: Capstan Phase Error Detection Control Register
CPGCR: Capstan Error Detector
0
1
1
2
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
CPOVF
R/W
CPCS0
0
R/W
CPCS1
CR/RF
SELCFG2
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Preset signal select bit
0 Preset by REF30P signal
1 Preset by CRRF signal
Preset, latch signal select bit
0 Preset by CAPREF30 signal and latch by DVCTL signal
1 Preset by REF30P signal and latch by DVCFG2 signal
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Clock source select bit
CPCS1 CPCS0
0 0
s
1
s/2
1 0
s/4
1
s/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status
1 Counter overflows.
Description
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D05A: Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Register 2 CPPR2: Capstan Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D05C: Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Register 1 CPPR1: Capstan Error Detector
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 930 of 1037
H'D05D: Capstan Phase Error Data Register 1 CPER1: Capstan Error Detector
0
0
1
0
R
*
/W
2
0
R
*
/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
H'D05E: Capstan Phase Error Data Register 2 CPER2: Capstan Error Detector
0
R
*
/W
13
0
R
*
/W
14
0
R
*
/W
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
*
/W
6
0
R
*
/W
9
0
R
*
/W
8
0
R
*
/W
11
0
R
*
/W
10
0
R
*
/W
0
R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
R
*
/W R
*
/W
12
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 931 of 1037
H'D060: HSW Mode Register 1 HSM1: HSW Timing Generator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
1
R
1
R
5
6
0
7
EMPA
OVWB
OVWA
CLRB
CLRA
0
R
FLB
R/W
R/(W)
*
R
FLA
EMPB
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
FIFO2 full flag
0 FIFO2 is not full
1 FIFO2 is full
FIFO1 full flag
0 FIFO1 is not full
1 FIFO1 is full
FIFO2 empty flag
0 Data remains in FIFO2
1 FIFO2 is empty
FIFO1 empty flag
0 Data remains in FIFO1
1 FIFO1 is empty
FIFO2 overwrite flag
0 Normal operation
1 Data is written to FIFO1 while it is full. Write 0 to clear the flag.
FIFO1 overwrite flag
0 Normal operation
1 Data is written to FIFO1 while it is full. Write 0 to clear the flag.
FIFO2 pointer clear
0 Normal operation
1 Clear FIFO2 pointer
FIFO1 pointer clear
0 Normal operation
1 Clear FIFO1 pointer
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 932 of 1037
H'D061: HSW Mode Register 2 HSM2: HSW Timing Generator
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
EDG
ISEL1
SOFG
OFG
VFF/NFF
0
R/W
FRT
R/W
R/W
R/W
FGR20FF
LOP
Free-run bit
0 5-bit DFG counter and 16-bit timer
1 16-bit FRC
FRG2 clear stop bit
0 16-bit counter clear by DFG reference register 2 is enabled
1 16-bit counter clear by DFG reference register 2 is disabled
Mode select bit
0 Signal mode
1 Loop mode
DFG edge select bit
0 Calculated by DFG rising edge
1 Calculated by DFG falling edge
Interrupt select bit
0 Interrupt request is generated by rising of FIFO STRIG signal
1 Interrupt request is generated by FIFO match signal
FIFO output group select bit
0 20-level output by FIFO1 and FIFO2
1 10-level output by FIFO1 only
Output FIFO group flag
0 Outputting pattern by FIFO1
1 Outputting pattern by FIFO2
VideoFF/NarrowFF output switchover bit
0 VideoFF output
1 NarrowFF output
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 933 of 1037
H'D062: HSW Loop Stage Setting Register HSLP: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
5
*
6
*
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
LOB1
R/W
LOB2
*
R/W
LOB3
LOB0
LOA3
LOA2
LOA1
LOA0
FIFO1 stage setting bit
HSM2 HSLP Description
Bit 5 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LOP LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0
0
*
*
*
*
Single mode
1 0 0 0 0 Output stage 0 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 and 1 of FIFO1
1 0 Output stage 0 to 2 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 3 of FIFO1
1 0 0 Output stage 0 to 4 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 5 of FIFO1
1 0 Output stage 0 to 6 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 7 of FIFO1
1 0 0 0 Output stage 0 to 8 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 9 of FIFO1
1 0 Setting disabled
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
Note:
*
Don't care.
FIFO2 stage setting bit
HSM2 HSLP Description
Bit 5 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
LOP LOB3 LOB2 LOB1 LOB0
0
*
*
*
*
Single mode
1 0 0 0 0 Output stage 0 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 and 1 of FIFO2
1 0 Output stage 0 to 2 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 3 of FIFO2
1 0 0 Output stage 0 to 4 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 5 of FIFO2
1 0 Output stage 0 to 6 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 7 of FIFO2
1 0 0 0 Output stage 0 to 8 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 9 of FIFO2
1 0 Setting disabled
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 934 of 1037
H'D064: FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 FPDRA: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
13
14
*
15
NarrowFFA
VFFA
AFFA
VpulseA
MlevelA
1
W
W
W
ADTRGA
STRIGA
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
5
6
*
7
PPGA4
PPGA3
PPGA2
PPGA1
PPGA0
*
W
PPGA7
W
W
W
PPGA6
PPGA5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
H'D066: FIFO Timing Pattern Register 1 FTPRA: HSW Timing Generator
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1
*
W
FTPRA1
0
*
W
FTPRA0
3
*
W
FTPRA3
2
*
W
FTPRA2
5
*
W
FTPRA5
4
*
W
FTPRA4
7
*
W
FTPRA7
6
*
W
FTPRA6
9
*
W
FTPRA9
8
*
W
FTPRA8
11
*
W
FTPRA11
10
*
W
FTPRA10
FTPRA13 FTPRA12
FTPRA15 FTPRA14
12
*
13
*
14
*
15
*
W
W
W
W
H'D066: FIFO Timer Capture Register 1 FTCTR: HSW Timing Generator
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1
0
R
FTCTR1
0
0
R
FTCTR0
3
0
R
FTCTR3
2
0
R
FTCTR2
5
0
R
FTCTR5
4
0
R
FTCTR4
7
0
R
FTCTR7
6
0
R
FTCTR6
9
0
R
FTCTR9
8
0
R
FTCTR8
11
0
R
FTCTR11
10
0
R
FTCTR10
FTCTR13 FTCTR12
FTCTR15 FTCTR14
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
0
R
R
R
R
H'D068: FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 FPDRB: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
13
14
*
15
NarrowFFB
VFFB
AFFB
VpulseB
MlevelB
1
W
W
W
ADTRGB
STRIGB
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
5
6
*
7
PPGB4
PPGB3
PPGB2
PPGB1
PPGB0
*
W
PPGB7
W
W
W
PPGB6
PPGB5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Note:
*
Undetermined
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 935 of 1037
H'D06A: FIFO Timing Pattern Register 2 FTPRB: HSW Timing Generator
1
FTPRB1
0
FTPRB0
3
FTPRB3
2
FTPRB2
5
FTPRB5
4
FTPRB4
7
FTPRB7
6
FTPRB6
9
FTPRB9
8
FTPRB8
11
FTPRB11
10
FTPRB10
FTPRB13 FTPRB12
FTPRB15 FTPRB14
12
13
14
15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
W
*
*
*
*
W
W
W
W
Note:
*
Undetermined
H'D06C: DFG Reference Register 1 DFCRA: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
DFCRA4
DFCRA3
DFCRA2
DFCRA1
DFCRA0
0
W
ISEL2
W
W
W
CCLR
CKSL
Interrupt select bit
0 Interrupt request is generated by clear signal of 16-bit timer counter
1 Interrupt request is generated by VD signal in PB mode
DFG counter clear bit
0 Normal operation
1 Clear 5-bit DFG counter
16-bit counter clock source select bit
0
s/4
1
s/8
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D06C: DFG Reference Count Register DFCTR: HSW Timing Generator
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
5
6
1
7
DFCTR4
DFCTR3
DFCTR2
DFCTR1
DFCTR0
R
R
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D06D: DFG Reference Register 2 DFCRB: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
5
6
1
7
DFCRB4
DFCRB3
DFCRB2
DFCRB1
DFCRB0
W
W
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
Undetermined
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 936 of 1037
H'D06E: Special Effect Playback Control Register
CHCR: 4-head Special Effect Playback Circuit
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
HAH
SIG3
SIG2
SIG1
SIG0
0
W
V/N
W
W
W
HSWPOL
CRH
HSW output signal select bit
0 VideoFF signal output
1 Narrow FF signal output
COMP polarity select bit
0 Positive
1 Negative
C.Rotary synchronization control bit
0 Synchronous
1 Asynchronous
H.AmpSW synchronization control bit
0 Synchronous
1 Asynchronous
Signal control bits
SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0 Output pin
C.Rotary H.Amp SW
0 0
*
*
L L
1 0 0 HSW
L
1 HSW H
1 0 L HSW
1 H HSW
1 0 0
*
HSW EX-OR COMP COMP
1 HSW EX-NOR COMP COMP
1 0 HSW EX-OR RTP0 RTP0
1 HSW EX-NOR RTP0 RTP0
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 937 of 1037
H'D06F: Additional V Control Register ADDVR: Additional V Signal Generator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
1
6
7
R/W
R/W
HMSK
HiZ
CUT
VPON
POL
1
1
Note:
*
Don't care.
OSCH mask bit
0 OSCH added
1 OSCH not added
High impedance bit
0 3-level output from Vpulse pin
1 Vpulse pin is set as 3-state (H/L/HiZ) pin
Additional V output control bits
CUT VPON POL Description
0 0
*
Low level
1 0 Negative polarity (Figure 28.46)
1 Positive polarity (Figure 28.45)
1
*
0 Immediate level
(high-impedance when HiZ bit = 1)
1 High level
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D070: X-Value Data Register XDR: X-Value, TRK-Value
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
XD1
XD0
XD3
XD2
XD5
XD4
XD7
XD6
XD9
XD8
XD11 XD10
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D072: TRK-Value Data Register TRDR: X-Value, TRK-Value
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
12
TRD1 TRD0
TRD3 TRD2
TRD5 TRD4
TRD7 TRD6
TRD9 TRD8
TRD11 TRD10
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 938 of 1037
H'D074: X-Value/TRK-Value Control Register
XTCR: X-Value, TRK-Value Adjustment Circuit
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
W
W
AT/MU
W
CAPRF
TRK/X
EXC/REF
XCS
DVREF1
DVREF0
1
Capstan phase adjustment auto/manual select bit
0 Manual mode
1 Auto mode
External sync signal edge select bit
0 Generated at EXCAP rising edge
1 Generated at EXCAP rising and falling edge
Capstan phase adjustment register select bit
0 CAPREF30 is generated only by XDR setting value
1 CAPREF30 is generated by XDR and TRDR setting values
Reference signal select bit
0 Generated by REF30P signal
1 Generated by external referece signal
Clock source select bit
0
s
1
s/2
REF30P frequency division rate select bit
DVREF1 DVREF0 Description
0 0 1-division
1 2-division
1 0 3-division
1 4-division
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
H'D078: Drum 12-bit PWM Data Register DPWDR: Drum 12-Bit PWM
1
0
R/W
DPWDR1
0
0
R/W
DPWDR0
3
0
R/W
DPWDR3
2
0
R/W
DPWDR2
5
0
R/W
DPWDR5
4
0
R/W
DPWDR4
7
0
R/W
DPWDR7
6
0
R/W
DPWDR6
9
0
R/W
DPWDR9
8
0
R/W
DPWDR8
11
0
R/W
DPWDR11
10
0
R/W
DPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 939 of 1037
H'D07A: Drum 12-Bit PWM Control Registor DPWCR: Drum 12-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
1
7
DH/L
DSF/DF
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
0
W
DPOL
W
W
W
DDC
DHiZ
Positive polarity
Negative polarity output
0
1
Polarity switchover bit
Fixed output bit, PWM pin output bit
0
1
0
Low level output from PWM pin
HiZ
H/L
DC
Fixed output bit, PWM pin output bit
1
High level output form PWM pin
1
0
*
High impedance from PWM pin
*
*
PWM modulated signal output
Note:
*
Don't care.
Modulate error data from digital filter circuit
Modulate data written in data register
0
1
Output data select bit
Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and phase
filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the CAPPWM and DRMPWM pins.
However, it is possible to output only drum phase filter results from CAPPWM pin and only capstan
phase filter result from DRMPWM pin, by DFUCR settings of the digital filter circuit.
See the section explaining the digital filter computation circuit.
Carrier frequency select bits
Carrier frequency select bits
0
0
0
/2
CK1
CK0
CK2
1
/4
1
0
/8
1
/16
0
1
0
/32
1
/64
1
0
/128
1
(Do not set)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D07B: Capstan 12-Bit PWM Control Register CPWCR: Capstan 12-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
1
7
CH/L
CSF/DF
CCK2
CCK1
CCK0
0
W
CPOL
W
W
W
CDC
CHiZ
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 940 of 1037
H'D07C: Capstan 12-Bit PWM Data Register CPWDR: Capstan 12-Bit PWM
1
0
R/W
CPWDR1
0
0
R/W
CPWDR0
3
0
R/W
CPWDR3
2
0
R/W
CPWDR2
5
0
R/W
CPWDR5
4
0
R/W
CPWDR4
7
0
R/W
CPWDR7
6
0
R/W
CPWDR6
9
0
R/W
CPWDR9
8
0
R/W
CPWDR8
11
0
R/W
CPWDR11
10
0
R/W
CPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D080: CTL Control Register CTCR: CTL Circuit
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
W
5
1
6
0
7
W
W
W
FSLB
W
FSLC
0
W
NT/PL
FSLA
CCS
LCTL
UNCTL
SLWM
NTSC/PAL select bit
0 NTSC mode (frame rate: 30 Hz)
1 PAL mode (frame rate: 25 Hz)
Long CTL bit
0 Clock source (CCS) operates at the setting value
1 Clock source (CCS) operates for further 8-division after
operating at the setting value
CTL undetected bit
0 Detected
1 Undetected
Mode select bit
0 Normal mode
1 Slow mode
Clock source select bit
0
s
1
s/2
Operating frequency select bits
FSLC FSLB FSLA Description
0 0 0 Reserved (do not set)
1 Reserved (do not set)
1 0 fosc = 8 MHz
1 fosc = 10 MHz (Initial value)
1
*
*
Reserved (do not set)
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 941 of 1037
H'D081: CTL Mode Register CTLM: CTL Circuit
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
FW/RV
R/W
REC/PB
0
R/W
ASM
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Record/playback mode bits
ASM REC/PB Description
0 0 Playback mode (PLAYBACK)
1 Record mode (RECORD)
1 0 Assemble mode
1 Invalid (do not set)
Direction bit
0 FORWARD
1 REVERSE
CTL mode select bits
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D082: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 1 RCDR1: CTL Circuit
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT11
W
12
0
CMT10
W
0
CMT13
W
0
CMT12
W
0
CMT15
W
0
CMT14
W
0
CMT17
W
0
CMT16
W
0
CMT19
W
0
CMT18
W
0
CMT1B
W
0
CMT1A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D084: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 2 RCDR2: CTL Circuit
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT21
W
12
0
CMT20
W
0
CMT23
W
0
CMT22
W
0
CMT25
W
0
CMT24
W
0
CMT27
W
0
CMT26
W
0
CMT29
W
0
CMT28
W
0
CMT2B
W
0
CMT2A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D086: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 3 RCDR3: CTL Circuit
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT31
W
12
0
CMT30
W
0
CMT33
W
0
CMT32
W
0
CMT35
W
0
CMT34
W
0
CMT37
W
0
CMT36
W
0
CMT39
W
0
CMT38
W
0
CMT3B
W
0
CMT3A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 942 of 1037
H'D088: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 4 RCDR4: CTL Circuit
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT41
W
12
0
CMT40
W
0
CMT43
W
0
CMT42
W
0
CMT45
W
0
CMT44
W
0
CMT47
W
0
CMT46
W
0
CMT49
W
0
CMT48
W
0
CMT4B
W
0
CMT4A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D08A: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 5 RCDR5: CTL Circuit
1
1
1
1
13
14
15
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11
10
CMT51
W
12
0
CMT50
W
0
CMT53
W
0
CMT52
W
0
CMT55
W
0
CMT54
W
0
CMT57
W
0
CMT56
W
0
CMT59
W
0
CMT58
W
0
CMT5B
W
0
CMT5A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R / W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D08C: Duty I/O Register DI/O: CTL Circuit
0
1
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
W
3
0
4
5
1
6
7
R/W
W
W
VCTR0
1
W
VCTR1
1
W
VCTR2
BPON
BPS
BPF
DI/O
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Bit pattern detection ON/OFF bit
0 Bit pattern detection OFF
1 Bit pattern detection ON
Bit pattern detection start bit
0 Normal status
1 Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection
Duty I/O register
Bit pattern detection flag
0 Bit pattern (8-bit) is not detected
1 Bit pattern (8-bit) is detected
VCTR2 VCTR1 VCTR0 Number of 1-pulse for detection
0 0 0 2
1 4 (SYNC mark)
1 0 6
1 8 (mark A, short)
1 0 0 12 (mark A, long)
1 16
1 0 24 (mark B)
1 32
VISS interrupt setting bits
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 943 of 1037
H'D08D: Bit Pattern Register BTPR: CTL Circuit
0
1
1
1
R
*
/W
2
1
R
*
/W
3
1
4
5
1
6
7
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
R
*
/W
LSP5
1
R
*
/W
LSP4
1
R
*
/W
LSP6
1
R
*
/W
LSP7
LSP3
LSP2
LSP1
LSP0
Note:
*
Writes are disabled during bit pattern detection.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D090: Reference Frequency Register 1 RFD: Reference Signal Generator
15
1
REF15
W
14
1
REF14
W
13
1
REF13
W
12
1
REF12
W
11
1
REF11
W
10
1
REF10
W
9
1
REF9
W
8
1
REF8
W
7
1
REF7
W
6
1
REF6
W
5
1
REF5
W
4
1
REF4
W
3
1
REF3
W
2
1
REF2
W
1
1
REF1
W
0
1
REF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D092: Reference Frequency Register 2 CRF: Reference Signal Generator
15
1
CRF15
W
14
1
CRF14
W
13
1
CRF13
W
12
1
CRF12
W
11
1
CRF11
W
10
1
CRF10
W
9
1
CRF9
W
8
1
CRF8
W
7
1
CRF7
W
6
1
CRF6
W
5
1
CRF5
W
4
1
CRF4
W
3
1
CRF3
W
2
1
CRF2
W
1
1
CRF1
W
0
1
CRF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D094: REF30 Counter Register RFC: Reference Signal Generator
15
0
RFC15
14
0
RFC14
13
0
RFC13
12
0
RFC12
11
0
RFC11
10
0
RFC10
9
0
RFC9
8
0
RFC8
7
0
RFC7
6
0
RFC6
5
0
RFC5
4
0
RFC4
3
0
RFC3
2
0
RFC2
1
0
RFC1
0
0
RFC0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 944 of 1037
H'D096: Reference Frequency Mode Register RFM: Reference Signal Generator
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
REX
CRD
OD/EV
VST
VEG
0
W
RCS
W
W
W
VNA
CVS
Clock source select bit
0
s/2
1
s/4
Mode select bit
0 Manual mode
1 Auto mode
Manual select bit
0 VD sync
1 Free-run
External signal synchronization select bit
0 VD signal or free-run
1 External signal sync
DVCFG2 synchronization select bit
0 At mode switching
1 DVCFG2 signal synchronized
ODD/EVEN edge switchoverselect bit
0 Generated at field signal rising (EVEN)
1 Generated at field signal rising (ODD)
VideoFF counter set
0 VideoFF signal turns counter set OFF
1 VideoFF signal turns counter set OFF
VideoFF edge select bit
0 Set at VideoFF signal rising
1 Set at VideoFF signal falling
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D097: Reference Frequency Mode Register 2 RFM2: Reference Signal Generator
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
6
7
FDS
1
1
1
R/W
Field select bit
0 Generated by selected ODD or EVEN VD
signal
1 Generated by VD signal immediately after
mode transition
TBC select bit
0 Reference signal is generated with VD
1 Reference signal is generated in free-run
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
(TBC)
*
--
--
--
--
--
--
(R/W)
*
--
--
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
The TBC bit is readable/writable only in the
H8S/2194C series. This bit cannot be
modified in the H8S/2194 series, and the
reference signal is therefore generated in
free-run.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 945 of 1037
H'D098: DVCTL Control Register CTVC: Frequency Divider
0
*
1
*
R
2
*
R
3
4
5
6
7
R
CFG
HSW
0
W
0
W
CEX
CEG
CTL
1
1
1
DVCTL signal generation select bit
0 Generated by PB-CTL signal
1 Generated by external input signal
External sync signal edge select bit
0 Rising edge
1 Falling edge
CFG flag
0 CFG level is low
1 CFG level is high
HSW flag
0 HSW level is low
1 HSW level is high
CTL flag
0 REC or PB-CTL level is low
1 REC or PB-CTL level is high
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
Undetermined
H'D099: CTL Frequency Division Register CTLR: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
CTL4
CTL3
CTL2
CTL1
CTL0
0
W
CTL7
W
W
W
CTL6
CTL5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 946 of 1037
H'D09A: DVCFG Control Register CDVC: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
1
6
1
7
W
R
CMK
CMN
W
DVTRG
0
R/W
*
MCGin
CRF
CPS1
CPS0
0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written
Mask CFG flag
0 CFG normal operation
1 DVCFG is detected while mask is set (race detection)
CFG mask status bit
0 Mask is released by capstan mask timer
1 Mask is set by capstan mask timer
CFG mask select bit
0 Capstan mask timing function ON
1 Capstan mask timing function OFF
PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync ON/OFF select bit
0 PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync ON
1 PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync OFF
CFG frequency division edge select bit
0 Execute frequency division operation at CFG rising edge
1 Execute frequency division operation at CFG rising
and falling edges
CFG mask timer clock select bit
CPS1 CPS0 Description
0 0
s/1024
1
s/512
1 0
s/256
1
s/128
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
H'D09B: CFG Frequency Division Register 1 CDIVR1: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
0
6
7
W
W
CDV15
CDV14
0
W
CDV16
0
W
CDV13
CDV12
CDV11
CDV10
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
H'D09C: CFG Frequency Division Register 2 CDIVR2: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
0
W
5
0
6
7
W
W
CDV25
CDV24
0
W
CDV26
0
W
CDV23
CDV22
CDV21
CDV20
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 947 of 1037
H'D09D: DVCFG Mask Interval Register CTMR: Frequency Divider
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
4
1
W
5
1
6
7
W
W
CPM5
CPM4
1
W
CPM3
CPM2
CPM1
CPM0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
H'D09E: FG Control Register FGCR: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
W
DRF
1
DFG edge select bit
0 NCDFG signal rising edge is selected
1 NCDFG signal falling edge is selected
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0A0: Servo Port Mode Register SPMR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
7
EXCTLON DPGSW
COMP
H.Amp.SW
C.Rot
0
R/W
CTLSTOP
R/W
R/W
CFGCOMP
1
CFG input method switch bit
0 Zero cross type comparator method for CFG signal input
1 Digital signal input method for CFG signal input
CTLSTOP bit
0 CTL circuit operates
1 CTL circuit does not operate
EXCTL pin function switch bit
0 EXCTL/PS4 pin functions as EXCEL input pin
1 EXCTL/PS4 pin functions as PS4 I/O pin
COMP pin function switch bit
0 COMP/PS2 pin functions as COMP input pin
1 COMP/PS2 pin functions as PS2 I/O pin
H.AmpSW pin function switch bit
0 H.AmpSW/PS1 pin functions as H.AmpSW output pin
1 H.AmpSW/PS1 pin functions as PS1 I/O pin
C.Rotary pin function switch bit
0 C.Rotary/PS0 pin functions as C.Rotary output pin
1 C.Rotary/PS0 pin functions as PS0 I/O pin
DPG pin functionswitch bit
0 Separate input for drum control system input
(DPG/PS3 pin functions as DPG input pin)
1 Weight input for drum control system input
(DPG/PS3 pin functions as PS3 I/O pin)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 948 of 1037
H'D0A1: Servo Control Register SPCR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
6
7
SPCR4
SPCR3
SPCR2
SPCR1
SPCR0
W
W
1
1
1
SPCRn Description
0 PSn pin functions as input pin
1 PSn pin functions as output pin
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0A2: Servo Data Register SPDR: Servo Port Controller
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
SPDR4
SPDR3
SPDR2
SPDR1
SPDR0
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0A3: Servo Monitor Control Register SVMCR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
SVMCR5
R/W
R/W
R/W
SVMCR5 SVMCR4 SVMCR3 Description
0 0 0 REF30 signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 CAPREF30 signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 CREF signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 CTLMONI signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 0 DVCFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 CFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 DFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 DPG signal is output from SV2 output pin
SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0 Description
0 0 0 REF30 signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 CAPREF30 signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 CREF signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 CTLMONI signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 0 DVCFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 CFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 DFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 DPG signal is output from SV1 output pin
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 949 of 1037
H'D0A4: CTL Gain Control Register CTLGR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
6
7
CTLFB
CTLGR3
CTLGR2
CTLGR1
CTLGR0
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
CTLE/A
R/W
R/W
R/W
CTL select bit
0 AMP output
1 EXCTL
CTL amp feedback SW bit
0 CTLFB SW is OFF
1 CTLFB SW is ON
CTL amp gain setting bit
CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0 CTL outpu gain
0 0 0 0 34.0 dB
1 36.5 dB
1 0 39.0 dB
1 41.5 dB
1 0 0 44.0 dB
1 46.5 dB
1 0 49.0 dB
1 51.5 dB
1 0 0 0 54.0 dB
1 56.5 dB
1 0 59.0 dB
1 61.5 dB
1 0 0 64.0 dB
*
1 66.5 dB
*
1 0 69.0 dB
*
1 71.5 dB
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Note:
*
With a setting of 64.0dB or more, the CTLAMP is in a
very sensitive status. When configuring the set board,
be concerned about countermeasure against noise
around the control head signal input port.
Also, thoroughly set the filter between the CTLAMP
and CTLSMT.
H'D0B0: Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Value Register VTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
W
W
W
VTR5
VTR4
VTR3
VTR2
VTR1
VTR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 950 of 1037
H'D0B1: Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Value Register HTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
5
6
1
7
W
W
HTR3
HTR2
HTR1
HTR0
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0B2: H Pulse Adjustment Start Time Setting Register HRTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
HRTR4
HRTR3
HRTR2
HRTR1
HRTR0
0
W
HRTR7
W
W
W
HRTR6
HRTR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D0B3: H Pulse Width Setting Register HPWR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
5
6
1
7
W
W
HPWR3
HPWR2
HPWR1
HPWR0
1
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0B4: Noise Detection Window Setting Register NWR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
W
W
W
NWR5
NWR4
NWR3
NWR2
NWR1
NWR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
H'D0B5: Noise Detection Register NDR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
0
W
NDR7
W
W
W
NDR6
NDR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 951 of 1037
H'D0B6: Sync Signal Control Register SYNCR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
1
4
5
6
1
7
R/W
R/W
NIS/VD
NOIS
FLD
SYCT
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written.
Interrupt select bit
0 Noise level interrupt
1 VD interrupt
Noise detection flag
0 Noise count is less than four times of NDR setting value
1 Noise count is over four times of NDR setting value
Field detection flag
0 Odd field
1 Even field
Sync signal polarity select bit
SYCT Description Polarity
0 Positive
1 Negative
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 952 of 1037
H'D0B8: Servo Interrupt Enable Register 1 SIENR1: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
IECAP3
IECAP2
IECAP1
IEHSW2
IEHSW1
0
R/W
IEDRM3
R/W
R/W
R/W
IEDRM2
IEDRM1
Drum phase error detection interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM3
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM3
Drum speed error detection (lock detection)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM2
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM2
Drum speed error detection (OVF, latch)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM1
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM1
Capstan phase error detection interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP3
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP3
Capstan speed error detection (lock detection)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP2
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP2
Capstan speed error detection (OVF, latch)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP1
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP1
HSW timing generation (counter clear, capture)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRHSW2
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRHSW2
HSW timing generator (OVW, match, STRIG)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRHSW1
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRHSW1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 953 of 1037
H'D0B9: Servo Interrupt Enable Register 2 SIENR2: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
R/W
IESNC
IECTL
1
1
1
1
1
Vertical sync signal interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt (vertical sync signal interrupt)
request is disabled by IRRSNC
1 Interrupt (vertical sync signal interrupt)
request is enabled by IRRSNC
CTL interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is
disabled by IRRCTL
1 Interrupt request is
enabled by IRRCTL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 954 of 1037
H'D0BA: Servo Interrupt Request Register 1 SIRQR1: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
0
R/(W)
*
5
6
0
7
IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1
0
R/(W)
*
IRRDRM3
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Drum phase error detector interrupt request bit
0 Drum phase error detector interrupt request is not generated
1 Drum phase error detector interrupt request is generated
Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request bit
0 Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is not generated
1 Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is generated
Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request bit
0 Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is not generated
1 Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is generated
Capstan phase error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request bit
0 Capstan phase error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is not generated
1 Capstan phase error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is generated
Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) intrerrupt request bit
0 Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is not generated
1 Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is generated
Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request bit
0 Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request in not generated
1 Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request in generated
HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture)
interrupt request bit
0 HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture) interrupt
request is not generated
0 HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture) interrupt
request is generated
HSW timing generator (OVW, match, STRIG)
interrupt request bit
0 HSW timing generator (OVM, match, STRIG)
interrupt request is not generated
1 HSW timing generator (OVM, match, STRIG)
interrupt request is generated
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 955 of 1037
H'D0BB: Servo Interrupt Request Register 2 SIRQR2: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
R/(W)
*
IRRSNC
IRRCTL
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Vertical sync signal interrupt request bit
0 Sync signal detector (VD, noise) interrupt
request is not generated
1 Sync signal detector (VD, noise) interrupt
request is generated
CTL interrupt request bit
0 CTL interrupt request is not
generated
1 CTL interrupt request is
generated
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0E0: Start Address Register STAR: 32-Byte Buffer SCI2
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
1
7
R/W
R/W
STA4
STA3
STA2
STA1
STA0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D0E1: End Address Register EDAR: 32-Byte Buffer SCI2
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
1
7
R/W
R/W
EDA4
EDA3
EDA2
EDA1
EDA0
1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 956 of 1037
H'D0E2: Serial Control Register 2 SCR2: 32-Byte Buffer SCI2
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
7
R/W
R/W
GAP1
0
R/W
ABTIE
R/W
TEIE
GAP0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
1
Transfer data interval select bits
GAP1 GAP0 Transfer data interval
0 0 No interval
0 1 8-clock interval
1 0 24-clock interval
0 1 56-clock interval
Transfer end interrupt enable bit
0 Transfer-end interrupt request is disabled
1 Transfer-end interrupt request is enabled
Transfer interrupt enable bit
0 Transfer interrupt request is disabled
1 Transfer interrupt request is enabled
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Transfer clock select bits
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 SCK2 pin Clock source Transfer clock frequency
= 10 MHz
= 5 MHz
0 0 0 Sprescaler S
/256 25.6
s 51.2
s
0 0 0
/64 6.4
s 12.8
s
0 0 0
/32 3.2
s 6.4
s
0 0 0
/16 1.6
s 3.2
s
0 0 0
/8 0.8
s 1.6
s
0 0 0
/4 0.4
s 0.8
s
0 0 0
/2
--
0.4
s
0 0 0 External clock
--
--
--
Prescaler frequency
division rate
SCK2
output
SCK2
input
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 957 of 1037
H'D0E3: Serial Control Status Register 2 SCSR2: 32-Byte Buffer SCI2
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
6
7
R/W
R/(W)
*
SOL
R/(W)
*
TEI
ORER
WT
ABT
STF
0
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Transfer end interrupt request flag
0 [Clear conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When transmission or reception ends
Abort flag
0 [Clear conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When CS pin output level becomes high
during transfer
Overrun error flag
0 [Clear conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When extra pulse is over-applied to correct
transfer clock or clock input is generated after
transfer end, when using external clock
Wait flag
0 [Clear conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When read/write instruction to serial data
buffer (32-bit) is generated while transfer is in
progress or during CS input standby
Extension data bit
0 Read: SO2 pin output level is low
Write: SO2 pin output level is changed to low
1 Read: SO2 pin output level is high
Write: SO2 pin output level is changed to high
Start flag
0 Read: Transfer stops
Write: Transfer aborted and SCI2 initialized
1 Read: Transfer in progress, or CS input
standby
Write: Transfer starts
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 958 of 1037
H'D100: Timer Interrupt Enable Register ITER: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICICE
R/W
ICIBE
0
R/W
ICIAE
ICIDE
OCIAE
OCIBE
OVIE
ICSA
ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is disabled
ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is enabled
0
1
Input capture A interrupt enable bit
FTIA pin input is selected
for input capture A input
HSW is selected for input
capture A input
0
1
Input capture input select A bit
ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is disabled
ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is enabled
0
1
Input capture B interrupt enable bit
ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is disabled
ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is enabled
0
1
Input capture C interrupt enable bit
ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is disabled
ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is enabled
0
1
Input capture D interrupt enable bit
OCFC interrupt request
(OCIC) is disabled
OCFC interrupt request
(OCIC) is enabled
0
1
Output compare interrupt enable bit
OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is disabled
OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is enabled
0
1
Output compare interrupt B enable bit
OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is disabled
OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is enabled
0
1
Output compare interrupt A enable bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 959 of 1037
H'D101: Timer Control/Status Register X TCSRX: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/ W
R/(W)
*
ICFB
0
R/(W)
*
ICFA
R/(W)
*
ICFD
R/(W)
*
ICFC
R/(W)
*
OCFB
R/(W)
*
OCFA
CCLRA
R/(W)
*
OVF
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags.
Output compare flag A
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to OCFA after reading
OCFA = 1
[Setting conditions]
When FRC = OCRA
0
1
Output compare flag B
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to OCFB after reading
OCFB = 1
[Setting conditions]
When FRC = OCRB
0
1
Timer overflow
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to OVF after reading
OVF = 1
[Setting conditions]
When FRC changes from H'FFFF to
H'0000
0
1
Input capture flag D
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to ICFD after reading
ICFD = 1
[Setting conditions]
When input capture signal is generated
0
1
Input capture flag C
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to ICFC after reading
ICFC = 1
[Setting conditions]
When input capture signal is generated
0
1
Input capture flag B
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to ICFB after reading
ICFB = 1
[Setting conditions]
When FRC value is transferred to ICRB by
input capture signal
0
1
Input capture flag A
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to ICFA after reading
ICFA = 1
[Setting conditions]
When FRC value is transferred to ICRA by
input capture signal
0
1
Counter clear
FRC clearing is disabled
FRC clearing is enabled
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 960 of 1037
H'D102: Free Running Counter H FRCH: Timer X1
H'D103: Free Running Counter L FRCL: Timer X1
0
3
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
7
0
9
0
R/W
11
0
13
0
15
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
1
0
2
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
6
0
8
0
R/W
10
0
12
0
14
FRC
FRCH
FRCL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D104: Output Compare Register AH, BH OCRAH, OCRBH: Timer X1
H'D105: Output Compare Register AL, BL OCRAL, OCRBL: Timer X1
1
3
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
7
1
9
1
R/W
11
1
13
1
15
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
R/W
R/W
1
1
2
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
6
1
8
1
R/W
10
1
12
1
14
OCRA, OCRB
OCRAH, OCRBH
OCRAL, OCRBL
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 961 of 1037
H'D106: Timer Control Register X TCRX: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
IEDGB
0
R/W
IEDGA
R/W
IEDGD
R/W
IEDGC
R/W
BUFEB
R/W
BUFEA
CKS0
R/W
CKS1
Capture at falling edge of input capture input A
Capture at rising edge of input capture input A
0
1
Input capture edge select A
Capture at falling edge of input capture input B
Capture at rising edge of input capture input B
0
1
Input capture edge select B
Capture at falling edge of input capture input C
Capture at rising edge of input capture input C
0
1
Input capture edge select C
Capture at falling edge of input capture input D
Capture at rising edge of input capture input D
0
1
Input capture edge select D
ICRC is not used as buffer register for ICRB
ICRC is used as buffer register for ICRB
0
1
Buffer enable B
ICRC is not used as buffer register for ICRA
ICRC is used as buffer register for ICRA
0
1
Buffer enable A
Clock selct bit
Clock select
0
0
CKS0
CKS1
1
0
0
1
Internal clock: count at
/4
Internal clock: count at
/16
Internal clock: count at
/64
1
1
DVCFG: Edge detection p
ulse selected by CFG
frequency division timer
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 962 of 1037
H'D107: Timer Output Compare Control Register TOCR: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
ICSC
0
R/W
ICSB
R/W
OSRS
R/W
ICSD
R/W
OEB
R/W
OEA
OLVLB
R/W
OLVLA
FTIB pin is selected for input capture B input
VD is selected for input capture B input
0
1
Input capture input select B
Low level
High level
0
1
Output level B
FTIC pin is selected for input capture C input
DVCTL is selected for input capture C input
0
1
Input capture input select C
FTID pin is selected for input capture D input
NHSW is selected for input capture D input
0
1
Input capture input select D
OCRA register is selected
OCRB register is selected
0
1
Output compare register select
Low level
High level
0
1
Output level A
Output compare A output is disabled
Output compare A output is enabled
0
1
Output enable A
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
1
Output enable B
Output compare B output is disabled
Output compare B output is enabled
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 963 of 1037
H'D108: Input Capture Register AH ICRAH: Timer X1
H'D109: Input Capture Register AL ICRAL: Timer X1
H'D10A: Input Capture Register BH ICRBH: Timer X1
H'D10B: Input Capture Register BL ICRBL: Timer X1
H'D10C: Input Capture Register CH ICRCH: Timer X1
H'D10D: Input Capture Register CL ICRCL: Timer X1
H'D10E: Input Capture Register DH ICRDH: Timer X1
H'D10F: Input Capture Register DL ICRDL: Timer X1
0
3
0
R
5
0
R
7
0
9
0
R
11
0
13
0
15
R
R
R
0
R
R
1
0
2
0
R
4
0
R
6
0
8
0
R
10
0
12
0
14
ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, ICRD
ICRAH, ICRBH, ICRCH, ICRDH
ICRAL, ICRBL, ICRCL, ICRDL
R
R
R
R
0
R
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 964 of 1037
H'D110: Timer Mode Register B TMB: Timer B
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
TMBIE
R/(W)
*
TMBIF
0
R/W
TMB17
TMB12
TMB11
TMB10
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Interval function is selected
Auto reload function is selected
0
1
Auto reload function select bit
[Setting conditions]
When TCB overflows
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
0
1
Timer B interrupt request flag
Timer B interrupt request is disabled
Timer B interrupt request is enabled
0
1
Timer B interrupt enable bit
0
0
0
Internal clock: Count at
/16384
TMB11
TMB10
TMB12
Clock select
0
1
Internal clock: Count at
/4096
1
0
0
0
0
Internal clock: Count at
/1024
1
1
Internal clock: Count at
/512
0
1
0
Internal clock: Count at
/128
0
1
Internal clock: Count at
/32
1
1
1
1
0
Internal clock: Count at
/8
1
1
Count at rising/falling edge of external
event (TMBI)
Note:
*
External event edge selection is set at PMR51 in port mode register 5
(PMR5).
See section 12.2.4, Port Register 5 (PMR5).
Clock select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
H'D111: Timer Counter B TCB: Timer B
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
4
5
0
6
0
7
R
R
TCB15
0
R
TCB14
0
R
TCB13
R
TCB16
0
R
TCB17
TCB12
TCB11
TCB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 965 of 1037
H'D111: Timer Load RegisterB TLB: TimerB
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
4
5
0
6
0
7
W
W
TLB15
0
W
TLB14
0
W
TLB13
W
TLB16
0
W
TLB17
TLB12
TLB11
TLB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D112: Timer L Mode Register LMR: Timer L
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
LMIE
0
R/(W)
*
LMIF
IMR3
IMR2
IMR1
IMR0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Timer L interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When LTC overflow, underflow or compare
match clear occurs
0
1
Timer L interrupt enable bit
Timer L interrupt request is disabled
Timer L interrupt request is enabled
0
1
Up count control
Down count control
0
1
Up/down count control
Clock select bit
Clock select
0
0
0
Count at rising edge of PB and REC-CTL
LMR1
LMR0
R2
1
Count at falling edge of PB and REC-CTL
1
*
Count DVCFG2
0
1
*
Internal clock: Count at
/128
1
*
Internal clock: Count at
/64
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 966 of 1037
H'D113: Linear Time Counter LTC: Timer L
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
3
0
4
5
6
0
7
R
R
R
R
LTC6
0
R
LTC5
0
R
LTC4
0
R
LTC7
LTC3
LTC2
LTC1
LTC0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D113: Reload/Compare Match Register RCR: Timer L
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
3
0
4
5
6
0
7
W
W
W
W
RCR6
0
W
RCR5
0
W
RCR4
0
W
RCR7
RCR3
RCR2
RCR1
RCR0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 967 of 1037
H'D118: Timer R Mode Register 1 TMRM1: Timer R
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
RLD
R/W
AC/BR
0
R/W
CLR2
RLCK
PS21
PS20
RLD/CAP
CPS
TMRU-2 is not cleard at the time of capture
TMRU-2 is cleard at the time of capture
0
1
TMRU-2 clear select bit
Deceleration
Acceleration
0
1
Acceleration/deceleration select bit
TMRU-2 is not used as reload timer
TMRU-2 is used as reload timer
0
1
Execution/non-execution of reload by TMRU-2
Reload at CFG rising edge
Reload at TMRU underflow
0
1
TMRU-2 reload timing select bit
0
0
Count at TMRU-1 underflow
PS20
PS21
1
PSS, count at
/256
0
1
PSS, count at
/128
PSS, count at
/64
1
TMRU-2 clock source select bits
TMRU-2 clock source select
Capture signal at CFG rising edge
Capture signal at IRQ3 edge
0
1
TMRU-1 capture signal select bit
TMRU-1 functions as reload timer
TMRU-1 functions as capture timer
0
1
TMRU-1 operation mode select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 968 of 1037
H'D119: Timer R Mode Register TMRM2: Timer R
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/W
R/W
PS10
R/W
PS11
0
R/W
LAT
PS31
PS30
CP/SLM
CAPF
SLW
TMRU-1 clock source select bits
TMRU-1 clock source select
0
0
Count at CFG rising edge
PS10
PS11
1
PSS, count at
/4
0
1
PSS, count at
/256
1
PSS, count at
/512
TMRU-3 clock source select bits
TMRU-3 clock source select
0
0
Count at rising edge of DVCTL from frequency divider
PS30
PS31
1
PSS, count at
/4096
0
1
PSS, count at
/2048
1
PSS, count at
/1024
Interrupt select bit
Interrupt request by TMRU-2 capture signal is enabled
Interrupt request by slow tracking mono-multi end is enabled
0
1
Capture signal flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When TMRU-2 capture signal is generated while CP/SLM bit = 0
0
1
Slow tracking mono-multi flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When slow tracking mono-multi ends while
CP/SLM bit = 1
0
1
TMRU-2 captrue signal select bits
*
0
Capture at TMRU-3 underflow
CPS
LAT
0
1
Capture at CFG rising edge
1
Capture at IRQ3 edge
TMRU-2 capture signal select
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 969 of 1037
H'D11A: Timer R Capture Register 1 TMRCP1: Time R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC17
R
TMRC16
R
TMRC15
R
TMRC14
R
TMRC13
R
TMRC12
R
TMRC11
R
TMRC10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11B: Timer R Capture Register 2 TMRCP2: Time R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC27
R
TMRC26
R
TMRC25
R
TMRC24
R
TMRC23
R
TMRC22
R
TMRC21
R
TMRC20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11C: Timer R Load Register 1 TMRL1: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR17
W
TMR16
W
TMR15
W
TMR14
W
TMR13
W
TMR12
W
TMR11
W
TMR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11D: Timer R Load Register 2 TMRL2: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR27
W
TMR26
W
TMR25
W
TMR24
W
TMR23
W
TMR22
W
TMR21
W
TMR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11E: Timer R Load Register 3 TMRL3: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR37
W
TMR36
W
TMR35
W
TMR34
W
TMR33
W
TMR32
W
TMR31
W
TMR30
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 970 of 1037
H'D11F: Timer R Control/Status Register TMRCS: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/W
TMRI1E
R/W
TMRI2E
0
R/W
TMRI3E
TMRI3
TMRI2
TMRI1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
TMRI3 interrupt request is disabled
TMRI3 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI3 interrupt enable bit
TMRI2 interrupt request is disabled
TMRI2 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI2 interrupt enable bit
TMRI1 interrupt request is disabled
TMRI1 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI1 interrupt enable bit
TMRI1 interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When TMRU-1 underflows
0
1
TMRI2 interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When TMRU-2 underflows or when capstan motor
acceleration/deceleration operation ends
0
1
TMRI3 interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When interrupt source selected at CP/SLM bit in
TMRM2 is generated
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 971 of 1037
H'D120: PWM Data Register L PWDRL: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
7
W
PWDRL0
W
PWDRL1
W
PWDRL2
W
PWDRL3
W
PWDRL4
W
PWDRL5
0
W
PWDRL6
W
PWDRL7
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D121: PWM Data Register U PWDRU: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
1
7
W
PWDRU0
W
PWDRU1
W
PWDRU2
W
PWDRU3
W
PWDRU4
W
PWDRU5
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
H'D122: PWM Control Register PWCR: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R/W
PWCR0
1
Clock select bit
Note:
*
t
: PWM input clock frequency
Input clock is
/2 (t
= 2/
)
Generate PWM waveform with conversion frequency of
16384/
and minimum pulse width of 1/
Input clock is
/4 (t
= 4/
)
Generate PWM waveform with conversion frequency of
32768/
and minimum pulse width of 2/
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D126: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 0 PWR0: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW04
PW03
PW02
PW01
PW00
0
W
PW07
W
W
W
PW06
PW05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D127: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 1 PWR1: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW14
PW13
PW12
PW11
PW10
0
W
PW17
W
W
W
PW16
PW15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 972 of 1037
H'D128: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 2 PWR2: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW24
PW23
PW22
PW21
PW20
0
W
PW27
W
W
W
PW26
PW25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D129: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 3 PWR3: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PW34
PW33
PW32
PW31
PW30
0
W
PW37
W
W
W
PW36
PW35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D12A: 8-Bit PWM Control Register PW8CR: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
5
6
7
PWC3
PWC2
PWC1
PWC0
R/W
R/W
1
1
1
1
Output polarity select bits
Positive polarity
Negative polarity
0
1
(n = 3 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D12C: Input Capture Register 1 ICR1: PSU
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
0
R
5
6
0
7
ICR14
ICR13
ICR12
ICR11
ICR10
0
R
ICR17
R
R
R
ICR16
ICR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 973 of 1037
H'D12D: Prescaler Unit Control/Status Register PCSR: PSU
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
ICEG
R/W
ICIE
0
R/(W)
*
ICIF
NCon/off
DCS2
DCS1
DCS0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Interrupt request by input capture is disabled
Interrupt request by input capture is enabled
0
1
Input capture interrupt enable bit
Frequency division clock output select bits
Frequency division
clodk output select
0
0
0
PSS, output
/32
DCS1
DCS0
DCS2
1
PSS, output
/16
1
0
PSS, output
/8
1
PSS, output
/4
0
1
0
PSW, output
W/32
1
PSW, output
W/16
1
0
PSW, output
W/8
1
PSW, output
W/4
Input capture interrupt flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When input capture is executed at IC pin edge
0
1
Noise cancel function of IC pin is disabled
Noise cancel function of IC pin is enabled
0
1
Noise cancel ON/OFF bit
IC pin edge select bit
Falling edge of IC pin input is detected
Rising edge of IC pin input is detected
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 974 of 1037
H'D130: Software Trigger A/D Result Register H ADRH: A/D Converter
H'D131: Software Trigger A/D Result Register L ADRL: A/D Converter
ADRH
ADRL
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
0
R
12
13
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D132: Hardware Trigger A/D Result Register H AHRH: A/D Converter
H'D133: Hardware Trigger A/D Result Register L AHRL: A/D Converter
AHRH
AHRL
1
0
3
2
5
4
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2 AHR1 AHR0
0
R
12
13
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 975 of 1037
H'D134: A/D Control Register ADCR: A/D Converter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
1
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
HCH1
0
R/W
CK
HCH0
SCH3
SCH2
SCH1
SCH0
Clock select
0 Conversion frequency = 266 states
1 Conversion frequency = 134 states
Hardware channel select bits
HCH1 HCH2 Analog input channel
0 0 AN8
1 AN9
1 0 ANA
1 ANB
Software channel select bits
SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0 Analog input channel
0 0 0 0 AN0
1 AN1
1 0 AN2
1 AN3
1 0 0 AN4
1 AN5
1 0 AN6
1 AN7
1 0 0 0 AN8
1 AN9
1 0 ANA
1 ANB
1
*
*
Software-triggered conversion
channel is not selected
Notes: 1. If conversion is started by software when SCH3 to
SCH0 are set to 11xx, the conversion result is
undetermined. Hardware- or external-triggered
conversion, however, will be performed on the channel
selected by HCH1 and HCH0.
2.
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 976 of 1037
H'D135: A/D Control/Status Register ADCSR: A/D Converter
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
7
R//(W)
*
R
R/W
ADIE
0
R/(W)
*
SEND
SST
HST
BUSY
SCNL
HEND
1
A/D interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is disabled
1 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is enabled
Software A/D start flag
0 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion
has ended or been stopped
Write: Software-triggered A/D conversion is aborted
1 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion
is in progress
Write: Starts software-triggered A/D conversion
Busy flag
0 No contention for A/D conversion
1 Indicates an attempt to execute software-triggerd
A/D conversion was canceled by the start of hardware-
triggered A/D conversion.
Software-triggered A/D conversion cancel flag
0 No contention for A/D conversion
1 Indicates that software-triggered A/D
conversion was canceled by the start of
hardware-triggered A/D conversion.
Hardware A/D status flag
0 Read: Hardware- or external -triggered A/D conversion is
not in progress
Write: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is
aborted
1 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has
ended or been stopped
Software A/D end flag
0 [Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When software-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Hardware A/D end flag
0 [Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting conditions]
When hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion has ended
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 977 of 1037
H'D136: A/D Trigger Select Register ADTSR: A/D Converter
0
1
2
3
0
4
R/W
5
6
7
TRGS1
0
R/W
TRGS0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Trigger select bits
TRGS1 TRGS0
0 0 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion is disabled
1 Hardware-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion
is selected
1 0 Hardware-triggered (DFG) A/D conversion
is selected
1 External-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion
is selected
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'D138: Timer Load Register K TLK: Timer J
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
W
TLR25
W
TLR26
1
W
TLR27
TLR24
TLR23
TLR22
TLR21
TLR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D138: Timer Counter K TCK: Timer J
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
R
R
R
TDR25
R
TDR26
1
R
TDR27
TDR24
TDR23
TDR22
TDR21
TDR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D139: Timer Load Register J TLJ: Timer J
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
W
W
W
TLR15
W
TLR16
1
W
TLR17
TLR14
TLR13
TLR12
TLR11
TLR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 978 of 1037
H'D139: Timer Counter J TCJ: Timer J
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
R
R
R
TDR15
R
TDR16
1
R
TDR17
TDR14
TDR13
TDR12
TDR11
TDR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D13A: Timer Mode Register J TMJ: Timer J
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ST
R/W
PS10
0
R/W
PS11
8/16
PS21
PS20
TGL
T/R
TMJ-2 toggle flag
TMJ-2 toggle output is 0
TMJ-2 toggle output is 1
0
1
Timer output/remote-controller output
select bit
TMJ-1 timer output
TMJ-1 toggle output (data
transmitted from remote
controller)
0
1
TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate separately
TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate together as 16-bit
0
1
8-bit/16-bit operation select bit
Stop TMJ-1 clock supply in remote control mode
Start TMJ-1 clock supply in remote control mode
0
1
Remote-controlled operation start bit
Note:
*
External clock edge selection is set in edge select register (IEGR).
See section explaining edge select register (IEGR).
When using external clock in remote control mode, set opposite edges for IRQ1 and IRQ2 edges
(eg. When falling edge is set for IRQ1, set rising edge for IRQ2).
0
0
PS10
PS11
1
0
1
PSS, count at /512
PSS, count at /256
PSS, count at /4
1
Count at rising/falling edge of external clock (IRQ1)
TMJ-1 input clock select bits
TMJ-1 input clock select
Notes: 1. The edge selection for the external clock inputs is made by setting the edge select
register (IEGR). See section 6.2.4, Edge Select Register (IEGR) for more
information.
2. Don't care.
3. Available only in the H8S/2194C series.
PS20
PS21
PS22
*
3
Counthing by the PSS, /16384
Counthing by the PSS, /2048
Counting at underflowing of the TMJ-1
Counting at the leading edge or the trailing edge of
the external clock inputs (IRQ2)
*
1
Counting by the PSS, /1024 (available only the
H8S/2194C series)
TMJ-2 input clock select bits
TMJ-2 input clock select
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
1
0
1
0
1
*
2
*
2
0
1
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 979 of 1037
H'D13B: Timer J Control Register TMJC: Timer J
0
1
0
2
0
R/W
3
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
MON1
R/W
BUZZ0
0
R/W
BUZZ1
MON0
TMJ2IE
TMJ1IE
1
1
/4096
BUZZ0
Output signal
BUZZ1
Frequency when
= 10 MHz
/8192
2.44 kHz
1.22 kHz
Output monitor signal
0
0
1
1
0
1
Output Timer J BUZZ signal
Buzzer output select bits
TMJ2I interrupt request is disabled
TMJ2I interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMJ2I interrupt enable bit
TMJ1I interrupt request is disabled
TMJ1I interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMJ1I interrupt enable bit
PB or REC-CTL
MON0
MON1
DVCTL
Output TCA7
0
0
1
1
*
Monitor output select bits
Monitor output select
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
(PS22)
*
--
(R/W)
*
H8S/2194 series: When ths is read, 1 will
always be readout.
Writes are disabled.
H8S/2194C series: This bit, together with
bit 3 and 2 (PS21,PS20)
in TMJ, selects the input
clock for TMJ-2.
Note:
*
Bit 0 is readable/writable only in the H8S/2194C series.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 980 of 1037
H'D13C: Timer J Status Register TMJS: Timer J
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
7
R/(W)
*
TMJ1I
0
R/(W)
*
TMJ2I
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
TMJ1I interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When TMJ-1 underflows
0
1
TMJ2I interrupt request flag
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting conditions]
When TMJ-2 underflows
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 981 of 1037
H'D148: Serial Mode Register SMR1: SCI1
7
C/A
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Start-stop synchronous mode
Clock synchronouns mode
0
1
Communication mode
Multiprocessor function is disabled
Multiprocessor format is selected
0
1
Multiprocessor mode
Clock select
Clock select
0
0
CKS0
CKS1
1
0
1
clock
/4 clock
/16 clock
1
/64 clock
8-bit data
7-bit data
0
1
Character length
Note:
*
When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted,
and LSB-first/MSB-first selection is not available.
Even parity
*
1
Odd parity
*
2
0
1
Parity mode
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission
so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity
bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number
of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even.
2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission
so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity
bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number
of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd.
1 Stop bit
*
1
2 Stop bit
*
2
0
1
Stop bit length
Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent.
2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent.
Parity bit addition and checking disabled
Parity bit addition and checking enabled
*
0
1
Parity enable
Note:
*
When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit
is added to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is
checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 982 of 1037
H'D149: Bit Rate Register BRR1: SCI1
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 983 of 1037
H'D14A: Serial Control Register SCR1: SCI1
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request is disabled
*
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request is enabled
0
1
Transmit interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0,
or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Reveive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is disabled
*
Reveive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is enabled
0
1
Receive interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag,
then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Transmission is disabled
*
1
Transmission is enabled
*
2
0
1
Transmit enable bit
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR1 is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and TDRE flag in SSR1
is cleared to 0.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the TE bit to 1.
Reception is disabled
*
1
Reception is enabled
*
2
0
1
Receive enable bit
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial
clock input is detected in synchronous mode.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE bit to 1.
Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal reception performed)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
(2) When data with MPB = 1 is received
Multiprocessor interrupt are enabled
*
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF,
FER, and ORER flags in SSR1 are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
0
1
Multiprocessor interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
When receive data including MPB = 0 is reveived, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR1, receive error detection, and
setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR1, is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received,
the MPB bit in SSR1 is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts
(when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR1 are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled.
Clock enable bits
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
Clock select
0
0
Internal clock/SCK1 pin function as I/O port
*
1
CKE0
CKE1
Internal clock/SCK1 pin function as serial clock output
*
1
1
Internal clock/SCK1 pin function as clock output
*
2
Internal clock/SCK1 pin function as serial clock output
0
1
External clock/SCK1 pin function as clock input
*
3
External clock/SCK1 pin function as serial clock input
1
External clock/SCK1 pin function as clock input
*
3
Start-stop synchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Start-stop synchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Start-stop synchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Start-stop synchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
External clock/SCK1 pin function as serial clock input
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is disabled
*
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is enabled
*
0
1
Transmit end interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it
to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 984 of 1037
H'D14B: Transmit Data Register TDR1: SCI1
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 985 of 1037
H'D14C: Serial Status Register SSR1: SCI1
Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
0
1
Multiprocessor bit transfer
Transmit data register empty
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
[Setting conditions]
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR and data can be written to TDR1
0
1
Transmit end
0
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
[Setting conditions]
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When TDRE = 1 at trasmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial
transmit character
1
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)
*
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)
*
5
ORER
0
R/(W)
*
4
FER
0
R/(W)
*
3
PER
0
R/(W)
*
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Multiprocessor bit
0
[Clearing conditions]
*
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
[Setting conditions]
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is reveived
1
Note:
*
Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0 with
multiprocessor format.
[Clearing conditions]
*
1
When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1
[Setting conditions]
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit
does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR1
*
2
0
1
Parity error
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set. Also,
subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Receive data register full
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
[Setting conditions]
When serial reception ends normally adn receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR1
0
1
Note: RDR1 and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception
or when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set
to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Overrun errro
[Clearing conditions]
*
1
When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1
[Setting conditions]
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1
*
2
0
1
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR1, and the data received subsequently is lost.
Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Framing error
[Clearing conditions]
*
1
When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1
[Setting conditions]
When the SCI1 checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception
ends, and the stop bit is 0.
*
2
0
1
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 1; the second stop bit is not checked.
If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set.
Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 986 of 1037
H'D14D: Receive Data Register RDR1: SCI1
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D14E: Serial Interface Mode Register SCMR1: SCI1
7
--
1
--
6
--
1
--
5
--
1
--
4
--
1
--
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
SMIF
0
R/W
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
--
1
--
Normal SCI mode
Reserved mode
0
1
Serial communication inteface
mode select
Data invert
TDR1 contents are transmitted
without modification
Receive data is stored in RDR1
without modification
TDR1 contents are onverted before
being transmitted
Receive data is stored in RDR1
in inverted form
0
1
TDR1 contents are transmitted LSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR1 LSB-first
TDR1 contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR1 MSB-first
0
1
Data transfer direction
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 987 of 1037
H'D158: I
2
C Bus Control Register ICCR: IIC Bus Interface
7
ICE
0
R/W
6
IEIC
0
R/W
5
MST
0
R/W
4
TRS
0
R/W
3
ACKE
0
R/W
0
SCP
1
W
2
BBSY
0
R/W
1
IRIC
0
R/(W)
*
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the falg.
I
2
C bus interface enable
0 I
2
C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins
set to port function. Initialization of the internal state of the I2C
module. SAR and SARX can be accessed
1 I
2
C bus interface module enabled for transfer operation (pins SCL
and SCA are driving the bus)
I
2
C bus interface interrupt enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled
1 Interrupt request is enabled
Acknowledge bit judgment selection
0 The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed
1 If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Bus busy
0 Bus is free
[Clearing conditions] When a stop condition is detected
1 Bus is busy
[Setting conditions] When a start condition is detected
I
2
C bus interface interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
1 Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
s
I
2
C bus format master mode
(1) When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is
issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
(2) When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1
(3) At the end of data transfer
(at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse, and at the fall of the 8th transmit/
receive clock pulse when a wait is inserted)
(4) When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost
(when the AL flag is set to 1)
(5) When 1 is reveived as teh acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
s
I
2
C bus format slave mode
(1) When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches
(when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to
the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When the general call address is detected
(when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to
the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(3) When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
(4) When a stop condition is detected
(when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
s
Synchronous serial format
(1) At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
When conditions are occurred such that the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Start condition/stop condition prohibit
0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag
1 Reading always returns a value of 1
Writing is ignored
Master/slave select
Transmit/receive select
MST TRS
0 0 Slave reveive mode
1 Slave transmit mode
1 0 Master receive mode
1 Master transmit mode
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 988 of 1037
H'D159: I
2
C Bus Status Register ICSR: IIC Bus Interface
7
ESTP
0
R/(W)
*
6
STOP
0
R/(W)
*
5
IRTR
0
R/(W)
*
4
AASX
0
R/(W)
*
3
AL
0
R/(W)
*
0
ACKB
0
R/W
2
AAS
0
R/(W)
*
1
ADZ
0
R/(W)
*
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Error stop condition detection flage
0 No error stop condition
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1
s
In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting conditions]
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
s
In other mode
No meaning
Normal stop condition detection flag
0 No normal stop condition
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1
s
In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Normal stop condition detected
[Setting conditions]
When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
s
In other mode
No meaning
I
2
C bus interface continuous transmission/reception interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 Continuous transfer state
[Setting conditions]
s
In I
2
C bus interface slave mode
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1
s
In other mode
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Second slave address recognition flag
0 Second slave address not recognized
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
(2) When a start condition is detected
(3) In master mode
1 Second slave address recognized
[Setting conditions]
When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0
Arbitration lost flag
0 Bus arbitration won
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
1 Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
(1) If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode
(2) If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Slave address recognition flag
0 Slave address or general call address not recognized
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
(3) In master mode
1 Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting conditions]
When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode
General call address recognition flag
0 General call address not recognized
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
(3) In master mode
1 General call address recognized
[Setting conditions]
When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode
Acknowledge bit
0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowldeged the data (signal is 0)
1 Receive mode; 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowldeged the data (signal is 1)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 989 of 1037
H'D15E: I
2
C Bus Data Register ICDR: IIC Bus Interface
7
ICDR7
--
R/W
6
ICDR6
--
R/W
5
ICDR5
--
R/W
4
ICDR4
--
R/W
3
ICDR3
--
R/W
0
ICDR0
--
R/W
2
ICDR2
--
R/W
1
ICDR1
--
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D15E: Second Slave Address Register SARX: IIC Bus Interface
7
SVAX6
0
R/W
6
SVAX5
0
R/W
5
SVAX4
0
R/W
4
SVAX3
0
R/W
3
SVAX2
0
R/W
0
FSX
1
R/W
2
SVAX1
0
R/W
1
SVAX0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Format select
Used combined with SAR FS bit.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 990 of 1037
H'D15F: I
2
C Bus Mode Register ICMR: IIC Bus Interface
7
MLS
0
R/W
6
WAIT
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
2
BC2
0
R/W
1
BC1
0
R/W
MSB-first/LSB-first select
0 MSB-first
1 LSB-first
Wait insertion bit
0 Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively
1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Transfer clock select bits
Bit counter
Bit/frame
BC2 BC1 BC0 Clock sync I
2
C bus format
serial format
0 0 0 8 9
1 1 2
1 0 2 3
1 3 4
0 0 0 4 5
1 5 6
1 0 6 7
1 7 8
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
See STCR Bit 6.
IICX
*
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Transfer rate
=5 MHz
=8 MHz
=10 MHz
0 0 0 0
/28 179 kHz 286 kHz 357 kHz
1
/40 125 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz
1 0
/48 104 kHz 167 kHz 208 kHz
1
/64 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 156 kHz
1 0 0
/80 62.5 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz
1
/100 50.0 kHz 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
1 0
/112 44.6 kHz 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
1
/128 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0 0
/56 89.3 kHz 143 kHz 179 kHz
1
/80 62.5 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz
1 0
/96 52.1 kHz 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
1
/128 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0
/160 31.3 kHz 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz
1
/200 25.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
1 0
/224 22.3 kHz 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
1
/256 19.5 kHz 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 991 of 1037
H'D15F: Slave Address Register SAR: IIC Bus Interface
7
SVA6
0
R/W
6
SVA5
0
R/W
5
SVA4
0
R/W
4
SVA3
0
R/W
3
SVA2
0
R/W
0
FS
0
R/W
2
SVA1
0
R/W
1
SVA0
0
R/W
Format select bit
SAR SARX Format select
Bit 0 Bit 0
FS FX
0 0 I
2
C bus format
SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
1 I
2
C bus format
SAR slave address recognized
SARX slave address ignored
1 0 I
2
C bus format
SAR slave address ignored
SARX slave address recognized
1 I
2
C bus format
SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFB0: Trap Address Register 0 TAR0: ATC
H'FFB3: Trap Address Register 1 TAR1: ATC
H'FFB6: Trap Address Register 2 TAR2: ATC
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
R/W
A18
A17
A16
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A23
A22
A21
0
0
R/W
R/W
A20
A19
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
R/W
A10
A9
A8
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A15
A14
A13
0
0
R/W
R/W
A12
A11
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
4
5
6
7
A2
A1
0
0
R/W
0
R/W
R/W
A7
A6
A5
0
0
R/W
R/W
A4
A3
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 992 of 1037
H'FFB9: Address Trap Control Register ATCR: ATC
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R/W
TRC2
TRC1
TRC0
1
Trap control 0
0 Address trap function 0 is
disabled
1 Address trap function 0 is
enabled
Trap control 1
0 Address trap function 1 is
disabled
1 Address trap function 1 is
enabled
Trap control 2
0 Address trap function 2 is
disabled
1 Address trap function 2 is
enabled
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 993 of 1037
H'FFBA: Timer Mode Register A TMA: Timer A
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)
*
TMAOV
TMA3
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written to TMAOV after reading
TMAOV = 1
[Setting conditions]
When TCA overflows
0
1
Timer A overflow flag
Interrupt request by Timer A (TMAI) is disabled
Interrupt request by Timer A (TMAI) is enabled
0
1
Timer A interrupt enable bit
Timer A clock source is PSS
Timer A clock source is PSW
0
1
Clock source, prescaler select bit
PSS,
/16384
TMA1
TMA0
TMA2
Prescaler frequency division rate (interval timer)
or overflow frequency (time-base)
Operation mode
PSS,
/8192
PSS,
/4096
PSS,
/1024
0
TMA3
PSS,
/512
PSS,
/256
PSS,
/64
PSS,
/16
1 s
Interval timer
mode
Clock time
base mode
0.5 s
0.25 s
0.03125 s
0
1
0
1
1
Clear PSW and TCA to H'00
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clock select bits
Note:
= f osc
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 994 of 1037
H'FFBB: Timer Counter A TCA: TimerA
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
5
6
7
R
R
TCA3
0
R
TCA4
0
R
TCA5
0
R
TCA6
0
R
TCA7
TCA2
TCA1
TCA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFBC: Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register WTCSR: WDT
7
OVF
0
R/(W)
*
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
RSTS
0
R/W
3
RST/NMI
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Overflow flag
WTCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted
WTCNT counts
0
1
NMI interrupt request is disabled
Internal reset request is generated
0
1
Timer mode select bit
Timer enable bit
Reset or NMI
Interval timer mode: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt
request (WOVI) when WTCNT overflows
Watchdog timer mode: Sends the CPU a reset or NMI interrupt
request when WTCNT overflows
0
1
[Clearing conditions]
(1) Write 0 in the TME bit
(2) Read WTCSR when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
[Setting conditions]
When WTCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
(When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode,
OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset.)
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 995 of 1037
H'FFBD: Watchdog Timer Counter WTCNT: WDT
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC0: Port Data Register 0 PDR0: I/O Port
0
1
R
2
R
3
4
R
R
5
7
PDR04
PDR03
PDR02
PDR01
PDR00
R
PDR07
R
R
R
PDR06
PDR05
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFC1: Port Data Register 1 PDR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR14
PDR13
PDR12
PDR11
PDR10
PDR17
PDR16
PDR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC2: Port Data Register 2 PDR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR24
PDR23
PDR22
PDR21
PDR20
PDR27
PDR26
PDR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC3: Port Data Register 3 PDR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR34
PDR33
PDR32
PDR31
PDR30
PDR37
PDR36
PDR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 996 of 1037
H'FFC4: Port Data Register 4 PDR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PDR44
PDR43
PDR42
PDR41
PDR40
PDR47
PDR46
PDR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC5: Port Data Register 5 PDR5: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
R/W
PDR51
R/W
PDR50
0
R/W
PDR52
0
R/W
PDR53
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFC6: Port Data Register 6 PDR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR64
PDR63
PDR62
PDR61
PDR60
0
R/W
PDR67
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR66
PDR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC7: Port Data Register 7 PDR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR74
PDR73
PDR72
PDR71
PDR70
0
R/W
PDR77
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR76
PDR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC8: Port Data Register 8 PDR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PDR84
PDR83
PDR82
PDR81
PDR80
0
R/W
PDR87
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR86
PDR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 997 of 1037
H'FFCD: Port Mode Register 0 PMR0: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR04
PMR03
PMR02
PMR01
PMR00
PMR07
PMR06
PMR05
P07/AN7 to P00/IRQ0 rin function select bits
P0n/ANn pin functions as P0n input port
P0n/ANn pin functions as ANn input port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFCE: Port Mode Register 1 PMR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR14
PMR13
PMR12
PMR11
PMR10
PMR17
PMR16
PMR15
P17/TMOW pin functions as P17 I/O port
P17/TMOW pin functions as TMOW output port
0
1
P17/TMOW pin function select bit
P1n/IRQn pin functions as P1n I/O port
P1n/IRQn pin functions as IRQn input port
0
1
P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 pin function select bits
(n = 5 to 0)
P16/IC pin functions as P16 I/O port
P16/IC pin functions as IC input port
0
1
P16/IC pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 998 of 1037
H'FFCF: Port Mode Register 2 PMR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR20
PMR27
PMR26
PMR25
P27/SCK2 pin functions as P27 I/O port
P27/SCK2 pin functions as SCK2 I/O port
0
1
P26/SO2 pin functions as P26 I/O port
P26/SO2 pin functions as SO2 output port
0
1
P25/SI2 pin functions as P25 I/O port
P25/SI2 pin functions as S12 input port
0
1
P26/SO2 pin functions as CMOS output
P26/SO2 pin functions as NMOS open drain output
0
1
P27/SCK2 pin function select bit
P26/SO2 pin function select bit
P25/SI2 pin function select bit
P26/SO2 pin PMOS control bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFD0: Port Mode Register 3 PMR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PMR34
PMR33
PMR32
PMR31
PMR30
PMR37
PMR36
PMR35
P3n/PWMm pin functions as P3n I/O port
P3n/PWMm pin functions as PWMm output port
0
1
P36/BUZZ pin functions as P36 I/O port
P36/BUZZ pin functions as BUZZ output port
0
1
P37/TMO pin functions as P37 I/O port
P37/TMO pin functions as TMO output port
0
1
P37/TMO pin function select bit
Notes: If the TMO pin is used for remote control sending, a careless timer output
pulse may be output when the remote control mode is set after the output
has been switched to the TMO output. Perform the switching and setting in
the following order.
[1] Set the remote control mode.
[2] Set the TMJ-1 and 2 counter data of the timer J.
[3] Switch the P37/TMO pin to the TMO output pin.
[4] Set the ST bit to 1.
P36/BUZZ pin function select bit
P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 pin function select bit
P31/STRB pin functions as P31 I/O port
P31/STRB pin functions as STRB output port
0
1
P31/STRB pin function select bit
(n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0)
P30/CS pin functions as P30 I/o port
P30/CS pin functions as CS input port
0
1
P30/CS pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 999 of 1037
H'FFD1: Port Control Register 1 PCR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
P1n pin functions as input port
P1n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFD2: Port Control Register 2 PCR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR24
PCR23
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
PCR27
PCR26
PCR25
P2n pin functions as input port
P2n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFD3: Port Control Register 3 PCR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR34
PCR33
PCR32
PCR31
PCR30
PCR37
PCR36
PCR35
P3n pin functions as input port
P3n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1000 of 1037
H'FFD4: Port Control Register 4 PCR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W
W
W
W
6
PCR44
PCR43
PCR42
PCR41
PCR40
PCR47
PCR46
PCR45
P4n pin functions as input port
P4n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFD5: Port Control Register 5 PCR5: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
W
PCR51
W
PCR50
0
W
PCR52
0
W
PCR53
P5n pin functions as input port
P5n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 3 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFD6: Port Control Register 6 PCR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
0
W
PCR67
W
W
W
PCR66
PCR65
0
0
P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n general purpose input port
PCR6n
PMR6n
1
P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n general purpose output port
*
1
P6n/RPn pin functions as RPn realtime output port
Port Control Register 6
Note:
*
Don't care. (n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1001 of 1037
H'FFD7: Port Control Register 7 PCR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
0
W
PCR77
W
W
W
PCR76
PCR75
P7n pin functions as input port
P7n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFD8: Port Control Register 8 PCR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
6
0
7
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
0
W
PCR87
W
W
W
PCR86
PCR85
P8n pin functions as input port
P8n pin functions as output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFDB: Port Mode Register 4 PMR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
R/W
6
PMR40
P40/PWM14 pin functions as P40 I/O port
P40/PWM14 pin functions as PWM14 output port
0
1
P40/PWM14 pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1002 of 1037
H'FFDC: Port Mode Register 5: PMR5: I/O Port
0
1
1
0
2
3
4
1
1
5
1
7
1
6
R/W
PMR51
0
R/W
PMR52
0
R/W
PMR53
P53/TRIG pin function as P53 I/O port
P53/TRIG pin function as TRIG input port
0
1
P53/TRIG pin function select bit
P52/TMBI pin function as P52 I/O port
P52/TMBI pin functions as TMB input port
0
1
P52/TMBI pin function select bit
The timer B event input detects the falling edge
The timer B event input detects the rising edge
0
1
Timer B event input edge select
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFDD: Port Mode Register 6 PMR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR64
PMR63
PMR62
PMR61
PMR60
0
R/W
PMR67
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR66
PMR65
P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n I/O port
P6n/RPn pin functions as RPn output port
0
1
P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 pin function select bit
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFDE: Port Mode Register 7 PMR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
PMR74
PMR73
PMR72
PMR71
PMR70
0
R/W
PMR77
R/W
R/W
R/W
PMR76
PMR75
P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 pin function select bit
P7n/PPGn pin functions as P7n I/O port
P7n/PPGn pin functions as PPGn output port
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1003 of 1037
H'FFDF: Port Mode Register 8 PMR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
1
5
6
1
7
PMR83
PMR82
PMR81
PMR80
1
R/W
R/W
P83/SV2 pin functions as P83 I/O port
P83/SV2 pin functions as SV2 output port
0
1
P83/SV2 pin function select bit
P82/SV1 pin functions as P82 I/O port
P82/SV1 pin functions as SV1 output port
0
1
P82/SV1 pin function select bit
P81/EXCAP pin functions as P81 I/O port
P81/EXCAP pin functions as EXCAP input port
0
1
P81/EXCAP pin function select bit
P80/EXTTRG pin functions as P80 I/O port
P80/EXTTRG pin functions as EXTTRG input port
0
1
P80/EXTTRG pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
H'FFE1: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 1 PUR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR14
PUR13
PUR12
PUR11
PUR10
PUR17
PUR16
PUR15
P1n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor
P1n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1004 of 1037
H'FFE2: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 2 PUR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR24
PUR23
PUR22
PUR21
PUR20
PUR27
PUR26
PUR25
P2n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor
P2n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFE3: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 3 PUR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
6
PUR34
PUR33
PUR32
PUR31
PUR30
PUR37
PUR36
PUR35
P3n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor
P3n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFE4: Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select Register RTPEGR: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
1
3
1
4
1
1
5
6
1
7
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
1
R/W
0
0
Trigger input is disabled
RTPEGR0
RTPEGR1
1
Rising edge of trigger input is selected
0
1
Rising and falling edges of trigger input is selected
1
Falling edge of trigger input is selected
Realtime output trigger edge select bit
Realtime output trigger edge select
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1005 of 1037
H'FFE5: Realtime Output Trigger Select Register RTPSR: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
6
0
7
RTPSR4
RTPSR3
RTPSR2
RTPSR1
RTPSR0
0
R/W
RTPSR7
R/W
R/W
R/W
RTPSR6
RTPSR5
External trigger (TRIG pin) input is selected
Internal triggfer (HSW) input is selected
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFE8: System Control Register SYSCR: System Control
0
1
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R
R
INTM1
INTM0
XRST
NMIEG1
NMIEG0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt is controlled by I bit
INTM0
INTM1
Interrupt
control mode
Interrupt control
1
1
Interrupt is controlled by I and UI bits and ICR
0
1
2
Cannot be used in the H8S/2194 Series
1
3
Cannot be used in the H8S/2194 Series
0
0
Interrupt request is generated at falling edge of NMI input
NMIEG0
NMIEG1
1
Interrupt request is generated at rising edge of NMI input
*
1
Interrupt request is generated at rising or falling edge of NMI input
Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
Reset is generaed by external reset input
0
1
Interrupt control mode
External reset
NMI edge select bits
NMI edge select
Note:
*
Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1006 of 1037
H'FFE9: Mode Control Register MDCR: System Control
0
--
*
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R
MDS0
0
Note:
*
Determined by MD0 pin.
Mode select 0
Bit :
Initial value :
R / W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1007 of 1037
H'FFEA: Standby Control Register SBYCR: System Control
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
STS1
R/W
STS2
0
R/W
SSBY
STS0
SCK1
SCK0
Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in
high-speed mode or medium-speed mode
Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP
instruction in subactive mode
Transition to stadby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after
execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-
speed mode
Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of
SLEEP instruction in subactive mode
0
1
Software standby
System clock select
System clock select
0
0
SCK0
SCK1
1
0
0
1
Bus master is in high-speed mode
Medium-speed clock is
/16
Medium-speed clock is
/32
1
1
Medium-speed clock is
/64
0
0
STS1
STS2
0
0
1
0
Standby timer select bits
0
STS0
1
0
Standby time
8192 states
16384 states
32768 states
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
65536 states
1
1
*
1
16 states
*
2
131072 states
262144 states
Notes: 1. Don't care.
2. The standby time is 32 states when transited to
medium-speed mode
/32 (SCK = 1, SCK = 0).
Do not select 16 states for Flash ROM version.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1008 of 1037
H'FFEB: Low-Power Control Register LPWRCR: System Control
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
R/W
NESEL
R/W
LSON
0
R/W
DTON
SA1
SA0
Low-speed on flag
Noise elimination sampling frequency select
Subactive mode clock select
Subactive mode clock select
Sampling at
divided by 16
Sampling at
divided by 4
0
1
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch
mode, or directly to high-speed mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made directly to subactive mode
*
, or a transition is made to sleep mode
or standby mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
directily to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode
0
1
Direct transfer on flag
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch
mode, or directly to high-speed mode
After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made to
watch mode, subactive mode, sleep mode or standby mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to
subsleep mode or watch mode.
After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode
0
1
Note:
*
Don't care.
0
0
SA0
SA1
1
0
*
1
Operating clock of CPU is
w/8
Operating clock of CPU is
w/4
Operating clock of CPU is
w/2
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1009 of 1037
H'FFEC: Module Stop Control Register MSTPCRH: System Control
H'FFED: Module Stop Control Register MSTPCRL: System Control
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Module stop
Module stop mode is released
Module stop mode is set
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFEE: Serial Timer Control Register STCR: System Control
7
--
0
--
6
IICX
0
R/W
5
IICRST
0
R/W
4
--
0
--
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
--
0
--
2
--
0
--
1
--
0
--
Flash memory control register enable bit
I
2
C controller reset bit
I
2
C transfer clock select
Used combined with ICMR CKS2 to CKS0
I
2
C bus interface controller is not reset
I
2
C bus interface controller is reset
0
1
Flash memory control register is not selected
Flash memory control register is selected
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1010 of 1037
H'FFF0: IRQ Edge Select Register IEGR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ4EG
R/W
IRQ5EG
IRQ3EG
IRQ2EG
IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG2
0
6
IRQ0 pin detected dege select bits
IRQ0 pin detected edge select
0
0
Interrupt request generaed at falling edge of IRQ0 pin input
IRQ0EG0
IRQ0EG1
1
0
Interrupt request generaed at rising edge of IRQ0 pin input
*
1
Interrupt request generaed at bath falling and rising edge of IRQ0 pin input
Note:
*
Don't care.
IRQ5 to IRQ1 pins detected edge select bits
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn pin input
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn pin input
0
1
(n = 5 to 1)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
H'FFF1: IRQ Enable Register IENR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
0
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
6
IRQ5 to IRQ0 enable bits
IRQn interrupt is disabled
IRQn interrupt is enabled
0
1
(n = 5 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1011 of 1037
H'FFF2: IRQ Status Register IRQR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/(W)
*
2
0
R/(W)
*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)
*
5
0
0
7
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
R/(W)
*
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
6
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
IRQ5 to IRQ0 flag
[Clearing conditions]
Cleared by reading IRQnF set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed
[Setting conditions]
(1) When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input while falling edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0)
(2) When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input while rising edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0)
(3) When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQ0 input while both-edge detection is set (IRQ0EG1 = 1)
0
1
(n = 5 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
--
--
--
--
H'FFF3: Interrupt Control Register A ICRA: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF4: Interrupt Control Register B ICRB: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF5: Interrupt Control Register C ICRC: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF6: Interrupt Control Register D ICRD: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
0
R/W
ICR7
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICR6
ICR5
6
Interrupt control level
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority)
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority)
0
1
(n = 7 to 0)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1012 of 1037
H'FFF8: Flash Memory Control Register 1 FLMCR1:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194 FLASH Version Only)
7
FWE
--
*
R
6
SWE
0
R/W
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
EV
0
R/W
0
P
0
R/W
2
PV
0
R/W
1
E
0
R/W
Note:
*
Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
Program
Software write enable
Writes are disabled
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1
0
1
Flash write enable
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
0
1
Erase-verify
Erase-verify mode cleared
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Program-verify
Program-verify mode cleared
Transition to program-verufy mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Erase
Erase mode cleared
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE = 1, and ESU = 1
0
1
Program mode cleared
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE = 1, and PSU = 1
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1013 of 1037
H'FFF8: Flash Memory Control Register 1 FLMCR1:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194C FLASH Version Only)
7
FWE
--
*
R
6
SWE
0
R/W
5
ESU1
0
R/W
4
PSU1
0
R/W
3
EV1
0
R/W
0
P1
0
R/W
2
PV1
0
R/W
1
E1
0
R/W
Note:
*
Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
Program
Software write enable
Writes are disabled
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1
0
1
Flash write enable
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
0
1
Erase verify
Erase-verify mode cleared
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Erase setup bit 1
Erase-setup cleared
Erase-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Program setup bit 1
Program-setup cleared
Program-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Program verify
Program-verify mode cleared
Transition to program-verufy mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE = 1
0
1
Erase
Erase mode cleared
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE = 1, and ESU = 1
0
1
Program mode cleared
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE = 1, and PSU = 1
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1014 of 1037
H'FFF9: Flash Memory Control Register 2 FLMCR2:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194 FLASH Version Only)
7
FLER
0
R
6
--
0
--
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
--
0
--
0
PSU
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
ESU
0
R/W
Flash memory error
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode
An error has occurred during flash memeory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition] See section 7.8.3, Error Protection
0
1
Program setup
0
Program setup cleared
Program setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Erase setup
0
Erase setup cleared
Erase setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1015 of 1037
H'FFF9: Flash Memory Control Register 2 FLMCR2:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194C FLASH Version Only)
7
FLER
0
R
6
--
0
--
5
ESU2
0
R/W
4
PSU2
0
R/W
3
EV2
0
R/W
0
P2
0
2
PV2
0
R/W
1
E2
0
Flash memory error
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode
An error has occurred during flash memeory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition] See section 8.8.3, Error Protection
0
1
Program 2
0
Program mode cleared
Transition to program-mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1,and ESU2=1
1
Erase 2
0
Erase mode cleared
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1,and ESU2=1
1
Program-verify 2
0
Program-verify mode cleared
Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Erase-verify 2
0
Erase-verify mode cleared
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Program setup bit 2
0
Program-setup cleared
Program-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Erase setup bit 2
0
Erase-setup cleared
Erase-setup
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1, and SWE = 1
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
R/W
R/W
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1016 of 1037
H'FFFA: Erase Block Select Register 1 EBR1:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194 FLASH Version Only)
7
--
0
--
6
--
0
--
5
--
0
--
4
--
0
--
3
--
0
--
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
--
0
--
1
EB9
0
R/W
Bit :
EBR1
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFFA: Erase Block Select Register 1 EBR1:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194C FLASH Version Only)
7
--
0
--
6
--
0
--
5
EB13
0
R/W
4
EB12
0
R/W
3
EB11
0
R/W
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
EB10
0
R/W
1
EB9
0
R/W
Bit :
EBR1
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFFB: Erase Block Select Register 2 EBR2:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194 FLASH Version Only)
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit :
EBR2
Initial value :
R/W :
Division of Erase Block
Block (size)
128-kbyte version
EB0 (1k bytes)
EB1 (1k bytes)
EB2 (1k bytes)
EB3 (1k bytes)
EB4 (28k bytes)
EB5 (16k bytes)
EB6 (8k bytes)
EB7 (8k bytes)
EB8 (32k bytes)
EB9 (32k bytes)
Address
H'000000 to H'0003FF
H'000400 to H'0007FF
H'000800 to H'000BFF
H'000C00 to H'000FFF
H'001000 to H'007FFF
H'008000 to H'00BFFF
H'00C000 to H'00DFFF
H'00E000 to H'00FFFF
H'010000 to H'017FFF
H'018000 to H'01FFFF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1017 of 1037
H'FFFB: Erase Block Select Register 2 EBR2:
FLASH ROM (H8S/2194C FLASH Version Only)
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit :
EBR2
Initial value :
R/W :
Division of Erase Block
Block (size)
256-kbyte version
EB0 (1k bytes)
EB1 (1k bytes)
EB2 (1k bytes)
EB3 (1k bytes)
EB4 (28k bytes)
EB5 (16k bytes)
EB6 (8k bytes)
EB7 (8k bytes)
EB8 (32k bytes)
EB9 (32k bytes)
EB10 (32k bytes)
EB11 (32k bytes)
EB12 (32k bytes)
EB13 (32k bytes)
Address
H'000000 to H'0003FF
H'000400 to H'0007FF
H'000800 to H'000BFF
H'000C00 to H'000FFF
H'001000 to H'007FFF
H'008000 to H'00BFFF
H'00C000 to H'00DFFF
H'00E000 to H'00FFFF
H'010000 to H'017FFF
H'018000 to H'01FFFF
H'020000 to H'027FFF
H'028000 to H'02FFFF
H'030000 to H'037FFF
H'038000 to H'03FFFF
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1018 of 1037
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
C.1
Pin Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams for all pins except power supply pins are shown in table C.1.
Legend
OUT
G
IN
OUT
G
IN
PMOS
NMOS
Clocked gate signal
transmitted when G = 1
Signal transmitted
when G = 0
[Symbols]
RD:
Read signal
RST:
Reset signal
LPM:
Power-down mode signal (1 in standby, watch, and subactive modes)
Hi-Z:
High impedance
SLEEP: Sleep mode signal
Note:
Numbers given for resistance values, etc., are reference values.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1019 of 1037
Table C.1
Pin Circuit Diagrams
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P00/AN0 to
P07/AN7
PMR0nRD
SCH3 to SCH0
Hi-Z
Retained Hi-Z
AN8 to ANB
HCH1, HCH0
Hi-Z
Retained Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P10/
,54
to
P15/
,54
P16/
,&
PUR1nPCR1n
RD
PDR1n
PMR1n
PCR1n
INT
INT = IRQ0 to IRQ5, IC
n = 0 to 6
PMR1n
Hi-Z
When
,54
to
,54
and
,&
input are selected, pin
input should be fixed high
or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1020 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P17/TMOW
PUR17PCR17
TMOW
PDR17
PMR17
PCR17
RD
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P20/SI1
PUR20PCR20
RD
PDR20
RXE
PCR20
SI1
RXE
RXE: Input control signal determined
by SCR and SMR.
Hi-Z
When SI1 input is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1021 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P21/SO1
PUR21PCR21
SO1
PDR21
TXE
PCR21
RD
TXE: Output control signal determined
by SCR and SMR.
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P22/SCK1
PUR22PCR22
SCKO
SCKI
PDR22
CKOE
PCR22
RD
CKIE
SCKO:
SCKI:
CKOE:
CKIE:
Transfer clock output
Transfer clock input
Transfer clock output control signal
determined by SMR
Transfer clock input control signal
determined by SMR and SCR
Hi-Z
When SCK1 is set to input,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1022 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P23/SDA
P24/SCL
PUR2nPCR2n
SDA/SCL
PDR2n
IICE
PCR2n
RD
IICE
IICE
SDA/SCL
IICE: I
2
C bus enable signal
n = 3, 4
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P26/SO2
PUR26PCR26
SO2
PDR26
PDR26
PCR26
RD
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1023 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P25/SI2
PUR25PCR25
RD
PDR25
PMR25
PCR25
SI2
PMR25
Hi-Z
When SI2 input is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P27/SCK2
PUR27PCR27
SCKO
PDR27
PMR27
EXCK
PCR27
SCKI
RD
SCKO: Transfer clock output
SCKI: Transfer clock input
EXCK: External clock input control signal
determined by SMR1 or SMR2
n = 3, 6
Hi-Z
When SCK2 is set to input,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1024 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P30/
&6
PUR30PCR30
RD
PDR30
PMR30
PCR30
CS
PMR30
Hi-Z
When
&6
input is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
P31/STRB
P32/PWM0
P33/PWM1
P34/PWM2
P35/PWM3
P36/BUZZ
P37/TMO
PUR3nPCR3n
OUT
PDR3n
PMR3n
PCR3n
n = 1 to 7
RD
OUR:
P31/STRB: SC12 strobe output
P32/PWM0: 8-bit PWM0 output
P33/PWM1: 8-bit PWM1 output
P34/PWM2: 8-bit PWM2 output
P35/PWM3: 8-bit PWM3 output
P36/BUZZ: Timer J buzzer output
P37/TMO: Timer J timer output
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1025 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P40/PWM14
OUT
PDR40
PMR40
PCR40
OUT PWM14
RD
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P41/FTIA
P42/PTIB
P43/FTIC
P44/FTID
RD
PDR4n
PCR4n
IN = FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID
*
n = 1 to 4
IN
Hi-Z
Note:
*
As pins FTIA to
FTID are always
active except in the
standby and watch
modes, a high or
low level should be
input to them.
P45/FTOA
P46/PTOB
OUT
PDR4n
TOE
PCR4n
RD
n = 5, 6
OUT:
P45/FTOA: Timer X1 output compare output
FTOA
P46/FTOB: Timer X1 output compare output
FTOB
TOE: Output control signal determined by
TOCR
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1026 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
P47
RD
PDR47
PCR47
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P50/
$'75*
RD
PDR50
TRGE
PCR50
ADTRG
TRGE: A/D trigger input control signal
TRGE
Hi-Z
When
$'75*
input is
selected, pin input should
be fixed high or low.
P51
RD
PDR51
PCR51
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1027 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P52/TMBI
P53/TRIG
RD
PDR5n
PMR5n
PCR5n
IN
IN = TMBI, TRIG
n = 2, 3
PMR5n
Hi-Z
When TMBI and TRIG
input are selected, pin
input should be fixed high
or low.
P60/RP0 to
P67/RP7
RD
n = 0 to 7
PDRS6n
PCRS6n
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P70/PPG0 to
P77/PPG7
PPGn
PDR7n
PMR7n
PCR7n
RD
n = 0 to 7
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1028 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P80/
EXTTRG
P81/EXCAP
RD
PDR8n
PMR8n
PCR8n
IN
IN = EXTTRG, EXCAP
n = 0, 1
PMR8n
Hi-Z
When EXTTRG and
EXCAP input are selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
P82/SV1
P83/SV2
OUT
PDR8n
PMR8n
PCR8n
RD
OUT = SV1, SV2
n = 2, 3
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P84 to P87
RD
n = 4 to 7
PDR8n
PCR8n
Hi-Z
Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Csync
Module STOP
Pin input should be fixed high or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1029 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
COMP/PS2
RD
SPMR2
COMP
SPMR2
SPDR2
SPCR2
Hi-Z
When COMP input is
selected, pin input should
be fixed high or low.
AUDIOFF
VIDEOFF
OUT
LPM
LPM:power-down mode signal
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
CAPPWM
DRMPWM
Low
output
Low
output
Low output
Vpulse
LPM
Three-
level
control
circuit
15 k
Typ
Note: Resistance values are
reference value
15 k
Typ
Low
output
Low
output
Low output
5(6
RST
Low input (High)
(High)
MD0
NMI
When
10,
is not used, pin input
should be fixed high or low.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1030 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
C.Rotary/PS0
H.Ampsw/
PS1
OUT
SPDRn
SPMRn
SPCRn
RD
OUT = C.Rotary, H.Ampsw
n = 0, 1
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
EXCTL/PS4
RD
SPDR4
SPMR4
SPCR4
EXCTL
SPMR4
Hi-Z
When EXCTL input is
selected, pin input should
be fixed high or low.
CFG
+
-
+
-
+
-
CFGCOMP
CFGCOMP
P250
REF
M250
S
R
F/F O
stp
VREF
VREF
CFG
BIAS
Res+ModuleSTOP
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1031 of 1037
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
Than Sleep
Mode
DFG
DPG/PS3
RD
PDRn
DFG
DPG
PMRn
PCRn
DPG SW
DPG SW
RES+LPM
DFG
DPG
/PS3
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
CTL (+)
CTL (
-
)
CTLREF
CTLBias
CTLFB
CTLAmp (O)
CTLSMT (i)
+
-
-
+
+ -
CTLGR3 to 1
CTLFB
CTLGR0
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
PB-CTL (+)
PB-CTL (-)
CTLSMT (i)
CTLAmp (o)
CTLFB
CTLREF
CTL (+)
CTL (-)
CTLBias
Note
Note: Be sure to set a capacitor between
CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i).
X2
Oscil-
lation
Oscil-
lation
Oscillation
X1
1 M
Typ
Note: Resistance values are
reference values.
When the subclock is not used, set
X1 = high and X2 = open.
OSC2
Low output
OSC1
LPM
Oscil-
lation
Oscil-
lation
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1032 of 1037
Appendix D Port States in the Difference Processing States
D.1
Pin Circuit Diagrams
Table D.1
Port States Overview
Port
Reset
Active
Sleep
Standby
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
P07 to
P00
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
impedance
High
impedance
P17 to
P10
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P27 to
P20
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P37 to
P30
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P47 to
P40
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P53 to
P50
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P67 to
P60
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P77 to
P70
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
P87 to
P80
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions
Retained
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1033 of 1037
Appendix E Usage Notes
E.1
Power Supply Rise and Fall Order
Figure E.1 shows the order in which the power supply pins rise when the chip is powered on, and
the order in which they fall when the chip is powered down. If the power supply voltages cannot
rise and fall simultaneously, power supply operations should be carried out in this order.
At power-on, wait until the microcomputer section power supply (V
CC
) has risen to the
prescribed voltage, then raise the other analog power supplies.
At power-down, drop the analog power supplies first, followed by the microcomputer section
power supply (V
CC
).
When powering up and down, ensure that the voltage applied to the pins does not exceed the
respective power supply voltage.
V
CC
, AV
CC
V
CC
AV
CC
SV
CC
Vin
: Microcomputer section power supply voltage
: A/D converter power supply voltage
: Servo section power supply voltage
: Pin applied voltage
SV
CC
V
CC
, AV
CC
SV
CC
Vin
Vin
Figure E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order
In power-down modes (except sleep mode), the analog power supplies can be turned off to
reduce current dissipation. When the microcomputer section power supply (V
CC
) is dropped to
the backup voltage in a power-down mode, the order shown in figure E.2 should be followed.
Make sure that the voltage applied to the pins does not exceed the respective power supply
voltage.
The A/D converter power supply (AV
CC
) should be set to the same potential as the
microcomputer section power supply (V
CC
). In all power-down modes except sleep mode, AV
CC
is turned off inside the device. At this time, the AV
CC
current dissipation is defined as AISTOP.
Rev. 1.5, 09/00, page 1034 of 1037
V
CC
AV
CC
SV
CC
Vin
5 V
2.7 V
: Microcomputer section power supply voltage
: A/D converter power supply voltage
: Servo section power supply voltage
: Pin applied voltage
V
CC
, AV
CC
SV
CC
Vin
Figure E.2 Power Supply Control in Power-Down Modes
E.2
Pin Handling When the High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-
Head Special Playback Is Not Used
Table E.1 shows how the C.Rotary, H.AmpSW, and COMP pins should be handled when the
switching circuit for four-head special-effects playback is not used. COMP is an input pin, and
the other two are output pins.
When the switching circuit for four-head special-effects playback is not used, the related pins
should be handled as shown below.
Table E.1
Pin Handling When the High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special
Playback Is Not Used
Pin No.
Pin Name
Connection
103
C.Rotary
OPEN (output pin)
*
104
H.AMP SW
OPEN (output pin)
*
105
COMP
V
SS
Note:
*
Output depends on the special-effects control register (CHCR) value. If the initial
value is used, the output is low-level.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1035 of 1037
E.3
Sample External Circuits
Examples of external circuits for the servo section, and sync signal detection circuit are shown in
figures E.3, E.4.
(1) Servo Section
An example of the external circuit for the DRMPWM output and CAPPWM output pins is
shown in figure E.3.
R
1
DRMPWM
CAPPWN
C
1
Figure E.3 Sample External Circuit for Servo Section
(2) Sync Signal Detection Circuit Section
Figure E.4 shows an example of the external circuit for the sync signal detection circuit section.
33 k
Csync
Note: The figures shown are reference values.
Careful consideration should be given to board floating capacitance
and wiring characteristics when deciding on the constants.
10 pF
Figure E.4 Example of External Circuit for Sync Signal Detection Circuit Section
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1036 of 1037
Appendix F List of Product Codes
Table F.1
Product Codes List of H8S/2194 Series and H8S/2194C Series
Product Type
Product
Code
Mark Code
Package
(Hitachi
Package
Code)
Mask ROM
version
HD6432194
HD6432194 (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2194
F-ZTAT
version
HD64F2194
HD64F2194F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2193
Mask ROM
version
HD6432193
HD6432193 (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2192
Mask ROM
version
HD6432192
HD6432192 (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2194
Series
H8S/2191
Mask ROM
version
HD6432191
HD6432191 (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
Mask ROM
version
HD6432194C
HD6432194C (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2194C
F-ZTAT
version
HD64F2194C
HD64F2194CF
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2194B
Mask ROM
version
HD6432194B
HD6432194B (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
H8S/2194C
Series
H8S/2194A
Mask ROM
version
HD6432194A
HD6432194A (
***
)F
112-pin QFP
(FP-112)
Note: (
***
) is the ROM code.
Rev. 2.0, 11/00, page 1037 of 1037
Appendix G External Dimensions
Unit: mm
*
Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
0.10
23.2 0.3
*
0.32 0.08
0.65
1.6
0.8 0.3
*
0.17 0.05
3.05 Max
23.2 0.3
84
57
56
29
112
1
28
20
85
2.70
0 - 8
0.13 M
0.10
+0.15 -
0.10
1.23
0.30 0.06
0.15 0.04
Figure G.1 Extermal Dimensions (FP-112)
H8S/2194 Series, H8S/2194C Series, H8S/2194 F-ZTAT
TM
,
H8S/2194C F-ZTAT
TM
Hardware Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, November 1998
2nd Edition, November 2000
Published by:
Electronic Devices Sales & Marketing Group
Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by:
Technical Documentation Group
Hitachi Kodaira Semiconductor Co., Ltd.
Copyright Hitachi, Ltd., 1998. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Document Outline
- Cover
- Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition
- Contents
- Section 1 Overview
- 1.1 Overview
- 1.2 Internal Block Diagram
- 1.3 Pin Arrangement and Functions
- 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
- 1.3.2 Pin Functions
- 1.4 Differences between H8S/2194C Series and H8S/2194 Series
- Section 2 CPU
- 2.1 Overview
- 2.1.1 Features
- 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
- 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU
- 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU
- 2.2 CPU Operating Modes
- 2.3 Address Space
- 2.4 Register Configuration
- 2.4.1 Overview
- 2.4.2 General Registers
- 2.4.3 Control Registers
- 2.4.4 Initial Register Values
- 2.5 Data Formats
- 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats
- 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats
- 2.6 Instruction Set
- 2.6.1 Overview
- 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes
- 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function
- 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats
- 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions
- 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
- 2.7.1 Addressing Mode
- 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation
- 2.8 Processing States
- 2.8.1 Overview
- 2.8.2 Reset State
- 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State
- 2.8.4 Program Execution State
- 2.8.5 Power-Down State
- 2.9 Basic Timing
- 2.9.1 Overview
- 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)
- 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
- 2.10 Usage Note
- Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
- 3.1 Overview
- 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection
- 3.1.2 Register Configuration
- 3.2 Register Descriptions
- 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR)
- 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)
- 3.3 Operating Mode Descriptions
- 3.4 Address Map
- Section 4 Power-Down State
- 4.1 Overview
- 4.1.1 Register Configuration
- 4.2 Register Descriptions
- 4.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
- 4.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
- 4.2.3 Timer Register A (TMA)
- 4.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 4.3 Medium-Speed Mode
- 4.4 Sleep Mode
- 4.4.1 Sleep Mode
- 4.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode
- 4.5 Module Stop Mode
- 4.6 Standby Mode
- 4.6.1 Standby Mode
- 4.6.2 Clearing Standby Mode
- 4.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode
- 4.7 Watch Mode
- 4.7.1 Watch Mode
- 4.7.2 Clearing Watch Mode
- 4.8 Subsleep Mode
- 4.8.1 Subsleep Mode
- 4.8.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode
- 4.9 Subactive Mode
- 4.9.1 Subactive Mode
- 4.9.2 Clearing Subactive Mode
- 4.10 Direct Transition
- 4.10.1 Overview of Direct Transition
- Section 5 Exception Handling
- 5.1 Overview
- 5.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority
- 5.1.2 Exception Handling Operation
- 5.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table
- 5.2 Reset
- 5.2.1 Overview
- 5.2.2 Reset Sequence
- 5.2.3 Interrupts after Reset
- 5.3 Interrupts
- 5.4 Trap Instruction
- 5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling
- 5.6 Notes on Use of the Stack
- Section 6 Interrupt Controller
- 6.1 Overview
- 6.1.1 Features
- 6.1.2 Block Diagram
- 6.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 6.1.4 Register Configuration
- 6.2 Register Descriptions
- 6.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)
- 6.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)
- 6.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IENR)
- 6.2.4 IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR)
- 6.2.5 IRQ Status Register (IRQR)
- 6.2.6 Port Mode Register (PMR1)
- 6.3 Interrupt Sources
- 6.3.1 External Interrupts
- 6.3.2 Internal Interrupts
- 6.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table
- 6.4 Interrupt Operation
- 6.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
- 6.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0
- 6.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1
- 6.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
- 6.4.5 Interrupt Response Times
- 6.5 Usage Notes
- 6.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
- 6.5.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts
- 6.5.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
- 6.5.4 When NMI is Disabled
- Section 7 ROM (H8S/2194 Series)
- 7.1 Overview
- 7.2 Overview of Flash Memory
- 7.2.1 Features
- 7.2.2 Block Diagram
- 7.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes
- 7.2.4 Pin Configuration
- 7.2.5 Register Configuration
- 7.3 Flash Memory Register Descriptions
- 7.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
- 7.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
- 7.3.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)
- 7.3.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
- 7.4 On-Board Programming Modes
- 7.4.1 Boot Mode
- 7.4.2 User Program Mode
- 7.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
- 7.5.1 Program Mode
- 7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode
- 7.5.3 Erase Mode
- 7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode
- 7.6 Flash Memory Protection
- 7.6.1 Hardware Protection
- 7.6.2 Software Protection
- 7.6.3 Error Protection
- 7.7 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
- 7.8 Flash Memory Programmer Mode
- 7.8.1 Programmer Mode Setting
- 7.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map
- 7.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation
- 7.8.4 Memory Read Mode
- 7.8.5 Auto-Program Mode
- 7.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode
- 7.8.7 Status Read Mode
- 7.8.8 Status Polling
- 7.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time
- 7.8.10 Notes On Memory Programming
- 7.9 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
- 7.10 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
- Section 8 ROM (H8S/2194C Series)
- 8.1 Overview
- 8.2 Overview of Flash Memory
- 8.2.1 Features
- 8.2.2 Block Diagram
- 8.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes
- 8.2.4 Pin Configuration
- 8.2.5 Register Configuration
- 8.3 Flash Memory Register Descriptions
- 8.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
- 8.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
- 8.3.3 Erase Block Registers 1 (EBR1)
- 8.3.4 Erase Block Registers 2 (EBR2)
- 8.3.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
- 8.4 On-Board Programming Modes
- 8.4.1 Boot Mode
- 8.4.2 User Program Mode
- 8.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
- 8.5.1 Program Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'0000 to H'1FFFF and n= 2 for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
- 8.5.2 Program-Verify Mode (n =1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for addresses H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
- 8.5.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for address H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
- 8.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 for addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF and n = 2 for address H'20000 to H'3FFFF)
- 8.6 Flash Memory Protection
- 8.6.1 Hardware Protection
- 8.6.2 Software Protection
- 8.6.3 Error Protection
- 8.7 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
- 8.8 Flash Memory Programmer Mode
- 8.8.1 Programmer Mode Setting
- 8.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map
- 8.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation
- 8.8.4 Memory Read Mode
- 8.8.5 Auto-Program Mode
- 8.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode
- 8.8.7 Status Read Mode
- 8.8.8 Status Polling
- 8.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time
- 8.8.10 Notes On Memory Programming
- 8.9 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
- 8.10 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version
- Section 9 RAM
- Section 10 Clock Pulse Generator
- 10.1 Overview
- 10.1.1 Block Diagram
- 10.1.2 Register Configuration
- 10.2 Register Descriptions
- 10.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
- 10.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
- 10.3 Oscillator
- 10.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator
- 10.3.2 External Clock Input
- 10.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit
- 10.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider
- 10.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
- 10.7 Subclock Oscillator Circuit
- 10.7.1 Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator
- 10.7.2 External Clock Input
- 10.7.3 When Subclock is not Needed
- 10.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit
- 10.9 Notes on the Resonator
- Section 11 I/O Port
- 11.1 Overview
- 11.1.1 Port Functions
- 11.1.2 Port Input
- 11.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors
- 11.2 Port 0
- 11.2.1 Overview
- 11.2.2 Register Configuration
- 11.2.3 Pin Functions
- 11.2.4 Pin States
- 11.3 Port 1
- 11.3.1 Overview
- 11.3.2 Register Configuration
- 11.3.3 Pin Functions
- 11.3.4 Pin States
- 11.4 Port 2
- 11.4.1 Overview
- 11.4.2 Register Configuration
- 11.4.3 Pin Functions
- 11.4.4 Pin States
- 11.5 Port 3
- 11.5.1 Overview
- 11.5.2 Register Configuration
- 11.5.3 Pin Functions
- 11.5.4 Pin States
- 11.6 Port 4
- 11.6.1 Overview
- 11.6.2 Register Configuration
- 11.6.3 Pin Functions
- 11.6.4 Pin States
- 11.7 Port 5
- 11.7.1 Overview
- 11.7.2 Register Configuration
- 11.7.3 Pin Functions
- 11.7.4 Pin States
- 11.8 Port 6
- 11.8.1 Overview
- 11.8.2 Register Configuration
- 11.8.3 Pin Functions
- 11.8.4 Operation
- 11.8.5 Pin States
- 11.9 Port 7
- 11.9.1 Overview
- 11.9.2 Register Configuration
- 11.9.3 Pin Functions
- 11.9.4 Pin States
- 11.10 Port 8
- 11.10.1 Overview
- 11.10.2 Register Configuration
- 11.10.3 Pin Functions
- 11.10.4 Pin States
- Section 12 Timer A
- 12.1 Overview
- 12.1.1 Features
- 12.1.2 Block Diagram
- 12.1.3 Register Configuration
- 12.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 12.2.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)
- 12.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA)
- 12.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 12.3 Operation
- 12.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer
- 12.3.2 Operation of the Timer for Clocks
- 12.3.3 Initializing the Counts
- Section 13 Timer B
- 13.1 Overview
- 13.1.1 Features
- 13.1.2 Block Diagram
- 13.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 13.1.4 Register Configuration
- 13.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 13.2.1 Timer Mode Register B (TMB)
- 13.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB)
- 13.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB)
- 13.2.4 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
- 13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 13.3 Operation
- 13.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer
- 13.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer
- 13.3.3 Event Counter
- Section 14 Timer J
- 14.1 Overview
- 14.1.1 Features
- 14.1.2 Block Diagram
- 14.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 14.1.4 Register Configuration
- 14.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 14.2.1 Timer Mode Register J (TMJ)
- 14.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC)
- 14.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS)
- 14.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ)
- 14.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK)
- 14.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ)
- 14.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK)
- 14.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 14.3 Operation
- 14.3.1 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1)
- 14.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2)
- 14.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission
- Section 15 Timer L
- 15.1 Overview
- 15.1.1 Features
- 15.1.2 Block Diagram
- 15.1.3 Register Configuration
- 15.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 15.2.1 Timer L Mode Register (LMR)
- 15.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC)
- 15.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR)
- 15.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 15.3 Operation
- 15.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation
- Section 16 Timer R
- 16.1 Overview
- 16.1.1 Features
- 16.1.2 Block Diagram
- 16.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 16.1.4 Register Configuration
- 16.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 16.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)
- 16.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)
- 16.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS)
- 16.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1)
- 16.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2)
- 16.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1)
- 16.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2)
- 16.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3)
- 16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 16.3 Operation
- 16.3.1 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1
- 16.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2
- 16.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3
- 16.3.4 Mode Identification
- 16.3.5 Reeling Controls
- 16.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
- 16.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function
- 16.4 Interrupt Cause
- 16.5 Exemplary Settings for Respective Functions
- 16.5.1 Mode Identification
- 16.5.2 Reeling Controls
- 16.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-multi Function
- 16.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
- Section 17 Timer X1
- 17.1 Overview
- 17.1.1 Features
- 17.1.2 Block Diagram
- 17.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 17.1.4 Register Configuration
- 17.2 Descriptions of Respective Registers
- 17.2.1 Free Running Counter (FRC)
- 17.2.2 Output Comparing Register A and B (OCRA and OCRB)
- 17.2.3 Input Capture Register A Through D (ICRA Through ICRD)
- 17.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)
- 17.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX)
- 17.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX)
- 17.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR)
- 17.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 17.3 Operation
- 17.3.1 Operation of the Timer X1
- 17.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC
- 17.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing
- 17.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing
- 17.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing
- 17.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing
- 17.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing
- 17.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing
- 17.4 Operation Mode of the Timer X1
- 17.5 Interrupt Causes
- 17.6 Exemplary Uses of the Timer X1
- 17.7 Precautions when Using the Timer X1
- 17.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC
- 17.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC
- 17.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR
- 17.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations
- Section 18 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
- 18.1 Overview
- 18.1.1 Features
- 18.1.2 Block Diagram
- 18.1.3 Register Configuration
- 18.2 Register Descriptions
- 18.2.1 Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)
- 18.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)
- 18.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)
- 18.2.4 Notes on Register Access
- 18.3 Operation
- 18.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation
- 18.3.2 Interval Timer Operation
- 18.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
- 18.4 Interrupts
- 18.5 Usage Notes
- 18.5.1 Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment
- 18.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0
- 18.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
- Section 19 8-Bit PWM
- 19.1 Overview
- 19.1.1 Features
- 19.1.2 Block Diagram
- 19.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 19.1.4 Register Configuration
- 19.2 Register Descriptions
- 19.2.1 Bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3)
- 19.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR)
- 19.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
- 19.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 19.3 8-Bit PWM Operation
- Section 20 12-Bit PWM
- 20.1 Overview
- 20.1.1 Features
- 20.1.2 Block Diagram
- 20.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 20.1.4 Register Configuration
- 20.2 Register Descriptions
- 20.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR)
- 20.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (CPWDR, DPWDR)
- 20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 20.3 Operation
- Section 21 14-Bit PWM
- 21.1 Overview
- 21.1.1 Features
- 21.1.2 Block Diagram
- 21.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 21.1.4 Register Configuration
- 21.2 Register Descriptions
- 21.2.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR)
- 21.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)
- 21.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 21.3 14-Bit PWM Operation
- Section 22 Prescalar Unit
- 22.1 Overview
- 22.1.1 Features
- 22.1.2 Block Diagram
- 22.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 22.1.4 Register Configuration
- 22.2 Registers
- 22.2.1 Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1)
- 22.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR)
- 22.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
- 22.3 Noise Cancel Circuit
- 22.4 Operation
- 22.4.1 Prescalar S (PSS)
- 22.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW)
- 22.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count
- 22.4.4 8-Bit PWM
- 22.4.5 8-Bit Input Capture Using IC Pin
- 22.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output
- Section 23 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
- 23.1 Overview
- 23.1.1 Features
- 23.1.2 Block Diagram
- 23.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 23.1.4 Register Configuration
- 23.2 Register Descriptions
- 23.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)
- 23.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR1)
- 23.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
- 23.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR1)
- 23.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR1)
- 23.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR1)
- 23.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR1)
- 23.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR1)
- 23.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR1)
- 23.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 23.3 Operation
- 23.3.1 Overview
- 23.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode
- 23.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function
- 23.3.4 Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode
- 23.4 SCI1 Interrupts
- 23.5 Usage Notes
- Section 24 Serial Communication Interface 2 (SCI2)
- 24.1 Overview
- 24.1.1 Features
- 24.1.2 Block Diagram
- 24.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 24.1.4 Register Configuration
- 24.2 Register Descriptions
- 24.2.1 Starting Address Register (STAR)
- 24.2.2 Ending Address Register (EDAR)
- 24.2.3 Serial Control Register 2 (SCR2)
- 24.2.4 Serial Control Status Register 2 (SCSR2)
- 24.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 24.3 Operation
- 24.3.1 Clock
- 24.3.2 Data Transfer Format
- 24.3.3 Data Transfer Operations
- 24.4 Interrupt Sources
- Section 25 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
- 25.1 Overview
- 25.1.1 Features
- 25.1.2 Block Diagram
- 25.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 25.1.4 Register Configuration
- 25.2 Register Descriptions
- 25.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)
- 25.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)
- 25.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX)
- 25.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
- 25.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)
- 25.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
- 25.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
- 25.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 25.3 Operation
- 25.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format
- 25.3.2 Master Transmit Operation
- 25.3.3 Master Receive Operation
- 25.3.4 Slave Receive Operation
- 25.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation
- 25.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
- 25.3.7 Noise Canceler
- 25.3.8 Sample Flowcharts
- 25.3.9 Initialization of Internal State
- 25.4 Usage Notes
- Section 26 A/D Converter
- 26.1 Overview
- 26.1.1 Features
- 26.1.2 Block Diagram
- 26.1.3 Pin Configuration
- 26.1.4 Register Configuration
- 26.2 Register Descriptions
- 26.2.1 Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR)
- 26.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR)
- 26.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)
- 26.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
- 26.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR)
- 26.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0)
- 26.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
- 26.3 Interface to Bus Master
- 26.4 Operation
- 26.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion
- 26.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion
- 26.5 Interrupt Sources
- Section 27 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
- 27.1 Overview
- 27.1.1 Features
- 27.1.2 Block Diagram
- 27.1.3 Register Configuration
- 27.2 Register Descriptions
- 27.2.1 Address Trap Control Register (ATCR)
- 27.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0)
- 27.3 Precautions in Usage
- 27.3.1 Basic Operations
- 27.3.2 Enable
- 27.3.3 Bcc Instruction
- 27.3.4 BSR Instruction
- 27.3.5 JSR Instruction
- 27.3.6 JMP Instruction
- 27.3.7 RTS Instruction
- 27.3.8 SLEEP Instruction
- 27.3.9 Competing Interrupt
- Section 28 Servo Circuits
- 28.1 Overview
- 28.1.1 Functions
- 28.1.2 Block Diagram
- 28.2 Servo Port
- 28.2.1 Overview
- 28.2.2 Block Diagram
- 28.2.3 Pin Configuration
- 28.2.4 Register Configuration
- 28.2.5 Register Descriptions
- 28.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals
- 28.3 Reference Signal Generators
- 28.3.1 Overview
- 28.3.2 Block Diagram
- 28.3.3 Register Configuration
- 28.3.4 Register Descriptions
- 28.3.5 Description of Operation
- 28.4 HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator
- 28.4.1 Overview
- 28.4.2 Block Diagram
- 28.4.3 Composition
- 28.4.4 Register Configuration
- 28.4.5 Register Descriptions
- 28.4.6 Description of Operation
- 28.4.7 Interrupt
- 28.4.8 Cautions
- 28.5 Four-head High-speed Switching Circuit for Special Playback
- 28.5.1 Overview
- 28.5.2 Block Diagram
- 28.5.3 Pin Configuration
- 28.5.4 Register Description
- 28.6 Drum Speed Error Detector
- 28.6.1 Overview
- 28.6.2 Block Diagram
- 28.6.3 Register Configuration
- 28.6.4 Register Descriptions
- 28.6.5 Description of Operation
- 28.6.6 fH Correction in Trick Play Mode
- 28.7 Drum Phase Error Detector
- 28.7.1 Overview
- 28.7.2 Block Diagram
- 28.7.3 Register Configuration
- 28.7.4 Register Descriptions
- 28.7.5 Description of Operation
- 28.7.6 Phase Comparison
- 28.8 Capstan Speed Error Detector
- 28.8.1 Overview
- 28.8.2 Block Diagram
- 28.8.3 Register Configuration
- 28.8.4 Register Descriptions
- 28.8.5 Description of Operation
- 28.9 Capstan Phase Error Detector
- 28.9.1 Overview
- 28.9.2 Block Diagram
- 28.9.3 Register Configuration
- 28.9.4 Register Descriptions
- 28.9.5 Description of Operation
- 28.10 X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit
- 28.10.1 Overview
- 28.10.2 Block Diagram
- 28.10.3 Register Descriptions
- 28.11 Digital Filters
- 28.11.1 Overview
- 28.11.2 Block Diagram
- 28.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer
- 28.11.4 Register Configuration
- 28.11.5 Register Descriptions
- 28.11.6 Filter Characteristics
- 28.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response
- 28.11.8 Initialization of Z-1
- 28.12 Additional V Signal Generator
- 28.12.1 Overview
- 28.12.2 Pin Configuration
- 28.12.3 Register Configuration
- 28.12.4 Register Description
- 28.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal
- 28.13 CTL Circuit
- 28.13.1 Overview
- 28.13.2 Block Diagram
- 28.13.3 Pin Configuration
- 28.13.4 Register Configuration
- 28.13.5 Register Descriptions
- 28.13.6 Operation
- 28.13.7 CTL Input Section
- 28.13.8 Duty Discriminator
- 28.13.9 CTL Output Section
- 28.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit
- 28.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt
- 28.14 Frequency Dividers
- 28.14.1 Overview
- 28.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider
- 28.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider
- 28.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit
- 28.15 Sync Signal Detector
- 28.15.1 Overview
- 28.15.2 Block Diagram
- 28.15.3 Pin Configuration
- 28.15.4 Register Configuration
- 28.15.5 Register Descriptions
- 28.15.6 Noise Detection
- 28.15.7 Sync Signal Detector Activation
- 28.16 Servo Interrupt
- 28.16.1 Overview
- 28.16.2 Register Configuration
- 28.16.3 Register Description
- 28.17 Module Stop Control Reigster (MSTPCR)
- Section 29 Electrical Characteristics
- 29.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
- 29.2 Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194
- 29.2.1 DC Characteristics of HD64F2194
- 29.2.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
- 29.2.3 AC Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
- 29.2.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
- 29.2.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
- 29.2.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2194, HD64F2194C
- 29.2.7 FLASH Memory Characteristics
- 29.2.8 Usage Note
- 29.3 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432194, HD6432193, HD6432192, HD6432191, HD6432194C, HD6432194B, and HD6432194A
- 29.3.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432194,HD6432193,HD6432192,HD6432191,HD6432194C,HD6432194B,and HD6432194A
- Appendix A Instruction Set
- A.1 Instructions
- A.2 Instruction Codes
- A.3 Operation Code Map
- A.4 Number of Execution States
- A.5 Bus Status During Instruction Execution
- A.6 Change of Condition Codes
- Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
- B.1 Addresses
- B.2 Function List
- Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
- Appendix D Port States in the Difference Processing States
- Appendix E Usage Notes
- E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order
- E.2 Pin Handling When the High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback Is Not Used
- E.3 Sample External Circuits
- Appendix F List of Product Codes
- Appendix G External Dimensions
PDF 
ZIP